«»
NUNC COCNOSCO EX PARTE
ized by the Internet
2019 with funding
Archive
from
ation
https://archive.org/details/trent_0116401869858_1
MEMOIRS
OF
THE BERNICE PAUAHI BISHOP MUSEUM
OF
POLYNESIAN ETHNOLOGY
NATURAL HISTORY.
VOLUME I.
HONOLULU, H. I.:
Bishop Museum Press.
1899-1903.
KRAUS REPRINT CO.
Millwood, New York
1974
6-N c^no
\J .
/
Reprinted with the permission of the Bishop Museum Press
KRAUS REPRINT CO.
A U.S. Division of Kraus-Thomson Organization Limited
Printed in U.S. A.
'table: of contents.
I. Hawaiian Feather Work: By William T. Brigham. Issued September, 1899.
II. Index to the Islands of the Pacific: By William T. Brigham. Issued December, 1900.
III. Key to the Birds of the Hawaiian Islands: By William Alanson Bryan. Issued 1901.
IV. Ancient Hawaiian Stone Implements: By William T. Brigham. Issued April, 1902.
V. Supplementary Notes to Hawaiian Feather Work : By William T. Brigham. Issued January,
1903.
03^794
LIST OF PLATES IN THIS VOLUME.
I. HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
FACING PAGE
Helmet of Kaumualii, King; of Kauai
. Colored frontispiece
Tahitian Gorget .
Hawaiian with Cloak and Helmet - - -
Small Kahili .
Tropic Bird and young .
Feather Mats in British Museum - - -
Helmets in the Museum at Madrid
Hawaiian Chiefs Boki and Liliha- • -
2
6
7
io
36
44
48
FACING PAGE
IX Network used in Feather Cloaks - ... 50
X Cloak of Kiwalao . 58
XI Network of the Cloak of Kiwalao - - - 54
XII Ahuula in the Boston Art Museum- - 72
XIII Her Majesty Victoria’s Feather
Cloaks in Windsor Castle . 64
XIV Feather Capes in Windsor Castle.. - 78
XV Colored plate of Cape in Bishop
Museum . End of Me?noir
II. INDEX TO THE ISLANDS OF THE PACIFIC.
Outline Maps.
FACING PAGE
1 Hawaiian Islands (Main) . Title
2 Hawaiian Islands (Western) . 89
3 Caroline Islands (Western) . 92
4 Caroline Islands (Middle) . 100
5 Caroline Islands (Eastern) . 108
6 Marshall Islands . 116
7 Gilbert Islands . 124
8 New Guinea Coast Islands . 132
9 Louisiade Archipelago . 139
10 Bismarck Archipelago . 147
11 Solomon Islands . 156
12 New Hebrides . 164
FACING PAGE
13 New Caledonia and Loyalty Groups. - 172
14 Viti or Fiji Archipelago . 180
15 Samoan Islands and Niue . 188
16 Ellice Group . 196
17 Phoenix and Union Islands . 204
18 Tongan Islands . 212
19 Line Islands and Tongareva . 220
20 Society Islands . 228
21 Paumotu Archipelago (West) . 236
22 Paumotu Archipelago (East) . 244
23 Marquesas and Hervey Islands . 248
24 Index Chart . 256
III. KEY TO THE BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
Plates at the end of Memoir.
XVI Sterna fuliginosa, Anous stolidus.
XVII Microanous hawaiiensis, Gygis alba
kittlitzi, Anous stolidus.
XVIII Diomedea nigripes, Diomedea immu-
tabilis.
XIX Priofinus cuneatus, Bulweria bulweri,
H$strelata hypoleuca, Puffinus new-
elli, Puffinus nativitatis.
XX Phaethou lepturus, Phaethon rubri-
cauda.
XXI Sula piscator, Sula cyanops, Sula sula.
XXII Anas wyvilliana, Anas laysanensis.
XXIII Nyeticorax nycticorax nsevius.
XXIV Gallinula sandvicensis, Porzanula
palmeri, Fulica alai.
XXV Heteractitis incanus, Arenaria inter-
pres, Himautopus knudseni, Cha-
radrius dominicus fulvus, Nume-
nius tahitiensis.
(v)
vi
XXVI
XXVII
XXVIII
XXXI
XXXII-
XXXVI
XL
XL I
XLII
XLIH
xuv
XLV
XL VI
XLVII.
LX VI
LX VII
List of Plates.
Buteo solitarius, Corvus hawaiiens.is,
Asio accipitrinus sandvicensis.
Chasiempis gayi, C. sclateri, C. sand¬
vicensis, Phaeornis myadestina, P.
obscura, P. lanaiensis, P. palmeri,
Drepanorhamphus funerea, Acro-
cephalus familiaris.
Vestiaria coccinea, Hitnatione san-
guinea, Oreomj’za flammea, Lox-
ops ochraeea, L. coccinea, Palmeria
dolei.
Rhodacanthis palmeri, Hemignathus
procerus, Psittacirostris psittacea,
Telespiza cantans, Hemignathus
obscurus, Loxops caeruleirostris,
Oreoinyza mana, O. newtoni, O.
bairdi, Heterorh}mchus wilsoni, H.
hanapepe, H. affinis, Pseudonestor
xanthrophrys, Chlorodrepanis par-
va, C. Stejnegeri, Moho nobilis, M.
braceatus.
XXX Chaetoptila angustipluma.
XXIX
IV. ANCIENT HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
Plates at the end of Memoir.
Hawaiian Slingstones.
J Polishing Stones.
IX Squid Hook Sinkers.
Hawaiian Stone Clubs.
Hawaiian Stone Pestles.
Hawaiian Stone Pestles.
Hawaiian Mortars.
Stirrup Poi Pounders.
Ring Poi Pounders.
Ring Poi Pounders.
Stone Cups.
XLVIII-LII Hawaiian Stone Lamps.
LIII-VII Hawaiian Adzes.
LVIII Fragments from a Workshop.
LIX Maori Adzes.
LX Hawaiian Adzes mounted.
LX I Ceremonial Adzes from Duau.
LXII Necker Island Images.
LXIII Moriori Clubs.
LXIV Hawaiian Idol.
LXV Phallic Emblems.
V. ADDITIONAL NOTES ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
Plates at the end of Memoir.
Helmets, Norwich Castle. LXVIII Clark Cape.
Norwich Castle Cape, etc. LXIX Santa Cruz Feather Money.
ILLUSTRATIONS IN THE TEXT.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
io
i x
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1
2
MEMOIR I.
PAGE
Cook’s Feather Cape : now in Austral¬
ian Museum . 4
Helmet taken to England by Vancou¬
ver : now in the Bishop Museum ... 5
Bone Handles of Kahili in the Bishop
Museum .
Iiwi, Ou and Apapane : from mounted
specimens in the Bishop Museum. • • 8
Oo and Mamo: from mounted speci¬
mens in the Bishop Museum . 9
Pueo, Hawaiian Owl . 12
Feathers as brought in by the Hunter* . 13
Kahili . 15
Stem of Ki ( Cordyline terminalis ) . 16
Princess Nahienaena in 1825 . 17
Kahili handles left unfinished by Paki 18
Branches of a Kahili . 19
Hulumanu of a Kahili . 19
Portion of the funeral procession of
Kamehameha III in 1855 . 20
Kahili made of sugarcane in place of
feathers . 24
Small hand Kahili . 25
The growing end of a feather Eei . 26
Hawaiian Feather Eei . 27
Hawaiian Feather Eei . 29
Feather Model of an Anuu : Cook col¬
lection in Vienna . 30
Kukailimoku engraved from a photo¬
graph taken by the author in 1864. • 31
Kukailimoku, war god of Kameha¬
meha: nowin Bishop Museum . 32
Kukailimoku : now in British Museum 32
Kukailimoku: now in British Museum 33
Kukailimoku : now in British Museum 33
Kukailimoku : now in British Museum 34
PAGE
27 Kukailimoku : now in British Museum 35
28 Kukailimoku : now fh British Museum 36
29 Diagram to show method of attaching
eyes to Kukailimoku . 36
30 Kukailimoku figured in Cook’s Voyage 38
3 1 Mask and Head-dress from New Guinea 40
32 Portrait of Hawaiian Warrior: given
by Cook . 41
33 Maliiole or Helmet: from Cook’s col¬
lection in Vienna . 42
34 Mahiole or Helmet : from Cook’s col¬
lection in Vienna . 42
35 Mahiole or Helmet: from Cook’s col¬
lection in Vienna . 42
36 Outlines of Mahiole in Berlin Museum 43
37 Helmet of wickerwork with projections:
in Berlin Museum . 44
38 Helmet without feathers, Cook collec¬
tion : in Australian Museum . 44
39 Helmet of wickerwork with five pro¬
jections : from F'reycinet . 44
40-1 Helmets in the British Museum . 46-7
42 Small feather cape . 49
43 Hawaiian scraping Olona : from a pho¬
tograph taken on Molokai . 50
44 Hawaiian spinning Olona on his thigh 51
45 Diagram to show the method of attach¬
ing the feathers to the network . 51
46 Knotting of feathers on a cape . 52
47 Cape in Bishop Museum . 53
48 Back of the cloak of Kiwalao, to show
patchwork . . 54
49 Diagram of colors used in the figures
of Alxuula . 58
49-115 P'igures to indicate the patterns
and colors of Ahuula . 59~81
MEMOIR II.
Butaritari, Palmyra and Matuku, to 3
show forms of Islands . 98 4
Diagram of Isochrymes between which 5
coral reefs occur . . . 100
Butaritari of the Gilbert Group . 132
Fanning Island . 146
Malekula of the New Hebrides: from
British Admiralty Chart . i79
(Vii)
List of Illustrations.
viii
PAGE
6 Marianas or Eadrone Islands . 183
7 Matuku in Fiji: from Challenger re¬
port . 186
8 New Zealand : from Government map 201
9 Palmyra: from U. S. chart . 21 1
PAGE
10 Peru: from U. S. chart . 214
1 1 Rapanui or Easter Island : Map by
Thompson, U. S. N. . 220
12 Washington: from U. S. chart . 251
MEMOIR III.
1 Chasiempis sandvicensis . 292
2 Drepanorhainplius funerea . 298
3 Vestiaria coccinea . . 296
4 Palmeria dolei . 299
5 Chlorodrepanis stejnegeri, Himatione
sanguinea, Chlorodrepanis parva and
Oreomyza bairdi . . • • 299
6 Eoxops coccinea . 304
7 Hemignathus obscurus . 306
8 Heterorhynchus afhnis . 307
9 Heterorhynchus wilsoni . 307
10 Pseudonestor xanthophrys . 309
1 1 Psittacirostra psittacea . 309
12 Telespiza cantans . 310
13 Rhodacanthis palmeri . 31 1
14 Chloridops kona . 312
15 Molio nobilis . 312
16 Acrocephalus familiaris . 314
17 Phreornis obscura . 315
MEMOIR IV.
1 Hawaiian Stone Hammers . 338
2 Australian and Maori Stone Hammers 339
3 Hawaiian Canoe-breakers . 340
4 Canoe-breaker in Munich Museum. . . . 341
5 Obsidian Dagger and Dagger-heads- . . 342
6 Slingstones from New Caledonia and
Guam . 343
7 Hawaiian Sling and Slingstones . 344
8 Stone Anchor of a Kamehameha canoe 346
9 Hawaiian Grindstones . 347
10 Stone Balls used in games . 348
1 1 Bath Rubbers of cellular lava . 349
12 Stone Files for making and sharpening
fishhooks . . 350
13 Hawaiian Door Stone . 351
14 Squid hook used by Hawaiians . 352
15 Stone Knife . 353
16 Moriori .Stone Flensing Knives . 354
17 Compound Hawaiian Club: from Read 355
18 Hawaiian Club heads of basalt . 356
19 Hawaiian Stone weapons . 357
20 Clubs of New Guinea and the Bis¬
marck Archipelago . 358
21 Ancient Maori Clubs . 359
22 Maori Paoi and Club . 360
23 Hawaiian Stone Pestles . 361
24 Hawaiian Pestles . 362
25 Hawaiian Pestles . 363
26 Hawaiian Stone Mullers . 364
27 View of Kaulanauahoa on Molokai... 365
28 Hawaiian Stone Mortars of cylindrical
form • . . 366
29 Mortar broken in the making . 367
30 Stone Cups used for grinding . 368
31 Hawaiian Poi Board and Pounders- • • 369
32 Tahitian Poi Pounders . 370
33 Marquesan Poi Pounders . 371
34 Ancient Marquesan Poi Pounder . 371
35 Coral rock Pounders: from Ruk, Caro¬
line Islands . 372
36 Wood and Stone Pounders : from the
Caroline Islands . 373
37 Hawaiian Muller: of coral rock . 374
38 Ancient Hawaiian Poi Pounder . 375
39 Hawaiians making Poi Pounders . 375
40 Unfinished Poi Pounders .... . . 376
41 Ancient form of Hawaiian Poi Pounders 377
42 Group of Hawaiian Poi Pounders . 378
43 Group of Hawaiian Poi Pounders . 379
44 Group of Hawaiian Poi Pounders . 380
45 Position of holding Ring Pounders for
pounding (a), or grinding (b) . 381
46 Stone Pounders of uncertain use . 381
47 Hawaiian stone implement of ancient
but unknown use . 382
48 Kapa Pressers . 383
49 Rude Hawaiian Stone Dish . 384
50 Hawaiian Dish of coral sandstone.... 385
51 Hawaiian Stone Dish . 386
52 Stone Offertorium : from Molokai . 386
List of Illustrations.
IX
PAGE
53 Stone Bowl from Necker Island . 387
54 Stone Bowl from Nihoa Island . 387
55 Hawaiian Stone Dish . 388
56 Hawaiian Stone Cups . 389
57 Kapuahi kuni anaana : Cups for burn¬
ing souls . 390
58 Stone Salt Pans from Kailua, Hawaii. 391
59 Lamp from a lava bubble . 392
60 Lamps made from broken pounders. • • 393
61 Rude forms of Hawaiian Lamps . 394
62 Large Stone Lamps from Molokai.... 394
63 Cylindrical Hawaiian Stone Lamps- • • 395
64 Fishing Lamp . 396
65 Tahitian Sorcery Lamp . 397
66 Hawaiian Stone Mirrors . 399
67 Hawaiian Maika Stones, of good form 400
68 Hawaiian Maika Stones, of good form 401
69 Pile of Maika Stones to show varying
thickness . 403
70 Rings of limestone and shell from the
western Pacific . 404
71 Method of boring Shell Rings . 405
72 Hawaiian Fishing Stones . 406
73 Hawaiian Stone Axe . 407
74 Cutting edges of Hawaiian Adzes . 408
75 Hawaiian Adzes, 3122, 3146 and 3150- . 409
76 Hawaiian Adzes, 3137, 3152 and 3121 . . 410
77 Hawaiian Adze with oblique blade. ... 41 1
78 Hawaiian Stone Adzes . 412
79 Hawaiian Stone Adzes . 413
80-1 Solomon Island Adzes of greenstone.. 416
82 Southern Pacific Adzes . 417
83 Moriori Adzes from Chatham Islands. • 419
84 Moriori Adzes from Chatham Islands. . 420
85 Handles of Adzes from New Guinea
and Micronesia . 420
86 Various Adze handles from the Pacific 421
87 Gilbert Islands Adzes with handles. . . 422
88 Maori Adzes with ornamented handles 422
89 Ceremonial Adzes from Mangaia . 423
90 Maori carved Adze handle . 424
91 Fine Stone Chisel . 425
92 Stone Gouge . 425
93 Stone images of Fish gods . 426
94 Image from Manoa Valley, Oahu . 427
95 Necker Island Image in profile . 428
96 Miscellaneous Stone objects . 429
97 Teetotum Stones . 430
98 Pile of Hawaiian Stone Adzes . 433
MEMOIR V.
x Under side of Feather Mat . 438
2 Kukailimoku, Newcastle-upon-Tyne. . 439
3 Kukailimoku, Oxford Museum . 440
4 Eye of shell and feathers . 441
5 Wicker Helmet from Maui . 443
6 Helmet, Newcastle-upon-Tyne . 444
7 Helmet, Newcastle-upon-Tyne . 445
8 Helmet in Oxford Museum . 446
9 Helmet at Berne . 447
10' Helmets in Peabody Museum . 447
11 Marquesan headband . 448
12 Color Diagram Berne Cloak . 449
13 Cambridge Cape . 449
14 Cape, Newcastle-upon-Tyne . 450
15 Edge-Partington Cape . 450
16 Burned Cloak, Honolulu . 451
17 Dover Cloak . 451
18 Cape . 451
19 Norwich Cape . 451
20 Coil of Feather Money . 452
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
HAWAIIAN
i
HONOLULU, H. I.
BISHOP MUSEUM PRESS.
1899.
WORK
BY
WILLIAM T. BRIGHAM.
A.M.(Harv-), A. A. S. (1867.)
Correspondent of the Berlin Gesellschaft
fur Anthropologies Ethnologie und
Urgeschichte ; the Philadelphia Acad¬
emy of Natural Sciences; the Cali¬
fornia Academy of Sciences.
Member of the Massachusetts Horticul¬
tural Society ; and of the Vienna
A nthropologischen Gesellschaft.
EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
I. Helmet of Kaumualii, King of Kauai. Printed in colors by Eowy, of Vienna, from a
negative by the author.
II. Tahitian gorget or portion of a dress of ceremony. From a photograph sent from Sydney
by R. Etheridge, Jr., Esq.
III. Hawaiian with cloak (No. 5) and helmet (No. 2). Photographed by the Diredlor.
IV. Small kahili in the Bishop Museum. Photographed by the author.
V. Tropic bird (No. 7463) and young (No. 7464). Photographed by the Director from
mounted specimens in the Bishop Museum.
VI. Feather mats in the British Museum. Photographed by Mr. Henry Oldland for this use.
VII. Helmets in the Spanish National Museum at Madrid. From a lithographed plate
kindly furnished by Stewart Culin, Esq., of Philadelphia.
VIII. Boki and Eiliha. From the colored lithograph of a painting by John Hayter, published
in September, 1824. The copy in the Pidture Gallery of the Bishop Museum was given to Queen
Emma in 1885 by the Bishop of Rochester. I do not know where the original painting is. Boki,
who was Governor of Oahu, wears a feather cloak and helmet. Liliha wears a lei of feathers, a niho
palaoa of human hair about her neck, and the pa'u or usual female dress of kapa.
IX. Network used in feather cloaks. The upper figure shows three grades of olona net, the
middle one a long malo; the lower figure shows the back of a cloak where, from the looseness of the
netting, the feathers have worked through.
X. Cloak of Kiwalao (No. 2); in modern times styled the “Queen’s cloak.”
XI. Network of the cloak of Kiwalao to show the piecing.
XII. Ahuula in the Boston Art Museum (Nos. 58 and 59).
XIII. Cloaks in the Museum of Her Majesty Victoria at Windsor Castle (Nos. 19 and 20).
Photographed by Russell & Co.
XIV. Capes in Her Majesty’s collection at Windsor Castle (Nos. <2=21, £=87, c= 86, ^=85).
Photographed by Russell & Co.
XV. Cape in the Bishop Museum (No. 7). Printed in colors by Lowy, of Vienna, from a
negative by the Diredlor. The central crescent should be black instead of red.
m
»
HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
An Essay on ancient Hawaiian Feather decoration , with a List of the more
important remains. By William T. Brigham, A.M., Director of the
Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum.
The love of personal decoration appears very early in the history of the
human race. When the fierce struggle for existence and the pursuit of food and shel¬
ter allowed time for the consideration of family, the keen hunters must have learned
many a lesson from the beasts of the field and forest, — not less from the birds of the air,
of the processes of Nature which Mr. Darwin has called sexual se/eftion. That any
savage ever reasons out these processes cannot be believed, but the sharp eye trained in
daily hunts could not be blind to the patent fact that so many birds have plumage
evidently intended for attractive decoration, and that it answers this purpose. Savage
man at first put on the adornments in which he saw the male of so many birds and beasts
was resplendent, and not until many ages after was the woman allowed to appropriate
to her own use what in early tribal life was the exclusive property of the male.
The lion’s mane, the tiger’s skin, the eagle’s feather were man’s earliest adorn¬
ment, and it is not improbable that woman in humble emulation of her lord made for
herself clusters and bands of flowers or fruits, while the dwellers on the ocean shores
soon took the sea-shells cast on the sandy beach.
The warrior of the far North has the eagle and hawk from which to borrow, and
the ancient war dress of a Mandan chief was decorated with spoil of these and other
birds; but in the warmer regions of the earth, where Nature puts forth all her powers,
and birds and insedts vie in coloring with the most brilliant flowers, uncivilized man
has wantoned in the prodigality and fashioned for himself a gorgeous decoration taken
from the captives of his bow, net, or blow-gun.
India still, through all the years of her changing civilization, has preserved the
traces of early work in bird feathers in the superb punkas where the showy feathers of
the peacock and pheasant have replaced the smaller and more beautiful feathers of
earlier days. The rock-cut temples record on the effigies of gods and heroes that line
the walls or cluster about the columns the use of feather decoration both in civil
and martial guise; a tale of very remote times. Eastward through the Siamese penin¬
sula, northward through China, the use of feather decoration extended, and in the lattei
Memoirs of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum. Vol. I.
2
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
empire, where are seen in the glimpses we obtain of their remote history, so many
germs of what we fondly consider onr own inventions, feather mosaics are even at the
present day made in abundance. I have seen in China the simple process of cement¬
ing the bright-colored feathers to metal surfaces in a form of jewelry most popular
with the middle classes.
It was in the midst of the American continent that feather work in ancient times
reached its best estate. In Brazil along the banks of the Amazon, in Venezuela on the
Orinoco, where it is difficult to decide whether birds outnumber the flowers or the flowers
are brighter in color than the birds that fly among them, the strings and plumes of
bright feathers were not merely decorations: they were, and are, often symbols of
chieftainship, and feather sceptres are found in most large museums of Ethnology,
especially in Rome, Vienna and Berlin.
In Central America the wonderful monoliths buried in the forests of Guatemala
and Honduras bear the feather plumes of Quetzaleoatl, and at Quirigua I have seen
these plumes sculptured with rare fidelity. The Maya picture writings that escaped
the destroying hand of the bigoted Spanish priests, show feather standards, head¬
dresses and other ornaments, but when we follow the Conquistadores northward through
many a league of unbroken forest, we come in Mexico to the royal domain of the uArs
plumariaA Here feather work was most admirable at the time of the Conquest and
we have still preserved the grand tiara of Montezuma and a superb fan of the same
period in the royal Museum at Vienna. These although differing from the class of
work we are at present to consider, deserve a passing notice for their wonderful beaut}'
not only of material but of artistic arrangement as well. Baron Ferdinand von Hoeh-
stetter has well described the first1, and Dr. Franz Heger2 the second. The plumes of
the Quetzal ( Pharomacrus mocinno ) and the vivid turquoise blue of the Xiuhtototl
( Cotinga cinlia or ccernlea ) are prominent among charming spoils of less known birds.
The Ara ( Psittacus viacao ) furnished brilliant plumage as do scores of other parrots,
and the Mexican of today continues the pretty art bequeathed him by remote ancestors.
Whichever way then the ancient inhabitants of the Polynesian groups entered
the Pacific Ocean they must have brought some knowledge of feather decoration.
Central Asia has now little enough of this work, but the southern and eastern shores of
Asia furnished and still furnish abundant illustration. New Guinea, the halting
place for the east-bound, has among others the feathers of the Birds of Paradise and
the helmets and diadems are no mean objects among the manufactures of a remarkably
decorative people. If the immigrants came from the American shore and journeyed
with the “ Trades” they had no inferior preceptor in the people of Greater Mexico.
On the comparatively barren islands the new comers found few birds of brilliant
plumage. Two shades of yellow, two of red, a green, black and white exhausted the
lUebe> - mexicamsche Reli/uien am da Zeit Montezuma's in der
k. k. Ambraser Sammlung /.v den Denkschnflen der philosophisch-
hiAorischen Classe der kaiserlich Akademie der tVisscnschaften in
ri’. rxxv. [rss^ ]
2 Altmexicanische Reliquien aus dem Schlosse Ambias in Tirol.
Annalen des k. k. naturhistorischen Hof museums. Wien, 1895.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, You. I.
Plate IT.
I _
TAHITIAN GORGET
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
3
palette, for the forests were not extensive, nor fruits abundant as in the East Indies or
in Mexico.
In Viti the red feathers of the Lorius solitarius and in Samoa those of the
Coryphilus fringillaceus were used to decorate choice mats, and feathers of the former
were much sought in Tonga. In the Society Islands stiff gorgets were made of
feathers and shark teeth (PI. II.) and ceremonial dresses or masks of pearl shell and
feathers one of which is still preserved in the British Museum and another, less per¬
fect, in Florence.
All these uses of feathers in a permanent form are crude and primitive: all yield
to the beautiful and far more durable work of the Hawaiians which it is the object of
this essay to illustrate. Hawaiian feather work seen in its remains which have come
down to us consists, first, in Leis or strings of feathers worn in the hair, or, in later
times, about the neck; Kahilis or plumes of feathers used as royal insignia; Ahuula
cloaks or capes worn on state occasions by chiefs and nobility; Mahiole or helmets
designed for protection as well as ornament; images of the god Kukailimoku the chosen
war-god of Kamehameha I.; and finally a few other things, as a model of a temple oracle
given to Captain Cook, and certain mat-like objects now in the British Museum, of
which the probable use will be discussed in order.
The birds which supplied the feathers, at least the choicer yellow, red and green,
were inhabitants of the mountain regions into which as the abode of evil spirits the
Hawaiian did not like to go. His home was on the shore where the fish were at hand,
or in the well-watered valleys where he could grow his kalo ( Caladium esculentum ).
Hence a caste arose of hardy venturesome men, the bird-hunters, — poe hahai manu , —
who endured cold and privations in their hunt for the precious feathers which were
indeed the gold currency in which tribute might be paid or by which coveted goods
might be obtained. The old Hawaiian was a close observer of nature. Having neither
books nor the modern curse of newspapers, his memory was strengthened and his eye
sharpened. He had a name for every tree and plant and not less for every bird. It is
true that he did not always conjoin the two sexes when they, as is not infrequently
the case, differ greatly in coloration ; but ornithologists of education have failed in the
same way. The hunters knew well enough the haunts of the birds they sought and
the seasons when the plumage was at its best. They knew the habits of the birds,
their food and other matters that might facilitate their quest. For example, they recog¬
nized the curiosity of the birds and planted strange trees in the open places in the
forests, and in these new trees placed the sticks smeared with bird-lime which would
entangle the prying birds. Bows and arrows would have been of no avail, if they had
possessed them, for the rarer birds were seldom killed but captured alive and when the
few feathers desired were plucked, released to renew their plumage at the next moult¬
ing. When bird-lime made of the viscid juice of the “papala” ( Pisonia umbellifera )
4
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
could be obtained it was preferred, although other kinds were known and snaies and
throwing nets were frequently used. The common sorts were often killed and eaten,
and the oo could hardly have survived the loss of nearly its entire plumage.
It will be well to look at the description the early voyagers give of this feather
work at a time when it was in perfection, bearing in mind that in fifty years from the
earliest account the making of feather cloaks had practically ceased, although the con¬
struction of kahilis and the plaiting of leis continues to the present day. These latter
works, however, require no especial skill and draw upon very miscellaneous material.
FIG. I. cook’s CAPE: now IN AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM.
When Cook anchored off Waimea, Kauai, in 1778, on his first discovery of the
Hawaiian Group, he and his officers at once noticed the feather robes and helmets, and
the artist Waber [not Webber] in the capital drawing made of the scene on shore
delineates a chief wearing the mahiole and ahuula. The account is as follows :
“Amongst the articles which they brought to barter this day [Jan. 21, 1778] we could not help
taking notice of a particular sort of cloak and cap, which, even in countries where dress is more
particularly attended to, might be reckoned elegant. The first are nearly of the size and shape of the
short cloaks worn by the women in England, and by the men of Spain, reaching to the middle of the
back and tied loosely before. The ground of them is a net-work, upon which the most beautiful red
and yellow feathers are so closely fixed, that the surface might be compared to the thickest and richest
velvet, which they resemble, both as to feel and glossy appearance.
“The manner of varying the mixture is very different, some having triangular spaces of red
and yellow alternately ; others a kind of crescent, and some that were entirely red, had a yellow border
which made them appear, at some distance, exactly like a scarlet cloak edged with gold lace. The
brilliant colours of the feathers, in those that happened to be new, added not a little to their fine
FEATHER WORK IN COO ITS VOYAGES.
5
appearance, and we found that they were in high estimation with their owners, for they would not, at
first part with one of them for anything we offered, asking no less a price than a musket. However,
some were afterward purchased for very large nails. Some of them as were of the best sort, were
scarce, and it would seem that they are only used on the occasion of some particular ceremony or
diversion, for the people who had them always made some gesticulations which we had seen used
before by those who sung.
“The cap is made almost exadtly like a helmet, with the middle part, or crest, sometimes of a
hand’s breadth ; and it fits very close upon the head having notches to admit the ears. It is a frame
of twigs and osiers, covered with a net-work, into which are wrought feathers, in the same manner
as upon the cloaks, though rather closer and
less diversified ; the greater part being red
with some black, yellow or green stripes on
the sides following the curve direction of the
crest. These probably complete the dress
with the cloaks, for the natives sometimes
appeared in both together.
“We were at a loss to guess from
whence they could get such a quantity of these
beautiful feathers ; but were soon informed as
to one sort for they afterward brought great
numbers of skins of small red birds [Are/] for
sale, which were often tied up in bunches of
twenty or more, or had a small wooden
skewer run through their nostrils. At the
first those that were brought consisted only
of the skin from behind the nostrils forward,
but we afterward got many with the hind
part including the tail and feet The first
however struck us at once with the origin of
the fable formerly adopted, of the birds of
paradise ( Paradisea afioda) wanting legs ; and
sufficiently explained that circumstance.
Probably the people of the islands east of
the Moluccas, from whence the skins of the
birds of paradise are brought, cut off their
feet, for the very reason assigned by the peo¬
ple of Atooi [Kauai] for the like practice,
which was, that they hereby can preserve
them with greater ease, without losing any
part of which they reckon valuable. The red bird of our island was judged by Mr. Anderson to
be a species of merops, about the size of a sparrow ; of a beautiful scarlet colour, with a black tail and
wings ; and an arched bill twice the length of the head, which with the feet was also a beautiful red¬
dish colour. The contents of the head were taken out, as in the birds of paradise, but it did not appear
that they used any other method to preserve them than by simple drying ; for the skins, though moist,
had neither taste nor smell that could give room to suspect the use of anti-putrescent substances.3
“They have another [dress] appropriated to their Chiefs, and used on ceremonious occasions,
consisting of a feathered cloak and helmet, which in point of beauty and magnificence, is perhaps
nearly equal to that of any nation in the world. As this dress has been already described with great
accuracy and minuteness, I have only to add that these cloaks are made of different length in propor¬
tion to the rank of the wearer, some of them reaching no lower than the middle, others trailing on the
ground. The inferior chiefs have also a short cloak, resembling the former, made of the long tad
feathers of the cock, the tropic and man-of-war birds, with a broad border of the small red and \ello\\
FIG. 2. HELMET TAKEN TO ENGLAND BY VAN¬
COUVER : NOW IN THE BISHOP MUSEUM.
3 Cook's Voyages. Quarto Kd.. 1784, II., p. 206.
6
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
feathers, and a collar of the same. Others again are made of feathers entirely white with variegated
borders. The helmet has a strong lining of wicker-work, capable of breaking the blow of any war¬
like instrument and seems evidently designed for that purpose. Fig. 2.
“These feathered dresses seemed to be exceedingly scarce, appropriated to persons of the
highest rank and worn by the men only. During the whole time we lay in Karakakooa Bay [Keala-
keakua], we never saw them used but on three occasions: in the curious ceremony of Terreeoboo’s
[Kalaniopuu] first visit to the ships ; by some chiefs who were seen among the crowd on shore when
Captain Cook was killed; and afterward, when Eappo [?] brought his bones to us.
“The exact resemblance between this habit and the cloak and helmet formerly worn by the
Spaniards was too striking not to excite our curiosity to inquire whether there were any probable
grounds for supposing it to have been borrowed from them. After exerting every means in our power
of obtaining information on the subject, we found they had no immediate knowledge of any other
nation whatever ; nor any tradition remaining among them of these islands having been ever visited
before by such ships as ours. But notwithstanding the result of these inquiries, the uncommon form
of this habit appears to me a sufficient proof of its European origin, especially when added to another
circumstance, that it is a singular deviation from the general resemblance in dress which prevails
amongst all the branches of this tribe dispersed through the South Sea. We were driven indeed by
this conclusion to a supposition of the shipwreck of some Buccaneer, or Spanish ship, in the neigh¬
borhood of these islands. But when it is recollected that the course of the Spanish trade from Aca¬
pulco to the Manilas is but a few degrees to the Southward of the Sandwich Islands in their passage out,
and to the Northward on their return, this supposition will not appear in the least improbable.’’4
To Captain King’s account must be added that of the surgeon of the fleet,
William Ellis, who was both a ready writer and a good draughtsman. His relation of
the last voyage of Cook, now a rare book, adds much to the information given in the
official account.
“The principal ornaments of the men are the feather caps and cloaks ; some of the latter -reach
down to their heels, and have a most magnificent appearance. They are made for the most part of
red and yellow feathers, which are tied upon fine net work ; the caps are composed of the same kind
of feathers which are sometimes intermixed with black ; they are secured upon a kind of basket work
made in the form of a helmet. Both caps and cloaks are made of various patterns and sizes. The
cloaks are not all composed of the same kind of feathers, but are sometimes varied with the long tail
feathers of the cock, with a border of yellow or red, and sometimes with those of the tropick bird.
Both caps and cloaks, however, are only to be seen in the possession of the principal people. They
have also a kind of fly-flap, made of a bunch of feathers fixed to the end of a thin piece of smooth and
polished wood : they are generally made of the tail feathers of the cock, but the better sort of people
have them of the tropick bird’s feathers, or those belonging to a black and yellow bird called mo-ho
[Oo]. The handle is very frequently made of one of the bones of the arm or leg of those whom they
have killed in battle, curiously inlaid with tortoise shell : these they deem very valuable, and will not
part with them under a great price. This ornament is common to the superiors of both sexes.
“The women too have their share in the ornamental way: that which they value most is the
erai This is a kind of ruff or necklace made of red, green, black, and yellow feathers, curi¬
ously put together, and in most elegant patterns, which really do honor to the fancy of the ladies,
whose business it is to make them. They never think themselves dressed without one or two of these
round their necks, and those who can afford it wear many.”5
■‘Journal of Captain King; Cook’s Voyages , III., p. 138. The sup¬
position that the Spaniards had preceded them was indeed cor¬
rect. Cook had doubtless read Anson’s Voyage, which was pub¬
lished the year he sailed from Kngland, and in which was a copy
of the Spanish chart captured on the galleon June 20, 1743, on the
voyage from Acapulco to Manila. On this chart are laid down a
group "has Mesas” in nearly the latitude of the Hawaiian Islands,
though some fifteen degrees out of the correct longitude, not an
unusual error at that time. In November, 1527, shipwrecked Span¬
iards arrived at Keei, near Kealakeakua, Hawaii, in the reign of
Kealiiokaloa. In 1555 Juan Gaetano discovered these islands when
sailing from New Spain to the Moluccas.
5 An authentic narrative of a voyage performed by Captain Cook
and Captain Clerke , in his majesty’s ships Resolution and Discovery
during the years 1776. 1777, 1778, 1779 and 1780; in search of a north¬
west passage between the continents of Asia and America. Including
a faithful account of all their discoveries , and the unfortunate death
of Captain Cook. By W. Kills, assistant surgeon to both vessels
London, 1782. Vol. II., p. 155.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate III.
HAWAIIAN WITH CLOAK (5) AND HELMET (2)
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I
Plate XV.
SMALL KAHILI
FEATHER WORK IN EARLY VOYAGES.
7
In the vc^ages of Captains Portloek and Dixon in 1786 we read:
“But the most beautiful ornament wore by the women is a necklace made from tlie variegated
feathers of the humming bird which are fixed on strings so regular and even as to have a surface equally
smooth as velvet ; and the rich colours of the feathers give it an appearance equally rich and elegant.
“The caps and cloaks wore by the men are still superior in beauty and elegance. The cloaks
are in general about the size of those wore by the Spaniards ; the ground is network and the feathers
are sewed on in alternate squares or triangular forms of red and yellow,
_ ^ ^ . which have a most brilliant appearance. The ground of the caps is
wicker work, in the form of a helmet; the elevated part from the fore¬
head to the hind part of the neck, is about a hand’s breadth and gen¬
erally covered with yellow feathers, the sides of the cap with red. This
cap, together with the cloak, has an appearance equally splendid, if
not superior to any scarlet and gold whatever.
“These truly elegant ornaments are scarce, and only possessed
by Chiefs of the highest rank, who wear them on extraordinary occa¬
sions. There are cloaks of an inferior kind, which have only a narrow
border of red and yellow feathers, the rest being covered with feathers
of the tropic and man-of-war bird.’’6
Vancouver returning to Kealakeakua Bay in 1792 me^
i r Kamehameha I. and he describes the dress of the young
king as follows :
“The largest canoe was rowed by eighteen paddles on each side ;
in this was his Hawaiian majesty, dressed in a printed linen gown,
that Captain Cook had given to Kalaniopuu ; and the most elegant
feather cloak I had yet seen, composed principally of beautiful bright
yellow feathers and reaching from his shoulders to the ground on which
it trailed. O11 his head he wore a very handsome helmet, and made
altogether a very handsome appearance. ’’7
During that visit the king presented Vancouver with
four very handsome feathered helmets' (one of these, Big- 2, is
now in the Bishop Museum, No. 322); and later, when coming
to see his good friend, —
“Kamehameha conceiving this might be his last visit, presented
me with a handsome cloak formed of red and yellow feathers, with a
small collection of other native curiosities ; and at the same time deliv eied
into my charge the superb cloak that he had worn 011 his formal visit on
our arrival. This cloak was very neatly made of yellow feathers ; after
he had displayed its beauty and had shewn me the two holes made in
different parts of it by the enemy’s spears the first day he wore it, in Ins
last battle for the sovereignty of this island, he very carefully folded it up,
and desired that on my arrival in England, I would present it m his name
to H M King George ;'•> and as it had never been worn by any person but
himself, he stridly enjoined me not to permit any person whatever to
, . , . , , , • o- it was the most valuable in the island of Hawaii, and lor that
throw it over their shoulders, saving it was rue . , , t? no-1 and
monarch, and so good a friend, as he considered the King of England.
the command of Captain George Vancouver. I.ondon,
FIG. 3. BONE HANDLES OF
KAHILIS : B. P. B. M.
reason he had sent it to so great a
6 Voyage round the world , but more particularly to the Northwest
coast <tf America, performed m 1785-88, London, 1789. 4to. p- 271.
7 a voyage of discovery to the North Pacific Ocean and round the
world, undertaken by his Majesty's command , principally with a view to
ascertain the existence of any navigable communication between le
North Pacific and North Atlantic Oceans, and performed m the years
1790-95, under
1798. Vol. IX., p- 126.
*Loc. cil., p. 127- These are now,
in the British Museum.
9 cit p. 159. This cloak is supposed to be one of those now
at Windsor Castle. It might be identified by
with the exception mentioned.
the holes made by
8
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
“This donation I am well persuaded was directed by his own grateful heart, without having
received the least hint or advice from any person whatever, and was the effect of principles, highly
honorable to more civilized minds. The cloak I received and gave him the most positive assurance
of adting agreeably with his directions. ”
I have given the extracts from these early voyagers in full for it is the only
authentic information that we have from foreigners : that from native sources is very
meagre and indefinite. Even in recent times we can learn nothing very exactly about
these ancient cloaks : for example when King Lunalilo was buried, his father Kanaina
insisted upon putting the fine feather cloak which had been laid over the remains, into
the coffin with him. This was in 1874, and hundreds must have seen this cloak as the
a b t d
FIG. 4. IIWI, OU AND APAPANE: SPECIMENS IN THE BISHOP MUSEUM.
royal corpse was exposed to the view of the people ; I have questioned many most in¬
telligent foreigners and natives with the result that one saw the cloak and only
remembers that it was yellow and large : another says it was not all yellow but had
some other color, but whether red or black he cannot say : another is sure it had some
pattern but whether crescents or triangles could not say : still another is under the
impression that the cloak was entirely red ! The most trustworthy testimony places a
green crescent in the middle. Little of a more definite nature is to be gathered from
native song and tradition, although both cloaks and kahilis are mentioned and the
royal birds play a conspicuous part in many a fine old mele. Then the absurd stories
repeated in almost every new book written about these islands, although false, seem
immortal. How often is the statement repeated in book and on label that the bird of
the spear, but at the time of my last visit to England the Windsor private museum in the castle. All of these Her Majesty has gra-
cloaks had “been sent to the furrier for repairs.'’ Since my visit ciously allowed me to have photographed and they will be described
renewed search has been made for this cloak at Windsor, but without in due order. The cloak Vancouver so carefully carried to his sov-
success. Other cloaks and capes were found and are now in the ereign has probably perished.
OF THE HAWAIIAN BIRDS. g
yellow feathers has but two of the precious decorations, — the fact being that the Oo has
in each axil a tuft of from fifteen to twenty feathers, and the Mamo has quite as many
in the dorso-caudal region. But it is time lost to repeat the many wanderings from
the truth that these mysterious birds have caused, and we may turn at once to a con¬
sideration of the birds that furnished the feathers for the old Hawaiians.10
BIRDS FURNISHING FEATHERS.
Iiwi. First the Iiwi ( l estiana cocctnea , Reichenbach ), Fig. 4, the bright red
bird, found all over the group, today as in former times the most abundant native bird,
although, like all other natives disappearing. I have seen it in my garden in Nuuanu
a bed
FIG. 5. OO AND MAMO! SPECIMENS IN BISHOP MUSEUM.
Valley about 120 feet above the sea, in fair weather, and it is often driven down to the
shore from the mountain ridges, which are its usual haunt, by severe storms. It is a
honey-sucker and frequents the arborescent Lobeliaceae so noticeable a feature of the
Hawaiian flora. The adult female is of a darker vermilion than the male, and her
feathers are easily mistaken for those of the faded apapane. Total length, 5.75 inches.
The breast furnishes the main supply of feathers.
That there may be something more definite than the mere terms red, yellow,
orange applied to these feathers, I have compared unfaded specimens with the color
illustrations given in M. Teon Tefevre’s Trciite des Matures colorantes artificielles ,
Paris, 1896, and the fresh feathers of the iiwi correspond to the rouge d’alizarine SX
IOFor the measurements and ornithological names I am indebted tors, has trusted too much to the modern native, who neither remem-
chiefly to Mr. Scott B. Wilson, whose Aves Hciwaiienses : Birds of bers nor cares for the ancient lore of the islands, but will not confess
the Sandwich Isla?ids is replete with careful observation and much his ignorance, passing' upon the unsuspe<5ting stranger it may be the
study. In the case of native names, Mr. Wilson, as most other collec- name of a fish or flower, if the true name is forgotten.
TO
BRIGHAM ON HAW A HAN FEATHER WORK.
sur soie 25% pate a 20% given on page 1402 of that great work. When the feather
fades it assumes a yellow tone, and the color of these as of the 00 and mamo fades
quickly in alcohol. Kept in the dark, as the ahuula were most of the time, the tint
seems very durable, some old leis and capes showing as bright as the freshly plucked
feathers.
Oo. — Next to this the Oo ( Acnilocercns nob i/ is, Wilson), Fig. 5, a $ , S , is
abundant, but confined to the island of Hawaii. Other species are found on Kauai,
Maui and Molokai, but none of them have the bright axillary tufts. Like the iiwi it
is a honey-sucker, but I have fed them successfully in captivity on the juice of sugar
cane. The general color is a brilliant black which brings the yellow tufts into fine
contrast. All the black figures and lines in the feather work are of this plumage, and
it was largely used in the grand kahilis. As the bird was a favorite article of food,
and as the larder of the hunters in the mountains was poorly stocked, it seldom
survived capture, and yet this bird has remained in comparative abundance while the
mamo, whose orange feathers alone were taken, has become extinct. The name is
onomatopoeic, the note closely resembling 0-0. Total length of adult male, 12.5 inches;
adult female, 9.5 inches. The curled tail which gives the bird its generic name is
confined to the male of the nobilis. The yellow of the axillary tufts is nearly l'epre-
sented by the eitronine sur soie shown on p. 449 of Lefevre. In mounting these
feathers, which are rather thin at the top and black at the base, iiwi short feathers
are often added to the base to give a warm tint to the pale yellow and to approximate
it to the mamo. This addition is called piiu (waist-cloth).
Ou. — The On ( Psittacirostra psittacca, Temminck), Fig. 4, b $ , c $ , has a range
throughout the group, feeding largely on the ripe fruits of the ie-ie ( Freycinctia
arborea, Gaudiehaud ). The green color varies considerably; only that on the head is
brilliant while the body plumage is dull, and was not much used; only three or four
capes and as many helmets showing these have survived. Adult, 6.3 inches long.
Other greens might have been obtained from the genus Hemignathus or Heterorhyn-
chns, but this seems to have been rare anciently as well as at present.
Apapane. — The Apapane ( Himatione sanguined, Cabanis), Fig. 4, d $ , ranges
all over the islands, feeding on honey. Not much used in feather work; the dark crim¬
son feathers being inconspicuous at a distance. The color is eroeeine sur laine 2%,
p. 461 of Lefevre, shaded with primuline-f-/3 napthol, p. 596. Adult length, 5.25 inches.
A fragment of a cape (Cat. No. 40) made largely of these fine feathers is now in Hono¬
lulu, and several leis where they appear mixed with other feathers are in this Museum.
Mamo. — The beautiful Mamo (D/rpanis pacifica, Temminck) is rare in col¬
lections, the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum having only four specimens, two of those
in the Mills collection having been given by Mr. Clias. R. Bishop to Mr. Scott B.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate V.
TROPIC BIRD AND YOUNG
OF THE HAWAIIAN BIRDS.
ii
Wilson. It is probably nearly extinct, collectors of late years having failed to find it.
In 1890 I saw three in a sandal-wood tree under which I was camping on the slopes of
Mauna Hualalai on Hawaii (to which island the species is confined) at an elevation of
7000=!: feet. The Mills specimens were obtained, so Mr. Mills informed me in 1864,
near Olaa in Puna. The Kamehameha cloak in the Bishop Museum (No. 1 of the
catalogue given below) is composed wholly of these feathers ; so also is a fine lei in
the same collection. The bird is about 8 inches long. Fig. 5, r, d. The general
plumage is not of so rich a black as the 00, while the lower part of the body, the rump,
thighs, anterior margin of wings and tail coverts are of a rich orange. Among
Hawaiian birds the mamo is facile princeps. Its name has been applied to all royal
war-cloaks very mch as “beaver” has clung to a soft hat no longer made of the fur of
the Castor fiber. The principal color of the orange feather seems to be represented
by the jaune metanile sur laine, 2% shown on p. 446 of Lefevre’s work. To distin¬
guish these feathers when faded from the 00 is not always easy, but the orange of the
former is separated from the black base by a marked white space, and the tips of the
00 feathers are thinner and larger.
Koae. — The Tropic bird ( Phaethon eethereus , Bloxam), Boatswain bird, Paille-
en-queue, Pylstaart, is shown in PI. V. with its young. It breeds among the loose
rocks of the bird islands or on ledges of almost inaccessible cliffs on Oahu and other
inhabited islands, where its white form hovering like a kite in the air against the
green palls is often seen late in the afternoon. The long tail-feathers of the adult
and the mottled plumage of the young were used to some extent in the fabrication of
kahilis, but by no means so frequently as the feathers of the next species.
Koae tlla. — At present the Red-tailed Tropic bird ( Phaethon Rnbricanda ,
Salvin), while found occasionally on Niihau and the outlying islets is abundant on
Nihoa and Necker Islands. On the latter island I have pulled the red tail feathers
from the sitting bird who did not seem to greatly resent the outrage ; perhaps at that
season the feathers are more loosely attached, preparatory to moulting. While these
two feathers forming the important part, were greatly sought and highly valued, the
satiny white of the body plumage was also much in demand for capes, although little
of this white work is extant in museums: the only two specimens I have found are at
Florence; Nos. 66 and 67 in the List of Ahuula.
Iwa. — The Frigate bird ( Fregata aquila , Gould), also called the Man-of-war
hawk, was hunted for its long black metalic-tinted feathers, both for cloaks and for
kahilis. Common in the nesting season on Necker Island. In ancient days fishermen
made frequent excursions to Nihoa and Necker Islands. The landing places (only
one on each island) were so situated that landing was possible on one or the other
island in whatever wind. On the latter island, which is the narrow rim of a ruined
12
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
crater, are many stone constructions used in worship or in the propitiation of the
deities of sea, wind, fishing and hunting, as both fishers and hunters had their peculiar
gods, images of which were found there a few years ago broken to fragments.
Pueo. — The Hawaiian owl ( Asia accipitrinus , Gurney) was worshipped as a
god, but Davida Malo says in his so-called Hawaiian Antiquities, — but which is really
a compilation of native schoolboys’ compositions, — that the feathers were used for
kahilis, the bird being caught in snares placed near its burrows.
FIG. 6. PUEO, HAWAIIAN OWL.
Alala. — The Crow ( Corvns tropicus , Gmelin) is found only in the southwest
part of Hawaii. It was caught in snares. I have known one to be knocked down by
a stick, caught and kept eighteen months in captivity. The black feathers were used
for kahilis and for dressing idols much in the way common in New Guinea.
The feathers of the barnyard fowl and of the gamecock were largely used for
common capes or cloaks, as were those of the duck, and in recent times those of the
latter were sometimes dyed red or yellow. Kahilis of such dyed feathers are in the
Bishop Museum from the collection of Queen Emma." Dyed feathers have been much
used for leis and for ahuula as well, so that it is very necessary to examine specimens
“These dyed feathers are far from permanent in color, and in except on the two exhibition days each week quite in the dark,
the past eight years four of these kahilis which were placed outside Two placed within the almost air-tight cases have preserved their
the cedar cases in the Kahili room at the Museum have lost much of color better,
their color although never exposed to the direct rays of the sun and
COLLECTING THE FEATHERS.
i3
of feather work with care for this counterfeit. Fortunately both of the precious
yellow feathers have black bases not present of course in the dyed specimens. Dr.
Serrurier tells ( Aarddrijkskundig Weekblad , 1881, No. 19) an amusing story of dyed
feathers as quoted by Director Schmeltz:12 “ Tie ^ontgett ber ©nnbiuicf) $nfeln fcmbte
einen fofdjen Mantel nacf) irgenb enter SGSel tauf teltung unb ticff if)n be§ groffen 3Sertf)e§
f)n(6en fiir erne fjofje ©umme tterjtdjern. Ta§ (Spiff lift ©djiprucfj, aber nacf) ciniger
3eit murbe bie Sabung aufgafifcf)t unb ber 9Jlcmtet fam miebet §itm 23orfc£)ein, inbeff non
ber gefben $arbe ber $eberrt mar ttidjts ntcfjr itbrig; ber Mantel mar gefdrbt gcmefeu.”
Now even the old natives
were aware of the adtion of
salt water on the genuine
feathers and took great pre¬
caution when carrying their
precious robes on canoe voy¬
ages. Surely the prolonged
saturation of a shipwreck
would account for any loss
of color. I have, however,
soaked both mamo and iiwi
feathers in a saturated solu¬
tion of common salt for six
months with but little loss of
color. The story, although
probably apocryphal, has
served its purpose. It is
unnecessary to more than
mention the leis and capes made in recent times of the feathers of the peacock and
pheasant, many of which were in the possession of Kalakaua and his sister; they were
poor substitutes for the genuine Hawaiian feathers.
Besides the method of capturing with bird-lime, nets of light thread and wide
mesh were skilfully thrown over the flying bird, and sticks and stones were also re¬
sorted to with the larger birds. Peheapueo was a snare used especially for owls. One
of the ancient nets for bird-catching is in this Museum (No. 138), and I have suc¬
ceeded without difficulty in capturing with it the so-called “mina” ( Pastor tristis ) a
bird about the size of the 00. This net is of considerable size and the mesh stick
would be five inches wide. In whatever way the birds were caught the feathers when
plucked were tied to a thin but strong fibre and made up into small parcels as shown
in Fig. 7. The hunters often padded the main feather with the small down (pa’u) to
*2 Archives Internationales 'D} Ethnographie , /.
i4
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
make the parcel appear well. The feathers from under the wings were called ee, those
over the rump pui, while the tail feathers were pupua.
The use of feathers as currency was common throughout Polynesia, as shell
money was with the Papuans. In New Zealand, while cloaks of large size were made
of the feathers of the Kiwi ( Apteryx mantellii , etc.), the fine black feathers of the
Huia ( Heterolocha acutirostris , Gould) were used in the Polynesian way for barter as
well as for cloak making.
FEATHER KAHILIS.
The name kahili is derived from the root verb hill , to braid or tie on, as feathers
to a stem, or stone adzes to a handle: with the article it becomes ka-hih , the plaited
thing. The kahili in its greatest development consisted of a pole sometimes twenty
feet high, to the upper end of which was attached the hulu or cluster of feathers.
This was sometimes of great extent; the Rev. C. S. Stewart, who was at the Islands
when Lord Byron brought home the bodies of Liholiho and Kamamalu (in 1825), saw
poles near thirty feet high with hulumanu forming cylinders fifteen to eighteen inches
in diameter and twelve to fourteen feet long.'3 The largest in the Bishop Museum is
thirty inches in diameter and four feet long. Neither Cook nor Vancouver mention
these immense kahilis, for they never saw them, no royal funeral occurring during
their stay, and usually the poles were stripped of feathers when occasion passed, and
the feathers were preserved in calabashes until again required.
It is probable that a bunch of feathers used as a fly-flap was the primal form of
feather work. Flies ( nalo ) were here though not in such abundance as found by early
explorers on other islands of the Pacific ; but even for this useful purpose the bunch of
feathers was no doubt preceded by a bunch of leaves, and the prototype of the kahili
seems to have been a stem of that most useful plant the ki ( Cordyline terminalis ,
Kunth). Fig. 9, p. 16. On many of the islands of the Pacific a branch of ki was the
symbol of peace, and on the Hawaiian Islands it shared in early times with a coconut leaf
the representation of high rank. Its utility has survived its symbolism : and the native
obtains food and drink from the large saccharine root. At first he made a kind of fer¬
mented beer, then taught by vicious whites the Hawaiian distilled this fermenting mass
making a smoky whiskey called in the vernacular, from the name of the rude iron still,
okolehao . The tough leaf is still the favorite wrapper for fish, and I have seen an unclothed
and so pocketless native carry a score of oranges, each fruit wrapped neatly in one of the
leaves still attached to the stem. These leaves are also acceptable fodder for animals.
Very early the hand plumes became symbols of rank and on all public occasions
kahili bearers ( na lawekahili ) attended a chief, or while he ate or slept a haakui
"Private Journal of a voyage to the Pacific Ocean and residence at the Sandwich Islands , in the years 1822-25. By C. S. Stewart. New
York, 1828. p. 10. See extract below.
FEATHER KAHILIS .
i5
brushed away with smaller ones all troublesome inserts. In public they were tokens;
in private fly-flaps. The picture of Nahienaena, sister of Ivauikeaouli, shows one in
her hand. big. 10, p. 17. When oil portraits were introduced those of chiefs often had
small kahilis attached to the side of the frame. The small kahilis were easily made
and became very common ; were used as presents and so fell into the hands of others
than the nobility, thus losing much of their meaning. The late royal family, however,
retained them to the end of the monarchy, and royal personages had them at their side
at feasts or public receptions.
Of these small kahilis the Bishop Museum has four score, and examples are
found in most museums. The large kahilis used only on solemn occasions are now
limited in number, all the important historic ones are in this Museum and no more
w ill ever legitimately be made. I know of none in any foreign museum.
The pole, at first a mere support or stem, became from the force of circum¬
stances the impersonation of the whole kahili in this way: a kahili was made for a
chief, was named, and, when the occasion for its use had passed, its feathers were taken
off and stored away; the form was dissolved and only the name remained to the pole
which might when the next need arose be again clothed with t lie same or other
feathers, and in similar or quite different form. Often the pole was a spear ( pololu
kauila) , or a stick of well rounded koa ( Acacia koa , Gray), and in later times cabinet
i6
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
makers formed the stems of alternating native woods. Many of these last, both large
and small, are in this Museum but were unknown to the ancient Hawaiian. The old
native had, however, a very elaborate form of handle made by stringing disks of tor¬
toise-shell on a tough but slender core of kauila wood ( Alphitonia excelsa , Reissek),
or in the small ones of whalebone. The tortoise-shell was either used alone or alter¬
nating with bone or ivory. Making these handles was amusement as well as work for
chiefs, and two that the high chief Paki, father of Mrs. Bishop, left unfinished at his
death in June, 1855, are in the Bishop Museum and show well the method of construc¬
tion : Fig. 11. On the whalebone core
were strung twenty or more disks of
the outer shell of the sea turtle,
square or approximately rounded,
then a ring of bone was pressed tight¬
ly down on the parcel of disks and the
whole filed into shape and polished.
This is precisely the process used in
the manufacture of shell money once
the common currency of the people
of the western Pacific, though not
generally among Polynesians. In
the large kahilis the bone is often
omitted and the whole series pressed
closely together apparently without
cement. Such handles are of great
weight but always of elegant form
and perfect finish. How early this
manufacture began we have no means
of knowing : the same work is shown
in a fan handle once belonging to
Kalaniopuu the King of Hawaii at
the time of Cook’s visit [B. M. No.
5011], and from the finish it can
hardly have been a new process. Probably, as the turtle were abundant and the shell
FIG. 9. STEM OF KI.
easily worked, the manufacture is of considerable antiquity.
The bone alternating with the tortoise-shell is often human, as described by the
early voyagers, and a good example is shown in Fig. 3, p. 7 [B. M. No. 24]. The kumu
01 piincipal bone is the right shin bone of Kaneoneo, a noted chief of Kauai who came
to Oahu to fight for the religion of his fathers as well as for the independence of the
island threatened by Kamehameha, and who fell in the battle of Nuuanu [1795]. The
other bones, each from a different man, are of the brave chiefs who perished in the same
FEATHER KAHILIS.
i7
battle and were thus honored by the conqueror. 4 It was an old Hawaiian custom to
outrage the memory of an enemy by placing bits of his skeleton or teeth in some vessel
of dishonor, or by making fishhooks or arrow points15 of them; hence the care taken to
hide the bones of prominent chiefs. On the other hand it was honorable to have one’s
bones placed on a kahili handle or inlaid in a poi umeke. The old men a generation
ago knew the names of the chiefs whose bony relics are preserved in these kahilis while
the rest of their anatomy has long been dust, but probably no one can now tell the tale.
When a chief is at the point of death these bones are supposed to rattle, but as the
chiefs are all dead they seem now to have abandoned their heraldic vocation. Another
similar handle, but without feathers [B. M. No. 117], shown in the same illustration,
was given by Paki nearly half a century ago to Gorham D. Gilman to whom he told
all the names of the bones in order; but when Mr. Gilman gave the handle to the
Museum he had long since forgotten the interesting list.
The feathers ( hulumanu ) were of every variety known to the Hawaiians, includ¬
ing such foreign ones as ostrich and peacock; but the old ones were of the tropic-bird,
00 (both yellow and black), frigate-bird, pueo, iiwi and the barnyard fowl. In later
degenerate times dyed duck feathers were
used. The method of the modern florist
who fastens his short-stemmed flowers to
wires that they may have due prominence
in his bouquet was practised by the isl¬
ander of olden time, but as he had no wire
he pressed into service the tough, slim
midrib of the coconut leaf. Several of
these, or of other stiff fibres, he bound
together with the thread of olona, attach¬
ing by the same thread the feathers to
the separated ends of the main stem in a
way shown more clearly in Fig. 12, p. 19.
These feathered branches are tied together
in small bundles and kept in quantity for
use. How they were finally fastened to
the kahili pole is shown in Fig. 13, p. 19.
I believe that anciently, before
white influence was felt, no thought was
given to fitness of color to occasion, and it was only by foreign teaching that reds and
yellows were reserved for coronations or general state functions, while black and the
sombre colors were appropriated to funerals. At the funeral of the Princess Pauahi
*4 Doubtless bones of Kaiana, a chief of distin<5tion, and of Kalapi. 15 The only arrows used bv the Hawaiians were directed solely
kupule, the last king of Oahu, are among these trophies. against mice,
fVtEMOiRS B. P. B. Mugpuivf, Vot. I., No. i. — 2.
FIG. IO. NAHIENAENA, IN 1825.
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
iS
the kahilis made especially for the funeral were of pure white as in keeping with her
character. No such distinction held in the olden time. I do not forget that in the case
of cloaks, and to a less degree with kahilis, yellow was a royal color as with so many
oriental nations ; possibly, as has been suggested, from gold the king of metals, but
most likely from the sun the ruler of earthly life. The yellow robes of China, the yel¬
low umbrellas of the Hast Indies, the
golden disks of Peru, — and we might go
back to the life-giving orb of the Egyp¬
tian Ra, — all proclaim the regal essence
of yellow.
Formerly the base of the hulumanu
or cylinder of feathers was closed or ter¬
minated at the base by an inverted cone
of feathers kept in place by bands of kapa.
This simple form gave way to rather
tawdry sleeves of silk bound with long
ribbon streamers of the gaudy colors dear
to the colored races.
The very grand effect of the kahilis
carried in a funeral procession will not
easily be forgotten by those who have been
present at such functions. From every
side they present the same aspect, and
the graceful forms add dignity to the
stream of humanity almost as palms do
to a tropical sunset. Nor alone in pro¬
cession, — grouped about a throne or a bier
they both decorate and add dignity to
the place. The funeral of Kauikeaouli
(Kamehameha III.), in January, 1855,
was sketched by a Swiss artist, Paul
Emmert, and from his drawing the illus¬
tration, Fig. 14, p. 20, is given. The pall
FIG. II. unfinished kahili handles, upon the coffin was the royal robe of his
sister Naliienaena, and many of the
kahilis used on that occasion are now in the Bishop Museum. The officer in charge
of the kahili was called Paakahili.
Before leaving the subject of kahilis we may recall the description given by
Rev. C. S. Richards, in his Journal, of a celebration given in May, 1822, in memory of
Kamehameha the Great. The American Mission had been on the Islands but two
KAHILIS IN PROCESSIONS.
19
years and native customs had not been greatly modified, at least by the missionaries.
It was on the last day of a long revel :
“ Tameha-maru [Kamamalu, the favorite queen of Liholiho] on this day was, as usual, a con¬
spicuous object. The car of state in which she joined the processions passing in different directions
consisted of an elegantly modelled whaleboat fastened firmly to a platform of wicker work thirty feet
long by twelve wide, and borne on the heads of
seventy men. The boat was lined, and the whole
platform covered, first with imported broad¬
cloth, and then with beautiful patterns of tapa
or native cloth of a variety of figures and rich
colours. The men supporting the whole were
formed into a solid body so that the outer rows
FIG. 13. HULUMANU OF A KAHILI.
only at the sides and ends were seen ; and all forming
these wore the splendid scarlet and yellow feather
cloaks and helmets of which you have read accounts;
FIG. 12. BRANCHES OF A KAHILI. anc^ than which, scarce anything can appear more
superb. The only dress of the queen was a scarlet
silk pa'u or native petticoat, and a coronet of feathers. She was seated in the middle of the boat
and screened from the sun by an immense Chinese umbrella of scarlet damask [B. M. No. 5X52]
richly ornamented with gilding, fringe and tassels, and supported by a chief standing behind her, in
a scarlet malo or girdle and feather helmet. On one quarter of the boat stood Karimoku [Kalaimoku]
20
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
the Prime Minister, and on the other Naihe, the national orator, both also in malos of scarlet silk and
helmets of feathers, and each bearing a kahili or feathered staff of state near thirty feet in height.
The upper parts of these kahilis were of scarlet feathers so ingeniously and beautifully arranged on
artificial branches attached to the staff as to form cylinders fifteen or eighteen inches in diameter, and
twelve or fourteen feet long ; the lower parts or handles were covered with alternate rings of tortoise
shell and ivory of the neatest workmanship and highest polish.
“ Imperfect as the image may be which my description will convey to your mind of this
pageant of royal device and exhibition, I think you will not altogether condemn the epithet I use
when I say it was splendid. So far as the feather mantles, helmets, coronets and kahilis had an effect
I am not fearful of extravagance in the use of the epithet. I doubt whether there is a nation in
Christendom which at the time letters and Christianity were introduced, could have presented a
^ — - --- - - ----- -
FIG. 14. PORTION OF THE FUNERAL PROCESSION OF KAMEHAMEHA III.
court dress and insignia of rank so magnificent as these : and they were found here, in all their rich¬
ness, when the Islands were discovered by Cook. There is something approaching the sublime in the
lofty noddings of the kahilis of state as they tower far above the heads of the group whose distinction
they proclaim : something conveying to the mind impressions of greater majesty than the gleamings
of the most splendid banners I ever saw unfurled.” 16
Not in the least does the excellent missionary exaggerate in his eulogy on the
grand kahilis. Those of us who, in these latter days of the degeneration of all good
native works and customs, have seen the kahilis wave above royalty, however faded, —
the finely built and naked bronze statues that bore the kahilis replaced by clumsy, ill-
dressed, commonplace bearers of neither rank nor dignity, — even the withered rose,
most of its fragrance gone, has yet appealed strongly to our admiration and sympathy.
The powerfully built chiefs, head and shoulders above the common crowd, free from
all sartorial disfigurements, sustained easily the great weight of these towering plumes;
but the modern bearer, stranger alike to the strength and virtues of his predecessors,
has to call in the aid of stout straps of imported leather to bear the much smaller
kahilis of the modern civilized days.17
It was a notable gathering of chiefs. Kamamalu was a daughter of Kameha-
meha I. by Kaheiheimalie (afterwards Hoapiliwahine), and as the wife of Eiholiho
went with him to England where she died July 8, 1824. Kalaimoku or Kalanimoku,
sometimes called Pitt, was a chief, not of the highest rank, but was a valued counsellor
of Kamehameha during his wars, and of considerable ability, energy and honesty, a
16 Private Journal of a Voyage to the Pacific Ocean and Residence at times have been much longer on the march than in the early days
the Sandwich Islands , in the years 1822 , 1823, 1824 and 1823. By C. S. when streets wide enough for such displays were non existent, the
Stewart. New York, 1828: p. 109. town was small, and the passage frpm the palace tp the royal mau-
I7It is but fair to state that the funeral processions of modern soleum but a few rods long,
LIST OF LARGE KAHILIS.
2 I
combination of qualities useful, if rare, in the office of Prime Minister which he held
during the regency of Kaahumanu. He died February 8, 1827. Naihe, called the
national orator, was husband of Kapiolani, the enlightened alii who braved the goddess
Pele in her very den Kilauea. He died in 1831. The grand old chiefs have passed
away and not one descendant remains. With them have passed the gigantic kahilis of
which the much smaller successors remain, no longer useful except as relics of the past.
Of the large kahilis in the Bishop Museum the following list will show the
variety. The group of most of these, Fig. 8, p. 15, well exhibits the variation in form.
LIST OF LARGE KAHILIS IN THE BISHOP MUSEUM.
1. Ash pole 11 feet high. Hulumanu 50 inches high, 24 inches in diameter;
of black 00 feathers; branches bound with black but attached to the pole with white
cord. Used at the funerals of H. R. H. Keelikolani and of Mrs. Bishop. Black and
white silk trimmings.
2. Kauila spear 12 feet long. Hulumanu of blue peacock feathers arranged in
globular form, 22 inches in diameter, with feather base. It belonged to Queen Emma.
The name Noel .... is partly obliterated. Orange trimmings.
3. Koa pole 10 feet high. Hulumanu of peculiar form, only 4 inches high and
34 inches in diameter; of peacock feathers. The conical silk base is 2 feet long. Pink
and orange trimmings. A striking form, especially when alternating with the more
common kind.
4. Kauila spear 12 feet long, with carved end. Hulumanu of green peacock
feathers arranged in globular form, 22 inches in diameter; base of feathers. Kamaka-
mao was the name of this kahili. Trimmings orange.
5. Koa pole 10 feet long. Hulumanu 4 inches high, 22 inches in diameter; of
small black and white feathers. Princess Pauahi. Purple and lavender trimmings.
6. Painted pole (to imitate tortoise-shell and ivory) 14 feet high. Hulumanu
34 inches high, 26 inches in diameter; of black and white feathers. It was in the pos¬
session of Queen Emma and was named Laielohelohe. Purple and white trimmings.
7. Painted pole 13 feet high. Hulumanu globular, 13 inches in diameter; of
duck feathers dyed red. Blue, white and cherry trimmings.
8. Painted pole 14 feet high. Hulumanu globular, 15 inches in diameter; of
soft grey and white feathers. It belonged to Queen Emma and bears the label, —
“ Kalelehoano he inoa no ia no ka Moiwahine Ema, o keia na kahili opuu i ukali
i ko ka Moiwahine hoolewaia ana.” Cherry and terra cotta trimmings.
9. Kaulahoanalani, a metal-sheathed pole 9^ feet high; the alternate sections
to represent gold and silver. Hulumanu 40 inches high, 15 inches in diameter; of soft
22
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
grey and white feathers in a close cylinder with red feather base. Given by the half-
castes to the Prince of Hawaii, son of Kamehameha IV. Cherry and white trimmings.
10. Painted pole 14C2 feet high. Hulumanu 15 inches high and 30 inches in
diameter; of loose grey feathers mixed with the red tail feathers of the tropic-bird.
The name was Kamakaalaneo. Cherry and lavender trimmings.
11. Kanila spear 10 feet long. Hulumanu 42 inches high and 18 inches in
diameter; of peacock feathers. Blue and orange trimmings.
12. Painted pole 14^ feet high. Hulumanu 24 inches high, 30 inches in
diameter; of dark fluffy ostrich (?) feathers. The inscription is, — “ Kaleoaloha, he
makana wale ia mai ka hulu ; he inoa keia mawaena o ke alii a me kona haku
kahili.” Figured purple and plain orange base, purple and orange trimmings.
13. Ash pole 11 feet high. Hulumanu 30 inches high, 18 inches in diameter;
of black 00 feathers. “ Kumaka he inoa ia o kona kupunawahine oia ka makuahine
o Kamalalawalu moi o Maui.” Buff and black trimmings.
14. Painted pole 14 feet high. Hulumanu 24 inches high, 18 inches in diam¬
eter; of black 00 feathers.
15. Pole wound spirally with blue and white, 10 feet high. Hulumanu 30
inches high, 10 inches in diameter; of white feathers. Made by H. R. H. Liliuokalani
for the Princess Pauahi’s funeral. Pale blue trimmings.
16. Heavy kauila pole 14 feet high. Hulumanu 30 inches high, and 24 inches
in diameter; of large feathers dyed red. “ Leleoili he inoa keia no Kekelaokalani ko ka
Moiwahine makuahine; he elua laua nei ma keia inoa.” Orange and cherry trimmings.
17. Ash pole 10 feet high (cut down). Hulumanu 30 inches high, 26 inches
in diameter; of iwa (Frigate-bird) feathers from the guano islands. H. R. H. Ruta
Keelikolani. Cherry and orange trimmings.
18. Pole of inlaid native woods 13 feet high. Hulumanu 36 inches high, 34
inches in diameter; of tail feathers of the Phaethon rubricanda. As there are but two
feathers in the tail many hundred birds must have contributed to this kahili. Princess
Pauahi. Cherry and white trimmings.
19. Tortoise-shell and ivory pole, slender and only 8 feet high. Hulumanu
24 inches high, 24 inches diameter; of yellow 00 feathers; with its mate, No. 22,
perhaps the most brilliant in the collection. H. R. H. Princess Victoria Kamamalu.
Blue and yellow trimmings to a black feather base.
20. Kauila spear, turned, 12 feet long. Hulumanu 38 inches high, 36 inches
in diameter; yellow 00 feathers and red tail feathers of the tropic-bird; black feather
base. As the tail feathers project 6-8 inches beyond the cjdinder of 00 feathers they
are often neatly spliced to eke out the length. Black and orange trimmings.
21. Ash pole 12 feet high. Hulumanu 30 inches high, 26 inches in diameter;
of large white feathers. Made for Mrs. Bishop’s funeral. Fight blue and white trim¬
mings.
LIST OF LARGE KAHILIS.
23
22. Tortoise-shell and ivory pole 12 feet high. Hulumanu 38 inches high and
36 inches in diameter; of yellow 00 and the red tail feathers of the tropic bird; black
feather base. Named Mainland Mate to No. 20. Black and orange trimmings.
23. Pole of native inlaid woods 13 feet high. Hulumanu 36 inches high, 34
inches in diameter; of the red tail feathers of the tropic-bird. Mate to No. 18. Cherry
and white trimmings.
24. Tortoise-shell and human bone pole 7 feet high. There are 12 pieces of
bone representing that number of chiefs of renown, and the humit or principal bone is
the left shin bone of Kaneoneo, chief of Kanai. Hulumanu 24 inches high and 12
inches in diameter; grey, white-tipped feathers of the koae; black feather base. Black
and white trimmings. See Fig. 3, p. 7.
25. Stained wood pole 14 feet high. Hulumanu 30 inches high and 24 inches
in diameter; of large feathers dyed red. Mate to No. 16.
26. Tortoise-shell pole gl/2 feet high. Hulumanu very old, 24 inches high, 12
inches in diameter; of red and yellow feathers (00 and iiwi), and black base. Black
and orange trimmings.
27. Painted pole 14 feet high. Hulumanu 36 inches high, 22 inches in diameter;
of black 00 feathers. “ Kekuaipoiwa he inoa keia o ke kupunawahine oia ka makua-
hine o Kamehameha a me Keliimaikai.”
28. Ash pole 11 feet high. Hulumanu 36 inches high, 30 inches in diameter;
of peacock feathers. Princess Pauahi. Pink and yellow trimmings.
29. Painted pole 14^ feet high. Hulumanu 15 inches high and 30 inches in
diameter; of loose grey feathers with red tail feathers of the tropic-bird. Mate to No. 10.
30. Tortoise-shell and ivory pole 9*^ feet high. Hulumanu 50 inches high,
22 inches in diameter; of black ostrich feathers, grey and white tropic -bird base.
Black and white trimmings.
31. Painted pole 14 feet high. Hulumanu 12 inches high, 24 inches in diam¬
eter; of fluffy ostrich feathers. Mate to No. 12.
32. Tortoise-shell and ivory pole 10 feet high. Hulumanu 27 inches high, 12
inches in diameter; of red apapane feathers with base of grey and white tropic-bird
feathers. Cherry and white trimmings.
33. Painted pole 14 feet high. Hulumanu 10 inches high, 12 inches in diam¬
eter; grey and white feathers in globular form. Mate to No. 8.
34. Koa pole 11 feet high. Hulumanu in globular form 18 inches in diameter;
of duck feathers dyed red. Tight blue and white trimmings.
35. Painted pole 14 feet high. Hulumanu 28 inches high, 24 inches in diam¬
eter; of grey tropic-bird and green-black iwa feathers. “ Keaka he inoa keia no kona
kupuna a o ka hooholo loa ana o Keakamaha, a ua hea ia i keia kahili.” Purple and
white trimmings.
36. Koa pole, turned, 10 feet high. Hulumanu 6 inches high, 24 inches in
24
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
diameter; of small stiff black and white feathers. Princess Panahi. Pale blue, pur¬
ple and white trimmings.
37. Painted pole 14 feet high, with the imposing name Kalanikaumakamana.
Hulumanu 15 inches high and 30 inches in diameter; of blue peacock feathers.
Purple and yellow trimmings.
38. Koa pole, turned, 10 feet high. Hulumanu 8
inches high, 33 inches in diameter; of peacock feathers.
Pink silk base, cherry and yellow trimmings.
39. Painted pole 13 feet high. Hulumanu 36 inches
high, 24 inches in diameter; of black iwa feathers. “Kawao
he inoa ia o kekahi kupuna ona; oia ke alii i ana maia i na
Orange and black trimmings.
40-43. Kauila poles, 9^ feet high. Hulumanu 24
inches high and wide ; of duck feathers dyed red. These four
kahilis are inscribed as follows: “Pilialoha o na kahili pili
eha keia ma ka aoao o ka pahu o Kekelaokalani i kona
hoolewa ia ana, a oia no 11a pili o ka pahu o ko ka Moi-
wahine hoolewa ia ana.” Cherry ribbons are attached.
From the inscription it is seen that these four kahilis of dyed
red feathers which were imported in quantity for hat orna¬
ments, stood at the four corners of the stand on which
reposed the remains of the mother of Queen Emma,
Fanny Young. And when Emma, the grand-daughter of
pig. 15. kahili or John Young, an English seaman and friend of Kameha-
SUGAR CANE.
meha I., adopted daughter of Dr. T. C. B. Rooke an English
ph)rsician, wife of Alexander Liholiho (Kamehameha IV.), in turn was gathered to her
ancestors, these four emblems of royalty, — and also of the foreigh element so interwoven
in her life, were held by bearers over her mortal remains as they reposed in state in
the old Kawaiahao church.
That kahilis were not always made with feathers is shown by the interesting
pair in the Bishop Museum which were presented to Queen Emma January 2, 1883, as
a birthday offering from the women of Wailuku, Maui. Fig. 15.
44-45. Poles of plain wood 12 feet high. The body of irregular form, made
from the tips of sugar cane. See the one on the extreme right in the group of
kahilis. Fig. 8, p. 15.
The tops of these interesting kahilis are shown more clearly in Fig. 15, where they
remind one of the results of topiarian art seen formerly in old English gardens. The
makaainana kona kupapau a puni na moku o Maui ; he alii
aloha oia i na makaainana, a he aloha na makaainana iaia.”
SMALL KAHILIS.
25
measurements given are approximate, as the kahilis are enclosed in sealed cases, but
they are nearly correct. Notice is taken of the unornamental trimmings, but these
are not the same the kahilis wore at their last public appearance, for the}'’ were
redecorated by native women immediately before they were brought to their present
cases and the Director is not responsible for the strange effects presented.
A kahili handle | B. M. 117 | is shown in Fig. 3. It is made of tortoise-shell and
human bone (those of Kaneoneo, Kalanikupule, Kaiana and other chiefs who perished
in the battle of Nuuanu in 1795), was given b}^ Paki to Gorham D. Gilman many
years ago, and b}^ him to the Bishop Museum. Many other handles of tortoise-shell
and ivory are in the Museum collection and some of them are doubtless handles of
those kahilis described b}^ the Rev. C. S. Stewart in the account of Kamamalu’s
pageant just quoted.
No attempt is made to describe the many small kahilis in this Museum; speci¬
mens are found in most museums ; and here, while they are in great number and variety,
and often of considerable beauty, they are generally quite modern and made of foreign
feathers. Sufficient illustration is given in Figs. 8 and 16, and Plate IV.
FIG. 16. SMALL KAHILIS.
FEATHER LEIS.
A lei was a very primitive form of personal decoration. Among the Hawaiians
the favorite form was a necklace of the fragrant fruits of the screw pine, — the Icihala
“he leihala oe ma ka ai o ka poe naauao — thou art a hala necklace about the neck of
the wise,” well expressed the native estimation of this ornament. When made of
feathers the name could hardly be translated necklace, for the lei of feathers was as
often worn in the hair and about the head as about the neck : or the longer ones were
thrown over the shoulder precisely as the long strings of flowers called lei at the present
day are usually worn. It is best then to adopt the
Hawaiian word without “doing it into English.”
No feather work required less labor or
skill than tying feathers around a core (usually
of several strings of olona or, in modern times,
of cotton or woolen cord), but unless the work
was thoroughly done there was danger of disso¬
lution, and in case the lei came apart in windy
weather the constituent feathers might be harder
to retrieve than were the gold beads of our great¬
grandmothers when the retaining string acci-
The illustration, Fig. 17, will show how
the feathers were tied (J, taku ), and while the
result was rather stiff, there was ample opportunity for display of taste in the ar¬
rangement of feathers both in colors and size. The long feathers, such as were used
in cloaks and capes were sometimes used, but generally the smaller feathers were re¬
served for this purpose. Large feathers made a very hot ornament ; several strands
of a smaller diameter were cooler. When not in use the joint of a bambu made a con¬
venient and safe receptacle. Leis of mamo and 00 are highly valued at the present day.
A superb one of mamo, an heirloom of the Kamehainehas [ B. M. No. 2800] is valued at
$1000, and another of 00 quite as large | B. M. No. 2801 ] is believed to be worth $800.
Small ones of 00 not more than three-quarters of an inch in diameter and long enough
to go around the neck (18 to 20 inches long) are now valued at more than $200. Of
these smaller ones the leis of malvaceous flowers (Si da fallax ) strung and sold in the
streets of Honolulu are, so far as color goes, a very good imitation.
The flat bands of peacock or pheasant, or even of dyed feathers, are of course
modern, often poorly made by sewing the feathers to a strip of cotton cloth, and used
by natives and others for hat bands.
( 26)
dentally parted.
FIG. 17. THE GROWING END OF
A LEI.
FEATHER LEIS.
27
The true feather leis are generally of uniform cylindrical section and either
monochromatic (especially in the case of the more costly feathers) or made up of alter¬
nating bands or spirals of mixed colors. In some cases leis have longer feathers
inserted at regular intervals giving a pleasing variety of form. Figs. 18 and 19 will
show some of the leis in this Museum.
FIG. 18. HAWAIIAN FEATHER LEIS.
FIST OF FEATHER LEIS IN THE BISHOP MUSEUM.
[The numbers are those the specimens bear in the Museum Catalogue.]
2800. Mamo feathers of the choicest quality ; made from three ancient leis be¬
longing to the Kamehameha family ; 3 inches in diameter, 24 inches long.
2801. Oo feathers, large and of brilliant yellow. While the property of the
Government it was sent to an exposition in Paris and there ruined by the upsetting of
a bottle of ink; the stains cannot be removed by any ordinary washing. This lei is
with the preceding the largest I have seen either in museums or private hands;
24 inches long.
2802. Mamo under feathers, medium size, downy; 22 inches long.
2803. Mamo of even size; 24 inches long.
28
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
2804.
2805.
2806.
2807.
2808.
2809.
2810.
2818.
2819.
2820.
2821.
2822.
2823.
Mamo, small ; three-quarters of an inch by 20 inches long.
Mamo, medium size with long narrow inserts; 22 inches long.
Mamo, similar to the last; 25 inches long.
Mamo, of medium size; 21 inches long.
Apparently dyed to imitate mamo; 18 inches long.
Mamo, close and stiff, few long exserts; 19 inches long.
Mamo, with three short spirals of black 00 and apapane; very elegant;
21 inches long.
2811. Mamo and iiwi, narrow spiral; 26 inches long.
2812. Oo and apapane in narrow spirals; 23 inches long.
2813. Mamo and iiwi, three sections of each, medium size; 19 inches long.
2814. Oo and apapane, four sections each; 21 inches long.
2815. Mamo and 011, six sections each, orange and dark green; 17 inches long.
2816. Mamo and black 00, five sections each, with long exserts, elegant;
24 inches long.
2817. f Oo, long feathers; 20 inches long.
Oo, mate to the last; 19 inches long.
Oo and trimmed green feathers (?), three sections of each; 25 inches long.
Like the last; 23 inches long.
Yellow, dyed, with long crimson exserts, medium size; 24 inches long.
Mamo and ou, three sections of each; 23 inches long.
Mamo and 00, three sections each ; 24 inches long.
2824. ( Oo and ou (pauku), three sections of each; 25 inches long.
2825. \ Mate to the last, but 23 inches long.
2826. In sections arranged mamo, ou, mamo, apapane, mamo, ou ; 24 inches long.
2827. Oo and apapane, three sedlions each; 19 inches long.
2828. | Oo and iiwi, three sections each; 17 inches long.
2829. \ Mate to the last, but 20 inches long.
2830. Oo and iiwi; 23 inches long.
2831. Mamo and iiwi, fifteen sections each; 24 inches long.
2832. Mamo and iiwi, sixteen sections each; 23 inches long.
2833. Oo and iiwi, sixteen sedlions each; 24 inches long.
2834. f Oo and apapane, four sedlions each, very small and stiff; 21 inches long.
2835. I Mate to the last, but 23 inches long.
Three crimson and three green (dyed?) sections, long open feathers;
23 inches long.
Three green, two crimson sections (unfinished), mate to the last!
15 inches long.
6727. Oo and iiwi, three sections; 24 inches long.
2836 r
2837
MODEL OF ANUU.
29
6728. Mamo, long open feathers with a few tinged with black; 23 inches long.
6729. Mamo and apapane, four sections each with long exserts ; 21 inches long.
It will be noticed in this list that leis are often made in pairs, but one slightly
longer than the other, the longer one being twisted around the other when worn in
the hair.
FIG. 19. HAWAIIAN FEATHER EEIS.
TEMPLE ORACLE: ANUU.
A MOST interesting relic of Captain Cook’s visit to Kealakekua and his deifica¬
tion there is preserved with other objects from, that voyage in the Hofmuseum at
Vienna, where Dr. Heger kindly allowed me to examine it. Cook, it will be remem¬
bered, was regarded by the Hawaiians as superhuman and the apokatastasis of Lono,
a deified chief of former days. The account of his worship is given at length in
Cook’s Voyages, and the rather nauseating details need not be repeated here. The
heiau or temple in which the Cook apotheosis took place is still extant, although ruinous,
but the frail edifice that in outer appearance took the place of a church steeple has of
course disappeared; and although I have often searched on this and other heiaus for
traces of its location the general surface of all these is now so disturbed that no signs
remain. Fortunately Cook gives some details both as to structure and appearance and
his account of the first landing on Kauai may be quoted :
“As we ranged down the coast from the East, in the ships, we had observed at every village
one or more elevated white objeCts, like pyramids or rather obelisks : and one of these which I
guessed to be at least fifty feet high, was very conspicuous from the ships’ anchoring station, and
seemed to be at no great distance up this valley [Waimea]. To have a nearer inspection of it was
the principal object of my walk. Our guide perfectly understood that we wished to be conducted to
it, but it happened to be so placed that we could not get at it, being separated from us by the pool of
water, However there being another of the same kind within our reach about half a mile off, upon
30
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
our side of the valley, we set out to visit that. The moment we got to it we saw that it stood in a
burying ground or morai : the resemblance of which in many respedls to those we were so well ac¬
quainted with at other islands in this ocean, and particularly Otaheite [Tahiti], could not but strike
us, and we also soon found that the several parts that compose it were called by the same names. It
was an oblong space, of considerable extent, surrounded by a wall of stone about four feet high. The
space enclosed was loosely paved with smaller stones ; and at one end of it stood what I called the
pyramid, but in the language of the island, is named hanananoo \_he anuu~\, which appeared evidently
to be an exact model of the larger one observed by us from the ships.
It was about four feet square at the base and about twenty feet
high. The four sides were composed of small poles interwoven
with twigs and branches, thus forming an indifferent wickerwork
hollow or open within from bottom to top. It seemed to be in rather
a ruinous state, but there were sufficient remaining marks to show
that it had originally been covered with a thin light gray cloth [kapa]
which these people, it would seem, consecrate to religious purposes;
as we could see a good deal of it hanging in different parts of the
morai, and some of it had been, forced upon me when I first landed.
On each side of the pyramid were long pieces of wickerwork.” 18
This obelisk-like structure was an important part of
all large heiaus, although not found in small private temples
dedicated to personal gods, and was generally built of
bambu to a height of twenty feet or more and covered with
kapa. Its plan was redtangle but not a square. A single
door in one of the longer sides, closed with a curtain, admitted
the priest or chief to the interior where the voice of the god
of the temple (luakini) was supposed to be audible. Cook
entered one of these and with the priest climbed some dis¬
tance up the frail staging. The priests of Cook’s heiau
(at Kealakekua on Hawaii) were well-to-do and influential
men, were his friends to the last, although he destroyed their
houses and goods and wantonly pillaged the temple, — in his
desire for firewood removing the sacred fence, — and it is
probable that they had made for him this unique model of
We have no other history of this model before it arrived in
Europe. It was sold with other of the curiosities brought home by the expedition and
passed to Austria, finally finding a home in the beautiful Hofmuseum.
It is neatly made of basket work covered with red feathers of the iiwi and trim¬
FIG. 20.
MODEL OF
ANUU.
AN
the abode of the god-head.
med on the vertical edges with the yellow 00. The doorway on one of the wider sides
is eased with tortoise-shell to which time has given the coloration of rusty iron. The
total height is twenty-three and a half inches. In the pidture given by Cook’s artist,
Waber, of a temple on Kauai the frame of a similar stnidture is shown. As the cov¬
ering was very perishable, it is probable that it was renewed whenever the oracle was con¬
sulted, generally at the time of human sacrifices. With the Hawaiian collection at Vienna
is a low-crowned, broad-brimmed hat of European form, once covered with feathers.
18 Cook's Third Voyage, 1784: II., 200.
KUKAILIMOKU.
FIG. 21. KU
KAILIMOKU.
The Polynesian trinity of Kane, Kn and Lono, worshipped with various
attributes and together or individually, developed on the Hawaiian Group
a number of variations from the Polynesian originals (as indeed was the
ease elsewhere), and from Ku was derived (not descended) the war-like
deity especially honored by the great Umi/9 and later by Kamehameha
who in other things as in parity of religion resembled his renowned prede¬
cessor. One recalls with Mr. Ellis20 that Taire [ Kaili] was a famous war
god of Tahiti. Kuakimotumotu is the Maori name of a cluster of stars
placed on the breast of Rangi [ Lani, the heavens | by his son Tane
[ Kane]. Kamehameha was a religious man and from his war-like youth
to the last scenes in his very adtive life Kukailimoku was the god to whom due rites
were always paid. Hence it is not surprising that a number of effigies of this god,
made in the most costly way known to the Hawaiians, — of feather work — should have
survived the general destruction of idols after the accession of Riholiho.
It can hardly be out of place to trace briefly the conquest of the Group since
Kukailimoku was considered the diredting deity. On the death of Kalaniopuu, King
of Hawaii at the time of Cook’s visit, the kingdom was left to Kiwalao, his son by
Kalola, and to his foster son Kamehameha jointly, although the son was to be moi in
chief. This was at the beginning of 1782 and before the year was half gone Kameha¬
meha had slain his foster brother in the battle of Mokuohai. When Cook landed
Kalaniopuu was king of all Hawaii and of East Maui, Kahekili of West Maui, Kuma-
koa of Molokai, Keliiaa of Lanai, Kahahana of Oahu, and Keawe of Kauai. By the
death of Kiwalao Kamehameha became nominal king of Hawaii, but by this time
Kahekili had extended his power all over Maui, Lanai, Molokai and Oahu, and his
brother Kaeo was king of Kauai. All this change was not effedted without great loss
of life, and part of the great decrease of population noticed by Vancouver in the four¬
teen years since his visit as sub-officer of Cook was due to these wars, which if not
always very bloody certainly at times kept the average a high one. After the con¬
quest of Oahu Kahekili avenged a conspiracy against his rule by so bloody a punish¬
ment that the Ka-po-luku or night of slaughter is said to have choked with the bodies
of the slain the stream of Niuhelewai, just west of Honolulu ; and at Moanalua a house
was built of the bones of the vidlims. Another terrible slaughter was at the hill of Kau-
wiki in Hana, East Maui, the result of which was to make Kahekili master of all Maui.
When Kamehameha heard of the capture of East Maui he at once prepared to
reconquer it and colledted a considerable fleet of canoes at Kamilo in sight of the oppo-
•9 Umi was the son ol Liloa, King of Hawaii. For his romantic Contributions of a venerable savage to the ancient history of the Hawaiian
story see Recits d'un Vieux Saui’age pour servir a I’hisloire ancienne de Islands ; Boston , 1868 : by the present author,
Hawaii, par Jules Remy ; or a translation of the same work entitled 20 Polynesian Resear ches , I., 276.
(31)
32
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORN.
site shore and under the shadow of Haleakala, the “ House of the Sun,” that vast vol¬
cano that forms East Maui. To the invader Kahekili sent his younger brother Alapai
with this remarkable message: “Say to him ‘wait until the black kapa [shroud] cover
me and my funeral rites shall be performed then come and receive your kingdom with¬
out the peril of war’ — for indeed he is my son and
from me he received his name after that of my
elder brother.”21
Even Hawaii was not to become one king¬
dom without many a struggle. Keawemauhili,
uncle of Kiwalao, had been the chief adviser in the
course which led
to the disaffec¬
tion and death
of his nephew,
and after that
event he held
court in the dis¬
trict of Hilo,
while Keoua-
kuahuula, half-
brother of Kiwa¬
lao, ruled Kau,
both disputing
the authority of
Kamehameha.
A long and
bloody war resulted in the submission of the king of
Hilo who assisted Kamehameha in his attack on Ka¬
hekili, a proceeding which roused the ire of Keoua who
immediately marched against his former ally and
killed him in the battle of Alae. In the year 1790
Kamehameha invaded Maui and defeated Kalaniku-
pule, son of Kahekili with great slaughter in the battle of Iao. While this was going on
in Maui, Keoua, hot with the victory over Keawemauhili, marched into the district of
Hamakua, Kamehameha’s territory. This hastened the return of Kamehameha and
after several battles, in which gunpowder was used on both sides, Keoua retreated to Hilo.
While marching thence to renew the contest his army passing by the volcano of Kilauea
was partly destroyed by the last explosive eruption recorded from that crater.22
21 It is generally believed that Keouakalanikupuapaikalaninui, 22 For a full account of that eruption and the destruction of Keoua’s
nephew of Alapainui, was the father of Kamehameha, but of this no forces see Notes on the Volcanoes of the Hawaiian Islands : With a His_
man can know. The practice of adoption still farther complicated lory of theii various Eruptions. By William T. Brigham, Boston, 1868 ,
genealogies, in the Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural History , I., 404.
FIG. 22.
KIJKAILIMOKU.
33
In the meantime Kamehameha was residing at Kawaihae and a priestly oracle
had declared that a temple built on the hill Puuokohala in that place would avert the
perils of war and insure the final conquest of the group. The king built the heiau
called from the name of the hill, and as each part was finished bathed it with the blood
of many human sacrifices offered to Kukailimoku.23
From the dedication of this heiau his star was in the
ascendant.
Kahekili and his brother Keawe from Kauai
fought the naval battle of Kepuwahaulaula off the
coast of Hamakua, near Waimanu, and were decis¬
ively routed by Ka¬
mehameha. The
aged Kahekili re¬
treated to Oahu
where he died in
July, 1794, leaving
the remains of his
kingdom to his son
Kalanikupule. Be¬
fore the end of 1791
Keoua Kuahuula
was treacherously
slain at Kawaihae
by Keeaumokupa-
paiaaheahe and his
body offered on the
altar of Puukohala
to Kukailimoku. After more than nine years of
almost constant warfare Kamehameha was at last in
fact king of Hawaii.
In the spring of 1795 Kamehameha invaded
Oahu and in the battle of Nuuanu defeated Kalani¬
kupule and his allies : the king fled to the mountains
but was captured and his body offered to Kukailimoku. Kaiana, who had attained some
prominence by a voyage to China with Captain Meares, and who had deserted Kameha-
meha while on this expedition to Oahu, was also slain, and the bones of these two warriors
are believed to be among those decorating the kahili handles now in the Bishop Museum.
Fig. 3, p. 7. In 1800 Kaumualii, king of Kauai, came to Kamehameha at Waikiki and
fig. 25.
FIG. 24.
23 For a good account of the building of this last great temple of migrations , and chc Ancient History of the Hawaiian people to the times
the old worship, and the same method was always used, so far as we of Ktimehameha /. By Abraham Fornander. Iyondon, 1880. II., 327.
are informed, see An Account of the Polynesian Race , its origin and
Memoirs II. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 1. — 3.
34
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORN.
arranged for the posthumous cession of his kingdom, and thus the sovereignty of the
whole group came to the foster son of Kalaniopuu. After suppressing an insurrection
on Hawaii peace came at last to the chief, and he devoted his energies to promoting the
comfort of his people : he was also friendly to foreigners and protected their commerce.
Among his orders was one to the bird-catchers : “When you take a bird do not strangle
it, but having plucked the few feathers for which it was sought, set it free that others
may grow in their place.” They inquired, “Who will possess the bird set free? You
are an old man.” He added, “My sons will possess
the birds hereafter.” 24
As death drew near and the priests could not
heal the increasing infirmity of the king, a special
house was built for Kukailimoku at Kailua, on Ha¬
waii, where the king was living at the time, and
human sacrifices were proposed, but the dying king
declared, “The men are sacred to the king” (his son
Liholiho). And so the head of network covered with
red feathers which had been his deity, and the object
of all his prayers and offering, was held to still as
Kamehameha went to his grave. There is little
doubt that the image once in the cabinet of the
American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Mis¬
sions in Boston, and now in the Bishop Museum
[ No. 7855 1 was the particular one to which the
dying king turned for unavailing help. Certainly
those carried away by Cook’s officers and by Van¬
couver, and now in London and Vienna could not
have been, and it is improbable that the idol of the
founder of the family would have been destroyed in
the general destruction of the temples and gods in the
beginning of the reign of Liholiho.
And how is it that we have still extant a number of these feather-covered heads
of varied form and more or less repulsive features ? I do not know that there are more
than those now stored in the museums of Vienna, London and Honolulu, but it is
quite possible that others were hidden in caves at the time of the overthrow of the an¬
cient Hawaiian religious system, as tradition claims. It must be remembered that
although to the present generation Kukailimoku is known as Kamehameha’s war-god,
the deity had been the object of an ancient cult,25 and many images ma}^ have been made
in various parts of Hawaii, and the process of manufacture, as will be seen below, lent
2 4 History of the Sandwich Islands. By Sheldon Dibble. I,ahaina- Many authorities claim that this god idea was not anterior to the time
luna, 1849; p. 75. of Umi, and was naturally adopted by the ambitious young Kameha-
25 Kukaili-moku in Hawaiian means Ku that seizes fhe islands. meha as a suitable promotor of his designs.
FIG. 26.
KUK AILIMOKU.
35
itself readily to individual variation. How did Cook and Vancouver obtain possession
of these images ? In Cook’s case it is not improbable that his supposed divinity would
influence the aged king Kalaniopuu to present an image of a brother god; or it is not
at all inconsistent with known facts that the image may have been stolen, for the
morality of those times seemed to permit “the spoiling of the Egyptians” while abusing
the latter as arrant thieves. This image, now at Vienna, is certainly the most kindly
looking of its congeners, not at all war-like or repulsive.
When Vancouver returned to Hawaii Kalaniopuu had gone to his long rest and
the young Kamehameha was reigning over the por¬
tion of the island at which he touched, and the wily
king may have been quite willing to have rival im¬
ages well out of the way; and certainly after Van¬
couver’s visit no more of these god-heads appeared,
while the particular one entrusted by the dying
Kalaniopuu to his foster son and successor in the
priestly office was more assiduously worshipped than
ever. Kamehameha’s god was removed from vulgar
sight soon after Tiholiho’s defiance to the priesthood
and the kapu, and from the cave where it was hidden
it only emerged to go to the cabinet of the American
Board of Commissioners for foreign Missions. It is
unfortunate that so little is known of the personality
of these Hawaiian deities, but so great Avas the shame
for all these native customs instilled into the minds
of the early converts by the American missionaries
that it was almost impossible, even a generation ago,
to get details of worship or ritual from Hawaiians, —
they had made a business of forgetting; it was
uno mi ricordon to all questions in that direction. 1
I have frequently conversed with old Hawaiians, both
on Hawaii and on Molokai, who had been familiar with
the rites of the ancient cult, but they always shoved restraint when speaking of them.
They described the processions and positions of priests and idols, but passed over the
human sacrifices briefly.
The strudlure of these peculiar images is simple. A wickerwork, neatly made
of the long and very durable aerial roots of the ie-ie ( Frcycinctici arborea ) in such a way
as to show the general form and features, is strongly braced by hoops or ribs Avithin, and
then covered with a tightly fitting net of olona to which feathers were attached, as in
the feather cloaks which will be described later. Red iiwi was the basis to Avhieh yellow
and black oo was added for embellishment or to demark features. In some cases human
FIG. 27.
36
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
hair crowned the head, in others the mahiole or crest. The eyes were of pearl shell,
and in those in the Bishop Museum are attached in two ways by carved knobs of dark
wood representing pupils. Fig. 29. In one (a) the stem of the knob is perforated by
conical holes whose apices meet, and through the hole thus formed a cord of coconut fibre
makes fast the whole pseudo optical device. In the other (b) the end of the stem is
left somewhat larger than the rest to hold in a cord of siunet. One or the other of these
methods prevail, I believe in all cases, except the one called Vancouver’s, Fig. 24, where
there is no pupil. The teeth were those of dogs saved from the priestly feasts. Kars
were represented by small patches of black or yellow, sometimes by both colors united.
These gods were carried in battle on kauila
poles, most of them having no other sufficient sup¬
port, and being also too small to be placed over the
head of a priest, as has been suggested.26 An inspec¬
tion of the illustrations will make this plain.
The details of the worship, so far as they are
known, need not be entered into here; but it may be
stated that human sacrifices
were a sad adjunct to all im¬
portant rites. Many hun¬
dred victims are reported,
although the true number
cannot now be determined.
I am inclined to connect
with the worship of Kuka-
ilimoku the two curious mats now in the British
Museum and shown in PI. VI. I cannot claim any
satisfactory authority for the opinion, but I have
endeavored to find some use for these elaborate mat¬
like objedts, on the supposition that they are of
Hawaiian origin, and cannot find that any of the
suggested uses are allowable, whether dress, orna¬
ment or armor, standard or insignia. They are flat, stiff, not very solidly bound to¬
gether, and the patterns quite unlike those used in the feather cloaks: there are, more¬
over, no signs of attaching cords or braids by which they might be joined to other
objeCts. Now it was the custom in worship to place the image of a god, unless of too
large size, on a mat of pandanus covered with red kapa, and on the same mat the offer¬
ings were made. This custom has been retained to the present day in the poor rem¬
nants of heathen worship that appear sporadically among the people. We have in the
In a recent publication on Hawaiian feather work it has been were not such as would require masks of any kind, least of all those
stated that the feather-covered heads are “dancing- masks.” I do with repulsive features. The heads in question could not have been
not know any authority for the statement. The Hawaiian dances used for any such purpose.
FIG. 28.
LIS 7 OF K UK AIL 7MOKU.
37
Bishop Museum all the paraphernalia of an offering to a rude stone god, and the mat
is covered with Turkey-red cotton, on one end of which the god stands flanked by a
bottle of whiskey and one of gin, while offerings of awa root with fern and dracaena
leaves are before him, and intermingled are various ancient relics to bring to the mod¬
ern kahuna all the influence or mana of the ancient days. Is it unreasonable to sup¬
pose that a god, distinguished by the material always used in his construction, should
be placed on a mat of the same costly feather work, either when deposited in the
sanCtuary or when used as the object of prayers and supplications ? Until I can see
some better use for these mats I must be allowed to appropriate them to the worship
of Kukailimoku.
The two mats are made of very short red, yellow and black feathers attached to
rods which are bound together not unlike the structure of some of the helmets. The
ornamentation is in transverse bands of various widths, either plain or elaborately
figured as may best be seen in the photographs which Mr. H. Oldland, of the British
Museum has kindly made for me. The loose cords attached rather irregularly to each
end are not of sufficient strength to be used as fastenings. The length of the larger
one is 2 2/4 inches, the breadth 14^ inches; while the other is 22 inches long and
12 inches wide. The design seems much more Mexican than Hawaiian.
LIST OF KUKAILIMOKU.
1. First I place the probable god of Kamehameha. This is 27 inches high over
all, while the crest is UA inches, and the diameter of the base of neck 9 inches; weight,
3 lbs. 1 oz. The frame is a compact basket work of ie-ie roots made in one piece and
strengthened by four hoops. This is closely covered with a net of olona, to which are
attached red feathers of the iiwi, except on the top of the crest and the base of the neck,
which are yellow 00, and the eyebrows, nostrils and two small square spots two inches
behind the eyes (intended to mark ears), which are black 00. It is in good preserva¬
tion except at the base of the neck. The dog teeth number 94, — 49 in the upper jaw
and 45 in the lower; the open space between is filled by a red feather tongue. The
teeth are broken at the base and bound in place by a firm cord about the middle, but
the points are intact. This head was hidden in a cave in Kona for many years, and at
last as its hold on the superstition of its kahu or keeper weakened under the influence
of the new religion, it was brought as an offering to the missionary of the station, and
through him transferred in 1850 to the museum of the American Board of Commis¬
sioners for Foreign Missions in Boston : from this collection it came to the Bishop
Museum by purchase. The eyes are thick pieces of pearl shell pierced through the
middle where a round knob of black wood is inserted in the manner shown in Fig.
29, b. Fig. 22, p. 32.
2. A smaller head, shown in Fig. 21, which was engraved from a photograph
taken by the author in 1865 when the idol was in the cabinet of Oahu College at
38
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
Punahou. It was then in fair condition, but now is greatly dilapidated. The height
is 22 inches. Instead of a crest there is a wig of human hair of a reddish tone, and
the mahiole is long and curly. The substructure is of the usual form and material,
and the olona net is now much torn and loosened from the wicker work ; while the
feathers, which were originally red, have mostly disappeared. The eyebrows were
black and the base of the neck yellow. Eyes as in
the previous description, but the pupil fastened in
in the way shown in Fig. 29, A. There are 74 dog
teeth, 40 in the upper and 34 in the lower jaw;
these are all filed at the points, or perhaps worn.
The base is broken and without trace of feathers.
Given to the Bishop Museum by the trustees of
Oahu College.
3. A head originally in the Cook collec¬
tion, now in the kairserlich -koniglich naturhis-
torische Hofmuseum at Vienna. Of all known
Kukailimoku this has the most benignant expres¬
sion, if such a quality can be predicated of an
object so removed from correct human form. It is
in good order and quite like No. 1 in construction.
Red, with yellow trimmings and black eyebrows.
Fig- 23.
4. A curious variation, Fig. 24, originally
in the collection of Mr. Geo. Goodman Hewitt,
surgeon’s first mate on Vancouver’s ship. It re¬
mained in the possession of his family until 1890,
when the collection of which it was a part was
purchased by the late Sir A. Wollaston Franks,
and by him presented to the British Museum. The frame is 39 inches high, covered
with neatly-fitting olona net, to which are attached in the usual way red iiwi for the
principal covering, the crest and base of neck being of the usual yellow 00. A yellow
and black square marks the place for the ears, and there is a narrow black line of 00
on each side of the curious projection beneath the crest. The right eye alone remains,
a crescent of pearl shell not perforated as in all the other examples, and so having no
black pupil, but now cracked across the middle. The teeth are from dogs, and there
G a very prominent Adam’s apple” on the long neck. Mr. Dalton, of the British
Museum, has given a colored figure of this curious variety.27
- Botes on an Ethnographical collection from the West Coast of in the British Museum. By O. M. Dalton Archives Internationales
.t orth America (.more especially California), Hawaii and Tahiti. D'Elhnographie, X., PI. XVI,
formed during the Voyage of Captain Vancouver-, '790-17%, and now
FIG. 30.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I
Plate VI,
FEATHER MATS IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM
LIST OF KUK AILIMOKU.
39
5. Head with human hair braided in the centre of the forehead. Red, with
broad, yellow base to the short neck. As may be seen in Fig. 26, it has a very ex¬
pressive countenance. Height, 24 inches. The eyes have very large pupils of wood.
British Museum.
6. Image with low forehead and very prominent black eyebrows; base of neck,
as usual, yellow. Height, 32 inches. Kyes very large, with wooden knobs; the pearl-
shell of the right eye is broken through the middle. British Museum. Fig. 25.
7. Very long, slim neck, adding greatly to the height (41 inches), and giving
a snake-like physiognomy. Yellow covers the crest and sides, extending to the neck.
British Museum. Fig. 28.
8. Long neck and extensive crest. Great development of the head immedi¬
ately under the crest accompanied by an atrophy of the lower portion. The eyes are
long and narrow pearl-shells, the right one in two portions. Covering mainly of red.
From the London Missionary Society; deposited in the British Museum. Fig. 27.
9. To these may be added the one figured in Cook’s Voyages, which differs
from any of the others in the hollow head and horizontal eye. It is not known what
became of this. It resembles No. 4. Fig. 30.
MAHIOLE OR HELMETS.
In every day life tlie ancient Hawaiian trusted to the protection of his thick,
coarse hair and wore no hat. When the conch-shell trumpet called to battle, however,
the chiefs donned a head-covering both ornamental and useful. While it was firm
and thick enough to resist a severe blow, it was remarkable for beauty of form. So
graceful were its lines that writers have likened it to the helmets of the Greeks and
wondered at the connection. Did the Hawaiians borrow the form from the Spaniards
or other Europeans? To this we must answer
decidedly no. Neither Spaniards nor other
Europeans wore Greek helmets at the time
when intercourse would have been possible; nor
is it probable that any of these voyagers knew
anything about Greek helmets. It would be
more reasonable to look in the opposite direc¬
tion, to New Guinea, where the forms of head¬
covering varied greatly it is true, but often pre¬
sented a form far more analagous to the Ha¬
waiian mahiole than anything we find on Greek
medals, coins or sculptures. Figure 31 will
show the connection. It came from the north¬
ern coast of New Ireland [ B. M 1664], a region
where many Polynesian colonies are found.
Dr. von Euschan has figured another from the
same locality in his interesting essay on the
influence of foreign art on African productions.28
Indeed caps with crests are common enough all over the world, but the old
Hawaiian had another excuse for the form of his head covering. It was a custom to
cut the hair close at the sides of the head leaving a ridge of stiff, erect hair, like a
mane on the top of the scalp, and this mane-like ridge was called mahiole , the same
name that was given to a helmet. Originally this personal decoration was a mark of
rank, but like all such exclusive tokens was in course of time seized by the aspiring
democracy. At the period when feather helmets were in vogue the mahiole was a token
of chieftainship, and if covered by any cap, the latter would repeat the token. Hence the
skullcap was supplemented by a ridge which often, as will be seen in the illustrations,
became an imposing crest. Cook and his companions were much impressed by the
beauty of this helmet and the accompanying feather cloak; the picture given in his
28 jremder Eivfluss m Afnka. Felix von I.uschan, aus We.slertnans Illustrierten Deutsehen Monatsheften , September , 1898.
( 40 )
FIG. 31.
FEATHER MAHIOLE OR HELMETS.
4i
Voyages, Fig- 32, shows well a good specimen, which, by the way, closely resembles
one now in the British Museum.
The structure was in general of wicker work made of le-ie or other material,
often beautifully plaited, as will be seen in the illustrations given. Over this was
neatly fitted a net of olona to which feathers were attached, usually red with crest of
yellow and lines of black or green. In many of the helmets that have survived this
FIG. 32. HAWAIIAN WARRIOR, COOK’S VOYAGE.
net has gone as well as the feathers, and no traces are left of the once splendid cover¬
ing. The remaining frame is so well made in many instances that I was once per¬
suaded that the specimens in question were never intended to be covered with feathers,
but I am now convinced that all were covered with feathers or human hair. In some
cases the crest is partly detached from the cap and held in place by spurs; and in several
the crest has been so modified that only a row of knobs remains: several of this latter
form are in European museums, but none have the feathers left; so I am unable to verify
my opinion that these knobs were really the base or support of feather plumes. It is
42
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORN.
remarkable that so many helmets remain, as they were not so easily preserved or
hidden from an enemy as were the feather cloaks, but it will be seen by the following
list that many are still preserved in museums, while doubtless some few are still in
private hands.
LIST OF HELMETS OR MAHIOLE.
i. Mahiole of Kaumualii, King of Kauai, who died May 26, 1822. This is the
only helmet whose former owner is definitely known, and it is in most perfect preserva¬
tion, in fact it is precisely in the same condition as when last worn. It was given, with two
feather capes (Nos. 14 and 78 of the list) to the Rev. Samuel Whitney, one of the first
company of American missionaries, by Kaumualii when he was taken a state prisoner
to Honolulu. Mr. Whitney, whose station was at Waimea, Kauai, was skilled in the
FIG. 33. FIG. 34. FIG. 35.
healing art and had been of considerable service to the king in that way, and the royal
prisoner, who supposed he was going to his death, expressed his acknowledgment by
this offering of what was perhaps his most valuable personal property". Preserved in
the Whitney home for half a century, it was sold on the death of Mrs. Whitney, in
1872, Hon. Chas. R. Bishop, then Minister of Foreign Affairs, purchasing it and giving
it to the Government Museum, from which collection it came to the Bishop Museum
after having been exhibited at the Paris Exposition in 1889, and in other places. The
wicker work is finely made and very substantial although light (it weighs 14 ounces);
the body and sides of the crest are covered with red iiwi feathers, the top of the crest
is of yellow 00, and there are small patches of black 00 on the front edge and a yellow
spot over each ear: these last do not show in the figure, Plate I., which was made by
Lowy in Vienna from a negative by the author. The extreme height, as shown in
the plate, is 15% inches; width, 6)4 inches, and depth 10 inches. Museum No. 959.
The feathers are attached diredtly to the frame without the usual nae.
LIST OF HELMETS.
43
2. Mahiole from the Vancouver collection given by the trustees of the British
Museum in exchange. Its form is quite different from the last, as may be seen in
Fig. 2, p. 5. Bands of red iiwi, green on and yellow 00, nearly obliterated by long
neglect, must have made this a very conspicuous ornament of some Hawaiian warrior.
The double plaited crest would have resisted a powerful blow. Height, 11 inches;
width, 7^4 inches; depth, 9 inches. Museum No. 958. The attachment of the feathers
is direCtly to rods, 011 one side of which they are bound much in the way feathers are
bound to leis. The frame of the helmet is as usual of ie-ie basket work, and to the top
of the crest no less than eighteen of the rods are fastened, while the sides of the crest
have twelve: on the body of the helmet the varying curvature is followed by long or
short rods. The succession of colors from the front is red, green, red, black, yellow.
A narrow border of black and yellow follows the edge.
FIG. 36. OUTLINES OF HELMETS IN THE BERLIN MUSEUM.
3. Mahiole from Cook’s collection, now in the k. k. naturhistorisehe Hofmu-
seum, Vienna: red, with yellow crest; few feathers remaining. The front of the crest
is set rather farther back than usual. Fig. 33.
4. Mahiole from the same collection and now in the same depositary. The
body is green and the crest red and yellow, although few feathers remain. Fig. 34.
5. Mahiole also from Cook collection and with the others at Vienna. No
feathers now remain, although originally it was covered in the manner of No. 2. The
disposition of the covering rods is shown in the illustration, Fig. 35.
6. Mahiole of red, except the yellow top of crest and a narrow black and yellow
line at the junCture of the body and crest and along the border. This helmet is rather
soiled, but in a good state of preservation. Nationalmuseet, den Kthnografiske Sain-
ling, Copenhagen. (“Fjerkappe og Hjoelm” on the label.) The statement in the
excellent handbook, which is in Danish, that the “Kongens Kappe var forabejdet alene
44
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
af gule Fjer,” — the King’s helmet is all of yellow feathers, — while those of the upper
chiefs are of red with a yellow border, is without foundation.
7. Mahiole of red, with the usual yellow crest, with one black stripe on the
right side at base of crest, and two on the left side.
Feathers mostly gone. The form is shown in A
of Fig. 36. Now in the museum fiir Volkerkunde,
Berlin.29
8. Mahiole with traces of feathers in the
same collection. Fig. 36, B. In both this and
the next the rod structure was used, and it is so
general that I am inclined to think that when the
net or nae was used it was because of a plentiful
supply of torn or otherwise disfigured capes.
9. Mahiole of the rod structure and traces
of feathers. Fig. 36, c. Also in the Berlin Museum.
10. Mahiole of most interesting structure,
but showing no traces of feathers at present. The
usual plaited
cap of ie-ie is
surmounted, in
place of the com-
FiG.
37. HELMET IN BERLIN
MUSEUM.
mon crest, by
FIG. 38.
Mr.
R. Etheridge,
Jr., the
seven neatly plaited projections like rude umbrellas
with tops some two inches across. These are shown
in Fig. 37, and I suppose them to have been the
base of plumes.
11. Mahiole without feathers; in the Cook
collection of the Australian Mu¬
seum in Sydney. This was in
the collection of relics of the
great explorer purchased by the
New South Wales Government
from the family of Cook. The
structure differs from those be¬
fore noted and is a braid in three
sections. A11 illustration, Fig.
38, I owe to the kindness of
distinguished Director of the Australian Museum.
FIG. 39.
12. Mahiole of the ordinary form; red, with yellow crest; feathers well pre-
29This and the three following have been figured by Dr. von l^usclian in FvemcLer Eitifluss in Afrika , already quoted, and from that
publication these outlines have been copied.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. X.
Plate VII.
HELMETS IN THE SPANISH NATIONAL MUSEUM
LIST OF HELMETS.
45
served. Given to Berne by Waber, the Bernese artist of Cook’s last voyage; now in
the Municipal Museum of that city.
13. Mahiole; black, with yellow crest, on a figure supposed to represent a
Hawaiian in the Musee d’Artillerie, Galerie d’Ethnographie at the Hotel des Invalides,
Paris. If I am rightly informed, this figure is a rlplique of one in the Jardin des
Plantes, but at my last visit to that wonderful collection the ethnological specimens
were being rearranged in new galleries and I was unable to see them.
14. Mahiole supposed to be in the Jardin des Plantes.
15. Mahiole without feathers, but with five pins of the same class as
already seen in No. 10. This is figured in the Voyage of F'reycinet,30 Plate 90.
Guimard. P'ig. 39.
16. Mahiole of red feathers, with a yellow crest raised from the cap by
interlacing arms. Attributed to Legoarand; now in the Musee de Marine at the
Louvre, Paris.
17. Mahiole of similar structure to the last.
18. Mahiole figured in Freycinet, PI. 90.
19. Mahiole without feathers, but woven in a very neat and ornamental man¬
ner, quite as if no feathers were to cover it. This is in the Army and Navy Museum
in the old Whitehall Palace in London, where I was kindly allowed to examine and
photograph it. In the character of the weaving it differs from any I have seen.
20. Mahiole with a detached crest supported on four arms and joined to the cap
at the base. The first and third arms are of different finish from the others, which
with the cap and crest were covered with feathers on rods : none are now visible.
This, with the four following, is in the Museo Arqueologieo Nacional at Madrid, and
shown in PI. VII., Fig. 1, which I have copied, with correction of positions (which
were all incorrect in the original plate) from a sheet sent me by Stewart Culin, Esq.,
of Philadelphia.
21. Mahiole of ordinary form, partly covered with red, black and yellow
feathers. Fig. 2, PI. VII. Madrid.
22. Mahiole with heavy crest and constructed with ornamented braid, but
showing (in the plate) no signs of feathers. On the sides of the crest are three black
and yellow stripes, and on the cap six of similar braid. Fig. 5, PI. VII. Madrid.
23. Mahiole of ordinary form; once covered, apparently, with red feathers on
net work. Fig. 3, PI. VII. Madrid.
24. Mahiole with an immense, high and projecting crest. The cap is covered
with the rod struClure, while the crest seems to have been covered with feathers at¬
tached to a net. As I have not been able to examine personally any of these helmets
in the Spanish museum, I am dependent on the drawings of Senor Teruel, which,
although apparently exact, do not indicate color. Fig. 4, PI. VII. Madrid.
3° Fovaye autout du monde fait par ordre du Rui sur les corvettes de S. M. Uranie et ta Physicienne , pendant les armies, iSiy-iS20. Par. M.
Louis de Freycinet.
46
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
25. Mahiole of ordinary form, but with curious projections over the ears not
seen in any other. No feathers left. Height, 13 inches; depth, 8 inches. From the
Vancouver collection now in the British Museum. Fig. 40, a.
26. Mahiole of rather coarse wicker work, with detached crest supported by
five round, plaited bars. The ear holes are angular instead of, as usual, rounded. No
feathers. Height, 18 inches; depth, 12 inches. Vancouver collection, British Museum.
Fig. 40, b.
a b c
FIG. 40. HELMETS IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM.
27. Mahiole of ordinary form and close woven structure. Height, 13 inches;
depth, 12 inches. Vancouver collection, British Museum. Fig. 40, c.
28. Mahiole in good preservation ; feathers in concentric band of red, black
and yellow; yellow crest with prominent feathers, much resembling the one figured in
Cook’s Voyage, Fig. 32. It is the best one in the British Museum. Fig. 41, a.
29. Mahiole of form somewhat resembling No. 2. Red, with yellow crest and
border. British Museum. Fig. 41, b.
30. Mahiole of form similar to No. 1. Red, with yellow crest, and black and
jrellow border. In good condition. British Museum. Fig. 41, c.
LIST OF HELMETS.
47
31. Mahiole of red feathers and yellow crest attached to a net over a well-made
ie-ie frame. The feathers on the body have suffered much, but the crest is in better
condition. British Museum. Fig. 41, d.
32. Mahiole of rather small size. Red, with yellow top to crest in good con¬
dition. British Museum. Fig. 41, e.
The last five helmets range in height from 11 to 15 inches. All those in the
British Museum were photographed for me by Mr. Henry Oldland, of the Museum
a b c d e
FIG. 41. HELMETS IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM.
staff. One or two of the last five were in the Meyrick collection, but I am unable to
identify them from my notes.
33. Mahiole with detached crest supported by two circular rods. Red, with
yellow top to crest, which is edged with black, and with yellow bands around the sup¬
porting rods and a border of the same color. This was taken to England by Boki,
who accompanied the King and Queen in 1824, but whether left there or brought
home and since destroyed is not known. It is well shown in Plate VIII.
34. Mahiole, of which only the wicker work remains in a damaged condition.
In the possession of a doctor in Honolulu. A request to be allowed to examine and
photograph it was denied.
48
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
35. Mahiole of wicker work covered with a net of olona. To this were origi¬
nally attached red feathers, those on the crest being yellow, and on the edge black.
This, with the next one, was for years attached to the wall in the exhibition hall of
the Real Museo in via Romana, and it is not strange that they have little to indicate
the color. Dr. Giglioli, who has described them,31 was able by the use of a lens to
make out the remains of color. He says: “Dopo minuzioso esame e coll’ aiuto di una
buona lente, ho potuto constatare, scoprendone gli avanzi, ehe il corpo di questo
mahiole era in origine coperto di penne rosse della iiwi, mentre la cresta lo era colle
penne gialle dell’oo; lo spazio intorno alle intaeeature per le orecchie era coperto di
penne nere, pure tolte all’oo; mentre l’orlo intorno all’apertura dell’elmo era gueruita
di penne rosse, gialle e nere.”
36. Mahiole without feathers, in form of No. 2, and like that, covered with
rods to which are still attached the olona threads that held the feathers. This and
the preceding are in the Real Museo di Fisica e Storia Naturale at Florence.
37. Mahiole like those covered with feathers, but in this human hair covers
the wicker work frame in the guise of a wig. The crest (mahiole) is of bleached and
longer hair, while the rest is of a brownish hue. This was used in war, possibly a
trophy from some vanquished enemy, and belonged to the mother of Queen Emma.
It is now in the Bishop Museum. [B. M. No. 124.] It should certainly be noted that
this helmet of human hair was not of so strong and firm a wicker work as most of
those to which feathers were added, and they seem more for ornament (or disguise)
than for protection.
I have not been able to trace other helmets adorned with human hair, although
assured by old natives that the fashion was genuine Hawaiian. It was customary in
the southern islands, especially Fiji, to wear a wig made of the hair of an enemy, es¬
pecially if that enemy had been eaten; and one of these from a man who was eaten in
1862 is in the Bishop Museum. [ B. M. No. 2026.]
38-41. Since the above was in type word has come that four mahiole, two of
them with feathers, formerly in the Boston Museum, have been given to the Peabody
Museum of American Archaeology at Cambridge, Mass. It is wrell that they have
ceased to be mere curiosities, and have become objedls of ethnological interest.
Here then are more than forty of the fine Hawaiian helmets still preserved m
museums, and it is not improbable that a few more are in private collections unknown
to me. Of all these the one in best condition and exhibiting the full splendor of its
original state is the Kaumualii helmet in the Bishop Museum, which I have placed
at the head of the list. There is many an imposing panoply in the royal armories of
Europe. I have seen them at Vienna, Turin and elsewhere, but the Hawaiian warrior
clad in the superb bone and flesh of the olden day and decorated with the helmet and
3 1 Appunti intorno ad una Collezione Etnografica fatta durante il Dott. Knrico Hillyer Giglioli. Firenze, 1895. In this valuable essay
terzo viaggio di Cook e conservaia sin dalla fine del secolo scorso nel R. Dr. Giglioli describes many other Hawaiian specimens, and it will
Museo di Fisica e Storia Naturale di Firenze , p. 79. Studio del Prof. again be referred to when treating of the Hawaiian feather cloaks.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate VIII.
BOKI AND LILIHA
LIST OF HELMETS.
49
cloak, not of steel from the earth but of the plumage of the birds of the air, was quite
the equal in imposing majesty of any kuight of the Holy Roman Empire that ever
wielded lance.
Blit to return to a matter that this fine helmet suggests. It was the cherished
armor of a king as noble as any of the Hawaiian line, and yet it is not all yellow, as
one or two authors claim that the helmet of a king should always be: it is of red, as
are the most of those which retain any of their original feathers, and not a single one
of all is exclusively yellow.
r
FIG. 42. SMALL FEATHER CAPE.
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vou. I., No. 1. — 4.
AHUULA OR FEATHER CLOAKS AND CAPES.
Of all the Hawaiian feather work that has come down to us that comprised
under the above heading is not only the most abundant but also the most beautiful.
It is durable, of comparatively small bulk, and easily cared for, while its decorative
character has caused it to be sought for by the foreigners who have visited Hawaii.
The generous Hawaiian chiefs often made ahuula a token of their friendship, and so
feather capes or cloaks have made their way to America and Kurope, and have been
gradually gathered into museums until there is not a large ethnological museum that
cannot show a specimen of some quality. It will be seen from the list subjoined from
how many localities the information has been gathered, and although the number is
great, I cannot believe that I have been able to track all that still exist. It is hoped
that the publication of this list, even incomplete, will lead to the discovery of more
that may be hidden in private cabinets or in the museums of small towns.
Olona is so imiversally the basis of Hawaiian feather cloaks, that feathers
mounted on any other substance would be at once classed as foreign to the group.
This fibre comes from Touchardici latifolia , a Hawaiian genus of a single species dis¬
covered by Gaudichaud. This genus of Urticacae is closely allied to the better known
ramie ( Baehmeria nivea ) , but is even more
tenacious and durable. Although not
abundant, it is found in deep ravines and
well-watered mountain slopes all over the
group, and formerly it was cultivated for
its fibre much in the same way and
places as the fibre plants used for kapa
or bark -cloth.
The stripped bark is soaked and
then scraped on a long, narrow board
( laau kahi olona ), with a scraper ( iihi
kahi olona ) made of turtle bone ( kua -
honu) or of pearl shell l^papaua = Mele-
agrina margaritifera) . The hank of fibre
is made fast to the small end of the board and the operator places himself over it as
shown in Fig. 43. The fibre is easily scraped out, and the spinner then twists it on
the thigh using no spindle. Fig. 44. The cord or thread varies greatly in the net
used for cloaks, of which specimens are shown in Plates IX. and XI. The Hawaiians,
as was the case with other Polynesians, had no looms,32 even of the rudest sort, and the
3* The rude apparatus of the Maori is the nearest approach to a from the Caroline Islanders, or perhaps been evolved from the
loom that I can recall ; and that seems to have either been borrowed needs of the flax used by the Maori for clothing-.
(50)
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate IX.
net work used in feather croaks.
FEATHER CLOAKS AND CAPES.
5i
net or nae was formed with a netting needle (Hia aho ka upend) of the form common
to most peoples and found among the relics of the ancient Egyptians as well as in the
grass lints of Hawaii. The fineness of the net varies as does the size of the thread,
nor can I find that any particular fineness was peculiar to any time or place ; in the
same cloak may be found pieces of very varying degrees. The same netted fabric that
was used in the making of feather cloaks also served for the malo or waistband of
chiefs ; and one of these very durable
dresses, fringed with human teeth (much
decayed) is to be seen in the Bishop
Museum. | B. M. No. 6921. J
It was common custom to net bands
of a width from 8 to 12 inches, and this
was cut and joined as the rolls of modern
cloth would be used by the shaper. In
the cloak of Kiwalao (PI. XI.) there are
more than thirty irregular pieces thus
joined, and in the covering of the Ku-
kailimoku even more cutting and fitting
was required.
To fasten the feathers to this net
much finer thread, often single fibres, was
used and the feather was bound by two
or three turns of the thread in the way
shown in Fig. 45. The shaft of the
feather was bound by one turn, then bent at a and the end b bound, by another turn
of the thread, to the same or the next lower mesh. This was a very secure method,
and the feather could be broken but not pulled out whole. One
(A
skilful in attaching the feathers could easily arrange the pdu of
the bunch so as to completely conceal the uniting thread which
often was of considerable length and passed unbroken down the
rows. On the reverse the feathers did not show at all and the
thread being of the same material is hardly visible; only when the
cloak is much worn, and the net originally of open texture, do the
feathers show through, as is the case in PI. IX., lower figure.
When the cloak has been mended in modern times cotton thread
is generally used and is very conspicuous. It was generally, if not always, the custom
to arrange the feathers in direct rows, and where unevennes is found it is either the
result of careless workmanship or of the displacement of the net by age or rough
usage. It was important to prevent vertical breaks between rows, while horizontal
divisions were desirable for due flexibility, and so the horizontal rows were arranged
FIG. 44. SPINNING OLONA.
FIG. 45.
52
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORN.
V O
VI rj
quincuncially. In many cloaks the feather tnfts are so close that it is very difficult to
distinguish the knottings, but if placed one-sixth of an inch apart the surface is beauti¬
fully covered, and they are sometimes a quarter of an inch apart without breaks in
the surface. In some eases the yellow feathers have worn down to the extent of show¬
ing the red feathers used for the pa’u, and even then the knotting is hardly visible.
It is often stated that a cape in time becomes a cloak as the owner’s means or
rank increase ; that is, strips of network are added by a sort of exogenous growth ; but
I have not found this to be the case. The garment seems to be designed originally for
a certain size which cannot be greatly in¬
creased without disturbing the balance.
And this brings us to a consideration of the
usual patterns. No great originality has
been shown, and the elements are generally
triangles and crescents which in a flat de¬
sign seem rather commonplace, but when
it is remembered that the folds of the cloak
when worn greatly modify the geometrical
arrangement of the triangles, whether plain
or spherical, it must be admitted that the
simple designs are admirably adapted to
the purpose of decoration. An inspection
of the diagrams in the following list of
ahuula will show that, while there is no
great variety, no two were exactly alike: it
is only in the modern copies made of dyed
feathers, or even of suitably colored cloths,
that repetition occurs.
I have been told by aged Hawaiians
that the pattern was sketched on white kapa, cords of olona or coconut fibre serving as
radii of the curves which are generally arcs of circles, but I have never seen any of
these kapa patterns; and indeed as they were never duplicated they would not be pre¬
served. There does not seem to have been much freehand sketching in this feather
composition, and although in several designs irregularities appear these are due
probably to careless following of the pattern and not to artistic freedom on the part of
the designer.
There is nothing of the delicate variety and minute figures of the Mexican
mosaics ; the figures were all broad and even coarse, but in that were all the better
suited to the purpose intended, for it must be borne in mind that the primary use of the
Hawaiian feather cloaks was war-like decoration. They were a refined “war-paint.” As
in mediaeval Europe the vanquished knight was despoiled of his armor by the victor,
FIG. 46. KNOTTING OF A CAPE.
FEATHER CLOAKS AND CAFES.
53
so the chief who killed or captured his enemy took as spoils his feather cloak, helmet
or lei. It then became a trophy and a thing to be displayed on public occasions to the
conqueror’s fellows, and this use is still retained, in a modified form, among the
Hawaiians. In the latest royal funeral, that of the lamented Kapiolani, widow of
Kalakaua, feather capes were displayed to mark rank, if not a more bloody conquest.
N
FIG. 47. FEATHER CAPE.
Few of the ahuula still extant but have passed from owner to owner by violence in the
olden time, by the generosity for which the Hawaiian is noted in the days succeeding
the conquest of the Islands and the cessation of wars.
I11 wearing cloak or cape the usual fastening was a firmly braided collar of olona
fibre continued at the upper corners of the garment into cords of square braid long
enough to tie securely, or to make into such a knot as to readily permit escape, if exi¬
gencies required, at the cost of the cloak. In a few cases tags of feather work were
54
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
attached at intervals to the front edges to wrap the cloak closer to the body, but usually,
as the wearer required free exercise of his arms, the attachment around the neck was
the only one. In modern times silk ribbons have been substituted for the original cord
in many cases. A feather cloak was very warm, but as it was worn without under¬
clothing of any sort, — in battle ancient Hawaiians generally omitted even the malo or
waistcloth, — it was possible to avoid overheating. The weight of the large cloaks was
considerable owing to the firm netting of the substructure.
The impression is prevalent in foreign countries that a register was kept by the
chiefs, and later by the Government, of all royal feather robes. This was not the case.
FIG. 48. THE BACK OF THE CAPE OF KIWAKAO.
Not only did the Hawaiians have no written language until in 1820 the American
missionai ies introduced letters and adapted them to the sounds of the spoken language,
but theie weie no known traditions referring to any particular ahuula in other than
the most general terms.
The list that follows this brief description is the only one that has ever been
compiled, and although efforts have been unsparing to make it as complete as possible,
othei ahuula are known to exist here whose owners are not willing to have them seen,
still less examined or figured. In pleasant contrast is the kind assistance rendered by
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. X.
Plate XX.
NET WORK OF THE CLOAK OF KIWALAO.
FEATHER CL O A KS AND CARES.
55
many friends abroad who have photographed or made sketches in color of specimens
I have been unable personally to examine, or have put me in communication with
owners of specimens not in public museums.
It may seem strange that articles so highly valued should have so little history
connected with them. To most of us it would add greatly to the interest which must
ever attach to these beautiful examples of patient and long-continued work by a primi¬
tive people if we knew what chief first ordered the construction, how long the hunters
collected, how many years the deft fingers of the high chiefesses plaited the precious
feathers into the network, what rejoicings at the completion of the long task, in what
battle it first was worn, and then the changing ownership when murder, fraud, or theft
transferred the garment ; or when, in rarer cases, the owner gave the rich gift to a well¬
loved friend ; or, dying, left the ahuula to his heirs. But the native meles and kaaos,
while attesting the antiquity of the manufacture, are not explicit enough to permit the
identification of any one specimen ; as to the pattern and size, “aole i oleloia ma na kaao
kahiko o ko o nei poe kanaka — it is not told in the ancient legends of this people.”
Imagination and arithmetic are not usual yoke-fellows, but one can count the
number of feathers to the square inch and multiply by the area of the cloak, then
divide by the average number of the feathers from each bird: imagination must then
compute the time taken to ensnare a bird and the farther time to attach the feathers
to the cloak. There are those who are amused with such calculations, and they have
stated that in the case of the great mamo cloak of Kamehameha (the first in the follow¬
ing list), if paid for at the rate of wages ruling at the end of this nineteenth century,
a million dollars would hardly pay the bills for the work done by the makers of that
cloak at the beginning of the eighteenth century. I have not repeated their figuring
and I cannot adopt the result as my own, but imagination may be trusted when it tells
us that the time was great and the labor enormous before the predecessors of Kameha¬
meha could display this cloak on their broad shoulders. I do not care to reduce the
result of so much good work to mere dollars and cents. In the march of time and
civilization they have become to most men mere curiosities, while to a few they are
precious documents telling most honorable stories of a time and civilization long past.
As curiosities the market for Hawaiian feather work shows curious fluctuations.
I have been asked $10,000 for a cloak of no extraordinary beauty or condition: the
Hawaiian Government purchased a larger and finer one at auction for $1200: and
another of the same size was bought in London for $125. A small cape, from its per¬
fection of workmanship and complete preservation, I have valued at $600. It is safe to
say that the prices asked for the few specimens now in private hands are preposterous.
56 BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
LIST OF HAWAIIAN AHUULA.
I .
Mamo of Kamehameha.
Bernice Paualii Bishop Museum
Honolulu.
2.
Cloak of Kiwalao.
Photograph.
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
3-
Cloak of Kalanikauikalaneo.
< 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
4-
Pa’u of Nahienaena.
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
5-
Cloak with no history.
Photograph.
4 4 4 4 il 4 4
4 4
6.
Cloak with no history.
4 (
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
7-
Cape, Peterson family.
( (
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
8.
Cape, Princess Panahi.
< 1
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
l 4
9-
Cape, Queen Emma.
4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
IO.
Cape, Queen Emma.
( 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
1 1 .
Cape, Gilman.
( 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
12.
Cape, A. B. C. E. M.
4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
13-
Cape, Boston.
< 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
14.
Cape, Judd.
4 4
Chief Justice A. F. Judd.
4 4
15-
Cape, Elaalelea.
< (
Mrs. Haalelea.
4 4
16.
Cloak, Kapiolani.
Heirs of Kapiolani(?) .
4 4
i7-
Cloak, Eunalilo.
Eunalilo Mausoleum.
4 4
18.
Cloak, Queen Victoria.
Photograph .
Windsor Castle.
Windsor.
19.
Cloak, Queen Victoria.
4 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
20.
Cloak, Queen Victoria.
4 (
4 4 4 4
4 4
21 .
Cape, Queen Victoria.
< 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
22.
Cloak, Waber.
Sketch.
Municipal Museum.
Berne.
23-
Cloak.
Water-color.
British Museum.
London.
24.
Cloak.
< 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
25-
Cloak, cock’s feathers.
< (
4 4 4 4
4 4
26.
Cape.
4 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
27.
Cape.
4 (
4 1 4 4
4 4
28.
Cape.
4 (
4 4 4 4
4 4
29.
Cape.
4 (
4 4 4 4
4 4
30-
Cape.
4 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
3i-
Cape, Vancouver.
4 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
32.
Cape, cock’s feathers.
4 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
33-
Cape, cock’s feathers.
4 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
34-
Cape.
4 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
35-
Cape.
4 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
36.
Cape.
4 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
37-
Cape.
Sketch.
4 4 4 4
4 4
38.
Prayer carpet (?).
Photograph.
4 4 4 4
4 4
39-
Prayer carpet (?).
4 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
40.
Cape, Bingham.
4 4
Bingham family.
Honolulu.
41 •
Cloak, Aulick.
Water-color.
U. S. National Museum.
Washington.
42.
Cape, Bolton.
4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
43-
Cape, Welling.
4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4
44.
Cloak, Chapman.
4 4
Philadelphia.
45-
Cape.
Sketch.
Public Library.
Pitsfield, Mass.
46.
Cloak.
4 4
Ethnological Museum.
Berlin .
47-
Cape.
4 4
< < 4 4
4 4
48.
Cape.
4 4
ll 4 4
4 4
49-
Cloak.
4 4
National Museum,
Copenhagen .
5°-
Cape.
4 4
4 4 4 4
4 4
5i-
Cape,
Sketch.
National Museum,
Copenhagen,
LIST OF AHUULA.
57
52.
Cloak, Lucas.
Photograph.
London
53-
Cape, Christy.
( (
British Museum.
( (
54-
Cloak, Kelley.
i (
( (
55-
Cape.
Public Museum.
Maidstone, England
56.
Cloak, Pomare.
Brassy Museum.
London
57-
Cloak, Kearny.
Photograph.
Kearny family.
New York
58.
Cloak, Joy.
( l
Art Museum.
Boston
59-
Cape, Joy.
( l
( < t l
<<
60.
Cloak.
Musee d’ Artillerie.
Paris
61 .
Cloak.
Photograph.
Public Museum.
Saffron Walden, Eng
62.
Cloak.
< ( ll
Ipswich, Eng
63 •
Cloak.
Sketch.
Ethnological Museum.
Leiden
64.
Cape.
i (
( ( t (
“
65-
Cloak, Cunningham.
Photograph.
Mrs. Curran.
Englewood, N. J
66.
Cape, Cook.
( <
Royal Museum.
Florence, Italy
l i t i
67.
Cape, Cook.
i 1
t t It
68.
Cape.
Ethnological Museum.
Munich
69.
Cape, Cook.
Sketch.
Austrian Hofmuseum.
Vienna
7°.
Cape.
i (
it it
< (
7i-
Cape.
( (
it a
“
72.
Cape.
Photograph.
University Museum.
Gottingen
73-
Cape, Cook.
i <
Australian Museum.
Sydney, N. S. W
74-
Cloak [in rags].
New York.
75-
Cape, Lee.
Photograph.
Private hands.
( i
76.
Cloak.
Sketch.
( ( ( (
New Zealand.
77-
Cloak, Robeson.
(?)
United States.
78.
Cape, Whitney.
Heirs of Kapiolani ( ? ) .
Honolulu.
79-
Cloak.
National Museum.
Lisbon.
80.
Cape.
Photograph.
Mrs. Haalelea.
Honolulu.
81.
Cape.
( l
it it
( i
82.
Cape [net only].
< i
it it
i i
83-
Cloak.
Private hands.
London
84.
Cape.
< c it
( (
85-
Cape, Queen Victoria.
Photograph.
Windsor Castle.
Windsor.
86.
Cape, Queen Victoria.
< i
( ( t t
< (
87.
Cape, Queen Victoria.
l (
it i l
l (
88.
Cape, Kapena.
( (
Leihula.
Honolulu.
89.
Cape.
( (
Mrs. Manuel Reis.
< (
90.
Cape.
Sketch.
British Museum.
London.
Cape, Starbuck.
Photograph.
Miss Starbuck.
Bath, Eng.
92.
Cape.
< <
Colgate. Kent Lodge, Eastbourne, Eng.
93-
Cloak.
( i
i i a
t l l i it
94-
Cape.
Peabody Museum.
Cambridge, Mass.
95-
Cape.
S. Parker.
Honolulu.
96.
Cape.
Heirs of Kapiolani (?)
( <
97-
Cape.
Elgin, Eng.
98.
Cape.
York, Eng.
99-
Malo.
Liliuokalani.
Honolulu.
100.
Cape.
Cambridge, Eng.
[In the compilation of this catalogue the author desires to state that he was first assisted by
his friend Professor Otis T. Mason, of the United States National Museum, who kindly placed at his
disposal all the material he had himself collected, including water-color drawings of the specimens in
his charge. Acknowledgments are also due to his friend Mr. J. Edge-Partington for capital water-
58
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
color clrawings and measurements of the cloaks and capes in the British Museum. And to many
other friends, Directors and Curators of museums are thanks due for hearty and substantial aid in
gathering together the scattered remains of the patient and toilsome work of the ancient Hawaiians.
In the diagrams of the aluiula given below the three colors yellow, red and green are represented
conventionally, the two colored plates giving the tone, which is the same in all except the mamo.
The key to these colons is found in Fig. 49. The drawings have been made from the actual specimens
during a hurried visit to the Ethnological museums of Europe and America, or from photographs .sent
from private collections or museums not visited, and they will at least serve to identify the specimens.]
FIG. 49. DIAGRAM OF COLORS.
1. This magnificent cloak, made entirely of the feathers of the mamo i^Drepanis
pacifica ), may well be placed at the head of the list, as it is not only in superb condition
but, so far as is known, is the only one of its kind in existence. It is the historical
cloak once belonging to the great Kamehamelia, and to the last days of the Hawaiian
monarchy it was used to decorate the throne on public occasions, long ofter it ceased
to be worn as a robe of honor. When its fabrication began neither records nor tradition
clearly tell, but there can be little doubt that some of its feathers were plucked during
the seventeenth century and the unfinished work ceased in the last quarter of the suc¬
ceeding century. It is believed to have belonged to the ancestors of the king Kalaniopuu
who was king of Western Hawaii during Cook’s visit, and from him the young
Kamehamelia inherited the insignia with bis portion of the kingdom. The late J. J.
Jarves, Historian and Art Critic, in describing this cloak’3 says:
“ His Majesty Kauikeaouli lias still in bis possession the mamo or feather war-eloak of his
father the celebrated Kamehamelia. It was not completed until his reign, having occupied eight
preceding ones it its fabrication . A piece of nankeen, valued at one dollar and and a half, was
formerly the price of five feathers of this kind. By this estimate the value of the cloak would equal
that of the purest diamonds in the several European regalia, and including the price of the feathers,
not less than a million of dollars worth of labor was expended upon it at the present rate of com¬
puting wages.”
On the neck border are a few iiwi feathers, and the present border of purple velvet
dates from the reign of Kalakaua. The length is 56 inches; front edges, 46 inches;
width at base, 148 inches; weight, 6 pounds. The uae or net of olona is close, uniform,
of a dozen horizontal strips with several triangular pieces, and in perfect condition.
Given to the Bishop Museum by Legislative enactment. No. 6828.
2. Cloak of 00 ( Acnilocerciis nobilis) decorated with triangles of iiwi ( Vestiarici
coccinea). Plate X. This is of the same age as the preceding and belonged to
Kiwalao, son of a Kalaniopuu, and a brave warrior, slain by Kamehamelia who thus
obtained the cloak. I11 late years it has been called “the Queen’s Cloak” and has been
33 Hawaiian Spectator } II., 364 [July, 1839].
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate X.
CLOAK OF KIWALAO
LIST OF AUULA.
59
placed over the Queen’s throne on public occasions. Length, 60 inches; width at
base, 144 inches; front edges, 50.7 inches. The nae is composed of more than thirty
pieces, of irregular form and varying fineness, Fig. 48, and the cloak seems to have
been made up of the ruins of many other fabrics much as the choice products of
Kashmir are fitted piece to piece of many an ancient shawl. The network is shown on
a larger scale in Plate XI. At the fall of the Hawaiian Monarchy this, with Nos. 1,
3 and 4, came to the Bishop Museum where it is numbered 6829.
3. Cloak of iiwi with border, diamonds and triangles of 00. It formerly be¬
longed to the chief Kalanikauikalaneo, from whom it came to the chief Charles
Kanaina, father of King Lunalilo, and after the death of Kanaina in 1878 it was
purchased by the Government for $1200. Length, 54.5 inches; front, 45 inches;
width at base, 148 inches. No. 6830, B. P. B. M. Fig. 49.
4. Pa’u of 00, with small triangles of red and black at the ends. This, the
only known example of a feather robe made for a woman,34 belonged to Nahienaena
the beloved sister of Kauikeaouli [Kamehameha III.], a princess well deserving such a
decoration. It is related that at a reception given to Lord Byron, H. B. M. N., in 1825,
the Princess was urged to wear this pa’u and at first refused on the ground that such
robes belonged to the heathen times. She was then a girl of ten years and would have
been almost concealed in this immense garment, which was 20 feet 8 inches long and
30 inches wide. Since the death of the Princess, in 1836, this pa’u, cut in two and re¬
united lengthwise, has been used as a royal pall, last over the coffin of Kalakaua.
No. 6831, B. P. B. M.
5. Cloak of 00 and iiwi, from London, without history. Length, 46 inches ;
front, 40 inches; neck, 26 inches; base, 72 inches. No. 323, B. P. B. M. Fig. 50.
6. Cloak of 00 with perhaps half of its surface covered with iiwi : not in perfect
preservation. Purchased in London for ^25. History unknown. Length, 48.5 inches ;
front, 47 inches; base, 168 inches. No. 958, B. P. B. M. Fig. 51.
7. Cape of 00 and iiwi, dating from the time of Kamehameha I. Plate XV.
34 it perhaps marks the transition from a war-robe, suitable only for warriors, to a state decoration and mark of high rank which the
feather garments assumed in later days.
6o
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORN.
Formerly owned by the Peterson family in Honolulu. Length, 15.7 inches; front,
10 inches; base, 64 inches. In splendid preservation. Fig. 52.
8. Cape of 00 and iiwi; the central crescent half red and half black [00]. Once
the property of Princess Pauahi [Mrs. Bishop] and worn by her when a child. The net
is neatly made of nine irregular pieces, as shown in Fig. 54. Length, 14.5 inches;
front, 9.5 inches; width, 28.5 inches. No. 955 in the Bishop Museum. Fig. 53.
FIG. 51.
FIG. 52.
9. Cape of 00 and iiwi ; once the property of Queen Emma. Length, 12.5 inches;
front, 8 inches; base, 66 inches. No. 956 in the Bishop Museum.* Fig. 55.
10. Cape of 00 and iiwi; worn by Queen Emma when a child at the Royal
School. I find from the private journal of Mr. Cook, the master of that remarkable
school for young chiefs, that it was customary to send for the Princes Lot and Alex¬
ander with Bernice Pauahi and Emma to attend the king, Kamehameha III., at state
functions, or when officers of war vessels or other distinguished visitors were received
at the palace. Length, 15 inches; front, 8 inches; base, 66 inches. Feathers some¬
what worn. No. 957 in the Bishop Museum. Fig. 56.
11. Cape of 00 and iiwi, in fairly good condition. Carried to Boston about
1835. The owner died, and his son, in straightened circumstances, offered it to his
LIST OF AHUULA .
landlady in payment of a bill of fifty dollars
D. Gilman, Hawaiian Consul General in
Museum | No. 6841]. Length, 11 inches;
14 inches; on the base, 49 inches. Fig. 57.
61
From her it was purchased by Gorham
Boston, who presented it to the Bishop
front, 6.5 inches; circumference on neck,
Shown also in Fig. 42.
FIG. 56.
12. Cape of 00 and iiwi; formerly in the cabinet of the American Board of
Commissioners for Foreign Missions in Boston, whence it was purchased for the
Bishop Museum [No. 7766 | . Length, 28.5 inches; front, 11 inches; base, 72 inches.
This, when received at this Museum, was very much discolored, and the yellow 00
little more than a brown dust color; the skilful hands of a native lady restored the
original color, nearly if not cjuite, by careful washing. Fig. 58.
FIG.
57-
FIG. 58.
13. Cape of 00 and iiwi; purchased in Boston for $ 100 . Pattern almost identi¬
cal with that of No. 10. Net in five pieces of fine texture. Length, 13 inches; front,
10 inches. No. 8075 in the Bishop Museum. Fig. 59. The modern history of the
cape is contained in the following note which came with the specimen :
62
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
Boston, January ii, 1897.
My Dear Mr. Gilman: —
The latter part of the year 1833 Mr. and Mrs. Rufus Perkins left Boston on their way to
China where Mr. Perkins was engaged in business . Some matters required Mr. Perkins to
remain in Honolulu some little time. King Kamehameha, surnamed “the good,’’ gave them one of
his grass cottages at the head of Nuuanu Valley for a residence. There, April, 1834, their daughter
Mary, who became my mother, was born. She was of the same age as the heir to the throne,35 and
the king gave her this feather cape as a token. Very truly yours,
B. B. Bardwell.
14. Cape of 00 and iiwi; once the property of Kanmualii, King of Kauai, and
by him given to Mr. Whitney of the newly established Mission at Waimea. After the
death of Mrs. Whitney it was purchased by Hon. A. F. Judd. It is in good condition.
Length, 14.5 inches; front, 9.5 and 10 inches; base, 64 inches. Fig. 60.
15. Cape of 00 with a central crescent half red, half black; red and black
triangles on front, and black and red border on neck and front. Property of Mrs.
Haalelea. Length, 14.5 inches; front, 9.7 and 10 inches. In good condition and the
feathers very thick. Fig. 61.
35 Alexander Liholiho [Kamehameha IV.] was born February 9, 1834. — Chas. R. Bishop.
LIST OF AHUULA
63
16. Cloak purchased in England for $600. Her Majesty the late Kapiolani
was the owner of this cloak which I have not seen for several years. There was, if
my memory serves, nothing remarkable about it, and it is reported buried with its
former owner.
17. Cloak belonging to the ancestors of Kekauluohe, the mother of King
Kunalilo, and by order of his father Kanaina buried in the coffin of the king. It was
large, of 00 with more or less green on.
fig. 64.
One person remembers that there was a
green crescent on the back ; another that it was all green !
18. Cloak of iiwi with 00 decorations; collar red and black; feather tab on the
right side; length, about 57 inches. In the collection of Her Majesty Queen Victoria
at Windsor Castle. This, with the others described below | 19, 20, 21, 85, 86, 87] was
FIG. 65.
fig. 66.
found carefully packed away in the round tower at the castle while search was being-
made for the royal cloak sent by Kamehameha to King George. Fig. 62.
19. Cloak of iiwi with figures of 00. A narrow black and yellow band around
the neck was accidentally omitted from the diagram. Fig. 63. The shape is rather
unusual. Length, 57 inches. Windsor Castle collection. Upper figure in Plate XIII.
64
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
20. Cloak of iiwi; five yellow triangles at the neck, four concentric bands of
six lozenges each, and a yellow band at the base; narrow red and black border at the
front edges. A magnificent cloak but badly preserved; as will be seen by the Plate,
XIII., the net is visible in many places. Fig. 64. Windsor Castle collection. Length,
68 inches; base, 160 inches.
21. Cape of iiwi with basal border of 00 and seven crescents in two rows on the
back; on each front a yellow triangle between two of black 00. This is large for a
cape and small for a cloak. Fig. 65. Plate XIV., a. Windsor Castle collection.
22. Cloak of iiwi with bands and triangles of 00. About 60 inches long and
c[uite narrow; apparently to cover only the back and sides of the wearer. Waber
\anglice Webber], the artist of Cook’s third voyage, brought this home and gave it
with other things to Berne, bis native town, where it is preserved in fair condition in a
sealed glass case in the fine new Municipal Museum. The diagram, Fig. 66, is from
a sketch by the author, as it was difficult to photograph it in its double case.
23. Cloak of iiwi with bands, triangles and circles of 00. Feather tabs on the
front edges. Length, 70 inches; front, 50 inches; base, 116 inches. A remarkably
showy pattern. From a water-color sketch by J. Edge-Partiugton, Esq. In the British
Museum, without history of ancient ownership. Fig. 67.
24. Cloak of iiwi with rhombs of 00 and a basal border of the same. Neck,
29 inches; length, 64 inches; front, 54 inches; width, 102 inches. British Museum.
Its resemblance to the Windsor cloak, Plate XIII., will be noticed. This, with most of
the others in the British national collection has been figured from Mr. Partington’s
water-color sketches made for the author. Fig. 68.
25. Cloak of cock’s feathers with neck and front border of alternate triangles
of iiwi and 00. Length, 70 inches; front, 36 inches; neck, 29 inches; width, 69 inches.
One of the long, narrow cloaks, and of a construction often repeated [32, 33, 34, 64,
etc.]. While the addition of the feathers of the common fowl must be regarded as a
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. 1.
Plate XIII.
HER MAJESTY VICTORIA’S CROAKS IN WINDSOR CASTLE
LIST OF AHUULA.
65
cheap substitute for the far more precious 00 and iiwi, these cloaks were not without a
special grace of their own. It may be noted that the barnyard fowl was brought to
these islands by the early Polynesian immigrants, and they were common enough at
the time of Cook. While these birds have not run wild like the turkeys, I once found
a hen sitting in the midst of a bird’s nest fern [. Asplenium nidus'] growing on the
horizontal branch of a tree some twenty feet from the ground, and at least four miles
removed from any human habitation. British Museum. Fig. 69.
26. Cape or tippet of iiwi with 00 ornaments, one small crescent and two semi¬
crescents extending the width of the cape and united by the apices. Length, about
16 inches; neck, 26 inches; front, 8.5 and 9.5 inches. Fig. 70. British Museum.
This looks like the beginning of a larger cape, and in this and the next specimen there
is no basal border.
27. Cape of yellow 00 with a narrow cervical and frontal border of black 00.
Length, 11. 5 inches; neck, 14 inches diameter; front, 7.7 and 7.2 inches. British
Museum. According to Scott Wilson the yellow feathers of this cape are mamo, and
he is probably right. The cape looks like the beginning of a royal robe. Fig. 71.
28. Cape of 00 and iiwi, the latter dotted through the yellow as well as arranged
in a central spherical triangle, and two small triangles on each front edge. Length,
12.5 inches; front, 8.5 inches. British Museum. [Christy Coll., 5769.] Fig. 72.
29. Cape of iiwi and 00 feathers, the latter in two unusual loops. Neck, 31
inches; front, 8.5 and 10.5 inches. British Museum. Fig. 73.
30. Cape of iiwi with two large triangles, a central lozenge and basal border
of 00. A narrow neck band of yellow, red and black. The olona net is especially
good. Length, 11.5 inches; front, 7.2 and 7.5 inches; neck, 15 inches; width, 29.5
inches. British Museum. Fig. 74.
31. Cape of iiwi with two bands of 00. Length, 15.5 inches; front, 9 inches;
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. i. — 5,
66
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
neck, 12.5 inches. Vancouver collection ; now with Christ}' Collection in the British
Museum. Fig. 75.
32. Cape of cock’s feathers with cervical border of red, black and yellow.
Length, 22 inches; front, 9 and 10.5 inches; neck, 13 inches. British Museum. Fig. 76.
33. Cape of cock’s feathers with a cervical and frontal border of red and yellow.
Open olona net. Length, 15 inches; front, 8 inches; neck, 21 inches; width, 34.5
inches. British Museum. Fig. 77.
34. Cape of black and white fowl feathers with a band of red around neck and on
upper third of front; base of game cock feathers. Length, 15 inches; front, 8 inches;
neck, 14 inches; width, 29 inches. Mounted on olona net. British Museum. Fig. 78.
LIST OF AHUULA.
67
35. Cape | ? | of unusual shape; more suitable for waistband or petticoat. The
base is a net of olona with large meshes. A band of red and yellow feathers comes
first on the upper part, then white fowl feathers edged top and bottom with black
cock’s feathers, and at side with game cock feathers. The lower corners have loops,
the upper corners the usual strings. Length, 18 inches; top, 30.7 inches ; bottom,
48.5 inches. British Museum. Fig. 79.
FIG. 77. FIG. 78.
36. Curious apron-like structure of cock’s feathers 40 inches long, 24 inches
wide, narrowing at the top to 10 inches. Perhaps a dress for an idol. British Museum.
37. Cape of iiwi, 00 and black 00. Length, 14 inches; front, 7.7 and 7.2 inches.
Christy Coll., 589 7. British Museum. Fig. 80. From a photograph.
fig. 79. FIG- 80.
38. Mat of rods covered with feathers of various colors arranged as shown in
Plate VI. There are five bands of unequal width and of design much more varied than
usual in Hawaiian feather work, and the narrower edges are fringed with sparse coids
about six inches long. The structure is by no means neat or strong. It has already
been stated that the probable use was in cou junction with the feather war god.
British Museum.
Mat similar to the last and shown with it on Plate VI. I know of nothing
39-
68
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
similar in any other collection, and it is very unfortunate that the history of these
strange objects is lost. British Museum.
40. Fragment of a fine cape. The net is of well twisted, closely netted olona:
neck border and cords of the usual square braid: front edges finished with a flat braid.
Feathers are inserted in rows one-lialf to five-eighths of an inch apart with two olona
threads loosely twisted but fastened in three turns around each bunch of feathers.
Black and yellow 00, the crimson of very long apapane feathers: the only ahuula I
have found with these feathers. It belonged to the early missionary Rev. Hiram
Bingham: perhaps given to him by his friend Kalaimoku, the Prime Minister. It was
carried to the United States in 1840, and when lent to a friend was mutilated by a negro
servant in the household. Length, 24 inches; front, 12 inches. Now in possession of
the Bingham family in Honolulu. Fig. 81. The portion to the left of the irregular
black line is now extant.
41. Cloak of 00 and iiwi. Given to Commander J. H. Aulick, U. S. Navy, by
Kamehameha III. in 1S41. Cervical border (23 inches) of black and yellow 00; front
edges red, black and yellow. Length, 48 inches; base, 138 inches. Lhiited States
National Museum, Washington, 79,180. Fig. 82.
42. Cape of 00 with crescents and semicrescents of iiwi, and a central crescent
of black 00. Cervical and frontal border of red, black and yellow. Length, 16 inches;
neck, 16 inches; base, 66 inches. Obtained by Commander William Compton Bolton
in 1841. United States National Museum, 3574. Fig. 83.
43. Cape of iiwi with basal border of 00 and five crescents of the same. Cervi¬
cal and dorsal border of black and red. Length, 15 inches. Deposited in the United
States National Museum by Mrs. J. C. Welling and Miss Dixon. Fig. 84.
44. Cape of iiwi with basal border and figure of 00 of remarkable design.
Property of Henry Chapman, Esq., of Philadelphia, Penn. Length, 56 inches; front,
44 inches; greatest breadth, 96 inches. These measurements are plotted from a water
LIST OF AHUULA. 69
color sketch kindly given me b}- Prof. Benjamin Sharp and may not be exact. Fig. 85
shows the pattern and also three holes, perhaps made by some weapon during battle.
45. Cape of iiwi with basal border an inch wide, crescent and two semicrescents
of 00; two larger semicrescents of black 00. Cervical and frontal border of red, black
and yellow. Length, 9.2 inches ; front, 7.7 and 7.2 inches. Given by Miss Bissell to the
Berkshire Athenaeum at Pittsfield, Mass., and preserved in the library in a glass frame.
The feathers are somewhat worn in several places. Fig. 86.
46. Cloak of iiwi, 51.5 inches long, with figures of 00. Of the long and narrow
class. From a sketch by the author. In the Museum fur Volkerkunde, Berlin [1825 j.
Fig. 87.
47. Cape of 00 with two triangles and two semicrescents of iiwi; neck and front
edges of red, black and yellow. Length, 14 inches. Museum fiir Volkerkunde,
Berlin. Fig. 88. From sketch by author.
48. Cape of iiwi with border at base, two crescents in the middle, and a triangle
on each front edge of yellow 00, the latter with a smaller insert of black 00, and two
70
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN BE A THAR l TORN.
bits of the same black on the neck. Length, 16.5 inches. Museum fur \ dlkerkunde,
Berlin. Fig. 89. Sketch by author.
49. Cloak of iiwi, 57.5 inches long, with crescents and triangles of 00 and basal
border of the same. Rather dirty and poor. It was so arranged in the case that I
could not see the back of the cloak, hence my sketch, Fig. 90, is fragmentary. The
fig. 87. FIG. 88.
late Dr. Bahnson offered to open the case, but was prevented during my short visit by
other callers. Nationalmuseet, den Ethnografiske Samling, Copenhagen.
50. Cape of 00 with a spherical triangle in middle and two semicrescents on
each border; front edge of dark green on feathers; spots of iiwi are on neck and edges.
fig. 90.
I11 fine condition and a splendid specimen. I wras unable to measure this and the suc¬
ceeding specimen, which is a little smaller, for the reason given above. National¬
museet, den Ethnografiske Samling, Copenhagen. Fig. 91. Sketch by author.
51. Cape of iiwi with three crescents in the middle, two triangles on each
front edge, and five on the neck, with basal border of 00: the neck border of iiwi
INDEX.
ILLUSTRATIONS ARE
Ahuula - - - .
-
PAGE
50
“ List of
-
56
“ Auliek -
-
- 68
“ Bardwell
-
61
Berlin
-
- 69
“ Bingham
-
68
“ Bolton
-
- 68
“ Brassey
-
7i
“ British Museum
-
64, 90
“ Chapman
-
68
“ Christy -
-
- 7i
“ Colgate
-
80
1 ‘ Copenhagen
-
- 70
“ Cunningham
-
74
“ Emma, Queen
-
- 60
“ Florence
-
75
“ Gilman -
-
61
‘ 1 Gottingen
-
76
“ Haalelea
62,
77. 78
“ Ipswich
-
74
“ Joy
-
- 72
“ Judd -
-
62
“ Kalanikauikalaneo -
-
- 59
1 ‘ Kamehamelia
-
58
‘ ‘ Kearny -
-
- 72
“ Kelley
-
7i
“ Kiwalao -
-
- 58
“ Lee
-
76
‘ ‘ Leiden
-
- 74
“ Leihula
-
79
“ Lucas
-
- 7i
“ Lunalilo
-
63
“ Maidstone
-
- 7i
“ Munich
-
75
“ Paris
-
- 73
“ Pauahi
.
60
“ Pittsfield
-
- 69
“ Pomare
7i
“ Reis
-
80, 81
“ Saffron Walden -
73
‘ ‘ Starbuck
-
- 80
“ Sydney
-
76
“ Victoria -
63.
78. 79
1 1 Vienna
-
75
“ Waber
-
- 64
“ Welling
-
68
Mala
-
- 12
PRINTED IN ITALICS.
PAGE
Anuu ------- 29, 30
Apapane - - - - - - 10
Auliek cloak - - - - - - 68
Bard well cape - - - - - 61
Berlin capes and cloak - - - - 69
Bingham cape ----- 68
Bird - lime - -- -- -- 3
Birds furnishing feathers - - - 9
Bolton cloak - - - - - - 68
Brassey cloak - - - - - 71
British Museum cloaks and capes - 64, 90
Capes and cloaks ----- 50
“ “ “ List of - - - 56
“ Market value - 55
Chapman cloak ----- 68
Christy cloak - - - - - - 71
Cloaks and capes, see Capes and cloaks.
Colgate ahuula ----- 80
Colors of feathers ----- 9
“ “ kahilis ----- 17
Cook's cape ------ 4
Copenhagen ahuula - - - - 70
Cunningham cloak - - - - 74
Designs of ahuula - - - - 52
Dyed feathers - - - - - - 12
Kills' account of feather work - - 6
Emma, Queen, capes - - - - 60
Feathers from the hunter - - - 13
Florence ahuula - - - - 75
Gilman cape - - - - - 61
Gottingen cape - - - - - 76
Haalelea capes - 62, 77, 78
Handles of human bone - - - - 16
“ “ kauila - - - - 16
“ “ tortoise-shell - - - - 16
Handles, unfinished - - - - 18
Helmet from Cook - - - - - 41
Helmet covered with human hair - 48
“ New Ireland - - - - 40
Helmets in Berlin - - - - 43
“ “ British Museum - - 46, 47
“ " Paris ----- 44
“ Vienna - - - - - 42
Helmets, List of ----- 42
Iiwi -------- 9
Ipswich cape ----- 74
Iwa - - - - - * - -H
INDEX.
ii
Joy ahuu la
PAGE
72
Mats -
-
P
36,
Judd cape
-
62
Munich cape
-
-
Kahili branches
-
19
Nahienaena
-
of sugar cane
-
24
Nets for birds
-
-
Kahilis -
7. H,
15
Oloua
-
Kahilis , group of
-
15
Olona scraping
-
-
in procession
-
20
“ spinning -
-
Kahilis, List of
-
2 1
“Only two feathers’’
-
Kalanikauikalaneo cloak
-
59
Oo ( Acrulocercus nobi/t's )
-
Kamehatueha cloak of tnamo
-
58
On ( Psittacirostra psittacca )
-
-
Kauila haudles -
-
16
Paris cloak -
-
Kearny cloak
-
72
Pa’u of Nahienaena
-
-
Kelley cloak -
-
7i
Pauahi cape -
-
A 7 stem
-
16
Pittsfield cape
-
-
Kiwalao cloak -
-
58
Pomare cloak (Brassey)
-
Koae
-
1 1
Portlock and Dixon account
-
-
Kukailimoku
31-36,
38
Pueo ( Asio accipitrinus )
-
Kukailimoku, List of
-
37
Queen’s cloak
-
-
Lee cape
-
76
Reis cape
-
80,
Leiden ahuula
-
74
Saffron Walden cloak
-
-
Leihnla cape
-
70
Starbuck cape
-
Ac/' end
-
26
Stewart’s description
-
Let's -
- 27>
29
Sydney cape -
-
4-
Leis, List of
-
27
Temple oracle , Model of
-
-
Lucas cloak
-
7 1
Tortoise-shell handles
-
Lunalilo cloak
-
63
Vancouver account
-
-
Mahiole or Lfelmet
-
40
Victorian ahuula
63,
78,
Maidstone cape
-
7i
Vienna ahuula
-
-
Malo -
-
81
Waber cloak -
-
.1/a mo
-
9
Welling cloak
-
-
-AGE
67
75
17
13
50
50
5i
8
9
8
*7
/ v5
59
60
69
71
7
12
58
81
73
80
19
76
3°
16
7
79
75
64
68
Memoirs Bishop Museum, vol. I.
Plate XV.
CAPE IN THE BISHOP MUSEUM (NO. 7)
AN
INDEX
TO THE
A HANDBOOK TO THE CHART ON THE WALLS OF
THE BERNICE PAUAHI BISHOP MUSEUM OF
POLYNESIAN ETHNOLOGY AND
NATURAL HISTORY.
WILLIAM T. BRIGHAM, A. \I.
Vol. I. — No. 2.
HONOLULU, H. I.:
BISHOP MUSEUM PRESS.
19OO.
KRAUS REPRINT CO.
Millwood, New York
1974
ISSUED AT THE INSTANCE OF THE TRUSTEES
OF THE MUSEUM.
Reprinted with the permission of the Bishop Museum Press
KRAUS REPRINT CO.
A U.S. Division of Kraus-Thomson Organization Limited
Printed in U.S. A.
PREFACE.
In arranging the Ethnological collections in the Bishop Museum the difficulty presented
itself at the outset of a very extensive synonomv of the islands comprised in the region of the Pacific
from which these collections are drawn. The orthography was largely undetermined, native names
of islands had generally given place to the names of saints or of the vessels which carried their sup¬
posed discoverers, and as determinations of longitude are, even at the present day, very uncertain in
this ocean, islands were discovered, lost and rediscovered, — as the Solomon Islands were lost for
two centuries — and the rediscoverer renamed the bit of land or rock that he found seemingly adrift
in the mighty waste of waters.
To show the true relation of the various groups and solitary islands in the Pacific the Director
constructed with great care upon the wall of the Polynesian Hall of the Museum a chart extending
from 130° East to iro° West longitude, and from the Tropic of Cancer to 450 South in latitude, occu¬
pying a wall space eleven feet by twenty. The names given to the islands there represented were in
all cases the native names where such were known to exist; where there were no aboriginal inhabi¬
tants (as at Wake Island), or where the aborigines had disappeared (as at Pitcairn Island), the
name imposed by the first discoverer was preferred. This led to some difficulty as names familiar to
some were replaced by less familiar terms: Penrhyn became again the original Tongareva; one Pes¬
cadores became Bikini, another Rongelab; Sandwich Island returned to its aboriginal Vate. As it
was impracticable to cover the chart with synonyms the best way seemed to be to print a list of all
the names generally applied in charts or voyages in the form of an index, that not only the student
might understand the labels attached to the ethnological specimens and groups, but the general visitor
to the Museum be able to find an island appearing on the chart under an unfamiliar name.
This course appeared convenient, if not necessary, for those who had the arrangement of the
Museum in charge that there should be no confusion or variation in the nomenclature of localities;
that consistency, at least, if not absolute accuracy might prevail.
In the present state of our knowledge of the geography of the Pacific Ocean, it is not possible
to place accurately the position of the known islands of this ocean, still less is it possible to go beyond
conjecture in the identification of many of the discoveries of the earlier voyagers. It has not been
possible to obtain the true native name in all cases, and indeed in some of the larger islands, as
New Guinea, there seems to have been no collective name for the numerous districts comprising the
island, and doubtless in a few cases the name of a portion has been applied to the whole. Especially
is this the case in the “ring-atolls” where the name of a prominent islet sometimes stands for the whole
group. As to the orthography, even the missionaries who have acquired more or less knowledge of the
vernacular, do not always agree as in the case of Jaluit which some spell Jaluij. But if one were to
wait for perfect knowledge before coming to the public there would be little enough printed, and it
has seemed best to print the following pages with all their imperfections, trusting that the better
IV
Preface.
knowledge of others to whose notice they may come will assist in correcting the existing mistakes.
Those in charge of this Museum will welcome any addition to their information in these matters.
Although the modern war vessel is sadly unfit for the purposes of scientific exploration, it is
hoped that England, America, Germany or France may ere long find national ships to survey the
Pacific anew and accurately. The life that Magellan, Mendana, Cook, Vancouver, and even Wilkes
found has almost disappeared; a new and far less interesting order has replaced it. Even the out¬
lines of the coral islets have changed, and in the volcanic region the very bottom of the bays in
which the great explorers anchored has sunk or risen as the submarine forces have adted. Europe
and America have divided the islands among them, let them now, like wise proprietors, carefully
survey and study their new possessions. Elere in the midst of the Pacific Ocean we would store for
common use all that we may gather from the vast extent of the “Great Ocean’’.
WILLIAM T. BRIGHAM.
Director of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum.
[88]
THE ISLANDS OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN.
FOR the purpose of this Index the Pacific Ocean will no longer extend from
Bering’s Strait to the Antarctic circle and from Kamchatka, Japan, China, the
Philippines, Moluccas and Australia to the American coast : the Aleutian and
continental islands, the Galapagos and Juan Fernandez on the East with Kurile,
Philippine and the archipelago north-west of Australia belong ethnologically if not
geographically to another region, and hence the 'bounds of the Pacific which shall in¬
clude all Oceanica (except Malaysia) will be on the North the Hawaiian and Bonin
Islands, 30°N.; on the East Rapanui or Easter Island, 105 \\\; on the South New
Zealand and its islets, 55° S.; and on the West New Guinea and the larger portion of
Australia, 130° E. Thus defined all minor divisions of this vast expanse of water are
eliminated, except the Coral Sea. Shorn of its fringe of seas, gulfs and bays it is still an
immense area extending through eighty-five degrees of latitude from north to south and
through one hundred and twenty-five degrees of longitude from east to west. We may
glance at its history both natural and political, beginning with the latter as best known.
Although the Portuguese followed Vasco de Gama by the Cape of Good Hope
and far beyond the Moluccas into what is now known as the Pacific Ocean, it was left
to their neighbors and only rivals in discovery, the Spaniards, in the person of the
brilliant and ill-fated Vasco Nunez de Balboa, to reach its eastern shores. September
29, 1513, the brave conquistador, after a terrible journey through Darien, saw the new
ocean, and as it was the Michaelmas season, in the custom of those days named it
Golfo de San Miguel; then marching into its clear and placid waters took possession
in the name of His Majesty of Spain. Balboa died soon after ( 1517), murdered by
his father-in-law Pedro Arias d’ Avila, and his great discovery profited him little if
indeed it was not indirectly the cause of his untimely death.
Another grand man, in many ways not unlike Balboa, Fernao de Magalhaes,
possessed with the conviction that the continent of America did not, as it seemed to all
others, absolutely bar the path to far Cathay, but that there must be a way around if
only one could sail far enough to the southward, pushed on with the spirit of Columbus
against storms and storm-like men, sailed through the strait which still bears his
name, and on November 28, 1520, passed into the wide ocean which in contrast to the
rough Atlantic he named Mrr Pacifico . We know now that storms on this ocean are
as formidable as on the Atlantic, but his experience was all the other wav and for
[»9] (s)
6
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
three months and twenty days he sailed with favoring winds north, then north-west,
and finally west, suffering bitterly from scurvy and privation until on March 6, 1521,
the green shores of the islands which his sailors called from the misconduct of the
natives “Ladrones” were seen, but not until ten days later were the sufferings of the
companv relieved when they came to the important group since called the Philippines.
Then persuaded to aid the pettv chief of Zebu in his wars Magalhaes fell miserably on
the island Madlan, and his comrades had not even the melancliolly privilege of burying
his remains. The survivors completed the first circumnavigation of the globe but
strangelv missed all the islands of the central Pacific and added only the islands of the
Marianas to the map of Balboa’s ocean.
Next from the west came the Portuguese Jorge Menezes and discovered New
Guinea, which only a few months later was rediscovered by the Spaniard Alvaro de
Saavedra sent bv Hernan Corte> from Mexico to the Moluccas. Saavedra on his re¬
turn saw islands of the Caroline Group, and in 1542 Ruiz Lopez de Villalobos on a
voyage from Mexico to colonize the Philippines saw others of the same group but
neither could sufficiently determine the position for identification.
In 1567 Alvaro Mendana de Nevra discovered the important group which he
called Is/as de Salomon and in 1594 Philip II. gave him a commission as Adelantado.
In April, 1595, Mendana sailed from Callao “para ir a pacijica v poblar las islas occi¬
dental's del mar del siirT Although he never again saw the Solomon Islands, he dis¬
covered and named the Marquesas Group and came at last to the island of Nitendi or
Santa Cruz where he attempted to colonize but died and his survivors quarrelled with
the natives until his widow sailed with his remains and what was left of the colon}- to
Manila, where she married the Governor. Not long after the ship of the expedition
which carried the corpse of the Adelantado, and which had been driven from the
squadron by a storm, followed her to the islan 1 of Luzon where it ran ashore, sails all
set and rotten, and all hands dead on board, ai ther tragical ending for a discoverer in
the Pacific! One of the ships of this expedition disappeared mysteriously in a slight
squall one evening and it was supposed that tired of the infelicities of the ill-fated
colony her company had deserted and taken the northern roe >ack to Callao. If they
tried this long and perilous way, in a ship insufficiently provisioned, they never reached
their goal, and as the Hawaiian Group was not far from their probable track, it may
have been from this ship that the survivors were thrown on the shore of Hawaii, as
told in the .ative legends.
Francis Drake had in the meantime crossed the Pacific in the “ Golden Hindp
the first English warship to circumnavigate the globe. He left England December
13, r577» entering the Pacific in September of the following year, and early in Novem¬
ber, 1580, arrived at Plymouth; but his mission was not to discover new lands but
rather to vex the Spaniard.
[90J
EARLY DISCOVERIES.
7
In 1606 Luis Vaez de Torres, a companion of Quiros, coasted the southeastern
part of New Guinea and discovered the strait separating that island from Australia
which still bears his name. At the same time the more distinguished Pedro Fernandez
de Quiros, who had been pilot with Mendana, discovered the New Hebrides and other
islands, among them Sagittaria which Espinosa and others identify with Tahiti. Abel
Janszen Tasman sailed by order of the Governor Van Diemen from Batavia in August,
1642, to explore Australia, and in November discovered Tasmania (which he named
Van Diemen’s Land), in December New Zealand, and in 1643 a part of the Tongan
Group. Other Dutch vessels from Batavia made various discoveries along the coast of
Australia, and in 1699 the English freebooter Captain William Dampier explored the
coast of Australia and New Guinea, leaving memorials of his voyaging in Dampier
Archipelago, Dampier Island and Dampier Strait. Jacob Lemaire and Jan Schouten
had in 1615 discovered the Strait of Lemaire and Cape Horn (which Schouten named
in honor of his native town, Horn). March 1, 1616, they sighted Juan Fernandez and
then crossed the ocean to the northern coast of New Guinea.
The eighteenth century was destined to reveal more accurately the secrets of
the “Great Ocean”. In 1721 Jacob Roggewein was sent across the Pacific by the
Dutch East India Company and he discovered Rapanui or Easter Island. Lord
Anson’s voyage (1740-1744) was of a war-like nature, but in capturing the Spanish
galleon he captured also the Spanish chart on which were “Las Mesas”, a group
of islands which Cook searched for on his way north from Tahiti and found in the
designated latitude the group which he called Sandwich in honor of his patron, a
Lord of the Admiralty. Anson’s voyage had a far greater effect than Drake’s in turn¬
ing the attention of the English to the Pacific, and in 1764 Commodore Byron, the grand¬
father of the poet, crossed it on his voyage around the world, and on his return in 1766
a more formal exploring expedition was fitted out with Captain Wallis in the Dolphin
and Captain Philip Carteret in the Swallow. Wallis first determined longitudes in this
ocean by lunar distances and thus corrected the charts, which hitherto had but little im¬
proved on the early Spanish in that measurement. He rediscovered Tahiti June 19,
1767, and discovered Sir Charles Saunders Island (Tapamanu) in the same group. His
colleague Carteret discovered Pitcairn’s Island July 2, 1767, and a number of islands of
the Low Archipelago. About the same time the French sent Louis Antone de Bou¬
gainville on his memorable voyage around the world. He passed the Strait of Magel¬
lan and touched at Tahiti eight months after Wallis. He was a distinguished navi¬
gator and mathematician, a Fellow of the Royal Society, and had the honor of first
carrying the French flag around the world, but his surveys and charts were sadly
inaccurate.
All these advance scouts had prepared the way for a series of voyages unsur¬
passed in the history of maritime discovery : voyages whose record translated into all
[91]
8
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
the principal languages of Europe were the most popular reading of the period, and to .
this day they are a mine of information concerning the people then dwelling in the
islands of the great Pacific Ocean. The transit of Venus excited the greatest interest
among the astronomers of that day and the Royal Society prevailed upon the Govern¬
ment to send an expedition to the “South Sea” to make suitable observations. Tahiti
was selected as the most desirable place, and a young lieutenant, James Cook, who had
distinguished himself at Quebec and in the service generally, was put in command of
the Endeavor and sailed for the little known island. After exploring the group, which
he named “Society Islands” in honor of the Royal Society, he surveyed New Zealand
and the east coast of Australia with an accuracy which left little for his successors,
then sailed for home through Torres Strait. Brief must be the account in this place
of Cook’s voyages, but it may be stated that on the second, when the main object was
to explore the antardlic region, he sailed in the Resolution (460 tons) and discovered
New Caledonia and several islands of the New Hebrides. This time he sailed as Cap¬
tain, and on his return he was appointed Captain of Greenwich hospital with the rank of
post-captain. This honorable sinecure he left to command the Resolution and Dis¬
covery on a voyage to discover the “Northwest Passage”. Wintering in the Friendly
Islands, he discovered the Hervey Group, often called Cook’s Islands, and on his way
north found the Sandwich Islands, which his countrymen have hardly yet learned to
call Hawaiian. It was on his return from an unsuccessful search for the passage be¬
tween the Pacific and Atlantic that he died at the hands of the Hawaiians at Keala-
kekua Bay.
Cook’s example stimulated the French to renewed efforts, and the accomplished
Jean Francois Galaup de la Perouse was sent in 1785 to search for the delusive passage.
He was in command of the Boussole and, with his assistant De Fangle on the Astrolabe ,
sailed to the coast of Alaska. The same icy wall blocked their way that had turned Cook
back, but on the north-east coast of Asia they made some discoveries. In December,
1788, De Langle, Lamonon the naturalist, and ten of the crew of the Astrolabe were
massacred 011 Tutuila of the Samoan Group (named Navigator Islands by Bougain¬
ville), but the rest of the expedition reached Botany Bay in January, 1788, and was
not heard from after leaving that port.
In 1791 D’Entrecasteaux was sent in search of Fa Perouse. He surveyed the
Fouisiade Archipelago and made some interesting discoveries in that region but died
on board July 20, 1793, still ignorant of the fate of his countrymen. Only in 1828
Peter Dillon found the remains of the wrecked vessels on the island of Vanikoro in
the New Hebrides.
Fieutenant Bligh, in the Bounty , was at Tahiti in 1788, and six months after
the famous mutiny broke out and the commander was set adrift in an open boat. In
this he made his adventurous voyage to Timor discovering the Banks Islands on the
[92]
<?
ft
o.
■i
i
<
tn
3
©
2
►
o
a
*4/*
3
3
o
<S)
*
i
in
eg'?)
w
<S>
td
•J
Z>
fc
3
Q
•a
Q
3
(s')
CO
Q
Z
<
(0
hi
Z
-J
o
c r
<
o
5
o
?s
£*\
&
cy
o
$
$
«
8'-
s
8
a
5 5
5 £
D
ca
,: . ^
I
O
I
£ ^
&
HOI E. t 145
COOK AND LA PE ROUSE.
9
way. Captain Edwards, who was sent in the Pandora to search for the Bounty , dis¬
covered Anuda and Fataka Islands, but his ship was wrecked on a reef (Pandora Reef)
in Torres Strait.
In 1796-97 Captain Wilson, during the missionary voyage in the Duff, dis¬
covered the Gambier Islands and rediscovered the Duff Group. In the latter year there
was great activity in the Australian region when George Bass discovered Bass’ Strait,
and with Matthew Flinders surveyed the east coast of Tasmania. Captain Flinders
continued this work in the Investigator but was captured by the French in 1804 and
kept a prisoner for six years.
George Vancouver, another great Englishman who had been with Cook in his
last two voyages, explored the Pacific (1792-1795), especially on the north-west coast
of America, and had much to do with the conquest of the Hawaiian Group by Kameha-
meha. Only his untimely death soon after his return to England in 1795 prevented
his return to the Pacific for farther exploration.
The Russians now took up the task and in 1804 Admiral Kruseustern sailed
around the world.. From 1815 to 1818 Otto von Kotzebue followed in the Rio irk dis¬
covering a number of low islands in the Panmotus and farther north ; while in 1828
Liitke, in the Seniavine, surveyed the Carolines. To this nation also belongs the voy¬
age of Bellingshausen in 1819-21.
England continued the work with Captain William Beeehey in the B/ossoni ,
1825-28; Sir Edward Belcher in the Sulphur, 1836-42; Captain Fitzroy (with whom
was Charles Darwin) from 1832 ^*1836; and Sir Janies Ross with the Erebus and
Terror , 1841-43; all of the voyages adding largely to the knowledge of the Pacific.
In 1838 the United States Government entrusted to Lieutenant (afterwards
Admiral) Charles Wilkes the command of its first and greatest exploring expedition, and
under his direction surveys were made of the Hawaiian, Fiji, Samoan, Paumotu and otlier
groups, while the results to Natural Science were even greater than to geography.
The French had not been idle, and mention should be made of the following
government voyages in addition to those already noticed. Louis de Freycinet with
the Uranie and Phy sideline, 1817-20; Duperrey on the Coquille , 1822-25; Dumont
d’Urville on the Astrolabe , 1826-29; and du Petit Thouars on the I Inns, 1836-39,
made some geographical discoveries and corrected many mistakes of their predeces¬
sors, but perhaps their harvest was rather in the realm of Natural History, and
indeed with these voyages the discovery of new lands ceased and the efforts of suc¬
ceeding explorers were dire&ed mainly, to investigation of natural phenomena, as in
the Austrian voyage of the Novara , 1857-59, of which the naturalist Dr. Karl von
Scherzer was historian; and the Italian voyage of the Magenta, 1865-68, whose story
was so well told by another naturalist, Dr. Enrico Hillyer Giglioli. The greatest of
these scientific voyages was that of the English in the Challenger, 1872-76. The
IO
INDEX TO THE PA C/E/C ISLANDS.
depths of the ocean were studied in this long voyage and at the same time (1873-76)
the United States sent the Tuscarora in command of Belknap, Erben and Miller, to
take soundings for a submarine cable across the Pacific. The British ship Gazelle
took many soundings in the South Pacific, and the British ship Penguin under Com¬
mander Balfour has the distinction of reaching the greatest depth in this ocean in
1 895, when in latitude 30° 28' S. and longitude 176° 39' W. 5107 fathoms were meas¬
ured. The United States surveying vessel Albatross has made no slight contribution
to the knowledge of this ocean and its inhabitants of the lower forms of animal life.
Before we leave the story of the discoveries in this ocean tribute should be paid to the
hardy American whalers who discovered many islands and have left the name of their
ship, sometimes indeed their whole ship on the islands they discovered.
The activity at the present time in the examination of the oceanic depths due
to the various schemes for la}ring telegraphic cables will no doubt result in considera¬
ble increase of our knowledge of the bottom, and it seems probable that in the next
few years the map will be something more than a mere outline.
The story of the great discoverers is a tragic one, as nearly all met a violent
death, from Balboa to Dumont D’Urville, and every islet has its romance although
often untold by mortal tongue: Defoe did not tell of all the Robinson Crusoes, nor
Melville all about Typee. Islands have been found and lost again, men and ships
have been lost and never found again; and from the time when the early whalers were
said to have hung their consciences upon Cape Horn as they entered the Pacific
Ocean, to the later days when the labor pirates disposed of theirs in some ecpially con¬
venient way, there has been great crime and great cruelty through the islands of this fair
ocean. Those usually considered of a higher race who have voyaged tli rough the
Pacific have not always been missionaries, nor have they always been true to the tra¬
ditions of their race. How often have the}- expressed the utmost horror of the poor
untaught cannibals while themselves devouring the souls and lives of those they pre¬
tended to detest !
Glancing but briefly at the results of all these discoveries in the province of
Natural History we find certain fadts that will be a foundation for many theories as to
the origin of both animal and vegetable life on the land found here and there amid the
waste of waters. First of the great earth cup that contains this greatest of oceans, an
expanse of water extending 10,000 miles from Quito to the Moluccas and covering
nearly 70,000,000 square miles of the earth’s surface.
Depth of the Ocean. — Modern deep-sea soundings have established the fact
that the average depth of the Pacific Ocean is greater than that of the Atlantic, and
that in it are found the greatest depths yet reached in any ocean. The average height
of the continents bounding this ocean is 800 feet, while the average depth of the Pacific
is 2500 fathoms, or about three miles below the average continental level.
[94]
CURRENTS OF THE PACIFIC.
1 1
If an imaginary line be drawn from Honolulu to Tahiti the portion of the Pacific
to the east of this line is of comparatively even and moderate depth and there are few
islands. West of this line island groups are abundant and the bottom presents great
irregularities. Abysmal holes abound and submarine peaks arise in some cases many
thousand feet from a depressed plateau. Shallow traCts are said to extend from Pata¬
gonia to Japan, and parallel to this occur the wrinkle-like elevations of the bottom on
which occur the many groups of islands. The seas that fringe the western boundary
of this ocean are separated from the main basin by plateaus of considerable height,
although still submarine, and this feature has furnished rather insecure foundation
(in our present knowledge) for many theories of animal and vegetable distribution.
A matter of considerable interest is the occurrence of deep holes such as that the
Challenger found between the Caroline and Marianas Groups where the soundings indi¬
cated 4475 fathoms, or about five miles and a quarter. Another occurs east of Tonga ; one
has just been found near Midway Island, and the “deep” along the eastern coast of Japan
from 20° N. to 50° N. seems like a long narrow crack in the sea bottom. Other deeps have
been charted and the number which bear distinctive names is already considerable, but
they can best be studied in the Challenger reports and on the more recent hydrographic
charts. The shoals seem even more important as they may be inchoate islands.
Currents of the Pacific. — It is certainly known that the vast body of water
of this ocean is in a constant state of circulation, and in a way partly independent of
the prevailing winds, although, as we shall see below, the winds vary with the seasons
as do the main channels of circulation. In this place it is sufficient to mention the
great streams or arteries which flow in tolerably determined bounds and in constant
direction while we must pass by the less definite currents which are modified by lands,
by shoals, or by the winds, — currents which in meeting do not mingle, but the denser or
cooler current sinks below and passes beneath its lighter antagonist.
Bering Strait is but a little gateway and admits no important current from the
ArClic seas, but on the south from the AntarClic regions a strong current flows north
to New Zealand where it is turned eastward to the coast of Patagonia, a branch con¬
tinuing east past Cape Horn, while the main stream, called in honor of its discoverer
Humboldt, passes up the coast of South America until the isthmus of Panama defleCts
it to the west. As it meets the coast of Formosa it also encounters and travels with a
stream analogous to the Gulf Stream of the Atlantic, the Kuro siwa of the Japanese,
so called from its dark blue color. Merged with this it flows northeast then east until
the Alaskan shores divert it to the south and west. The Kuro siwa has an average
maximum temperature of 86° F., or about 12° greater than that of the waters of the
ocean through which it passes. Narrow near Formosa, it gradually broadens until
north of the Bonin Group it is 500 miles wide. Between the two great equatorial cur¬
rents flowing westward on either side of the equator is a narrow counter-equatorial
12
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
current flowing to the east. Still farther observations on the currents are needed, for
their influence, although of less interest to navigators in these days of steam-propelled
vessels has most important bearing on the peopling of the different groups.
The cases of Japanese junks recorded as drifting to the Hawaiian Islands and
to the north-west coast of America have often been referred to, and it is well known
that the inhabitants of the Alaskan Islands obtain much of their fuel as driftwood
from the Asiatic coast: it should also be noted that many of the largest and most
famous double canoes of the Hawaiians were hewn from logs of Oregon pine brought
to the shores of Niihau and Kauai by the waves. I myself saw dozens of such logs
in 1864, some of great size, some bored by Teredo, others covered with barnacles, along
the shores of Niihan. To the same shores are brought lumps of fine pumice which
the ancient Hawaiians freely used to polish their canoes and wooden dishes.
Winds of the Pacific. — In some considerable measure accelerators if uot
originators of oceanic currents are the prevailing winds. The two agencies combined
have had a large part in the distribution of animal and vegetable life through this
ocean. In the eastern half of the Pacific, which is comparatively free from land, the
north-east trade winds blow with marked regularity as far south as the equatorial belt
of calms which encircles the globe nearly parallel with the equator, and in the southern
hemisphere the south-east trade winds blow as regularly to the same belt where they
rise and return in the upper regions to the polar seas whence they came. Such is in
general the plan of air currents in the open ocean of the eastern half, but the north
and south limit of each of these trade winds varies with the season, and wherever isl¬
ands occur a variation results not always easy to explain : even the very low coral
islands are quite sufficient to change the force and direction of the trade winds, substi¬
tuting a land and sea breeze system. The following table, taken from Kerhallet, will
show clearly the variation of the “Trades”:
A TABLE OF THE LIMITS OF THE “TRADES” AS AFFECTED BY CHANGE OF SEASONS.
POLAR MM IT
January .
February .
March ...
April .
May .
June .
July .
August . . .
September
October .
November
December.
OF THE NE.
OF THE 8K.
21° 0' N.
33° 25' S.
9v r.u
29 0
Zo .)n
31 10
30 0
27 25
29 5
28 24
27 41
25 0
31 43
25 28
29 30
24 18
23 20
24 51
2;J 0
23 27
25 0
28 39
24 0
22 30
ades on the belt of the
OF THK NK.
6° 30' N.
4 1
X 15
4 45
7
9
12
15
13
12
58
(>
0
5(»
20
12
UATORIAL
' 1
„
MM IT
OF THE SK.
RREADTH OF THK
INTERVENING ZONE
OF CALMS.
N.
3°
0' N.
;t°
30'
2
0
2
1
5
50
2
25
2
0
2
45
3
30
4
in
2
30
7
28
5
4
7
1
2
30
u>
30
X
11
5
4.->
3
32
8
48
i
50
3
io
of the equator, perhaps owing to the unequal distribution of land and water in the two
hemispheres, for representing land by 100 the proportion of water in the north liemi-
L96]
WINDS OF THE PACIFIC.
13
sphere is 150 while in the south it is 628. Over the doldrums, at a great height,
hangs a belt of cloud formed by the opposing currents of different temperatures.
Foimerly it was believed that the trade winds extended over the entire breadth
of the Pacific, but although additional data are needed, enough are at hand to show
that this is true only of the region extending between the Galapagos and the Paumotus,
or from 90° to 150° west longitude, less than half its extent so far as the SE. trade winds
are concerned : the NE. trades blow as far west as the Mariannes. We fortunately
have tables of wind observation from two points in the western course of the northern
belt of wind. At Jaluit in the Marshall Group (169° E.) Dr. Steinbaeh has made the
observations given in the following table :
table of the direction of the wind at jaluit, marshall islands, for the three
YEARS 1892-1894 AS OBSERVED BY DR. STEINBACH.
(The Azures are percentages.)
N.
NNE. NE.
ENE.
E.
ESE.
SE.
SSE. S.
SW.
wsw.
NW.
NNW.
CALM.
January .
. 1
0 47
22
9
6
6
0 0
1
0
0
0
s
February .
2
2 34
27
lli
7
5
0 2
0
0
0
0
March .
. 0
0 35
31
17
6
5
0 0
0
0
0
0
6
April .
. 0
1 20
S4
23
7
6
2 0
0
0
0
0
4
May .
. 0
U IS
S3
29
7
4
1 1
1
0
1
0
14
June .
. 0
1 14
33
29
4
4
3 (1
0
0
0
0
11
July .
. 1
0 ' st
21
28
12
6
1 1
0
0
1
0
20
August .
. 0
1 ! 12
26
23
11
8
2 1
0
0
0
0
13
September . . .
. 1
0 5
16
13
10
13
9 1
1
0
0
1
25
October .
. 0
1 ft
n
18
17
24
12 2
1
1
1
0
8
November ...
. 0
0 1ft
24
IS
14
14
3 1
1
0
1
2
6
December .
1 4(>
22
13
8
4
1 j 0
1
0
0
0
4
At Ponape in the Caroline Group (158° E.) Mrs. L. H. Guliek, of the American
Mission, kept a meteorological record for several 3^ears. From this the winds for the
year 1854 are shown as follows:
MONTHS
DAYS OF
TRADE WIND.
Jan nary . 2!)
February . 2S
March . 23
April . 29
M ay . j 29
June . 22
DAYS OF
VARIABLE WIND.
0
1
2
s
DAYS OF CALM.
MONTHS.
DAYS OF
TRADE WIND.
DAYS OF
VARIABLE WIND.
DAYS OF CALM.
0
July .
11
11
9
0
August .
7
24
0
0
September .
11
16
3
»t
< tctober .
6
10
14
0
November ....
15
15
0
0
December .
29
1
0
Among the islands between the Australian coast and the Paumotu Group the
SE. trade winds are only felt during the winter or between March and Odlober. In
the belt of calms storms and abundant rains are not uncommon. South of the Tropic
of Capricorn are found the antitrades blowing from the NW. or W. with considerable
regularity, and north of the Tropic of Cancer blows the SW. anti-trade. This SW.
wind coming over the vast area of northern Asia is a cold dry wind, but when it crosses
the warm stream of the Japanese current it condenses the tropical vapors brought by that
stream from the south and thus causes almost perpetual fog: as it strikes the Alaskan
shores it is a warmer rain-bearing wind. In the western Pacific monsoons take the place
of the trade winds, blowing half of the year in one direction but reversing the direction
during the other half. The change of monsoons is much dreaded asprolifie of storms.
[97]
14
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Hurricanes seldom occur in the open Pacific, but in the region of Samoa and Fiji
and farther to the west are far from uncommon. The whole of the north-west portion
between 20° and 45° N. is subject to cyclonic storms called typhoons. A capital review
of these storms, both hurricanes and typhoons, is to be found in Segelhctndbuch fur den
St Men Ozean of the German Hydrographic Board, Hamburg, 1897.
Climate. — From the great range in elevation from the coral islet over which
the storm waves break to the heights of the island of Hawaii where the volcanic peaks
closely approach the line of 14,000 feet; from the winds of constant direction in the
eastern half to the fickle airs of the Solomon Islands : there is even in the main portion
of Oceania which is within the tropics a great variety of climate. In the trade wind
regions the moisture brought in the breezes is mainly precipitated on the windward
CORAL ISLANDS.
FIG. I.
HIGH ISLAND.
side of high islands leaving the lee side often dry and desert-like, while where the
monsoons prevail both sides get a share of the rain and the vegetation is more luxuri¬
ant and uniform. Indeed the rain is often superabundant on some groups of the
western Pacific, as the early Spanish navigators found to their disgust, for in those
days the seamen had no proper shelter and had to cook their food on the open deck.
The dry climate of the Hawaiian Islands where the natives could wear bark cloth had
its counterpart in the cool and wet New Zealand where the same Polynesian had to
make his garments of the warmer and more durable flax which he ingeniously made
water-proof. New Zealand and its dependencies alone extend beyond the tropics, and
[98]
VOLCANOES AND CORAL ISLANDS.
15
in the southern part of that noble group the southern Alps vie in beauty and majesty
with the better known Swiss mountains. Perhaps nowhere in the world outside of the
Pacific can so great a variety of climate be found. Tables of rainfall, maps of isother¬
mic lines can be given of some parts of the Pacific region, but the record is too imper¬
fect and as yet covers too narrow a territory to make it worth while to reproduce here.
Island Forms. — A marked difference exists between islands in our region : some
rise high above the ocean presenting conical peaks more or less eroded into radial val¬
leys ; the peaks and slopes generally, at least on the windward side, covered with dense
vegetation ; while the second class consists of a low sand bank not more than a dozen
feet above the ocean and only visible to the approaching vessel by the lofty coconut trees.
Of the former class are the Hawaiian, Samoan, Society Groups, and most of the western
islands, while to the latter class belong the Paumotus, Gilbert and Marshall Groups : the
two forms are sometimes combined as at the Fijian Group. So far as known all the
high islands of the central Pacific and most of those in the west are volcanic.
Volcanic Systems. — All along the shores of the Pacific are adtive volcanoes.
Commencing with the little known volcanoes of the Antarctic region, of which we may
hope to learn more in view of the present interest in Antarctic exploration, the Andes
continue the line with some of the loftiest in the world near the equator. Central
America presents volcanoes of great variety and interest, mostly detached and not in
mountain chains. Mexico with her Coseguina and others less adtive in modern times,
while Shasta, Ranier and Baker carry the line northward until it takes to the water in
the Alaskan Islands and crosses to the fine ranges of Kamchatka, then through Japan,
the Philippines to Java and Sumatra where it leaves this region. With such a wall of
fiery sentinels it is not surprising that the enclosed space should bristle with similar
volcanic and seismic phenomena. Hawaii on the north-east seems to be a prolongation
of the Mexican line which is marked by Colima, Popocatepetl and Orizaba. It is a
line of volcanic adtion extending nearly a thousand miles, although the portion to the
north-west has long been extinct. At the extreme southwest is the largest adtive crater
in the world, Kilauea, which has given its name to a remarkable type of pit crater.
The Marquesas, although volcanic, present no craters and have long been extinct: and
this is true of the Society Islands, but their near neighbor the Tongan Group is still
adtive and submarine volcanoes break out, form islands of loose cinders, and soon are
converted to shoals by the waves. New Zealand contains several grand volcanoes and
its volcanic phenomena in the way of hot springs are noteworthy. The “Terraces”
on the North island were the most beautiful in the world until destroyed by the erup¬
tion of Tarawera (in June, 1886). In the New Hebrides are several smaller adtive
vents; one of them, on Tanna, has been constantly adtive, like Stromboli, at least since
the time of Cook. The Solomon Islands and the Bismarck Archipelago are fully vol-
[99]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
16
came, eruptions frequently occurring in some part of that territory. A region of such
marked volcanic character might be expected to exhibit the concomitant phenomena of
earth movements, both earthquakes and the grander if less obtrusive movements of
elevation and depression, and it was the latter change in level that gave Darwin the
foundation of his ingenious theory of the formation of
Coral Islands. — Most important, both from a geological and a zoological
standpoint are the buildings of the coral-forming polyp. Throughout the portion of the
Pacific between the dotted lines on the diagram of this ocean ( Fig. 2) this minute animal
has by the force of numbers greatly increased the area of habitable land, made harbors
possible, and changed if not created currents, in the equatorial sea. This is not a work
now complete or of paroxysmal or intermitent nature, but it is a work of the present
day, like the aeolic erosion of valleys and shows no sign of diminution.
While the other great agency in the formation of the intra-Pacific lands, vulcan-
ism, seems to be diminishing from Hawaii to the Solomon Islands, the coral polyp, all
unconscious, it may be, as the volcano of its mighty work, goes on building up reefs
which in time become habitable islands.
As a certain degree of warmth is needed for the life as well as growth of reef¬
forming corals, and not all corals come into this class, the boundaries of the coral
region both north and south of the equator will be determined by the isocryme (or line
of equal cold) of 68° F., colder water preventing their growth, and their activity in¬
creasing with the mean temperature. In the hotter water under the equator the tem-
[100]
.
CORAL REEFS.
*7
perature is 85° F., or two degrees higher than in the Atlantic. The mean temperature
for the year is, in the North Pacific 73.5° F.; in the South Pacific, 70° F. Where the
temperature of the surface is never below 70° F. during the year, that is within i5°-20°
of the equator, the reef corals abound both in species and individuals, as at the Fiji
Group, which is one of the most remarkable coral gardens of the ocean. The Hawaiian
Islands are near the northern limit of subtorrid warmth and only the hardier forms are
found (as Porites and Pocillopora) and their growth is not so luxuriant : the beautiful
Madrepora of the southern groups is wholly wanting. This brief reference must
suffice to indicate the important fadtor that temperature makes in the distribution
of reefs. Corals will not grow in muddy water, or when the percentage of salt falls
below a certain point, hence their absence opposite the discharge of rivers. In
depth the living corals (reef-building) do not extend beyond twenty-five fathoms
or 150 feet (Dana).
The Hawaiian Islands are well provided with fringing reefs but have no
barrier reefs, and these two forms are thus distinguished : the former is a fringe or ex¬
tension around or on certain coasts of a high island, presenting a tolerably flat surface
at low tide, interrupted by wells and channels ; the latter is detached from the shore
by a channel of greater or less width, and may form a wing encircling the island, or it
may extend along a coast as the Great Barrier Reef of the east coast of Australia
which extends parallel with that coast some 1250 miles. What is the explanation of
these detached reefs ? It is not so difficult to understand the growth from a shore
as the polyp grows, comes too near the surface, is exposed too long at low tide, dies
and its successors have to push seaward. On most fringing reefs the dead far out¬
numbers the living coral. If coral, probably from a deficiency of light, cannot grow
at a depth below twenty-five fathoms, how could a detached mass start from the bottom
of an ocean which in the immediate vicinity of most coral islands presents a much
greater depth ? Charles Darwin explained this in a very simple way and his conclu¬
sions, with all their consequences, were accepted as satisfactory for many years. It is
well known that changes of level take place in “solid” land. On the Hawaiian island,
Oahu the ancient coral reef is now from two to three fathoms above the level at which
it was formed not many ages ago, and other regions have as evidently subsided. In
this subsidence Mr. Darwin finds the key to the formation of barrier reefs. Granted
the subsidence this theory capitally explains all the phenomena of reef formation.
Agassiz, Dr. Murray and Professor Alexander Agassiz (feeling that the subsidence
theory was not proven for all localities) base their explanation of the barrier reef
on the growth of the coral on the rim of a volcanic crater at a suitable depth. There
is this difficulty that some of the atolls in the Indian Ocean would presuppose a crater
thirty miles in diameter, a size which has no parallel on the earth’s surface. Interest
has lately been excited in this question by the borings on the coral island of Funafuti,
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 2. — 2. D®G
i8
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
and by the renewed explorations of Alexander Agassiz, but at the present writing the
evidence is not conclusive on either side.
Without adopting either theory we may state that coral islands have a fringing
reef more or less interrupted, sometimes a barrier reef, while the island in many eases
becomes simply a ring of circular or irregular form, and the enclosed space is called a
lagoon in the atoll. An opening into this lagoon may convert it into a good boat
harbor, or the continuity of the ring and the growth of coral or the wash of sand and
debris may fill the lagoon converting it into a simple coral island with a fringing reef.
Many islands have simply a depression in the centre marking the former lagoon.
Atolls have often many islets inhabited on the ring, while other islets rise from the
shallow lagoon.
From the organic nature of the reefs they are constantly changing, and the
change is generally a growth : hence channels become shallower and unless kept open
by some fresh water stream finally close ; lagoons which have served for harbor to ves¬
sels of light draft become dry land. Coral rock is easily cut and artificial channels
can often be cut to good harbors, and the apparent scarcity of such havens in the cen¬
tral Pacific may be remedied. The growth of coral patches off harbors and in channels
is a serious danger to navigation and requires frequent surveys. The rate of growth
of coral reefs is not yet satisfactorily determined. Darwin’s Voyage of the Beagle , and
Dana’s Corals and Coral Islands may be consulted for farther information as to the
growth of corals. In regard to the geographical distribution of reefs it may be briefly
stated that there are no reefs on the South American coast, and only detached corals in
the Panama region. Easter Island is without reefs, so is Pitcairn, although there are
some growing corals about the latter, while the neighboring Paumotus consist of eighty
coral islands, nearly all with lagoons ; the Marquesas have little coral about them ;
the Society Islands and Fiji abound in reefs. The Samoan and Tongan are well pro¬
vided with reefs, although in the former group Tutuila has less coral than Upolu. Of
the Hawaiian Islands Kauai, Oahu and Molokai have extensive reefs, while Maui and
Hawaii have very little except detached corals ; Necker and Nihoa have none, but
farther toward the west are many reefs. The Gilbert, Marshal and Caroline Islands
are almost entirely coral. The Marianas are actively volcanic in the northern por¬
tion where there are no reefs, but the southernmost Guam has extensive reefs ; so have
Yap and the Pelews. The New Hebrides again are actively volcanic and have few
reefs, while New Caledonia abounds in them. The Coral Sea and Great Barrier reef
continue the line southward. The Touisiade Group and the Admiralty Islands have
barrier and fringing reefs, while the north coast of New Guinea which is fringed with
volcanic islands has no reefs. Of the Solomon Group only the western portion has
extensive fringing reefs. As to the extent of all the reefs in the western Pacific there
is great lack of trustworthy information.
[102]
FLORA OF 7 HE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
19
Flora. — On the shores of nearly all the islands in our region are found a few
plants common to all tropical countries, and which are easily dispersed by currents.
They belong to the families Malvaceae, Convolvulacese, Solanaceae and Leguminosae,
and are of little interest. This association of plants is often called the madreporic
flora. In the low islands of the Pacific there is little else for the botanist; add the
ubiquitous pandanus, coconut and mangrove and the tale is told. In the high islands
the interesting and peculiar flora begins at the height of about 1200 feet, and it is this
flora that contains all the species peculiar to the islands.
In the many shaded and moist valleys of Polynesia ferns find a congenial home,
and from the lightness of their spores are easily distributed ; hence the Polynesian
flora presents 15% of ferns. Other predominant plants are provided with especially
light seeds as in the families Urticaceae, Rubiaeeae, Lobeliaceae and Orchidacae. The
last family counts many species in Fiji and the Society Islands as well as in Australia,
while on the Hawaiian Group only three small species are found. On the other hand, of
the Lobeliaceae none are found in Fiji, three only in the Society Islands, while on the
Hawaiian Islands are found more than fifty species. Most of the Polynesian vegetation
is woody; annuals form only 1%, and most of these are strangers confined to the shores.
The question of the origin of the plants on isolated groups is of great interest,
but its discussion would carry 11s far beyond the limits of this introductory chapter.
It will be found, however, that the widely disseminated plants are either provided with
wings or other suitable appendages for the wind-borne journey, or are attractive food
for birds of passage. In the stomachs of pigeons killed in Micronesia have been found
the seeds of Fijian plants. The lantana (Z. camara ) was cultivated for years in gar¬
dens in the Hawaiian Islands but it showed no tendency to spread until the so-called
inina ( Acridotheres tristis) was introduced, when the berry became its favorite food
and the indigestible seed was scattered everywhere. Cosmopolitan species are intro¬
duced by winds and currents, hence a study of these will explain many cases. Rare
American plants are almost confined to the Hawaiian Group, the nearest to that con¬
tinent and in the line of the NB. trade winds.
Of the flowering plants the proportion to the whole flora is in south-eastern
Polynesia 20%; in Fiji, 40%; and in the Hawaiian Islands, 80%. The affinities of the
plants in each group are instructive. About 500 species are common to Asia and
tropical Australia. Some 220 species are common to New Zealand and Australia.
Of the two species of Ranunculus found on the Hawaiian Islands, one resembles
R. sericeus of Mauritius; the other, R. repens of America. Fiji has one species each
of three Asiatic genera, Terns troemia , Saurauja and Eurya. Hawaii and the Mar¬
quesas have each a species of the distinctively American genus Waltheria .
If we look rapidly at a few of the more important families we shall find that the
Leguminosae are not common in Polynesia; of the genus Acacia all the species peculiar
[io3]
20
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
to this region are phyllodineous and the rest of this peculiar group is Australian.
Among Rosaceae the genus Acacna has one species peculiar to the Hawaiian Islands
while some thirty other species are South American. Of Pittosporaceae the genus
Pittosporum , which is Australian in large part, has twelve species in New Zealand, ten
in the Hawaiian Islands, six in Fiji, and one in Southeastern Polynesia. The family
Rubiaceae contains 7% of the flowering plants peculiar to the Hawaiian Islands, 14%
of those peculiar to Fiji, and in New Caledonia some two hundred species are reported.
In all the islands there are three hundred species, while Australia has scarce one
hundred. There are several curious Composite in the Hawaiian Islands, Wilkesia ,
Argyroxiphium and Remya. The genus L ipochceta has one species in the Galapagos
while twelve are Hawaiian. Of the Campanulaceae, besides five species of Lobelia ,
there are five genera, Brighamia , Delissea , Rollandia , Clermontia , and Cyanea peculiar
to the Hawaiian Islands, and another Apetahia peculiar to the Society Islands: the
family is not found beyond those two groups in Polynesia : the centre of the Lobeliaceae
is American. Of the Urticacese the genus Ficus has a dozen species peculiar to Fiji,
twenty-three (all but six peculiar) in New Caledonia. The Palms are all related to
the Malaysian flora. In the Filices the relationship is well shown in the following
table taken from Drake del Castillo:
TYPE.
FIJI.
CENTRAL AND EAST
POLYNESIA.
HAWAII.
Asiatic .
59 p. c.
50 p. C.
13 p. c.
Australian .
3
2
1
New Zealand .
3
2
4
American .
9
2(1
26
Cosmopolite .
26
26
32
ALL OCEANIA.
3
IS
44
The paucity of edible fruits is a feature of the Polynesian flora as is also the
absence of poisonous plants on most of the islands. Although not rivaling the Ameri¬
can economic woods in variety or beauty, there are nevertheless many choice timber
woods in the Pacific Region. The koa of Hawaii, the kauri of New Zealand, the kou
and kaniani of the southern islands, and the eucalypti of Australia are both beautiful
and valuable, although many are fast disappearing and I know of no serious attempt
to cultivate them.
Throughout Polynesia proper the Kalo ( Caladium esculentum ) was the staple
vegetable food, varied, in the southern islands with the Breadfruit ( Artocarpus incisa) ,
and to the west, especially on sand islands and in Micronesia, the fruit of the Pandanus
odoratissimus is an important addition to the dietary. Bananas, yams, sugar-cane,
kukui nuts, Canarium nuts, the fruits of some Myrtacese and Vaccinieae were the prin¬
cipal fruits of the ancient Pacific-islander: all the fruits that now abound in the gar¬
dens and orchards have been brought since the time of Cook.
For farther information on the PAlora one may consult Remarques sur la Flore
de la Polynisie par E. Drake del Castillo, Paris, 1890; A LeLlure on Insular Floras, by
[104]
FA UNA.
21
J. D. Hooker, London, 1868; also Dr. Hooker’s admirable New Zealaiid Flora ; Mann’s
Enumeration of Hawaiian Plants; Die Vegetation der Erde , by A. H. R. Grisebach ;
Introduction to the Botany of the Challenger Expedition , by W. B. Helmsley.
Land Fauna. — In eastern Polynesia rats and mice were the only indigenous
mammals, but to the west the wonderful Marsupials of Australia and New Guinea, the
fruit-eating bats and some small and comparatively unimportant mammals extend the
list slightly. Reptiles are not more abundant. New Zealand and the Hawaiian
Islands have no snakes. Samoa, Fiji and Micronesia have a few harmless forms;
while Australia has numerous deadly species. Crocodiles are found in Queensland
and on some of the islands not far distant, and the lizards of Australia are of many
species and sometimes of considerable size. New Zealand has the curious Tuatara
( Hatteria punctata , Gray), but as we go eastward the species and individuals diminish
until on the Hawaiian Group there are but six small species- of lizard, and these are
disappearing before the introduced mongoos. Of the birds New Guinea has the re¬
markable Birds of Paradise, and Australia has many and most interesting species.
New Zealand has the Kiwi, a remnant of some of the most wonderful birds, now ex¬
tinct, that have ever lived. Samoa has another survival in the Didunculus , but again
as we go east the birds grow scarce. In insect life the rule holds good and the fine
butterflies and gigantic beetles of New Guinea give place to one or two diurnal lepi-
doptera on Hawaii, where the insect fauna has been well worked and although of great
interest to the entomologist has little to interest by size or beauty of form.
The marine fauna is indeed as rich as the land fauna is poor, and the low coral
islands of the central Pacific swarm with fishes which have always been the principal
food of the inhabitants. These fishes are closely connected with Bast Indian forms.
The great mammals of this ocean are far more important than those of the land and
deserve far more notice than can be given in this sketch.
Whales and the whaling Industry. — I place the whales and their pursuit
together, for no other animals have caused such changes to the primitive inhabitants
and no study of the ethnology of the Pacific can omit or fail to give its proper promi¬
nence to the whalers and their intercourse with the islanders of this ocean. The days
are gone when fifty or more American whalers wintered or refitted in the harbors of the
Hawaiian Group, but the effedls of this intercourse will only cease when the weaker
race has wholly succumbed to the advance of the white race. It is pleasanter to look for
a moment at the whales than to consider the adls of their hunters. The polar whale
l^Balcena mysticetus ) comes only into the most northern part of our region, but another
species (B . japonica) is found from continent to continent nearly as far south as the
Tropic of Cancer. Still another species is common south of Australia, around the
South American continent, and to some extent between these points ( B . antipodum) .
D°5]
22
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
The Sperm whale ( Physeter macrocephalus ) is found between Australia and New
Zealand, in Micronesia and around certain groups as the Hawaiian, Marquesas, Fiji
and Society Islands. It is much more tropical than the Balaenas, and while the latter
prefer the cold polar waters and seldom go beyond the cooler currents of the Pacific,
the cachelot is found especially in the tropical region and serves to employ the ardlic
whalers during the off season in the northern seas. Besides these “nobility” of the
whale kind there are lesser lights hunted in the Pacific as in the Atlantic. The
humpback ( Megaptera boops ) is found all along the American coast, at many of the
central island groups in the tropics, and off the shores of New Zealand, New Cale¬
donia and Australia. The Sulphurbottom ( Sibbaldia sulphureus) , Graywhale ( Rha -
chianectes glaucus) , Pacific finback ( Balaenoptera velifera ) and Rorqual (Z?. davidsoni )
are found off Japan, in Bering Sea and off the American coast.
The pursuit of these great mammals employed many men and much capital as is
well known. When in full force in 1846 there were 735 American vessels with an aggre¬
gate tonnage of 233,133 tons. It may perhaps be forgotten that a whale ship, from the
length and hardship of the voyage was regarded as a sort of reform school for rather
hardened young offenders who were not amenable to the good influences on land. Hence
it happened that many of these quasi convidts escaped to the island Edens and played
the part of the serpent. But with these important exceptions I believe the influence
of the whaling industry was not one of preponderant evil. Many natives went as
sailors on these ships and learned to work as they would never have learned in the
dolce far niente of their homes, and it was often the advice of these travelled country¬
men that opened the door to the white missionary. It is impossible to believe that
the influence of the sturdy men who sailed from New Bedford and Nantucket was very
bad. Have we not known them in their homes and shaken hands with their worthy
descendants? Of the literature on this subject may be mentioned, F. D. Bennett,
Whaling Voyage Round the Globe , 1833-36; Beale, The Sperm Whale and its Captors ,
1839; United States Fish Commission Report , 187 57 Scammon, Mammalia of North¬
western America , 1883.
Inhabitants and Their Origin. — In no part of the primitive world has
there been more confusion of races, more difficulty in exact classification, and, it must
be added, more ignorance of people than in the Pacific. We have prehistoric remains
in Easter Island, in Tongatabu, in Ponape and in the Marianas of which Ethnologists
know no certain origin. The great leaders of Ethnology have measured a few skulls
(too often labelled “South Seas”) and have compared imperfect vocabularies, and then,
with some hesitation it is true, have made family arrangements in which they do not
agree among themselves, and which farther knowledge may modify or replace. But
this is not the place to enter into a discussion of the different systems, nor to follow
[106]
INDIGENOUS INHABITANTS.
2 3
that fascinating — because so difficult — quest for the origin of the peoples we now find
on the islands of the Pacific. All admit they are not autoethonous, but theories of
their origin start both from the East and from the West. One claims that the Poly¬
nesians, to take one of the more evident divisions of the islanders, came from the great
Malayan islands and worked eastward ; another contends that they had their origin in
South or Central America and were dispersed through the great ocean by the Trades ;
while another, admitting their Asiatic birth, claims that they not only crossed the
Pacific and peopled it, but continued their planting to the American continent. Let
the theories await more complete knowledge: in the meantime all theorists in this
domain are helping towards a final solution.
We may, to save repetition in the list of island names of which this is an ex¬
tended introduction, adopt the most common and perhaps most correct classification
into three main divisions without going beyond our region for relationships. These
are Papuan, Micronesian and Polynesian. With the first we place Australians and
the people of New Guinea, Pelew Islands, Bismarck Archipelago, Solomon Islands,
New Hebrides, New Caledonia, Eoyalty Islands and Fiji. The Australians are strongly
differentiated from the others in mental if not in physical traits, and the Vitians are
strongly tindfured with Polynesian blood, but on the whole the islanders mentioned
agree in the following important matters; flat and abundant hair on both head and
body; skin dark — almost black in Australia, Solomon Islands and New Caledonia,
chocolate-colored in New Guinea, yellowish (from Malay admixture) in the Pelew Isl¬
ands; scar or paint the bod}q but do not tatu ; do not circumcise except in Australia,
Fiji and some islands of the New Hebrides; heads dolichocephalic, prognathous and
phanerozygomatic ; nose broad and hooked ; lips intumescent but not so full as in the
negro ; height medium ; chew betel rather than awa ; have artistic feeling in decora¬
tion (especially in New Guinea and the Bismarck Archipelago); cook in earthen
vessels; are cannibals (except Australians and the Pelew Islanders); are noisy and
restless, decidedly democratic, have no kings nor hereditary chiefs ; show no sentiment
in favor of clothes ; are irreligious and exhibit great diversity of dialedls.
The Micronesian division includes the Marianas, Caroline, Marshall and Gilbert
groups. It is a debatable ground between the first and last divisions. The people are
a plainly mixed race of Papuan and Poljmesian ancestry with considerable Malay ad¬
mixture at the western end. They are less democratic than the Papuans, more so than
the Polynesians; use looms (as do also the New Hebrideans); are good navigators;
tatu to some extent (Carolines); considerable diversity of dialedts with many Polyne¬
sian roots.
In the Polynesian Group are the Hawaiians, Samoans, Tahitians, Marquesans,
Tongans, Paumotuans and Maoris. They have long, black, cylindrical hair, little of
it on body, hence addidted to tatuing in which they excel ; brachycephalie, and not
[107]
24
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
very prognathous ; fairly large stature ; light-colored ; very large dark eyes ; practise
circumcision; are not cannibals (except Marquesans and Maoris); caste institutions
with kings and chiefs ; are very religious ; kapu system in full force ; use awa, never
betel ; no looms, no earthen vessels ; cook in earth ovens and with hot stones ; make
kapa or bark cloth (as do also the Solomon Islanders and some tribes of New Guinea);
have a strong sentiment of dress; have a common language from Hawaii to New Zeal¬
and; are good seamen and fishermen. In ancient times were good navigators journey¬
ing in their canoes to almost incredible distances as seen in the ancient voyages of the
Hawaiians to Tahiti.
In every generalization there must be many exceptions, but the characters here
given are very general. The hybrids are very numerous and most difficult to place
when met casually. The Papuan -f- Polynesian hybrid is much more homogeneous,
that is, more difficult to pick out traits of either parent, than is the mixture of
Chinese -j- Polynesian, where the Mongolian predominates but the Polynesian is still
in evidence. Otherwise half-breeds in the Pacific are much as half-breeds are every¬
where else.
Cannibalism. — This custom which arouses a curious horror in most civilized
people, although man is a carnivorous animal and human flesh is not unwholesome,
was once prevalent in the Marquesas, Fiji and New Zealand, and is now in full force
in the Solomon Islands, New Hebrides, Bismarck archipelago and parts of New
Guinea. Elsewhere in the Pacific it has never existed or has yielded to the pressure
of civilization. The origin of this curious habit has been ascribed to various causes,
as for instance, piety — the nearest relative devouring the remains of a dear corpse to
place them nearest the seat of the affedtions and to protect them from outrage by the
enemy. Such disposal has occurred on groups not otherwise anthropophagic. To
absorb the qualities of another is, I believe, the most orthodox application of cannibalism.
Brave and tried warriors were eaten, never women or children, and the true cannibal
never allowed a woman to eat a man! Certainly the portions in which the desired
qualities were supposed to reside were most sought, the hand, the heart, the testes.
This effect of food is, perhaps unconsciously, recognized in the navy of a great nation
where mutton is never eaten lest the marines become sheepish. It is worthy of note
that the worst cannibals in the Pacific were also the most skilled producers. Maori
and Marquesan carvings, Solomon Island canoes, New Hebridean mats are all in evi¬
dence. Revenge; that sweet passion in the savage thought, — to cook an enemy like a
dog or pig, to drink his blood, is world-wide in desire if not in full execution, and Kali
the bloodthirsty wife of Shiva in the Hindu pantheon is not the only primitive deity
in which this passion is personified. Needed food: man, although carnivorous, did not
suffer from famine on the Pacific Islands, at least on those where anthropophagy pre¬
vailed, but it has been suggested that in the long voyages food may have failed as it
[ioSJ
LANGUAGE.
25
has too often in the voyages of civilized men, and the weakest has been sacrificed to
save life. The strong persistence of the habit once acquired is fully recognized. This
might explain the prevalence of the custom among Maoris and Marquesans at opposite
ends of the Polynesian domain. Cakobau used to boast that he had eaten one hundred
and seventy-five of his fellow Yitians, and a New Hebridean belt in the Bishop Museum
is hung with one hundred and thirty-five incisors, the tally of so many victims of its
chiefly owner; but the commoner got little of this rich food, and now it has come that
under British rule the last vestiges of this custom have been wiped out in the two
South Pacific strongholds, New Zealand and Fiji. Even the trophies of cannibalism,
arm and leg bones inserted in the stem of a growing tree, are more common in museums
than in the Fijian archipelago. Evidently in the Pacific it will soon be only a matter
of history.
Languages. — While among the Polynesian islanders there is an unmistakable
relationship of language, in the Melanesian the confusion of Babel seems to rule
supreme. O11 not a few small islands of Micronesia several mutually unintelligible
tongues are found, and it would require much imagination to trace any connection.
The languages of New Guinea are so little known that no comparisons can be drawn
between them and the Melanesian, nor can it be stated with authority whether the
Mala}- element is more preponderant there than in the tongues farther east. Codring-
ton (in the work mentioned below) seems to regard the Melanesian as superior to the
Polvnesian. The languages of Australia offer other differences and still less relation¬
ship to the Malay. Even where certain common words are selected and compared in
the forty or fifty dialeCts of which vocabularies are accessible, the result is by no means
satisfactory, and to classify one must have recourse not to roots but to grammatical
structure, of which not enough is at present known to warrant any definite scheme.
To enter into the peculiarities of even the best known would require not only much
space but a knowledge beyond the reach of the present writer, and the subject will be
left with a few examples of the languages of the Pacific as they have been printed.
Those who are curious to know more may consult the works of which a list is appended.
The similarity between the Polynesian dialeCts is so great that a native of one group
finds little difficulty in making himself understood in any other. Codrington, R. H.,
The Melanesian Languages , Oxford, 1885; Gabelentz, H. C. von de, die Melanesischen
Sprachen , 2 vols., Leipzig, 1860-73; Humboldt, Wm. von, Ueber die Kawi Sprache
aup der fusel Java , 3 vols., Berlin, 1836-38; Hale, Horatio, Ethnography and Philology
of the U. S. Ex. Ex., Philadelphia, 1846; Inglis, J., Grammar and Dictionary of the
Aneityumese Language, London, 1882; Grezel, Pere, Diflionnaire Fu tu n ien-Frangais,
Paris(?), n. d.; Tregear, E., Maori - Polynesian Comparative Dictionary, Wellington, N.
Z., 1891; Andrews, L. A., Dictionary of the Hawaiian Language, Honolulu, 1865;
Pratt, G., Grammar and Dictionary of the Samoan Language, 2d ed., London, 1891 ;
[109]
26
INDEX TO THE PA CIFIC ISLANDS.
Macdonald, D., The Asiatic origin of the Oceanic languages ; Etymological Dictionary
of the language of Ef ate, London, 1894; Hazlewood, D., A Feejeean and English Dic¬
tionary, Vewa, Fiji, 1850; Cowie, Andson, English- Sulu- Malay Vocabulary, London,
1893 ; Williams, W. L., A DiBionary of the New Zealand Language, 4th ed., Auck¬
land, 1892; Crawfurd, J., A Grammar and DiBionary of the Malay Language, Lon¬
don, 1852; Gaussin, Dialect de Tahiti, de celui des lies Marquises, et en general de la
langue Polynesienne, Paris, 1853; Bopp, F, Verwandscliaft der malayische -polynesische
Sprachen mit den indisch-europaischen, Berlin, 1840.
The illustrative sentence I have chosen is the invocation of the Lord’s prayer,
“Our Father which art in heaven, Hallowed be thy name.” — Matthew vi, 9.
Hawaiian — E ko makou Makua iloko o ka lani, i hoanoia kou inoa.
Maori — E to matou Matua i te rangi, kia tapu tou ingoa.
Tahitian — E to matou Metua i te ao ra, ia raa to oe i’oa.
Tongan — Ko e man Tamai oku i he lagi, ke tabuha ho huafa.
Rarotongan — E to matou Metua i te ao ra, Kia tapu toou ingoa.
Samoan— Lo matou Tama e o i le lagi, ia paia lou suafa.
Rapanui — To matou Matua noho rangi e, ka tapu to koe ingoa.
Fiji- — Tama i keimami mai lomalagi Me vakarokorokotaki na yacamu.
Aneiteum — Ak Etamama an nohatag, Etniu itaup nidam.
Erromanga — Itemen e kam unpokop, eti tumpora nin enugkik.
Uea — Kamdmun etho nyi drany, E so e kap iam.
Mare — Ceeewangoiehnij’ile ri awe ke! Hmijocengo ko re acekiwangoieni buango.
Lifu — Tetetro i anganyihunieti e kohoti hnengodrai, jiniati e hmitote la atesiwa i enetilai.
Motu — Ai Tamamai guba ai noho, oi ladamu baine ahelagaia.
Gilbert Islands — Tamara are i karawa, E na tabuaki aram.
Mortlock — Ie ojon ami au pue iotok: Jam at me nono lan.
Rotuma — Ko otomis Oifa tae e lagi, La re titiaki se oil asa.
Kusaie — Papa tumus sn in kosao, E’los oal payi.
Ebon — Jememuij i Ion, En kwojarjar Etom.
Ponape — Jam at me kotikot naloh, mwar omwi en kakanaki er. (Old version.)
Ponapc — Jam at me kotikot nalan, Mmar omui en Jaraui ta. (New version.)
Religion. — As has already been said the Polynesians were a religious people
and their theogony was much the same on all the groups. The attributes of the gods
differed widely, and the forms of worship as well. On the Hawaiian Group Maui,
Kane and Lono were the great trinity while their subordinates were reckoned by the
40,000 and the 400,000. Images were in demand and an odd beach-worn pebble would
serve where the more elaborate carvings could not easily be obtained. Every guild
[no]
WORSHIP AND MISSIONS.
27
had its deity, and the man often had a god distinct from that of his wife. In New
Zealand divine images were rare and a very few of inferior workmanship have come to
us. It is remarkable that when the Maoris excelled in wood-carving their skill was
expended on other than divine images. So it was to even a greater extent with the
Fijians and Samoans. Of the Society Islands idols of most complicated form and
good workmanship are to be seen in the British Museum, but nowhere else. In Tonga
images and bundles of sticks alike served to fix the wandering prayers of the people.
Human sacrifices were most common on the Hawaiian Islands where cannibalism did
not exist, least common among the anthropophagous Vitians.
In the western Pacific the objedls of worship were generally departed spirits,
and a refined form of this ancestor worship is seen in the curious custom of Korowars
in New Guinea which recalls the image always provided for the ka of the ancient
Egyptian. The idols of the Marquesan at one end of the Pacific and of the New
Hebridean at the other were elaborately cut from wood or stone. The temples of east¬
ern Polynesia were built of stone in substantial manner, while in the west the Mela¬
nesian eredted ephemeral structures of cane or palm leaves, and the Fijian built with
sinnet the hardly more durable “Devil Houses” of his cult. Had not the Hawaiian
temples been destroyed by the hand of man they would have lasted for many centu¬
ries; this is also true of the morais of the Tahitians.
Throughout the Pacific there was an unseen world recognized by all. Good
spirits and bad, white spirits and black were everywhere and were generally objects
of dread and propitiation. Night was especially the time wffien the spirits drew near
to human beings, and even when Christianity has replaced many of the ancient beliefs
a Pacific islander does not like to travel alone in the dark.
Missions. — This is not the place to speak at length of the great work the
devoted bands of missionaries have been doing for the last eighty years in the Pacific
region. All sedts, from the Buddhist and Mahometan on the west to the Protestant,
Catholic and Mormon on the east have earnestly ploughed some portion of the field,
and the harvest has in many cases been good. With the religious Polynesians the
work was not so difficult, and in turn the Tongan, Samoan and Hawaiian converts
became earnest and successful helpers in the missions to the other groups. In the
Marquesas faithful Hawaiian missionaries have labored for many years, and so have
they done in Micronesia. The Melanesian Mission has also made good use of native
converts in reclaiming the heathen. The whalers made it possible for the mission¬
aries to land on many islands, and the missionaries have in turn made it possible and
pleasant for other civilized people to dwell where formerly paganism and cannibalism
were supreme.
[in]
28
INDEX TO 7 HE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Kapil System. — The early voyagers found almost everywhere on the islands
at which they touched a system of which the name has become a common English
word. They recognized it as a method of prohibition against which they were con¬
stantly striking, but to the present day no one has fully treated of the wonderful politi¬
cal and religious engine by which the Polynesian first, the Melanesian in imitation
controlled the wishes and adts of the common people. It was a might}' power in the
hands of the ruler, whether priest or chief, and it might be exemplified in the strip of
white kapa that, bound around a coconut tree, preserved the fruit from all marauders;
or the tuft of the same fragile material at the end of a slender wand which placed in
the path would turn an army aside into the jungle. It might be temporary, as the
order of silence which at stated times fell on all the land and not even a dog might
bark or a cock crow while the kapu lasted, or it might be the lasting prohibition which
denied to woman certain choice articles of food which man was free to eat.
The origin of kapu is unknown but it must have been remote, so elaborate had
the system become. It had grown until it became so complicated that the understand¬
ing of the common people could not compass it, and even to the chiefs its restrictions
grew unbearable until in the Hawaiian Islands, where it reached its most perfect
development, a great uprising swept it away and left a clear field for the introduction
of Christianity.
My knowledge is not sufficient to permit me to decide which was the greatest
achievement of the Polynesian mind, the Kapu or the system of water rights. Both
are admirable and should sometime receive the attention the}’ deserve in the thought
of scholars. For information on these subjects consult: Grey's Polynesian Mythology ,
London, 1855; Codrington, R. H., The Melanesians; Studies in their Anthropology
and Folk-lore , Oxford, 1891; Gill, W., Myths and Songs of the South Pacific , London,
1876; Stair, J. B., Old Samoa , London, 1897; Ellis, W., Polynesian Researches, Lon¬
don, 1830, 2 vols.; Bastian, A., Zur Kenntniss Hawaii's, Berlin, 1883; Fornander, A.,
The Polynesian Race, 3 vols., London, 1878-85; Remy, J., Re cits d'un zdeux sauvage
pour servir a I'histoire ancienne de Havaii , Chalons-sur-Marne, 1859.
The Partition of the Pacific . — Unlike the partition of the African conti¬
nent, the appropriation of the islands of the Pacific has led to no important wars or
diplomatic difficulties, and the division is now nearly complete. Foreign nations have
not quarrelled over the spoil and the natives have generally acquiesced in a change of
sovereignty which they could not well prevent. In New Zealand the Maoris made a
fierce resistance to the invaders, but this did not last long. France found some fight¬
ing before she could control all the south-eastern portion of the Pacific, and Spain
found some energetic protests to her work in the Marianas. Elsewhere it was “Good
God, good devil” to the natives so long as they had their accustomed food and were
not compelled to work.
[112]
PARTITION OF THE ISLANDS.
29
Among the powers there was slight friction at times. The Hawaiian Islands
were seized by England (Lord George Paulet) but relinquished, threatened by France
(La Place) and Japan until the United States put an end to all claims by annexation.
In Micronesia Germany’s claim to a part of the Carolines was adjudicated by the Pope,
and now Spain has sold all of that extensive archipelago as well as the part claimed, and
thrown in the remnant of the Marianas to boot to Germany. The tripartite attempt
to govern Samoa threatened to make trouble, but this was happily averted by the
withdrawal of Great Britain and the amicable division of the group by Germany and
the United States. When by the fortune of war the United States acquired Guam and
the Philippines, Spain ceased to be an important owner of Pacific territory, and Eng¬
land, the United States, Germany, France and Japan control the entire region.
When the question of a trans-Pacific telegraphic cable arose there was adtive
annexation by Great Britain of all islands, islets or rocks that happened to be in any
of the tracks proposed, and Japan seized Marcus Island in imitation of more important
powers. In the hurry some islands were taken that had already been appropriated by
another government, but the real value of these bits of sand and rock is not sufficient
to make trouble in these days of wiser arbitration.
The colonization of these islands, some of them without inhabitants, others with
a dying population, but many of them most attractive in scenery and climate, has not
yet progressed far except on the Hawaiian Islands, New Zealand and Australia.
Germany has an elaborate official organization in her colonial islands, but officials
alone will not bring prosperity to a colony. France has some choice islands, but for
some reason immigrants do not increase there. Will the United States be as success¬
ful as England in her new colonial experience?
In Conclusion. — A few words of more formal introduction may lead the reader
to the geographical material to which this long chapter is the preface. The maps
have been constructed from the best government charts, although they are copies of
no one chart; neither are they, like the composite photograph, a combination of many.
Selection has been made, but no serious attempt has been made to produce a finished
chart ; it would be useless in the present state of our knowledge of the Pacific islands,
and it would not greatly surprise the author should the exact surveys that must be
made in the near future, expose great inaccuracies, nay, even render the present maps
quite unrecognizable as delineations of the same island or group. But they will have
served their modest purpose: the Primer must come before the Reader, and if they will
in any way clear the path of the future geographer of the Pacific by giving ground for
just criticism, they will not have been offered in vain.
The needs of the administration of a museum like this that bears the honored
name of Mrs. Bishop, have compelled much reading of voyages and descriptive accounts
of the Pacific region, and notes have been made for years and arranged alphabetically
[1 13]
3°
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
on uniform slips, which now number nearly 4000, and the convenience for reference
has been so great that these notes have been made the basis of the list of islands
here given.
I am sorry that I am not so familiar with many of the dialebts of the Pacific as
to be always sure of the orthography, or even of the meaning of names, but I have con¬
sulted the best authorities within my reach. In some cases I may seem to have wilfully
left the right and chosen the wrong, as in the case of the name Paumotu which I have
retained as the best known throughout this region, although the form Tuamotu adopted
by the French may be more correct. The first word of the compound is usually
dropped among traders and navigators in the south Pacific and Motu alone used.
As to the heights given I have met with difficulty. Findlay’s Directory may
state the height of an island as 3000 feet, a later chart will put it at 2100, while a still
later Hydrographic report will call it 1200, not one of these important publications
giving the authority. An ordinary estimate should not vary so much, and I was in¬
clined to omit all heights as well as population, but finally have given them as merely
approximate and the reader can attach his own value.
To supplement the meagre information given in the Index authorities have
been sometimes appended to the text, and the following list will assist some perhaps
to follow more closely the information attainable. It does not of course pretend to be
even a partial Bibliography, but simply a list of some of the more important works
used in the compilation of this Index.
The Life of Ferdinand Magellan and the first Circumnavigation of the Globe, 1480-1521 . By F. H.
H. Guillemard. London, 1891.
Pigafetta, Antonio, Primo Viaggio intorno al Globo Terracqueo, ossia ragguaglio della navigazione
fatta sulla squadra del Capit. Magaglianes 1519-22, publicado per la prima volta da Carlo Amo-
retti. Milano, 1800.
Historia del Descubrimiento de las regiones austriales hecho por el general Pedro Fernandez de
Quiros. Publicado por Don Justo Zaragoza. Madrid, 1876-80, 2 vols.
Schouten (Willem Cornelissen) and Jacques Lemaire. Novi Freti a parte meridionali Freti Magel-
lanici, in Magnum Mare Australe detectio ; facta laboriosissimo et periculosissimo itinere a
Guilielino Cornelii Schoutenio Flornano annis 1615, 1616, et 1617 totum Orbem terrarum eircum-
navigata. Amstelodami, 1619. Also in Dutch, 1618. Lemaire published his narrative of the
same voyage in 1622.
Anson’s Voyage round the World, 1740-44. By R. Walter. London, 1767.
Cook, Captain James. — Journal during his first voyage round the world made in H. M. bark
“Endeavor,” 1768-71. A literal transcription of the original MSS. with notes and introduction.
Edited by Captain W. J. L. Wharton. London, 1893.
- Second Voyage toward the South Pole and round the World, performed in the “Resolution”
and “Adventure,” 1772-75. London, 1777, 2 vols.
- —A voyage to the Pacific Ocean, undertaken by command of His Majesty, for making discov¬
eries in the northern hemisphere : performed under the direction of Captains Cook, Clerke and
Gore, on H. M. S. “Resolution” and “Discovery,” 1776-80. London, 1781, 3 vols.
Bougainville’s voyage round the World, 1765-69. Translated by J. R. Forster. London, 1772.
[114]
LIST OF BOOKS.
3i
Forrest, Capt. Thomas. — Voyage to New Guinea and the Moluccas from Balambangan, 1774-76,
with a Vocabulary of the Magindano Tongue. London, 1779.
Wilson, H. — Account of the Pelew Islands in the west Pacific. By George Keate. London, 1788.
Portlock, Capt. Nat. — Voyage round the World, more particularly to the Northwest coast of America,
1785-88, in the “King George’’ and “Queen Charlotte.” Captains Portlock and Dixon. Lon¬
don, 1789. Dixon also published an account written by W. Beresford.
La Perouse, J. F. G. de. — Voyage autour du monde pendant les annees 1785-88, redige et publiee
par M. L. A. Millet-Mureau. Paris, 1797, 4 vols. and atlas.
Labillardiere. — An account of a voyage in search of La Perouse, undertaken by order of the Con¬
stituent Assembly of France, and performed in the year 1791-94 in the “Recherche” and
“Esperanee,” ships of war under command of Rear-Admiral Bruni D’Entrecasteaux. London,
1802, 2 vols.
Marchand. — Voyage round the World, 1790-92. By Ijtienne Marchand, 2 vols. London, 1801.
Vancouver, George. — A voyage of discovery to the north Pacific ocean and round the world .
in the years 1790-95. London, 1798, 3 vols. and atlas.
Wilson, Capt. J. — Missionary voyage to the south Pacific ocean in the ship “Duff,” 1796-98.
London, 1799.
P4ron, F. — Voyage aux Terres Australes, 1800-04. Paris, 1807-16.
P'linders, M. — Voyage to Terra Australis, 1801-3. London, 1814, 2 vols.
Kotzebue, Otto von. — Entdeckungs-Reise in der Sud see und nach der Behring’s Strasse, in den
Jahren 1815-18. Weimar, 1821, 3 vols.
Krusenstern, Adam John von. — Reise um die Welt in den Jahren 1803-6, auf befehl seiner kaiser-
lichen Majestiit Alexander des Erster auf den Schriffen Nadeshda und Neva, 3 vols. St. Peters¬
burg, 1810.
Byron, Capt. Lord G. A. — Voyage of H. M. S. “Blonde” to the Sandwich Islands in the year 1824-5.
London, 1826.
Freycinet, L. de. — Voyage autour du Monde sur les Corvettes l’Uranie et la Physicienne pendant
les annees 1817 a 1820. Paris, 1824-44, 8 vols. 4to., 4 vols. fol.
D’Urville, J. Dumont. — Voyage de Decouvertes de P Astrolabe. Paris, 1830-33.
Stokes, J. L.— Discoveries explored during the voyage of H. M. S. “Beagle” in 1837-43. London,
1846.
Jukes, J. Beete. — Surveying voyage of H. M. S. “Fly” in Torres Strait, New Guinea, etc. London,
1847.
Wilkes, Charles. — Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition, 1838-42. Philadelphia,
1845, 5 vols.
Hochstetter, F. von.— New Zealand; its physical geography, geography and Natural History.
Translated by Edw. Sauter. Stuttgart, 1867.
Moresby, John. — Discoveries and Surveys in New Guinea and the D’Entrecasteaux islands. Lon¬
don, 1876.
Thomson, J. P. — British New Guinea. London, 1892.
Bevan, T. F. — Toil, Travel and Discovery in British New Guinea. London, 1890.
Chalmers, J. and Gill, W. W. — Work and Adventure in New Guinea. London, 1885.
Romilly, H. H. — The western Pacific and New Guinea. London, 1887.
Smith, R. B. — The Aborigines of Victoria. Melbourne, 1878, 2 vols.
Spencer, B. and Gillen, F. J. — The native tribes of central Australia. London, 1899.
Codrington, R. H. — The Melanesians. Oxford, 1891.
Heeres, J. E. — The part borne by the Dutch in the Discovery of Australia, 1606-1765. Leiden, 1899.
[115]
32
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Rosenberg, C. B. H. von. — Reistoehten naar de Geelviukbaai op Nieuw Guinea in den jaren 1869
en 1870. ’S Gravenhage, 1875.
Abel Janszoon Tazman’s Journal. Amsterdam, 1898.
West, T. — Ten years in south -central Polynesia (Tonga). London, 1865.
Mariner, W. — An Account of the Natives of the Tonga islands. London, 1817, 2 vols.
Williams, T. — Fiji and the Fijians. London, 1858, 2 vols.
Waterhouse, J. — King and people of Fiji. London, 1866.
Turner, George. — Nineteen years in Polynesia. London, 1861.
- - - Samoa a hundred years ago and long before. London, 1884.
Lang, J. D. — Origin and migrations of the Polynesian nation. 2d edn. Sydney, 1877.
Guppy, H. B. — The Solomon islands and their natives. London, 1887.
Woodford, C. M. — A Naturalist among the Head-Hunters (Solomon Islands). Melbourne, 1890.
Brenchley, J. — Cruise of the “Curagoa” among the South Sea islands during 1865. London, 1873.
Vincendon-Dumoulin. — Isles Marquises ou Nouka-Hiva. Paris, 1843.
Museum Godeffroy. Journal. Hamburg.
Voyage of Governor Phillip to Botany Bay (Journals of Shortland, Marshall and others). London.
Taylor, R. — Te Ika a Maui, or New Zealand and its inhabitants. London, 1870.
Findlajq'A. G. — Directory for the Navigation of the North Pacific Ocean. 3d. edn. London, 1886.
- Directory for the Navigation of the South Pacific Ocean. 5th edn. London, 1 886 ( ? ) -
British Admiralty Reports and Sailing Directions to date.
LIST OF MAPS.
I .
Hawaiian Islands (Main).
13-
New Caledonia and Loyalty.
2.
Hawaiian Islands (Western).
14.
Fiji.
3-
Caroline Islands (Western).
i5-
Samoan Islands and Niue.
4-
Caroline Islands (Middle).
16.
Ellice Group.
5-
Caroline Islands (Eastern).
17-
Phcenix and Union Islands.
6.
Marshall Islands.
18.
Tongan Group.
7-
Gilbert Islands.
19-
Line Islands and Tongareva.
8.
New Guinea Coast Islands.
20.
Society Islands.
9-
Louisiade Archipelago.
21 .
Paumotu Archipelago (West).
10.
Bismarck Archipelago.
22.
Paumotu Archipelago (East).
1 1 .
Solomon Islands.
23-
Marquesas and Hervey Islands
12.
New Hebrides.
24.
Index Chart.
ILLUSTRATIONS IN TEXT.
Butaritari.
Malekula.
New Zealand.
Rapanui.
Fanning.
Marianas.
Palmyra.
•Washington
Matuku.
Peru.
Ill 16]
170
Rongelap
/'•" J »,
10; /. o,f
/V n'
i •; A\
Utirik
o o
/•: Roncerik
Taka .
E.
Bikar
: / • *.
" w
\;\j)
(?>i\ Ailuk
10° N.
Likieb
) \
\ \
Jemo \L.?/
, Oj
%
Miadi
10 °N.
Mentschikow
Group
V./ * ‘N— ..v.
•../ \ 5
_ -
v \v
*• \ - • *\
ti M
\'y • /
Lip
■.„r
Romavzow Group
. .
.7"'2i
! ; Erikub
fi^
v A Nemu
• ; >•
Jabwat
; Maloelab
(\\ r.i
\-X '• i
PiSenC;-. Aurh
Ailinclablab fir"
MARSHALL
O.
JAI-UIT ../
Kili
V\
NamorikC ic
•!>
s.\ .> •>
Madjuro
C-i .
r\s /j Arno
ISLANDS
VX
Mille o\
Knox-. 0 :
V/
V
AN INDEX TO THE NAMES OF THE ISLANDS OF OCEANIA.
AaSU, or Paris, on the north coast of New Guinea, 3° 22 S., 143° 25' E. Thickly
wooded and inhabited. On the same reef is the islet Unei.
Aatao, one of the many names given to Angatan, Panmotn islands. 21.*
Ababa, see Torres islands. Also called Baba.
Aba evara, the western islet of the Basses group, Louisiade archipelago.
Abaga gaheia, or Abagaheia, eastward of Pana trusima ( Earle) in the Lonisiade
archipelago. 1.7 m. long, 585 ft. high.
Abau, in Cloudy bay on the south coast of New Guinea, io3 13' S., 148° 42' E.
Abaura, or Midge islands, three low and wooded islets near Fly river, south coast of
New Guinea. 8’ 29' S., 143 39' E.
Abavi, in Cloudy bay on the south coast of New Guinea. 10 15' S., 148 44' E.
Abgarris, also called Faed islands, in the Bismarck archipelago. A chain of low
islands, of which Goodman is the southernmost, extending 30 m. nw-SE. North
point 30 og' S., 154 22' E. Discovered by Captain Renneek of the Lyra. 10.
Abian, a form of Apaiang, Gilbert islands.
Abingdon, of the Galapagos, o 34' 25^ N. 1950 ft. high. Resort of the Buccaneers.
Abo, on the coast of New Guinea. 8 22' S., 143 07 ' E.
Abuda, within Angasa reef of the Fiji group. 18° 56' s., 1S1 26' 30^ E.
Abutolema, without Angasa reef of the Fiji group. 18° 53" 30" S., 181 24" E. 60 ft.
high.
Abutuena, Angasa reef of the Fiji gronp.
Aehir = Uea of the Loyalty gronp. 13.
Actaeon, or i\mphitrite islands in the Panmotn group were discovered in 1833 by T.
Ebrill in the Tahitian trader Amphitrite. The names are much mixed on charts.
Maturei vavao, Tenarunga, Yehanga and Tenararo. 22.
Adabadana Kawa, of the Talbot group on the coast of New Guinea, between Kawa
and Mata Kawa. 9 S., 142" 1 1' E.
Adams, southernmost of the Auckland islands, belonging to New Zealand. 2000 ft.
high.
Adams (Ingraham), see Huapu of the Marquesas. 23.
Adams (Roberts), see Nnkuhiva of the Marquesas. 23.
Adele, easternmost of the Louisiade archipelago, only 500—600 yards in diameter.
n° 2g' 50" S., 154 26' 10" E. Discovered by Captain Coutanee.
Adi, on the coast of New Guinea. 4 05' S., 133 30' 30,/ E.
Admiralty Islands were discovered by Schouten and Lemaire in Jul}q 1616. The
gronp consists of one large and many small islands. Carteret visited it in 1767.
Admiralty, the largest, was described by D’Entrecasteaux in 1792. It is 50 m.
♦Names considered more correct are printed in heavier-faced type. The number at the end of the paragraph indicates the map on
which the island will be found.
Memoirs Bt P. B, Museum, Vol. I., No. 2.-3.
(33)
34
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
E-W.X15 rn. N-S. 3000 ft. high. Chcille7iger visited the group and named after
the officers nearly ever}" bay, point or rock. Jesus Maria, La Vandola, Elisabeth,
Sugar-loaf, Western, Wild, Suhm, and many mere rocks compose this interesting
group now included in the Bismarck archipelago. The inhabitants are not very
dark, often dye their black hair red; wear little clothing — the men, as their sole
garment, a white cowry shell; use splints of obsidian for knives and spear points;
carve fine circular bowls often of great size ; principal food, sago. Centre of prin¬
cipal island about T 10 S., 147° 00 E. IO.
Admiralty Islets, a small group a mile and a half from north end of Lord Howe
island.
Adventure, see Motutunga of the Paumotu islands. 21.
Adventurer Islands are two islands about half a mile in extent, low, wooded, and
connected by a reef. Reported in 1877 by Mr. Ebury, master of the Adventurer.
Existence is doubted.
Agaga*= Anganga of the Fiji group.
Agakanitai, an islet of Mangareva.
Agata, south of Yasawa towards Naviti, Fiji. Is it confounded with Agate?
Agate, in the Yasawa group, Fiji, near Naviti. Small, rocky, high. 170 1 1 30” S.,
177' 08' 10" E. Named for one of the artists of the United States Exploring
Expedition. 14.
Agomes = Hermit islands in the Bismarck archipelago. IO.
Agrigan, of the Marianas. A volcanic island 6 m. long by 2 m. broaj, and 2000 ft.
high. i8c 48' N., 145' 40' E. In 1810 Captain Brown and other Americans with
several families of Hawaiians formed a colony on this island, but it was broken up
by the Spaniards who destroyed the plantations and carried off the Hawaiians to
slavery and they were never again heard from. See Chamisso in Kotzebue’s
voyage. For map of the group see Marianas.
Aguari, see Santa Catalina, Solomon islands. II.
Ague, islet of the Harcourt group on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
Aguijan, of the Marianas, was discovered by Magelhaes March 6, 1521, in 140 51' n.,
145' 30' E. It is 3 m. long by 2 m. wide and uninhabited.
Ahangatou = Angatou of the Paumotu group. 21.
Ahii, or Peacock, is low, coral, inhabited, and about 13 m. long. The east end is
14 27 20 S., 146 13 24 E. 20.
Ahunui, also called Fangataufa and Cockburn, of the Paumotu group, was discovered
by Captain Beechey in 1826 and named after the Comptroller of the Navy. It is
a closed lagoon island nearly 4 m. in diameter and the southwest end is in
22 17 S., 138 39 53 W.
Aidoumea, or Aidoema, on the south coast of New Guinea. 30 58' S., 1340 oc/ E.
Called formerly Isla del Capitano Luis Yaes de Torres from its discoverer.
Ailinginae, or Remski-Korsakoff of the Marshall islands is 12 m. southwest from
Rongerik. It is 15 m. E-w. and 4 m. n-s.; uninhabited. It was discovered by
Kotzebue, and the southwest point is iT 08' n., 1660 20 E.
* Although this is the correct form it has seemed best in giving the Vitian names to adopt the phonetic spelling: g is pronounced ng,
c is th. and b is mb. Thus Cakob.iu is pronounced Thakombau: Baga. Mbanga, etc.
Ln8j
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
35
Ailingiappel, islet of Mentsehikow or Kwadjelin in the Marshall islands.
Ailinglablab, of the Marshall islands, was discovered by Captain Bond in December,
1792. It is 36 m. long and composed of many islets on the ring encircling in a
very irregular way a lagoon. The northwest end is 8° 11' n., 167° 58' E.
Ailuk, also Tindal, Watts or Krusenstern of the Marshall islands, was discovered by
Captain Marshall in 1788, and is 20 m. long and 5-8 m. wide. 10° 3c/ N., 170° 04/ E.
Ain, wooded islet of Mengalia reef on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
Ainioro, one of the Amazon islands on the south coast of New Guinea. io° 21 S.,
149° 17' E.
Aiona, islet of Murua or Woodlark in the Trobriand group. 90 13' s., 152° 49' E.
Aiou = Yowl, west from the New Guinea coast.
Aipere, a name sometimes given to Tanna of the New Hebrides.
Airik, islet of Maloelab in the Marshall islands. 8C 3 1 n., 17T ior 30” E.
Aitutaki, of the Hervey group, was discovered April 11, 1789, by Captain Bligh of
the Bounty a few days before the mutiny broke out. It is high and 18 m. in
circumference, with a reef on the southwest coast. Population about 1500,
The finest tatuing I have ever seen was on two Aitutakian sailors. i8c 54' S.,
159° 41' w. 23.
Aiva, is a double islet, Aiva-va and Aiva-thaki, between Lakemba and Oneata of the
Fiji group; low, not exceeding 30 ft.; uninhabited; 9 m. X 3-5 m. 18' 21' S.,
1810 17' E. 14.
Aivei, islet on the coast of New Guinea. 70 50' S., 145° io' E.
Aivo, or Renny, is on the east side of Malaita, Solomon islands, low and wooded ;
less than a mile nw-SE. 8° 58" S.
Akahaina, or Fakaina, or Predpriatie, of the Paumotu group was discovered by Kotze¬
bue in 1824. It is low, inhabited, about 4 m. long. The centre is in 15' 58' S.,
140° iF 30" w. 21.
Akamaru, or Wainwright, is an islet of Mangareva of the Paumotu group. 22.
Akamokum, islet of Peleliu of the Pelew or Palao islands.
Akatli, a group of islets in the Bismarck archipelago. 3 20' S., 154" 36' E.
Akiaki, or Thrum Cap of the Paumotu group was discovered by Bougainville in 1768
and by him called Les Landers ; inhabited, though a low coral bank less than a
mile in diameter. 19° 17' 40" S., 138° 42' w.Q 22.
Akoo, islet of Ontong Java, Solomon islands. 5“ 37' S., 159° 34' E. II.
Alapawa, in Cook strait, New Zealand. 41° 12' S., 174° 20' E.
Alau, islet off the east coast of Maui, Plawaiian group. 20c 43' 50'’ N., 155” 58' w.
Albany, on the coast of Australia. io° 43' s., 142° 36" E.
Albatross, islet at the mouth of Saluafata harbor on Upolu, Samoan group, 9 m. east
of Apia.
Albemarle, of the Galapagos, 60 X 15 m., 4000 ft. high; six volcanoes; largest of
the group.
Alcester, a group of three islands of the Trobriand group extending about 3 m. ENE-
wsw. The natives are most skilful canoe builders. 9 2g' S., 152" 30' 45” E.
Alcmene, an islet 3 m. southeast from Isle of Pines, Loyalty group. 22 40' s., 167 " 29" E.
Alden, of the Hudson group, Fiji. High and rock}\ 17° 37' 20" s., 177 00 E.
D19]
36
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Alefa, of the Tongan group is in 20° oo' S., 174° 30' w.
Aleford, group of four small and reefed islets at the head of Milne bay at the south¬
east end of New Guinea. io° 22 S., 150° 20 E.
Alele, coastal islet of New Guinea. 70 52' S., 145° 13' E.
Alet, islet of Enderby, Caroline islands. At the east of the fringing reef which ex¬
tends 5.5 m. E-w. and 3 m. n-s. is Pozoat. 17° 19' 25” n., 1490 15' E.
Alewa kalotl, Awakalo or Round, an uninhabited rocky islet of Fiji, 500A; ft. high.
1 6° 40' s., 1770 46' E.
Algrail, islet of Wolea, Caroline islands.
Alita, southernmost of the Trois Sceurs, Solomon islands. II.
Allen, one of the Wellesley group in the Gulf of Carpentaria.
Allison, is between L’Echiquier and Durour in the Bismarck archipelago. Dis¬
covered by Captain Allison in 1885. 2-3 m. nw-SE., 100-150 ft. high, covered with
trees. i° 25' S., 143° 26' E.
Allufatti = Alofa, Horne islands.
Almagan, an adtive volcano of the Marianas. It is 2.2 m. N-S. by 1.5 E-w., and 2316
ft. high. 17" 36' N., 145° 50' E. See map under Marianas.
Alofa, one of the Horne islands southeast from Fotuna. It is 6 m. E-w. by 3 m., and
1200 ft. high; volcanic. io° 16' S., 178° oo' w. 18.
Alu, a wooded coral island 150 ft. high at the east end of Shortland island, Solomon
islands. It is well cultivated, and surrounded, except on the northwest side, with
a fringing reef. 70 08' S., 155° 50' E. II.
AmatlU, or Moller, of the Paumotu group was discovered by Captain Bellingshausen
in 1829. It is 18 m. ne-SW. and 8 m. wide. Inhabited and abounds in pearl oys¬
ters. The northeast point is 170 43' s., 140° 39' w.
Amat, Isla d’. In 1774 Spanish priests gave this name to Tahiti.
Amazon Islands, two small islands in Amazon bay on the south coast of New
Guinea. They are called Ainioro and Earaoro. When, some years ago, natives
attacked H. M. S. Bramble a canoe filled with female warriors accompanied the
party, hence the name of both bay and islands.
Ambatiki, of the Fiji group, is nearly an equilateral triangle of 2 m. on a side and sur¬
rounded by a reef. It is 750 ft. high, and inhabited. 170 47' s., 179° io' 30" E. 14.
Ambau, see Mbau of the Fiji group. 14.
Ambrym, of the New Hebrides, was discovered by Cook in 1773. It is volcanic, Mt.
Marum having had an eruption in 1888, and is 22 m. E-W. and 17 m. N-s.; about
3000 ft. high; population dense. 16" io' s., 1680 05' E. 12.
Amedee, islet of New Caledonia, is 10 m. off Noumea in 22° 28' 44" s., 1660 28' 40" E.
On it is a fine lighthouse 174 ft. high.
Atnere, islet on the southeast reef of New Caledonia.
Amesse, islet of Namoluk of the Caroline islands. 50 45' 15" n., 1530 16' 30" E. 4.
Amicitia, an island perhaps identical with Oraluk of the Carolines. 4.
Amota, one of the Hermit islands, in i° 32' S., 144° 55' E. 8.
Amphlett Islands are northeast of Moratau of the D’Entrecasteaux group, about
90 20 S., 150 48' E. There are eight or more small islands, wooded and of mod¬
erate height, forming a broken chain parallel to the coast. 9.
CI20J
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
37
Amsterdam, islet on the coast of New Guinea. o° 20' s., 132° o8r E.
Amsterdam (New), a name given by Tasman, in 1643, to Tongatabu.
Amytideu, an islet of Namonuito of the Carolines. 4.
Anaa, or Chain of the Paumotus, was discovered by Cook in 1769. The northwest
point is in 17° 23' S., 145° 38' 30" w. In 1874 there were 1500 inhabitants and
7,000,000 coconut trees. Inhabitants formerly war-like, good sailors, and canni¬
bals ; obtained control of many of the neighboring islands. 21.
Anabadibadila, islet of the Dumoulin group on the southeast coast of New Guinea.
It is 17 ft. high.
Anacoretas, called also Hermit, Monk’s, Anchorite, were discovered by Bougainville,
August 7, 1768. There are five or six islets covering a space 2.5 m. long. The
inhabitants are said to resemble Chinese. o° 50' S., 145° 35' E. 8.
AnagUSa, or Bentley of the Louisiade archipelago, in io° 43' S., 150° 43' E., is 1.2 m.
E-W. and half a mile broad; inhabited; 350 ft. high.
Atiakarukarua, one of the Dumoulin group on the coast of New Guinea. 225 ft. high.
Anangai, see Wolea, Ca'roline islands.
Anataxatl, or Anatajan, of the Marianas, is 5 m. E-W. and 1.5 N-S., about 1200 ft. high;
volcanic. 16° 19" n., 145° 35' E. See map under Marianas.
Anatunga, islet on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji, north of the entrance to the
Lekutu river.
Anchor, low, small, wooded on northeast of East cape of New Guinea.
Anchorage, or Pass at the mouth of the lagoon of Taka or Suvarov. 130 13 s.,
163 09 15 w.
Anchorage, islet of Stewart island, New Zealand.
Anchorite, see Anacoretas.
Andatavie, marks the north limit of Ngaloa harbor, Fiji. It is 165 ft. high.
Andema, or Ant, of the Carolines, was discovered by Eiitke and is about eight miles
west of Ponape. It consists of a dozen coral islets and is not permanently in¬
habited ; belongs to a chief of Ponape, and is resorted to for fish and turtle.
The name has been explained to mean Ant over there. 6° 45" N., 158° E. 5.
Andiwathe, islet 250 ft. high, off the west coast of Vanua mbalavu, Fiji. 14.
Andrew, near the centre of Hercules bay, low and wooded, on the northeast coast of
New Guinea.
Androna, in the Yasawa group, Fiji, extends 3 m. by 1.2 and is 900 ft. high. The
north point is in 16° 52" S., 177° 24" 30" E. 14*
Anegada, La. Quiros discovered January 26, 1606, an island which he called Luna
puesta; Gaspar Gonzales de Leza called it La Anegada, and Jose Espinosa named
it Encarnacion.
Aneiteum, was discovered by Cook in 1773 in his passage through the New Hebrides.
It is 10 m. E-w. and 6 m. N-S., 2788 ft. high, and has 1500 inhabitants. Southwest
point is in 20° 15" 17” S., 169° 44" E. In control of the Presbyterian Mission.
Anganga (Agaga), high, uninhabited island of Fiji. The east end is in 16 34' 3o"s.,
178° 38' 20" E.
Allgasa is 150 ft. high and has three islets within the same reef in Fiji. 18° 55' S.,
1810 28' E.
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Angatau, also called Arackcheeff or Araktchev and Ahangatiu, is a low island of the
Panmotu group, discovered by Bellingshausen in 1820; 200 inhabitants. 150 52' S.,
140' 52' \v. 21.
Angaur, see N’yaur, of the Palao or Pelew islands.
Angerimus Islands, in Geelvink bay on the north coast of New Guinea. 2 50' s.,
135' 00' E.
Angriffe, or Attack, is connected with New Ireland by a reef. It was called by the
second name from a war-like attempt on a boat of the German war ship Gazelle.
O / O o'
2 55 s-i I5I °b E.
Anhar, see Anaa or Chain, in the Panmotu archipelago.
Anil, islet of Nanni, Marshall islands.
Aniwa, or Immer or Nina, of the New Hebrides, is about 2 m. long. It is a station
of the Presbyterian Mission. 190 18' S., 169° 38' E.
Anna, or Current, was discovered in 1761; it is low, half a mile in diameter, and in¬
habited. 4° 39' x., 132° 04' E.
Annan Islands, three in number, off the north end of Yiti levu, Fiji. The group
extends 4 m. by 0.7 m., and rises to a height of 610 ft. North point, 170 3c/ 40" S.,
So /
12 E.
Aunamokka, or Rotterdam, Tasman’s name for Naniuka of the Tongan group.
Annatam, a form of Aneiteum, of the New Hebrides.
Anne, islet in the Bismarck archipelago. 4° 57' s., 151° 12' E.
Annula, see Anuda.
Anologo, one of the Matema islands, Santa Cruz group. io° 07' S., 165° 38' E. It
extends 1 m. E-w., and is 120 ft. high; w. 34 s., 17 m. from Nukapu. British pro¬
tectorate August 18, 189S.*
Anonima, see Namonuito, Caroline islands.
Anser, or Glennie, a small group west of Wilson point, south coast of Australia in
Bass strait.
Anson, 13 o' x., 141" 35' E., is of doubtful report. A name of Buka in the Solomon
group.
Ant, of Andema group, Caroline islands. 6° 44' x., 1570 53" 30" E.
Antipodes, rocky, uninhabited group, 1100 ft. high. 40° 40' 53" S., 178° 43' E. Not
exacth* the antipodes of London. Belongs to New Zealand. Called also Penan-
tipode.
Anuanuraro, of the Paumotu archipelago, is a lagoon island named b)r Quiros, in
1606, San Miguel Archangel. 20° 24" 57” S., 143° 31' 12” w.O 21.
Anuanurunga, of the Paumotu archipelago, also called Four Crowns and Cuatro
Coronadas, was discovered by Quiros in 1606. 20° 38' S., 143° 19 w. 21.
Anuda, or Cherry, was discovered in 1791 by Captain Edwards in the Pandora. It is
1.5 m. in diameter and 325 ft. high. The inhabitants are Polynesian, make neat
canoes, chew betel, and the men have an average height of 5 ft. 11 in. British
protectorate declared Oct. 1, 1898. n3 40' S., 169° 40' E. 12.
Anutunga, low islet near Ngaloa bay on the north coast of Yanua levu, Fiji.
16 37' s., 178° 40' E. Inhabited. 14.
•For the official notices of these Protectorates I am indebted to H. B. M. Consul in Honolulu, W. R. Hoare Esq.
[122]
INDEX TO THE PA C/E/C ISLANDS.
39
Anuu, islet, 65 ft. high, east of Tutuila, Samoan islands. 140 18' 40" S., 170° 30' 40" w.
Belongs to the United States. 15.
Aoba, Omba or Leper, of the New Hebrides, was named by Bougainville Isle des
Lepreux under a mistaken diagnosis. It is 17 m. long, 3000-4000 ft. high, and
inhabited. 15° 15' S., 167° 50' E. 12.
Aore, islet off the southeast coast of Espiritu Santo in the New Hebrides. The
natives of this region are all cannibals.
Aoura, islet of Mokil in the Caroline archipelago.
Apaiatlg, or Charlotte, in the Gilbert group, was discovered by Captain Marshall in
the Charlotte. It extends 16 m. by 6 m. and consists of six islets on a high reef.
Population in 1886, 1300. The islets are Terio or Marshall, Allen, Gillespy,
Clerk, Smith and Armstrong. Southeast point is in i° 43' N., 173° oC 45" e. 7.
Apamama, Hopper or Roger Simpson, in the Gilbert group, was discovered by Captains
Marshall and Gilbert in 1788. It extends about 12 by 5 m. and the islets are about 5
ft. above the sea. Population, 650. Northwest point o° 3c/ N., 173° 53" 35" E. 7.
Apapa, or Cabras, on the west coast of Guam, Marianas.
Apataki, or Hagemeister atoll, in the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by Cap¬
tain Hagemeister in 1830. It extends 17 m. n-S.; is a low coral atoll and in¬
habited. The northwest point is in 150 14' S., 146° 32" w. 20.
Api, called also Tasiko and Volcano, in the New Hebrides, extends about 25 m. nw-SE.,
and is 6-10 m. wide ; fertile, well wooded, densely peopled ; 2800 ft. high. 16° 38' S.,
1680 12' E. 12.
Apia, a name of Apaiang, Gilbert group.
Aplin, see Idika, New Guinea.
Apolima, of the Samoan Group, is an extinct volcano, 547 ft. high, and five sea miles
from Savaii. It covers 1.8 sq. m. 130 49' 30" S., 172° 03" w. 15.
Ara, of the New Hebrides, is a wooded islet on the fringing reef of Valua, off the
southwest point. It has perhaps 100 inhabitants.
Arabi, or Hat, of the New Hebrides, is an islet off Tangoa on the south coast of
Espiritu Santo.
Arag, of the New Hebrides, called also Pentecost, Whitsuntide, Bougainville, is 38 m.
long, and 2000 ft. high. Its inhabitants are noted for their large canoes. North
end is in 150 25' S., 1680 07' E. 12.
Araktcheeff, an islet of Maloelab in the Marshall group.
Araktcheeff, or Araktchev, see Angatau, Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Aranuka, or Henderville, of the Gilbert group, was discovered by Captains Marshall
and Gilbert; is 6.5 by 5.5 m. The northeast point is in o° 13' 25” n., 173° 41' E. 7*
Aratika, or Carlshov, of the Paumotus, was discovered by Roggewein in 1722, and
named Carlshov by Kotzebue. It is 20 m. west from Kawehe, and is 8 X 5 m.;
wooded and inhabited. The west point is in 15° 33' 25" S., 145^ 39" w. 21.
ArayOll^et, of the Pelew group, lies south of Kajmngle with Carapellas and Korack
on a reef extending 4.5 m. N-S., 5 m. E-w.
Arch, two islets on a reef nearly three miles in circumference, in io° 47' S., 150' 46' E.
The highest is 360 ft.; they are variously called Nasa peipei, Nasa ruarua and
Koia reibareiba, Ilei.
[i23]
40
INDEX TO THE PA C/E/C ISLANDS.
Archangel, see Anuanuraro of the Paumotus. 21.
Archipel du Saint Esprit, a name given by De Flenrien to the New Hebrides.
Arden, islet ill Torres strait. 9 54' s., 142 57 K.
Arecifos, see Fdjelong in the Marshall group. 6.
Aritnoa, three islets on the north coast of New Guinea, 500 ft. high, wooded and in¬
habited. T 45' s., 138" 45' k.
Aris, a volcanic island on the north coast of New Guinea, two miles northwest from
Vulcan; about 700 ft. high. 4 00' S., 144 56' K. 8.
Arnavon, islet off Choiseul, Solomon group. 7° 25" S., 158" 00' E. II.
Arno, of the Marshall group, is also called Arhno, Daniel or Pedder. It is the largest
reef, or at least has the most land, of any in the Ratak chain, as it is more than
300 m. in circumference. The islets, among them Tagelib, High and Ine, are not
more than 6-8 ft. above the sea but support a population of 3000 (in 1882). Islets
at the north and south extremes are often at war with each other. Northeast
point, 70 30' N., 17 1° 55' E. 6.
Aro, islet east of Tabntha, Fiji. 17° 42' 30" s., 181 22' w. 14.
Arorai, or Hurd of the Gilbert group, was discovered from the brig Elisabeth about
1S09, and was named Hope; changed to Hurd by Purdy. A well wooded atoll
6-7 m. nw-SE., a mile and a half wide. Population in 1883, 1200. 2 J 39. S.,
1 77° 01' E. 7.
Arossi, see San Cristobal of the Solomon group. II.
Arova, or Rossel, see Roua of the Touisiade archipelago. 9.
Arrecifos, of Villalobos (1545), are the Pelew islands.
Arrowsmith, see Majuro of the Marshall group. 6.
Arsacides, Terre de, a name given in 1769 by Surville to Malaita, Solomon islands.
Art, largest of the Belep group, northwest of New Caledonia. It is 1 1 m. nw-SE. 13.
Arteck, islet off north point of Babeltop, Pelew islands.
Arthur, islet of Eniwetok of the Marshall group, n 4c/ n., 162' 15" e:.
Aru, two islets on the north coast of New Guinea.
Arutua, of the Paumotu archipelago, the Rurick of Kotzebue, is a lagoon atoll 20 ft.
high. The natives are of Tahitian origin. The northwest point is in 15“ ic/ S.,
146' 49' 20” w. 20.
Ar^obispO, one of the Volcano group south of the Bonin islands.
Asaua, or Asawa, see Yasawa, Fiji.
Ascension, see Ponape, Caroline archipelago.
Asia, islets east from Gilolo; low, wooded. 1 00' N., 13 1 17' E. Another group with
same name off coast of Peru.
Asore, see Tanna, New Hebrides.
Asouni, islet in Makira bay of San Cristobal, Solomon islands.
Asuncion, or Assumption, in the Marianas, 19' 45' n., 145" 2g' E. A volcanic cone
about a mile in diameter and 2S00 ft. zb high, 54 m. n. by w. from Agrigan. The
west side is covered with vegetation. Discovered by La Perouse Dec. 14, 1786.
Ata, or Pylstaart (Tropic-bird) in the Tongan group, was discovered by Tasman in
1643. Island northeast from Tongatabu; 3 m. long, 1165 ft. high, uninhabited.
o f _ o / // __ o
22 20 S., IJO 12 30 W. IO.
INDEX TO THE PA C/E/C ISLANDS.
4i
Atafu, or Oatafu, a closed coral lagoon of the Union group, discovered by Byron in
1765. Also called Duke of York. It is 3 m. E-w., 2.5 m. x-s., 8-10 ft. high. There
are said to be 63 islets covered with pandanus and coconut trees. Some 260 in¬
habitants; subject to Fakaafo. 8= 39' 40" s., 172° 28' 10" w. British protectorate
proclaimed June 22, 1889. 17.
Atana, a chain of islets lying northwest from Rotuma. The eastern is Wea (Emery);
the western, Athaluna.
Atangota, islet northwest from Rotuma. 12° 30 s., 177s 14' e.
Atata, islet northwest from Tongatabu, Tongan group. 21° 03’ s., 175° 15' w.
Athaluna, one of the Atana chain, northwest of Rotuma.
Atit, is a low, wooded islet in Tuo passage on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
Atiu, of the Hervey group, was discovered b}- Cook March 31, 1777; called by him
Wateeoo. It is 100 m. north from Mangaia, 20 m. in circumference, of uplifted
coral, 394 ft. high. 19° 59' s., 158° 06' w. 23.
AtO, islet of the Yasawa group, Fiji, between Matathoni and Yangati. 160 59' 30" s.,
177 18 25 E. 14.
Attack, see Angriffe, Bismarck archipelago. 10.
Attack, islet in delta of the Fly river, New Guinea.
Auckland, an uninhabited group belonging to New Zealand, discovered in 1806.
Northeast cape, 50' 30' 25” s., 166' 19' 12” E.
Aukena, islet of Mangareva. Also called Elson.
Aulong, see Orolong of the Pelew group.
Auotu, of the Hervey group, was discovered by Cook in 1773. It is a twin islet with
Manuae enclosed by one reef, barren, with few inhabitants. 19 14' s., 158' 58" w. 24.
Aura, or Duperrey, is an islet of Mokil in the Carolines. 6 4c/ x., i59: 53' e. 5.
Aura, see Kaukura in the Paumotu archipelago. 15' 41' s., 146“ 50' 30" w.
Aureed, islet in Torres strait. 9 57' S., 143' 17' E.
Aurh, Ibbetson or Traversey of the Marshall islands, is 15 m. long and from 4 to 9 m.
wide. The lagoon is deep and surrounded with 32 islets. The northeast point
is m 8 18 x., 17 1 12 E.
Aurobu, islet 150 ft. high on the south side of Bagaman in the Eouisiade archipelago.
Aurora, see Maiwo of the New Hebrides.
Aurora, see Makatea of the Paumotu archipelago.
Austral, or Tubuai group, a name given by Mr. Williams in his “Missionary Enter¬
prises in the South Seas” to a group of very little known islands in the southeast
Pacific. They belong to France. Population, 1875, according to French reports.
Of the group Vavitao is 100 ft. high, and was discovered by Broughton in 1791;
Tubuai discovered by Cook 1777; Rurutu, discovered by Cook in 1769, is 1300 ft.
high; Rimatera, discovered b}T Henry and Norurotu, Hull, Maria and Sands, dis¬
covered by J. R. Sands in 1845, complete the list.
Autano, an islet of Fakaafo, of the Union group. 9' 24" 55" s., 17 1 12' w.
Avea, of the Exploring group, Fiji, is a small island northeast from Yanua mbalavu,
3 m. in circumference and 600 ft. high. Population, 40. 17' io" 30 S., 181 06 E.
Awakalo, see Alewakalou, Fiji.
[125]
42
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Baba, see Torres islands.
Babagarai, or Smith islet on the southeast coast of New Guinea.
Babeltop, of the Pelew group, is also spelled Baobeltaob, etc. It is of irregular shape,
20 m. N-S. Mt. Aremolunguj is 2000 ft. high. Northeast end, 70 40' 30" N.,
134° 38; 45" E.
Bacon, Fiji, is a white rock 60 ft. high covered with guano within Argo reefs. I7°04r S.,
oO /
178 25 W.
Badeneu, see Moali, Loyalty archipelago.
Badila beddabedda bonarua, westernmost and largest of the Brumer group on the
coast of New Guinea, in io° 45' 24" S., 150° 23' 03" E. It is 2.5 m. long, half a
mile wide and 670 ft. high.
Bagabag, or Rich, the Sir R. Rich of Dampier, is 4 m. in circumference and 1500 ft.
high. It is in 40 50' S., 140° 12' E. 10.
Bagaimotu, islet of the Tongan group.
Bagaman, or Stanton of the Louisiade archipelago is 2.5 m. E-w. by 1.7 m., and 720
ft. high. ii° 08' S., 152° 40' E.
Bagamoti, islet southeast coast of New Guinea, near Sideia; 115 ft. high.
Bagavirana, of the Conflict group, Louisiade archipelago. An atoll 10 m. E-w. by
5 m. N-S. Ten islets uninhabited; covered with Casuarina trees. Visited by H.
M. S. Conflict in 1880. io° 46' S., 151° 46' E.
Bagga, islet in bight on west side of Vella Lavella, Solomon islands. 70 47' S.,
z'O /
156 30 E.
Bagiagia, or Markham of the D’Entrecasteaux group, is an islet in Moresby strait
between Dauila and Moratau. 9° 25' S., 150° 25' E.
Baibara, islet on coast of New Guinea. io° 20 s., 1490 36' E.
Baibesika, islet on southeast coast of New Guinea, a mile east of Suau, 1.5 m. by
0.5 111., 560 ft. high; cultivated.
Baiiri, largest of the Dumoulin group; 365 ft. high, with few inhabitants. io° 54' 17" S.,
o / // ^
150 44 52 E.
Baiwa, with Pana wadi and Pana roran in the Renard group, Louisiade archipelago.
Baker, or New Nantucket, was discovered by Captain H. Foster of the barque Janiaica.
Taken by the United States in 1857. A guano island 1 111. E-w., 0.7 m. wide, 20 ft.
high, o 13 30 n., 176 29 30 w.
Balabio, off the northwest point of New Caledonia.
Baldwin, islet of the Yasawa group, Fiji. 170 26' 50" S., 177° 00' 45" E. 14.
Ballale, islet northeast of Shortland, Solomon islands. 6° 58' S., 155° 52' E.
Bampton, see Parama, coast of New Guinea.
Banabana, or Grange, on the coast of New Guinea, is low and wooded. io° 22/ S.,
148° 54' E.
Banepe, see Panavi, Santa Cruz group.
Banga Netepa, see Panavi, Santa Cruz group.
Banganeda, see Matema. 12.
Banks, in Torres strait. io° 12' S., 142° 15' E. 8.
Banks, in Spencer gulf, South Australia. 340 30' S., 136° 20' E.
[126]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
43
Banks group was discovered by Quiros and visited by Bligh in May, 1789. It con¬
sists of Vanua Lava, Gaua, Mota, Valua, Ureparapara, with twelve islets. An¬
nexed by Great Britain August 18, 1898. 12.
BaranagO, islet 120 ft. high in Utuha passage, south coast of Florida, Solomon islands.
Barclay de Tolly, see Raroia of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Barena, of the Stewart islands or Sikaiana. 11.
Baring, see Namorik of the Marshall group. 6.
Barn, off Australian coast. io° 49' s., 142° i8/ E.
Barnard, N., coast of Australia. 170 41' s., 146° 12' E.
Barnard, S., coast of Australia. 170 52' S., 146° n' E.
Barr, islet on the north side of Mille, Marshall group, east side of entrance to lagoon.
6° 14' N., 1710 46' E. 6.
Barren (Cape), northeast from Tasmania, east entrance to Banks strait; 2300 ft.
high. Another island of the same name is in the Hunter group northwest of
Tasmania. 40° 25' and 40° 32' S.
Barrier (Great), in Hauraki gulf, New Zealand, also called Otea, is 21 m. by 10 m.,
and 2130 ft. high. In the same gulf is Little Barrier, 9 m. west from Great
Barrier. Also called Houtourou. 4 m. n-s., 3 .7 m. E-w.; 2400 ft. high.
Barrier islands, in the channel between Dauila and Moratau of the D’Entrecasteaux
group. 90 24' S., 150° 25' E. 9.
Barrington, of the Galapagos, was named by Colnett. o° 50' 30" S., 90° io' w.
Barrow, see Vanavana of the Paumotu archipelago.
Bartlett, islet of Tutuila, Samoan islands, off Massefau bay.
Barwell, see Tucopia. 12-
Basilaki, or Moresby, is a well wooded, densely populated island noted for the careful
cultivation of kalo, sago, betelnut, sugar, indian corn, etc. It is 10 m. E-w. by 3.5
m.; 1326 ft. high. io° 37' s., 1510 00' 35" E. 9.
Basilisk, see Sideia, New Guinea.
BaSS, islet of Taumaco group. 12.
Bass islands, or Maretiri, are 46 m. E. by s. from Rapa. Four islets, 346 ft. high,
discovered by Captain Bass who first sailed through the strait, which bears his
name, between Australia and Tasmania. 27° 55' 30" S., 143° 28' 20" w.
BaSSakanna, a circular islet off the northwest coast of Malaita, Solomon group.
8° / _ r o / _
22 S., ICO 29 E.
Basses, are low coral islands in the Louisiade archipelago. io° 58' S., 152° 45' E.
Gumaian is the largest and easternmost, Abaevara is at the other extreme, and
Leiga with Isurauaraua complete the group.
BaSS, reef-tied islet of Maloelab, Marshall group. 6.
Bat, the westernmost of the Purdy group, discovered by Captain Bristow in 1817, con¬
sists of two flat islands and islet covered with coconut trees and enclosed by reef
close to which no bottom at 20 fathoms. 2° 51' S., 146° 12' E. IO.
Batanta, a long, narrow and mountainous island on the coast of New Guinea.
Bateman, a low islet of the Underwood group, Fiji. 17° 40' 30” S., 177° 20" E.
Batiki, or Mbatiki, Fiji, is near the centre of the group; is 2 m. in diameter and 609
ft. high. Population in 1880, 342. 17° 46' S., 179° io' E.
[127]
44
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Bau, see Mbau, Fiji.
Batldissill, is at the northwest end of New Ireland, Bismarck archipelago, and ex¬
tends 7 m. E-w. 2° 46' s., 150° 40' E.
Bauro, see San Cristobal, Solomon islands. II.
Baux, see Nukuhiva, Marquesas group. 23.
Bavo, islet 3 m. E. from Idiha on the Southeast coast of New Guinea.
BaxO trista, islet on southeast end of Oraluk reef, Caroline' group, 50 ft. high.
7° 27' N., 155° 24' E. 4.
Bayonnaise, islet at south entrance to Kuto bay, Isle of Pines. Named from French
ship.
Beacon, islet of Australia. 12° 48' s., 1430 36' E.
Beagle, islet of Guadalcanar, Solomon islands. II.
Beaupre, or Eo of the Loyalty group, northwest of Uea, was discovered in 1782 by
D’Entrecasteaux. Covered with coconut trees; inhabited. 20° 20 S. Named for
the Geographical Engineer of the Recherche.
Beautiful, a group in the Gulf of Carpentaria, north coast of Australia.
Bedford, see Vehanga of the Adlseon group. 22.
Bee, on the south shore of Huon gulf. 70 30' S., 147° 27' E.
Beechey, islands of the Bonin group. 27° 08' N., 142° 15' E. Annexed by Japan,
Beika, on the southeast coast of New Guinea, east of Sariba; 130 ft. high; densely
wooded.
Belcher = Taravai, islet of Mangareva.
Belep, five islets and a number of rocks northwest from New Caledonia. 13.
Bellevue, group on the coast of New Guinea. Jervis island is the principal,
142° 09' E.
Bellingshausen, Society group, was discovered by Kotzebue in 1824. It is low
and uninhabited. Named for the distinguished Russian navigator. 15° 48' S.,
1540 30' w. 20.
Bellona, of the Solomon group, was discovered by Captain Wilkinson in the Indis¬
pensable, 1790. It is small, 400 ft. high, and uninhabited. August 18, 1898, it
was declared a part of the British Solomon islands Protectorate. n° 25' S.,
1 5 9° 45' E-
Bentinck, one of the Wellesley group in the gulf of Carpentaria.
Bentley, see Anagusa, Louisiade archipelago.
Bega, see Mbenga of Fiji.
Berriberrije, or Slade, Louisiade archipelago, is the northwest and most conspicuous
of the Engineer group, 1.7 m. nw-SE., half a mile wide, 596 ft. high. io° 37' S.,
o w
151 16 E.
Bertrand, on the north coast of New Guinea. 30 n's., 143° ic/ E. Low and wooded,
near Schouten.
Berry, islet 60 ft. high, of the St. Andrew group, Admiralty islands.
Berud, see Kuria of the Gilbert islands.
Bet, see Burrar in Torres strait.
Beverley, a group off the east coast of Queensland, Australia. 21° 30' s., 149° 45' E.
[128]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
45
Biak, is separated from Korrido by a narrow channel, the two forming the Schouten
islands. i° S., 136° 02' E. Little known.
Bickerton, see Late, in the Tongan group. 18.
Bigali, see Pikelot, Caroline islands.
Bigar, another form of Bikar, Marshall islands.
Bigedj, islet of Kwadjelin, Marshall islands.
Bigini, see Bikini, Marshall islands.
Biguela, see Pikelot, Caroline islands.
Bikar, or Dawson, consists of three islets on the east side of the atoll in the Marshall
islands. According to Kotzebue the centre of the group is in n° 48' n., 170° K.
Bikerei, islet of Maiana, Gilbert group. 1 oo' 20" n., 173° oo' 45" K. 7.
Bikini, or Eschseholtz, was discovered by Kotzebue in Oct. 1825. Marshall group,
18 m. N-S. South point is, according to Brown, 11 33' N., 165° 37' K. 6.
Bilibili, in Astrolabe bay, New Guinea. 5 20' S., 145 46' K. Natives are enterpris¬
ing traders and make excellent pottery.
Bindloe, of the Galapagos, is 800 ft. high, o 18' 50” N.
Bio, 2 111. northwest from Ugi, Solomon islands; coral islet 100 ft. high, uninhabited.
Birara, a name of a district of New Guinea, sometimes incorrectly applied to the whole
island.
Bird, islet on east coast of Admiralty. 2 08' S., 147° 14’ K.
Bird, islet in passage between Mbenga and \’iti levu, Fiji. 18" 19'20's., 177° 58' 15'’ K.
Bird, islet of Palmyra.
Bird, see Farallon de Medinilla of the Marianas.
Bird, see Nihoa of the Hawaiian group.
Bird, see Reitoru of the Pauniotu archipelago.
Bird, a name given by Cook to Hikueru, Pauniotu archipelago.
Bird, a small group off the Australian coast. 11 47' s., 143 06' K.
Birilie, of the Phoenix group, was discovered by Captain Eminent. It is a mile long
and not more than 6 ft. above the sea. 3° 34' 15" S., 171' 42 w. British protec¬
torate July 10, 1889.
Bishop, see Nonuti, Gilbert group. Also Tapituea of the same group.
Bishop and his clerk, rocky islets south from Macquarie. 55" 15' s., 160° 10' K.
Bishop Junction, see Erikub, Marshall islands.
Bitutll, islet of Tarawa, Gilbert group. 120’ 33' N., 1721 55' 30" K.
Biu, islet 2 111. northwest from Ugi, Solomon group. 1.5 111. long, 240 ft. high.
IO II S., IOI 38 K.
Biva, a low, coconut-covered, inhabited islet a mile in length, 10 111. west from Yasawa
group, Fiji, if 08' 30" s., 176° 52' 30" K.
Blackney, or Blakeney, a low, wooded island in the Louisiade archipelago.
Blair, Fiji. 180 30' 10" s., 177" 36' k.
Blake, see Motuiti of the Marquesas.
Blunt, Fiji. 1 8° 52' s., 178° 24' 40" k.
Blanchard, of D’Entrecasteaux, is the island known as Doini. 10' 42 S., 150 40 K.
Blanche, islet 280 ft. high, on the north coast of Rendova, Solomon islands.
Blaney, see Nonuti of the Gilbert group.
[129]
46
INDEX TO THE PA C/EC ISLANDS.
Blelatsch, islet of Yap, Caroline archipelago. g° 30' 10" n., 138° 04' 42" E..
Bligh, see Mematangi of the Paumotu archipelago.
Bligh, Ureparapara of the Banks group. There is a Bligh island in Nootka sound,
and another off the coast of Alaska. The name recalls the commander of the
Bounty.
Blosseville, a high, steep, wooded crater with several villages on the crater edge.
30 36' s., 1440 32' E. 8.
Blunt, see Mbulia, Fiji.
Bobo, or Bristow, a low, mangrove-covered island, 11-12 m. in circumference on the
coast of New Guinea. 90 08' S., 143° 14' E.
Bobo eina, or Huxley of the Touisiade archipelago, is 800 ft. high and thickly wooded.
Bobu, islet on the north coast of Murua or Woodlark island. 8° 58" S., 152° 46' E.
Boiaboiawagga, islet in the Louisiade archipelago a quarter-mile long E-w., densely
wooded.
Bock, islet of Ailinglablab, Marshall group. Another of the same name is an islet of
Udjae.
Bogen, islet of Maloelab, Marshall islands.
Boh, islet in Tanle bay on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
BoigU, or Paigo, a low, swampy island 6 m. E-w., 2 m. n-s., near the mouth of the
Mai Kassa river on the south coast of New Guinea. g° 20 s., 142° 15' E.
Boimagi, of the Kiriwina or Trobriand group. 8° 31' S., 150° 52' E.
Boirama, a grassy islet 290 ft. high, northeast from Nukata in the Louisiade archi¬
pelago.
Bolabola, or Borabora of the Society group, is mountainous and picturesque, rising in
Mt. Pallia to 2165 ft. Large population. North end is in 1 6° 22' S., 15 1 4c/ w. 2,0.
Bolatlg, on the coast of New Guinea. 2° 03" S., 131° 56' E.
Bonabe, Panopea, Baanopa, or Ocean, of the Gilbert islands, was discovered in 1804
from the ship Ocean. It is 10-11 m. in circumference. o° 52' 02” S., 169° 35' E.
Bonabona = Torlesse, islets in the Louisiade archipelago.
Bonham, see Jaluit of the Marshall islands.
Bonin, Bonin-sima, a chain extending almost N-S. from 27° 45' to 26u 32' n., divided
into four small groups, Parry, Kater, Peel and Coffin. They are high and vol¬
canic; except a small colony on Peel they are uninhabited. Probably discovered
by Japanese fishermen about 1675, they were unknown to the world till 1823
when Captain Coffin, an American whaler, discovered and took possession of the
southern group. In 1824 John Kbbets, another American, discovered the central
since called Peel. Visited by Liitke 1828, Beechey 1827, Collinson 1853, and by
Commodore Perry. Claimed by Japan.
Bonnawatl, a grassy islet a mile N-S., and 335 ft. high, in the Louisiade archipelago.
Bonvouloir, a group in the Louisiade archipelago seen by D’Entrecasteaux. It ex¬
tends in a slight curve about 20 m. nw-SE. Inhabitants are Papuans. East islet
is 500 ft., Hastings 10 m. to wnw. is 400 ft. high. Five miles beyond there are
3-4 islets on the same reef. Centre io° 20 S., 151° 56' E. Bonvouloir was an
officer on the Recherche.
Booby, a bare, uninhabited rock 35 ft. high in Torres strait. io°36'o5"s., 141° 54,45" E.
[130]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
47
Bordelaise, see Oraluk of the Caroline islands.
Borne, islet 50 ft. high off Hanaiapa bay on Hivaoa, Marquesas islands.
Bory, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 70 14' n., 15 i° 39' 37" e.
Boseawen, see Tafahi of the Tongan islands. 18.
Botany Isles of Cook are between New Caledonia and Isle of Pines.
Boucher, see Tiger of the Loyalty group.
Boudeuse, low, uninhabited island, shaped like a horseshoe open to the west. Dis¬
covered by Bougainville August 9, 1768, and named after his ship. i° 25' S.,
1440 32' E.
Bougainville is the largest of the Solomon islands; extends no m. nw-SE., and is
30 m. wide; very mountainous, with volcanic peaks reaching nearly 10,000 ft.
Bagana, in the centre, is adlive. Owing to the ferocity of its inhabitants little is
known of the interior. Cannibals all. The north point is in 50 24' S., 154° 38' E. II.
Bouka, or Buka of the Solomon islands, is much lower than Bougainville, more fer¬
tile and more populous. Natives said to have the finest physique in the group;
they are adlive and daring cannibals. The north point is in 50 S., 154° 35' E. II.
Bounty, a group of 24 islets and rocks, inhabited and belonging to New Zealand.
Discovered by Captain Bligh of the Bounty , Sept. 19, 1788. 47° 50' S.
Bourke, islet in Torres strait. 90 52' S., 1430 22' E.
Bouro, see San Cristobal, Solomon islands.
Bow, see Hau of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Bowditch, see Fakaafo of the Union group. 17.
Bowerick, islet of Oneatoa, Gilbert islands. i° 47' 40” S., 175° 35' 20" E. 7.
Brackenridge, low, I m. long, off Vanua levu, Fiji. 160 33' s., 178° 47' 20" E. Named
for the botanist of the United States Hxploring Expedition under Wilkes.
Bramble Cay, see Massaramcoer. Sand islet at northeast boundary of Queensland
colony.
Brampton, see Parama, New Guinea coast.
Brander, islet of Rahiroa of the Paumotu archipelago.
Brattle, islet of Albemarle in the Galapagos.
Brewer, islet in China strait. io° 34' 30" s., 150° 43' 45" E.
Brierly, see Daddahai in the Louisiade archipelago.
Bristow, see Bobo on the New Guinea coast. 90 08' S., 143“ 14' E.
Britannia, another name of Mare, Loyalty group.
Broadmead, one of the St. Andrew group, Admiralty islands.
Brocke, see Jarvis.
Brongniart, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. j° 33' 30" n., 15 1° 47' 02" E.
Brooker, see Utian of the Louisiade archipelago.
Brown, same as Bikini of the Marshall group.
Brown, see Eniwetok of the Marshall islands.
Brown, see Lae of the Marshall islands. Named for Captain J. W. Brown who dis¬
covered it.
Brown, islet in Henry Reid bay on the east side of New Britain.
Browne is low, wooded, on the same reef with Carpenter and Tracey in Nares harbor,
Admiralty group.
[131]
IXDEX TO THE PACIFIC 1ST AXES.
4S
Brmner, see Tassai, coast of Xew Guinea.
Brumer group consists of six small basaltic islands; largest and westernmost 2.5 m.
bv 0.5 m., 665 ft. high, inhabited. 10' 46' s., 150° 22' E. People use canoes with
outrigger and double mat sails. The other islands are Badila beddabedda bonarua,
Harikoa, Gobi gobi, Bugomaki and Abana.
Buchanan, in the Admiralty group. i = 56' s., 146° 2S’ E.
Budd, an extinct volcano, Soo ft. high, in the Ringgold group, Fiji. 17' 26' 30” s.,
1 So' 23" E.
Buen viage (Isla de), discovered by Quiros July 8, 1606. Probably one of the Gilbert
islands. Quiros says: “Este dia se vio 1111a isla de hasta seis leguas de boj ;
v porque hasta aqui 110 se liabia encontrado tierra alguna ni bajo, ni otra cosa que
impidien nuestro camino, se le puso por nombre Bunt l logo: su altura son tres
grados y medio parte del Xorte. Acordose de no ir a ella por 110 ser ya a pro-
posito v por el riesgo de ser baja.” J logos dr Quiros , /., JjS. This dav was seen
an island about six leagues in circuit ; and because thus far we had encountered
neither land nor shoal, nor other thing which might impede our way, we bestowed
the name Good J ovogr. Its latitude is three and a half degrees Xorth. It was
determined not to land as it was not convenient and there was risk of reefs.
Buena Vista, or Yatilau of the Solomon islands, is 1050 ft. high. S' 53’ 30” S.,
159' 59 3°" E- II.
Bugomaki, one of the Brumer group, 220 ft. high.
Bugotu, the native name (of a part) of Ysabel, Solomon islands.
Buhi, islet on northwest extreme of the Tougan group, on the same reef with
Ofolanka.
Bukalau, low islet of Fiji. East point, 16 12' 20” S., 179' 45' 50” E.
Bulia, see Mbulia in the Kandavu group, Fiji.
Bull, islet of St. Andrew group, Admiralty islands.
Bultig, or Hump islet, in Geelvink bay, Xew Guinea; 10-12 m. X 4 m.
Bunatik, islet on the southeast coast of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Buninga, sontliwesternmost island of the Shepherd group, Xew Hebrides. Three-
quarters of a mile XE-SW. 723 ft. high. A hundred inhabitants, all Christian.
Bunker, another name of Jarvis.
Bunkey, see Xamonuito of the Caroline islands. 4.
Buraku, or Murray, an uninhabited volcanic peak, 1000 ft. high, northwest from
Guadalcanal Solomon islands. S 59 s., 15S 35’ E.
Buriwadi, islet of the Kiriwina or Trobriand group. S 32" S., 150' 52" E.
Burke, islet on the coast of Xew Guinea. 10' 10' s., 142' 30' E.
Burnett, see Xoina of the Lonisiade archipelago.
Burrar, or Bet, of the Three Sisters ( Bet, Sue, Poll ) in Torres strait. 10' id S.,
142 50' E.
Burrh, islet at the entrance of Port Rhin on Luknnor, Marshall islands. 6' 14' x.,
171 46' E.
Burrows ( 1S42), see Mare, Loyalty group.
Burwan, inhabited islet in Malo pass, off Espiritu Santo, Xew Hebrides.
Bushy, islet off Australian coast. 10 s., 142" 58' E.
[132]
V
"A
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
49
Butaritari or Touching in the Gilbert group, is an atoll of triangular form, about
14 m. on a side. As shown in the figure, most of the land is on the south side
of the lagoon and there are the principal villages. Namaka, Nakudi, Pikhat,
Ourik and Napuni are the main islets. The entrances to the lagoon are on the
west side. The northwest point is in 30 14' n., 172° 39' 50" E. In 1886 the popu¬
lation was 3000, all protestants. The American Board has a station here. The
south side is a continuous grove of coconut and pandanus, and a large amount of
copra is exported annually. 7.
Butchart, or Dekatua, is an islet of the
Engineer group, Louisiade archipel¬
ago, 350 ft. high, covered with coconut
trees.
Button is a low islet in Shallow bay of
Admiralty island.
Button, a grassy islet in China strait.
io° 34' S., 150° 44' E.
Button, see Utirik, of the Marshall islands.
Byam, see NGanati, Paumotu archipelago.
Byam Martin, an old name of Vairaatea,
Paumotu archipelago.
Byer, see Patrocinio of the Hawaiian group.
Byron, island in Engineer group of the Louisiade archipelago.
Byron, on the southeast coast of New Guinea; forms a triangle with Grant and
Shortland.
Byron, see Nukunau, Gilbert islands. 7.
Cabeva, islet of Fiji. 160 iT 20" s., 1790 34' 45" e.
Cabras, see Apapa on the west coast of Guam, Marianas.
Cadmus, a name of Morane of the Paumotu archipelago. 2,2,.
Cairncross, a group on the Australian coast. iT 15' S., 143° E.
Calalin, islet of Majuro, Marshall islands. 70 09' n., 1710 13' E.
Calvados Chain, Louisiade archipelago; a series of high islands extending 45 m.
from Panasia. The villages are generally on the northern sides of the densely
wooded islands. The canoes are large and fitted with oval mat sails. The in¬
habited islands are: Pana varavara, Utian, Panaudiudi, Toloi awa, Gulewa, Ulu-
lina, Moturina, Panarora, Paba baga, Pana numara, Panantinian and Panawina.
Calvert, see Maloelab of the Marshall group.
Campbell, an uninhabited group 30 m. in circumference; discovered in 1810 by Cap¬
tain Hazelburgh and named for the owner of the brig in which he sailed. Dent
lies to the northwest, Jacquemart to the south. The highest hill is 1500 ft. high.
52 33 44 S., 169 09 09 E.
Campbell, islet in Torres strait. 90 33° 08" S., 143° 29' E.
Candelaria Shoals, of Mendana, now called Roneador. 11.
Cannae, a rock 200-250 ft. high, 9 m. west from Laughlan. Discovered by Dumont
D’Urville. 90 18' S., 153° 2 7' E.
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 2. — 4. C 1 3 2 J
50
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Canton, Mary Balcout or Swallow, in the Phoenix group, is a low, sandy island 1 1 m.
long, 50-500 ft. wide and 10-18 ft. high. 2 44' 35" S., 171° 42' w. 17.
Cap, islet between Gibba and Turtlebacked, off New Guinea. 90 49' S., 142° 42' E.
Cap, see Tabutha, Fiji. 14.
Capeniur, islet of Ailuk, Marshall islands. io° 17' 25" n., 169° 59' 20" E. 8.
Carapellas is south of Kayangle, Pelew islands, with Arayonzet and Korack on a
reef 4.5 m. N-S., 5 m. E-w.
Carlshoff, see Aratika, Paumotu archipelago. 21.
CAROLINE ISLANDS.
Native Name.
Chart Name.
Discoverer.
Latitude
North.
Longitude
East.
Authority.
Population.
Western Group:
NGoli.
Matelotas (Spenser).
Villalobos, 1643.
8°
17'
0"
137°
33'
0"
Cheyne.
100
Lamoliork, Ulu.
Yap.
Ouap.
Hunter, 1791.
9
37
138
08
D'Urville.
2000
Uluthi.
Mackenzie.
Hunter, 1791.
10
06
139
50
Liitke.
200
Fey 6.
Tromelin, Fais.
Tromelin, 1828 (?).
9
46
138
16
“
300
Sorol.
Philip.
Hunter, 1791.
8
06
140
03
20
Central Group:
Eurupig.
Kama.
Hunter, 1791.
6
40
143
10
Liitke.
50
Wolea.
Ulie, Thirteen Ids.
Wilson, 1793.
7
23
30
143
57
“
600
Ifalik.
Wilson.
Wilson. 1793.
7
14
144
31
“
200
Faranlep.
Gardner.
Liitke, 1828.
8
36
144
36
“
Uninhabited.
Olimario.
Liitke, 1828.
7
43
145
56
“
200
Grimes.
High.
Capt. Grimes, 1841.
9
15
145
33
Elato.
Haweis.
Wilson, 1793.
7
30
146
19
300
Lamotrek.
Swede.
Wilson, 1793.
7
27
146
30
“
200
Faiu, West.
West.
Liitke, 1828.
8
03
146
50
“
Uninhabited.
Satawal.
Tucker.
Wilson, 1793.
7
22
147
06
Duperrey.
200
Pikela.
Lydia.
Ibargoita, 1801.
8
38
147
13
“
Uninhabited.
Pikelot.
Coquille. Bigali.
Duperrey, 1824.
8
09
147
42
Uninhabited.
Suk.
Ibargoita.
Ibargoita, 1799.
6
28
149
30
Freycinet.
100
Poloat.
Enderbv, Kata.
Ibargoita, 1801.
7
19
25
149
15
100
Tamatain.
Los Martires.
Ibargoita, 1801.
7
27
149
28
Duperrey.
200
Namonuito.
Anonima, Bunker.
Livingston.
Ibargoita, 1801.
9
00
149
47
Liitke.
50
Fa'iu, East.
Liitke.
Liitke, 1828.
8
33
20
151
26
“
50
Namolipiafane.
Fananou.
Hall, 1824.
8
25
30
151
49
15
“
60
Morileu.
Hall.
Hall. 1824.
8
41
152
25
“
100
Ruk.
Hogoleu, Truk.
Duperrev, 1825.
7
43
151
46
D’Urville.
8000
Losap.
Duperrey.
Liitke, 1824.
6
53
152
42
20
Duperrey.
200
Nama.
D’Urville.
Duperrey, 1825.
6
59
152
33
Findlay.
Namoluk.
Liitke, 1828.
5
45
15
153
16
30
Liitke.
300
Etal. )
( Mortlock, 1793.
5
35
153
43
Cheyne.
200
Lukunor.
Mortlock Islands.
\ Mortlock, 1793.
5
29
18
153
58
Liitke.
200
Satoan. 1
( Mortlock, 1793.
5
17
153
46
500
Nukuor.
Monteverde. Dunkin.
Monteverde, 1806.
3
52
154
56
Findlay.
500
Oraluk.
Bordelaise, San Agostino
Tompson, 1773.
7
38
155
09
“
Uninhabited.
Eastern Group:
NGatik.
Los Valientes, Raven.
Tompson, 1773.
5
47
30
157
32
Findlay.
30
Pakin.
Peguenema.
Liitke, 1828.
7
02
157
47
30
Cheyne.
50
Andema.
Ant.
Fraser, 1832.
6
45
158
00
“
Uninhabited.
Ponape.
Ascension, Puynipet.
Liitke, 1828.
6
48
158
07
Liitke.
5000
Mokil.
Duperrey, Wellington.
Duperrey, 1824.
6
39
159
53
Duperrey.
80
Pingelap.
Musgrave, McAskill.
Musgrave, 1793.
6
12
160
53
McAskill.
300
Kusaie.
Ualan, Strong.
Crozer, 1804.
6
19
163
06
Liitke.
700
Caroline Islands extend from the Pelew group to Ualan, and from 2° to 12° N., and
with the Marshall and Gilbert groups are comprised in that portion of the Pacific
usually called Micronesia. The name comes from that given by the Spanish
Admiral Don Francisco Lezcano to a large island in the group not now identified.
Duperrey and Liitke made the group known geographically, and to Dr. Luther
Halsey Gulick, an American missionary, we are indebted for much information on
both islands and inhabitants. The earliest account is by a Jesuit missionary,
Juan Antonio Cantova, who visited portions of the group in 1721 and was killed
at Mogmog ten years later. There are perhaps 877 square miles distributed over
nearly fifty groups, most of them atolls. The table will show the distribution
[NS]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
5i
more clearly, but the population there given is only approximate. In 1885 the
German gunboat litis took Yap, which Spain at once claimed and her claim was
sustained by the Pope, adting as arbitrator. After the war with the United States,
and the loss of Guam and the Philippines, Spain sold the entire group to Germany
for $4,000,000.
Caroline, or Thornton, a group of low coral islands on one reef 7 111. long, 1 m. wide.
Taken by England July 9, 1868. io° o' 01" S., 150° 14' 30" \v.
Carpenter, islet on the same reef with Browne and Tracey in Nares harbor, of
Admiralty island.
Carr, a high island in the Hudson group, Fiji. North point in I7°35/S., 1770 oT 30” E.
Carry, ereseent-shaped, uninhabited island in Forteseue strait, southeast coast of Newr
Guinea, 1 in. NE-SW., 300 ft. high. io° 34' 45" S., 150° 54' 45" E.
Carteret, a group of six islets on a circular reef 10 m. diameter, all inhabited and
thickly wooded. Discovered by Captain Carteret in 1767. 40 45" S., 155 20 E.
Carysfort, see Tureia, Paumotu archipelago.
Case, a high island of the Hudson group, Fiji. 170 37' 30" S., 177° 03" 30" E.
Casey, islet I m. north from Montravel, New Caledonia.
Castori, a high, rocky group on the southeast point of New Guinea. io° 47" S.,
150° 38' E. 9.
Catherine, islet off Cape Dueie on the northeast coast of New Guinea.
Catherine, see Ujae, Marshall group.
Catto, islet 2 m. off southwest end of Eua, Tongan group. Discovered by Tasman in
1643. 2i° 29' S., 174° 50' 30" w.
Cerisy, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 70 iT 05" n., 151" 51' 36" E.
Cette, another name for Eunauro on coast of New Guinea.
Chabral, see Lifu of the Loyalty group.
Chain, a low, wooded islet northeast of East cape, New Guinea.
Chain, see Anaa, Paumotu archipelago.
Chamisso, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 7 16' 48" N., 15 1° 47' 42" E.
Champignon, islet in St. Vincent bay on southwest coast of New Caledonia.
Chanal, of Marchand, is Hatutu of the Marquesas group.
Chanter, islet off the east coast of Raoul, Kermadec group. 29° i5'3o"s., 1 77° 54,02,,\v.
Chard, islet 4.7 111. long, 100 ft. high, off the coast of New Britain. 50 27A., 150° 58' E.
Charles, of the Galapagos is 24 m. in circumference; once settled, now deserted,
1780 ft. high.
Charles Hardy, see Nissan of the Bismarck archipelago.
Charlotte, another name for Apaiang, Gilbert islands.
Chas, see Wari, New Guinea.
Chase, see Tamana, Gilbert islands.
Chassant = Salat, of the Caroline islands.
Chatham, a group belongingto New Zealand and situated in 43°48/59"s., 176° 39' 50" w.
It was discovered by Captain Broughton of the armed tender Chatham attached to
Vancouver’s expedition in 1791. At the time of the discovery there were some
1200 natives of a race resembling the Maori and called Moriori. They were a
cheerful and healthy people dressed in seal skins, but when, in 1840, Dr. Dieffenbach
[134]
52
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
visited the group, only 90 survived. In 1830 there had been an importation of 800
Maoris, and the present population is a very motley one. The largest island,
Chatham or Warekauri, extends on the north coast 31 m., on the south about half
that distance. Pitt or Rangihaute is 1 1 m. from Chatham and 8 m. long. A mile
off the southeast end of Pitt is Rangatira or Southeast, and still farther to the
southeast is Tarakoikoia or the Pyramid, a bare rock 566 ft. high. In 1868 this
group was surveyed by the New Zealand Surveyor General, S. Percy Smith.
Both the geological formation and the flora connect the Chatham islands with
New Zealand.
Chatham, of the Galapagos, 19 m. NE-SW. by 8 m., 1650 ft. high. Only island of the
group where water is always found.
Chaumont, see Hui-wadiamo of the Louisiade archipelago.
Cherry, see Anuda. 12.
Chicayana, a spelling of Sikaiana or Stewart.
Chiknru, a name of the islet Pingelap, Caroline islands, usually called Tugulu on the
charts.
Chissy, islet on the Maclay coast of New Gninea. 6° 02' S., 147° 32' E.
Choiseul, of the Solomon islands, was discovered in April, 1568, by Pedro de Ortega
Valencia and Hernan Gallego, Mendana’s pilot. The present name commemo¬
rates the distinguished minister of Louis XV. In extent, 83X20 m., and 2000 ft.
high; mountainous and wooded. The north point is in 6° 37' S., 156° 27' E. II.
Christina (Cristina), the old name of Tahuata, of the Marquesas islands.
Christmas, a low, lagoon island extending 44 m. E-w. Discovered by Cook December
24, 1 777. The water of the lagoon is said to be remarkably salt. Annexed by
Great Britain March 17, 1888. i° 59' n., 1570 32' w.
Church, islet on south side of Huapu, Marquesas islands.
Cicia, see Thithia, Fiji.
Cicobia, see Thikombia, Fiji.
Clarence (Duke of), see Nukunono, of the Union group. 17.
Clark, a low island of the Fiji group. 16° 22' 24” S., 179° iF 32" E.
Clarke, island on the north side of Banks strait.
Clerk, see Onoatoa of the Gilbert islands.
Clerke, see Tekokoto of the Paumotu archipelago.
Clermont de Tonnerre, see Reao, Paumotu archipelago. Named for the French Min¬
ister of Marine.
Cliff, islet of the Australian coast. 140 13' S., 143° 48' E.
Cliff, two islets off the coast of New Guinea. 90 26' S., 146° 56' E.
Cliffy = Ikaika Keino of the Louisiade archipelago.
Chokach, an islet within the reef of Ponape, Caroline islands, on the north side.
Clipperton, a lagoon island, uninhabited; discovered by Captain Clipperton in 1705.
There is a deep hole in the lagoon, and trachytic rocks on the outer ring.
Claimed by France. io° 17' n., 109° 13' w.
Clock, islet on the Australian coast. 140 04' S., 144° 17' E.
Cloquet, a name of Giequel which was formerly described as an island on the north
coast of New Britain; now known to be a peninsula. 10.
[i35]
INDEX TO THE PA CIEIC ISLANDS.
53
Close, islet in the Bismarck archipelago. 40 57' s., 15 1° i8r E.
Clute, see Hiti, Paumotu archipelago.
Coast, island off New Guinea, 300 ft. high, well-wooded, and with a fringing reef.
o / // _ o / // .
10 35 25 s., 150 40 20 e.
Cockatoo, islet in Thousand Ships bay, Solomon islands. 8° 33' S., 159° 37' E.
Cockburn, group off coast of Australia. iT 51' s., 1430 18' E.
Cockburn, see Ahunui, Paumotu archipelago. 22.
Coconut, in the Bismarck archipelago, with Leigh and the coast of New Ireland forms
Carteret harbor. Inhabitants cannibals. 40 42' S., 152° 42' E.
Coconut, islet on the New Guinea coast. io° 04' S., 143° 03' E.
COCOS, island known to Wafer, Dampier and other early navigators, 4.5 m. NE-SW.,
very high. 50 32' 57" N., 88° 02' 10" w. Northeast from the Galapagos.
Cocos, a name given in 1790 by Captain Wilkinson to the group discovered by Lemaire
and Schouten, and by them called Marqueen.
Codfish, islet off the west coast of Stewart, New Zealand, 3 m. nw-SE., 2 m. wide.
Coffin, group of the Bonin islands. 26° 38' N., 142° 15' E.
Collis a name of Kamaka, an islet of Mangareva.
Columb, a coral islet, wooded and inhabited, in Astrolabe bay, New Guinea.
Colvocoressis, see Draviuni, Fiji.
Commerson, or Comerson, two low islands discovered by Bougainville in 1768.
0° 40' S., 145° 17' E.
Conflict, group of more than 22 islets in the Louisiade archipelago. io°46/S., 15 1° 46" E.
Named for H. B. M. S. Conflict in 1880.
Connor, see Katai in the New Guinea region.
Constantin, see Greenwich of the Caroline group.
Contrariete, the old Spanish name of Ulava, Solomon islands.
Contrariete islet = Porondu, New Caledonia.
Conversion de San Pablo (La), supposed to be Britomart, of Duperrey. Discovered by
Quiros February 10, 1606. See Quirds Viajes , /., 256; //., 7, 92.
Cook, islet at entrance to Christmas island lagoon. i° 57' 16" N., 157° 27' 45" W.
Cook, see Tarawa, Gilbert islands.
Cook, islet on the northeast coast of Fate, New Hebrides.
Cook Islands, a portion of the Hervey group, often so-called.
Coquille, see Pikelot of the Caroline islands.
Cornwallis, another name for Johnston.
Coronados, see Anuanurunga, Paumotu archipelago.
Cosissipe, island in the Hermit group. It abounds in pigeons.
Count Heiden = Likieb, Marshall group.
Coutance, a well-wooded islet of New Guinea, half a mile long and a quarter broad.
io° 13' S., 148° of E.
Covell, a name for Ebon, Marshall islands.
Crab, islet on the northwest coast of York peninsula, Australia. io° 58' S., 142° 56' E.
Cravetl, a high island in the Hudson group, Fiji. 17° 39' S., 177 01 30" E.
Credner, or Pigeon group, lies between Duke of York and New Britain; low and thickly
wooded islands, each with a separate reef with deep water between. 40 15' S., 152° 19'E.
[136]
54
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Crescent, see Timoe, Paumotu archipelago. 22.
Cretin, see Tami, east coast of New Guinea. 6° 45' S., 147° 49' E. Named for Lien-
tenant Cretin of the Recherche.
Croker, see Heraiki, Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Crouy islet is in Dumbea passage, entrance to Noumea roadstead, New Caledonia.
Crowtl is 7 m. northwest from Long on the coast of New Guinea. It was discovered
by Dampier; is 4-5 m. in circumference, and 2000 ft. high. 5 08' S., 146° 56' E.
Culpepper is the most northerly of the Galapagos, very barren, 550 ft. high.
i° 39' 30" n., 92° 03' w.
Cumberland, see Manuhangi, Paumotu archipelago.
Cumberland, an extensive group off the east coast of Queensland, Australia, reach¬
ing to 21° S.
Cumming, low islet of Fiji. i6c 21' 40" s., 1790 oS' 47" e.
Cuop, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands.
Cure, a name of Ocean in the Hawaiian group.
Current, see Pulo Anna, Caroline islands.
Curtis, two rocks in the Kermadec group, 500 ft. high. Said to emit hot water and
steam. 30° 36' S., 179° 14 w.
Cyclades ( Les) of Bougainville — New Hebrides.
Cyprian Bridge, the easternmost island on the west side of Bougainville strait, Solo¬
mon group, 377 ft. high, dome-shaped.
Daddahai, or Brierly, in the Louisiade archipelago; about a mile in circuit, 380 ft.
high, wooded and inhabited. n° i8r S., 153“ 08' E.
Dageraad = fVurora or Makatea of the Paumotus. Discovered by Roggewein in 1712.
Daiwari, or Gibbons, islet of Nuakata, Louisiade archipelago; 290 ft. high, clothed
with grass, uninhabited.
Dalrymple, in Torres strait. g° 37' S., 143° 18' E.
Dambach, a small cluster Oil the east coast of Bougainville, Solomon islands. 5°4i's.,
155° 07' E.
Dampier, or Karkar, is 6-7 m. northeast of Cape Croisilles on the coast of New
Guinea; volcanic, and about 5000 ft. high, 36-40 m. in circumference. 40 42' S.,
145° 58' E. IO.
Danger, see Pukapuka, Paumotu archipelago. 22.
Danger group consists of three islands, Pukapuka, Motukoe and Motnkavata on a
reef 8 m. E-w. and 4 m. n-s. Discovered by Byron June 21, 1765. Lagoon closed,
landing dangerous. io° 53' S., 165° 45' 30" w.
Danger, islands of New Guinea. o° 15' s., 1350 05' E.
Dangerous Archipelago, a name of the Paumotu group.
Daniel, see Arno of the Marshall group.
Dao Balayet, a sand islet marking Estrees passage on the northwest coast of New
Caledonia.
Daos islets form the south part of Belep group, New Caledonia. 13.
Daomboni, islet on the north coast of New Caledonia.
Darnley, a name of Ernb on the New Guinea coast,
U37]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
55
Dartl, or Yarn, at the mouth of the Oriomo (Tait) river, north of Bobo and between
Bristow and the mainland. Fertile, fine timber, not many natives. g° 05' s.,
143° 12' E.
Dauan, islet off the west side of Saibai on the South coast of New Guinea. 9° 25' S.,
142° 32' E.
Dauar, or Dowar, islet within the same reef with Mer and Waier of the Murray isl¬
ands; Papuan inhabitants. 90 54' S., 144° 02' E.
Daugae, islet on the reef at the north extreme of New Caledonia.
DaugO, the highest of the Fishermen islands off Port Moresby on the south coast of
of New Guinea. Natives numerous, dark copper color; they have large canoes
with four mat sails. 90 3 2 S., 147° 04" E.
Dauila, or Goodenough, of the D’Entrecasteaux group, is 21 m. nw-SE. A mountain
range, of which the highest peak reaches 8500 ft., extends throughout. Well
peopled and cultivated to some extent. 90 31' s., 150° 20 E.
DailSSy, islet in Arembo bay on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Davis, a high island in the Yasawa group, Fiji. 170 27" 40^ S., 1 7 70 ocf 30" E.
Davis, see Rapanui or Easter.
Dawhaida, see Marokau of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
DawSOll, largest of the Easeinie group in the Louisiade archipelago, 0.7 m. nw-SE.,
450 ft. high, uninhabited.
Dawson, a very small reefed islet in the D’Entrecasteaux group. io° 21S., 151° 25W.
Dawson, see Bikar, Marshall islands. 6.
Day, one of the Tiri islets off Vanua levu, Fiji. 16 24" 14" S., 179° 09' 20" E. Low
coral.
Dayman, islet in Torres strait. io° 45' s., 142° 21' E.
Dayrell, islet off the east coast of Raoul, Kermadec islands.
Deal, island of Kent group in Bass strait. 390 30' s., 147° 18" E.
Deans is one of the names of Rahiroa, also called Vliegen and Nairsa, Paumotu archi¬
pelago.
Death, islet in St. Vincent bay on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Deblois, islet of New Guinea. 30 22' S., 144° 09' E.
Deboyne, group in the Louisiade archipelago is 6 m. from St. Aignan, a high
(1500ft.), wooded cluster, of which Panniet is the largest; Rara at the southeast
extreme. Nivan, Panapoinpon, Nibub, Mabui, Redlick and Torlesse complete
the list.
Deboyne, see Panniet of the Louisiade archipelago.
Debrun, islet near Noumea on the south side of New Caledonia.
Ducena = Maitea in the Espinosa chart. Discovered by Quiros February 12, 1606.
Deception = Moso, New Hebrides.
Deedes, two islets 0.7 m. apart in the Engineer group. io° 32' S., 151° 16' E.
Deguala, one of the Pleiades group northwest of Uea, Loyalty group.
De Haven, a high island of the Ringgold group, Fiji. 160 30" 20" s., i8oc 2F 3c/ E.
Deirina, islet of New Guinea, 0.7X0. 5 m., 280 ft. high, inhabited.
Dekatua, or Butchart, islet of the Engineer group, 350 ft. high, covered with coco¬
nut palms,
[138]
56
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Delami = Roporopo in Orangerie bay, southeast coast of New Guinea.
Deliverance islet, a point in the north boundary of Queensland colony. g° 34/ S.,
1410 45' E.
Denham, islet at west end of Kandavu, Fiji.
Deni is the native name of Nitendi or Santa Cruz in the New Hebrides, according to
Codrington.
Dent, island in Northwest bay, Campbell island, New Zealand.
D’Entrecasteaux group was seen from a distance by the French navigator from whom
it is named. Captain Moresby examined the islands in 1874. The group con¬
sists of Duau (Normanby), Moratau (Fergusson), Dauila (Goodenough) , Rapu-
tata Sanaroa (Welle), Dobu (Goulvain), all of them high and fine islands, well
peopled. 9.
D’Entrecasteaux, inhabited islet half a mile long in the Admiralty group. i°53/S.,
146° 30' E.
De Peyster, see Nukufetau of the Ellice group. 16.
D’Haussez, see Mercury, New Zealand.
Des Eacs, one of the French group, 1550 ft. high, inhabited. 4°38's., 149° 33' E. IO.
Des Fanciers, a name given by Bougainville to Akiaki or Thrum Cap of the Paumotu
islands.
Devarenne, islet in St. Vincent bay on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Deverd, islet off Chasseloup bay on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Didigili, wooded islet, 150 ft. high, with fringing reef on the southeast coast of New
Guinea.
Didot, islet in Mueo passage near Noumea, New Caledonia.
Didymus, see Ito, islet on the New Guinea coast.
Dieterici, a small group on the northeast coast of Bougainville, Solomon islands.
60 o f o /
08 s., 155 23 E.
Digaragara, islet at west opening of the outer ring of Egum atoll in the Kiriwina
group. 90 22' 30" S., 15 1° 53' E. 9.
Dingen, small island in Dampier strait.
Dinner, see Samarai on the coast of New Guinea.
Direction = Manevai, Santa Cruz islands.
Direction, see Namena, Fiji.
Disappointment islands (of Byron), in the Paumotu archipelago, were discovered by
Byron June 17, 1765. 14° og S., 141° 14' w. Consist of atoll Napuka or Why-
toohee and Tepoto or Otooho. 21.
Disappointment, off the west coast of the Auckland islands, New Zealand.
Disappointment, one of the Taumaco group.
Disappointment, is the largest of the Duff group, 1200 ft. high. Natives are Poly¬
nesian, number about 350, thin and ugly, armed with bows and poisoned arrows.
Disappointment, see Rosario of the Bonin islands.
Dobu, or Goulvain, is at the entrance to Dawson strait in the D’Entrecasteaux group,
2 m. N-S., 2.2 m. E-W.; inhabited by Papuans. 90 46" s., 150° 52" E. 9.
DodogeSSa, islet off Dauila in the D’Entrecasteaux group.
Dog, see Nonuti of the Gilbert group.
[139)
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
57
Dog, see Pukapuka of the Paumotu archipelago.
Dogigi and Rikarika compose the Lebrun group of the Louisiade archipelago. The
former is 165 ft. high.
Doi, or Konaoe is one of the Ono i lau group, Fiji.
Doini, the Blanchard of D’Entrecasteaux on the southeast coast of New Guinea, is
2 m. ENE-wsw., half a mile wide, 510 ft. high, and well cultivated. io° 42' S.,
150° 40' E.
Dominica, the Spanish name of Hivaoa, Marquesas islands. 23.
Dongaloa, a group of low islets off Viti levu, Fiji. 170 24' S., 177° 39' 30' E.
Dot, islet in Huon gulf on the east coast of New Guinea. j° 05' S., 147° 08' E.
Double, on the Australian coast. 16° 44' S., 145° 44' E.
Double, islet in Torres strait. io° 2J S., 142^ 25' E.
Double, see Nemu, New Caledonia.
Doubtful, an islet of Beaupre, Loyalty group.
Doubtful, see Tekokoto, of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Dougherty, seen by Captain Dongherty in 1841 from whaler James Stewart. Seen
again in 1859. 59° 2 F S., 119° 07' w.
Dove, islet in Torres strait. io° 04' S., 142 57' E.
Dover, two islets on the south coast of Admiralty. 2° iC S., 147° 13' E.
Dowar, see Dauar in Torres strait.
DowSett Reef is 13 m. south from Malo reef in the Hawaiian group. It extends
8 m. X 4 m. 25° 13' N., 170° 38' w. On July 4, 1872, the whaling brig Kameha-
meha , Captain Dowsett, struck on this reef which is awash in some parts.
Dowsett, see Bikini of the Marshall group.
Drala, see Ndrala, Fiji; islet 80 ft. high, off the east coast of Viti levu.
Dramai, islet on the New Guinea coast. 4 oC S., 134 10' E.
Draviuni, see Ndraviuni, Fiji.
Druadrua, see Ndruandrua, Fiji.
Druau, see Ndruandrua, Fiji.
Drummond, a name of Tapituea of the Gilbert islands.
Du ami and Du ana, islets ill Kutu bay, Isle of Pines.
Duau, or Normamby, of the D’Entrecasteaux group, is 39 111. long, mountainous,
rising to an height of 3374 ft., and inhabited. The southeast cape is in io° ic/ S.,
I5I° 14 E.
Dublon, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 70 22' 15" N., 151° 55' 22" E.
Dubou^et, or Nu islet, bears a lighthouse at the entrance to Noumea, New Caledonia.
Dubuaru, islet on the New Guinea coast. 90 08' S., 142° 58' E.
Duchateau, three low, wooded islets, Pana bobai ana, Pana rurawara; and Kukulub,
of the Louisiade archipelago. iT 16' S., 152° 22' E.
Duchess, see Uruma of the D’Entrecasteaux group. 9.
Ducie was discovered by Captain Edwards in H. M. S. Pandora in 1791. A low, un¬
inhabited lagoon island 1.7 m. NE-SW., and 1 m. wide in 24° 40' S., 124° 48' w.
DUCOS, islet in St. Vincent bay on the southwest coast of New Caledonia.
Dudemaine, islet on the north coast of New Guinea, 100-200 ft. high. 30 08' S.,
142° 20 E.
58
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Dtlfaure, on the north side of New Britain, is 7 nr. long. 50 06' S., 150° 14 E.
Dnfaure, see Mugula on the southeast coast of New Guinea. 9.
Duff, group in the Santa Cruz islands, was discovered by Quiros and Torres in 1606,
and again by Captain Wilson, in the Duff , September 25, 1797. Consists of ten
small islands extending SE-NW. 17 m. Inhabitants largely Polynesian. British
protectorate declared October 1, 1898. 90 48' S., 167° 10' E.O 12.
Dugong, islet on the New Guinea coast. io° 31' S., 143° 03' E.
Dugumenu, a low, coral island 0.5 m. in diameter, of the Trobriand group.
Duipoi, islet of Mahabarina, of the Killerton group, off the north shore of Milne bay,
New Guinea.
Duke of Clarence, see Nukunono of the Union group. 17.
Duke of Gloucester, a group of three atolls named by Carteret in 1 767. Nuku-
tapipi or Margaret, Anuanurunga, Coronados or Four Crowns, and Anuanuraro
or Archangel, in the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Duke of York, a group of 13 islets, of which this is the largest, Bismarck archi¬
pelago, between New Britain and New Ireland. It is 5 m. E-W., 3.5 m. n-S.
Makada and Uluare are the only others of any size, but all except Ulu are in¬
habited by cannibals. 4' 09' S., 152° 28' E. IO.
Duke of York, see Atafu or Oatafu of the Union group. 17.
Duke of York, see Moorea, Society islands. Name given by Wallis July 27, 1767. 20.
Dumoulin, group of four islets and two detached rocks, Baiiri, Ana karukarua,
Ana badi badila, Uarama kiukiu. The first is 365 ft. high and inhabited. io°55/S.,
150° 43' E.
Dumplings, a group of three islets from 180-250 ft. high on the northeast coast of
New Guinea.
Duncan, a group of islets in Torres strait. io° 16' S., 142° 06' E.
Duncan, of the Galapagos.
Dundas, on the northeast coast of Auckland islands, New Zealand.
Dundas, see Apamama, Gilbert islands. 7.
DungeneSS, islet on the south coast of New Guinea near Tut. 90 51' s., 142° 55" E.
Dunk, islet of the Australian coast. 170 58" S., 146° iT E.
Dunkin, see Nukuor, Caroline archipelago. 4.
Duperre, a group of five wooded islets on a reef in the Louisiade archipelago. n° I2/S.,
152° E.
Duperrey, a low, wooded, inhabited island in Humboldt bay on the north coast of
New Guinea.
Duperrey, see Aura, an islet of Mokil, Caroline islands. This name is applied to
Mokil, also.
Duportail, a group on the north side of New Britain, 5 m. by 2.7 m. There is an
adtive volcano near the southwest end. 40 55' s., 15 1° 21' E. Named for Lieu¬
tenant Duportail of the Esperance. 10.
Duroc, islet in Alemene passage, Isle of Pines.
Durour, a flat islet on the coast of New Guinea, discovered by Carteret September 19,
U67- i° 3.V s., 143° 11 E.
D’Urville, in west end of Cook strait, New Zealand.
[141]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
59
D’Urville, see Kairu, New Guinea.
D’Urville, see Nama islet of Uosap, Caroline islands. 4.
Dyar, islet on the New Guinea coast. i° 37' s., 13 1° 45' E.
Hap, an old spelling of Yap, Caroline islands.
Bar, islet of Uluthi, Caroline islands.
Karl Dalhousie shoal, Caroline islands. 8° n., 1450 09' E.
Barle = Pana krusima of the Uouisiade archipelago.
Hast Haiti or Liitke, a low coral island 0.7 m. long, with fringing reef, uninhabited.
Caroline islands. 8° 33' N., 15 1° 26' E.
East, see Waremata of the Uouisiade archipelago.
Kast, a group of four islets off the north coast of New Hanover, the easternmost being
the largest.
East, islet 60 ft. high off Florida, Solomon islands.
East, islet off Kandavu, Fiji; rocky, 69 ft. high.
East, islet of Wari or Teste, New Guinea, 100 ft. high.
Easter, see Rapanui.
Eastern, islet of Midway islands, Hawaiian group, 1.2 m. long, 6-15 ft. high, covered
with coarse grass and small shrubs; sand dazzling. 28° 12' 22" N., 1770 22" w.
Ebadon, islet of Kwadjalin, Marshall islands. 90 22" n., i66j 53' E.
Ebon, called also Boston and Covel, of the Marshall group, consists of 21 well wooded
islets on a reef 25 m. in circumference. Discovered May 25, 1824, by Captain
Ray, an American. 4 48' N., i68D 45" w. The islets of importance are called
Jurijer, Enijarmek, Ebon, Dereg, Eniiadok, Guamaguamlap, Euer, Munjak, Taka,
Enilo, Jio, Met. Ebon islet forms the south and southeast side of the atoll; 5 m. long;
is the largest and most important of the group. American mission station. 6.
Ebuma, islet 80 ft. high, near Samarai on the southeast coast of New Guinea.
Eddystone, see Panarora of the Uouisiade archipelago. It is 540 ft. high and inhabited.
Eddystone, see Narovo, Solomon islands. II.
Edgecombe, see Tupua, of the Santa Cruz group.
Edigen, islet of Kwadjelin, Marshall group.
Efate = Fate or Vate or Sandwich, of the New Hebrides.
Egerup, see Erikub of the Marshall islands. 6.
Egg, see Nui of the Ellice group. 18.
Egg, see Uehua, Hawaiian group.
Egmont, see Vairaatea, Paumotu archipelago. 22.
Egniont of Carteret is Santa Cruz, or Deni (Nitendi).
Egum, atoll in the Trobriand group, is 13 m. in diameter, the encircling reef opening
only on the nw. and NE., having six islets on the north portion, Degargara,
Yanaba, Wiakou, Napasa, Tabunagora, Nagian ; while in the centre of the lagoon
are Fandaio, Simlakita, Kadais Mua and Egum in one group to the north, and
Nasakor consisting of four islets to the south. 9 26' S., 151 58" E. 9.
Ehiki, islet of Panasia, Uouisiade archipelago.
Eiao, called also Masse, Knox, Hiaou, of the Marquesas group, is 6 m. ne-SW., 2000 ft.
high, well wooded, but uninhabited. 8° 02" S., 140° 4F W. 2 3*
[142]
6o
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Eil, Malk or Irakong, of the Pelew islands, is rocky and well-wooded. io° iL yT' N.,
o / // _
134 27 30 E.
Eimeo, see Moorea, Society islands. 20.
Einmlap, islet of Udjelong, Marshall islands.
Eirek, islet of Wotto, Marshall islands.
Ejeet, islet in Majuro lagoon, 9.5 m. from from the entrance, Marshall islands.
Ekolo, islet of Ontong Java. 5° 38' S., 159° 34' E. II.
ElatO, or Haweis, Caroline group, consists of the islets Falifi, Toass, Namoliaur.
o r ro f ^
7 30 N., 146 24 E.
Eld, a small, high island near Naviti, Yasawa group, Fiji. Of triangular form, 1 m.
long. The north point is in 170 09' 40" S., 177° ic/ 10” E. Named for Henry Fid
of the United States Exploring Expedition.
Elephant, islet of Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
Elisabeth, one of the Admiralty group; a low coral island 1.2 m. N-S, by 0.2 m. wide;
inhabited. 2° 55' S., 147° 03' E.
Elisabeth, near Mbenga, Fiji.
Elisabeth, see Henderson of the Paumotu archipelago.
Elisabeth, see Toau of the Paumotu archipelago.
Elisabeth, see Manoba of the Solomon islands.
Eliza, see Tepoto of the Paumotu archipelago.
Eliza, see Onoatoa of the Gilbert group.
Eliza, see Peru of the Gilbert group.
Ella, islet of Ifalik, Caroline islands.
Ellice group. Consists of nine low atolls of which eight are inhabited ; extends
nw. by N.-SE. by S. about 360 m.; peopled from Samoa, except Nui whose inhabitants
came from the Gilbert islands. Visited by Maurelle in 1781, and by Captain
de Peyster in 1819. The atolls are Nurakita or Sophia, Nukulaelae or Mitchell,
Fangawa, Funafuti or Ellice, Funafana, Nukufetau or De Peyster, Vaitupu or
Tracy, Nui or Netherland or Egg, Niutao or Speiden or Lynx, Navomana or
Hudson, and Nanomea or St. Augustine. 16.
Ellice, see Funafuti.
Elliott, island of Fiji, named for the Chaplain of Wilkes’ ship. 18° 5T S., 178° 24' E.
Elmore, islet of Odia atoll, Marshall group.
Elson is the same as Aukena of Mangareva.
Emery, or Wea of the Atana group, northwest from Rotuma; 700 ft. high.
Emmons, islet of the Hudson group, Fiji. 170 38' 20" s., 1770 06' E. A high islet
named for Lieut. Geo. F. Emmons of the Wilkes Expedition.
Encarnacion of Quiros (1606) was placed in about 24° 50' S., 137° 42" w., but there is
no land near that position. As Quiros estimated the distance from the American
coast at 1500 legnas it would be difficult to identify his island, which he describes
as nearly level with the water.
Enderbury, a guano island of the Phoenix group, 3 m. by 2.5 m., and 23 ft. high.
The north point is in 30 06' 35" S., 171° 14' 25" w. 17.
Enderby, islet on the northeast coast of Auckland island, New Zealand.
[143]
INDEX TO THE PA C/E/C ISLANDS.
61
Enderby, one of the Tamatam or Los Martires group in the Carolines, discovered by
Ibargoitia in 1799- It consists of Alet and Poloat with a fringing reef 5.5 m. E-W.
and 3 m. N-s. 7° 19' 25" n., 1490 15' e. 4.
Enear, islet of Kbon, Marshall islands.
Engebi, islet on the north side of Eniwetok, Marshall islands.
Engineer, see Tubutubu, New Guinea.
Engineer group, in io° 37' S., 151° 16' E., consists of four islands, Berri berrije or
Slade, Nara nara wai or Skelton, Kuriva or Watts, and Dekatua or Butehart. 9.
Engnoch, islet of Yap, Caroline islands.
Eniwetok, or Brown of the Marshall group, was discovered by Captain Thomas
Butler, December 13, 1794. Consists of 30 islets on a reef 29 m. in diameter.
The north point is in n° 40' N., 162° 15' E. 6.
Enkaba, islet of Fiji, 2 m. by 1 m., well wooded, and inhabited. The north end is in
180 50' s., 1810 06' 30" E.
Entrance, islet east of Prince of Wales in Torres strait. io° 42' S., 142° 17' E.
Entrance, at the mouth of Aird river, New Guinea.
Entrance, islet in the Louisiade archipelago.
Entry, see Kapiti, New Zealand.
Enybarbar, islet of Rongelab, Marshall islands.
Enyebing, islet of Ailinglap, Marshall islands.
Enylamiej, north islet of Udjae; one of the finest in the Marshall islands. 90 21 N.,
165° 36' E.
Enyvertok, islet of Rongelab, Marshall islands. n° 16' n., 167° 43' E.
Eo, another name for Beaupre, Loyalty group. 13.
Eori, an uninhabited islet of the Mamanutha ira group, Fiji.
Epi, see Api of the New Hebrides.
Epoko, the westernmost islet of the Renard group, Louisiade archipelago.
Eraniau, at the entrance to Erakor lagoon, Fate or Sandwich island, New Hebrides.
Headquarters of the Presbyterian mission.
Erikub, or Bishop Junction or Egerup, is an uninhabited island of the Marshall
islands, 25 m. by 6-1 1 m. The southeast point is in 90 06 ' n., 170° 04' E., accord¬
ing to Kotzebue.
Eromanga, a high and rocky island of the New Hebrides, 30 m. by 32 m. Five
missionaries have been murdered here. 12.
Erradika, or Hat islet at the entrance to Havannah harbor in Fate, New Hebrides,
contains a coral mound 345 ft. high rising from a low island.
Erronan, see Futuna, New Hebrides.
Eru, islet of Kwadjelin, Marshall group.
Erub, or Darnley in Torres strait, is a volcanic island 5 m. in circumference and 610 ft.
hi gh. 9° 35' 20 " s., 143° 45' E-
Eruption, see Misima in the Louisiade archipelago.
Eschscholtz, a name given to Bikini by Kotzebue in honor of Johann D. Esehscholtz,
who was naturalist on both of Kotzebue’s expeditions. 5.
Espiritll Santo, New Hebrides, called Australia del Espiritu Santo by Quiros in
April, 1606, and by the settlers and traders plain Santo, Marina of the natives, is
[144]
62
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
a high volcanic island 75X40 m. in extent, and 4000 ft. high. Inhabitants were,
and to some extent still are cannibals. The southwest point is in 150 38' 08" S.,
1 66° 46' 30" E.
Estaneelin, see Maturei Vavao in the Adtseon group, Paumotu archipelago.
Etal, of the Carolines, is 12 m. in circumference and has some 400 inhabitants. Fine
breadfruit trees here are said to measure 60 ft. to the first limb. 50 35' N.,
153° 43' E- 5-
Ethel, islet at the head of Port Moresby, south coast of New Guinea.
Eua, of the Tongan group, was discovered by Tasman in January, 1643, who called it
Middleburg. It is 10 m. southeast from Tongatabu, is 30 m. in circumference,
and 1078 ft. high. 21° 20 30" S., 175° 02' w. About 300 inhabitants. 18.
Euaiga, see Buaiki of the Tongan group.
Eliaiki, -islet of Tongatabu, much higher than the others. 2i 07/30//S., 174° 55^. 18.
Etlgene, islet on the southwest coast of Ysabel, Solomon islands. 8° 17' S., 159° iFe. II.
Eugenie, islet in Cloudy bay on the coast of New Guinea.
Eunauro (Kuna), or Cette, is on the southeast coast of New Guinea. io° 25/ S.,
1490 2O E. Rocky, thickly inhabited by savages who have large canoes and fight
chiefly with spears.
Eurupig or Kama, Caroline archipelago, consists of two islets on a reef 2.5 m. long.
Population, 50. 6° 40' n., 1430 10 ' E. 3.
Evans, of the Louisiade archipelago, was discovered in 1841. g° 10' S., 151° 55' E.
Evans, islet of Sugar-loaf, is in Cook strait, New Zealand.
Ewing, islet on the northeast coast of Auckland islands, New Zealand.
Ewose, near Tonga in the New Hebrides, is 1.2 m. nw-SE., and 1076 ft. high. About
30 inhabitants.
Exchequer, see L’Echiquier. 8.
Exploring islands, a name given by Wilkes in 1840 to an important group in Fiji
enclosed by a reef 77 m. in circumference, which has a sloping edge to windward.
The islets are Munia, Malatta, Osubu, Vanua mbalavu, Avia, and Susui.
Eyo, islet in Makira harbor of San Cristoval, Solomon islands.
Faaite, or Miloradowitch of the Paumotu islands, was discovered by Bellingshausen in
1819. It is 15 m. long and 5 m. wide. The west end is in i6°43's., 145° 19' 30" w. 21.
Fabre, a guano island of the Huon group.
Faed, see Abgarris of the Bismarck archipelago.
Fafa, islet of Tongatabu, Tongan islands. 21° 05' S., 175° 08' w. 18.
Faiava or Wasau islet of Uea, Loyalty group.
Faioa, islet of Uvea or Wallis. It is covered with coconuts.
Fais, see Feys, Caroline archipelago.
Faitruk, a group in the west part of Ruk lagoon, Caroline islands. Consists of Tol,
Fanup, Fanupenges, Remalum, Oni, Utet, Jawt, etc. Population not less than
8000; fierce, untamed heathen.
Faiu (east) or Lfitke, of the Caroline islands, was discovered by Lfitke, and is a low
coral island 0.7 111. long; uninhabited. 8° 33' 20" n., 15 i° 26' E. 4.
[145]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS. 63
Faill (west), low, wooded, coral islet, 300 yards in diameter and uninhabited. 8° 03' n.,
146° 50' E. 3.
Faguin, see Howland.
Fakaafo or Bowditeh, in the Union group, was discovered by Captain Hudson of the
United States Exploring Expedition. A British protectorate was proclaimed June
20, 1889. A triangular coral island 8 m. n-S., 4 m. E-W.; population about 250. South
point is in 90 26' 40" s., 17 1° 03' 15" w. Sixty-two islets. Also written Fakaofu. 16.
Fakaina, see Akahaina of the Paumotu archipelago.
Fakarawa, or Wittgenstein, was discovered by Bellingshausen in 1829. A lagoon
atoll 32 m. by 10 m. Station of the French Resident for the Paumotu archi¬
pelago. Northeast point is in 16° 05' S., 145° 33' w.
Falalep, islet of Uluthi of the Caroline archipelago.
Falalis, islet of Wolea, of the Caroline archipelago. Population, 600 (Gulick).
Falang, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 7° 21' 22" n., 151' 52' 57" E.
Falcon, Tongan group. 20° 21' S., 175° 23" W. First seen as a breaking reef from
H. M. S. Falcon in 1885. An eruption of that year left it 2 m. long and 250 ft.
[146]
64
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
high, according to a survey in 1889. Ten years later Captain Field, in H. M. S.
Penguin , found nothing but a breaking shoal.
Faleii, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands.
Falevai, islet in the Tongan group.
Falifi, islet of Elato, Caroline islands.
Fallafagea, a form of Kelifijia in the Tongan group.
False, islet on the northeast coast of New Guinea, near Huon gulf.
False, see Thikombia, Fiji.
Falulap, islet of Wolea, Caroline archipelago.
Fanadik, central islet of Tamatam or Los Martires, Caroline archipelago.
Fanantl, islet of Namolipiafane, Caroline islands.
Fatldaio, islet in the lagoon of Egum, atoll of the Kiriwina group. 9°25/S., i5i°57,E.
Fangataufa, see Ahunii, Paumotu archipelago.
Fangawa, westernmost islet of Nukulaelae, Ellice group. 9°22,S., 179° 50' E. 16.
Fanning was discovered in 1798 by Captain Edmund Fanning, an American, in the
ship Betsy. Annexed by England March 15, 1888; 9.5 m. NW-SE., 27 m. in cir¬
cumference; very fertile; English harbor on the west side is within an opening
to the lagoon, and the principal houses are south of this. 3°5i/25//N., I59°22,w.
Fanuatapu, high, rocky islet, east coast of Upolu, Samoan islands.
Fanuatapu, inhabited islet on the southwest side of Nui, Paumotu archipelago.
Fanup, islet of Ruk lagoon, Caroline archipelago.
FanupengeS, islet of Ruk lagoon, Caroline archipelago, 3 m. east from Tol.
Faore is the second in size of the Stewart islands at the northwest end of the reef.
Fapula, islet on the east coast of Ysabel, Solomon islands. 8° 19' S., 159° 42' E. II.
Fara, islet on the east coast of Ysabel, Solomon islands. 8° 09' S., 159° 35' E. II.
Faraguet, a low, wooded islet of Sans Souei group, New Guinea. 30 08' S., 142° 24' E.
Farailes, islet of Wolea, Caroline archipelago.
Farallon de Medinilla or Bird Island, of the Marianas. Volcanic, 2 m. ne-sw., 50 ft.
high. 1 6° 3c/ N., 146' E. See map of Marianas under that name. Farallon is the
common Spanish term for an isolated high rock.
Farallon de Pajaros, in the Marianas, is an aCtive volcano 1039 ft- high ’> in eruption in
1877. Discovered by Douglas Sept. 12, 1789; 1.2 m. in diameter. 20° 36']*., 1440 55'E.
Farallon de Torres, in the Marianas. Formerly pinnacled rocks, but now reduced
by the aCtion of the waves or volcanic forces to rocks awash. Named for a former
governor of Guam. 16° 51' n., 145° 50' E.
Fararik, islet of Ifalik, Caroline islands. 3.
Faraulep or Gardner, of the Caroline islands, was discovered by Liitke, March 28,
1818. There are three islets on a reef 4 m. in circumference. 8° 36' N., 1440 36' E.
Fataka, or Mitre, was discovered by Captain Edwards, in 1791, while searching for
the mutineers of the Bounty. It is uninhabited; 2 m. nw-SE. A British pro¬
tectorate was proclaimed OCtober 1, 1898. n° 55' s., 170° io' E. 12.
Fate, the correct form of Vate or Sandwich, as v does not occur in the alphabet of that
island. Also called Efate and Efat. Is considered the finest island of the New
Hebrides; 20 m. E-w. i7°4o,s., 168° 2o'e. The natives have more Polynesian blood
than their neighbors, and there are many Samoan words in their language. 12.
[147]
65
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Fatuba, one of the Pleiades group, northwest from Uea of the Loyalty islands.
Fatufatu, a rocky islet of Tahaa, Society islands. 20.
Fatuhiva or Magdalena of the Marquesas group. Discovered by Alvaro de Mendana,
July 21, 1595. It is 8 m. n-s., 4 m. E-w., and 3675 ft. high. The west end is in
IO 24 S., 138 40 w.
Fatuhuku or Hood of the Marquesas group. An uninhabited island, 1180 ft. high;
discovered in 1774 by one of Cook’s midshipmen who afterwards became Lord
Hood. 90 26' S., 138° 56' w.
Fatumanga, the south westernmost islet of the Vavau group, Tongan islands.
Fauna, islet in the northeast part of Ruk lagoon, Caroline islands. Population, 150.
Fauro, volcanic island n m. N-S., and 1925 ft. high, in the Solomon group. 6° 56' S.,
156 04 E.
Fawsawil, islet of Ruk, Caroline archipelago.
Fead, see Abgarris in the Bismarck archipelago.
Fedarb, a group of three thickly wrooded islets in the Admiralty islands. The eastern
one has a conical peak 250 ft. high. 2° 22" S., 147° 2C E.
Fearn, or Hunter, was discovered by Captain Fearn in the Hunter in 1798. It is a
volcano 974 ft. high, wooded on the slopes; sulphurous vapors escape. 22° 24" S.,
172° 05' E.
Federal, or Ingraham, is Nukuhiva of the Marquesas islands.
Fefau, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands.
Fenuafu, islet of Llvea or Wallis.
Fenua iti, see Takutea of the Hervey group.
Fenualoa, of the Santa Cruz group, is 4.5 m. N-S. b)-T 0.7 m.; 100-200 ft. high.
Extensive reefs.
Fenua ura, or Scilly of the Society group, was discovered by Wallis in 1767. It is a
circular reef 6-7 m. in diameter with a closed lagoon; inhabited. 16° 3F S.,
i54° 43' w-
Fenua ino, a wooded islet of Tahiti opposite Tomotai valley.
Ferguson, islet in Shallow bay of Admiralty island.
Ferguson, island in Marau sound east of Guadalcanar of the Solomon islands.
9 50 30 S., 160 48 45 E.
Fergusson, see Moratau of the D’Entrecasteaux group.
Ferneaux, see Marutea, Paumotu archipelago. 22,.
Fetohougo, a spelling of Fatuhuku of the Marquesas group.
Fetouhouhou, see Hatutu of the Marquesas group.
Fetuku, see Fatuhuku of the Marquesas group. 23.
FeyS, or Tromelin of the Caroline archipelago, was discovered by Captain Tromelin
in 1828. 2.6 m. in circumference and 30 ft. high; of coral rock, but has no lagoon
or fringing reef. When discovered had 300 inhabitants. 9° 46" N., 140 35" E. 3*
Fiji or Viti. An important group of the central Pacific comprising 155 islands, 100
of which are inhabited, as many more islets and reefs. The total area is not less
than 7500 square miles, extending in longitude from 175 E. to 177 w., and in
latitude from 15° S. to 22° S. The formation is both coral and volcanic, although
there are 110 adlive volcanoes. Coral formations may be studied here to great ad-
[149]
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 2. — 5.
66
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
vantage. The highest peak rises to a height of 5000 ft. In 1889 the population,
including Rotuma, was 124,010, of which 122,012 were native Fijians. These are
a fine race, all nominally Christian, although within the memory of man, can¬
nibals. The language is a branch of the same stock whence the Polynesian lan¬
guages have been derived, and is not difficult to acquire bv English-speaking people.
As the consonants have a different pronunciation from that of the English language
the printed page seems far more remote from the Polynesian dialedls than it-
really is. The names of islands, for example, spelled in the form adopted by the
missionaries are quite different from the colloquial. The pronunciation is as
follows: b — mb, c — th, d = nd, g = ng, q = nqorngg, p = v, vu = b. The
vowels nearly as in Italian. Dialedls occur in several parts of the group, but not
at all to the extent found in the islands of the western Pacific. The group was
discovered by Tasman February 6, 1643, an(l by him named Prince William Isl¬
ands. D’Urville made the first chart of the group, and in 1840 Wilkes spent six
months surveying the entire archipelago. In 1875 (September 1) Fiji was for¬
mally proclaimed a British colony. Thakombau, like Kamehameha on Hawaii,
brought some order out of the devastating civil wars between petty chiefs, and
during the last years of his life his supremacy was fully recognized by all the
other chiefs. After the annexation the seat of the colonial government was at
Levuka on Ovalau, but since 1882 this has been transferred to Suva on Viti levu.
The foreign government seems wisely administered and is acceptable to the
natives. In February and March the rainfall reaches its maximum. During
the hot months, from December to April, cyclones often of great severity occur.
The temperature in the shade during the hot season ranges from 66° to 88°. From
April to November, the fine weather season, the average daily temperature in the
shade is about 78°. In 1876 the rainfall for the }Tear at Levuka was 108.05 inches ;
rain fell on 162 days, the greatest fall for one day being 5.6 inches. Produces of
the group are copra, sugar, cotton, fruit, peanuts, fibre and pearl shell. Fiji is the
form of the name in the windward portion of the group, "Viti in the leeward.
Among the best books to be consulted for information on Fiji are Narrative of the
United States Exploring Expedition 1838-1842, by Wilkes ; Fiji and the Fijians ,
18^8, by Rev. Thomas Williams; A Mission to Viti , by B. Seemann; Xing and
People of Fiji, by Waterhouse.
Fila, a raised coral and wooded islet on the southwest side of Fate, New Hebrides.
Firth, apparently a misprint for Frith. See Ilamu of the D’Entrecasteaux group.
Fischel, islet in Astrolabe bay on the north coast of New Guinea.
Fischer, see Yisschers of the Bismarck archipelago.
Fishermen, a low, sandy group off the coast of Motu, surrounded by reef. So named
because the canoe which came off to the Bramble had long seines fitted like Eng¬
lish nets. Natives of a dark copper color and numerous. 9°3c/s., i47°02,E.
Fits, island 100 ft. high off the coast of New Britain. 40 52' S., 150° 31' E.
Fitzroy, island off Cape Grafton, Australia. 16° 56' s., 146° 02 E.
Flat, islet of the Haszard group, New Guinea.
Flat, see Hemenahai of the Louisiade archipelago.
Flat, islet on the south coast of Huapu of the Marquesas islands.
[150]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
67
Fliegen, on the New Guinea coast. 70 20 s., 147° 23' E.
Flinders, or Great, on the north side of Banks strait, 2550 ft. high.
Flinders, group on the Australian coast. 14" ii' S., 144° 17' E. Named for Captain
Matthew Flinders.
Flint, a low, guano, uninhabited island belonging to Great Britain. It was discovered
in 1801. 2.5 m. long, and 0.5 m. wide. n° 25' 43" S., 15 1° 48' w.O
Florida, one of the Solomon group. The name was given by the discoverer, Mendana.
The native name is said to be Ngela, but others declare this is only the name of a
district. It is 1500 ft. high and populous. There are several stations of the
Melanesian mission on the coast. 9° 02' S., 160° 20 E.
Fly, islet on the northeast coast of Fate, New Hebrides; low, covered with trees.
Fly, two islets off Death Adder bay on the northeast coast of New Guinea.
Folger, one of the Magellan islands whose existence is doubtful.
Follenius, islet on the north coast of New Guinea.
Fonuafala, see Fakaafo. 90 22' S., 17 T 17' w.
Fonualei, Amargura or Gardner of the Tongan group, in 18° 02' S., 174 24' w., was
destroyed by an eruption in August, 1847. Ashes were thrown in large quantities
on passing ships 500-600 m. to the northeast.
Fonualoa, see Fakaafo. 90 2j' S., 171 14 w.
Fonualoa, Tongan group.
Forbes, group on the Australian coast. 12 J 18' s., 143° 24' E.
Forfano, see San Alessandro, Volcano islands.
Forsyth, one of the Wellesley group in the gulf of Carpentaria.
Fortuna, 360 m. northeast of Fiji. Same as Fotuna below.
Fotuhaa, islet of the Tongan group.
Fotuna, with Alofa the Horne islands. 8.2 m. by 5.2 m. Mt. Schouten is 2500 ft.
high. io° 14' 15” S., 178° io' W. 18.
Four Crowns, see Anuanurunga of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Four Facardins, see Vahitahi, Paumotu archipelago.
Fox, island 2 m. long, near Naviti in the Yasawa group, Fiji. 17' n's., 177 J 09' 30" E.
Fox, see Renard of the Louisiade archipelago.
Francis, see Peru of the Gilbert islands. 7.
Frankland, group Oil the coast of Australia. 17° 15' s., 146" 15' E.
Franklin (of Ingraham), see Motuiti, Marquesas islands.
Fraser, or Great Sandy, on the east coast of Queensland. 24° 42' S., 153° ii' E.
North end.
Frazer, see Andema of the Carolines.
Freemantle (of Roberts), see Eiao, Marquesas islands.
Freewill, see Pegan. o° 57' n., 134" 21 E.
French, islet in Laurie harbor, Enderby island.
French, group discovered by D’Entrecasteaux and named lies Franchises. They are
all high and adjacent to New Britain. IO.
French Frigates, of the Hawaiian group, was discovered by La Perouse November
6, 1786. He gave the name Basse des Fregates Franchises. It is usual to make
the mistake in translating to print in the singular, but the name was given for
[VC
68
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
the two frigates of the expedition. A picturesque rock, very difficult of ascent,
rises 120 ft. from the lagoon, and around are reefs and sand banks. Coarse grass
and some small shrubs compose the vegetation. The lagoon and outer shores
abound in sharks. 23" 46' 30” N., 166 16' w. 2.
Freycinet, ill Dumbea passage, New Caledonia. Round, moderately high, wooded.
Friday, north from Prince of Wales in Torres strait. 10 35' s., 142 09' K.
Friendly, the name given by Cook to the Tongan group.
Frith, in the southwest part of Moresby strait, D’Entrecasteaux group. 2 m. K-w.,
1.2 m. n-S.; 500zt ft- high; many inhabitants. Wallaby abound.
Fua, islet o'f Hapai, Tongan islands.
Fulanga, Fiji group. The west bluff is 150 ft. high. Inhabited. Fine timber.
19° 04' 30” s., 1810 19' 40" E. East end.
Fulatutasi, islet of Fakaafo or Bowditch. 9 24' S., 171 13 w.
Funafana, southernmost island of the Ellice islands.
Funafuti, or Ellice, was discovered by Captain de Pe\Tster March 18, 1819. A lagoon
atoll 13 m. by 7.2 111. There are some 30 islets; principal one long but very
narrow. Of recent interest as the scene of a boring into the coral reef, and of zoo¬
logical investigations, which have been published by the Australian Museum.'55'
80 r n o / rr r
35 5° s., 179 10 40 e. 16.
Fungalei, islet of Uvea or Wallis; about 200 ft. high.
Furneaux, a group in Bass strait composed of Clarke, Cape Barren and Flinders.
Futuna, or Erronan of the New Hebrides, is about 15 m. in circumference and 1931 ft.
high. There are 900 inhabitants; of Tongan origin.
Gabagabawa, islet northwest from Duau, D’Entrecasteaux group. 9°44 S., 150° 53' E.
Gabba, islet on south coast of New Guinea. 9 45' s., 142“ 37' E.
Gadogadoa, prominent islet, 315 ft. high, on the southeast coast of New Guinea.
Gagan, islet of.Kwadjelin of the Marshall islands.
Galapagos. This group, on some accounts one of the most interesting in the Pacific
region, lies on the equator some 600 miles from Equador, to which it belongs. It
extends T 30' both north and south of the equator, and the centre of the group is
in longitude 90° 3c/ w. Dampier, who visited these islands in May, 1684, gave a
quaint account of their inhabitants: “The Spaniards, when they first discovered
these islands, found multitudes of guanoes (iguanas) and land-tnrtle or tortoise,
and named them the Galapagos (tortoise) islands. I do believe there is no place
in the world that is so plentifully stored with these animals. The guanos here
are fat and large as an\r that I ever saw; they are so tame that a man may knock
down 20 in an hour’s time with a club. The land-turtle are here so numerous
that 500 or 600 men might subsist on them alone for several months without any
other sort of provision ; they are extraordinary large and fat, and so sweet that no
pullet eats more pleasantly.” All the early visitors speak of the abundance of
this nutritious food; the buccaneers made good use of it, and in 1813 Porter, near
♦Taking this island as a typical Central Pacific atoll, we may note the fauna as given by Hedley in the Memoirs of the Australian Museum,
iii., 1899. No other portion of this Central Pacific fauna has been so well studied. It is composed of 2 Mammals, 15 Birds, 5 Reptiles,
73 Fishes, 2 Knteropneusts, 87 Crustaceans, 27 Arachnids, 5 Myriopods, 42 Insects, 440 Molluscs, 1 Brachiopod, 28 Echinoderms, 5 Annelids,
12 Gephyrean worms, 16 Sponges, 8 Hvdrozoa, 2 Scyphozoa, and 120 A<5tinozoa.
U52]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
69
a bay on the northeast part of James island, took on board about 500 individuals,
or nearly 14 tons: Journal of a Cruise made to the Pacific Ocean , New York, 1822,
2 vols. 8vo. The tortoise are now nearly extinct, and some species (there are dis¬
tinct ones on different islands) have wholly disappeared. See Catalogue of the
gigantic Land Tortoises in the British Museum , by Gunther, London, 1877. There
are six principal islands, nine islets, and many mere rocks. All are volcanic, and
Darwin ( Volcanic Islands ) estimated the number of extinct craters at 2000. The
largest island, Albemarle, is 60X15 m., and 4700 ft. high. The other islands are
Narborough, Culpepper, Wenman, Abingdon, Bindloe, Tower, James, Jarvis,
Duncan, Indefatigable, Barrington, Charles, Hood and Chatham. See Proceed¬
ings of the Royal Geographical Society , 1880, pp. 742-755.
Galera (La), discovered April, 1568, by Pedro de Ortega Valencia and Hernan Gallego
of Mendana’s expedition. Solomon islands.
Galoa, see Ngaloa, Fiji.
Gambier, see Mangareva in the Paumotu archipelago. Discovered by Captain Wilson
in the Duff named for Admiral Lord Gambier. 22.
Ganges, nothing certain known of this island or reef reported in 39" 47' n., 154' 15' E.
Gannet, see Karewha, New Zealand.
Garahi, islet of Sariba, southeast coast of New Guinea; 355 ft. high.
Garden, see Ivin of the Louisiade archipelago.
Gardenijs was named by Tasman for a member of Council for India. Tasman calls
it Gerrit de Nijs and Gardenvs on the same page of his journal (p. 42 of transla¬
tion), 1643. About 20 m. off the northeast coast of New Ireland; i6ood= ft. high.
The north end is in 30 04 S., 152" 38' E.
Gardner, of the Bismarck archipelago, is about 29 m. wnw. from Gardenijs, and more
than 1600 ft. high. The north point is in 2 45' S., 151° 55' E.
Gardner, see Faraulep of the Caroline archipelago.
Gardner, of the Hawaiian group, is a rock 200 yards in diameter, and 170 ft. high.
It was discovered by the captain of the American whaler Malo , June 2, 1820.
o r rr r o f ft
25 OO 40 N., 167 59 05 W.
Gardner, or Kemins, is the southwestern island of the Phoenix group. 40 3 f 42' S.,
o f of f
174 40 18 w.u
Gardner, see Fonualei, Tongan islands.
Garnot, a volcanic cone in the Schouten group on the north coast of New Guinea.
3° 3T'.s., *44° 34 E.
Garrick, on the New Guinea coast. 7' 48' S., 144° 52" E.
Gaspar Rico, a name of Taongi, Marshall islands.
Gau, see Ngau, Fiji.
Gaua, Gog or Santa Maria of the Banks group, is 10 m. in diameter and 2200 ft. high.
It has about 2000 inhabitants. 14 15' S., 167“ 28' E.
Gaudichaud, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands, f 32' 35" N., 150° 59' 32" E.
Gavotu, islet of Solomon islands.
Gawa, an island of curious structure in the Trobriand group. It is 2 m. in diameter,
and a coral wall rises 400 ft., within which is a plateau 100 ft. lower. Population,
500 dm 3° 30' S., 15 L E.
[i53]
70
INDEX 70 THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Gela, see Florida, Solomon islands.
Gelootl, or Gelun, one of the Hermit islands. Inhabited. i° 32 S., 145" E.
Getlte Hermosa, or Swain, was discovered by Quiros March 2, 1606, and by him
named Fa Peregrina. Espinosa called it Isla de Gente Hermosa, from the beauty
of the inhabitants. It is 7-8 m. in circumference, and 15-25 ft. above the sea;
lagoon closed. At the time of the Wilkes expedition it was well wooded, but now
the island is occupied by an American, Jennings, who has 800 acres planted with
coconuts. n° 05' S., 170° 55' 15" w. 15.
Georgian, name given by Cook to Tahiti and the southeast group; the northwest he
called Society, for the Royal Society.
Gera, inhabited islet off the northeast coast of Guadalcanar, Solomon islands.
Gero, islet in Uarai bay, southwest side of New Caledonia.
Gerrit Denys, see Gardenijs of the Bismarck archipelago.
Gesira, islet 220 ft. high on the southeast coast of New Guinea.
Gibbons, see Daiwari of the Fouisiade archipelago.
Giequel, a volcanic island on the north side of New Britain. Found by late surveys to
be a portion of the main island. West end, 40 57' S., 149° 52' E. Named for one
of the pilots of the Recherche . 10.
Gie or Pine islet off Isle of Pines. 13.
Gigila, islet 420 ft. high, wooded; connected with Abaga gaheia by reef on the south¬
east. Fouisiade archipelago.
GiktlO, islet of Ontong Java. 50 19' s., 159° 46' E. II.
Gilbert, islet, low and wooded, near Sehouten islands on the north coast of New Guinea.
Gilbert, see Maiana of the Gilbert islands. 7.
GIFBERT ISFANDS.
Native Name.
Chart Name.
Discoverer.
Latitude
North.
Lonkitude
East.
Square Miles.
Population.
Scarborough Group:
Makin.
Pitt.
Marshall & Gilbert,
1788. I
3°
20'
45"
172°
28'
45"
2.7
500
Butaritari.
Touching.
3
11
172
21
11.5
1500
Maraki.
Matthew.
Marshall A Gilbert,
1788. i
2
0
173
25
9.7
2000
Apaiang.
Charlotte.
Marshall & Gilbert,
1788. I
1
fix
172
58
30
15.5
3000
Tarawa.
Kno.y, Cook.
Marshall cfc Gilbert,
1788.
1
30
05
173
02
15.5
3000
Maiana.
Gilbert, Hall.
Marshall & Gilbert,
1.788.
0
55
30
173
03
45
11.5
4000
Simpson Group:
K uria.
Woodle.
Marshall A Gilbert,
1788.
0
13
173
28
30
3
1500
Aranuka.
Henderville, Nauki.
Marshall & Gilbert.
0
13
25
173
41
6
1000
Apaiuama.
Hopper, Roger, Simpson
Marshall & Gilbert,
1788.
0
30
173
53
35
6.5
5000
Kingsmili Group:
Nonouti.
Sydenham.
0
30
45
171
19
10
11.5
6000
Tapiteuea.
Drummond, Bishop.
('apt. Drummond.
1
08
45
174
45
0.7
8000
Peru.
Francis.
('apt. Clerk, 1827.
1
17
30
175
56
25
13.5
2000
Nukunau.
Byron.
Bvron, 1765.
1
23
176
34
9.7
5000
Onoatoa.
Clerk, Onutu.
1
53
175
30
9.7
3000
Tamana.
Hotelier, I’hoebe.
2
32
175
55
4
2000
Arorai.
Hope, Hurd, Arore.
Elisabeth , iSocj.
L
2
.30
177
01
11.5
2500
Gilbert Islands, so named by Krusenstern for the captain of the Charlotte , consist of
16 islands not more than 20 ft. above the sea. The area of dry land is not more
than 150 sq. m. Population, 50,000. They belong to Great Britain. The inhabi¬
tants have been christianized by the missionaries of the American and Hawaiian
Boards and the Bible has been translated into the language of the group by Rev.
Hiram Bingham, D.D. In former days the people were noted for the manufacture
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
7i
of armor from coconut fibre, and spears and knives armed with shark’s teeth.
Having no stone their adzes and axes were made from the hard shell of the
Tridacna gig as.
Gilia, islet 200 ft. high, between Bagaman and Bobo eina, Louisiade archipelago.
Gilua, of the Kiriwina group. 8° 37' 3 c/ ' S., 150° 5c/ E.
Ginara, islet on the south coast Murua, Kiriwina group. gJ oy' S., 152 28' E.
Gingala, group of six large and two smaller islands off Cape Cretin, northeast coast
of New Guinea. Mostly connected with each other and the coast b}^ reef.
GippS, one of the French islands, 3 m. in circumference, thickly populated. Geysers
on the southeast shore. 4 32' S., 149" 06' E.
Givry, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 7' 08' 55,/ n., 15 i° 52" 07" E.
Gizo, of the Solomon islands, is 300-400 ft. high and has a fringe of reef and islets.
8° 01 S., 156° 48' E.
Glen, islet 30 ft. high off Cape Vogel, New Guinea. 9' 45' s., 150° 05' E.
Glennie, see Anser.
Glenton, or Kato katoa, is 3 m. in circumference and 400 ft. high, io ^oks., i5i°04 E.
Gloucester, on the Australian coast. 20° s., 148 2y' E.
Gloucester, see Paraoa of the Paumotu archipelago. 2 1.
Goat, islet off Pangopango harbor, Tutuila, Samoan islands.
Goat, islet 90 ft. high, off north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji, at entrance to Wailea bay.
Goat, fourth islet from the westward in Wotje atoll, Marshall islands.
Goat, see Korolib, Fiji.
Goat, see Santa Clara.
Gobigobi, rocky islet 330 ft. high, Brumer islands.
Gog, see Gaua or Santa Maria, Banks islands.
Gogan, islet of Rongerik, Marshall islands.
Goodenough, see Dauila of the D’Entrecasteaux group.
Goodhope, see Rekareka of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Goodhope of Schouten is probably Niuafoou of the Tongan group. 18.
Goodman, see Nugarba of the Bismarck archipelago. IO.
Goold, on the Australian coast. 18° icf S., 146° \2 E.
Goro, better Koro, Fiji. Fertile, 9.5 m. by 4.5 m.. South point is in 1 y° 23" S.,
1 79° 25' 5°" E. 14-
Goulou, old spelling of Ngoli, Caroline islands.
Goulvain, see Dobu of the D’Entrecasteaux group. Goulvain was boatswain of the
Recherche.
Gower, of the Solomon islands, was named by Carteret in 1767. It is the Inattendue
of Surville (1769). y° 55' s., 160° 30' E.
Gowland, off the south shore of Collingwood bay, New Guinea. 90 30" S., 149° 19' E.
Grace, one of the Bonvouloir islands in the Louisiade archipelago. io° i8's., i5i°o8'e.
Gracious, a group named by D’Urville Les lies Graeieuses. Bismarck archipelago.
09 s., 148 57 e.
Gran Cocal, see Nanomanga of the Ellice islands.
Grand Duke Alexander, a name given by Bellingshausen in 1820 to Rakaanga or
Reirson,
[155]
7 2
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Grandes Cyclades, a name given by Bougainville to the New Hebrides.
Grange, see Banabana, New Guinea.
Grant, a low coral islet near the north point of Basilaki, southeast coast of New
Guinea, io 32 45 S., 15 1 02 50 E.
Grass, or Wanim, islet of the Louisiade archipelago, is 390 ft. high.
Green, islet on the Australian coast. 16 15' S., 146° ok E.
Green, islet of the south coast of Admiralty. The Groene Eylanden of Tasman.
2° 15' S., 147° 05' E.
Green, islet on northeast coast of Auckland.
Green, one of the low Tiri islands of Vanua levu, Fiji. 160 24" 14TS., ij<f 05 27" E.O
Green, islet in the southeast corner of the lagoon on Ocean, of the Hawaiian group.
Named for W. L. Green, Hawaiian Minister of Foreign Affairs. 28° 25" N., 178° 29" w. 2,.
Green, islet of \7olcano island in Blanche bay, New Britain.
Green, islet in Port Preslin, New Ireland.
Green, east of New Ireland, 300 ft. high, densely wooded.
Green, see Pinipel, Bismarck archipelago.
Greenwich, Constantin or Kapinga marangi, Caroline islands, consists of 28 islets on
a reef 14 m. N-S., 8-9 m. E-w. Discovered in 1825; I5° inhabitants. i° 04' N.,
154° 45' E.
Greig, see Niau, in the Paumotu archipelago.
Grenville, a name of Rotuma.
Gressien, see Musehu in the New Guinea region.
Griesbach, on the northeast coast of Bougainville, Solomon islands, is a group of
small islands. 6° ik s., 155" 44" E.
Griffith, near New Guinea. Southwest end 7' 43' s., 144" 35" E.
Grimes or High, Caroline islands, was discovered b}? Captain Grimes in 1841. It is
6 m. in circumference, wooded. 90 15' n., 1450 33" E.
Grimoult — Kiamu, New Caledonia.
Gronemann, islet ill Astrolabe bay, north coast of New Guinea. Small and uninhabited.
GroS, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 70 2/ 02" n., 15 i 53' 50" E.
Guadalcanar, the Guadalcanal of Gallego and Mendafia who discovered it in April,
1568. One of the larger of the Solomon islands. Native name Guambata. 80111.
by 25 m. and 8000 ft. high. Northwest point is in 9 15' s., 159^ 40" E.; east point,
90 50' s., 1600 47' E. 11.
Guadaloupe (Isla de), in the Solomon islands. Discovered in April, 1568, by Men-
daiia’s expedition in latitude 90 30" S.
Guahan, a spelling of Guam, Marianas group. Guajan is another form.
Gualito, see Ngualito, Fiji.
Guam or Guajan of the Marianas or Ladrones. O11 this island, in 1668, the Span¬
iards founded a mission under the direction of Padre de Sanvitores who declares
that during the first year he baptized 13,000 people and converted 20,000. His
conversions were so very thorough that when Dampier visited the islands in 1686
there were but 400 alive! Kotzebue, in 1817, found a single couple of the in¬
digenes surviving. The population in 1873 amounted to about 7000, imported from
the Philippines and the Carolines. Guam is 29 111. long. As a result of the
[156]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
73
Spanish-American war this island became the property of the United States. See map
under Marianas. i3°4o'n., 1440 55' f,., north point; i3°i^n., i44°47'e., south point.
Guap, see Yap, Caroline islands.
Guap, islet in Dallmann harbor on the north coast of New Guinea, is inhabited by
peaceable Papuans.
Gudin, on the New Guinea coast. 30 28' S., 132° 3c/ E.
Gue, islet near Coetlogon passage, Uea, Loyalty group.
Guetehe, islet on the same reef with the preceding.
Guguail, an inaccessible rock 2.5 m. by 1 m. in the Marianas. 170 19' n., 1450 49' E.
Guilbert, on the New Guinea coast. 30 12' S., 143° 15" E.
Gulewa, in the Louisiade archipelago, 1 m. east from Pana udiudi; 0.7 m. long, 315
ft. high; inhabited.
Gumaian, eastern and largest of the Basses islands, Louisiade archipelago.
Gumoti, islet near Roux group on the southeast coast of New Guinea.
Gunner’s Quoin, or lie Plate, islet on the south side of Huapu, Marquesas islands.
Guppy, a small, wooded island in Choiseul bay on the west side of Choiseul island,
Solomon islands. Named for Dr. H. B. Guppy, who has written much on the
Solomon islands.
Haafeva, islet of the Tongan group.
Haaio, islet on the south coast of Raiatea, Society islands.
Haane, islet on the south coast of Huahuna, Marquesas islands.
Haaono, islet of the Hapai group, Tonga islands.
Hack, islet of Oneatoa, Gilbert islands. 1° 54' 30" s., 175° 39' E.
Hacq, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands.
Hagemeister, see Apatiki of the Paumotu archipelago. 2,0.
Haggerstone, on the Australian coast. 12° 02 S., 143° iB' E.
Haidana, off Port Moresbj^ on the south coast of New Guinea. 90 27" S., i47°02/E.
Haines, near Janies bay on the southeast coast of New Guinea; 1 m. long, 0.2 m.
wide, 250 ft. high. io° 41' 10" S., 151° 03' 40" E.
Hairiri, see Paraoa of the Paumotu archipelago.
Hakelaki, on the east coast of Ysabel, Solomon islands. 70 53' s., 159° 22" E.
Halelei, islet Oil east side of Maramasiki, Solomon islands, inhabited by wild and
treacherous natives.
Half-way, islet in Torres strait. io° 08' S., 143° 17' E.
Halgan, see Uea, Loyalty group. 13.
Hall, see Maiana, Gilbert islands. 7.
Hall, see Morileu, Caroline islands. 4.
Hamelin, or Leliogat; low and wooded. Loyalty group.
Hamilton, on the Australian coast. 20° 22" S., 1490 E.
Hammond, on the New Guinea coast, 3.5 m. by 1.5 m., 600 ft. high. io° 3c/ S.,
142° 13' E.
Hammond, see Rendova, Solomon islands.
Hanakubakuba, one of the Obstruction group, so called because they block the pas¬
sage betreen Nuakata island and East cape of New Guinea, It is 270 ft. high.
[i57]
74
INDEX TO THE PA Cl El C ISLANDS.
Hancock of Roberts is Hatutu, Marquesas islands. 23.
Hannam, island on the east side of Willaumez peninsula, New Britain.
Hannibal, on the Australian coast. n° 37' s., 142° 56' E.
Hansa, see Vulcan, New Guinea.
Hanudamava, islet 273 ft. high, near Port Moresby on the southeast coast of New
Guinea.
Hao, see Hau of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Hapai, group of the Tongan islands, is composed of many small islands on a reef
40X23 m., of which little is known.
Harcourt, group consisting of Karu and Ague, north from Ugue bay on the north¬
east coast of New Caledonia.
Hardman, group of two islets, low and wooded, in the Louisiade archipelago.
Hardy, north of Collingwood bay on the coast of New Guinea. 90 1 F s., 149° 21 E.
Hardy = lie St. Ignace, Loyalty islands.
Harikoia, second in size of the Brumer group, New Guinea; 520 ft. high; inhabited.
Harowani is the east of the Killerton group in Milne bay, on the east coast of New
Guinea. A station of the London Missionary Society.
Harp, see Hau in the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Harper, on the coast of New Guinea. 8C 04' S., 148 09' E.
Harris, or Mewadi, is off the coast of Normanby (Duau), D’Entrecasteaux group.
9° 52' S., 150° 57' E.
Hash, see Mokor of the Caroline islands. Said not to exist.
Hastings, in the Bonvouloir group, Louisiade archipelago; 400 ft. high. io° 20 S.,
15P 52' E. .
Hassard, two islands in the Engineer group. The southern one is about a mile long,
200 ft. high, with a reef encircling. 10 38' s., 15 1 22 E.
Hat, see Vatu vara, Fiji group.
Hat, see Teauaua of the Marquesas group.
Hat, see x\rabi of the New Hebrides.
Hat, islet in Geelvink bay on the north coast of New Guinea.
Hat, islet at entrance to Havannah harbor, of Fate, New Hebrides.
Hatutu, or Chanal of the Marquesas group, is 4 m. b}? 1 m., and 1380 ft. high.
Perhaps the Nexsen of Captain Fanning, 1798. Marchand called it Chanal;
Ingraham christened it Hancock, and Roberts named it Langdon. j° 57' s.,
140° 34 w. 23.
Hau, Bow, or Harp, was discovered by Bougainville in 1768. Cook visited it the
next year and called it Bow. It is 30 m. long and 5 m. wide. 18° 03' 38" S.,
140° 59' 15" w. 21.
Hawaii, the largest of the Hawaiian group, was called by Cook Owhyhee, misunder¬
standing the article O Hawaii. The island is wholly volcanic, composed of lava
emitted from Kea, Loa, Hualalai and Kilanea. Of these volcanoes Kea has at¬
tained the height of 13,825 ft.; Loa, 13,675 ft.; and Hualalai, 8275. The area of
the island is 4015 sq. m. While a large part of the surface is barren lava, along
the shores and in the valleys on the north and east sides much sugar is produced,
and on the west side the best coffee of the group is found.
[158]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
75
Hawaiian Group. Called by Cook Sandwich islands in honor of his patron the
Earl of Sandwich, a cordial hater of Americans. The group was discovered by
the Spaniard Juan de Gaetano in 1555, and again by Cook January 18, 1778.
They were annexed to the United States July 7, 1898.* The group consists of
eight principal islands and a long range of uninhabited rocks extending many de¬
grees to the northwest. Perhaps more books have been written about the Hawaiian
islands than about any other group in the Pacific. The Geology has been pub¬
lished by Dana, the present writer and others; the Botany by Mann and Hille-
brand ; the Ornithology by Wilson, Rothschild, Dole and Bryan; the Entomology
by Perkins and others; Herpetology by Stejneger. Other departments of Nat¬
ural History have not been adequately studied. Historical books, apart from the
Voyages, are by Dibble, Bingham, Fornander and Alexander. A grammar of the
language and a dictionary were published by Andrews, and the translation of the
Bible by the American missionaries preserves the Hawaiian language in its purity,
while in common use it has become very corrupt. A very competent government
survey, under the charge of Professor W. D. Alexander, has measured and mapped
the topography. In 1898 the imports amounted to $10,368,815.09; the exports,
$17,346,744.79; Custom House receipts, $896,975.70.
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
Area in Square Miles.
Hawaii . 4,015
Maui . 728
Oahu . 500
Kauai . 540
Molokai . 261
Lanai . 135
Niihau . 07
Kahoolawe . 69
Acres. Height in Feet. Population in 1896.
,570,000
1 3,825
33,285
466,000
10,032
17,726
384,000
4,030
40,205
348,000
4,800
15,225
167,000
4,958
2,307
86,000
3,400
1 05
62,000
800
164
44,000
1,427
Kaula, Lehua, Nihoa, Necker, French Frigates, Gardiner, La.vsan, Lisiansky, Midway, and Ocean are rocks, uninhabited save by the fercr
naturcr.
Haweis, see Elato of the Caroline islands.
Hawkesbury, islet in Torres strait. 10 22 S., 142° 07' E.
Haymail, northwest of Hook on the Australian coast. 20° 03' S., 148° 56' E.
Hayter, see Sariba on the New Guinea coast.
Head, high, wooded island in China strait. ioL 34' 35" S., 150° 44' 40" E.
Heath, 200 ft. high, off the coast of New Britain. 40 5L S., 15 1 32" E.
Heath, see Rogeia, New Guinea.
Height, see Hemeni of the Marquesas.
Hemenahei, or Flat is the easternmost of the Calvados chain in the Louisia.de archi¬
pelago; 2.5 m. E-W. by 1.2 m.: cultivated, but not inhabited because considered
unhealthy. n° iL s., 1530 05' E.
Henderson, or Elisabeth of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by a boat’s crew
from the whaler Essex , in 1820, and named for Captain Henderson; 5 m. by 2.5 m.,
80 ft. high; of raised coral, much undermined by waves. Cliffs are perpendicular,
except on the north side. Uninhabited. 24" 25" S., 128° 19' w.
♦June 14, 1898, the Newlands annexation resolution passed the House of Representatives : July 6th the Senate confirmed the same ; July
7th the President signed the joint resolution; August 12th the United States flag was raised, and President Dole transferred the jurisdi<5tion
to the United States ; but it was June 14. 1900, when annexation went fully into effect.
[I59]
76
IXDEX TO THE PACIFIC 1ST AXES.
Henderville, see Aranuka of the Gilbert islands.
Hennake (Henuake of AA’ilkes), see Pukapttka, Paumotu archipelago. 22.
Henry, a low islet of the Underwood group, Fiji. 41 30" s., 1770 17' 30” E.O
Heraiki, Croker or St. Quentin, was discovered bv Bonecheo in 1772; 4 m. xw-SE.;
uninhabited. 17' 28' s., 143' 23' 42” w.O 21.
Herekerettli, Bligh or San Pablo, was discovered by Quiros in 1606. It is low, un¬
inhabited, and has a closed lagoon; about 3 m. in diameter. 21 40's., 140 38" w.O
Hergest, see Marquesas islands.
Hergest Rock, see Motuiti of the Marquesas islands.
Hermit, Los Eremitanos, Agonies, a group of 17 islets, of which only Loof and Geloon
are inhabited, extending 10 m. x-s., 13 m. E-w. 1 36 s., 145' E. 8.
Heron, or Ola, is northeast from Roua, Louisiade archipelago. 10 18 S., 154' 16' E.
Hervey, a name given by Cook September 23, 1773, for Captain Hervey, afterwards
Earl of Bristol, Lord of the Admiralty. It applies properlv to the two northern
islands. In 1777 Cook discovered Mangaia, Aitutaki and others. Krusenstern
proposed the name of Cook for the southern group, but there seems no geographi¬
cal division and Cook's name should hold.
Hetau, islet of Bouka, Solomon islands. Small but thickly populated bv men of
powerful build and thorough cannibals.
Hetchin, islet of Malekula, Xew Hebrides. Inhabited and cultivated; natives have
war canoes large enough to carrv fifty men.
Heuschober, of the Admiralty group. 2" 44' S., I47c 18' E.
Hevaisi, islet of Panatinani, Louisiade archipelago, 275 ft. high.
Heyn, small, wooded, 95 ft. high ; 30 m. northwest from Rook or Umboi in the Bis¬
marck archipelago. 5' 25 s., 147' 44 E.
Heyou, of Beechey, is Hau of the Paumotu archipelago.
Hiaou, a spelling of Eiao, Marquesas islands.
Hibwa, a small, sandy islet 60 ft. high, northwest front Xuakata, Louisiade archipelago.
Hieb, in Auckland harbor. Xew Zealand.
High, on the Australian coast. 17” 09 s., 146' 03" E.
High, on the Australian coast. 10" 43’ s., 142' 24' E.
High, islet on the northeast coast of Eromanga, New Hebrides. 18' 4c/ s.. 169' 20' E.
High, islet in Bismarck archipelago. 4' 48 s., 150° 03 E.
High, islet of Arno, Marshall islands.
High, see Grimes of the Caroline islands.
High, see AVuli of the Louisiade archipelago.
Higham, islet in Shallow bay, Admiraltv island.
Hikueru, or Melville, was discovered by Cook and called Bird, April 6, 1769. Un¬
inhabited atoll of the Paumotus, well wooded. The lagoon has a boat entrance.
17 35' S-, i42: 39 w. 21.
Hilap, islet of Caroline islands.
Hillsborough, of the Beechey group of the Bonin islands. 2y: 08' x., 142' 15 E.
Hinchinbrook, on the Australian coast. i8: 23' s., 146' 15' E.O
Hinchinbrook or Mau, see A’ele, Xew Hebrides.
Hitchin, islet on south coast of Malekula, Xew Hebrides. 12.
[160]
INDEX TO THE PA C/E/C ISLANDS.
/ /
Hiti, or Eliza, one of the Raeffskv group in the Paumotus. Uninhabited. 16' 42' s.,
144' og' w. Also called Ohiti and Clute. 21.
Hivaoa or Dominica, of the Marquesas islands, was discovered by Mendana 21-22 July,
1595. Dumont D’Urville calls it Oniva-Hoa. 22 m. by 6 m., 2820 ft. high. The
most fertile and populous of the group. Population in 1880, 2500:1b. The east
end is in g° 47' S., 138° 47' W. 23.
Hiw, the largest of the Torres group in the New Hebrides, is 6.5 m. X 3-5 m., and
1200 ft. high. 130 04' s., i66c 30' K.
Hogoleu, see Ruk, Caroline islands.
Holborne, on the Australian coast. 19' 42" S., 148' 21 E.
Holeva, islet 2.5 m. long, on the same reef with Lefuka, Hapai group, Tongan islands.
Holland, see Howland.
Holt, see Taenga of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Home, group on the Australian coast. iic 57' s., 143 17 E.
Honden, see Pukapuka, Paumotu archipelago. 22.
Honegueneck, one of the Pleiades group northwest of Uea, Loyalty islands.
Honni, see One, Gilbert islands.
Hood, of the Galapagos, is the southernmost of the group; 640' ft. high.
Hood, see Fatuhuku, Marquesas islands.
Hook, on the coast of Australia. 20' 07" s., 148' 57 E.
Hope, islet on the Great Barrier reef.
Hope, see Arorai, Gilbert islands.
Hope (Captain Charles Hope) see Niuafou, Tonga islands.
Hopper, see Apamama of the Gilbert islands.
Horea, islet on the north side of Tiano pass, west coast of Raiatea, Society islands.
Horn, between Torres and Endeavor straits. 10 36' s., 142 16' E.
Horne, group discovered by Le Maire and Sehouten May 19, 1616. Consists of Fotuna
and Alofa. Under French protectorate.
Homo, of the Admiralty group. 2' iF S., 147' 46' E.
Hosken, small, wooded, 150 ft. high. 7" 36' S., 147' 37' E.
Houaf, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 7 39' 05" N., 151 43 42" E.
Houahouna, a chart form of Huahuna of the Marquesas islands.
Houtourou, the native name for Little Barrier in Auckland harbor, New Zealand.
Howe (Lord), see Mopiha, Society islands.
Howick, group on the Australian coast. 14 30" S., 145' E.
Howison, in the Fiji group; 36 ft. high. 18 51' s., 178 25 30 E.O
Howland was discovered by the American Captain Netcher, September 9, 1842.
2 in. X 0.5 m., 20 ft. high. A guano island now claimed by Great Britain.
o° 49' N., 176° 40' w.
Huaheine, easternmost of the Leeward group of the Societ}- islands, discovered by
Cook July, 1769; 20 m. in circumference; divided at high water into Huaheine nui
and Huaheine iti. Population, 1100. 16“ 42' 30" S., 159 01 15' w. 20.
Huahuna, of the Marquesas islands. 8r 55' S., 139’ 34' w.
Huapu, or Adams of the Marquesas group is a bold and rocky island rising to a
height of 4042 ft., and covering about 45 sq. in. g 24 S., 140 05 W. 23.
[161]
78 INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Hudson, of the Fiji group, was named for Captain W. L. Hudson of the United States
Exploring Expedition. i8° 52' S., 178° 26' E.O
Hudson, see Nanomanga of the Ellice group. 16.
Hudson, see Mamanutha, Fiji.
Hudson Group, Fiji, comprises Carr, Walker, Johnson, Case, Emmons, Alden, Craven,
Perry, Malolo, Malolo lailai, Soni, Palmer, Waldron, and Spieden, all named for
members of the Wilkes Expedition. It is the extreme southwest group of Fiji.
Huga, islet of the Tongan group. Also Huga Haabai and Huga Toga.
Hueguenee, or Pine islet of Uea, Loyalty group.
Huerta (Garden), the Spanish name of the island called Trevanion by Carteret, now
known by the native name Temotn. It is off the northwest end of Santa Cruz in
the New Hebrides, about a mile from shore. Roughly triangular; 2.5 m. on a side.
Hugon, islet in Uitoe bay on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Huhunati, one of the Abgarris group, Bismarck archipelago. 30 25' S., 154° 37' E.
Hui-wadiamo, or Chaumont, lies direCtly south of Panaman, Louisiade archipelago.
n° 34 S-, 153° 08' E.
Hull, a very small, reefed islet of the Bonvouloir islands, 0.5 m. nw-SE. io° 23" S.,
1510 10' E.
Hull, of the Phoenix group, was discovered by Wilkes August 26, 1840. A British
protectorate was proclaimed July 11, 1889. The south point is in 40 31' 25" S.,
O o/ E ^ _
172 18 15 w. 17.
Hull, see Sands of the Austral group.
Humphrey, see Manihiki. 19.
Hunter, of the New Hebrides, is a volcano 0.5 m. in diameter and 974 ft. high, dis¬
covered by Captain Fearn of the Hunter in 1798. Sulphurous vapor issues from
the wooded sides. 22° 24' 02" S., 172° 05' 15" E.
Hunter, see F'earn on southeast side of New Caledonia.
Hunter, see Kili of the Marshall islands. 6.
Hunter, group off coast of Tasmania.
Huon, group northwest from New Caledonia, was discovered by the D’Entrecasteaux
expedition and named for Captain Huon de Kermadec. Consists of North Huon,
Leleizour, Fabre, and Surprise; the last in 18° 3F S., 163 08' E. 13.
Hurd, see Arorai of the Gilbert islands. 7.
Huxley, see Bobo eina of the Louisiade archipelago.
Iabama, islet in the Louisiade archipelago, 220 ft. high; wooded and cultivated, be¬
tween Nuakata and East cape.
Iakuilau, a low coral and sand islet on the west coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Iambu, a rock, densely wooded, 370 ft. high, west from Yanutha, Ringgold group, Fiji.
Iataui, the western islet of the Montemont group, Louisiade archipelago; 40 ft. high.
Ibargoita, see Suk of the Caroline islands.
Ibbetson or Ibbetsen, see Aurh of the Marshall islands.
Ich-Higen, islet of Port Puebo on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
Idaha or Aplin, a low, uninhabited islet at the northwest end of the visible Great
Barrier reef. 90 24" S., 146° 51' F,.
[162]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
79
Ie, islet of Port Mueo on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Iehgabate, islet Oil the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
Iehhingen, islet on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
Ienga, islet near Port Yengen on the northeast side of New Caledonia.
Ieroni, see Maitre, New Caledonia.
Ifalik or Wilson, of the Caroline islands was discovered by Captain Wilson in the
Duff in 1793. It consists of four islets about a lagoon reef 5 m. in circumference.
Ifalik, Moai, Ella and Fararik. 70 14' n., 1440 31' E. 3.
Iguari, East and West, two islands in the east side of China strait, the first 400 ft.
high, the other about 200 ft. high; cultivated and wooded.
Igurin, islet on the south side of Eniwetok, Marshall islands.
Ikara is on the north side of Yasaiosa bay, New Guinea. 90 39' s., 150° 02 E.
Ikaika, Keino or Cliffy, of the Eouisiade archipelago, is 250 ft. high off west side of Wari.
Ikop, eastern islet of Namolipiafane, Caroline islands. 4.
Iku, or Lone Tree islet in Bingham channel, Apaiang, Gilbert islands. 7.
Ilatnu or Frith, west islet in Moresby strait between Danila and Moratau of the
D’Entrecasteaux group. 9" 26' S., 150° 24" E.
He Bouzet, see lie Non.
lie Nou, a convict station near Noumea, New Caledonia,
lie Plate, or Gunner’s Quoin in the Marquesas islands.
Ilei, one of the Arch group; 0.3 m. nw-SE.; 270 ft. high. New Guinea,
lies du Golfe— Ugi and Biu of the Solomon islands.
Illasasa, of the Kiriwina group. 8° 37' s., 151° 02' E.
Illina, a peak 615 ft. high, between Bougainville and Fauro of the Solomon islands.
Imbert, a reef islet in the Louisiade archipelago. ii° 02 S., 151° ff E.
Immer, see Aniwa, New Hebrides.
Impakel, islet of Yap, Caroline islands.
Imsa, islet in Orangerie bay, south coast of New Guinea. io° 24" S., 149^ 34" E.
Inattendue of Surville is Gower of Carteret. Solomon islands.
Indefatigable, of the Galapagos, also called Duke of Norfolk; 24 m. E-w., 17 m. N-s.
Independence, a name given in i860 to Malden.
Independence, see Sophia of the Ellice group.
Indispensable, of the Solomon islands. 12° 30' S., 160 15' E.©
Ine, islet on the south side of the lagoon of Arno, Marshall islands. A trading sta¬
tion there.
Infernal, see Nokue, Isle of Pines.
Inueki, islet Oil the south coast of Korido, Schouten islands. o° 55" S., 135 30" E.
Inyeug, islet of Aneiteum, New Hebrides. 20° 15' 17" S., i69j 44' 44" E>
Ipotet, a rocky islet off Cape Vogel on the northeast coast of New Guinea.
Irakong, or Eil Malk of the Pelew group. io° 1 1 30^ N., 134° 2 7 30^ E.
Iririki, islet with a beacon in Ffila harbor on the southwest side of Fate. New
Hebrides. 187 ft. high.
Iriru, islet on the south side of the entrance to Faaroa bay, Raiatea, Society islands.
Isenay or La Baleine, one of the Pleiades group northwest from Uea, Loyalty islands.
Isie, islet of St. Vincent bay on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
L163]
8o
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Islas de los velas latinas = Southern Marianas.
Islas de los Reyes, name given by Saavedra in 1528 to a part of the Caroline islands
supposed to be Uluthi.
Isubobo, islet off the southeast coast of New Guinea, near Sideia island; 115 ft. high.
Itai, islet in Nandi waters on the west coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Itamati, islet on the reef of Pavuvu or Russell islands, Solomon group.
Itapa, see Santa Ana, Solomon islands.
Itiahi, islet at the entrance to Maupiti lagoon, Society islands.
Ito or Didymus, on the southeast coast of New Guinea. 1.2 111.X0.5 m.; 500ft. high;
uninhabited. 10" 33' 50,/ S., 150° 46' 25" E.
Iwa, see Jouveney of the Kiriwina group.
Iyin, or Garden, is south of Tagula of Louisiade archipelago; 170 ft. high; cultivated.
Iyoh, islet on the coast of Malaita, Solomon islands.
Jabbering, group of four islets in Ward Hunt strait. g° 38' S., 149° 53' E.
Jabeia, islet between Yasawa and Naviti, Fiji.
Jabor, islet of Jaluit, Marshall islands. 5° 55' n., 169° 39' E.
Jabwat, of the Marshall islands; 0.7 m. X 0.2 m. 70 43' n., 169° 05' E. 6.
Jacob, islet on the New Guinea coast. 30 07' S., 132° 27' E.
Jacquemart, off the south coast of Campbell island, New Zealand.
Jacquinot, a conical island off the north coast of New Guinea. 30 25' S., 144° 22' E.
Jaluit or Bonham, of the Marshall islands, was discovered in 1809 from the brig
Elisabeth. It is an atoll with 50 islets on a reef 32 m. n-S., and from 7 to 20 m.
wide. In 1882 the population was 700. The lagoon has a depth of 25—30 fathoms.
Now the seat of the German Government in the Marshall group. The north point,
according to Captain Brown, is in 6 22' N., 169° 22' E. 6.
James, of the Galapagos, is 1200 ft. high. o° 15' 20' S.
Jamna, on the north coast of New Guinea. The natives superior to those farther east.
Jane, islet in the Caroline islands.
Jane, islet, 600 ft. high, at the head of Port Moresby, New Guinea.
Jappen, see J obi, New Guinea.
Jardines (Los), a name given by the Spanish navigators to some garden-like islands
eastward of the Marianas. Krusenstejm thinks Namonuito in the Carolines.
Mhnoires hydrographiques , p. 16.
Jarrad, group on the south shore of Collingwood bay, New Guinea. 9°34/s., i49°30/E.
Jarvis or Bunker was discovered by Captain Brown in the English ship Eliza Francis
August 21, 1821. A raised coral island 10-12 ft. above the sea, of triangular out¬
line; 1.7 m. E-w., 1 m. N-S. No trees, and little grass; mostly guano. Annexed
to Great Britain June 3, 1889. o° 22 33" S., 159° 54' 11" w. 19.
Jarvis, 525 ft. high, 36 m. from the coast of New Guinea. 90 55' s., 142° E.
Jawt, islet of Ruk lagoon, Caroline islands. 4.
JekoitS, islet of Ponape, Caroline islands. An irregular triangle, 1.5 m.Fz on a side,
1000 ft. high. 5.
Jemo, Temo or Steep-to was seen from the Nautilus in 1799. It is 0.7 m. in diameter.
io° 00 45” N., 169° 42' E. Marshall islands. 6.
[164]
.
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
81
Jenkins, 3 m. long, off the coast of New Britain, Bismarck archipelago. 50 15' s.,
I5°° 39 E.
Jeridy, islet at the east end of Majuro lagoon, Marshall islands. 7°04 N., 1710 24 30" E.
Jermaeloff or Yermaloff of Bellingshausen is Taenga of the Paumotu archipelago.
Jervis is the largest of the Bellevue group in Torres strait. 90 07' S., 142° 11' E.
Jervis, an island of the Galapagos.
Jesu Maria, of the Admiralty group, is 600-800 ft. high, 7-8 m. long, inhabited.
2° 20' S., 147° 40' E.
Jesus (Isla de), discovered by Alvaro de Mendana January 15, 1568. Perhaps Nano-
mea, Ellice group.
Jih, north islet of Odia atoll of the Marshall islands.
Joannet, see Panatinani of the Louisiade archipelago.
Jobenor, islet of Lukunor, Marshall islands.
Jobi or Jappen, a large island at the entrance to Geelvink bay on the New Guinea coast,
no m. E-w., 10-15 m. wide, 2500 ft. high. Inhabited by Papuans on the lowlands,
but on the mountains a more savage tribe is in constant hostilities with the
dwellers on the shore. Belongs to the Sultan of Tidore and is under Dutch rule.
The east end is in T 46" S., 136 52" E.
Johnson, one of the Hudson group, Fiji; 70 ft. high. 17 36' 30" S., 1 77° oo' 20 " E.©
Named for Lieutenant R. E. Johnson of the Wilkes Expedition.
Johnston group consists of three thickly wooded islets, about 70 ft. high, in the
Admiralty islands. 2° 25' S., 147' oC E.
Johnston or Cornwallis was discovered December 14, 1807, by Captain Johnston of
H. M. S. Cornwallis. Examined in 1859 by Lieutenant J. M. Brooks of U. S.
schooner Fennimore Cooper. It is a lagoon island 3.5 by 3.2 m. and affords
guano. Claimed by the xVnerican Guano Company of San Francisco. 16 45" N.,
169° 39' w.
Jotnard, low group consisting of Panawaipona and Panarairai and a few islets in the
Louisiade archipelago. 1 1 15' S., 152" op E.
Jombombo, islet ill Astrolabe bay, northeast coast of New Guinea.
Jouvency or Iwa, 24 ill. east from Kitava in the Kiriwina group, a mile in diameter,
consisting of coral terraces and precipices, thickly wooded. Ascent from the sea
by ladders. Ebony in quantity. A finer people than on New Guinea. 8 44' S.,
15T44W. Jouvency was Geographical Engineer on the Esperance. In the latest
publication of the Admiralty Hydrographic Bureau this island is called Jouveney
and is so printed on charts.
Juan Fernandes, or Mas-a-tierra, was named for a Spaniard voyaging from Lima to
Valdivia in 1563. It is a volcanic island 12X4 m-> 3000 ft. high, 360 m. west from
Valparaiso. For three years the residence of Alexander Selkirk, the prototype of
the immortal Robinson Crusoe, gp 37' 45" S., 78' 13' w.
Judge and his clerk, 24 m. N., 20° E. true from the north end of Macquarie island.
540 22 S., 158° 46' E.
Jurien, see Kitava of the Kiriwina group. Jurien was a volunteer on tli <2 Esp trance.
Jurij, islet on the west coast of Ebon, Marshall islands. 4 36' 33" N., 168 41' 35" E.
[165]
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 2. — 6.
82
INDEX TO THE PA C/E/C ISLANDS.
Kaafa, see Pylstaart or Ata of the Tongan islands.
Kaan, a group of eight islets discovered by Tasman in 1643 and by him named
Anthony Caens after a member of the Council for India. They are due north
from the northeast point of New Ireland. 3 ' 3c/ S., 153° 28" E. The people are
described as naked, ferocious and armed with spears. IO.
Kabara, see Kambara, Fiji.
Kahoolawe, of the Hawaiian group, is a rather barren looking sheep pasture south¬
west of Maui. It has an extent of 44,000 acres, and is 1427 ft. high. 1.
Kadais, islet in the lagoon of Egum atoll in the Kiriwina group. 9" 26' S., 151° 57' E.
Kaboer, islet in Geelvink bay, on the north coast of New Guinea.
Kadavu, see Kandavu, Fiji.
Kahalape, islet of Andema, Caroline islands.
Kaiari, islet of Jobi, New Guinea.
Kaileuna, of the Kiriwina group. 8° 35' s., 150° 55' E.
Kaimbo, islet of volcanic and coral formation off east point of Yathata in the Lau.
group, Fiji. 1.5 m-. long, 150 ft. high, cultivated.
Kairu or D’Urville. Natives wear little clothing, are small (5 ft. high) and aCtive; wear
hair projecting behind in a conical case 18 in. long. West end, 30 20 S., 143° 2O E.
Kaj angle, group of four small islands surrounded by a reef- in the Pelew group. The
largest is 4 m. in circumference. 8° 03' n., 134" 39' E.
Kakea, islet of Port Patteson, Vanua Lava, New Hebrides.
Kakula, of the New Hebrides, is a low, tree-covered islet on the reef which extends a
mile from the north shore of Fate. It is inhabited.
Kalan, islet of Ontong Java. 50 3c/ S., 159° 15' E.
Kalap, see Mokil, Caroline islands.
Kalatl, islet on the southwest side of Eua, Tongan group.
Kalo, islet at west end of Udjelong, Marshall islands.
Kaluma, a name of Panawina of the Touisiade archipelago.
Kama, see Eurupig, Caroline islands. 3.
Kamac or Table islet in Infernet passage on the southwest coast of New Caledonia.
Kamako or Collie, an islet of Mangareva.
Kambara, Fiji, 3.5 m. by 2 m.; of rectangular form, fertile and well wooded; 350 ft. high
on the northwest side where there is no reef. South end, 18° 58" 13” S., 1810 03" E.
Kanathia, Fiji, 5 m. west from Valua valavo, is 3 m. n-S., 2.5 m. E-w., 830 ft. high.
The peak is in 170 16' 3c/' S., 180° 53' E. 14.
Kandavu (Kadavu), Fiji, was discovered by Bligh and called Mywoolla. It is 32 in.
ENE-wsw., and from half to eight miles wide. Buke levu or Mount Washington
is 2750 ft. high. Population, about 7000. The peak is in 190 05' S., 1 7 70 58' E.
Kandavu, islet in Nandi waters on the west coast of Viti levu.
Kandomo, an uninhabited islet of Mamanutha ira group, Fiji.
Kao, a conical rock, 3030 ft. high, northeast from Tofua, Tongan group. 190 4F 3 5" s.,
I74° 59 5o" w.
Kapeniur, islet of Ailuk, Marshall islands. At the north end ; 4 m. in circumference.
Kapenmailang, a small group near Nukuor, Caroline islands, on which a pure Poly¬
nesian dialect is spoken.
[166]
INDEX TO THE PA C/E/C ISLANDS.
83
Kapenoar, islet of Pakin, Caroline islands. 7" 4c/ 40" N., 1570 44' e. 5.
Kapetior, islet of Likieb on the west side, Marshall islands. 6.
Kapinga marangi, a name of Greenwich, Caroline islands.
Kapiti or Entry, New Zealand. 40" 50' S ., 174 35' E.
Kapuma, islet in South bay of Fate, New Hebrides.
Karajiu, Solomon islands. 8° 38' S., 158° io' E.
Karajiu geta, Solomon islands. 8 30' S., 158° 07' E.
Karajiu miki, Solomon islands. 8 27' s., 158° 05' E.
Karewha, in Bay of Plenty, New Zealand. 37° 29' S., 176 10 E.
Kar-Kar or Dampier, a high volcanic peak, 5000 ft. higher; 36-40 m. in circumfer¬
ence. 40 42' S., 145° 58' E.
Karkone, one of the Hermit islands. i& 32" S., i45u 01 ' E.
Karlshoff, see Aratika of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Karobailo Kawa, islet of the Talbot group between Kawa and Mata Kawa at the
mouth of the Wassi Kussa river, New Guinea. 9"’ \S s., 142' rF E.
KatOlli, high islet within the reef of Mothe, Fiji. i8u 40' S., 18F 28' 40” E.
Karu, islet of the Harcourt group, north from Ugue bay on the northeast coast of
New Caledonia.
Kassa, New Guinea coast. 9 15' s., 142 19' E.
Kata, see Enderby, Caroline islands. 4.
Katafanga, Fiji, a small island inhabited only during the turtle season. It is the
property of an European. East point is in 170 3 o' 30" s., 181 19 30" E.
Katai or Connor, is triangular, each side 1.5 m., 430 ft. high, well wooded. io° 40" 30” s.,
o / tf
15 1 05 30 E.
Katelma, islet of Pakin, Caroline islands. 70 02 N., 1 5 70 47' 30" E.
Kater, one of the Bonin group, 160 ft. high. 27° 30' n., 142 16 E.
Katharine, see Udjae, Marshall islands.
Katiu or Saken, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by Bellingshausen in
1822. The southeast point is in 16° 31' s., 144° 12' 10” w. 21.
Kato katoa, see Glentou, New Guinea.
KattOU, islet off the north point of Babeltop, Pelew islands.
Kau, uninhabited island on the coast of New Guinea.
Kauai, of the Hawaiian group. Here Cook first landed. It is the fourth in size and
perhaps the most beautiful of the group. Area, 348,000 acres. Population, 15,228
in 1896. Volcanic adtion seems first to have ceased at this end of the chain.
Atooi of Cook. 28 m. E-W. by 23 m. N-S. I.
Kauehi, see Kawehe of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Kaukura or Aura, of the Paumotu archipelago, is about 24 m. long, wooded and in¬
habited. 15° 43' si, 146° 50' 36" w. 20.
Kaula, a red volcanic islet off Niihau of the Hawaiian group; 17 m. sw. from Niihau.
Kaven, islet of Maloelab, Marshall islands; 2.2 in. by 0.7 111. 8 51' N., 170 49" E.
Kaveva, islet in Sausau passage on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Kawa, westernmost of the Talbot group, New Guinea. 9 16 S., 142 09' E.
Kawau, in Auckland bay, New Zealand.
Kawehe or Kauehi, the Vincennes of Wilkes, in the Paumotu archipelago, was dis-
I467]
84
INDEX TO THE PA C/E/C ISLANDS.
covered by Captain Fitzroy in H. M. S. Beagle in 1835. It is 12 m. N-S., open
lagoon with 15 fathoms. South point is in 150 59' 48” S., 145° 09' 30" w. 21.
Kayangle or Moore of the Pelew islands; 1.5 m. long. 8° 02' 30" N., 134" 38' 30" E.
Better spelling is Kajangle.
Kayser, off west coast of Bonka, Solomon islands. 50 31' S., 154 ’ 36' K.
Kea, an inhabited islet, 570 ft. high, near Vanna levn, Fiji. 16° 39' S., 179° 57' 20" E.
Keaba, islet of Ysabel, Solomon islands. Sometimes spelled Keaha. 8° S., 159° 28' E.
Keai, near Port Chalmers, New Guinea. 8° io' S., 146° 06" E.
KeatS, in Torres strait. 9" 41' s., 143° 25' E.
Kelifijia or Falafagea, of the Tongan islands. 28° 31' S., 175° 18' w.
Keluna, islet off north coast of New Guinea, near Cape King William. A German station.
Kemin, see Gardner of the Phoenix group. 17.
Ketnpe, group of two small islands connected by reef 1.5 m. north from Goulvain or Dobu.
Kemtai, islet 20 ft. high, on the southeast coast of New Guinea.
Kendec, wooded islet in Kumak passage on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Kennedy, see Motuiti of the Santa Cruz islands.
Kent, group in Bass strait between Flinders and Cape Wilson. See F. Nixon, Narra¬
tive of a visit to the islands in the Bass's Straits , London, 1857, 8vo.
Kepara, or Two Brothers, was discovered by D’Urville. It is west from Bultig, New
Guinea.
Keppel, see Niuatobutabu of the Tongan islands. 18.
Kerakera, islet Oil the bordering reef of Wari, Louisiade archipelago; 60 ft. high
and grassy.
Kerawarra ill the Bismarck archipelago. 40 if S., 152° 25' E.
Kermadec group. Named by D’Entrecasteaux for the commander of L'Esperance ,
Huon de Kermadec. The group is 500 m. ENE. from the north cape of New
Zealand, and extends 140 m. nne-SSW. There are four islands: the largest, Raoul,
was named by D’Entrecasteaux for the officer who first saw it; the south one for
his ship, L’Esperance. Lieutenant Watts, in 1788, discovered Curtis and Macau-
ley. Group annexed to Great Britain in 1886 and now a part of the colony of
New Zealand.
Kerue, see Squally, of the Bismarck archipelago. IO.
Kewley, see Udjelong of the Caroline islands. 5.
Kia, islet 780 ft. high, north of Vanua levu, Fiji, and just within the north point of
the Great Sea Reef. 160 14 S., 179° 06' E. 14.
Kiamu or Grimoult, islet in Mueo bay, southwest side of New Caledonia.
Kiangle, see Kajangle, Pelew islands.
Kibu, of the Kiriwina group. 8° 4c/ S., 150° 48' E.
Kie, islet 760 ft. high, off Muthuata on the north side of Vanua levu, Fiji. 16° 13' 54" S.,
170° of E.
Kie, islet on the southeast reef of New Caledonia.
Kilagen, islet north side of Udjelong, Marshall islands.
Kilap, islet of Uluthi, Caroline islands.
Kili or Hunter group. Discovered by Captain Dennett; in the Marshall group; 2.5 m.
in diameter, uninhabited. 50 40' N., 169° 15" E.©
[168]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
85
Killerton, group of small islands on the coast of New Guinea: Harowani, inhabited;
Mahabarina, Waga tumaiawa on the southwest, and four smaller islets. io°23/S.,
O o'
150 38 E.
Kimbombo, three islets within a reef 12 m. in circumference ; south and largest
densely wooded, 190 ft. high; middle one coral and sand, 120 ft. high; northern¬
most and smallest also coral and sand, 100 ft. high. Fiji.
Kimuta, westernmost and largest of the Renard group, Louisiade archipelago; 3.2 m.
long. Villages on the north side.
Kinamue, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands.
Kinde, islet north from Nemmene peninsula, southeast coast of New Caledonia.
King, off northwest point of Tasmania.
King George group, name given by Byron in 1765 to two atolls, Takapoto and
Takaroa of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
King George, Wallis’ name for Tahiti, Society islands.
King, see Taiaro, of the Paumotus.
Kingsmill, a name of a portion of the Gilbert islands, sometimes applied to the whole
group.
Kioa, in Somosomo strait, east of Vanua levu, Fiji; 5 m. NE-SW., 920 ft. high, un¬
inhabited.
Kiriwina or Trobriand. Names applied both to the principal island and to the whole
group of low coral but fertile islands. The population is more than 18,000 of
Polynesian, and a mixture of Papuan, Polynesian and Malay. 9.
Kitava or Jurien, of the Kiriwina group, is an elevated atoll 300-400 ft. high, with
an area of 5—6 sq. m. There are 13 villages in the depression which marks the
old lagoon. This is surrounded by a wooded coral wall 50-100 ft. high. Inhabi¬
tants are peaceful, industrious and fond of wood carving. They make wide-
mouthed earthen pots for cooking, and have remarkable dances, using a sort of
double shield in that amusement. 8° 40' S., 151° 24" E.
Kiup, islet of Makin, Gilbert islands. 3 ’ 17' N., 172° 56' 20" E.
Kiusick, in the Yasawa group, Fiji; 40 ft. high. 16° 41' S., 177“ 33" E.O
Kivave, islet of Fakaafo. 90 22' 20" S., 17 1° 12' w.
Kiwai, a long and populous island at the mouth of the Fly river on the south coast of
New Guinea; 37 m. long. South point in 8‘ 54' S., 143° 36' E.
Knox, see Ailinginae, Marshall islands. Also islet of this atoll. 1 1° 05^ N., i66°35/E.
Knox, see Eiao, Marquesas islands.
Knox, a common misprint for Knoy, see Tarawa, Gilbert islands.
Knox, islet 47 ft. high, in the Yasawa group, Fiji. 17° 26' S., 177° 02' E.O.
Knox group, ten islets 5 m. w. by N-E. by s.; 3 m. sw. from Mille, Marshall islands.
Knoy, see Tarawa, Gilbert islands.
Kobiloko or Yam, islet of Pavuvu or Russell group, Solomon islands. 90 02' S.,
159° °5' E. .
Kodokupuei, islet of Sansoral. 50 20' n., 132° 20' E.
Koikoi, on the New Guinea coast. io° 17' S., 149° 21' E.
Koliviu, a mangrove-covered islet of the Maskelyne group, New Hebrides.
Komaehu, islet of Guadalcanal Solomon islands.
[169]
86
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Komo levu, island north of Ularua, Fiji; 1.5 m. by 0.5 m., and 270 ft. high; in¬
habited. 18 37' 30^ S., 181° 20' E.
Komo ndriti, dark, rocky companion to the last; levu = large, ndriti = small.
180 38' S., 18 1° 18' 30" E.
Konaoe doi, islet of Ono i lau, Fiji.
Kotldogi, islet of Mnendo bay on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Konduyo, islet in Isie passage, New Caledonia. 21° 52' S., 165° 47' E.
Koniene, has two curious peaks, in Kataviti bay on the northwest side of New Caledonia.
Kotlig islet is north from Bilibili on north coast of New Guinea.
Kora, islet east from Kia, Fiji.
Korak, south of Kajangle, with Arayonzet and Carapellas on a reef 4.5 m. N-S.,
5 m. E-w. Pelew islands.
Kordiukoff, a name given by Kotzebue in 1824 to Rose island of the Manua group
( Samoan ).
Korido or Korrido, of the Sehouten group, is little known. o° 45' S., 135° 35' E.
Koro or Goro, Fiji, is 10 m. N-S., 4.5 m. E-W., 1840 ft. high; wooded, many coconuts.
Population about 1000. North point is in 170 13' 30" S., 179 26' 30" E.
Korolib or Goat, Fiji, wooded islet 320X200 yards. 16° 46' 20" S., 180° oF 40” E.
Korotuna, Fiji, small, fertile, inhabited. 16° 04' S., 180° 37' 30" E.
Korror, the seat of government of the Pelew islands; 3.5 m. by 2.5 m.
Korsakoff, see Ailinginae of the Marshall islands. Usually Remski-Korsakoff.
Kosmann or Maragili, of the Louisiade archipelago; uninhabited. n°o6's., 15 F 30" E.
KotU, group of small islands at the southwest part of the Hapai group, Tongan isl¬
ands. Principal islands, Oua and Luanamo.
Kotuho, Fiji. 160 48' 50" s., 179° 25' 30" E.O
Koulo, islet of the Tongan group.
Koutousoff of Bellingshausen (1820) is Makeino, Paumotu archipelago.
Kowata, islet 570 ft. high off west coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Krudu, see Quo}r, New Guinea.
Krusenstern, see Tikahau of the Paumotu archipelago. 20.
Kubokonilick, ill the Bismarck archipelago. 40 13' S., 152° 23' E.
Kuebuni, islet north from Port Goro, southeast side of New Caledonia.
Kuiao, islet of the Kiriwina group. 8° 38' 30" S., 150° 51' E.
Kliku, islet 87 ft. high on the southwest side of Malolo, Hudson group, Fiji. i7°47/s.,
177° o 7' E.
Kukuluba, islet 65 ft. high, east of the Duehateau group, Louisiade archipelago.
II 16 S., 152 21 45 E.
Kulambangara or Kulambangra, of the Solomon islands, is 16 m. n-s., 13 m. E-w.;
5000 ft. high. 70 58' s., 157° 05' E.
Kutnbara, on northeast coast of Guadalcanar, Solomon islands. 90 31" icFs., 160° 29" E.
Kumi, islet of Rongelab, Marshall islands. ii° 26 ' 35" n., 167° io' E. 6.
Kunie, see Isle of Pines. 13.
Kurateke, see Vanavana of the Paumotu archipelago. 22,.
Kuria or Woodle, of the Gilbert islands, was discovered by Captains Marshall and
Gilbert in 1788; 5 m. by 2.5 m. o° 13' n., 1730 28' 30" E. 7.
[170]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
87
Kurimaratl, islet of Pavuvu, Solomon islands.
Kuriva is southeasternmost of the Engineer group, Louisiades; 2 m. E-w., 400 ft. high.
Large village on the south side.
Kurudu is 3 m. east from Jappen on the north coast of New Guinea. It is 8 m. E-w.
Kusaie, Ualan or Strong, of the Caroline islands, was discovered in 1804 by Captain
Crozer, who named it for Caleb Strong, the Governor of Massachusetts ; 8.5 m.
E-w., 7.7 m. N-S.; 24 m. in circumference; volcanic. Mt. Crozer is 2152 ft. high.
Population about 400. 50 19' n., 163° 06' E. 5.
Kussa, of the Talbot group, north of Boigu, New Guinea. 90 16' S., 142° 21' E.
Kuthiu, a form of Kusaie, Caroline islands.
Kutomo or Lesser Isle of Pines, a portion separated from the main island by a narrow
channel.
Klltu, islet of Satoan, Caroline islands. 4. -
Kutusow, see Utirik of the Marshall islands. 6.
Ktivyo, islet of Maskelyne group, New Hebrides.
Kwadelen or Kwajalong, see Kwadjalin.
Kwadjalin, of the Marshall islands, consists of many islets about a lagoon, of which
the west side is 58 m. long. The north islet is in 90 14' n., 167° 02 E. Mentschi-
kow group of map No. 6.
Kwaiatabu, a name of Duau, D’Entrecasteaux group.
Kwaiawata, of the Kiriwina group, is nearly 2 m. in diameter. The lagoon has a
high, wooded, coral wall around, and the whole indications are of a raised island.
About 400 inhabitants.
Kwaiope, islet southeast from Moratau of the D’Entrecasteaux group. 90 43' s.,
150° 54 E.
Kwataua, small island north from Rogeia, on the southeast coast of New Guinea,
belonging to the London Missionary Society.
Kwewato, a coral island, densely peopled, in the Kiriwina group. 8°30/S., 15 1° E
Labi, of the Kiriwina group. 8 36" S., 150° 5c/ E.
Laciba, see Lathiba, a small, low island off Ngau, Fiji.
La Desgraciada, a name on the Spanish chart captured b}^ Anson and supposed to
apply to one of the Hawaiian islands.
Ladrone, a name given to the Marianas by some of the Spanish sailors of Magalhaes,
who fancied the indigenes were great thieves. As they were not more so than
other islanders, or perhaps than the sailors who named them, it seems a pity to
attach the stigma of such a name to the group, especially as all the original in¬
habitants have been “converted” into the grave.
Lae or Brown, of the Marshall islands, was discovered by Captain J. W. Brown in
December, 1858. It is a group of 14 islets on a reef 6 m. in diameter. About 250
inhabitants. 90 N., 166 20 E.
Lagoon of Cook is Vahitahi of the Paumotu archipelago. Lagoon of Bligh is Tema-
tangi of the same group.
Lagrandiere, of the Kiriwina group. Named for Lieutenant Lagrandiere of the
Esp Dance, 8° 52' s., 1 5 1 0 12' E.O
[17G
88
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Lagrimas de San Pedro, a discovery of Quiros, April 27, 1606, was perhaps the Banks
islands.
Laignel, northeast from Moratau, was named for Ensign Laignel, one of D’Entre¬
casteaux’ officers. It is in 18' S., 150° 55' E.
Laika is nearly 2 m. north from Tongoa of the New Hebrides and is not permanently
inhabited.
Lain, in Geelvink bay, northwest coast of New Guinea. o° 56' s., 135° 30' E.
Laing, islet in Hansa bay, north coast of New Guinea. 40 12' S., 144° 52' E.
Eaine or Uo, is north from Mare of the Loyalty group. It is low and covered with
pine trees.
Lakahia, of the New Guinea region. 40 06' s., 138° 28' E.
Lakeba, see Lakemba, Fiji.
Lakemba, a fertile island 5 m. E-w., 3 m. n-S.; 720 ft. high. It has an extensive reef.
Population has a large mixture of Tongan. Lakemba was the first Vitian island
christianized by the English Mission in 1835. Northeast point is in 18° 13' S.,
1810 12' E. 14.
Laketia, islet of Nanomea, Ellice group. 16.
La Madalena, a name given by Mendana to Fatuhiva of the Marquesas islands.
La Menu, islet on the northwest coast of Api, New Hebrides. 160 33's., 168° 06' E.
La Mesa, a name on the Spanish chart captured by Anson, supposed to apply to Hawaii.
Lamoliork, see Ngoli of the Caroline archipelago.
Lamotrek or Swede, a triangular reef about 6 m. wnw-ESE. There are several islets
on the border of the lagoon which are inhabited. 70 24' N., 146° 30' E.
Lamut, islet off the southwest coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Lanai, an island in the central portion of the main Hawaiian group containing
86,000 acres; 3400 ft. high, with a population of no. I.
Lancier, see Akiaki of the Paumotu archipelago. 22.
Langdon of Roberts is Hatutu of the Marquesas islands.
Laraoro, New Guinea. io° 23' S., 149° 20 E.
Larkin, of the Caroline islands.
Laseinie, a group of six islets in the Louisiade archipelago.
Laskar, see Lisiansky of the Hawaiian group. 2.
Lassion, another form of Lisiansky.
Las Tres Marias, see Three Sisters, Solomon islands.
Late i Tonga, Late i Viti and Booby, three islets in the lagoon of Reid reef in the
Lau group, Fiji. 170 54' s., 178° 23' w.O
Late or Lette, a volcanic island of the Tongan group, 6—7 m. in circumference and
1790 ft. high. 1 8° 52' s., 1740 37' w.
Lathiba, small, low island off Ngau, Fiji.
La Tortue, one of the Pleiades group, northwest from Uea of the Loyalty islands.
La Treguada, see Ulava, Solomon islands.
Laucala, see Lauthala, Fiji.
Laughlan, a group around a lagoon 5 m. E-w., discovered by Captain Laughlan in the
Mary , 1812. The ten islets are Wabomat, Budelun, Wasimu, Oburak, Bukulan,
I1?2]
V
'
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS. 89
Ozareo, Sureb, Kuneotu, Bwanibwani, Tamaris. The group is also called Nada.
There are about 170 inhabitants — a colony from Murea. 9 18’ s., 153° 38' K.
Lauru, on the New Guinea coast, o 31' s., 134 E.
Lausaneay, a group of low islands extending some 20 m. along a reef; between
8 25' S., 150 20 K. and 8C 31' S., 150 26' E. 9.
Lauthala (Laucala), Fiji, is 4 m. long and 880 ft. high. The peak is in 1 6 47' s.,
180° 23' E.
Iyauvergne, islet of Ruk, of the Caroline archipelago.
I/a Vandola, the easternmost of the Admiralty group; nearly circular, about 600 ft.
high, well peopled. 2° 15" S., 148° iL E.
Lavao, see Yule.
I/ayard, two low, small islands on the New Guinea coast. 7 35' s., 147" 32' E.
I/ayrle, islet at the north side of St. Vincent bay on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
I/aysan or Moller, of the Hawaiian group, is an American discovery. Captain Stani-
kowitch, in 1828, named it after his vessel. It extends 2 m. by 1.5 m. and is per¬
haps 25 ft. high. For some years it has been leased by the Hawaiian Government
to parties who export guano. 25° 47' 47" N., 17 L 53' w. 2.
Lazaroff or Lazarev, see Matahiva of the Paumotu archipelago. 2,0.
Leausan or Protection, on the northwest side of Fate, New Hebrides.
Lebris, a high islet in Uarai passage 011 the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Lebrun group, northwest from Wari, consists of Hikarika and Dodigi, two conical
islands extending E-w. 10 52' S., 150 57’ E.
L’Bchiquier group was discovered by Bougainville and named from a fancied resem¬
blance to a checkerboard. There are 53 islets, with some 800 inhabitants of a dark
copper color and with long, stringy hair. The northeast point is in i° 06' s., 144° 3c/ E.
Lefuka, a form of Lifuka found on old charts.
Legoarant group, two small islands off the north coast of New Guinea, 3 m. from
shore and half a mile apart. 5° 08" S., 145 E.
Lehua, a small, volcanic island about a mile from the north end of Niiliau of the
Hawaiian group. The channel between is very shallow. I.
Leiga, islet of the Basses islands in the Louisiade archipelago.
Leigh, islet off Port Carteret on the coast of New Ireland.
Leili is large, low, of horseshoe shape, in Sio bay of Malaita, Solomon islands.
8° 48' S, 1600 53' E.
Lejeune, a wooded islet on the north edge of a long reef in the Louisiade archipelago.
O / _ O /
II 12 S., 151 50 E.
Lekeleka, islet Oil Barrier reef, 5 m. southeast from Oua, Hapai group, Tongan islands.
Lekin, islet in form of a cube, between Uea and Moali, Loyalty group.
Lekll, low islet off Viti levu, Fiji. 18° 04' S., 177 16' E.O
Lele, islet of Kusaie, Caroline islands. According to Liitke the natives pronounce
the name Leila. 50 20 n., 163 09 E.
Leleigana, one of the Obstruction islands, Louisiade archipelago; 325 ft. high,
wooded and inhabited.
Leleisour, one of the Huon group. It has guano worked by a French establish¬
ment. 1 8° 1 8' s.
[173]
9o
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Leleppa or Protection, New Hebrides; 2.5 m. nnw-SSE., 1.5 m. wide, 637 ft. high; in¬
habited. Off the northwest coast of Fate, forming the west side of Havannah
harbor.
I/digoat or Hamelin, a low and wooded islet of the Loyalty group.
Leluvia is south from Motnriki, Fiji; low and covered with coconut walks. 170 48/30//S.,
178° 46' E.
Leneil, islet of Ailinglablab of the Marshall islands.
Leocadie group, two islets off the New Guinea coast.
Leonidas, low islet 0.7 m. in circumference, off Vanna levu, Fiji. 16° 39' 24" S.,
178° 36' 50" E.O
Leper, see Aoba (Omba), New Hebrides.
Leru, islet of Pavuvn, Solomon islands.
Lesson, an aCtive volcano (May 20, 1874) on the north coast of New Guinea; 3.5' m.
in circumference, 2200 ft. high. The natives wear their hair in bundles enclosed
in basket work and often projecting a foot behind. 30 35' s., 144° 47' E. 8.
Lette, see Late, Tongan islands.
Leuen, south island of Nanin atoll of the Marshall islands. 8° 14' n., i68° 03' E.
Leuneuwa, islet of Ontong Java. 50 28' s., 1590 44' E.
Levalea, islet of Pavuvn, Solomon islands.
Lewis, islet of the Yasawa group, Fiji. 170 28' 40" S., 1 7 70 00 10" E.O
Lib, of the Marshall islands; 2.2 m. E-w. 8° 20' N., 167° 30' E. (Captain Dennett.) 6.
Lifu, raised coral, 100-250 ft. high, in the Loyalty group. Population, 7000T:.
Formerly cannibals. 20° 36' S., 167 06' E. 13.
Lifuka, low, 5 m. by 2 m., in the Hapai group, Tongan islands. 19" 49's., I75°4i'w. 18.
Likieb, of the Marshall islands, was discovered hy Kotzebue November 5, 1817. It
consists of 44 islets on an atoll 27 m. long and from 7-12 m. wide. 90 48' n.,
169' 2 F E.
Likuri, a sand islet off west coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Lileb, see Kwadjalin of the Marshall islands.
Lily, on the New Guinea coast. 90 25' S., 147° 02' E.
Limu, islet in the Hapai group, Tongan islands.
Lina, of the Solomon islands. 70 15' s., 157° 32' E.
Linthicum, in the Underwood group, Fiji; low and wooded. i7°44/S., 1770 i5/io//E.O
Lisiansky, of the Hawaiian group, was discovered by Captain Lisiansky in the Neva ,
OCtober 15, 1805. It is 3 m. by 2 m., and 40 ft. high. 26° N., 1730 57' w. 2,.
Livingston, see Namonuito of the Caroline islands. 4.
Lizard, islet of Hueguenee, Loyalty islands.
Lizard, islet Oil the Australian coast. 140 4c/ S., 145° 28" E.
Lloyd, on the Australian coast. 12' 46' S., 143° 26' E.
Lo or Saddle, Torres islands; 3.5 m. N-S. by 2 m. E-W., 500 ft. high. Natives quiet
and friendly. 130 20 S., 166° 35' E.
Loa (Observatory of Wilkes), is northeast from Oneata to which it is connected by a
sunken reef; 140 ft. high. 18° 24" 40" S., 1810 28' E.O
Loangi, a mile long, off Vanua levu, Fiji.
Loch, New Guinea region. 70 45' s., 144° 12' E.
[174]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
9i
Locol, islet at the head of Port Moresby, New Guinea.
Lofaga, of the Tongan islands. 190 51' s., 1750 30' w.
Logea, in China strait, New Guinea. io° 39' s., 150° 38" E.
Loliwari, a name of Ambrym, New Hebrides.
Lolo or Roro, forms of the native name of Yule. See Roro.
Loloata with Lolorua, on east side of Port Moresby; 130 ft. high. 9°33,S., 1470 17' E.
I/Omlom or Nevelo, of the Matema islands, is 5 m. by 1.5 m., and 200 ft. high. Brit¬
ish protectorate was proclaimed August 28, 1898.
Lone Tree, see Iku of Apaiang, Gilbert islands. Another of the same name on the
north reef of Tarawa.
Long, volcanic island 2000 ft. high, north from Vitiez strait, north coast of New
Guinea. North point is in 50 14' s., 1470 oy' E.
Long, in Torres strait. io° 02 S., 1420 50' E.
Long, islet in South ba}4 southwest side of New Caledonia.
Longatana, islet of Fakaafo, TTnion group. 9" 24' 40" .s., 171 \2 w. 17.
Longuerne, group ill the southwest part of Huon gulf; islands are small, wooded and
rocky, but Saddle island is 2.5 m. long and 700 ft. high. Named for Midshipman
Longuerne on the Recherche. y° 20 S., 147° 16' E.
Lonkahu, islet of Tatafa of the Hapai group, Tongan islands.
Loof (Leaf) is the central island of the Hermit group; 500 ft. high. i° 28' s.,
145° 05' E. 8.
Lopevi, a volcano of the New Hebrides, 4714 ft. high, aCtive, occasionally ejeCting
ashes. Few inhabitants along the shore. 16° 28' s., 168° 18' E. 12.
Lord Hood, see Marntea of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Lord Howe was discovered February 17, 1778, by Lieutenant Ball. Volcanic and
mountainous, Mt. Gower at the southern end being 2840 ft. high; about 5.5 m.
long. On the west side are extensive coral reefs. Population, in 1880, 65. Belongs
to New South Wales. 31 36" 30" s., 159° 05" 10" E. See J. B. Wilson’s Report,
Sydney, 1882 ; also a paper by Mr. Corrie, Proceedings Royal Geographical
Society, 1878, pp. 136-143.
Lord Howe, islet off the southeast end of Santa Cruz. A British protectorate was
proclaimed August 18, 1898.
Lord Howe, see Mopeha, Society islands.
Lord Howe, see Ontong Java, Solomon islands.
Lord North, see Tobi.
Lord Salisbury, islet on the New Guinea coast. y° 52' S., 1 44 28' E.
Losap, of the Caroline islands was discovered by Duperrev. It has about 300 in¬
habitants. Peace islet, in the same lagoon, lias a population of 200. 6 53' N.,
o / tr
152 42 20 E.
Los Eremitanos, see Hermit. 8.
Los Magos, Los Monjes, names on the Spanish chart captured by Lord Anson; sup¬
posed to apply to the Hawaiian islands.
Los Martires, see Tamatam, Caroline islands.
Los Negros, islets of Admiralty island. i° 55' S., 147 16' E.
[i75]
92
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Los Reyes are two small, wooded islands about 500 ft. long. They are 15 m. north¬
west from La Vandola in the Admiralty group. 2° S., 148 03' K.
L’Ostange of Duperrey is Nengonengo of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Los Valientes of Don Felipe Tompson is Ngatik of the Caroline islands. 5.
Lottin is a nearly circular volcanic cone, 5200 ft. high.; 12.5 m. nw. by n. from Cape
King of New Britain. 5' 18' S., 147 35' K. 10.
Lot’s Wife, see Rica de Oro.
Lotlisiade archipelago is an extensive range of islands situated southeast from
New Guinea, between 10 10-11 50' S. and 154" 30-150" 55' E. Probably seen by
Torres in 1606, but named by Bougainville in 1793. Surveyed by D’Urville in
1840. There is gold on Tagula (Sud-est), and although many portions of the
group are still unknown it is thought to be rich in vegetable productions. There
are more than 80 islands besides many rocks and reefs. Inhabitants are of a
dark copper color, with Papuan hair; cartilages of nose and ears much distended.
Cannibals on occasion. Named for Louis XV. of France. 9.
Loutltass, in the Bismarck archipelago. 4 50' S., 150 5 L p;.
Lovuka, a small, sandy islet in Nandi waters off the west coast of Yiti lev u, Fiji.
Low, see Siassi on the east coast of New Guinea. 10.
Low archipelago, see Paumotu archipelago.
Lowendahl, see Nui of the Ellice group. 16.
Loyalty group, discovered by Captain Butler in the Walpole in 1800, or in the
Britannia in 1803. The group runs parallel to the coast of New Caledonia at a
distance of 50-60 m. Consists of Mare or Nengone, Lifu, Uea, with five islets
between the first two. 13.
Luanamo, one of the Koto islands, Hapai group, Tongan islands.
Luard islets are in Hercules bav on the New Guinea coast; six in number, low
(40-70 ft.), and covered with trees. 7° 40' S., 147 42' E.
Liitke, see East Fain, Caroline islands.
Luhuga, islet of Hapai group, Tongan islands.
Lukunor, of the Caroline islands, has been called the gem of Micronesia. It was dis¬
covered in 1793 by Captain J. Mortlock ; 18-20 m. in circumference. Population
about 850. It is not more than seven feet above the sea. 50 29' iS" n., 1530 58' E. 4.
Lukunor, islet off the southeast extreme of Mille, Marshall islands.
Lungur, islet of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Lusanqay, reefs ill the Kiriwina group, named for a lieutenant on the Espc ranee ,
Lvdia, see Pikela, Caroline islands.
Lydia, see Nuakata near East cape of New Guinea.
Lydia, see Udjae, Marshall islands.
L /nx, see Niutao of the hllliee group. 16.
Maabunghi, islet at the mouth of Tanle bay on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Maben, low and wooded, a mile ENE. from Kitai, New Guinea.
Mabneian, a small, wooded island 0.7 m. long on the north edge of a long reef,
Louisiade archipelago.
[176]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
93
Mabui, an islet of Misima, Louisiade archipelago; small, wooded, 90 ft. high. io°56's.,
o w
152 36 E.
Mabuiag, island in Torres strait.
Macarthur, on the Australian coast. iT 45' s., 143° E.
Maeaskill, see Pingelap of the Caroline islands.
Macatlley, of the Kermadec group, is 3 m. in circumference, 780 ft. high; volcanic,
uninhabited; surrounded by perpendicular cliffs 600 ft. high, but can be sealed by
means of a lava stream on the north side. 30° 16' s., 178" 32" w.
Mac Donald, in the Bismarck archipelago. 50 26' S., 150° 43' E.
Mackenzie, see Uluthi of the Caroline islands. 3.
Maclear, islet of the Admiralty group, 200 ft. high, 900 by 700 yards. 1 55' s.,
146 32 E.
Macquarie, in 54°44/s., i59°49rE., is 1200-1500 ft. high. In the early part of this
century it is said 80,000 seals were killed on it. Now inhabited by birds onl}o
Madaamet, islet of Ailinglablab, Marshall islands. Sometimes spelled Madamett.
Maer (pronounced Met') is the largest of the Murray group in Torres strait. On the
same reef with Dauer and Waier. Population, 450. 90 55' s., 144 02" E.
Maewo, see Mai wo, New Hebrides.
Magdalena, see.Fatuhiva of the Marquesas islands. 23.
Magellan, an old name of the Marianas.
Maghyr or Magur, islet of Namonuito, Caroline islands. At extreme north of atoll.
80 / // o / // .
59 45 n., 150 14 30 e.
Maghyrarik, islet of Namonuito, Caroline islands.
Magnetic, island of the Australian coast. 19 10 s., 146° 51' E.
Mago, see Mango, Fiji.
Magone, islet on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Mahabarina, middle islet of the Killerton group off east coast of New Guinea;
0.5 m. X 0.2 m.
Mahea, islet at entrance to Hamene bay, Tahaa, Society islands. 20.
Mahigi, see Ortega, Solomon islands.
Mai or Mae is the name often given to Three Hills of the New Hebrides, but it is the
name of the central district, not of the whole island. See Three Hills.
Maia iti, see Tu.buai manu of the Society group.
Maiakei, a corrupt spelling of Maraki, Gilbert islands.
Maiana or Hall, of the Gilbert islands, was called Gilbert by Captains Marshall and
Gilbert in 1788; then called Hall by the Captain of the brig Elisabeth in 1809.
It is 9 m. NE-SW. by 6 m. In 1886 the population was 1700. o° 55' 30" N.,
H3° 03' 45" s.
Maioiti, see Tapamanu, Society islands.
Mairu, off the New Guinea coast. io° 25' S., 149 2F E.
Maitea or Mehetia, is the easternmost of the Society group; 7 m. in diameter, 1597 ft.
high. 1 7° 53' S-, 148° 05' w.
Maitland, two islets remarkably alike, southwest from St. Andrew islands in the
Admiralty group. 2 29 S., 147° i8/ E.
[ 1 77]
94
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Maitre, islet between Noumea and Uen island, New Caledonia.
Maiwo or Maewo, also called Aurora, is the northeast island of the New Hebrides.
It is 30 m. n-S., and 2000 ft. high. The north point is 14° 50' S., 168° 05' E. 12.
Majuro or Arrowsmith was discovered by Captains Marshall and Gilbert in 1788.
It consists of 33 islets on a reef 30 by 10 111. Southeast point is in 70 05' N.,
17 i° 23' E.
Makada is an inhabited islet of the Duke' of York group in the Bismarck archipelago.
40 06' S., 152° 26' K.
Makahaa, islet in the Biha channel leading toTongatabu, Tongan islands. 2i0o6' 40" S.,
1 750 08' w.
Makamea, islet of Ontong Java. 50 36' S., 159° 21' E.
Makane, one of the Hermit islands. i° 35' S., 144° 57' E.
Makapu, islet of Mangareva.
Makaroa or Marsh, islet of Mangareva.
Makatea, Metia or Aurora, of the Paumotu archipelago, the Recreation of Rogge-
wein who discovered it in 1712, is of uplifted coral, 230 ft. high. It is wooded,
and inhabited by people who still make good kapa. North end is in 150 49" 35^ S.,
148 13 15 W. 20.
Makemo (Makima of Wilkes), Phillips, Koutousoff (of Bellingshausen), was dis¬
covered from the Margaret in 1803. It is 40 m. wnw-ESE. The west end is in
1 6° 26' s., 143° 56' w.
Makill or Pitt is the most northerly of the Gilbert islands, and is 6 m. long, and from
a half to two miles wide. The northeast point is in 30 2c/ 45" N., 172° 58' 45//E. 7.
Makondratlga is 1 m. by 0.5 m., and half a mile northwest from Makongai, Fiy
Makongai is between Ovalau and Koro, Fiji. It is 2 m. by 1.5 m., and 876 ft. hi^n.
170 27' s., 179° 02' w.
Makura, 4 m. southeast from Mai, New Hebrides; 991 ft. high; 1 m. nw-SE.; 120
natives; all profess Christianity.
Mala, see Malaita of the Solomon islands.
Malaita, Solomon islands, the Mala of natives, Isla de Ramos of Gallego, Terre des
Arsacides of Surville, was discovered by Hernando Enriquez of Mendana’s expe¬
dition in 1568. It is 103 m. long and 4274 ft. high. The northwest point is in
8° 19' s., i6oJ 30' E. The southeast point is in 90 45' s., 1610 3c/ E. Natives are
reputed treacherous.
Malacan or Malaeal, islet of Korror, Pelew islands. ]° 19' n., 1340 31' 45" E.
Malaki is off the north side of Viti levu, Fiji. Of triangular form with sides about
2 m. long, it is 755 ft. high, covered with grass and casuarina trees; inhabited.
The northeast point is in 170 16 ' 10" S., 178° o8r 40" E.
Malamala, a sand islet in Nandi waters off the west coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Malapa, the largest island in Marau sound off Guadalcanar, Solomon islands. 9°46/S.,
160° 48' E.
Malatta, of the Exploring group, is joined to Vanua mbalavu by reef. It is 2 m. by
0.3 m., and 420 ft. high. 170 20 30" S., 181° oT E.
Malaupaina, the southernmost of the Three Sisters, Solomon islands. The middle
one is Malau lalo, the north one Malau.
[178]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
95
Malden or Independence was discovered by Byron July 29, 1825, 011 the voyage on
which he brought the remains of the King and Queen of the Hawaiian islands to
Honolulu. It is 4 m. in diameter, and about 30 ft. high. There are traces of a
former Polynesian population in curious stone structures. It is a British pos¬
session and is worked for guano. No fresh water on the island. It was named
for an officer of the Blonde. \ 05' S., 155° w.
Malebu, islet off north coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Malekula or Mallicolo, of the New Hebrides, extends 55 m. nw-SE. by 15 m. The
inhabitants are warlike but small in stature. The southwest point is in 16 26' S.,
167° 47' E. As will be seen
by the map, the northeast and
south shores are fringed by a
mountain chain.
Malema, see Matema or Swallow
islands.
Mali is off the north coast of Va-
nua levu, Fiji; 350 ft. high;
inhabited. 16° 20' 54" S., 179°
/ rr
19 42 E.
Malima, two islets (south one
130 ft. high) in the centre of
a lagoon 1.7 m. in diameter,
6 m. n. by w. from Kanathia,
Fiji. i7°o8/30//s., i8o°5o/e.O
Malinoa, small, low, 50 ft. high.
Tongan group.
Maliu or Toulon is 6 111. off Ama¬
zon bay on the south coast of
New Guinea. It is 3 111. in cir¬
cumference, and 300 ft. high ;
covered with trees and grass.
There is a large village.
Mallicolo, see Malekula, New Hebrides. The former perhaps more common on charts.
Malo or St. Bartholemew, islet off the southeast side of Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
Natives are small in stature, but vigorous eaters of human flesh.
Maloelab, Calvert, Arakteheeff or Kaven of the Marshall islands, was discovered by
Captain Gilbert June 29, 1788, and by him named Calvert. It consists of 64 islets
on a reef extending 33 m. nw-SE. by 15 m. Kotzebue gives the southeast point as
* r>o / o / _ r
111 8 29 N., 171 11 E. 6.
Malogi, islet near Tangoa anchorage, Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
Malolo islands, of the Hudson group, Fiji, extend over a triangle with sides of 2 m.
They are inhabited and well cultivated. Malolo, Malololailai, Ngualito, Mathiu,
Wadingi and Vatu mbulo, the last three mere rocks. 17° 46' io"s., i77°o8'4o"e.O
Malololailai, islet southeast from Malolo, 30 ft. high. North point 170 46' 30" s.,
o r rr
177 10 30 E.
FIG. 5. MALEKULA: from admiralty chart.
96 INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Malpelo, a barren rock surrounded by many islets, seen by Colnett July 1793; 1200 ft.
high. 4 03' n., 8 1 36' w.
Malukawa, north from Saibai, New Guinea. 9' 18" S., 142 48' E.
Malume group consists of Puna and Nugarba, Bismarck archipelago. 3 13" S.,
154" 2O K.
Mamanutha, islands in the Hudson group, Fiji. 18 52" S., 178 2C E.© There are
13 islands divided into two groups: M. i thake (windward), Mana, Matamanoa,
Nautanivouo, Tavua, inhabited. Mondriki, Monu, Yanua, Tokoriki, M. i ira (lee¬
ward), Yavurimba, Kandomo, Vanua levu, Na vandra, Eori, all uninhabited. 14.
Mambualau, low islet on reef of Viti levu, Fiji. 17 57' 10” S., 178" 48' 15" E.©
Mamere, islet within N’Goe reef on the southeast side of New Caledonia.
Man, see Uatom, Bismarck archipelago. 10.
Man-of-war Rock, see Gardner south of the Hawaiian islands.
Mana, uninhabited islet of Mamanutha i thake group, Fiji.
Manahiki, a spelling of Monahiki or Humphrey. 19.
Manaka, two groups in the Paumotu archipelago discovered by Cook in 1773. They
each have lagoons and are very near each other. The north one is called
Marokau, the south one Manaka. More than 20 islets. The south point is in
13 28 S., 142 10 W. 21.
Mananua, islet on the southeast coast of New Guinea, 130 ft. high; east from Taurama.
Manaswari, islet of Port Dorei on the north coast of New Guinea. There is a Mis¬
sion station here, o 55' S., 134 08" E.
Mando or lie aux Canards, islet at the south end of New Caledonia.
Mandoliana is south from Florida, Solomon islands. 90 iF 30" S., 160° 15" 30" E.
Mandtliloto, one of the islets of Sikaiana or Stewart island. 8° 23" S., 162° 58" E.dz
Manevai or Direction, islet of Vanikoro, New Hebrides; small, 250 ft. high.
Mangaia, of the Hervey group, is 20 m. in circumference and 300 ft. above the sea.
Discovered by Cook March 29, 1777. In 1885 it had a population of 4000 and is
the centre of the Protestant Mission for the Central Pacific. The fringing reef
has no entrance. The people were very skilful in carving paddles and handles of
ceremonial adzes, as shown by the specimens in every museum. 2i°57/S., 151° 07' w.
Mangareva, Peard or Gambier, a coral reef with five small volcanic islands and many
islets, discovered by Captain Wilson in the Duff May 25, 1797. It was named for
Admiral Lord Gambier. The group extends 4 m. NE-SW., and there are three
passages into the lagoon. Mt. Duff is 1315 ft. high. In 1880 the population was
about 1000. Mangareva, Akamaru or Wainwright, Aukena or Elson, Taravai or
Belcher, Agakauitai, Makaroa or Marsh, Kamaka or Collie, Manui, Makapu.
Mangareva is an important station of the Roman Catholic Mission. 23° 08' S.,
1 34° 55' 3o" w. 22.
Mango (Mago), Fiji, is 18 m. nne. from Thithia, 3X2 m., and 670 ft. high ; water only
from wells. It is the property of English colonists. 170 27' 3o"s., 1800 53'3o"e.O
Mangorongoro, see Tongareva or Peurhyn.
Mangrove, low island of Fiji. 17 50" 30” s., 177° 21 E.©
Mangs or Manjas, see Urracas of the Marianas.
Manicolo, a name of Vanikoro, New Hebrides. 12.
[180]
97
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Matlihi, of the Paumotu archipelago, is the Waterlandt of Lemaire and Seliouten,
1616; 13 m. NE-SW. Inhabitants make curiously elaborate eances. The east end
is in 14 24' S., 145° 52' w. 21.
Manihiki, see Monahiki. 19.
Matlim, islet of Jobi, New Guinea.
Manitna, islet of Tongatabu.
Matioba or Elisabeth, a thickly wooded island off the northeast point of Malaita,
Solomon islands. 8° 20 s., 160° 43' E.
Manono, of the Samoan islands, is on the reef of Upoln. It has a surface of 3.3 sq. m.;
500 ft. high. i3°5c/s., 1 72° oF E. Formerly the political centre of the feudal aristo¬
crat; at present a sort of naval dockyard where a large double war-canoe is kept. 15.
Manor, of the Schouten islands. o° 50' s., 136° E.
Manose, one of the Hermit islands. i° 34' S., 144° 55' E. 8.
Mantapeiti (leeward) and Mantapeitak (windward), islets of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Manton, see Mokil, Caroline islands.
Manua, of the American part of the Samoan group, covers 20 sq. m. and rises to a height
of 2500 ft. 14° 15 s., 169 26'30,/W.O The traditionary cradle of the Samoan race.
Manuae, a barren islet on the same reef with Anotu ; few inhabitants. Discovered
by Cook in 1773. Hervey group. 23.
Manuatha, off the north coast of Viti levu, Fiji; 400 ft. high.
Manubada, islet off Port Moresby on the south coast of New Guinea. 9 32 S., 147 10' E.
Manuhangi or Cumberland, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by Wallis
in 1767. It is low but inhabited. The west end is in 19 12Y., 141° ig'oC'w. 21.
Manui, islet of Mangareva.
Manumanu, at the mouth of the Vanapa river in Redscar bay, New Guinea. 9° op's.,
I46°.54' K>
Maora, islet on the east reef of Huaheine, Society islands.
Maoraha, islet of San Cristoval, Solomon islands.
Map, islet on northern side of Yap, Caroline islands.
MapaS, islet on the south coast of Murua, Kiriwina group. 9° 09' S., 152° 45' E.
Mapeti, in Aifa pass on the coast of Tahiti, Society islands. 20.
Mapia, see Pegan.
Mara, islet in Muendo bay on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Maragili, a name of Kosmann islet in the Louisiade archipelago.
Marai with Taliwewai forms Stuers islets; low, wooded, in the Louisiade archipelago.
Maraki or Matthew, of the Gilbert islands, was discovered by Captains Marshall and
Gilbert in 1788; 5X2.5 m., the lagoon shores almost entirely covered with vegeta¬
tion. Population was 1900 in 1886. 2 N., 173° 25' E. 7.
Maramasiki is southeast of Malaita, Solomon islands. 90 32' S., 16T 25' E.O
Marambo, a small, wooded island 7 m. E. by N. from the south point of Kambara,
Fiji; 160 ft. high.
Marceau, islet in Arembo bay on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Marchand, see Nukuhiva of the Marquesas islands. 23.
Marcken, incorrectly on the charts as Marqueen, was named by Lemaire from a sup¬
posed resemblance to the island of that name in the Zuyder Zee. Captain Mort-
[181]
Mf.moihs B. P. B. Museum, Voi.. I., No. 2.-7.
9S
INDEX TO THE FACIEI C ISLANDS.
lock saw this group in 1795. It is supposed to be the Cocos of Wilkinson, 1790,
and it has been called Massacre because here a crew was cut off in 1830. There are
13 low, coral islands on a reef 10 m. in diameter. The south islet is the largest
and inhabited. 4 45' S., 157° E.
Marcus, barren island in 23 io' N., 154° E. Seized by Japan in 1899 in anticipation
of a cable station.
Mare or Nengone, the Britannia of Burroughs (1842), was discovered by D’Urville
June 15, 1827. It is the principal island of the Loyalty group, and has a popula¬
tion of about 2000. The northeast point is in 21 29' 30" S., 168° 06' E.
Maretiri, see Bass islands.
Margaret, an inhabited island near Sideia on the southeast coast of New Guinea;
1.5 in. E-w., 0.5 m. n-s.; 500 ft. high. io° 41' s., 150" 54' E.
Margaret, a name given to Nukutipipi by Turnbull from his ship Margaret.
Margaretta, see Namo of the Marshall islands.
Margaritana (La), an island discovered by Quiros April 26, 1606, 12 leagues from
the San Marcos of de Leza. Perhaps one of the Banks islands. 130 S.
Maria, see Moerenhout of the Paumotu archipelago. 2,2,.
Maria, an island on the east coast of Tasmania, 2750 ft. high, was a government re¬
serve for the last of the Tasmanians. 42 40' S., 148° E.
Maria, see Peru or Francis of the Gilbert islands. 7.
Marianas or Ladrone. Although Magalhaes first discovered this group March 6,
1521, his name “Islas de las velas latinas” was soon superseded by that of Ladrones;
and in 1668 they were officially named Marianas in honor of Maria Anna of Aus¬
tria, widow of Philip IV. of Spain. The islands of the group arranged from south
to north are as follows :
Names.
Extent.
H EIGHT.
Population.
Latitude
North.
Longitude
Last.
Guam .
29 III. Ions'.
650
7000
18° 14' 00"
144° 44' 00''
Rota, Zarpane, Luta .
Asuijan .
Tinian, Bona Vista .
12 by 5.5.
3 by 2.
800
14 OS
14 58 80
145 10
145 30
10 b.v 4.5.
2C0
14 51) 22
145 36 20
Saipan, Se.vpan .
Earallon de Medinilla .
14 m. long.
2 in. long.
1 COO
50
700
15 OS 80
15 21) 20
145 44
146
Anatajan .
Sariguan .
Farallon de Torres, Zelandia .
Guguan .
5 by 1 .5.
1.5 m. diameter.
2.5 by 1.
High.
16 20
16 41
16 51
17 16 50
145 40
145 47
145 50
145 50 15
Almagan .
2.2 by 1.5.
2816
17 84
145 51
Pagan, Pagon .
s b.v 2.5.
000
IS C7
145 52
Agrigan, Grigan .
6 by 2.5.
IS DO
IS 46 20
145 41 45
Asuncion .
Urracas .
1 m. diameter.
2.5 m. diameter.
2H4S
19 45
20 06 85
145 29
145 20
P’arallon de P ajar os, Guy .
1 .2 in. diameter.
1 089
20 88
144 4S 80
The primitive Chamorros have left memorials in remarkable stone columns on
Tinian and Guam. These are, according to Lieutenant Mortimer, 5 ft. 4 in. broad
at the base, 14 ft. high, and surmounted by hemispheres of stone 5 ft. 10 in. in
diameter. As the group is situated at about the place where the northeast trades
cease and the monsoons meet the rainfall is almost continuous, and atmospheric
disturbances attain to the force of hurricanes. Earthquakes, as might be expedited
in a country wholly volcanic, are common though not very severe. At the present
writing it is understood that Spain has sold the group to Germany since the acqui¬
sition of Guam by the United States at the end of the Spanish-American war.
[182]
INDEX TO I HE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Mariere or Pulo Mariere, also called Warren Hastings,
was discovered by Captain Hutchinson September,
1761. It is 2 m. N-S. by 1 m. E-w., and inhabited.
5 45 S., 132 28 e.
Marina, a name of Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides, used by the
Banks islanders. In Maewo and Oba it is called Marino.
Marion, see Tupua of the Society islands.
Marire, islet of Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
Markham, see Bagiagia, a reef island in Moresby strait.
Maro reef was discovered by Captain Allen of the Ameri¬
can whaler Malo in 1820. About 35 m. in circumfer¬
ence; no land ; breakers only. Northwest point is in
25" 31' N-> I7°° 37' 33" w.
Marokau, Dawhaida or Ravahere was discovered by Cap¬
tain Cook in 1773. There is great uncertainty about
this group, not as to its existence, but whether there
are not two distinct reefs, besides the neighboring one
of Manaka. I have followed the charts, but the sailing
directions contradict these and there is no competent
exploration to determine. North point is in 170 55' S.,
142° 17' w.
Maronil, islets in Uailu passage on the northeast side of
New Caledonia.
Maroupo, a name of Angatau of the Paumotu archipel'ago.
Marovo, New Georgia or Rubiana, of the Solomon islands,
consists of three principal islands and many islets, -all
of recent volcanic origin, some rising to a height of
2500 ft. Inhabitants are dark, sturdy cannibals. The
northeast point is in 7 57' s., 157^ 31' E.
Marqueen of the charts should be Marcken as named b}'
Lemaire.
Marquesas, Les Marquises, were discovered July 21, 1595,
by Mendana so far as the southeast group is con¬
cerned. The northern group by Marchand in 1791,
and by Ingraham about the same time. They were
named in memory of Don Garcia Hurtado de Mendoza,
Marques de Canete, Viceroy of Peru and patron of
Mendana’s second voyage. They were taken by France
in 1842. The native inhabitants have diminished from
the supposed number of 75,000 to less than 3500.
They were of beautiful form, finely tatued, and hun¬
gry cannibals. Now they are perishing with leprosy,
syphilis and other evils. Devoted Hawaiian mission¬
aries have labored with them for forty years. The
islands of the group may be tabulated as follows:
[183]
99
Pajaros
Urracas
Asuncion 0
MARIANAS
Agrigan ^
Pagan q
Almagan
Cuguan
Torres
0
OR
Sariguan
Anatajan
MediniUa
Saipan
^ W
Tinian
Aguijan Q
LADRONE
FIG. 6.
IOO
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
MARQUESAS ISLANDS.
Native Name.
Chart Name.
Discoverer.
Extent in
miles.
Height in
feet.
Latitude
South.
Longitude
West.
Washington Group:
Hatutu .
Fatuuhu, H nil rock.
Chanal.
Langdon.
Nexsen.
Ingraham, 17!*1 .
Marchand, 17111.
Roberts, 1793.
Fanning, 1793.
4 by 1 .
1380
7° 57' 00"
140° 34' 00"
Eiao .
Hiau.
Knox.
Freemantle.
Roberta.
New York.
Marchand, 1791.
Ingraham, 1791.
Robert's, 1793.
Hergest, 1792.
Fanning, 1798.
6 b.v 3.
2000
8 02
140 49
Motuiti .
Franklin.
Blake.
Hergest, Two Brothers.
Ingraham, 17(.)1 .
Roberts, 179:$.
Rock.
720
8 43
140 37
Nnkuhiva .
Federal .
Sir Henr.v Martin,
lie Banx.
Adams.
Ingraham, 1791.
Hergest, 1792.
Marchand, 1791 .
Roberts, 1793.
14 b.v HI.
4001) ?
8 54 03
140 08 40
Huahuna .
Washington.
Massachusetts.
Riou.
Ouahouka, Roahouga.
Ingraham, 1791.
Roberts, 1793.
Hergest, 1792.
7.5 by 5.
2430
8 55
139 34
Huapu .
Adams.
Washington.
Marchand.
Ouapou, Roapoua.
Ingraham, 1791.
Roberts, 1793.
9 by 5.
4042
9 24
140 05
Mendana Group:
Fatuhuku .
Hood.
Fatou-houkou.
Fetuku.
Cook, 1774.
Rock.
1180
9 28
138 50
Hivaoa .
La Dominica.
Ohiva-Hoa.
Mendana, 1595.
D’Urville.
22 by 6.
12X0
2820
9 47
138 47
Tahuata .
Santa Cristina.
Mendana, 1595.
8.6 by 4.
3280
9 53
139* (Mi
Motane .
San Pedro.
Mohotane.
Mendana, 1595.
5 by 2.
1640
10 00
138 5ft
Fatiihiva .
Santa Magdalina.
Mendana, 1595.
8 by 4.
3875
10 24
138 4 0
Marsh, see Makaroa, islet of Mangareva.
Marshall, see Tarawa, of the Gilbert group.
MARSHALL ISLANDS.
Native Name.
Chart Name.
Number of
Islets.
Discoverer.
liatack Group:
Knox .
10
Mille .
Mulgra ve.
' Captain Marshall, 1788.
Arno .
Daniel, Pedder.
Marshall & Gilbert.
Maju ro .
Arrowsmith.
33
Marshall & Gilbert.
Aurh .
Ibetson, Traversey.
32
Kotzebue.
Maloelab .
Calvert, Kaven, Araktcheeff.
64
Erikub .
Bishop Junction, Egerup.
Wotje .
Romanzow.
65
Likieb .
Count Heiden, Legiep.
44
Kotzebue, 1817.
Jemu .
Temo, Steep-to.
i
Ailko .
Tindai, Watts.
Miadi .
Medjit, New Year.
Kotzebue, 1817.
Taka .
Suvarov.
Utirik .
Kutuwov, Button.
Bikar .
Dawson.
3
Taongi . . .
Sin.yth, Gaspar Rico.
Kaliek Group (West):
Ebon .
Boston, Covell.
21
G. Ray, 1824.
Naraorik .
Baring.
3
Captain Bond, 1792.
Kill .
Hunter.
1
Captain Dennet.
Jalult .
Bonham.
5(1
Ailinglap .
Odia, Elmore, Helut.
21
Jabwat .
1
Nemu .
Namu, Musquilio,
Captain Bond, 1792.
Tebut, Princessa.
i
lljae .
Katherine.
Lae .
Brown.
14
Captain Brown, 1858.
Kwadjalin .
Menschikoff.
Wotto . . .
Shanz.
Captain Shanz, 1835.
Ailinginae .
Rongelap .
Pescadore.
Captain Wallis, 1767.
Rongerik .
Rimski- Korsakoff. Radokala.
48
Kotzebue, 1817.
Bikini . .
Eschscholtz.
10
Eniwetok .
Brown.
40
Captain T. Butler, 1794.
Ujelong .
Arecifos, Providence, Casobos.
13
[ 1 84]
INDEX TO THE PA C/E/C ISLANDS.
IOI
Marshall Islands, an extensive group between the Caroline and Gilbert islands,
probably visited by Alvaro de Saavedra in 1529. Captain Wallis, in 1767, was
at Rongerik, and in 1788 Captains Marshall and Gilbert explored this group
more thoroughly than any previous navigators. In February, 1886, Germany
annexed the group and has since endeavored to colonize it, but without much
success.
Marshall Bennett, three small, high, uninhabited islands discovered by Captain
Hunter of the Marshall Bennett in 1836. 8° 49' S., 151° 56' E.
Martin, on the northeast coast of Bougainville, Solomon islands. 6° n's., 155° 35' E.
Martin, see Nganati of the Paumotu archipelago.
Martin de Mayorga, name given by Maurelle in 1781 to the Tongan group.
Marua or Maupiti of the Society islands. It is 6 m. in circumference and surrounded
by a reef on which are several palm-covered islets; volcanic, 800 ft. high. Popu¬
lation, 300. 16 26' S., 152° 1 2 w.O 20.
Marutea or Lord Hood, in the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered in 1791 by Cap¬
tain Edwards in H. M. S. Pandora. The atoll extends n m. E-w., and 7 m. n-S.,
It is uninhabited and the lagoon is closed. 21° 3F S., 135° 38' w. 2,2,.
Marutea or Furneaux, a low, inhabited atoll discovered by Cook in 1773. West end
in i6° 54' S., 143° 20' w.
Mary Balcout of Wilkes is Canton in the Phoenix group.
Mas-a-fuera is 92 m. west from Juan Fernandez, 8 m. N-S., 5 111. E-w., 4000 ft. high.
33° 46' s., 8o° 46' w.
Masamasa is 575 ft. high, in Bougainville strait, Solomon islands. 6 47' S., 156° 09' E.
Mas-a-tierra, a name of Juan Fernandez.
Maskelyne, group of low islands, thickly peopled, off the southeast coast of Malekula,
New Hebrides. Sakau is the largest; others are Kolivia and Kiwyo.
Masmapi, islet in Dorei bay on the north coast of New Guinea.
Massachusetts of Roberts is Huahuna of the Marquesas islands.
Massacre, a name given to Marcken of Lemaire.
MaSSaramcoer or Bramble Cay, a sandbank 10 ft. high at the northeast boundary of
Queensland Colony. 9° 07' 50" S., 143° 52' icC E.
Masse of Roberts is Eiao of the Marquesas islands.
Matador, of the Caroline islands was discovered in 1876. It consists of 15 islets on
an atoll, some of them inhabited. 1 30' n., 1570 05' E.
Matahiva or Lazareff, of the Paumotu archipelago, a low, wooded island discovered
by Bellingshausen in 1820. West end is in 14° 53' 30” S., 148® 43' 30" w.
Mataiwa, a form of Matahiva.
Mata kawa, of the Talbot group is opposite the mouth of the Wassi kussa river of
New Guinea. g° 16' S., 142° 12' E.
Matamanoa, uninhabited islet of the Mamanutha i thake group, Fiji.
Matangi, islet of Fakaafo or Bowditeh. 90 22' S., 1 7 1 12' w.
Matangi, a small, unhabited island, 1 m. long, crescent-shape. Fiji.
Matamuku, islet south of Kandavu, Fiji; 700 ft. high. 19° 10' 20" S., 178" 06' 40" E.
Mataou or East Sentinel, islet at entrance to Comptroller bay, Nukuhiva, Marquesas
islands.
[185]
102
INDEX TO THE PA C/E/C ISLANDS.
Mataso or Two Hill of the New Hebrides, is about 19 m. north from Nguna; 1650
ft. high. Natives friendly. Mission station. 17’ 18 S., 168° 23 E.
Matathoni levu, of Yasawa group, Fiji, 2 m. x-s. North point in 16' 57 S., 178° 18 45 E.
Matelotas, see Ngoli of the Caroline islands.
Matema, Swallow or Reef, comprise Lomlom, Nufiluli, Pileni, Nukapu, Anologo,
Nibanga, Panavi, Nupani, Fenuloa. The group lies between io°04-io 22 S.,
16T 39 -166 19 E. British protectorate proclaimed August 18, 1898. 12.
Materbert, small, rocky, off Gazelle peninsula of New Britain, Bismarck archipelago.
Materhert, of the Bismarck archipelago, is 0.2 m. long. 4“ 17 S., 15 i° 32 E.
Matthias, a mountainous and wooded islet
northwest from New Hanover. 132 s.
Mathieu, islet of Malolo group, Fiji.
Mathuata ( Macuata ) , off north coast of Ma¬
nila levu, Fiji; 1.5 m.long, 500ft. highi-
Matilda, see Mururoa of the Paumotu archi¬
pelago. 22.
Matin, islet of Marovo or New Georgia,
Solomon islands. 8 25" S., 158' 05" E.
Mato, islet 5 m. south from Uen island.
Matthew, discovered by Captain Gilbert
in 1788; 465 ft. high. 22' 20' 12” S.,
17 1' 20 30” E.
Matthew, islet in Uitoe passage on the
southwest side of New Caledonia.
Matthew, a basaltic cone southeast from
New Caledonia.
Matthew, see Maraki of the Gilbert islands.
Mattinson, see Sophia of the Ellice group
(existence uncertain).
Matty, or Matv, was discovered by Carteret September 19, 1767, and named for his
friend Dr. Maty. It is 6 m. square, flat, and thickly peopled by a fine light col¬
ored race of uncertain relationship. Their implements are peculiar and exceed-
inglv interesting. 1 45" s., 142' 47' E. Probablv this is Tiger of the charts. 8.
Mat'll avi, one of the Stewart group. 8^ 23' S., 162° 58' E.
Matukanaputa, small and rocky island off Gazelle peninsula of New Britain; 60 ft.
high. 4C 13' s., 15F 32' E.
Mattlku, in Fiji, is a good example of a high ( 1262 ft.) island with a fringing reef.
The map is copied from the survey given in the Challenger Report. Matuku is
4.5 m. x-s. Carr’s harbor on the west side is the best in the group. The volcanic
peaks add great beauty to the scenery. The south point is in 19° 13' 30" S.,
179' 44' E. Population in 1880 was 712.
Matllpi, a small volcanic island in Blanche hay, New Britain. 40 13' S., 152° io' E.
Maturei Vavao or Estancelin of the Paumotu archipelago, is the southeastern of the
Adlason group. It is 6 m. xw-SE. Northwest point is in 2ic 27" S., 136 28AV. 22.
[186]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
103
Maty was discovered by Carteret September 19, 1767, and named for his friend Dr.
Maty. It is 6 m. square, flat and thickly peopled by a fine light colored race of
uncertain relationship. Their implements are peculiar and exceedingly interest¬
ing. 1 45' s., 142° 47' E. Probabl}' this is Tiger of the charts. 8.
Mau, Hinchinbrook or Vele of the New Hebrides, is a volcanic cone 2 m. in diameter,
and 1493 ft. high. The crater is filled with vegetation. Natives peaceable.
Maui, of the Hawaiian group, is the second in size, measuring 466,000 acres. It is
43 m. long, divided by a low isthmus into Hast and West Maui. The former is the
grand cone (10,032 ft. high) capped by the crater of Haleakala, which is more
than 2000 ft. deep and 20 m. in circuit. The latter, also an ancient volcano, is
lower (5820 ft.) and its flanks are deeply cut into picturesque valleys. Popula¬
tion in 1896 was 17,726. The north side of the isthmus is in 20° 54' 15" N.,
156° 29' w. I.
Mauiki, of the Hervey group, is about 6 m. in circumference, fertile, has no lagoon
nor any opening in the fringing reef. 20" 07' S., 157" 22' w. 23.
Maupiti, see Mama of the Society islands.
Mausoleum, a sugar-loaf-shaped hill 650 ft. high, between New Ireland and New
Hanover in the Bismarck archipelago. 2 ’ 44" S., 150° 32" E.
Mauti of Byron is Mauiki of the Hervey group.
Mavuva, islet of Mathuata on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Mawtu, islet of Fakaafo or Bowditeh. 90 25" 30" S., 17 1 12' 30" w.
May, see Yakuve, Fiji. 180 51' 45" s., 178° 27" E.O
Mayon, see Marua or Woodlark.
Mayor, see Tuhoua, New Zealand.
Mba, islet of Uitoe passage, southwest side of New Caledonia.
Mbatiki (Batiki), Fiji, near the centre of the group, is 2 m. in diameter and 609 ft.
high. Population in 1880, 342. 17° 46" S., 179 10 E.
Mbau (Bau), Fiji, small island east from Viti levu, 80 ft. high. 170 59" 16" s.,
no f rr ^
1 78 39 20 E.
Mbe, islet in Port Uitoe, southwest side of New Caledonia.
Mbenau, islet on the south coast of Vanua levu, Fiji, 100 yds. in diameter, covered
with palms.
Mbenga (Beqa), is 5X3 ni. and rises to 1400 ft. 1 8J 22' 15" S., 178° 07' 30" E.
Mboa, islet in Uitoe passage on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Mbu, islet in Port Uitoe, on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Mbua, islet 35 ft. high on the shore reef at the southeast end of Nananu i thake, Fiji.
Mbuitnbani, a conical island 430 ft. high in Nanuku passage, Fiji; planted with
coconut trees.
Mbulia (Bulia), 460 ft. high, inhabited, in Kandavu group, Fiji. i8°46's., 178° 33V.
Mbulo, a small island off Cape Pitt of Marovo, Solomon islands; about 800 ft. high.
8° 45' S., 158° 15' K.
McAskill, see Tugulu; also Pingelap.
McKean, of the Phoenix group, was discovered by Wilkes in 1840. It is low,
0.7X0.5 m. 30 36' s., 174' 1 6' w.O 1 7.
Meaburn, islet of Caroline islands.
[187]
ic>4
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Meama, islet of the Tongan group.
Meek, islet of Kwadjalin, Marshall islands.
Medjit, see Miadi of the Marshall islands. 6.
Mednro, see Majuro of the Marshall islands.
Mefur, a low, uninhabited island io m. long on the north coast of New Guinea.
Mehetia, a form of Maitea of the Society islands. 20.
Meiwa, islet east from Yeina in the Lonisiade archipelago. u° 22 S., 153° 30' E.
Mej, islet on the west coast of Ebon, Marshall islands. 40 30" N., i68J 41 30 E.
Mekinley, in China strait, 200 ft. high. io° 33' S., 150° 43' 35" E.
Mekundranga, a low island 1.2X0.2 m. Fiji. 170 24' 16" s., 178° 58' 50" e.O
Melbourne, see Tenarunga, Paumotu archipelago. 21° 22' S., 136' 34' w.
Meli, a low, inhabited islet of Fate, New Hebrides.
Mellittl, islet on the southeast coast of Marua of the Trobriand group. 90 09' S.,
152° 57' E-
Mellu, islets of Kwadjalin of the Marshall islands.
Melville, see Hikueru of the Paumotn archipelago. 21.
Metlde, islet on the east side of Willaumez peninsula, New Britain.
Mentschikow, see Kwadjalin, Marshall islands.
Menu (La), islet of Tasiko, New Hebrides.
Meoko, better Mioko, inhabited islet of the Duke of York group, New Ireland.
Meosnum, in Geelvink bay on the north coast of New Guinea; 12-14 m. long, 1 m.
wide. i° 29' S., 1 35° 14' E.
Mer or Murray, with Dauer and Waier within one reef. Inhabitants Papuan. 9°54's.,
144° 02' E.
Meralaba, see Merlav of the New Hebrides.
Merat, 3-4 in. in circumference, on the New Guinea coast.
Mercury or D’Haussez, on the coast of New Zealand. 36° 40' s., 175° 45' E.
Merig or St. Claire, is between Merlav and Gana of the Banks islands ; 200 ft. high.
Population, 15-20. 14° iy' S., 167° 50' E.
Merite, of the French islands, Bismarck archipelago, is about 5 m. E-w by 4 m., and
2150 ft. high; near New Britain. 40 56' S., 149° oy' E.
Merlav, Meralaba or Star Peak of the New Hebrides, is 2900 ft. high. Population
about 700. A Mission station. 140 29' S., 167° 59' E.
Messum, a raised coral island of the Lonisiade archipelago.
Meta, islet on the north coast of New Guinea, which with Gressien forms Dallmann
harbor.
Metia, see Makatea, Paumotn archipelago. 20.
Metis, of the Tongan group, was first noticed in 1875 by Metis 75 m. from Falcon
island. It was 29 ft. high; after an eruption it rose to 150 ft.; now a shoal bank.
19° I I s., 1740 49' w.
Metoma, between Middle and North of the Torres group, is about 450 ft. high.
1.5 X 0.7 m.
Mewadi, islet north from Duan, D’Entrecasteaux group. 90 5c/ S., 150° 55' E.
Mewstone, see Moturina of the Lonisiade archipelago.
Meyer, off the east coast of Raoul, Kermadec islands.
[188]
Gent* Hermosa
0
170
W.
15°S.
MANUA GROUP
Ofu^ .^Olosenga
S3 Tau
Rosa
o
SAMOAN ISLANDS
Nine
o
170
W.
'
INDEX TO THE PACIE/C ISLANDS.
105
Miadi, Medjit or New Year of the Marshall islands, was discovered by Kotzebue,
January 1, 1817. The atoll is 3 m. n-s., and 0.7 m. wide. io° 17' 30'^., i70°55'e.
Mibu, low, wooded, n 111. in circumference, at the mouth of Fly river, separated by a
narrow creek from the mainland. S' 43" s., 143° 23" K.
Michaelov, see Tuvana i ra, Fiji.
Middle, see Tegua in China strait.
Middleburgh, on the New Guinea coast, o 24 S., 132° io' E.
Middleburgh, a name given by Tasman in 1643 to Eua of the Tongan islands.
Midge, see Abaura, New Guinea.
Midway, of the Hawaiian group, was discovered by Captain Brooks of the Gambia in
1859. He took possession for the United States. It was surveyed by Captain
W. Reynolds (afterwards Admiral ) in U. S. S. Lackazuanna in 1867. Reef is 18 m.
in circumference, with an entrance to the lagoon on the west. There are two islets,
Eastern and Sand. 28 12' 22" N., 177 22" 20" w. It has (1900) been carefully
resurveyed by the officers and men of the U. S. Iroquois , and many soundings
were made to facilitate its use as a cable station.
Mille or Mulgrave, of the Marshall islands, is a chain of atolls 30 m. long; discovered
by Captain Marshall in 1788. The southwest point is in 6 09' N., 17 1 30" E.
Mills, one of the Tiri islands off Vanua leva, Fiji.
Milne, off southeast coast of Raoul, Kermadec islands.
Miloradowitch, a name given by Bellingshausen in 1819 to Faaite of the Paumotu
archipelago.
Minerva, see Pitkahuha, Paumotu archipelago.
Miniminiahura is north of Saibai, New Guinea. 9° 17' S., 142 ' 45' E.
Minto, see Tenarunga of the Adtseon group.
Mioko or Meoko, is an inhabited islet of the Duke of York group in the Bismarck
archipelago, where the German protectorate was proclaimed November 3, 1884.
o / o
4 13 S., 152 28 E.
Mioskaroar, small, low, thickly wooded, on north coast of New Guinea. oJi8\s., 135 03T.
Misima or St. Aignan of the Louisiade archipelago, is 21.5 m. E-w., 3-4 m. N-S., and
3500E: ft. high. Population, in 1890, 3000; a mixture of Malay and Papuan
stock; head-hunters, who have many canoes. Alluvial gold has been found.
West cape io‘ 38' s., 152 31 E. 9.
Misool is 50 111. north from Ceram; 50X20 111., mountainous and wooded. Interior
people are Papuan, 011 the coast much mixed with Malay. Subject to Sultan of
Tidore. 2° S., i30J E.
Misore or Mysore, see Schouteu islands.
Mitchell, a name of Nukulaelae of the Ellice group. 16.
Mitiero or Mitiaro, of the Hervey group, is 10 111. in circumference, very barren; deep
lagoon with 110 opening in the surrounding reef. Population about 275. I9<i49/S.,
157° 43' w.
Mitre, see Fataka in u° 55' S., 170° io' E.
Moai, islet of Ifalik, Caroline islands. 3.
Moala, high, volcanic island of Fiji; 5X7 m., and 1535 ft. high. Population about
600. South point is in 180 4F S., 179° ^ E.
Li 89]
io6
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Moali, Muli or Badeneu, islet southwest of Uea, Loyalty islands. There is only a
boat passage between Moali and Uea.
Modu manu (for Moku manu ), old spelling of the Hawaiian name of Nihoa or Bird
island.
Moe, islet of Pavuvn, Solomon islands.
Moller, see Amanu of the Paumotn archipelago.
Moller, see Laysan, Hawaiian islands. 2.
Moerenhout or Maria, of the Panmotn archipelago, was discovered by Mr. Ebrill of
the Ampliitrite in 1832. A lagoon in centre. 21 53' S., 136" 20 w.© 22.
Mofia, on the north coast of New Guinea; half a mile N-S., 200 ft. high. o° 28' S,,
I35° I3' E'
Mogmog, islet of Uluthi, Caroline islands. 10 oC n., 139° 45' 30" E.
Mogogha, islet off the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Moka, islet of Kia, Fiji.
Mokaluva, islet at the entrance to Port Nukulau on the southeast coast of Viti levu,
Fiji.
Mokil or Duperrey or Wellington is 90 m. east from Ponape, Caroline islands. It was
discovered June 18, 1824, by Duperrey. The reef is 3 m. in diameter and has
three islets, Mokil, Aoura and Ongai (According to others the names are Ur-ak,
Manton and Kalap). About 175 inhabitants. South end is in 6° 39' n., 159° 53' E.
Moko, islet of Pavnvn of the Russell group, Solomon islands. 9" 04' S., 159° oy' E.
Mokomok (Arrowroot), chief place of Uluthi or Mackenzie group, Caroline islands.
Mokor, Caroline islands, a name in Dr. L. H. Gulick’s list, in 5 41' n., 152° 40 E.
Said not to exist.
Mokuhootliki, islet 198 ft. high, off east end of Molokai, Hawaiian group. 2i°07'40// n.,
so / rr
156 42 20 W.
Mokulii, islet off north coast of Oahu, Hawaiian group.
Mokutlgai, 10 m. from Ovalau, Fiji; 3 m. N-S., 1.5 m. E-w. The north point is in
0 ' str _ o r .
17 24 16 S., 179 Ol E.
Molahau, in Bismarck archipelago. 30 14' s., 152° 28' E.
Molard, see Ndundine, Loyalty islands.
Mole, islet 0.7 m. long, in Purdy islands. 2° 52' S., 146 18' E. 8.
Molokai, of the Hawaiian islands, is a long, high island, 4958 ft. high, and covering
167,000 acres. Population, 2307. O11 the middle of the north side a tongue runs
northward from the base of high precipices, and here, walled by nature from the
rest of the island, is the Government leper establishment. The east end is in
2i° 09' 18' n., 156° 42' 45" w.; the west end in 21 05' 50" n., 15 y° r8' 45" w.. I.
Molokitli, of the Hawaiian islands, is a small, extinct crater in the channel between
Maui and Kahoolawe. Uninhabited.
Monagim or Monagun, islet east of Misima, Louisiade archipelago. io° 42' S.,
U3° 5/ E.
Monahiki or Humphrey was discovered by Captain Patriekson in the Good Hope ,
1822. British protedlorate declared August 9, 1889. It is a closed lagoon reef
of triangular form with the apex to the north ; 6X5 m. io° 2 o' 30” S., ibUoF 15" w.
Population, 400-500. 19.
[190]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
107
Motldriki, uninhabited islet of Mamanutha i eaki group, Fiji.
Money, islet of Pavuvu, Solomon islands.
Monges (Monjes), see Anacoretas.
Mono or Treasury is about 25 m. south from Bougainville of the Solomon islands;
6.5 m. E-w., 4 m. n-s.; 1165 ft. high. 70 21 s., 155° 32' E.
Monofe, of the Hermit islands. T 29' S., 144° 59' E. 8.
Montague, see Muna, New Hebrides.
Montemont, two islands, la taui and Pana bobo, in the Louisiade archipelago.
O ry/ O
II 18 S., 152 18 E.
Monteverde, see Nukuor of the Caroline islands. Discovered by Juan B. Monteverde
in 1806.
Montgomery, Solomon islands, is about 15 m. E. by s.-w. by N.; uninhabited. 8°43's.,
1570 29 E.
Montravel is I m. e-w. at the west entrance to Praslin bay, New Caledonia. Named
for Captain Tardy de Montravel.
Monu, uninhabited islet of Mamanutha i eaki group, Fiji.
Monuafe, islet of Tongatabu, opposite the entrance to harbor. 21 06' S., 175° 07' w.
Mooa, islet on the New Guinea coast.
Moore, see Kayangle of the Pelew islands.
Moorea or Eimeo of the Society islands, rises in Oroo peak to 4045 ft. The south
end is in 17 34' 15" s., 150° 00' 30" w. 20.
Mopelia, see Mopeha of the Society islands. 20.
Mopeha, Lord Howe, Maura and Mobidie (of Turnbull), in the Society group, was
discovered by Wallis in 1767; 10 m. N-S., 4 m. E-W. 16° 52" S., 154 w. approx.
Mor, 5 m. from Kutu, Caroline islands; 300 inhabitants.
Moramba, Fiji, 0.5 111. in diameter, is well wooded. 18 56' 30" S., 181 09 E.O
Morane or Cadmus, in the Paumotu archipelago, is a closed lagoon reef with three
inhabited islets; 5 m. by 2.5 m. 23° 08' S., 137° 20 w.O 22.
Morata, the name of a district of Dauila, D’Entrecasteaux group, often applied to the
island.
Moratau or Fergusson, of the D’Entrecasteaux group, is 30 m. E-w. by 24 m. N-S.
Mt. Kilkerran is 5000 ft. high. The island is cultivated and populous. 9.
Moresby, see Basilaki.
Moreton, off Moreton bay, Queensland; 20X5 ni. North point is in 27°o6/S., 153° i6'e.
Moretiga, islet on the northwest coast of Isle of Pines.
Morgusaia, islet Oil the south coast of Shortland, Solomon islands. 7 07 s., i55u46' E.
Morileu or Hall, discovered in 1824 by English Captain Hall. The group consists
of Morileu, Rua, Namorousse and six islets. Population about 100. 8 41' N.,
T52° 2S E. 4-
Morilug, coast of Australia. io° 39' s., 142° 39" E.
Morning Star, see Udjelong of the Marshall islands.
Morningtotl or Wellesley, a group in the Gulf of Carpentaria. Seen by Tasman in
1644, but supposed to be part of the mainland. Named for Lord Mornington,
afterward Marquis of Wellesley.
Moro, islet in Kuto bay, Isle of Pines.
[191]
io8
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Morrell, reported by Captain Morrell in 1825 as of 29° 57' n., 1740 31' E.; but its exist¬
ence is doubtful, as it has not been seen for many years. Now expunged from
Admiralty charts (1900).
Mortlock, a group of the Caroline islands discovered by Captain James Mortlock
November 29, 1793. Consists of Lukunor, Satoan, Ktal. Three long groups and
nine islets; in all, 98 islands. 4.
Mortlock, see Marcken.
Moseley, islet in Nares harbor, Admiralty island. Named for Henry N. Moseley, of
the Challenger expedition.
MOSO, Deception or Verao, on the northwest side of Havannah harbor, Fate, New
Hebrides. There are several villages on the island, of which Moso is one. Verao
means long.
Mosquito, a group on the north shore of Goodenough bay on the northeast coast of
New Guinea. 90 46' S., 149° 53' E.
Mota, New Hebrides, was discovered by Quiros in 1606 and called Nostra (nuestra)
Sehora de la Luz. Bligh called it Sugar-loaf. There are two wooded peaks about
1250 ft. high. Forty-two villages contain 2000 inhabitants, according to French
authority. 13° 48' S., 167° 4c/ E. 12.
Motatie or San Pedro, of the Marquesas islands, was discovered by Mendana July 21,
1595. Tessan calls it O-nateaya. 4.5 m. nnw-SSE; 1565 ft. high, sterile and un¬
inhabited. IO° s., 138° 50' w. 23.
Motea, islet at entrance to Hamene bay, Tahaa, Society islands.
Mothe (Moce), Fiji. Wilkes calls it Motha. 2.2 m. in diameter, 590 ft. high; soil
rich, island picturesque ; inhabited. i8~ 36' 30" S., 1ST 26' E.©
Motuhanua, islet to the eastward of Port Moresby, south coast of New Guinea.
o / _ o w n .
9 32 S., 147 16 30 E.
Motua, islet off the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Motuagea, islet of Fakaafo or Bowditeh. 9° 22' 38" S., 171° 13' w.
Motuailli, islet ill Styx passage, Loyalty islands.
Motuiti, islet of Fakaafo. 90 22' 45" S., 171 13' w.
Motuiti (little island) or Franklin, sterile islet of the Marquesas. 8° 43rS., 140° 37' w.
Motuiti or Kennedy, New Hebrides, was discovered by Captain Simpson in the
Nautilus in 1801. Little is known of it. 8° 36' s., 167° 48' E.
Motuiti, see Tubai, Society islands. 20.
MotU Korea, in Auckland harbor, New Zealand.
Motukavata, one of the Danger group; long, 125 ft. high, uninhabited. io° 58' S.,
165° 15' w.
Motukoe, one of the Danger group; uninhabited, 100-L ft. high. io° 53' S-, 165° 45' 30" w.
Motuloa, islet of Fakaafo or Bowditeh. 90 22' 26” s., 17 T 12 w.
Motumau or Table, on the New Zealand coast. 430 04' S., 173° io' E.
Motunangea, islet of Fakaafo or Bowditeh. 90 24' S., 171° 13' W.
Motunui or West Sentinel, islet at the entrance to Taiohae harbor, Nukuhiva, Mar¬
quesas islands.
MotU ora, ill Auckland harbor, New Zealand. Coconut island, in Hilo harbor, has
the same name which signifies island of life.
[192]
INDEX TO THE PA CIEIC ISLANDS.
109
Motupatu, in Hauraki gulf near Waiheke, New Zealand.
Moturiki is 1 m. sw. from Ovalau, Fiji; 5X1 m.; abounds in coconuts. 170 47' 06" VS.,
178° 48' 25" E. (Peak.)
Moturina or Mewstone, of the Louisiade archipelago, is 3 m. ESE-WNW. by 1.7 m.;
nearly 1000 ft. high ; inhabited.
Motutulatula, islet of Fakaafo or Bowditch. 90 24' 45” s., 17 1 12' w.
Motutunga or Adventure, atoll of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by Cook
in 1773. The lagoon has a boat entrance at the northwest side. Occasionally in¬
habited for colledling coconuts and pearl-shell. 170 04' S., 144° 17' w.O
Mouac, islet in Banare bay on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Mougaone, Tongan islands.
Moulin. 18 31 10" S., 160' 52' 14' E. Named for one of the sailors in D’Entre¬
casteaux expedition.
Mound, on the Australian coast. 170 57' s., 146° 09' E.
Mourilyan, on the New Guinea coast.
Mount Adolphus, group in Torres strait. ro° 38' S., 142° 37' E.
Mount Cornwallis, see Tauan 011 the southwest coast of New Guinea.
Mouse, one of the Purdy islands. 2° 55' S., 146° 20' E.
Mouse, islet in Fortescue strait, southeast coast of New Guinea.
Mown, islet of Kiriwina group. 9.
Mua, islet of Egum, Kiriwina group. 90 25' S., 1 5 1 0 58' E. 9.
Mudge, see Narri of the Engineer group. io° 45' S., 150° 18’ E.
Mugula or Dufaure is on the east side of Orangerie bay on the southeast coast of
New Guinea; 3 m. N-S., 2 m. E-w.; 1662 ft. high; inhabited. io° 29' S., 149” 49' E.
Muifuiva, islet near Namuka of the Tongan islands.
Mukalau, low, 0.5 ill. ill circumference; off Viti levu, Fiji. 18° ii's., 178 30' io"e.O
Mulgrave, ill Torres strait. 10 07' s., 142 09' e:.Q
Mulgrave, see Mille of the Marshall islands.
Muli, see Moali of the Loyalty group.
Mulifonua, islet of Fakaafo or Bowditch. 90 ig' s., 17 T 13' w.
Mumbualau, islet between Suva and Levuka, Fiji.
Muna, Ngnna, Nnna or Montague, islet on the northeast coast of Fate, New Hebrides;
1500 ft. high.
Mungaiwa, islet of Yanutha of the Ringgold group, Fiji.
Munia, of the Exploring islands, Fiji; 2X1 m., 1054 ft. high. 170 22's., 181° 07" 30” E.
Inhabited.
Munia, southwest from Fauro, Solomon islands; 0.7 m. in diameter, 275 ft. high,
wooded.
Murray, islet in Nares harbor, Admiralty island. Named for Dr. John Murray of the
Challenger.
Murray, see Mer.
Murray, 100 m. northeast from Cape York in Torres strait. 10 05' S., 144 05' E.
Murray, see Buraku, Solomon islands.
Murua or Woodlark, in the Kiriwina group, was discovered by Captain Grimes of the
Woodlark of Sydney before 1836; 40 m. E-w. Northwest point 8° 54' S., 152° 35" E. 9.
C 1 93]
I IO
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Mururoa, Osnaburgh or Matilda, was discovered by Carteret in 1767. It consists of
18 low islands extending 14 m. The last name from the wreck of the whaler
Matilda in 1792. East end in 21 5c/ S., 138° 45' w. Paumotn archipelago. 2,2,.
Muschu or Gressien, fertile and well peopled, on the north coast of New Guinea.
o / o rtf
3 24 S., 143 28 E.
Museeket, islet of Ailinglablab, Marshall islands. 6.
Muskillo, see Nemu, Caroline islands.
Muswar, in Geelvink bay, north coast of New Guinea. 2° S., 134° 25' E.
Mutakaloch, islet off the Metalanim coast of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Muthuata, off Vanua levu, Fiji; 1. 1X0.5 m., 1005 ft. high. East end in 16° 25' S.,
T79° °3' 54" E.
Mutok, islet on the south side of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Mutokaloj, islet of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Muturabu, islet of Tongatabu. 21° 05' 30" s., 175° oi' w.
Muwo, of the Kiriwina group. 8° 43' S., 150° 58' E.
Myet, in the Bismarck archipelago. 4° 06' S., 152 27' E.
Mysory, see Sehouten.
Matiuna, islet east of Port Moresby on the south coast of New Guinea. 91 33' s.,
o w
147 IO E.
Mywoolla, see Kandavu, Fiji.
Nada, see Laughlan.
Nagian, on the north side of the northeast opening of Egum atoll. 9°23/S., i52°c>3'e.
NagO, islet at mouth of Nusa harbor of New Ireland.
Naiabo, small coral island, 40 ft. high, with a barrier reef 3 m. in circumference, in
the Lau group, Fiji.
Naiau, 3.5X2 m., 500-600 ft. high, Fiji. About 230 inhabitants.
Naingani (Naigani), Fiji; 1X0.7 m., 420 ft. high. North point in 170 33' 40" S.,
^78° 43' E.
Nairai, IO m. n. by E. from Ngau, Fiji; 4 m. n-S., 1.5-3 m- E-w. Needle peak 1078 ft.
high. The north point in 17° 45' S., 179° 28" 30” E. In 1880 there were 612 in¬
habitants.
Nairn, off the southwest coast of Ysabel, Solomon islands. 70 40' S., 158° 20" E.
Nairsa, see Rangiroa (Rahiroa) of the Paumotu archipelago.
Naitamba (Naitaba), Fiji; is high and rugged, triangular, 1.5 m. in diameter, 610 ft.
high. Inhabited by Europeans.. 170 03' 30" S., 180° 46' E.©
Nakandra nui, islet on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Nakoga, see Anologo, Matema islands.
Nakudi, islet of Butaritari, Gilbert islands. 30 08' 25" N., 172° 41' 15" E.
Nakumbutha, small, rocky island off Vanua levu, Fiji. 16° 35 178° 36' 30” F,.©
Nalap, islet of Ponape, Caroline islands, off Ronkiti river.
Nalogo, a trader’s name for Anologo.
Nama or D’Urville (Peace?), of the Caroline islands, is small, without a lagoon, but
higher than most of the group. 6° 59' N., 152 33" E. 4.
Namaka, islet of Butaritari, Gilbert islands. 3 iF 30" N., 172 54' E.
[194]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
hi
Namatotte, off the New Guinea coast. 30 53' s., 133° 49' E.
Nambite, low, off Vanua leva, Fiji. North point in 160 2 7' 54" s., 178° 50' E.
Namena or Direction, Fiji; two high (320 ft.) hills covered with dense foliage; un¬
inhabited; 1X0.2 m. Namena reef encloses a lagoon 13 m. long and 2—3 m. wide,
with an average depth of 16-20 fathoms. 170 06' S., 179° 06' E.
Namo or Margaretta of the Marshall islands. South point in 8° 55' N., 167° 42' E.
Namoliaur, islet of Elato, Caroline islands.
Namolipiafane, of the Caroline islands, was discovered by Hall in 1824. The reef is
40 m. in circumference, encloses 13 islets, among them Ikop, Fananon, Namonine.
25 30 N., 151 49 15 E. 4.
Namoluk or Skiddy, of the Caroline islands, was discovered by Liitke in 1S28. Reef
is 15 m. in circumference, with five islets. 50 45' 15" n., 153° 16' 30" E. 4.
Namonuito, B unkey, Anonima, Livingstone, was discovered by Ibargoitia in 1801.
Reef enclosing the group is 45 m. E-w. The islets are Amytideu, Maghyr,
Maghyrarik, Ounalik, Onoup, Pilipal, Pizaras and Ulul. 8° 33' N., 150° 31' E.
Namorik or Baring, of the Marshall islands, was discovered by Captain Bond Decem¬
ber 15, 1792. Two islands on a reef 5 m. in diameter. Population about 300.
50 35' n., 1680 18' E.O 6.
Namorus or Namorousse, islet of Morileu, Caroline islands.
Namotu, islet 300 }Tds. in diameter on the west coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Namtuiroj, islet of Kwadjalin, Marshall islands.
Namu, see Nemn.
Namua, islet east from Upolu, Samoan islands.
Namuine, islet of the Namolipiafane atoll in the Caroline islands. 8 25" 30" n.,
o r rr
151 49 *5 E.
Namuka, see Nomuka, Tongan islands.
Namuka is 7 m. west from Mbenga, Fiji, enclosed in the same reef; 1.7 m. N-S. by 1 m.
21 50 S., 1 77 58 50 E.O
Namuka i lau (eastern), 15 m. north from Fulanga, Fiji; 4 m. E-w., 1.5 m. N-S.;
260 ft. high. East point in 18° 47" S., 181 21" 30" E.
Namuka, islet 3 m. southwest from Suva harbor, inside the shore reef; inhabited. Eiji.
Namuka, islet off centre of south side of Api, New Hebrides; 500 ft. high. 16 49" S.,
1 68° 19' E.
Nananu group, Fiji, consists of Nananu ira and i thake (leeward and windward);
230 ft. high.
Na Ndongu or Tiri islands, off north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Nangani, 5.5 m. northwest from Ovalau, Fiji; 1 m. N-S., 600 ft. high.
Nangati, in Yasawa group, Fiji; 1X0.5 m., 930 ft. high; inhabited. 16° 57' 30" S.,
o / rr r\
177 19 40 E.O
Nani, islet between Nekete and Lavaissiere bays on the southeast coast of New Cale¬
donia.
Nanikirata, islet of Apaiang, Gilbert islands. 1 54' n., 172° 54' 30" E.
Nanomanga or Hudson, of the Ellice group, is 1.5 m. n-s., i m. E-w.; lagoon closed.
Population in 1886 was 320 protestants. 6 13' S., 176 16' 30" E. 16.
[195]
1 12
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Nanomea, the San Augustine of Maurelle, 1781, was discovered by Maurelle. There
are two islands on the reef within 3-4 m. of each other, the westerly called Fakenu,
the other Nanomea. Supposed to be the Taswell and Sherson of the brig Elisabeth ,
1809. Nanomea is 4X1*5 ni. Rev. J. S. Whitmee says the inhabitants are phys¬
ically a remarkably fine race, numbering about 1000 (1870). This is the northern¬
most of the Ellice group. 5' 36' 30” S., 176° icf R.O
Nanouki, see TVranuka of the Gilbert islands.
Natiotllu, of the Kiriwina group, is in 8 46" S., 150° 58' E.
Nanouti, see Nonuti or Sydenham, Gilbert islands.
Nantucket, see Baker.
Nansouti, a wooded islet on the barrier reef of Tahiti, Society islands. 20.
Nanuia, high, inhabited islet, 0.7 m. in diameter; of the Yasawa group, Fiji. 160 58' 30//s.,
177 J9 5° E.O
Nanuku, Fiji; 1.5X0. 5 m. on a reef 14X8 m. 16° 42" 30" s., 180° 36' E.O
Naonao, islet on the south reef of Raiatea, Society islands.
Napasa, islet on northeast part of outer ring of Egum atoll. 9 20' 30" S., 152° E. 9.
Napier, off northeast coast of Raoul, Kermadec islands.
Napuka or Whytoohee, in the Disappointment group of Byron, Paumotu archipelago.
Wooded islets connected by an irregular reef enclosing a lagoon. Inhabitants
said to be a distinct race. The east end is in 140 \o 40" S., 141° \2 50" w.
Napuni, islet of Butaritari, Gilbert islands. 30 io' 20" N., 172° 4F 10" E.
Naranarawai or Skelton, of the Fouisiade archipelago, is an inhabited island 2 m.
ESE-wnw. by half a mile wide, and 500 ft. high.
Narancpuli, islet at the entrance to Port Lod on the southeast side of Ponape, Caro¬
line islands.
Narangi or Narangai, high island of Fiji. i6~ 48' 30'' S., 179° 29' 20" E.O
Narborough, of the Galapagos, is a volcano 3720 ft. high.
Narcissus, see Tatakoto of the Paumotu archipelago. 22.
Nares, on the Australian coast. 19 ’ 44' S., 148° 2F E. Named for Captain G. S.
Nares of the Challenger.
Naria, in Cloudy bay, New Guinea. 10" \/\ S., I483 39/ E.
Narlap, islet with Narmaur forming the entrance to Kiti harbor on the southwest
end of Ponape, Caroline islands
Narmaur, at the mouth of Kiti harbor, Ponape, Caroline islands. 6 47' n., i58c o8'e.
Narovo or Eddystone, of the Solomon islands, is 4X1 m.; volcanic, the activity con¬
fined at present to the south portion; lagoon frequented by crocodiles. Natives
friendly and good pilots. Eddystone Rock and Simbo are islets on the reef of
Narovo. 8° 15' S., 156° 28' E.
Narri or Mudge, of the Fouisiade archipelago, is a low, coral, uninhabited islet 0.7 m.
NE-SW. IO° 45' S., 150° l8' E.
Nasakor, one of the south group of islets in Egum atoll lagoon. 9 27' S., 151°
58' 30" E- 9.
Nassau, islet discovered in 1835 from the whaler Nassau; fringing reef. 1 F 33'2o'/S.,
165° 25' w.
Nataka, islet of Butaritari, Gilbert islands. 30 icf icF N., 172° 55" 10" E.
[196]
5° S.
1 ' i ' 180°'
E
6° 8.
10° S.
16
Nanomea ^
Niutao
Nanomanga 'S"
Nui<*.
Oaitapu /J,
w
Nukufetau
Funafuti $ A'
(/)!.' 9 •
ig*V/
Nukulaelae /^i^\
' %•
ELLICE GROUP
10°S
175c
— V ■■ ■ ■ - ■ — - - - — — -
w
>5
o
c
K
<§f
l-A
00
o
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS .
113
Nathula (Nacula), islet between Yasawa and Naviti, Fiji.
Nau, on southeast coast of New Caledonia.
Nauru, see Nawodo, Gilbert islands.
Nauta, of the Kiriwina group. 8° 37' s., 150° 50' E.
Nautilus, see Tapiteuea of the Gilbert islands.
NatltaniwOllO, uninhabited islet of Mamanutha i caki group, Fiji.
Navaildra, uninhabited islet of Mamanutha group, Fiji.
Navilli, sand islet in Nandi waters on the west coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Naviti, important island of the Yasawa group, Fiji; 8X3 m., 74oi ft. high. i7°c>5's.,
1 77° i4 E.
Navi'll, on the New Guinea coast. 8° 12' S., 143° 36' E.
Navumbalavu, islets 122 ft. high off Viti levu, Fiji. 170 37' 30" S., 178° 37' E.O
Navutuiloma, densely wooded; 210 ft. high; in the Yangasa cluster, Fiji.
Navuttlira, densely wooded; 270 ft. high, in the Yangasa cluster, Fiji.
Nawi, islet 130 ft. high at the mouth of the Na Kama creek on the south coast of
Vanua levu, Fiji.
Nawi, islet of the Schouten group in Geelvink bay. 2° i5/ S., 136° 18' E.
Nawodo, Nauru, Shank or Pleasant of the Gilbert islands was discovered by Captain
Fearn of the Hunter in 1795-8; 15 m. in circumference, raised coral, 100 ft. high;
in centre a fresh water lagoon. Population about 1200, a fine race. o° 25' S.,
167° 05' E.
Nayatl, Fiji, an inhabited island 4X2.5 m., 275 ft. high, with reef on one side only.
Northwest point is in 170 57' 30" S., 180° 58' E.
Nda, on the great reef south from New Caledonia.
Nde, islet on passage from Noumea to Uen island, south end of New Caledonia.
Ndendi, a spelling of Nitendi or Santa Cruz, New Hebrides.
Ndie, islet of the Great South Reef, New Caledonia.
N’digoro, islet on the outer reef in Isie passage on the northwest side of New Caledonia.
Ndrendre and Ndrendre lailai, islets with Thumbu on the north coast of Viti levu at
the entrance to the Rakiraki river.
Ndravuni or Colvocoressis, Fiji; an inhabited island 1.2 m. n-s., 0.2 m. E-w.; 350 ft.
high. 1 8° 49' 30" S., 178° 25' 40" E.O
Ndruandrua, islet on the north coast of Viti levu, Fiji; 156 ft. high. 160 \2 24" S.,
179 35 20 E.O
N’dakue, islet in Port Uitoe on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Ndundine, Ndundure or Molard, uninhabited island west from Mare, 3 m. in circum¬
ference. Loyalty islands.
Nea, islet in Kuabuni opening on the southeast coast of New Caledonia.
Neba, inhabited islet in Pume passage, northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Necker, of the Hawaiian group, was discovered by La Perouse November 1, 1786.
Named for the great minister of Louis XVI. Rocky; 280 ft. high; volcanic, the
remains of a crater with a shoal extending miles to the southward. 23° 35' 18" N.,
164° 39 w.
Neckes, see Puketutu, New Zealand.
Negeri, see Nihiru of the Paumotu archipelago.
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. z.— 8. CI97J
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
1 14
Nekutnara, islet between Dobu and Kwaiope, east from Dawson strait, D’Entrecas¬
teaux group. 90 44' S., 150" 54' E.
Nemtl or Double, islet in Infernet passage on the southwest coast of New Caledonia.
Nemtl or Musquillo, atoll of the Marshall islands. The south point is in 8° 14' N.,
1 68° 03' E.
Nendahande, islet south from Balabio on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
Nendiale, islet in Banare bay on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Nengone, the native name of Mare or Britannia of the Loyalty islands.
Netlgoneilgo or Prince William Henry of the Paumotu archipelago was discovered
by Wallis in 1765; 5 m. E-w. North end is in 18° 43' S., 141" 40 w. 21.
Netli, low and covered with coconut trees, on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
Nenotl or Nenu, in Port Bouquet on the east coast of New Caledonia; 1.5 m. E. by
N.-w. by S.
Nepean, island with extensive reefs in Torres strait. 90 34' s., 1430 38' E.
Nepean, one of the Kermadec islands; 0.2 m. long, 50 ft. high. 29° 04' S., 167° 58' E.
Netherland, see Nui of the Ellice islands.
Neu Hannover, see New Hanover.
Neu Lauenburg, German name for Duke of York islands.
Neu Mecklenburg, German name for New Ireland. It seems unfortunate that in
changing the well-known names of their new possessions the Germans should not
have improved on the former rather unsuitable appellations. I cannot see that
New Mecklenburg is any more appropriate than New Ireland.
Neu Pommern, the German name for New Britain.
Nevelo, see Lomlom, Santa Cruz.
Nevil, see Tobi, Caroline islands.
New, island of the New Guinea region. 2° 30' S., 131° 34' E.
New Amsterdam, the name given by Tasman to Tongatabu.
New Britain (Neu Pommern of the Germans). Carteret, in 1767, found that what
Dampier had supposed a bay when in 1700 he sailed through the strait that bears
his name and proved that there was an island distinct from New Guinea, was
really another strait, so he named the land to the east New Ireland, and the west¬
ern one New Britain. Little is known of New Britain, large as it is. There are
many adtive volcanoes in the long and narrow island. Cannibals are numerous
but in constant tribal warfare; 330 m. long, nowhere more than 50 m. wide. The
north point is in 40 07' s., 152° io' E. 10.
New Caledonia was partly discovered by Cook, but D’Entrecasteaux completed the
work. Taken by France in 1853 it was made a penal settlement in 1883 in spite of
the experience of England in her Australian penal stations, and the constant es¬
cape of convidls is a great damage to the neighboring colonies. New Caledonia is
about 216 m. long, 30 m. broad. There are two parallel ranges of mountains ex¬
tending the whole length; the eastern, about 2500 ft. high, has an even and regu¬
lar outline, while the western mountains are higher (2600-3600 ft.) and more
irregular in form. Mt. Douit, over Cape Colnett, is 5570 ft. high. Among other
minerals nickel is found here.* The native houses are generally conical. The
*Heurteau— Rapport sur la Constitution de la Nouvelle Calfdonie, 1876. Pelatan— I.es Mines de la Nouvelle Cal£donie, 1892,
[l98]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
115
natives use jade in weapons and ornaments. The winter season is from December
15 to April 15. The north point is in 20° 45' S. 13.
New Georgia, see Rubiana of the Solomon islands.
New Guinea was discovered by the Portuguese Jorge de Meneses in 1524; visited by
Saavedra in 1528; Grijalva y Alvarado in 1537; Inigo Ortiz de Retes in 1545, and
the last gave the name New Guinea. The history of the discovery of New Guinea
is a most complicated one, each discoverer mapping but a small portion of the
coast, and to this day the coast line is not well surveyed, while much of the in¬
terior remains unexplored. In 1705 a Dutch expedition explored the deep bay on
the north coast which was named for one of the ships of the expedition Geelvink
(yellow finch), and many other Dutch explorers were sent by the East India Com¬
pany from Batavia to this portion of New Guinea which was gradually claimed by
Holland. The boundary of Dutch New Guinea on the east is a straight line
drawn from Cape Bonpland on the east side of Humboldt bay, in 140° 47' east
longitude to 140° E. on the south coast. In 1885 the portion not claimed by the
Dutch east of the 141st meridian was divided between England and Germany, the
former taking the south coast from the mouth of Bensbach river in latitude
9° °7' 35” S., longitude 14 1° 01 48" E., this meridian forming the boundary till it
meets the Fly river which becomes the boundary until it crosses the 141st merid¬
ian ; also all the north coast from the east point to Mitre rock in latitude 8° S.
April 4, 1883, the resident magistrate at Thursday island hoisted the British flag
at Port Moresby and took possession of all between 141° and 1550 E. And on Sep¬
tember 4, 1888, the Administrator proclaimed the annexation as a crown colony
under the name of British New Guinea.
In its greatest length WNW.-ESE. New Guinea extends 1306 m., and its area,
including adjacent islands, is about 312,000 sq. m. The Owen Stanley range rises
to a height of 13,205 ft. Many tribes are found, but the type is Papuan, and is
found in purity on the northern portion. To the northeast Polynesian colonies
have resulted in some mixture. On the south coast the natives are enterprising
traders, making long voyages with the monsoons in their lakatois which are
clumsy, compound boats with two masts and V-shaped sails. Sago and pottery
are the principal cargo. Houses on the shore are built on piles, and farther in¬
land often in trees for safety.
For further information as to the discovery see Bougainville, Edwards, Flin¬
ders, D’Entrecasteaux, Freycinet, D’Urville, Moresby, Owen Stanley. And for
the geography and general description, see D’Albertis, Eawes, Chalmers, Powell,
and the reports of the Administrator.
New Hanover (Neu Hannover of the Germans) was discovered by Carteret. It is
37 m. E-W., 20 m. N-S. Fertile and mountainous, rising to 2000 ft. IO.
New Hebrides. Quiros was the first to discover any of the extensive group, or rather
groups, which are now known by the collective name of New Hebrides. He saw but
one island which he fondly imagined was part of the great southern continent, then
the dream of navigators, and he called his discovery Australia del Espiritu Santo ,
a name since curtailed to Santo in the Trader’s vernacular. Cook discovered most
of the southern chain and he gave the name New Hebrides in 1773. The natives
D99]
n6
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
are of the black Papuan or Melanesian stock and have a reputation for cannibal¬
ism, treachery and uncertain temper. They have been outraged repeatedly by the
labor pirates, and their hostility to the kind of white men who have principally
reached their islands does not seem unreasonable. They are far from being an
homogeneous population : Polynesian settlements exist throughout the group, and
more than a score of languages are noted. The climate is not very well suited to
white occupation, being damp and otherwise unwholesome. Although the group
has not been well studied interesting particulars of portions of the islands have
been published by the missionaries who have labored against great discouragement,
and more especially by Commander Markham in his “Cruise of the Rosario,” 1872.
Walter Coote’s “Wanderings, South and Hast,” 1892; and Julius Brenchley’s in¬
teresting “Cruise of the Cura5oa,” 1865.
Part of the group has already been annexed by Great Britain, and it is sup¬
posed that France has desires for the rest as contiguous to her New Caledonian
colony. Several agricultural companies of each nation are attempting to develope
the resources of the country. 12.
New Ireland (Neu Mecklenburg) was supposed by Lemaire and Schouten to be a part
of New Gninea. Dampier, in 1700, proved it to be a separate island, and sixty-
seven years later Carteret demonstrated the strait between it and New Britain.
240X15 m., volcanic and rising to 7000 ft. Papuans, physically inferior to those
of the Solomon islands. Cannibals ; practise circumcision but not tatuing. Coun¬
try not well known.
New Jersey adjoins Santa Cruz.
New Market, see Baker.
New Nantucket, see Baker.
New Philippines, a name once given to the Caroline islands.
New Year, see Miadi of the Marshall islands.
New York, see Washington. The same name was given by Fanning in 1798 to Eiao
of the Marquesas.
New Zealand. This important group lies between the parallels of 340 30' and
47° 30' south latitude and the meridians of 1660 36' 30” and 178° 36' 05" east longi¬
tude, being roughly the antipodes of Great Britain. The area is 104,403 sq. m. or
nearly equal to that of the British islands. The three islands are variously styled,
but the Maori names were Te ika a Maui (The fish of Maui) for the northern one;
Te wahi Pounamu (The place of Greenstone) for the middle; and Rakiura for
Stewart island. These have given place to New Leinster, New Ulster and New
Munster (of Governor Hobson), or more commonly Northern, Southern and Stewart.
Tasman sighted the western coast December 13, 1642., but in sending a boat
ashore the natives attacked and killed four of the crew. Tasman called the place
Mordenaars (Murderers) bay and did not again attempt to land, but sailed to the
extreme northern end, discovering Three Kings islands (on the eve of Epiphany)
and thence sailed to the Tongan islands. Tasman’s first name, Staatenland, he
later changed to Nova Zeeland. Cook was the next European to reach these
shores (October 6, 1769) and in Mercury bay, on November 11, he took formal
[200]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
ii 7
possession for King George III. Cook spent nearly a year (327 days) in the
group and his surveys gave the first definite knowledge of the islands.
As early as 1814 a Church mission was started and later other denominations
followed. In 1840 both Wellington and Auckland were founded and colonists
gathered until the natives were driven to exasperation and wars followed for many
years. At present all is
peace and by the wise
system of the British the
Maoris are segregated as
much as possible, so that
the traveller who merely
visits the principal cities
rarely sees a Maori.
The census of 1881 gave
44,099, a slight increase
over the previous one.
Yet, as the estimate in
1840 was 107,000, the
race is dying as all other
inferior people must in
the presence of the white
intruders.
The Maori race is
supposed, mainly on the
basis of their own tradi¬
tions, to have come to
New Zealand in the
fifteenth century from
Hawaiki to the eastward.
Their language closely
resembles the Hawaiian,
but these, whose tradi¬
tions go far beyond that
date, have no remem¬
brance of such an emi¬
gration as told in the
Maori traditions. When
first discovered they were
cannibals and particu¬
larly fierce, but like other cannibals they showed remarkable talent for fine work;
and to their intelligence is due the fact of their rapid conversion to Christianity
and their comprehension of the advantages of civilization, which while removing
them speedily from a world of trouble promised them a pleasanter one beyond the
grave, “where the wicked cease from troubling.” Maoris are a fine race of Poly-
[201]
ii8
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
nesians, more manly and vigorous than the Hawaiian whom they closely resemble
in outward form.
The climate of New Zealand is not extreme but is subject to sudden changes,
which do not increase the death rate which is very low. Volcanoes and snow-capped
mountains add greatly to the beauty of the scenery, and also give variety to
climatic effects. One thing is quickly noticed by the traveller, that the ruddy
complexions of England are rather enhanced here while they soon disappear in
the Australian colonies.
Nexsen, a name given by Fanning, in 1798, to Hatutu of the Marquesas islands.
Ngaloa (Galoa), of the Fiji group, is a small island which gives its name to the har¬
bor on the south side of Kandavu. 190 05' 10" S., 178° ii^o^E. {Challenger survey.)
Ngaloa, on the north coast of Vanua levu, north of Lekutu river. Thickly peopled.
37 24 s., 178 41 32 E.o 14.
Ngamea (Qamea), northeast from Taviuni, Fiji; 5.7 m. long E-w., 1000 ft. high;
about 500 inhabitants. 16° 47' S., 179° 44' w. 14.
Nganati, Pinaki or Whitsunday of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by Wallis
in 1767. It is low and wooded. 19' 40' 22" S., 140° 22' 28" w. There is much
confusion on the charts. 21.
Ngasi mbali, a low, uninhabited islet off Kandavu, Fiji, 60 ft. high.
Ngatik, or Raven islands, 50 m. sw. from Ponape; discovered in 1773 by Don Felipe
Tompson; 22 m. in circumference, and there are 11 islets on the unbroken reef.
There is a small lagoon. Much copra is exported. 50 47' 30" N., 1570 32' E. 5.
Ngau, the Angau of Wilkes, is 27 m. southeast from Ovalau, Fiji ; 11.2 x4 m. On the
west is a barrier reef 16 m. long. Dilathoa peak is 2345 ft. high, in 170 58' 30" S.,
80 / //
1 33 30 E.
Nge, islet near Dumbea passage at the south end of New Caledonia.
Ngea, islet in Bulari ba}q New Caledonia.
Ngele levu, a coral reef 1 m. se-nw. in the Ringgold group, Fiji.
Ngoli, or Lamoliork, Caroline islands. The Matelotas of Villalobos in 1545 ; consists
of five islets, the south one inhabited. 8° 15' N., 137° 35' E.
Ngualito, islet of Malolo islands, Hudson group, Fiji.
Ngtina, see Muna of the New Hebrides.
ITiau, or Greig, a low, wooded island of the Paumotu archipelago, 4 m. in diameter,
with a closed lagoon. The hurricane of 1878 almost depopulated this island.
1 6° ii' S., 146° 22' w.O
Nibatlga, the southeast island of the Matema group; small, round, 200 ft. high, in¬
habited. io° 2 1 S., 1660 17' E. Santa Cruz islands.
Nicholson, in the Tongan group, was first known as Beveridge reef, now a coral
island 3X2 m.; an example of an island formed from a reef in recent times.
200 02' S., 167° 49' w.
Nie, islet in Dumbea bay, north from Ducos peninsula on the southwest side of New
Caledonia.
Nielsen, islands off the north coast of New Guinea at the mouth of Prince Albrecht
harbor.
Nienane, a high, bare rock between Daos and Art islands, Belep group, New Caledonia.
[202]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
119
Nigeri, see Nihiru of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Nifilofi or Nifilole, of the New Hebrides, extends 1 m. nw-se., and is 120 ft. high.
Nifo, in the Yasawa group, Fiji, is between Matathoni levu and Yangati. 160 59' 30" s.,
_ o r ff s~\
177 19 10 E.©
Night, a wooded island on the Australian coast. 13° 1 1 S., 143° 35' E.
Nigahatl, islet off the northwest point of Panatinani, Louisiade archipelago.
Niguna, see Mima, New Hebrides.
Nihiru, Niheri or Nigeri, of the Paumotu archipelago, is a well wooded island with a
lagoon opening on the south side. It is 7 m. in diameter. North point is in
1 6° 41' S., 142° 53' w. 21.
Nihoa or Bird, of the Hawaiian group, is a volcanic mass rising steep from the water
to a height of 880 ft., the only landing place being on the south side. Discovered
by Captain Douglas of the Iphigenia April 13, 1789. Modu manu of the old charts
is a corruption of Moku manu=Bird island. 23° 05' 50” n., i6i° 56' 30" w. 1.
Niihau, of the Hawaiian group, is the most westerly inhabited island of the group,
with a superficies of 62,000 acres, and is about 16X6 m. and 800 ft. high. Used
mainly as a sheep ranch. 1.
Nileuti, a wooded islet in Tohio passage, on the southeast coast of New Caledonia.
NitnailU is 25 m. northeast of Santa Cruz; 200 ft. high. io° 21 S., 166' 17' E.
Nimoa or Pig, of the Louisiade archipelago, is fertile, well wooded and inhabited ; the
largest in Coral Haven 1.5 m. southeast from Panatinani; 455 ft. high.
Nimrod islands were seen by Captain Eilbeck in the Nimrod in 1828. 56' 20 s.,
158° 3 o' w. Existence doubtful.
Nina, see Aniwa, New Hebrides.
Ninepill, on the coast of New Guinea. io° 13' s., 142° 40' E.
Ninita, in the Eouisiade archipelago. ii° 17' S., 153° 15' E.
Ninon, of the Eouisiade archipelago, is northeast from Moturina. Half a mile long,
175 ft. high.
Ninuha, on the east coast of Ysabel, Solomon islands. 70 54' s., 159° 20 E.
Nitendi, see Santa Cruz, of the New Hebrides. 12.
Niua, see Aniwa, New Hebrides.
Niuababu, islet of the Tongan group.
Niuafoou, of the Tongan islands was discovered by Captain Edwards in H. M. S.
Pandora August 3, 1791, and by him called Proby. It is an adtive volcano 3.5 m.
N-S., 3 m. E-W. Was in eruption in 1853 when many lives were lost; April 12,
1867, and again in 1886 and 1887. 150 34' S., 175° 40' 40" w.
Niuatobutabu, of the Tongan group, was discovered by Lemaire and Schouten May
11, 1616. Named Keppel by Wallis in 1767. It is 2000 ft. high. 150 52' s.,
1730 50' w. 18.
Niue or Savage. 19° S., 170 w. Is a coral island upheaved, 300 ft. high, and about
30 m. in circumference. It was named by Cook (June 20, 1774) Savage because
his boats were fiercely attacked when making a landing. Population in 1872,
5,124; is increasing. Natives rather small and dark; have a language of their
own closel}^ resembling Samoan ; were not cannibals, did not offer human sacri¬
fices nor worship idols. Much of their work was quite distinct. 15.
[203]
120
INDEX 70 THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Niue, islet of Fakaafo. g° 22! 40" s., 17 1° 13' w.
NiutnailO or Tasman atoll is the easternmost and largest of the Tasman group.
4° 35' s-> T59° 3o' E.
Niutao, alias Lynx, Sepper, Speiden (Wilkes) of the Ellice islands, is 2-5XI-5 m.,
densely covered with coconut trees. Population, 417. 6° 08' S., 1 77° 22 E. 16.
Nivani or Nivan, a small island southwest of Misima (St. Aignan) in the Louisiade
archipelago.
Nmara, a grassy, uninhabited islet 230 ft. high on Kandavu reef, Fiji.
Nogahanghe, a rocky islet near Paaba island on.the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Noitia or Burnett is small and wooded, 3.5 m. N. by E. from Panasia, Louisiade archi¬
pelago.
Nokue or Infernal islet in Kuto bay, Isle of Pines. 13.
Noma, islet in lagoon 9 m. from Losap, Caroline islands; 200 inhabitants. 4.
Nomuka, of the Tongan group, the Annamooka of Cook, is a triangular coral island,
the sides 2 m. long. Peaks rise to a height of 166 ft. Closed salt lagoon 0.7 m.
in diameter. 20° 15' S., 174° .50' w.
Nono, islet of Pavuvu or Russell group, Solomon islands. 8° 02' S., 159° 05' E.
Nonuti, Sydenham, Dog, Blaney, or Nanuti of the Gilbert islands, measures 19X8.5 m.
The southeast point is in o° 46' 05" S., 174° 31' 30" E. 7.
Norbarbar is the native name of Ureparapara or Bligh in the Banks group.
Nord, see Gipps, Bismarck archipelago. 10.
Norfolk, was discovered by Cook October 10, 1774. It is 5X2.5 m. and 1050 ft. high.
The English frigate Sirius was wrecked here near the end of 1790. It belongs to
New South Wales. This beautiful island was once a convict station, but this was
given up in 1855 and the next year the Pitcairners were removed from the lonely
island where they had vegetated for 67 years to this much finer island. Soon, how¬
ever, 40 of the 194 returned to their old home. Those on Norfolk island have
doubled their number and are fairly prosperous. 29° oL S., 167° 56' E.
Normauby, a name of Duau of the D’Entrecasteaux group.
Norstlp, a low, wooded islet, uninhabited, near Port Stanley, Malekula, New Hebrides.
North or High, Fiji. 16° 28' 30" s., 180° 20 30" E.O
North, see Hetau, Solomon islands. 8° 50' S., 159° 58' E.
North, in Marau sound on the northeast coast of Guadalcanar, Solomon islands.
90 44' s., 1600 47' E.
North, small island on the north side of the Trobriand reef. 8° 25' S., 150° 48' E. 9.
North or Nord, see Gipps, Bismarck archipelago. IO.
North, one of the Torres group, Banks islands; 1200 ft. high.
North, group of islets off the north coast of New Hanover.
Northumberland, an extensive group on the east coast of Queensland, Australia,
reaching to 22° S.
Norton, in the Bismarck archipelago. 50 24' S., 150° 31' E.
Nosoata, islet at the mouth of Rewa river, V iti levu, Fiji.
Nouvelle Cythere (La), a name given to Tahiti by Bougainville in 1768.
Nu, see Dubouzet islet, New Caledonia.
[204]
1 2 I
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Nuakata or Lydia, is east of the East cape of New Guinea; 1010 ft. high, thickly
inhabited. io° 17' S., 151° E.
Nuare, on the great South Reef of New Caledonia, 3.5 m. sw. by s. from Kie.
Nubaru or Nubara, islet on the southeast coast of Murua. 90 io' s., 1530 E.
Nubiam, Trobriand group. 8° 40 30" S., 150° 52' E.
Nufiluli or Nufiloli, of the Matema group, is a mile long and 200 ft. high. British
protectorate was declared August 18, 1898.
Nugarba or Goodman, the southernmost of the Abgarris group, Bismarck archipelago.
The north point is in 30 23" S., 154° 41 E.
Nugatobe, a group of three small islands, Fiji. 17° 18' S., 180° 29' E.O
Nugent, islet off the east coast of Raoul, Kermadec islands.
Nugu consists of two islets, Pari sule and Pari pile, lying between Florida and Gua¬
dalcanal Solomon islands. g° 18' S., 160° 15' E.
Nugu, islet of Tongatabii on the northeast. 21° 05' 30" S., 174° 58' 30" w. 18.
Nui, Netherland or Egg, was discovered in 1827. There are 8 islets on the east side
of the reef. Although geographically of the Ellice group the people and language
are derived from the Gilbert group. ~]'J 13' 20" S., 1 77° 14' 30" E.
Nuimbua, a low, wooded islet in Tupeti passage on the southeast coast of New Cale¬
donia.
NukapU, of the Matema group, is a mile long and 100 ft. high. People Polynesian.
This was the place of Bishop Patteson’s murder.
Nuku, islet of Tongatabu, Tongan islands. 18.
Nuku akimoa or Sail-rock, islet of Uvea or Wallis; 15 ft. high.
Nuku atea, islet of Uvea; 200 ft. high.
Nukufetau or De Peyster group, Ellice islands, was discovered in 1819. 8-9 islets
around a lagoon 7 m. in diameter, with an entrance on the northwest side. In
1881 the population was 250. North point is in 70 56' S., 178° 27 30" E.
Nukuhiva or Marchand is the principal island of the Marquesas; 14 m. E-w., 10 m. n-S.
Lofty mountains and fertile valleys, but the population in 1880 had been reduced
to 800; twenty years before it was over 2000. 8° 57' S., 140° 15 W. (West end.) 23.
Nuku ira, one of the Tiri group on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Nukulaelae or Mitchell group, Ellice islands. A lagoon island 7 m. N-S., 2 m. E-W.
14 islets; 150 inhabitants in 1886. 90 18' S., 179° 48' E.
Nukulakia, islet of Fakaafo. 90 25" s., 1710 14' w.
Nukulau, a low, sandy, well wooded islet 0.3X0.2 m.; off Viti levu, Fiji. 18° io' 23”s.,
178° 30' 30" E.O
Nukulevu, Fiji, is small, fertile, inhabited. 170 41 16" S., 178° 39' 10" E.O
Nukumanu, an inhabited island west from Nuku mbasanga, Fiji. 160 20' 30" S.,
180° 36' 40" E.O
Nukumanu, see Tasman.
Nukumasanga, islet of Fakaafo. g° 24' 12" S., 171° 12' w.
Nuku mbasanga, one reef encloses this and Nuku mbalate; 10 m. north from
Nanuku, Fiji. 160 19' s., 180° 45' 20" E.
Nukumbatu, islet 80 ft. high, off the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Nukumbati, alow, mangrove islet 0.3 m. n-s., 400 yds. wide. i6°27,54/S., i79°oo'45" E.O
[2°5]
122
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Nukunamu, islet of the Tongan group.
Nukunau or Byron, Gilbert islands, was discovered by Commodore Byron July 2,
1765; 8Xi-5 m.; in 1872 population was 5000. i° 23' S., 176° 34' E.
Nllkunono or Duke of Clarence, in the Tokelau or Union group, was discovered by
Captain Edwards in the Pandora in 1791 ; 7.2 m. N-S., 5 m. E-W.; of triangular
form, with 93 islets on the reef. 90 05' S., 171° 46' w. British protectorate de¬
clared June 21, 1889. 17.
Ntlktior, Monteverde or Dunkin of the Caroline islands, was discovered in 1806 by
Juan B. Monteverde; 12-14 m. in circumference. About 150 Polynesian inhabi¬
tants who hold to their primitive religion ; the language is said to be pure Maori.
30 52' N., 154° 56' E. 4.
Ntlkusetnantl, islet on the east side of the reef of the same name in the Ringgold
group, Fiji.
Ntikusesuki, islet of Fakaafo. 90 24' 10" s., 17 1° 12' w.
Nukutapipi or Margaret, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by Turnbull
March 6, 1803, and named for his ship. It is low, wooded, 2 m. in circumference.
20 42 21 s., 143 03 48 w.o
Nukutavake, Lagoon or Queen Charlotte, of the Paumotu archipelago, was dis¬
covered by Wallis in 1767. 18° 43' 19" s., 138° 47" 13" w.O 2,2,.
Nuktltolll, three uninhabited islets 4 m. from Yathata in the Lau group, Fiji.
Nuktltu, islet off north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Numfoor. i° oL s., 1340 45' E.
Nunga, a rock, Fiji. 16° 55' S., 177° 2 o' 30" E.O
Nungna, islet on Boussole reef southeast from Vanikoro, New Hebrides.
Nunuail, islet of the Louisiade archipelago, 200 ft. high.
Nuotaea, islet of Apaiang, Gilbert islands. i° 53' n., 172° 56' 10" E. 7.
Nupani, one of the Matema islands. io° 04' s., 165° 40' E. British protectorate de¬
clared August 18, 1898.
Nura, islet in south part of Indispensable strait near Malaita, Solomon islands.
90 33' S., 1600 45' E.
Nusa and Nusalik, islets off the coast of New Ireland, Bismarck archipelago.
Nuulua, islet east of Upolu, Samoan islands; 120 ft. high.
Nuutele, islet east of Upolu, Samoan islands; 200 ft. high.
Nuvera, islet off Vanua levu, Fiji. North point in 160 28' 50" s., 178° 48' 30" E.
N’yaur or Angaur, southernmost of the Pelew islands ; 4.5 m. ne-SW. 6°5o'n., 1340 io'e.
Oafuna, islet of Fakaafo. 90 22' 10" S., 1710 12V.
Oahe, a name of Manihi, Paumotu archipelago.
Oahu, of the Hawaiian islands, the Wahoo of the old English charts, although not
the largest is the principal island of the group. Its area is 384,000 acres; height
at the Kaala mountains, 4030 ft.; and the population in 1896 was 40,205. On this
is the capital city, Honolulu ; also Pearl Lochs, an extensive harbor. I.
Oaitupu, see Vaitupu of the Ellice group.
Oandrau, low islet off Vanua levu, Fiji. 160 34' 30" s., 178° 47' E.O
Oatafu, better Atafu of the Union group.
[206]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
123
Oatara, islet on extreme east of reef of Raiatea, Society islands.
Oba or Lepers, New Hebrides. Often written Omba or, with the article, Aoba (b=mb).
About 17 m. long and 4000 ft. high. Natives have a good character, and there is
a station of the Melanesian mission on the northern side. The name Leper was
given under a mistaken diagnosis; inhabitants were not lepers. 12.
Obelisk or Sugar-loaf, islet south of Huapu, Marquesas islands. 23.
Obelisk, one of the Taumaco group.
Obi, islet of Yap, Caroline islands.
Observation or Mono, Solomon islands. 70 24' 30" s., 1550 34' 01" E.
Observation, on the north coast of Duau, D’Entrecasteaux group. 90 43' 53" s.,
150° 44' 43" E.
Observation, on the north coast of New Guinea. 2° 36' S., 140° 42' 11" E.
Observatory, small, stony islet in Nares harbor, Admiralty island. i° 55' 10" s.,
✓"O f
146 41 E.
Observatory, at Balade, New Caledonia. See Puduie.
Observatory, see Loa, Fiji.
Obstruction, of the Louisiade archipelago, a group so named because the islands
block the passage between Nuakata island and East cape. They are Hana kuba-
kuba, Lelei gana, Iabama, Banibani siga.
Obula, islet west of Duau, D’Entrecasteaux group. 90 49' S., 150° 46' E.
Ocean or Cure, of the Hawaiian group, is an atoll 14.7 m. in circumference, 56 m. west
from Midway island. There is one sand island 1.5X0. 7 m.; another called Green,
and two islets in the southeast corner. 28° 25' 45" N., 178° 29' 45" w. Taken pos¬
session of by the Hawaiian government during the reign of Kalakaua. 2.
Ocean, see Bonabe, Gilbert islands.
Ocheou of Belcher is Hau of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Odia, see Wotje of the Marshall islands.
Odia, see Ailinglablab, Marshall islands.
Oema, of the Solomon islands, is 10 m. nw. from Cyprian Bridge island, and about
800 ft. high. 8° 40' s., 156° 05' E. Oema atoll is 2 m. north from Oema island.
It has a lagoon and several islets.
OetlO, low and uninhabited island 65 m. nw. by N. from Pitcairn. Discovered by Cap¬
tain Henderson of the Hercules. 24° 00 30” S., 130° 40' w.
Ofalaga, islet of the Tongan group. 19° 37' S., 175° 34' w.
Ofiti, see Tepoto of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Ofolanka, islet on the same reef with Buhi in the northwest part of the Tongan group.
Ofu, of the Samoan islands, has an area of 9 sq. m., and is 1020 ft. high. By conven¬
tion proclaimed February 16, 1900, it came under the jurisdiction of the United
States. The west point is in 14° iF S., 169° 36' w. 15.
Ofu, islet of the Tongan group.
Ogasawara, see Bonin.
Ogea, see Ongea, Fiji.
Ogle, a low islet of the Underwood group, Fiji. 17° 40' S., 177° 14 30” E.O Named
for Alexander Ogle, a marine of the United States Exploring Expedition who died
at sea, August 12, 1839.
[207]
124
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Oheteroa, see Rurutu of the Austral islands.
Ohiti, see Hiti. O is the article.
Oidi islet is east from Hueguenee, Loyalty islands.
Okitnbo, Fiji, three islets on one reef, 4 m. E-w., 3 m. n-S.; desolate, uninhabited.
1 7° °3' s-> l8o° 59 E.O
Ola is the native name for Heron islet, Louisiade archipelago.
Olenea, see Ularua, Fiji.
Olevuga, islet northwest from Florida, Solomon islands. 90 S., 1600 04' E.
Olimarao or Olimario, of the Caroline islands, was discovered by Liitke in 1828.
There are two islets on a reef 5-6 m. in circumference ; 200 inhabitants. 70 43' 30" N.,
145° 56' 45" E. 3.
Ollap, islet of Tamatam, Caroline islands. 70 38' n., 1490 30' E. 4.
Olo, one of the Pleiades group northwest from Uea, Loyalty group.
Oloosinga of Wilkes is Olosenga, Samoan islands.
Olorua, islet in the Lau group, Fiji; 250 ft. high.
Olosettga, Samoan islands, has an area of 6 sq. m. and is 1500 ft. high. North point
is in 140 iF s., 169° 32' w. Manua group. Belongs to the United States.
Olot, islet of Maloelab, Marshall islands. 8° 46' n., 17 i° 09' 42" E. 6.
Oluksakel, islet of Korror, Pelew islands; long, narrow and rocky,
oiu malau, Las Tres Marias, or Three Sisters, Solomon islands, were discovered by
Hernando Fnriquez of the Mendana expedition, May, 1568. The group lies north
of San Cristobal, extends 10 m. nnw-SSE.; flat, uninhabited, coral. 11.
Omba, see Oba, New Hebrides.
Ombelim, islet on west side of Wotto, Marshall islands. io° 10' n., 167° 05' E. 6.
Ombi, small, uninhabited island of the Yasawa group, Fiji. 17° 30/ 3cFs., 177° 04' E.©
Omene, low islet off Viti levu, Fiji. 16° 45' 16' s., 178° 38' E.O
Onata, see Pegan. o° 57' n., 1340 21' E.
Onavero, see Nawodo, Gilbert islands. 7.
One or Honni, islet of Makin, Gilbert islands. 30 16' N., 172° 54' 45" E.
Oneaka, on the same reef with Kuria, Gilbert islands. o° 16' N., 1730 26' 30" E.
Oneata, north from Mothe, 12 m. southeast from Lakemba, Fiji. Within a barrier
reef 26 m. round, 2.5X0.5 m.; 160 ft. high. East point is in 18° 24' 30" S.,
80 / //
I 27 30 E.
Oneeheow, an old English name of Niihau, of the Hawaiian group.
O’Neill, see Weitoa of the New Guinea region.
Oneke is perhaps identical with Onoatoa, Gilbert islands.
Onemok, islet of Kwadjalin, of the Marshall islands.
One Tree, a low islet of the Yasawra group, Fiji. 160 47' 09" s., 177° 26' 08" E.
Onevai, islet on north of Tongatabu. 21° 05' S., 1750 05' w.
Ongai, islet of Mokil, Caroline islands.
Ongea (Ogea), Fiji, consists of two islets, Ongea levu (large) and Ongea ndriti
(small). The former is 4 m. long, 1-2 m. wide, 270 ft. high, densely wooded, has
80 inhabitants. The latter is 1.7 m. E-w., 1 m. N-S., 300 ft. high, uninhabited.
North end of levu is in 190 03' s., 1810 30' E. The centre of ndriti is in 190 07' s.,
80 / .
1 29 E.
[208]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
125
Otlgotnbua, islet on the northeast coast of New Caledonia, containing about two acres
of grass.
Oniop, islet of Lukunor, Caroline islands; 300 inhabitants. 4.
Ono is northeast from Kandavu, Fiji; 4.5 X 3-5 m. Peak Mbualu, 1160 ft. high.
Population in 1880 about 790.
Ono i lau, Fiji, consists of six islands, 3 volcanic, 3 coral. Group extends 5 m.
NE-SW., and is 4 m. wide; highest peak, 370 ft. Population about 450. 20° 39' S.
Onoatoa or Clerk of the Gilbert islands. i° 51' S., 175° 36' E. Described by Rev. H.
Bingham as 12 m. long, having a lagoon bordered by a reef on the western side,
with a good boat channel near the centre. Islets are Tanyah, Bowerick, Sand,
Otoeie, Hack, Taburari, Onutu, Teumah. Population, 3000. 7.
Onoune, islet of the Caroline islands.
Onotlp or Onupe, islet of Namonuito, Caroline islands.
Ontong Java. 5° 25' S., 1590 30' E. A reef 50 m. E-W., 20 m. N-S., with many densely
peopled islets. Natives said to be of Polynesian origin. Only weapon a sling.
Named by Tasman in 1643, afterwards identified with the Ford Howe of Captain
Hunter, 1791.
Otiua, islet off the north end of Alu, Solomon islands.
Onutu, islet of Onoatoa, Gilbert islands.
Opea, islet near the Roux group on the south coast of New Guinea.
Oparo, a name of Rapa.
Oputotara, islet of Tahiti on the south end of the barrier reef.
Oraluk, Bordelaise or San Agostino of the Caroline islands, was discovered in 1826
by Captain Saliz of Bordeaux. It is 2 m. long, 100 ft. high, coral. 7° 38" n.,
J55° 09 E.
Oreia, small, low and wooded island of the Renard group, Louisiade archipelago.
Orlofe, islet, inhabited, off the north end of Alu, Solomon islands.
Ortned, islet of Wotje, Marshall islands. 90 33' 16" n., 170° io' 58" E.
Orokotl, islet off the north point of Babeltop, Pelew islands.
Orolong, 1.5 m. long, off northwest point of Uruktapi, Pelew islands. 70 18' N.,
134° 25 E.
Ortega, islet of the Solomon islands. 8°33's., i59°48/E. Named for Pedro de Ortega
Valencia, an officer of the Mendana expedition of 1567.
Ortsen, islet northwest from Cape Duperre on the north coast of New Guinea.
Orumbau, islet off the northwest coast of Malekula, New Hebrides. i6°04/S., 167° 2i/E.
Osasai, islet 225 ft. high, wooded, near Tagula in the Louisiade archipelago.
Osnaburgh, a name given by Wallis to Mururoa, Paumotu archipelago.
Osubu, a group of three islets, high and rocky, east from Avia in the Exploring isl¬
ands, Fiji. 170 io' s., 1810 io' E.O
Otafi, islet of Fakaafo. 90 23' S., 17 1° 13' w.
Otaheite is Tahiti with the article, O Tahiti.
Otdia, a form of Odia, see Wotje.
Otea, the Great Barrier of Cook, is about 21 m. long and 10 in its greatest breadth.
Central Peak rises to 2130 ft. This the largest of the islands to seaward of the
gulf of Hauraki, New Zealand.
[209]
126
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Otoeie, islet of Oneatoa, Gilbert islands.
Otooho, see Tetopoto of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Otovawa, islet 0.7X0. 5 m. in the Yasawa group, Fiji. South point is in 16° 56/4o"s.,
o / // _
177 19 20 E.
Otutolu, islet of Tongan group.
Oua, islet of Kotu, Hapai group, Tongan islands.
Oua Houka, see Huahuna of the Marquesas islands.
Ouap, of the New Guinea coast. 30 24 S., 143° 28' E.
Ouap, see Yap of the Caroline islands.
Ouapou, see Huapu of the Marquesas islands. 23.
Oudot, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 70 24' 10" N., 15 1° 44' 34" E.
OueSSant or Tariwerwi is low and wooded, south from Wari, in the New Guinea
region. n° io' S., 151° 13' E.
Ounalik, islet of Namonuito, Caroline islands. 4.
Oura, see Takapoto, Paumotu archipelago.
Otirik, islet of Butaritari, Gilbert islands. 30 iF 15" n., 172° 41 E.
Ovaka, islet of the Tongan group.
Ovalau, Fiji, is 8 m. n-s., and 6 m. E-w.; 2089 ft. high. Levuka is the principal port.
The observatory on the east side is in 17° 40 46" S., 178° 52' 40" E.
Ovalll or Passage, Fiji, is 0.5 m. long, 104 ft. high (Vatu i thake). 170 22 30" S.,
178° 48' E.O
Ovau is between Fauro and Bougainville, Solomon islands; 1340 ft. high. 8° 48' S.,
1560 E'
Ovawo, near Yasawa, Fiji, is 1.5 m. in circumference, 40 ft. high. 16° 47' 30" s.,
O / s~\ .
177 25 E.O
Ove, islet south from Umboi in the Bismarck archipelago. Thickly populated.
Ovolau, see Ovalau, Fiji.
Oua raha is Santa Ana, Solomon islands. Owa riki is Santa Catalina. Natives are
lighter colored and of finer physique than their neighbors.
Owen Stanley is Sabari or Sabarai of the Louisiade archipelago.
Paaba is on the northwest coast of New Caledonia, 6 m. east from Tande. It is 5 in.
n-s., and is inhabited by the Neneena tribe.
Paaio, islet in Banare bay on the north west coast of New Caledonia.
Paama is 3 m. from the northwest point of Api, New Hebrides; 5 m. n-s., 1.2 m. E-w.;
about 1900 ft. high. 160 28' s., 168° 12' E.
Paanopa, a form of Bonabe.
Pachiai, islet of Andema, Caroline islands, at the northeast point of the reef.
Pacific is north of Ronongo, Solomon islands. 70 52' S., 156° 30' E. II.
Padeaids or Traitors, an extensive group of low islets, about 30 m. E-W., on the north
coast of New Guinea. i° io/ s., 136° 45' E.
Pagan, of the Marianas, is 8X2.5 m. and has three adtive volcanoes from 800-1000
ft. high. 18° 04' n., 1450 42' E. See map under Marianas.
Paguaiganique, islet on the southeast side of the reef of Andema, Caroline islands.
Paguenema, see Pakin, Caroline islands.
[210]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
12 7
09 E.
146° 43' E.O
Pahare, islet on the eastern reef of Huaheine, Society islands.
Paho, north of Saibai on the south coast of New Guinea. 9° 18" S., 142 46 E.
PaigO, see Boigu of the Talbot islands on the New Guinea coast. 90 20' S., 142° 29' E.
Pakin, of the Caroline islands, was discovered by Liitke in 1828; 5 islets extending
5 m. nw-SE., Katelma, Ta, Tagaik, Kapenoas. Called also Pakeen and Pegue-
nema. 70 02' n., 1570 47' 30” E. 5.
Palakuru or Pigeon, near New Britain, in Bismarck archipelago. 4 16 s., 152° 21 E.
Palao, another form of Pelew.
Palav, islet of Ontong, Java. 50 05' S., 159° 20' E.
Palea, islet of Fakaafo. 90 22' S., 171° 12' w.
Palilug or Goode, is small, 250 ft. high, in Torres strait. io° 32' S., 142
Pallikulo, islet of Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
Palm, a large group in Halifax bay, on the Australian coast. 18° 42' S.,
Palm, of the Solomon islands. 70 30' S., 157° 47" E.
Palmer, a high island in the Hudson group, Fiji. 170 45' s., 177° 07' E.O
Palmerston, eight sandy islets on a reef enclosing a lagoon. Discovered by Cap¬
tain Cook June 16, 1774, and named for Lord Palmerston, then First Lord of
the Admiralty. 18° 04' s., 163° io' w.
Palmyra or Samarang was discovered by
Captain Sawle, of the American vessel
Palmyra, November 7, 1802. There are
several islets not over six feet high
extending over an area of 5.7 m. E-W.,
1.6 m. N-S. The position, according to
Captain Skerrett, is 50 49' 04” N., 162°
1 1 29" w.; 50 islets. Taken for the FIG* 9'
Hawaiian Kingdom bjr Captain Zenas Bent, of Honolulu, in 1862. Annexed b)^
Great Britain May 28, 1889. The proclamation, issued under Kamehameha IV.,
was as follows :
•W —
{/VJty If* I
“Whereas, on the fifteenth day of April, 1862, Palmyra island, in lat. 5 deg. 50 min. n. and
long. 16 1 deg. 53 min. w. was taken possession of with the usual formalities by Capt. Zenas Bent,
he being duly authorized to do so in the name of Kamehameha IV. King of the Hawaiian Islands.
“Therefore, This is to give notice that the said island so taken possession of is henceforth
to be considered and respedted as part of the domain of the King of the Hawaiian Islands.
(Signed) L. KAMEHAMEHA.
Department of Interior, June 18, 1862. Minister of the Interior.”
Pam, islet in Harcourt bay, New Caledonia.
Panabahai or Peak is a grassy island 200 ft. high, off the southwest point of Panati-
nani of the Louisiade archipelago. Pana is the native word for island. See
Malay Pulo, Sulu Po.
Panabobaiana, west of the Duehateau group, Louisiade archipelago; 0.7 m. in diam¬
eter; 75 ft. high. 110 16' 43" s., 152° 21' 3 7" E.
Panabobo, eastern islet of the Montemont group, Louisiade archipelago; 50 ft. high.
Panakrusima or Earle of the Louisiade archipelago; 360 ft. high.
Panaktlba, islet of Mabneian, Louisiade archipelago.
[2x1]
128
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Panamatl or Woody, islet 200 ft. high, on Bagana reef, Louisiade archipelago.
n° 28' S., 153° ii' E.
Panangaribll, islet near Pananumara, Louisiade archipelago.
Panantilliail or Sharpe is an inhabited islet of the Calvados group, Louisiade archi¬
pelago.
Pananumara, in the Louisiade archipelago, is 1.3 m. E. by N. - w. by S.; 425 ft. high.
Panapompom, a wooded and inhabited island, 2 m. in diameter, 520 ft. high, 2 m.
southeast from Panniet, Louisiade archipelago.
Panarairai, the smaller of the Jomard group, Louisiade archipelago.
Panaroran, with Baiwa and Panawadai in the Renard groun, Louisiade archipelago.
ii° 07' s., 152° 30' E. Also called Eddystone; 540 ft. high.
Panarurawara is the midmost of the Duehateau group, Louisiade archipelago; 75 ft.
high. ii° 1 6' S., 152° 21 E.
Panasia or Real, of the Louisiade archipelago, is uninhabited, 2 m. long and very
narrow; 530 ft. high. n° og' S., 152° 22' E.
Panatinani or Joannet, of the Louisiade archipelago, is an inhabited island 10.5 m.
long and mo ft. high. The northwest point is in n° io/ S., 153° 06' E. 9.
Panaudiudi is 1 m. long, 390 ft. high, northeast from Utian, Louisiade archipelago.
Panavaravara, inhabited island on the Calvados chain.
Panavi or Banepe=Banga Netepa of the Matema islands. io° 17' s., 166° ig E.
British protectorate proclaimed August 18, 1898.
Panawadai, with Panaroran and Baiwa, in the Renard group.
Panawaipona, the larger of the two islets of the Jomard group, 1X0.3 m. iT 15' s.,
152° 09' E.
Panawina, inhabited island of the Louisiade archipelago, 4 m. E-w., 945 ft. high.
iT iT s., 1530 E. 9.
Panemote. g° 28' s., 15 1° 58' e.
Paneinur, islet of Andema, Caroline islands, at the south end of the reef.
Pangai, islet of Fakaafo. g° 24' 28" S., 171° 12" W.
Pangaimotu or Pangimotu, islet of Tongatabu. 21° 07' 30" s., 1750 08' w.
Paniau, islet of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Panniet or Deboyne, of the Louisiade archipelago, has an area of 10 sq. m.; 2000 pop¬
ulation in 1890. io° 41 S., 152° 23 E. The inhabitants make the best canoes and
sell them for 10-50 stone adzes. (This is of former days.)
Panopea, see Bonabe.
Papakena, see Tureia of the Paumotu archipelago. 2,2,.
PapleS, on the New Guinea coast ; 250 ft. high, well wooded. io° 33' 20" S., 150° 44/45"e.
Parama or Bampton (Brampton), on south coast of New Guinea; 10—12 m. in circum¬
ference, inhabited g° s., 143° 22" E. Station of the London Missionary Society.
Paraoa, Hariri or Gloucester was discovered by Wallis in 1767. It is low and at
present uninhabited. There is a stone structure at the southeast point. I9°o8's.,
140° 40' W. Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Patapotlpon, a small island a few miles south from Panniet of the Louisiade archi¬
pelago. io° 47' S., 152° 24' E.
Paris, see Aasu on the north coast of New Guinea.
[212]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
129
Pari, two islands off the northeast coast of Guadalcanar, Solomon islands. 90 43' 3<>/S.,
160° 46' E. Pari pile is smaller than Pari sule, which is about 1 m. E-W. by half a mile.
Parivara, see Varivara, New Guinea.
Pariwara, two islets near Redsear bay, New Guinea.
Parry, a small group of the Bonin islands. 27° 40' n., 142° 14' E.
Parry, islet of Bniwetok, Marshall islands. ii° 21 N., 162° 25' E.
Parry, see Mauki of the Hervey islands.
Parseval is at the entrance to Port St. Vincent, New Caledonia.
Pariim or Parram, islet of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Pass, see Anchorage, Suvaroff group.
Passage, in Choiseul bay, Solomon islands.
Passage, see Ovalu, Fiji.
Passage, see Vatu i thake, Fiji.
Patik, islet of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Patrocillio or Byer, of the Hawaiian group, was discovered by Captain Zipiani, of the
Spanish ship Nuestra Sefiora del Pilar in 1799; 3 m. long, volcanic. Called Byer
by Captain Morrell, July, 1825. Place doubtful. 28° 30' N., 1770 18' E. It has
been expunged from the British Admiralty charts on perhaps insufficient grounds.
Paumotu, Tuamotu or Fow archipelago. Coral atolls extending over sixteen degrees
of longitude. The native name means “Cloud (or bunch) of islands.” Quiros, in
1606, saw several islands of the group, but these cannot now be determined so
great is the similarity among all these islands. Many of the great navigators ob¬
served several islands, but Wilkes (1841) gave more accurate details, and to his
surveys the modern charts are chiefly indebted. The inhabitants vary from the
Vitian to the Tahitian type. There are 78 atolls each numbering many islets; 18
atolls are inhabited, the population being estimated at 8000, nearly all of them
Protestants. Flies are very troublesome. Principal exports, copra and pearl shell,
in the hands of American and British merchants of Tahiti. France took the
archipelago in 1844 and the French Resident is stationed on Fakarava. The de¬
tached islands to the southeast, Dueie, Henderson, Pitcairn and Oeno are British
possessions. From the structure of the atolls their form is continually changing,
and occasionally in severe storms the sea breaks over them destroying the inhabi.
tants and making radical changes in the geography. 2 0, 21, 22.
Pavuvu, see Russell, Solomon islands.
Peacock, see Ahii of the Paumotu archipelago. 20.
Peak, see Panabahai of the Louisiade archipelago.
Peard, a name of Mangareva or Gambier. 22.
Pearl and Hermes reef, Hawaiian islands. Discovered in 1822 by two whalers,
Pearl and Hermes wrecked near the eastern end on the same night, within ten
miles of each other. An atoll extending E-w. 16 m., N-s. 9 m., or 40 m. in circum¬
ference, with 12 islets, the southeast one in 27° 47' 50" N., 175" 51' w. 2.
Peddlar, see Arno, Marshall islands.
Peel, one of the Coffin group, Bonin islands. 27° 08" N., 142 15" E.
Pegatl, St. David, Freewill or Onata. Reported by ship Warwick in 1761. Atoll 14 m.
N-S., with 4 low islets; inhabited. Under the Dutch flag. o° 57' N., 1340 21 E.
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 2. — 9. [213]
130
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Pegue, one of the Hermit islands. i° 35' S., 144° 58' E. 8.
Peihi, islet on the west reef of Huaheine, Society islands.
Peka, high island of Fiji. 16° 52' 54." S., 177° 26' 06'' E.©
Pele, northeast from Fate, New Hebrides; 2 m. long, 300 ft. high; Polynesian inhabitants.
Pelelep, of Dnperrey is Pingelap, Caroline islands.
Peleliu or Pililu, of the Pelew islands, extends 3 m. NE-SW. 6° 58' N., 1340 16' 15" E.
Pelew or Palao, the Arrecifos of Villalobos, who discovered them in 1543, extend about
85 m. N-S., while the greatest breadth does not exceed 7 m. A barrier reef with
many passages extends the whole length of the group. The population in 1875
was 10,000; less than a century before it was 40,000. No pestilence, no massacres,
simply want of energy. Semper says: “The iron of the European followed too
close upon the stone of the savage.” The six principal islands are N’yaur on the
south, Peleliu, Eil Malk or Irakong, Uruktapi, Korror (seat of government), and
Babeltop, with many islets.
Pelican, on the Australian coast. 130 53' s., 1430 52' E.
Pell, see Lisiansky of the Hawaiian group.
Petne, the northeast islet of the Hermit group. i° 29' S., 145° 06' E.
Penantipode, a name sometimes given to Antipodes island, New Zealand.
Pender, a circular islet of the Engineer group, Eouisiade archipelago.
Penrhyn, see Tongareva.
Pentecost, see Arag of the New Hebrides.
Percy, low and wooded, 2 m. long, in Cloudy bay, on southeast coast of New Guinea.
Peregrina (La), see Gente Hermosa. 15.
Peroat, see Peru of the Gilbert islands.
Perry, a high island of the Hudson group, Fiji. 170 4F 30” S., 1 7 70 05' E.O
Peru, Sunday, Maria, Eliza, Peroat or Francis, was discovered by Captain Clerk of the
ship John Palmer in 1827; 11 m. long, 6-8 ft. high. Population about 2000.
Southeast point is in T 27' 35" S., 176° 05' w.
Pescado (Isla de), discovered by Quiros February 21, 1606. Perhaps the same as San
Bernardo, or even Solitaria.
Pescadores, see Bikini, Marshall group, or Rongelab.
[2I4l
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS. 131
Petat, off west side of Bouka, Solomon islands. 5° 09' s., 154° 30' E.
Philip, see Sorol of the Caroline islands.
Philip, islet at the entrance of Makira harbor, San Cristoval, Solomon islands.
Phillips, a name given to Makemo, Paumotu archipelago, by Trumbull in honor of Sir
Richard Phillips, late Sheriff of London.
Phoebe, see Baker, also Tamana, Gilbert islands.
Phoenix, a group of 8 low, scattered islands. For position see the islands composing it,
Gardner or Kemin, Hull, Sydney, Phoenix, Birnie, Enderbury, Canton, McKean. 17.
Phoenix, the nomenclator of the previous group, is a mile long and half as broad,
18-20 ft. high. Formerly had deposits of guano, but was worked out in 1871.
British protectorate was proclaimed June 29, 1889. 3° 47' S., 170° 43' w.O
Piano, one of the Hermit group. i° 34' S., 144° 56' E.
Piedu, island 540 ft. high in Bougainville strait, Solomon islands. 6°52/S., 15 6° 09' E.
Piele, near Nguna, New Hebrides; 2 m. long; inhabited.
Pig, see Nimoa of the Louisiade archipelago.
Pig, see Ulu of the Bismarck archipelago.
Pigen, islet of Aurli, Marshall islands.
Pigeon, on the Australian coast. 12° 3F S., 1430 18' E.
Pigeon, near Moresby island, New Guinea; 60 ft. high.
Pigeon, see Credner of the Bismarck archipelago.
Pigeon, see Palakuru of the Bismarck archipelago.
Pikela or Lydia of the Caroline islands. 8° 38' n., 147" 13' E. Considered doubtful. 3.
Pikelot or Coquille, of the Caroline islands, was discovered by Duperrey July 3, 1824,
and by him called Bigalli. It is but 300 yds. in diameter, low and uninhabited.
Liitke places it in 8° 09' N., 147° 42' E. 3.
Pikhat, islet of Butaritari, Gilbert islands. 30 13' 10" n., 172' 40' E.
Pileni, inhabited island 1 m. nw-SE., ioo ft. high, in the Matema group. British pro¬
tectorate declared August 18, 1898.
Pililu, see Peleliu, Pelew islands.
Pilipal, islet of Namonuito, Caroline islands.
Pilot, islet at the mouth of Requin bay, Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
Pinaki, a form of Nganati.
Pine, see Hueguenee, Loyalty islands.
Piner, a low island of theTiri group, off Vanua levu, Fiji. 16 ’ 23,54,/S., 179° 08' 25;/ E.O
Pines (Isle of), lies southeast from New Caledonia and belongs to France; 11.5 m.
nw-SE.; 880 ft. high. About 800 natives of Papuan stock and formerly cannibals.
Here the French missionaries took refuge in 1847 when driven by the natives from
Balade in New Caledonia. 22° 39' 20" S., 167' 28' E. 13.
Pingelap, Musgrave or MacAskill, of the Caroline islands, was discovered by Captain
Musgrave in the Sugar Cane , 1793; and again by Captain MacAskill of the ship
Lady Barlow in 1809. Three islands compose the group which is 2.5 m. in diam¬
eter; Pingelap is the southern and principal, Taka is small, and Tugulu (Chikuru)
is the northern. They are well wooded and have about 900 inhabitants, of light
color. 6° 1 2' n., 160° 53' E. 5*
Pionne, islet of Banare bay on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
[215]
132
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Piper, a group on the Australian coast. 12° 15' S., 143° 14' E.
Pipoa, on the Australian coast. 14° 07' S., 144° 32' E.
Piron or Yeina is n m. northwest of Tagula in the Louisiade archipelago. Inhab¬
itants warlike.
Pise or Pis, islet of Rnk, Caroline islands. 70 42' 30" n., 15 1° 46' E.
Pisonia, one of the Wellesley group in the Gulf of Carpentaria, northeast from Morn-
ington. 1 6° 30' S., 139° 32' 30" E.
Pitcairn was discovered by Carteret July 2, 1 767. Supposed by some to be the Encar-
naeion of Quiros; 2.2 m. E-w., 1 m. wide, 1000 ft. high. Named for a relative of
the Major Pitcairn who fired the first shot in the American revolution. Most in¬
terest attaches to this island from the mutiny of the Bounty in 1789. These mu¬
tineers were not the first inhabitants, however, for skeletons buried with stone
adzes and a pearl shell not found now on the island, have been unearthed in several
places. British protectorate proclaimed August 18, 1898. Adamstown is, accord¬
ing to Beechey, in 25° 03" 37" S., 130° 08" 23" w.
Pitt, a small, low, wooded island on the New Guinea coast. io° 35' 20" S., 15 1° 02/ 50^ E.
Pitt, see Makin of the Gilbert islands.
Pitt, see Rangiauria, one of the Chatham islands.
Pisaras, islet of Namonuito, Caroline islands. 8° 34" 20' n., 150° 32" 30^ E. 4*
Platform, islet in midst of reefs, Admiralty group. 2° 44" S., 147° 03' E.
Pleasant, see Nawodo of the Gilbert islands.
Pleiades, a group northwest from Uea, Loyalty islands. They are, beginning at the
northeast end, North, Isenay or La Baleine, La Tortue, Fatouba, Hueguenee or
Pine, Oidi, Deguala.
Poanopa, a way of spelling Bonabe.
Pollard Rock, a name of Gardner of the Hawaiian islands.
Pole, in Torres strait. io° 12" S., 142° 28' E.
Poll, of the Three Sisters group in Torres strait. io° 15" S., 142° 49" E.
Poloa, islet of Tongatabu on the northwest. 20° 05' 30" S., 175° 14" 3c/' w. 18.
Poloat or Enderby, of the Caroline islands. In 1799 Ibargoitia discovered an island
which he called Kata. Freycinet found it was two distinct islands, one of which
he called Alet, the other Poloat or Pozoat. They are on a reef 6 m. E-W. Popula¬
tion about 100. 70 19' 25” N., 1490 15' E. The group is usually called Enderby,
a name given by Captain Renneck in 1826 in honor of his employers, London
merchants.
Pomodedere, in Cloudy bay on the New Guinea coast. io° 17' S., 148° 46' E.
Pompom, islet off the south coast of Murua in the Kiriwina group. g°oy/S., 152° 3F E.
Potiafidin, one of the Bonin islands.
Ponape or Ascension was discovered by Lutke January 2, 1828; 12 m. n-S., 14.5 m.
E-w.; 2861 ft. high; coral reef 60 m. in circumference, on which are many basaltic
rocks or islets. Metalanien harbor, which is in 6° 51' N., 158° 18" E., has on the
shores very interesting ruins (see Geographical Journal , 1899, p. 105 ; also, La Isla
de Ponape, by Pereiro, 1895; both give maps of these ruins which were first
noticed by Dr. L. H. Gulick of the American mission). Ponape is the largest and
most important of the Caroline islands. Fanua pei=Land of the holy places. 5.
[216]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
i33
Pones, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands.
Ponui, in Auckland harbor, New Zealand.
Poporang, islet of Shortland, Solomon islands. II.
Porcupine, islet at base of Mont d’Or at the south end of New Caledonia; 300 ft. high,
rocky and covered with fir trees.
Porondu or Contrariete, islet on the southwest coast of New Caledonia; low and
wooded.
Pororan, off the west coast of Bouka, Solomon islands. 50 15' S., 154° 30' E.
Portland, three low, wooded islands in the Bismarck archipelago, the eastern one the
largest; 2.5 m. long, inhabited. 2° 38' s., 1490 40' E.
Portland, see Waikawa, New Zealand.
Portlock, in Torres strait. io° 07' S., 142° 22 E.
Possession, northeast from Banks in Torres strait. io° 05' S., 142° 20 E.
Possession, ill Endeavor channel. io° 42' S., 142° 23' E. It seems probable that there
is but one Possession island, but on the chart sometimes one, sometimes the other
position is given.
Pott, one of the Belep group northwest from New Caledonia; 4 m. nw-SE.
Powell, islet near Pender in the Eouisiade archipelago.
Pozoat or Poloat, eastern islet of Enderby group, Caroline islands. 70 20rN., 1490 17'E.
Predour (Ee) islet off St. Vincent bay on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Predpriatie, see Akahaina, Paumotu archipelago. Named for Kotzebue’s sloop of war.
Prince Frederick Henry, a low, flat island, 90 m. long, on the southwest coast of
New Guinea, north of the Gulf of Carpentaria.
Prince of Wales, a group in Torres strait, comprising Thursday, Horn, Prince of
Wales, Friday (Quarantine station) , Goode and Hammond. logo's., 142° 1 Fe.O
Prince William Henry, see Nengonengo of the Paumotu archipelago.
Prince William Islands, Tasman’s name for the Fijian group.
Princessa, see Lib of the Marshall islands. 6.
Proby, the name given by the discoverer, Captain Edwards, to Niuafoou, Tongan islands.
Prospect, see Washington.
Protection, see Leausan, off the northwest coast of Fate, New Hebrides. Leleppa, on
the same coast, is also called Protection, or are they perhaps confounded?
Providence, see Udjelong of the Marshall islands.
Pudiue or Observatory, islet off the northeast coast of New Caledonia. Here was
buried Huon de Kermadec, captain of the Espcrance of D’Entrecasteaux’ expe¬
dition. (Died May 7, 1792.)
Puen, islet, see Montravel, New Caledonia.
Pugelug, islet of the Caroline islands.
Pukapuka, a name given by traders to Tog in the Torres group.
Pukapuka, or Clerke, low, inhabited atoll of the Paumotu archipelago. 17 23' S.,
138 35 w.
Pukapuka, the north island of the Danger group, 80 ft. high. Population, 375;
coconut trees abundant. io'J 53' S., 165 45' 30" w.
Pukapuka, Henuake, Honden or Dog, was discovered by Lemaire and Schouten April
10, 1616; 330 m. west from Manahiki, and consists of three islets around a fine
[217]
tyeex to the pacific /slaves.
Used lagtcn The drst . - ; . . h: wj was lost here in 1864.- Uninhabited, but
i: said that there are snakes there in'' 55 40" 5., 13S' i~ 36’ w.G Must not
he ctntannded with hanger island. 22.
Park aara.ro — leeward • ;ne of the islets of Vairaatea, Panmotn archipelago.
North era is in io' zS S 1593 iS nr. 22.
Pnkaniha. or Serle. was dis-eavered bv Captain Wilson in the Day May 2S, i~9~,
h: named :: s:r the arthrr :: FF a h l a; mr 7.5 \ a. a m.. ta ft. high, with
cl: sea lag', n tar inhabitants. Southeast extreme is in iS' a a 30 s., 1-6' 5S 30 w.
Beechev. 22.
Pmkananga ,r; = windward islet of airautea. also called Egmont : discovered
hr Wallis ia rt" ta: tS s. 139s iS w. 22.
Pnketutu :r Neakes. an Uanukan barber. New Zealand.
ua lent, Fiji. 16
25 24" S„ 179' OJ E.O
mat is hall a mile lor p-. low. inhabited.
Pulo
.. Ita 02 E.
O
Caroline islands.
was discovered in 1761.
Low,
4 20 X., 132' 2 S E.l ? )
T * "1 A
- Lara .me islands.
4-
Pnlo Snge or Pnlnsnk. see Stak
Pnlo Wat. see Fanafik. Caroline islands.
Ptatia. n rshesmnrst tithe Malume mat Bismarck archipelago. 3 10's., 154' 25 E.
Pnnawan largest :f the Fnperre group, Lmisiade archipelago.
Pat r at" 2 taTE . islet :ft Care Surmlle. San CrdstoraL Solomon islands.
Pat ray. a grmr :f which the islands were hr K reason stern named Bat, Mole and
Manse. h -5 5. rut' :i z The inhabitants resemble Admiralty islanders. 8.
Pad smart Trtpic Birr see Ata of the Tongan islands. Tasman’s name.
Pvrataatd. -islet
1 r.
Qakea, islet tn the east coast tf . anna Lara. New Hebrides, at the south entrance to
?:ra Pataesm mere the language of Mora is spoken.
Queen Charlotte, see Akfak: Panmotn archipelago. 22.
Queer Charlotte see Ntaknaawake. Panmotn archipelago. 22.
Quemel, islet on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Qnfrosa. a name of PottapA Caroline islands.
Quoin, an the Australian coast. 12 25 5.. tut' 29' E.
Quoin, nek islet a mile sontheast from Mugnla, south coast of New Guinea.
Quoin :r Tna stutheast from Orangerie bay, south coast of New Guinea.
Qnoy tr Ktmatt. tn the New Guinea coast, extends S m. e-w., and is well wooded.
Raberabe, low island of r :;i ad' y 25 5.. 178' 43 20" e.O Also Rabi Rabi.
Radogala. see Rongelab. Marshall islands.
Raensky, a group cf the Pamnotu archipelago, discovered by Bellingshausen in 1820.
C insists cf Tet'tto. Tuinaka ana Hiti. 21.
Rahirta see Rargdroa, Panmotn archipelago. 20.
~2I&~
i35
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Raiatea or Ulietea, of the Society islands, is about 30 m. in circumference, and the
highest peak is 3389 ft. Population, 1400; all Protestants. Tahaa is within the
same reef and there are many islets between them. i6c 40' s., 154 40 w. 20.
Raine, in Torres strait. n° 35' 50" s., 1440 02 ' 20 " e.
Rairoa, see Rangiroa, Paumotu archipelago. 20.
Rakaanga or Reirson lies about 20 m. nnw. from Monahiki. Discovered by Bellings¬
hausen in 1820, who called it Grand Duke Alexander. Captain Patrickson called
it Reirson in 1822. Population, about 350. No lagoon. io°02,s., 161 05 30' w.
British protectorate declared August 9, 1889.
Rakino, in Auckland bay, New Zealand.
Raki Raki, high island off Viti levu, Fiji. 170 20' 20” s., ij~ 59 30'" e.O
Rakiura, the Maori name of Stewart island, New Zealand.
Ralick, a name given to the western chain of the Marshall islands.
Rambi (Rabi), high, inhabited island of Fiji; 8.7 m. NE-SW., 4.5 m. wide, 1550 ft. high.
North point is in 160 24' 40" s., i8o° 08' E.
Ramos (Los), a name given by both Gallego and Figueroa to Malaita, Solomon islands.
8° 19 s., 160° 09' E.
Ratnung, islet on the northern side of Yap, Caroline islands.
Ranai, a form of Lanai, Hawaiian islands.
Ratlgiauria or Pitt, the southeastern of the Chatham islands, New Zealand.
Rangiroa, Rahiroa, Yliegen, Deans or Nairsa, is an extensive atoll with many islets;
66 m. long, inhabited. (Wilkes, I., 337.) 15° 05' 15" s., 147 58' 34 w. 20.
Rangitoto, a volcanic island in Auckland harbor, New Zealand.
Rano, islet on the northeast coast of Malekula, New Hebrides. 12.
Raoul or Sunday was discovered by D’Entrecasteaux March 15, 1793; 12 m. in cir¬
cumference, 1627 ft. high. Of the Kermadec group, belonging to New Zealand.
29° 20 S., 178° ic/ w.O Joseph and Ange Raoul were pilots on the Recherche.
Raoul was represented on former charts as an island of some size between Gicquel and
Willaumez in the Bismarck archipelago. It is now found to be part of a moun¬
tainous peninsula of New Britain. 10.
Rapa or Oparo was discovered by Vancouver December 22, 1791 ; about 20 m. in cir¬
cumference, and 2100 ft. high. Natives do not know the name Oparo, but call the
island Lappa (Rapa). Climate delightful. When discovered population num¬
bered 1500 fine Polynesians resembling Maoris; Februar}- 23, 1S82, there were but
100 all told. On six hills there are stone fortifications like the Rapanui terraces.
Natives make a thick, heavy kapa. French protectorate in 1844; island annexed
to France February, 1882. See account b}r Captain Vine Hall, Proc. Roy. Geog.
Soc ., June, 1869. 27° 36' s., 144 22 w.
Rapaiti, islet of Rapa. 27° 38' s., 144° 15' w.
Rapanui or Easter, said to have been seen by Davis in 1686. Admiral Roggewein
saw it first on April 6, 1722 (Easter Sunday). Cook saw it in 1774. It is of tri¬
angular form, the longest side measuring 13 m. NE-SW. Volcanic with trachytic
lava and obsidian. The inhabitants are Pol}mesian from Rapa, and they call
their island “Te Pito o te honua,” the navel of the earth. The most interesting
remains on the island are the huge images so often described, and other relics of
i36
IXDEX TO THE PA CIFIC ISLANDS.
ancient inhabitants. Rapanui was surveyed by Beeehey in 1825, and by H. M. S.
Topaze in November, 1S68. For full account see Anuario Hidrografico de la
Marina dc Chili , 1881, pp. 164-190., Santiago.; Tour du Monde , XXXVI., 225.
The best account is by W. J. Thompson, U. S. Navy, in the Report of the U. S.
Nat. Museum , 1SS9, p. 447. From this the map is copied. 27°o8's., 109' 25' w.
Raputata or Welle, also called Sanaroa, of the D'Entrecasteaux group, is low, 10 m.
x-s., S m. E-w.. About 250 inhabitants. 9' 38’ S., 151' E. 9.
Rara, western of Sloss group, Louisiade archipelago.
Rara ni Tinka, a name of Tavuka, Fiji.
Raraka, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered October 1, 1831, by Captain
Ireland of the brig Adhemar . It is triangular, 15 m. on a side. Lagoon has deep
Inhabited. West point is in tWoS's., 145" oo^o" w.
00
o.)
FIG. II.
blue water. (Wilkes, I.,
Raroia or Barclay de Tolly
was discovered by Bell¬
ingshausen in 1820; of
the Paumotu archipel¬
ago ; population, 75. The
north point is in 15' 56’ S.,
142° 22' w.
Rarotonga, a beautiful isl¬
and of the Hervey group,
was discovered by John
Williams in 1S23; at
least he gave the first
authentic report of it.
It is about 30 m. in cir¬
cumference, volcanic, and
very fertile. Mt. Ter-
vanga is 2920 ft. high.
Population, 2000. English protectorate declared in 1888. 21
Rat, in Forteseue strait, New Guinea. io° 36’ 35 S., 150° 54' E.
Ratack or Radack, the eastern chain of the Marshall islands.
Rativa, islet on the coast of Yanua levu, Fiji. i6: 44 20 s., 179 40' 30 E.O
Raur, southeast islet of Wolea, Caroline islands ; inhabited. 7'2i 30 N'., I43“57,30, E. 3.
Ravahere, see Manaka, Paumotu archipelago. Some refer it to Marakau or Dauahaida.
Ravaivai, see Yavitao of the Austral islands.
Raven, see Xgatik of the Caroline islands. 5.
Ravenga, islet off Port Patteson, Yanua Lava, New Hebrides. 130 48' S., 167' 30' E.
Here the language of Motlav is spoken.
Ravil ravu, off Yanua levu, Fiji; 1.5x0.7m. Inhabited. 16' 27'24’s., 178' 56’ io'e.O
Razor, two islets near Sideia, Xew Guinea; 200 ft. high.
Real, see Panasia, Louisiade archipelago.
Reao or Clermont -Tonnere was discovered by Duperrey in 1822. A low, inhabited
atoll, 10-11 m. long and very narrow. Paumotu archipelago. Northwest end is
in 18' 16' 50 S., 137" 09' 06" w. 22.
20 S., i6o' w.
23-
* ^ q G Rakaanga
1U C>. A
Tongareva d<fv
io° s.
Monahiki ^
%
160°
w.
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
i37
Recherche (He de la), name given by the French to Vanikoro, New Hebrides.
Recreation, of Roggewein, is Makatea of the Panmotu archipelago.
Red, on the Australian coast. io° 50' s., 142° 20' E.
Redika, a wooded islet on the Great South Reef of New Caledonia.
Redlands, off Sandwich island, Bismarck archipelago. 30 S., 150° 45' E.
Redlick, a ring of low islands on a reef 4.5X2 m., with a closed lagoon, in the
Eouisiade archipelago. io° 5c/ S., 152° 30' E.
Redman, islet of Choiseul, Solomon islands.
Reef, see Matema group, Santa Cruz islands.
Refuge, islet of Bougainville, Solomon islands, near Cape Friendship.
Reid, Fiji; high. 17" 57' 20" s., 1810 38' 30" E.O
Reid, islet of Guadaleanar, Solomon islands.
Reid, a name of Tuinaka, Raeffsky islands. 21.
Reirson, name given to Rakaanga by Captain Patrickson in 1822.
Reitoru, Hikuera or Bird, a low, uninhabited island of the Paumotu archipelago.
1 7 48 10 s., 143 04 52 W. 21.
Rekareka or Goodhope of the Paumotu archipelago; inhabited; 5 m. NE-SW. by 4 m.
Boat entrance to lagoon. 16° 48' S., 141° 35' w.O 21.
Remalum, islet of Faitruk group in Ruk lagoon, Caroline islands.
Remski Korsakow, see Ailinginae, Marshall islands. Also Rimski-Korsakoff.
Renard or Fox, Eouisiade archipelago; 11 islets within reef. H. M. S. Renard , 1879.
io° 49' S., 152° 58' E.
Renard, Solomon islands; 1.5 m. long, 220 ft. high. Named for British war vessel,
Renard , 1880. 70 41' S., 156° 32' E. II.
Rendova, Solomon islands; volcanic, 2500 ft. high, densely wooded; 18 m. N-S., 8 m.
E-W. North point is in 8° 24' S., 157° 15' E. II.
Rennell, Solomon islands. Two islands, Mongiki = Bellona and Mongava = Rennell,
discovered by Butler in 1794. Population said to be Polynesian. British pro¬
tectorate declared August 18, 1898. West end n° 40' s., 1590 55' E.
Rennell, in Torres strait. 90 45' S., 143° 15' E.
Renny, see Aivo, Solomon islands.
Resolution, off southwest coast of Middle island, New Zealand. Named for Cook’s ship.
Resolution, see Tauere, Paumotu archipelago.
Revolution (lies de la), a name given by Marchand to the northwest group of the
Marquesas in 1791.
Reynold, see Vanua kula, Fiji.
Reynolds, of the Underwood group, Fiji. Named for William Reynolds (afterwards
Admiral). 170 43' 10" S., 177° 12' 10" E.O
Rica de Oro, Rica de Plata, two islands of the Bonin group. For years their
fabled riches were an El Dorado to the Dutch navigators.
Rich, see Bagabag in Astrolabe bay on the north coast of New Guinea.
Riche, of D’Entrecasteaux, is not an island but a bluff in Holnicote bay on the north¬
east coast of New Guinea. Riche was one of the naturalists on the Esperance.
Richmond, a low island of the Tiri group off Vanua levu, Fiji. 160 25' 24" S.,
179 07 50 E.O
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
138
Riff, north from Ronongo, Solomon islands. 70 49' S., 156° 26' E.
Rikarika, western and largest of the Lebrun group, Louisiade archipelago; 360 ft.
high. io° 52' S., 150° 57' E.
Rimitara, Austral islands; 2-3 m. in diameter, 315 ft. high; inhabited. 22°40,S., i52°45/w.
Rimski-Korsakoff, see Ailinginae, Marshall islands.
Rimsky, a name of Rongelab, Marshall islands, on some charts.
Ringgold, Fiji; a high, volcanic group, not inhabited, comprising Budd, Maury,
North, Holmes, De Haven; all named for officers of the Wilkes Expedition.
Riou, see Huahuna of the Marquesas islands.
Roahouga, see Huahuna of the Marquesas islands.
Roapoua, an old chart name for Huapu, Marquesas islands. Also spelled Roapua.
Robatu, see San Cristoval of the Solomon islands.
Robbe (Seal), islet in Marau sound, east end of Guadalcanar, Solomon islands.
Roberts (of Hergest) is Eiao of the Marquesas islands.
Roberts Isles, a name given by the Daedalus to the Marquesan group.
Rock, a low, inhabited island in Naloa bay, Vanua levu, Fiji. 160 39/24//S., 178° 39' E.©
Rocky, a dark-colored rock with a scant covering of grass on the summit, on the
southeast coast of New Guinea. io° 41' 25” S., 150° 59' 45" E.
Rocky, see Sophia of the Ellice islands.
Rocky, islet northwest from Mornington island in the Gulf of Carpentaria. 16° 19' S.,
1390 24' E.
Rofei, islet off Fauro, Solomon islands; 0,3X0. 5 m. 123 ft. high.
Rogeia or Heath, off east end of New Guinea, 4 m. nw-SE.; i m. wide, 1215 ft. high;
well wooded. io° 38' S., 150° 38' E.
Roger Simpson, a name of Apamama, Gilbert islands.
Roi, islet of Kwadjalin, Marshall islands. 6.
Roissy, off New Guinea. 30 15' s., 144° 03' E.
Rokahanga, a chart name of Rakaanga, Paumotu archipelago.
Romanzoff, see Tikei of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Romanzoff, see Wotje, Marshall islands.
Roncador or Candelaria reef, Solomon islands, was seen by the pilot Maurelle in
1781. Passing it in the night the noise of the breakers suggested the name
(Snorer). It is almost certain that it was the same reef seen by Mendana in 1567
and called by him Baxos de Candelaria. It is 18 m. in circumference and has two
openings on the southwest to a good lagoon. 6° 15' S., 159° 14 E. II.
Rongelab or Bigini, of the Marshall islands, the Pescadores of ancient charts, was
discovered by Wallis, September 3, 1767. A lagoon atoll 16 m. long. Gulick
gives the population in i860 at 120; Witte, in 1878, at 18. n° 19' n., 167° 35' E.©
Rongelapelap, islet of Rongerik, Marshall islands. n° 14' 30^ n., i66° 59' E.
Rongerik, Marshall islands. Discovered by Kotzebue; 36 m. long, with a width from
3-20 in. The population in i860, according to Gulick, was 60; in 1878 Witte
gives only 10. n° 14' N., 1660 35' E.© 6.
Ronhua, islet in Port Uitoe on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Ronongo, island south from Vella Lavella, Solomon islands, from which it is sepa¬
rated by Wilson strait. About 2000 ft. high. 8° S., 156° 32' E.
[222]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
i39
Rook, see Umboi, Bismarck archipelago. This name was given by Dainpier for Sir
George Rook.
Roporopo, islet 1 nr. southwest from Mugula in Orangerie bay, New Guinea. io° 31S.,
T49° 47' 37" H.
Roro or Yule, on the south coast of New Guinea, is 4X 1.5 m., and 534 ft. high. 8°48/S.,
146° 32' E. A mission station. The name is sometimes writen Lolo.
Rosario, of the Bonin islands, is 148 ft. high. 27° 18' n., 140° 50' E.
Rose, a coral islet discovered by Freycinet; named for his wife who accompanied him;
70 sea miles east from Manila, Samoan islands. It is inhabited only by birds. By
the treaty of 1899 it belongs to the United States. 140 31' 30" S., 168° 08' 30" w. 15.
RoSSe, northeast coast of Auckland islands, New Zealand.
Rossel, see Roua of the Louisiade archipelago. Rossel was Lieutenant on the Recherche.
Rota, Zarpane, Sarpan, or Luta, of the Marianas, is of calcareous rock, 12X5.5 m- an(i
800 ft. high. 140 08' n., 1450 io' E. See map under Marianas.
Rotch, see Oneke.
Rotcher, see Tamana of the Gilbert islands.
Rotterdam, Tasman’s name for Naniuka of the Tongan group.
Rotuma, Rotuam or Grenville, was discovered by Captain Edwards in 1791 ; 8 nr. E-w.,
2 m. n-S.; 800 ft. high. Islets on the south are Solnahou, Solkop; on the east,
Afgalia; north, Hanoua; on the west, Ataou, Hofliona, Ouea. Population, 2500;
all Christian. While the people are classed as Polynesian, their language belongs,
according to Codrington, to the Melanesian group. 12° 28' S., 177° E. 16.
Roua, Rua or Rossel, of the Louisiade archipelago, is 18.5X6 m., 2750 ft. high,
thickly wooded. Inhabitants, Papuan cannibals ; a short, robust race, sooty brown;
their language bears no resemblance to any known New Guinea dialect. East
point is in n° 23' S., 154° 18' E. 9.
Round, see Alewakalou, Fiji.
Round, islet in Marau sound, Solomon islands. Another of this name off Ysabel in
the same group. Still another in the Woodlark group.
Roux, five islets covered with coconuts, off the southeast coast of New Guinea.
io° 39' S., 149° 58' E.
Rowa is the northernmost of the Reef group, Banks islands. It has a mission station.
Royalist, a name sometimes given to the south group of Ruk, Caroline islands, com¬
prising South and Givry.
Rua, islet of Morileu, Caroline islands.
Ruac, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 7° 4F N., 15 1° 55' 22' E.
Ruadika or Solitary of the Solomon islands. 8° 45' S., 159 ' 47" E.
Ruapuke, at east entrance to Foveaux strait, New Zealand.
Ruarua, a group of several islets off the east side of Yendua, Fiji.
Rubiana, New Georgia or Marovo of the Solomon islands. 8° 22" S., 157° 17 E. II.
Ruk, Truk or Hogoleu, of the Caroline islands, was discovered by Duperrey June
24, 1824. The largest group in the Carolines, composed of ten high, basaltic
islands in an immense lagoon, with numerous islets (about 60) on the outer reef.
Some of these islands rise to a height of 1000 ft., and are 10-15 m. in circumference.
South, Givry, Hacq and Lauvergne are on a rectangular reef 12X5 m-> detached
[223]
140
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
from the main reef. Pis, Tsis, Tol, Woles, Salat or Chassant, Cuop, Faleii, Umol,
Pones are some of the islands. Rev. F. M. Price, an American missionary sta¬
tioned on Rnk, estimates the population at 15,000. The north end is in 7° 42' 30" N.,
1510 46' E. 4.
Run, in Geelvink bay on the north coast of New Guinea. 2° 30' S., 134° 35' E.
Rua kiki, off the northeast coast of Guadalcanar, Solomon islands. 90 30' 05,/ S.,
1600 37' E.
Rua Suli, off the northeast coast of Guadalcanar, Solomon islands. 9°30/S., i6o°36/E.
Rurick, see Arutua of the Paumotu archipelago.
Rurutu or Oheteroa, of the Austral group, was discovered by Cook, August 14, 1769;
1350 ft. high. Population about 600, all Protestant, under the teaching of the
London Missionary Society. Annexed by France in 1889. 22° 29's., 151° 20/25// w.
Russell or Pavuvu, a group northwest from Guadalcanar, 20 in. E-w., 12 m. N-S.;
largest island is 1600 ft. high. Natives peaceable, keen traders. 9°04' S., i59°05/E.
Sabarai or Owen Stanley, of the Louisiade archipelago, is 4X0.3 m., low, thickly
wooded; inhabited. ii° 08' S., 153° 06' E. Also spelled Sabari.
Sable, south from Goodman in the Bismarck archipelago. 30 32' S., 154° 36' E.
Sabuda, on the New Guinea coast. 2° 37' S., 131° 38' E.
Saddle, see Lo, New Hebrides.
Saddle, in Torres strait. io° io' S., 142° 40' E.
Sagitaria (La), an island discovered by Pedro Fernandez Quiros, 12-13 February, 1606.
According to Bspinosa this is Tahiti.
Saibai, low, 12X4 m- on the south coast of New Guinea. Population, 100. East end
is in 90 24' S., 142° 47' E.
Sainson, low, wooded island on the north coast of Humboldt bay, New Guinea.
30 09' S., 142° 24' E.
Saint Aignan, see Misima, Louisiade archipelago. Saint Aignan was a Lieutenant on
the Recherche.
St. Ambrose is 4 m. in circumference, 720 ft. high (1500 ft. Maclear). 26° i9/45"s.,
79° 49' 45" w.
St. Andre, see Sansoral.
St. Andrew, a group of six islands near the Admiralty islands: Violet, Waikatu,
Bull, Broadmead, Berry and a bushy islet. Natives seem to be a finer race than
the New Irish or Solonftm islanders. 2° 26' S., 147° 24" E.
St. Augustine, see Nanomea, Ellice group. 16.
St. Bartholomew, see Malo, New Hebrides.
St. Bruno, an inhabited islet off the northeast point of Gardenijs, in the Bismarck
archipelago.
St. Claire, see Merigi of the New Hebrides.
St. David, see Pegan.
St. Felix is 9 m. west from St. Ambrose; barren, volcanic. 26° 16' 46" S., 8o° 00' 15" w.
St. George or San Jorge, see Tuilagi, Solomon islands.
St. Ignace or Hardy, islet in Ugue bay on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
St. John, see Wonneram, Bismarck archipelago.
[224]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
141
St. Joseph, near Gardenijs, Bismarck archipelago; about 650 ft. high; inhabited.
St. Matthias or San Matthias, of the Bismarck archipelago, was discovered by
Dampier; 24 m. E-w., 15 m. N-S. i° 40' S., 149° 40' E.O 10.
St. Patrick, of the Admiralty group. 2° 32" S., 1470 15" E.
St. Peter, see Ponafidin of the Bonin islands.
St. Phalle, island in Arembo bay on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
St. Phalle, islet on the west part of Balabio reef, New Caledonia.
St. Simeon, see Tauere, Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Saipan or Seypan, of the Marianas, was discovered by Magalhaes March 6, 1521.
Volcanic; 14 m. long, 1345 ft. high (Marche). Once populous, but now depopu¬
lated by the Spaniards who also drove out an American colony in 1815. In 1877
it was repeopled by importing 876 Chamorros and Caroline islanders. Saipan is
the Serpana of Quiros, who visited it in 1596. 150 15' N., 1450 44' E. See map
under title Marianas.
Sakau, islet off northeast point of Kspiritu Santo, New Hebrides; about 500 ft. high.
Sakatl, islet southeast from Malekula, New Hebrides; 1.7 m. NE-SW.; 340 ft. high.
Sakea, islet of Fakaafo. 90 26' s., 171° 13" w.
Saken, see Katiu of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Salat or Chassant, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands.
Sala y Gome2 was discovered in 1793 by the Spanish commander of that name.
Small, rocky; inhabited only by birds. 26° 27' 41" S., 105° 28' w.
Saltoi, see Arorai of the Gilbert islands.
Salwati, off the northwest coast of New Guinea. About 30 m. in diameter. Subject
to the Sultan of Tidore. Papuan with admixture of Malay. Mohammedans.
Wild tribes in the interior. i° 15' S., 130° 45' E.
Sam, a low island of Fiji. 170 35' 30" S., 177° 25" 20" E.O
Samarai or Dinner, in China strait, New Guinea; 1.5 m. in circumference, 155 ft. high.
From June to December not unhealthy. No good water. io° 37' S., 150° 41' E.
Samarang, a name of Palmyra.
Samba, native name of Mendana’s Santa Ysabel, Solomon islands.
Samoan Islands lie between the parallels 13° 30'- 140 30' S. and the meridians
i68°-I73°W. Krusenstern believed them identical with the Bauman islands seen
by Roggewein in 1721. So far as any certain knowledge of them was obtained we
are indebted to Bougainville who, in 1768, touched there and called the group
lies des Navigatenrs. The Wilkes expedition, in 1839, surveyed them with some
care. The group (with the exception of Rosa or Rose island) is volcanic, but
without adtive craters ; although near Olosenga there was a submarine eruption
in 1866. There are 13 islands generally surrounded by coral reefs, and there is
but one good harbor in the group, that at Pangopango on Tutuila, for Apia on
Upolu has only an open anchorage within the reef. The islands are, beginning
at the west end, Savaii, Manono, Apolima, Upolu, Fanuatapu, Namua, Nuutele,
Nuulua, belonging to Germany; and Tutuila, Anuu, Ofu, Olosenga, Tau and
Rose belonging to the United States. Civil wars have prevailed of late years and
England, Germany and the United States undertook to establish peace and a gov-
1225]
142
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
eminent by a tripartite convention (1889) which was a miserable failure, and at
last the group was divided, as shown on Map 15, between Germany and the United
States. Proclaimed February 16, 1900. The area of the group is about 2650
sq. m.; and the native population, which is gradually diminishing, is estimated at
30,000. From December to April hurricanes may occur. The most complete ac¬
count of the geography of the Samoan islands will be found in the Journal of the
Godeffroy Museum, Hamburg, 1873-5.
San Alessandro or Forfano, one of the Volcano islands. 25° 24' N., 141° 15' E.
San Antonio, islet off the northeast point of Gardenijs, Bismarck archipelago; well
wooded; natives friendly. 30 07' S., 152° 43" E.
Sanaroa, one of the names of Raputata or Welle in the D’Entrecasteaux group. 9.
San AugUStino, an islet of Oraluk, Caroline islands. 70 37' n., 1550 09' E.
San AugUStino, one of the Volcano islands; 623 ft. high. 24° 14' N., 14 1° 25' E.
San Bartolomeo (Bajos e Islas de), islands in 30° n. seen by Quiros.
San Bernardo (Islas de), discovered b}^ Mendana August 20, 1595, in io° 4c/ S. Danger
islands (?). Perhaps the same that Gonzales called Isla de Pescado, February
21, 1606. Quiros Viajes, I., 53, 260; II., 6, 7, 10, 55.
San Bruno, of the Bismarck archipelago. 3 05' S., 152° 42' E.
San Cristobal, Arossi, Robatu, the Paubro of Gallego in the Solomon group, was
discovered by Mendana in June, 1568; 76X23 m., 4100 ft. high. Northwest point
is in io° io' S., 1610 20' E.
Sand, the western islet of Midway atoll, Hawaiian islands; 1.5X0. 7 m., 57 ft. high;
little vegetation, sand glaring. 28° 12' 22" N., 177° 22' 20" w. 2.
Sand, islet of Onoatoa, Gilbert islands. i° 49' S., 175° 37' E.
Sand islet, see Dao Balayet, New Caledonia.
Sandford, high island of Fiji. 18° 50' S., 178° 24' E.O
San Dimas, Solomon islands; discovered by Pedro de Ortega Valencia, of Mendana’s
expedition, in April, 1568. 90 31' S. Quiros Viajes, I., 4; II, 4, 28, 3 7.
Sands, group in Austral islands; discovered by J. R. Sands, in the whaler Benjamin
Dicker , October 19, 1845. Examined in i860 by Captain Lebleux, in the ship
Railleur , who found a triangular reef, the longest side extending 3 m. nw-SE., with
3 islands, a fourth one at the apex of the triangle 2 m. ne. from central island;
highest point, 66 ft. above the sea. Hull, Maria, Sands, Nororutu. Northwest
corner 21° 49' S., 154° 51' w.
Sandwich, of the Bismarck archipelago, is 6-8 m. from the southwest coast of New
Ireland; 10 m. E-w., 8 m. n-S.; 600 ft. high. North point is in 2°53 S., 150° 49' E.
Sandwich, Cook’s name for the Hawaiian islands.
Sandwich, see Fate, New Hebrides.
Sandy, one of the Belep islands, New Caledonia. 13.
Sandy, on the Australian coast. 12° 35' S., 143° 3F E.
San Francisco, the name given by Mendana to Wake island October 4, 1568.
San Francisco, near Gardenijs, Bismarck archipelago; about 650 ft. high; thickly
peopled. 2° 50' S., 1 5 2° 38' E.
San Gabriel, of the Admiralty islands, is about 6 m. long; thickly peopled. 2°o6/S.,
147° 37' E.
[226]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
M3
San German (Isla de), discovered among the Solomon islands by Pedro de Ortega
Valencia of the Mendana expedition, April 9, 1568, in 90 30' S.
San Jeronimo (Isla de), Solomon islands ; one of the discoveries of Pedro de Ortega
Valencia. Perhaps the same as San Jorge.
San Jorge (Isla de), Solomon islands, near Santa Ysabel. Natives called it Varnesta
or Borue. Discovered April 23, 1568, by Ortega and Gallego of the Mendana
expedition.
San Jorge, of the Admiralty group. 2° 22' S., 1470 18' E.
San Jose, between San Francisco and San Bruno, Bismarck archipelago. 2° 59 S.,
152° 39' E.
San Juan, see Ugi, Solomon islands.
San Juan Bautista, an unidentified discovery of Quiros, January 29, 1606, in 24° S.,
1 390 w.
San Marcos, see Choiseul, Solomon islands.
San Marcos, discovered by Quiros April 25, 1606, is, according to Espinosa, Pan de
Azucar of the Banks islands.
San Mateo (Bajos de) seen by Mendana, September 1568, in 8° 30' N.
San Miguel, discovered by Quiros February 9, 1606, in 19" S. The saints of the old
Spanish voyagers are harder to find on the charts than saints in real life.
San Miguel, of the Admiralty* group. 2° 1 7' s., 1470 31' E.
San Nicolas, another of the discoveries of Ortega and Gallego, April, 1568. “Noroeste
de Santa Ysabel;” but there are many islands in that position. II.
San Pablo, see Hereheretui of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
San Pedro, see Motane of the Marquesas islands. 23.
San Quentin, see Heraiki of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
San Rafael, of the Admiralty islands, is 3 m. long and very flat. 2° 06' S., 147° 45' E.
Sansoral or St. Andre, discovered by Padilla in -1710, consists of two islands, Sansoral
and Kodakopuei or Fauna; low, 350 inhabitants resembling the central Caro-
lineans. 50 20' N., 132° 20 E. Also spelled Sonsol, and incorrectly Sonsoral.
Santa Ana, native Itapa, was discovered by Francisco Munoz Rico, of the Men¬
dana expedition, Juty 4, 1568, in the Solomon group; 520 ft. high. io° 5 1 S.,
162° 26' E.
Santa Catalina, native Aguari, of the Solomon group, was discovered by Francisco
Munoz Rico and Hernan Gallego in July, 1568. It is 2 m. E-w., and 320 ft. high.
o ' ~ r o / .
IO 54 S., 102 25 E.
Santa Christina (Cristina), see Tahuata of the Marquesas islands.
Santa Clara, a barren island 4-5 m. in diameter, southwest from Juan Fernandez.
Also called Goat.
Santa CrU2 Group, discovered by Mendana in 1595; again by Carteret in 1767.
Examined b}^ D’Entrecasteaux in 1793. There are seven larger islands, Vanikoro,
Tapoua, etc. British protectorate declared August 18, 1898.
Santa Cru 2, Egmont or Nitendi (Ndendi) was discovered by Mendana September 7,
3:595 ; 15 m. long, with fringing reef. Carteret called it Egmont. Here Mendana
died October 18, 1595. io° 40' S., 1660 03' E. 12.
[227]
144
INDEX TO THE TACIF1C ISLANDS.
Sans-Souci, off Berlin harbor on the north coast of New Guinea, comprise Sainson
and Faragnet; low, wooded.
Santa Isabel, Solomon islands, see Ysabel.
Santa Maria, see Gaua, New Hebrides.
Santiago, north from San Cristobal, Solomon islands; discovered by Mendana May,
1568.
San Urban, close to Gnadalcanar; discovered by Hernando Enriquez of the Mendana
expedition. Perhaps San Juan.
Sariba or Hayter, on the New Guinea coast; 5 m. ESE-wnw., 800 ft. high. Named
for Lieutenant Hayter. io° 31' S., 150° 45' E.
Sariguan, of the Marianas, a volcanic cone 1.5 m. in diameter. Formerly inhabited,
now deserted. 160 42' N., 145° 43' E. See map under title Marianas.
Sarpan, see Rota, Marianas.
Satalo, islet on the south coast of Upolu, Samoan islands.
Satawal or Tucker, of the Caroline islands ; discovered by Captain Wilson of the Duff ,
October 25, 1793; 2-3 m. in circumference; 200 inhabitants. 70 22' N., 1470 oO E.
Satoan, of the Mortlock group of the Caroline islands; 7X12 m.; 60 islets and less
than 1000 inhabitants. Chickens, pigs, dogs and cats are all eaten here. The
south end is in 50 if n., 1530 46' E. 4.
Saumatafanga, islet of Fakaafo. f 25' s., 17 1° 12' w.
Saunders, see Tapamanu, Society islands. 2,0.
Satl Satl, islet on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji. 16° 16' 24”s., 179'1 25' 20" E.©
Savage, see Niiie.
Savaii, of the Samoan islands, is the largest of the group; 40X20 m., 5400 ft. high;
shores low. South end in i3°48/ 40” S., 172° if Belongs to Germany. 15.
SavO, a volcano north of the west end of Guadalcanar; the Sesarga of Mendana.
Discovered by Pedro de Ortega Valencia and Hernan Gallego, April, 1568. Sur-
ville called it Isla de las Contrariedades. Nearly circular; 4 m. in diameter, 1800
ft. high; At present emits steam. Inhabited. 90 08' S., 159° 45' E.
Scarborough, a name given to the north group of the Gilbert islands from the ship
Scarborough , one of those commanded by Captains Gilbert and Marshall.
Schanz, see Wotto of the Marshall islands.
Schotlteil, a group off the north coast of New Guinea consisting of Mysory, Korido
and Biak. The last two may be one island. 1 S., 136° E.
Schouteil, another group, more to the eastward, consisting of Lesson, Garnot and
Blosseville.
Scilly, six islands 60 ft. high, wooded, in the Bismarck archipelago. 4°c>3's., 15 1° 22' E.
Scilly, see Fenuaura of the Society islands.
Seagull, a name of the Raeffsky islands, Paumotu archipelago.
Secretary, islet on the southwest coast of Middle island, New Zealand.
SegU, on the New Guinea coast. 50 08' S., 145° 50' E.
Seniavina, Caroline islands; discovered by Liitke in 1828 and named after his vessel.
Consist of Ponape, Ant and Pakin.
Sentinel, East and West; two high islands on either side of the entrance of Taiohae
bay, south side of Nukuhiva, Marquesas islands.
[228]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
i45
Sepper, see Nuitao of the Ellice group. 16.
Serapill, islet at entrance to Wanderer bay, on Guadaleanar, Solomon islands, where
in 1851 Mr. Boyd, of the yacht Wanderer , was massacred. 90 41' S., 159° 39' E.
Serle, see Reao or Pukaruha of the Panmotu archipelago.
Sesarga, Mendana’s name for Savo, Solomon islands.
Setovi or Selovi, a flat island 2 m. east from Aore, New Hebrides.
Seu Seu, islet near Roux group on the south coast of New Guinea.
Seven Islands, a name of Ngatik of the Caroline islands.
Sewell, in Cloudy bay, New Guinea.
Shank, see Nawodo of the Gilbert islands.
Shanz or Sehanz, a name of Wotto, Marshall islands.
Sharp, in the Trobriand group. 90 34' s., 151° 39' E.
Sharp, see Panantinian of the Louisiade archipelago.
Shepherd, a group near Api in the New Hebrides, consisting of Tongoa, Tongariki,
Buninga, Valea, Ewose, Laika, Mai and Tevala.
Sherrard, on the Australian coast. 12° 58' S., 143° 37' E.
Shortland, of the Solomon islands, is 11 m. E. by N. - w. by S., 7 m. wide, 675 ft. high.
70 03' S., 155° 45' E. For Shortland’s Journal see Philips’ Voyage to Botany bay,
eh. xviii.
Shortland, on the southeast coast of New Guinea; 0.3 m. in diameter; 200 ft. high.
Siande, islet; wooded, at entrance to Port Burai on the southwest side of New Cale¬
donia.
Siapunor, islet of Lukunor of the Caroline islands. 4.
Siassi, a low archipelago off the east coast of New Guinea, near Umboi. 50 55' S.,
14 7° 55' E.
Sideia or Basilisk, on the New Guinea coast, forms three sides of a hollow square
open to the west; 8.2 m. E-w., 7.5 m. N-S.; inhabited; 1330 ft. high. io° 34' 20" S.,
150° 49 55" E.
Sidney, see Sydney, a group on the New Guinea coast. 90 35' S., 149° 49' E.
Sidney, or Sydney, of the Phoenix group, was discovered by Captain Eminent; 2X1 m.;
20 ft. high. 40 25' 30" s., 1 7 1° 2 1 40" w. © There are remains of stone buildings here.
Sikaiana or Stewart, discovered by Captain Hunter, 1791. Fine robust race of light
brown color. Formerly under the Hawaiian flag; British protectorate declared
August 18, 1898; 1.2 m. long, 150 ft. high. 9° S., 163° E. Faore, Manduiloto,
Barena, Matu avi are uninhabited islands of this group.
Sikalai, islet of Fakaafo. 90 22' 25" S., 1710 12' w.
Silat, islet of Ruk of the Caroline islands.
Simbo, see Marovo, Solomon islands.
Simlakita, in the lagoon of Hgum atoll. 90 26' s., 15 1° 57' E. 9.
Simonov, see Tuvana i tholo, Fiji. Named for the astronomer of Bellingshausen’s
expedition.
Simpson, see Apamama of the Gilbert islands.
Sinclair, small island near Naviti, Yasawa group, Fiji. 170 12' 30" s., 1770 o8/ 30" E.©
Sinde, islet within N’Goe reef on the southeast coast of New Caledonia. Is it Siande?
Single Tree Islet, on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
[229]
Memoirs b, p. B, Museum, vol. i., no. 2.— 10.
1 46 INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Sin Puerto (Isla), discovered by Quiros January 29, 1606, in 24° 45 S.,= San Juan
Bautista? Islands without port are not exceptional.
Sir Charles Hardy lies to the east of New Ireland; 300 ft, high; wooded.
Sir Charles Hardy, a group on the Australian coast. n° 54' S., 143° 28' E.
Sir Charles Saunders, a name given by Wallis to Tapamanu of the Society islands.
Sir Edward Pellew, a group at the west side of the Gulf of Carpentaria; 5 islets, of
which Vanderlin is the largest.
Sir Henry Martin, a name of Nukuhiva of the Marquesas islands. 23*
Sisters, two small islands off the coast of Malaita, Solomon islands.
Six Islands, see Apaiang of the Gilbert islands.
Skelton, a name of Naranarawai of the Louisiade archipelago.
Skiddy, see Namoluk, Caroline islands.
Skobelev, islet in Friedrich Karl harbor on the north coast of New Guinea.
Slade, see Berri Berrije in the Engineer group off New Guinea. io° 37' S., 151° 16' E.
SIOSS group, in the Louisiade archipelago, consists of Rara and Panaroba, both small
and wooded.
Small, an islet east from Duau, D’Entrecasteaux group. io° o6' S., 151° 15" E.
Smith, low islet of the Underwood group, Fiji. 170 43' S., 177° 16' 20" E.O
Smith — Babagarai near Glenton, New Guinea; uninhabited.
Smyth, see Taongi of the Marshall islands.
Snares, a group of rocks 250 ft high, southwest from Stewart island, New Zealand.
Sobareigi, north from Saibai, New Guinea. 9' 22" S., 142 42" E.
Sobasoba, islet of Duau, D’Entrecasteaux group. 9° 49' S., 150° 48/ E.
Society Islands, SO named by Cook, in 1769, in honor of the Royal Society, were
first discovered by Quiros in 1606. Captain Wallis rediscovered the group June
19, 1767, and knowing nothing of previous observations called it for his patron,
George III., King George Islands. At that time Lieutenant Furneaux took for¬
mal possession. April 2, 1768, Bougainville arrived at Tahiti in the Boudeuse ,
and after a short experience with the inhabitants called it La Nouvelle C\hrehe.
The famous transit of Venus expedition, commanded by Lieutenant Cook, arrived
April 12, 1769. After the observations were concluded Cook surveyed Tahiti
(Otaheite) and discovered the northwestern group to which he gave the name
Society, calling Tahiti and the neighboring islands Georgian, but his first name
has been extended to the whole group. In 1772 Bonecheo was sent by the Span¬
ish government to these islands, and on his report he was again sent with the
means of colonizing as then understood, in 1774. Cook twice again visited Tahiti.
The next European to arrive was Lieutenant Bligh in the Bounty in 1788. Van¬
couver came in 1791. In 1842, on account of hostilities to French missionaries,
Du Petit Thouars compelled Queen Pomare to sign a treaty in favor of French¬
men, and this was followed in 1844 by the forcible seizure of the island by Bruat
in the name of Louis Philippe of France. In 1888 the entire group was declared
under a French protectorate.
While government accounts are kept in francs and centimes, the merchants
all do business with the Chilean dollar. The principal exports are cotton, copra,
coconuts, oranges, vanilla, lime juice and edible fungus. All tropical fruits grow
L230]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
T47
well when introduced. The climate is hot and moist, causing rapid growth of all
vegetation, but is healthy for Europeans. The islands are, from the southeast,
Maitea, Tahiti, Tetuaroa, Moorea and Tapamanu for the windward group; and
Huaheine, Raiatea, Tahaa, Bolabola, Tubai, Marua, Mopiha and Bellingshausen
for the leeward group. 20.
Socorro (Nuestra Senora del), see Taumaco.
Sogaura, an island north of Saipai on the New Guinea coast. g° ig' s., 142° 44' E.
Sola, see Pylstaart.
Solander is west of Foveaux strait; mountainous, 1075 ft. high. 46° 32" S. Named
for Dr. Solander, one of Cook’s naturalists.
Solia, islet of Kia, Fiji.
Solitaria (La), discovered by Mendana August 29, 1595. Native name Tayti. logo's.
Solitary, in Huon gulf on the east coast of New Guinea. 70 10' S., 147° 00' E.
Solitary, see Ruadika of the Solomon islands.
Solomon Islands. A large group discovered by Mendana in 1567. This interest¬
ing Spaniard, in his anxiety to colonize and make his discoveries of use to his
country, strove for many years to induce the authorities to send another expedi¬
tion ; but it was not until 1595, when he was advanced in years, that his wishes
bore fruit. He was not destined to again see the islands which had been named
Is las de Salomon in hopes to attract colonists to this supposed Ophir. Mendana
died at Santa Cruz, and the remains of his expedition sailed on to Manila. The
narrative of Gallego, the pilot of the first expedition, had been suppressed, and
that of Quiros, who held the same position in the second expedition, met the same
fate. Drake had made his name terrible in the Pacific, and the jealousy of the
Spaniards led to a studied concealment of their discoveries, and for two centuries
the memory of this group was fading and passing into legend. So it was that the
Spanish discoveries profited no one; and even when at last the suppressed journals
were brought to light they afforded little new information, for the work of discovery
had been done again in the meantime. In 176 7 Carteret sighted outlying islands
of the group (Gower), and also a part of Malaita, but he did not suspect that he
had found the Solomon islands, although he had been looking for them. The next
year Bougainville made more definite work, but the real discovery took many
years, and to the present no sufficient survey has been made. Only the shores of the
larger islands have been explored, and the outlines are very inexact on the charts.
For more than thirty years the Melanesian Mission has braved the dangers
of climate and savages and made it possible to land on many islands of the group.
Dr. Guppy says truly that the only redeeming feature of the intercourse of the
white man with these islanders is this grand mission.
The group covers an area 600 m. in length NE-SW. Most of the islands are
volcanic, some are calcareous, and some are both. The natives are Papuan, but
show traces of Melanesian, Polynesian and Malay. They are of medium height,
well-proportioned, but do not have attractive features. The scantiest clothing is
worn, but ornaments are much in use, such as bracelets, anklets and nose pins.
Cannibals generally, they yet make good servants.
The principal islands are, beginning at the northwest, Bouka, Bougainville,
[231]
148
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Shortland, Fauro, Choiseul, Ysabel, St. George, Gower in the German part; and
Mono, Vella Lavella, Ronongo, Narovo, New Georgia (Rubiana), Buena Vista,
Florida, Guadaleanar, Malaita, Ulava, San Cristoval in the English portion. As
the map (12) does not give the line of demarcation between the portions allotted
to Great Britain and to Germany, the official bounds may be given here. South¬
ward and eastward of a line joining the undermentioned positions these islands
belong to the former, northward and westward to Germany.
A.
Lat. 8° 00' s.
Long.
1 540 00' E.
E.
Lat. 8°
50' s.
Long.
1 59° 50' E.
B.
“ 7° 15' s.
U
155° 25' K.
F.
“ 6°
oo' S.
U
173° 3o' E.
C.
“ 7° 15' s.
U
155° 35' E.
G.
“ i5°
oo' s.
u
H3° 3°' E.
D.
“ 70 26' s.
u
156° 4c/ E.
Since the above was written the Solomon islands have been repartitioned be¬
tween England and Germany as a part of the arrangement by which the former
withdrew from the Samoan group. The convention was signed at London on the
14th November, 1899, but proclaimed by the High Commissioner for the Western
Pacific at Suva, 6th October, 1900. It transfers from Germany to the Protectorate
of the British Solomon islands the following: —
Choiseul, and the small islands depending thereon; Ysabel, and the small
islands depending thereon, including Ramos and St. George; Shortland, with
Morgusaia, Alu, Poporang, Faise, Onua and Ballale; Fauro, with Oema (island
and atoll), Ovau, Asie, Illina, Nusave, Niellei, Nusakoa, Benana, Nufahana,
Munia, Piedu, Masamasa and Cyprian Bridge; Tasman or Niumanu atoll, com¬
prising Niumanu, Loto and thirty-seven others; Ontongjava; El Roncador or
Candelaria reef ; Gower or Inattendue.
Songo, a low coral islet at the entrance to Na Tandola harbor on the west coast of
Viti levu, Fiji.
Soni, a high island of the Hudson group, Fiji. 170 44' s., 177° 07' 40" E.O
Sonsol = Sansoral of the Pelew islands. Not Sonsoral. Sonsol with Fauna forms the
group of St. Andre. 50 20' N., 132° 20' E.
Sophia, Mattinson, Independence or Rocky, of the Ellice group ; 2-3 m. in circumfer¬
ence; wooded. io° 46' S., 179° 31' E. 16.
Sorol or Philip, of the Caroline islands, was discovered by Captain Hunter in 1791,
who called it Philip. Consists of two small groups 5 m. apart; 20 inhabitants.
80 w o /
00 N., 140 03 E.
Sotoan, see Satoan, Caroline islands.
South, islet Caroline atoll. io° 00' 01" S., 150° 14' 30" w.
South, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 6° 57' N., 15 1° 57' 30" E.
Sovu, three uninhabited rocks off the northeast coast of Vanua Mbalavu, Fiji. The
most westerly has a peak 230 ft. high.
Sowek, a small group on south coast of Korido, Schouten islands. o°45's., 135° 25'E.
Spear, a group on the northeast coast of New Guinea. 8° 58' 30” S., 149° 10' E.
Speiden, see Tavarua, Fiji. A name given by Wilkes for the purser of the Peacock ,
Speiden, see Nuitao of the Ellice group. Spelled also Spieden in Ex. Ex.
Spencer Keys, see Ngoli, Caroline islands.
[232]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
149
Spike, low and wooded, 1 m. in diameter, near North Foreland, New Guinea.
Spires, two small coral patches near Utian of the Louisiade archipelago.
Squally, of Tasman, is the Kerue of Bougainville; about 2 m. in diameter, low and
wooded. i° 40' S., 150° 30' E. 10.
Staaten Land, Tasman’s name for New Zealand.
Stacey, see Su-a-u, New Guinea. io° 43' 30" S., 150° 14' E.
Stalio, on the southeast coast of Bougainville, Solomon islands. 6° 25' S., 155° 56' E.
Stanton, see Babaman of the Louisiade archipelago.
Star or Star Peak, see Merlav, New Hebrides.
Starbuck, or Volunteer, was discovered by Captain Starbuck of D Aigle, whaler, in
which the Hawaiian king, Liholiho, and suite went to England. Sighted by Lord
Byron when he returned the bodies of the King and Queen. Taken by the British
in December, 1866; 5 m. E-W., 1.5 m. n-S., 15 ft. high; a guano island. 50 38' S.,
T55° 55' w.
Starbuck, see Aranuka of the Gilbert islands.
Staver, see Vostok.
Steeple, see Jemo, Marshall islands. Properly Steep to.
Stephen, see Ugar, Torres strait.
Stewart, New Leinster or South Island (Rakiura), of New Zealand, was discovered
by Cook in 1770. In 1809 it was explored and surveyed by Captain J. Chase in
the Pegasus; named for W. Stewart, First Officer; then uninhabited. Population,
in 1886, 200; mostty Maoris or half-breeds; 39 m. N-S., 20 m. E-W., 3200 ft. high,
wooded. On the west coast are islets Long, Mogy and Codfish. Other islets are
Bench, Weka, Breaksea, Entrance, Pearl, Anchorage, Noble, Wedge, Ernest and
Raggedy.
Stewart, see Sikaiana. Discovered by Captain Hunter in 1791.
Stirling, south from Mono, Solomon islands, is a raised coral reef 200 ft. high ;
3 x0.5 m. 7° 25' S., 155° 31' E.
Stobual, islet of Aurh of the Marshall islands. 8° 18' 42" N., 171° I2/ E. 6.
Storm, a high island of Fiji. 18° 20 20" s., 178° io' 15" E.O
Strachan, a large interfluvial island on the south coast of New Guinea, between the
Wassi Kussa and Mai Kussa rivers.
Stradbroke, 33X6 m. off Moreton bay, Queensland. North point is in 27° 23' S.,
i53°/5' E.
Straggling, northeast of the east point of Deaf Adder bay, New Guinea; 2.2 m. off
shore. 70 27' S., 147° 27' E.
Strait (E.), in Torres strait. io° 29' S., 142° 26' E.
Strawn, islet of Palmyra.
Strong, see Kusaie, of the Caroline islands.
Stuart, near Mbenga, Fiji; high, 1.5 m. in circumference. 18° 24' 2o"s., 178 05' 25"e.O
Stuers consists of Marai and Taliwewai in the Louisiade archipelago. n° oy' s.,
15 1° 08' E.
Su-a-U or Stacey was formerly supposed the south end of New Guinea; extends 2 m.
ne-SW.; 787 ft. high. io° 43' S., 150° 14' E.
Suckling Reef, see Uluma of the Louisiade archipelago.
[233]
150
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Sudest, see Tagula of the Louisiade archipelago.
Sue, of the Three Sisters in Torres strait; 15 m. from Warrior. io° 13' S., 142° 49' E.
Sugar-loaf, 13 m. south from Admiralty island; 4-5 m. in circumference; 800 ft. high.
2 22 30 S., 146 49 15 E.
Sugar-loaf, see Obelisk of the Marquesas islands.
Sugar-loaf, see Mota of the Banks islands.
Suhm, of the Admiralty group; half a mile long; uninhabited. i° 50' S., 146° 33' E.
Named for Rudolph von Willemoes Suhm, naturalist on the Challenger.
Suk or Pulo Suk, of the Caroline archipelago, was discovered by Ibargoitia in 1799.
Population, 100 Polynesian. 6° 28' N., 1490 30' E.
Suk, see Supiori of the Schouten islands.
Sule, islet on the east coast of Ysabel, Solomon islands. 8° 05' S., 159° 32' E.
Sulphur, one of the Volcano islands. 24° 50' N., 1410 18' E.
Sunday, islet north from Moratau, of the D’Entrecasteaux group. 9°i6/s., i50°30/E.
Sunday, see Peru of the Gilbert islands.
Sunday, see Raoul, Kermadec islands.
Supiori or Suk, of the Schouten islands in Geelvink bay on north coast of New Guinea.
Surprise, one of the Huon group, 2 m. E-w., 1 m. n-s. i8° 31' s., 163° 08' E. 13.
Susui, of the Exploring islands, Fiji, is between Munia and Vanua valavo; cultivated.
17° 2 1 S., 18T 03' E.O
Suvarov, a group discovered by Lieutenant Lazarev in the Suvarov in 1814. A reef
8 m. n-S., and nearly as broad, has several wooded islets mostly in the northern
part. British protectorate declared April 22, 1889. 13° 13' S., 163° 09' 15" w.
Suvarov, see Taka of the Marshall islands. 6.
Suwarro, a low, wooded islet off Malekula, New Hebrides.
Suwan, mangrove islet off Malekula, New Hebrides.
Swain, see Gente Hermosa.
Swallow, see Matema. 12.
Swallow, see Canton, Phoenix group.
Swede, see Lamotrek, Caroline islands.
Sweers, a long, narrow island east from Bentinck, Wellesley islands, in the Gulf of
Carpentaria. 170 05' S., 139° 54' E.
Sydenham, see Nonuti, Gilbert islands. 7.
Sydney, Phoenix islands, was discovered by Captain Emment. It is a coral reef with
closed lagoon, 2X17 m. British protectorate declared June 26, 1889. West side
is in 40 27' 22" S., 171° 15' 09" w. 17.
Sydney, a group in Ward Hunt strait, New Guinea. 90 35' S., 149° 49' E.
Ta, islet of Pakin, Caroline islands. 5.
Taabame, islet on a reef of the same name on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
Taanlai and Taanlo, islets near Paaba on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Taaruto, on the northeast coast of Guadalcanar, Solomon islands. 9°35 S., i6o°37/e.
Tabal, islet of Aurh of the Marshall islands. 6.
T abanagore = T abunagora.
Table, see Kamac, New Caledonia.
[234]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
151
Table, see Motumau, New Zealand.
Tabua, high islet off Viti levu, Fiji. West side is in 170 30' s., 1770 30' xo' E.
Tabunagora, an islet of the outer ring of Bgum atoll at the northeast part, on the
south side of the opening to the lagoon. 90 21 30” S., 153° 02 E.
Taburari, islet of Oneatoa, Gilbert islands. i° 54' 45" s., 175° 47' 10” E.
Tabutha or Cap, inhabited island of Fiji, 3X17 m., 350 ft. high. 170 40' s., 1810 i2/E.O
Taenga or Holt, discovered in the Margaret in 1803 and named Holt; low, inhabited.
Northwest point is in 160 18' S., 1430 17' w. Paumotu archipelago. 2,1.
Tafahi or Boseawen, of the Tongan islands, was discovered by Lemaire and Sehouten
May 11, 1616, and by them named Cocos. Wallis, in 1 767, named it Boseawen;
2000 ft. high; inhabited. 150 52' S., 1730 50' w.
Tafolaelo, islet of Fakaafo. 90 24' 50" S., 171° 12 w.
Tagaik, islet of Pakin, Caroline islands. 70 04 04" N., 1570 47' E.
Tagula or Sudest is the largest of the Louisiade archipelago, being 40X8 m., and
2689 ft. high; wooded and inhabited. Northwest point is in n° 20 S., 153° il' E.
Tahaa is within the same reef with Raiatea, Society islands; 1936 ft. high. Many
islets on the reef. 16° 35' S., 151° 35' 06" w. 20.
Tahatiea or Tchitschagof, of the Paumotu archipelago, a reef covered with wooded
islets. Three good entrances to the lagoon. The west end is in 160 52' S.,
1440 58' W. 21.
Tahanlagh, islet off the north end of Balabio, New Caledonia. 13.
Tahiti or Otaheite, of the Society islands, the Sagittaria of Quiros who discovered it
February 10, 1606. Wallis rediscovered it in 1 767. 17° 38' 30" S., 149° 30' w.O
33 m. nw-SE.; divided into two parts by an isthmus about 1.2 m. wide, the smaller
called Taiarapu. Orohena, the highest peak, is 7 329 ft. Barrier reef surrounds
the island at a distance of 1-2 m., within which are several good harbors, the
principal being Papiete on the northwest. Here is the seat of Government. Point
Venus, the place of Cook’s observations, is on the north side. 20.
Tahuata or Santa Cristina, of the Marquesas islands, was discovered by Mendana
21-22 July, 1595; 8.5 m. n-s., 1.2-5 m- E-w.; 3280 ft. high. Population, in 1888,
was 408. 90 56' 21" S., 1 39° 06' w. 23.
Tahura, old chart name for Kaula of the Hawaiian islands. I.
Tahurowa = Kahoolawe, Hawaiian islands.
Taiahtl, islet on the east reef of Huaheine.
Taiaro or King, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by Captain Fitzroy of
H. M. S. Beagle in 1835. The lagoon is closed; islets wooded ; few inhabitants.
15° 46' S., 144° 3 7' w. 21.
Taifaur, a grassy islet, 270 ft. high, northwest from Abaga gaheia in the Louisiade
archipelago.
Taii, islet of Tongatabu on the northeast. 21° 01' S., 1740 57' w. 18.
Taitaka, islet in the centre of Port Stanley, Malekula, New Hebrides; 400X200 yds.
Taka or Suvarov, atoll with closed lagoon and a few islets on the east reef. Popula¬
tion, 20 in i860. Discovered in 1814 by Lieutenant Lazarev in the Suvarov.
Protedforate declared by Great Britain April 22, 1889. 13° 15" S., 163° io" w.
Takain, islet of Ponape, Caroline islands. 5.
[235]
152
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Takapoto (Oura of Cook), in the King George group, of the Paumotus. It is low,
wooded, with closed lagoon and many islets. North point is in 140 32' 08" S.,
1450 14' 30" w. 21.
Takaroa (Tiokea of Cook), low, wooded atoll, open lagoon; with the preceding forms
King George group. The north point is in 140 22" 10" s., 1440 58' 30" w. 21.
Taka, islet of Pingelap, Caroline islands. 5.
Taki, a low island of Fiji. 170 07' 06" s., 176° 52' 50" e.O
Takoume = Takurea of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Takurea, Wolkonski or Takoume, is an inhabited atoll with closed lagoon. North¬
east end is in 150 39' 30" s., 142° 06' 15" w. 21.
Takutea or Fenua iti, of the Hervey islands, is 3 m. in circumference, uninhabited,
well wooded. 19° 49' s., 158° 16' w. 23.
Talbot, a small group on the south coast of New Guinea between 142° 08'- 142° 22/ E.
longitude and 90 i5/-9°2i S. latitude. Consists of Kawa, Mata kawa, Adabadana
kawa, Karobailo kawa, Kussa and Boigu. 8.
Taliwewai, a low coral island of the Stuers group, Louisiade archipelago. 9.
Taloes, islet of Ruk, south side of east entrance to the lagoon.
Tamami, see Tinakula of the New Hebrides. 12.
Taman (Tomun or Tanman), islet of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Tatnana or Roteher, of the Gilbert islands, is 3X0.7 m. Population, 500. 2° 32' S.,
175° 55r E.
Tamatam or Los Martires, of the Caroline islands, consists of a reef 11 m. n-s., 6 m.
E-w., with four islands: on the north, Ollap; in the centre, Fanadik; and at the
south, two called Tamatam. About 200 inhabitants. East end is in 70 27" 30" N.,
1490 28' E.
Tamborua, islet 99 ft. high at the entrance to Wailea bay on the north coast of Vanua
levu, Fiji. 14.
Taini, native name of the Cretin islands on the New Guinea coast. Four low, well
wooded and inhabited islands. 6° 45' S., 147° 54' E.
Tanabtlli, on the southeast of Ysabel, Solomon islands. 8° 2j' S., 159° 43' E.
Tande, 1070 ft. high. 20° 05' s., 163° 46' e.
Tandrukll, islet 35 ft. high off the northeast coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Tangadio, islet on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Tangoa = Tanoa = Tongoa, New Hebrides.
Tanle, islet at the mouth of Tanle bay on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Tanna or Aipere, of the New Hebrides, was discovered by Cook in 1774. An adlive
volcano, Mt. Yasua, has been in continuous eruption since the time of Cook. In
1878 there was a severe earthquake which altered the region about Port Resolu¬
tion. In the centre mountains rise to about 3000 ft. Some 8000 natives, formerly
cannibals. 190 31' 17" S., 169° 20 E. The size is given in one place at 30X10 m.
In another, of equal authority, 18X10 m. And still another says 40X35 m. The
reader may choose. Tanna — Honua — land. 12.
Tannawa, islet of Viti levu, Fiji. 170 47' 16" s., 178° 39' 10" E.O
Tanyah, islet of Oneatoa of the Gilbert islands. i° 47' s., 175° 34' E. 7.
Taongi, Gaspar Rico or Smyth, a low atoll with closed lagoon. 14° 45' N., 169° 15' E.
[236]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
i53
Taoru, islet of Raiatea, Society islands. 20.
Taoui, one of the Admiralty islands. West end in 2° S., 146° 32' E. 10.
Tapak, islet on the northeast side of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Tapamantl or Saunders, also called Maiaiti and Tubuai manu, of the Society islands,
was discovered by Captain Wallis July 28, 1 767; 6 m. long. Northeast point is in
17 38 41 s., 150 33 w.
Tapelau, islet of Yap, Caroline islands.
Tapimoor, islet of Mille, Marshall islands.
Tapiteuea or Drummond, of the Gilbert islands, was discovered by Captain Bishop
of the Nautilus. It is 30 m. long and 0.5 -0.7 m. wide. Population, 7000-8000.
North point is in i° 08' S., 174° 37' 30" E.
Tapitu, a form of Tapiteuea, Gilbert islands.
Tapu, island in Auckland harbor, New Zealand.
Taptia, Utupua or Kdgecumbe, in the Santa Cruz group, was discovered by Mendana
in 1595. Carteret named it Edgecumbein 1764. The west summit is in ii° i^^cCs.,
166° 32" 14'' E., according to D’Urville. British protectorate declared August 18,
1898. 12.
Tapui, a conical islet in Ahurei bay, island of Rapa.
Tarakoi, islet of Rapa. 270 35' s., 1440 18' w.
Taravai or Belcher, islet of the Mangareva group.
Tarawa, Cook or Knoy (not Knox), of the Gilbert islands; 18 m. N-S., 13 m. E-w.
North end is in i° 39' 05" N., 1730 02' E. 7.
Tareti, a sandy island near Noumea, New Caledonia.
Taritari, a common form of Butaritari, Gilbert islands.
Tariwerwi, see Ouessant, of the Eouisiade archipelago.
Tarratlg, islet of Yap, Caroline islands.
Tasiko, see Api, New Hebrides. 12.
Tasman, atoll discovered by Tasman in 1700, and seen by Captain Welling in 1824.
Some 40 islands on a reef encircling a lagoon; 11 m. E-w., 7 m. N-S. Inhabitants
resemble Gilbert islanders. Niumano, the largest island, is on the east side in
4° 35" S., 1 59° 30' E. British protectorate proclaimed OCtober 6, 1900.
Tassai or Brumer, New Guinea.
TastU, an inhabited island in Humboldt bay on the north coast of New Guinea.
Tatafa, islet 3 m. southwest from Lefuka in the Hapai group of the Tongan isl¬
ands. 18.
Tatakoto, called also Narcissus, Egmont and Clerke, of the Paumotu archipelago,
was discovered by Bonecheo in 1774 ; 4X1 m.; inhabited. 170 i8's., 138° 19' w. 22.
Tatana, islet in Port Moresby on the south coast of New Guinea.
Tau, the largest of the Manua group, Samoan islands, is 14 m. in circumference,
2500 ft. high; well watered and fertile. Belongs to the United States.
Tati, islet of Tongatabu. 18.
Taua, islet east from Tangoa, Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides. 12.
Tauak, lagoon islet of Ponape, Caroline islands.
Tauan or Mt. Cornwallis, is 9 m. in circumference and 795 ft. high. Inhabitants
Negrito. Station of the London Missionary Society. 90 25" 30” S., 142° 32" E.
[237]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
154
Tauata or Santa Cristina, of the Marquesas islands; 9 m. n-S., 5 m. E-w., 3280 ft. high.
Population, 450 in 1880. South point is in io° 02' S., 139° og' w. 23.
Tatiere or Taneri, also St. Simeon, Resolution and Tandree, of the Panmotn archi¬
pelago, was discovered by Bonecheo in 1772. Named by Cook in 1773 after
his ship; 4 m. in circumference ; two islands. West point is in 170 22' 21” S.,
1410 2g 39" w. 21.
Taulalia, islet in the Ringgold group, Fiji.
Tanmaeo, discovered by Quiros, April 7, 1606, and named Nnestra Senora del Socorro,
is, according to Espinosa, the Duff group. 12.
Tauna, islet of Rapa. 27° 36' S., 144° 17' w.
Tautu, islet on the northwest of the outer reef of Tahaa, Society islands.
Tauturau, islet of Rapa. 270 37' s., 1440 16' w.
Tavartia or Speiden island, off the west coast of Viti levu, Fiji. i7°52/S., 177° io' 30" E.
Named Speiden by Wilkes after the Purser of the Peacock.
Tavea, high island in Naloa ba)q Vanna levn, Fiji. Inhabitants make good pottery.
160 38' 24" S., 178° 43' 30" W.O
Taviuni or Vnna, Fiji; 23X8 m.; Ngalan peak, 4040 ft. high. Population, 2600 in
1880. East point is in 160 48' 30" S., 180° 14' E.
Tavua, inhabited islet of Mamanntha i thaki group, Fiji.
Tavuka or Rara ni Tinka, islet 150 ft. high, 2.2 m. south from Yanntha, Fiji.
Tavunasithi, Fiji; coral islet, half a mile in diameter, 200 ft. high; uninhabited.
Tehitsehagoff or Tehitehagov, see Tahanea, Panmotn archipelago.
Teapi, see Rapanni.
Teauaua or Hat, islet in Shavay bay on the southeast side of Hnahnna, Marquesas.
Tebnt, see Lib of the Marshall islands.
Tegtta, a circular island in the middle of Torres group, about 3.5 m. in diameter,
nearly 600 ft. high; 2.5 m. southeast from Hiw or North island.
Te Honra, see Waikawa, New Zealand.
Teilau, uninhabited islet 500X150 yds., on the southeast coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Tekareka, see Tekokoto, Paumotu archipelago.
Tekokoto, Tekareka or Doubtful, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by
Cook, August 11, 1773. It is a circular reef a mile in diameter. 170 20" S.,
142° 37' W.O 21.
Teku, see Anuanurunga of the Paumotu archipelago.
Teku, see Vanavana of the Paumotu archipelago. 22.
Tematangi or Bligh lagoon, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by Bligh in
1792. It is 7 m. in diameter. Some of the inhabitants were removed to Tahiti in
1858 on suspicion of having eaten a shipwrecked crew. North point is in 2i‘ D38'S,
140° 40" w. 21.
Temelflua, near Taumaco, the same as Tukopia.
Temo, see Jemo of the Marshall islands.
Temotu or Trevanion, Santa Cruz group, at the entrance of Trevanion lagoon, the
Puerto graciosa of Mendana who named this island La Guerta. Carteret called
it Trevanion. It is 10 m. in circuit. British protectorate declared OCtober 1, 1898.
The north point is in io° 40" S., 165° 41' 30" E. 12.
[238]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
155
Tenararo or Bedford island, in the Adtaeon group of the Paumotu archipelago, is 2 m.
in diameter, with a closed lagoon. About 20 inhabitants. 21° iS' S., 136° 42' w.
Tenarunga or Minto, of the Adtaeon group in the Paumotu archipelago, is 7 m. north¬
west from Maturei vavao. 21° 22 S., 136° 34' w. 22.
Te Ndu encloses Port Laguerre on the west. On the southwest side of New Cale¬
donia; 1 111. N-S.
Tetlia, islet Oil the north side of St. Vincent passage, on the southwest side of New
Caledonia.
Tepoto or Ofiti (the Eliza of Mauruc) was discovered by Bellingshausen in 1820.
Of the Raeffsky group in the Paumotu archipelago. 16° 48' S., 144° 19' W. 21.
Terio, islet of Apaiang, Gilbert islands. i° 48' 30" n., 173° 01' K.
Tern, on the Australian coast. n° s., 142° 46' K.
Testard, two islets on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Teste, see Wari on the New Guinea coast.
Tetaro, islet Oil the northeast part of the outer reef of Raiatea, Society islands.
Tetiaroa, a chart form of Tetuaroa, Society islands. 20.
Tetuaroa, of the Society islands, was discovered by Quiros, February, 1606. A reef
with a dozen islets, wooded. East end is in 17° 07' 15'' S., 149° 29 30" w.
Tetopoto (Disappointment islands of Byron), of the Paumotu archipelago, covers
about 9 sq. 111.; 110 lagoon ; uninhabited (?); large trees. 14 oS's., 141 ~ 16' w. 21.
Teuaua, islet of Uapu in Shavay bay, Marquesas islands.
Teumah, islet at the northwest extremity of Onoatoa, Gilbert islands. 1 53" S.,
l7.5° ?O R'
Tevai, within the reef of Vanikoro; 9 111. in circumference; high.
Tevairoa, islet of Bolabola, Society islands.
Tevala, one of the Shepherd islands, New Hebrides; small and almost inaccessible;
324 ft. high at the west end.
Thakaundrove, islet in Uaikava harbor on the south coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Thakavi, islet on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Thatlgalai, south from Moturiki on the southeast coast of Viti levu, Fiji. 170 47'46"s.,
178° 46' 40" E.
Thikombia (Cicobia), one of the Exploring islands, Fiji; 5 111. northeast from Munia;
3 111. SE-nw.; 1.7 111. wide; north end is in 150 47' 40" s., 180° 09 E. 14*
Thithia (Cicia), a fertile, inhabited island 4X3 ni., 300 ft. high. Northwest point is
in 1 70 44' 30" s., 1800 42' E. 14.
Thombia, the highest of the Ringgold group, is the crater of an extinct volcano, in
the centre of which is a lake 24 fathoms deep; whole island not quite 2 m. in cir¬
cumference; 590 ft. high.
Thompson, Fiji. 180 30' 45" s., 1770 36' 45" e.o
Thornton, see Caroline.
Three Hills, of the New Hebrides, is 6 111. ne-SW., and 2.5 m. wide. Mae is the cen¬
tral district and is pure Polynesian, while the languages on the other side are
Melanesian. The three hills are, from the east, 1850, 1450 and 1400 ft. high.
170 05' s., 1680 19' E. 12.
Three Kings, group northwest from Cape Marie van Diemen, New Zealand.
[239]
156 INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Three Sisters, rounded islets near east point of Bultig, New Guinea. io° 13' S.,
142° ig' E.
Three Sisters, Las Tres Marias or Olumalau of the Solomon islands. About io° S.,
162° E.; 230-250 ft. high. The south island is named Malaupina, the north one
Alita.
Thrum Cap, see Akiaki of the Paumotu archipelago.
Thukini, islet on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Thumbtl, islet 100 ft. high at the mouth of Rakiraki river, north coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Thursday, see Waiben. Centre of Pearl and Trepang fisheries.
Ti -a, islet at the north end of New Caledonia.
Tiae, islet at the entrance to Tanle bay on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
TiailO, islet on west coast of Raiatea, Society islands.
Tidiaut, two islets off Cape Baye on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
Tietlghiene, islet at the mouth of Nehue bay on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Tiere, wooded islet of Tahiti, opposite Tomotai valley.
Tiga, Tika or Boucher, of the Loyalty group, 8-10 m. in circumference, 150 ft. high,
with fringing reef. Used as a dump for the worst natives. 2 1° 2<g 20" S., 1680 17 E.
Tiger, an island “inhabited by ferocious savages,” discovered by Captain Bristow in
1817; 6.7 m. E-w. i°45/S., 142° iS'e. Probably identical with Matty, which see.' 8.
Tikahau or Krusenstern, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by Kotzebue in
1815. A small, wooded island 10 m. in diameter, with a lagoon and inhabitants.
The north point is in 140 52' S., 148° 15" 15" w. 20.
Tikei or Romanzoff, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered April 20, 1815, by
Otto von Kotzebue and named for Prince Romanzoff. 14° 57' S.-, 144° 35' 30" w.O 21.
Timboor, of the Yasawa group, Fiji; high. 16° 40' S., 177° 30' 30" E.O
Timoe or Crescent, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by Captain Wilson in
the Duff, in 1797; uninhabited. Northeast point is in 23° u's., 134° 34' 10" w. 22.
Tinakula or Tamani is a permanently adtive volcano 2200 ft. high, in the Santa Cruz
group. British protectorate declared August 18, 1898. io° 23' 3o"s., 165° 47' 30" E.
Tindal, see Ailuk of the Marshall islands. 6.
Tingolanu, a low island off Marovo, Solomon islands; 3-4 m. n-S. 8°43/S., 158° 15T.
Tinian, of the Marianas, was discovered by Magalhaes, March 6, 1521. He called it
Bona Vista; 10 m. n-s., 4.5 m. E-w.; 234 inhabitants in 1887. 140 59' 22^ n.,
I45° 33/ Low, but volcanic. See map under Marianas.
Tiokea, see Takaroa of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Tioae, islets in bay of the same name near Noumea, New Caledonia.
Tioki, islet of Fakaako. 90 24' 20" S., 171° \2 w.
Tipamau, islet at the entrance to Fairoa bay, Raiatea, Society islands.
Tiri, a group of low, mangrove-covered islands off Vanua levu, Fiji. Consists of Wil¬
liams, Green, Mills, Piner, Pully, Richmond and Day.
Tiritiri, in Auckland harbor, New Zealand.
Tissot, see Baibesika, 3 m. east from South cape, of New Guinea.
Tisungatu, islet of Fakaafo. 90 24' 35" S., 171° 12' w.
Tj an, islet of Maloelab, Marshall islands. 8° 52" 39" N., 171° oF 31" E.
Tnaguinui, islet of Nui, on the east side; inhabited. Ellice islands.
[240]
i57
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Toahotu, islet off Tahaa, Society islands. 20.
Toamaro, islet off west side of Raiatea, Society islands.
ToaSS, islet of Elato, Caroline islands. 70 24/ 30" N., 146° 19' E.
Toau or Elisabeth, of the Paumotu archipelago, lagoon atoll with many islets; 20 m.
E-W. All the fish in the lagoon are said to be poisonous. The southeast point is
in 15° 58' S., 145° 49 3o" W. 21.
Tobi, Lord North or Neville, was discovered on the ship Lord North in 1781; 1.5 m.
long, well wooded, inhabited. 30 03' N., 13 1° 04' E.
Tobitl, in Torres strait. io° 06' 30” S., 142° 2 i E. Tobin Cay is in 9° 37' s., 143° 40" E.
Toemo, islet in Port Goro at the south end of New Caledonia.
Tofua ( whale in Tongan), a volcano 5 m. in diameter, 2800 ft. high. 19^45's., i75°03'w.
Tog or South (called Pukapuka by the traders) is an inhabited island of the Torres
group, 9 m. in circumference, and 600 ft. high.
Tokelau, see Fakaafo.
Tokelau or Union group consists of Atafu with 63 islets, Nukunau with 93 islets,
and Fakaafo with 62. 17.
Tokikimoa, islet of Fakaafo. 90 24' 32" s., 1710 12' w.
Tokoeoa, islet on the north of Mille, Marshall islands, at the west side of the entrance
to the lagoon.
Tokoriki, uninhabited islet of Mamanutha i thaki group, Fiji.
Tokowa, islet on the west side of the entrance to Port Rhin, Mille, Marshall islands.
Toku, a low island, 11 m. ESE. from Amargura or Fonualei, Tongan islands. 18 oS's.,
1740 08' w. 18.
Tokuna, Toguna or Alcester, 3 islets within one reef in the Trobriand group. 90 29 S.,
152° 30" 45" E. The name seems to belong rather to the people than to the islands.
Tol, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands; 10 m. in circumference, 700 ft. high; largest of
the P'aitruk group in the western part of the lagoon. 7°2i/o8" N., 15 1° 39' 22” E.
Tombarua, low island of Fiji. 1 70 59' 46" s., 178° 45' 10" e.O
Tomman or Urn, off the southwest coast of Malekula, New Hebrides; 1 m. nw-SE.,
260 ft. high.
Tonga (Toga) or Friendly Islands, a group of 150 islands and islets occupied by
some 22,000 inhabitants. It is essentially a volcanic group, although many of the
islands are low. The group was discovered by Tasman in 1643. Tongatabu he
called Amsterdam, Fua Middleburgh, and Namuka Rotterdam. Cook was there
both on his second and third voyages, and gave the name Friendly. The Span¬
iard Maurelle discovered Vavau in 1781. The government is a limited monarchy,
the seat of government at Nukualofa on Tongatabu. Now England controls the
group.* The Wesleyan mission was established in 1826, and the inhabitants are
all Christian. The group has not been fully surveyed. 18.
Tongaravu, islet 70 ft. high off the east coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
Tongareva or Penrhyn was discovered by Sever in the ship Lady Penrhyn. An atoll
12X7 m*> and 50 ft. high; the lagoon is 9 m. across and contains 15 islets. In 1863
it was almost depopulated by Peruvian slavers. March 22, 1888, it was annexed
to Great Britain. Tongareva means Tonga in the heavens. 9°o6/25//S., i^S’cWic/'w.
*A British prote<5torate over the entire group was proclaimed May 19, 1900.
[24G
158
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Tongariki, volcanic island in the New Hebrides. iy° S., i68° 36' E. 12.
Tongatabu or New Amsterdam was discovered by Tasman January 29, 1643; 27 m-
E-w., 10 m. n-s., 60 ft. high. Composed entirely of coral rock. In places there
are caves with fine stalactites. See Mariner’s account. 21° oj' S., 175° 11 E.
Tongoa, New Hebrides, the Shepherd islands of Cook, are off the south coast of
Espiritu Santo. A Presbyterian mission here. 150 36" 12" S., 167 °E.
Topati, islet on the east reef of Huaheine, Society islands.
Torea, islet on west coast of Raiatea, Society islands.
Torlesse or Bonabonanga, low, wooded, uninhabited islets 8.5 m. southwest from
Panniet in the Louisiade archipelago, on a reef 4 m. long. io° 48' S., 152° 13'E. 9.
Torres (Ababa, Baba or Vava), a group of the Banks islands consisting of Hiw;
Metoma, Tegua, To, and Tog. They have little water and the natives depend on
coconuts for drink. The north island is 1200 ft. high, the others much lower.
Melanesian mission has a station here.
Torres, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands. 70 20 n., 15 i° 24" E.
Tortoise, an islet of the Pleiades group, Loyalty islands. 13.
Tortia, islet of Maloelab, Marshall islands. 8° 43" 10" N., 1710 09' 35" E.
Totoya, Fiji; 5 m. E-w., 3.5 m. N-S. Notch peak is 1200 ft. high in 18° 56' 30" S.,
180 05 30 E.
Totten, a high island of the Yasawa group, Fiji. 170 29' 30" S., 177° oi' 15" E.O
Named for George M. Totten of the Wilkes expedition.
Touching, see Butaritari, Gilbert islands.
Toukoua, an islet of Ontongjava. With the rest of the group belongs to Great
Britain.
Toulon, see Maliu kolo, New Guinea.
Toveru, islet on the west side of Buru bay on the northeast coast of New Caledonia.
Tovu and Tovu lailai are both on the same reef on the north coast of Viti levu, Fiji.
The former is 250 ft. high.
Tower, of the Galapagos, is 211 ft. high. o° 20 N.
Tracey, low, uninhabited island of the Admiralty group.
Tracy, see Vaitapu, Ellice islands. 16.
Traitor, a group of small and low islands north of Jobi in Geelvink bay, New Guinea.
i° 15' S., 136° 31' E.
Traitors or Padeaids on the north coast of New Guinea.
Travers, in Torres strait. io° 23' S., 142° 20 E.
Traversey, see Aurh, Marshall islands.
Treasurers, second in size of the Duff group.
Treasury, see Mono, Solomon islands. 11.
Tree, 4X2 m. low and wooded, off Fly river, New Guinea. 8° 41' S., 143° 37" E.
Tree, islet of Arova, Louisiade archipelago.
Tree, islet of Florida, Solomon islands.
Treguada (La), of the Solomon islands, was discovered by Mendana in May, 1568.
Native name Braba or Yraba. Now Ulaua.
Tres Marias, see Olu malau, Solomon islands.
Trevanion, see Temotu of the Santa Cruz islands.
[242]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
i59
Trevennen, see Huapu of the Marquesas islands.
Trio, islets on east side of Hugon island on the southwest coast of New Caledonia.
Trobriand, see Kiriwina group.
Troilem, islet of Uluthi, Caroline islands. 3.
Trois Soeurs, of Surville = Tres Marias of Mendana = 01u malou.
Tromelin, see Feys of the Caroline islands. 3.
Truk, a form of Ruk, Caroline islands.
Tsis, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands; 0.7 m. in diameter. 70 18' 30" N., 15 1° 48' 30" E.
Tua, see Quoin, New Guinea.
Tuamaco, a name given by Quiros to Disappointment island in the Duff or Wilson
group.
Tuamotu, the French form of Paumotu; tua a bunch, and motu island.
Tuanae, islet on northeast reef of Maupiti, Society islands.
Tuanaki or Reid, atoll in the Raeffsky group, in the north, uninhabited. 160 41' S.>
1 440 14' w.
Tuatua, see Haszard islands, Fouisiade archipelago.
Tu-aye, islet in Banare bay on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Tubai or Motuiti, uninhabited, lagoon island, Society islands. 16° ty's., i5i°48/w. 2,0.
Tubanaielli, west of Kambara, Fiji; uninhabited; 150 ft. high; with fringing reef.
1 8° 42' 30" S., i8o° 56' E.O
Tubuai, of the Austral islands, has an encircling reef about a mile from shore. Popu¬
lation in 1881 was 343. 23° 21 45" S., 1490 35' 35" w.
Tubuai manu, see Tapamanu, Society islands.
Tubuai, a name often given to the Austral islands from the principal island.
Tubutubu or Engineer, in the New Guinea region.
Tuck, one of the Magellan islands; existence doubtful.
Tucker, see Satawal, Caroline islands. 3.
Tucopia is 7 m. in circumference, and 3000 ft. high ; inhabited by mild and inoffensive
Polynesians. British protectorate declared August 18, 1898. I2°2i/S., i68°43/E.
Tuesday islands are in Torres strait. io° 32' S., 142° 2\ E.
Tufa, islet of Rongelab of the Marshall islands. n° 14' 35" n., 1660 47' 40" E. 6.
Tufaaga or Tufaka, islet on the northwest coast of Tongatabu. 2i°04/s., I75°i5/w. 18.
Tugua, in the Tongan group. 18.
Tugulu, the northern islet of Pingelap, Caroline islands. 6° 14' N., i6o°52'e. 5.
Tuhoua or Mayor, in the Bay of Plenty, New Zealand.
Tuilagi or St. George, uninhabited island southwest from Ysabel, Solomon islands.
13 m. long. 8° 30' S., 159° 30' E. II.
Tuinaka or Reid, of the Paumotu archipelago. Northwest point is in 160 37' 17" S.,
1440 13' w.
Tuki, a mile in diameter, off Viti levu, Fiji. 170 19' 40" s., 178° 02 E.O
Tukopia, see Tucopia; Temelflua of Quiros.
Tukua, islet of Ontong Java. 50 34' S., 159° 15' E.
Tuma, in the Kiriwina group. 8° 29' S., 150° 52' E.
Tumbu, on the New Guinea coast. 40 25' S., 133° 35' E.
Tuna, islet of Tiri group, 100 ft. high, on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
i6o
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Tupete, on the south coast of New Caledonia.
Tupinier, in Dampier strait, Bismarck archipelago. Adtive volcano, in eruption in
1877- 5° 25' s., 148° 08' E.
Tupua or Marion, islet in Teavanui harbor, Borabora, Society islands. 20.
Turea, on the south coast of New Guinea.
Tureia, Carysfort or Papakena, was discovered by Captain Edwards in H. M. S .Pandora
in 1791. Lagoon closed. East end is in 20° 45' S., 138° 30' w.
Turtl-again, on the south coast of New Guinea. 90 34' S., 142° \C E.
Turtle, see Yatoa, Fiji.
Turtle, islet in Malo pass, Espiritu Santo, New Hebrides.
Turtle, islet in Port Powell, of New Britain.
Turtle-backed, off the New Guinea coast. 90 54' S., 142° 46' E.
Tut or Warrior, an inhabited sandbank with an extensive reef. 9° 48' S., 142° 55' E.
Tutuila, of the Samoan islands, is 17X5 m., high, volcanic. Mataafo peak is 2359
ft. high. It has the fine harbor of Pangopango on the south coast, nearly bisecting
the island. I11 Asu bay Comte de Langle, M. de Lamanon and a boat crew of
La Perouse’s fleet were massacred in 1787. The west cape is in 140 20 40" S.,
1 70° 48" 14” w. This with the Samoan islands to the eastward now belongs- to the
United States. 15.
Tuvana i tholo or Simonov, and Tuvana ira or Michaelov, of Fiji, are each about half
a mile in diameter. The surrounding reefs are circular, and the islets are nearer
the north side. Named for the astronomer and artist of Bellingshausen, 1820.
21 03 S., 178 50 IO W.
Tuvuna, islet east from Tongoa, New Hebrides.
Tuvutha (Tuvuea), Fiji; a densely wooded and inhabited island, 800 ft. high, in
17 c 40" S., 178° 49' w. Palolo are caught off the eastern point.
Tuyam, islet 0.3 m. long, 160 ft. high, on the southeast coast of New Guinea.
Two Brothers, see Kepara, New Guinea.
Two Groups, see Manaka, of the Paumotu archipelago.
Two Hills, see Mataso, New Hebrides. 170 18' S., 1680 23" E.
Ua Huka, see Huahuna of the Marquesas islands. 23.
Ualan, a name of Kusaie or Strong island of the Caroline archipelago. 5.
Ualeva, of the Tongan islands.
Ualomo, islet of Ugo bay, Isle of Pines.
Uanne, islet in Gazelle passage on the northwest coast of New Caledonia. 13.
Uap, see Yap of the western Caroline islands.
Uapora, see Huapu of the Marquesas islands.
Uapu, see Huapu of the Marquesas islands.
UatOin or Man, in the Bismarck archipelago, is in 40 07' S., 152° 03' E. On the coast
of New Britain.
Udia-Milai, see Bikini of the Marshall islands.
Udjae or Katherine, of the Marshall islands, is 22X6 m. Udjae or Ujae the southern
islet, and Enylamiej the northern one, are considered the finest and most fertile
of the group. The north point of Enylamiej is in 90 2 1 N., 165° 36' E. 6.
[244]
■m
15 0 S ^UKAPUKA
$
PAUMOTU GROUP
[ EAST ]
Tatakoto
(<0-
W
22
Reao
Akiaki
C*j
Vairaatea
©
PXJKARUHA
Vam
ITAH1
Nukutapipi
ti)
#
' 0> Nukutavakb
20aS.
20° S.
Vanavana Tureia
Mururoa
&
Vemanca
Tenaraao ^^Tenaruwca
Maturci vav4O0
Mcerenhout^
Marutea
m ■
Ahunui
Morane
ManGARSVA 0!
Gameier
e
Timor
136
w. ^
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
i6oa
Udjelong, of the Caroline group, also called Areeifos and Providence islands. There
are thirteen islets occupying a space 24 m. long by 7-8 m. wide. 90 52' N.,
1600 56' E. 5.
Uea, Uvea or Halgan of the Loyalty group. This name sometimes extends to three
adjoining islands formed by a narrow, interrupted strip of raised coral reef 23 m.
SSW-nne., with a mean breadth of 1.5 m., but at the north end this increases to
7-8 m. 20 m. from Lifu. Two races inhabit the island; the northern one is said
to have come from Uvea or Wallis island. Fertile, but good water scarce. 13.
Uemie, islet within NGoe reef on southeast coast of New Caledonia.
Uen or Waima, off southwest point of New Caledonia. High and rugged; 4.5 m. n-S.
Named by Cook “Prince of Wales Foreland”.
Ugai is the northwest islet of Mokil, Caroline group. 6° 39' N., 159° 40' E.
Ugar or Stephen, in Torres strait, is a mile long, fertile and inhabited. 90 30' S.,
1430 32' E.
Ugi or San Juan, of the Solomon group, is 6 m. long; 670 ft. high. io° 15' S., 161°
43 E. II.
Ugo, a small islet, lies 2.7 m. S. by E. from Cape Ndua, New Caledonia.
Uia, an islet of the Hapai group, Tongan islands.
Uika, another form of Uia, Tongan islands.
Ulakua, see Ulava, Solomon islands.
XJlarua, small desolate island of Fiji; Olenea of Wilkes. 18° 33' 30" S., 181° 14' E.
North end.
Ulava or Contrariete, of the Solomon group, is 27 m. northeast from Ugi; 8 m. n-s.
by 3 m.; 1200 ft. high. Natives noted for making canoes for the neighborhood.
90 47' S., 1610 56' E. This is La Treguada of Gallego. II.
Ulie, see Wolea, Caroline islands.
Ulietea, see Raiatea.
Ulikar is the eastern islet of Majuro, Marshall group.
Ulilaba, an islet east from Tongoa, New Hebrides; 0.7 111. NE-SW.; 120 ft. high.
Uliti, a spelling of Uluthi, Caroline islands.
Ulu, an uninhabited islet of Duke of York islands, Bismarck archipelago. 40 13' s.,
15? 25' E.
Ulu, see NGoli, Caroline islands.
Ulul, islet of Namonuito, Caroline islands. 8° 36' N., 1490 47' 30" E.
Ultllina, of the Louisiade archipelago, lies west from Moturina; 325 ft. high; few
inhabitants.
(Please insert this opposite page 160 of the Index to the Islands of the Pacific Ocean.
A page of the manuscript was inadvertently omitted in printing.)
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
161
Uluma, or Suckling reef, is in the Louisiade archipelago.
Ulunatl, in the Admiralty group, is in 2° oC s., 1470 32' E.
Uluthi, Uluti or Mackenzie, of the Caroline islands, was discovered by Captain
Mackenzie in 1823, but previously by the Spaniard Egoi. The islets Mogmog
(on which Padre Cantova was killed when endeavoring to establish a Jesuit mis¬
sion), Falalep, Troilem, Ear and Kilap are the principal ones. 9°56,n., i39°5c/e. 3.
Umaitia was Bougainville’s name for Tetuaroa.
Umboi or Rook is immediately west of New Britain; 28X16 m., 5000 ft. high,
volcanic. 10.
Umol, islet of Ruk in the Caroline islands.
Umuda, at the mouth of the Fly river, New Guinea. 8° 28' S., 143° 48' E.
Unalik, see Ounalik, islet of Namonuito, Caroline islands.
Undaga, one of the French islands, Bismarck archipelago. 40 38' S., 149° 12' E. IO.
Underwood group, Fiji, consists of Bateman, Henry, Einthieum, Ogle, Reynolds,
and Smith.
Undui, islet of the Ono i lau group, Fiji. 14.
Unei, on the north coast of New Guinea. 30 io' S., 143 21 E.
Unes, islet of Uea, Loyalty group; covered with many flat-topped hills.
Uneyeute, islet at the southeast end of Namonuito, Caroline islands.
Union or Tokelau, group of low coral islands extending 180 m. nw-SE.: Gente Her-
mosa, Fakaofu, Nukunono, Atafu. Belongs to Great Britain. 17.
Uo, see Laine of the Loyalty group. 13.
Upolu, of the Samoan islands, is the second in size and contains the principal port,
Apia, of the German portion of the group; 39.5 m. E-w., with an average width of
8 m.; 3200 ft. high. Subject to hurricanes. 130 46' S., 171° 20 w. 15.
Ura, see Takapoto of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Urak, see Mokil, Caroline islands.
Urara, of the Bismarck archipelago; 1 m. E-w. 40 17" s., 151° 39" E.
Uraura, islet in the harbor on the south side of Pallikulo, New Hebrides.
Ureparapara or Bligh is 12 m. northwest from the north point of Vanua lava, New
Hebrides; nearly circular; 12 111. in circumference, 2440 ft. high; volcanic; 300
inhabitants. 130 35' S., 167° 18' E. 12.
Uri, islet of Malekula, New Hebrides; 1.5 m. wnW-ESE.; low, inhabited.
Uripiv, islet of Malekula, New Hebrides, half a mile in diameter; 300-400 inhabitants.
Natives are said to bury their old or sick people alive. Presbyterian mission station.
Urombo, islet of Malekula, New Hebrides. 150 58' s.
Urracas, of the Marianas, consists of three islands in a circle 2-3 m. in diameter;
probably the remains of a sunken crater. 20° 08" N., 145° 19 E. See map under
Marianas.
Uru, see Tonnnan, New Hebrides.
Urukiki, islet off Port Stanley, of Malekula, New Hebrides.
Uruktapi or Urukthopel, of the Pelew islands, is 5.5 m. long; uninhabited. South
point is in 70 14" 30" N., 130° 28' E.
Uruma or Duchess, of D’Entrecasteaux group, is west from Duau. 9" 57' S., 150° 5FE.
Useless, two small, wooded islands on the New Guinea coast. 10' 35' 45 ' s., 150° 5F E.
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 2. — 11. [245]
162
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Utan, islet in Meoko harbor, Duke of York island, Bismarck archipelago.
Uteroa, the northern islet of Tapiteuea, Gilbert islands. North end is in i°o8/20//S.,
1740 45' E.; south end i° 29' 14" S., 1750 11 02" E. 7*
Utet, islet in Faitruk group, Ruk lagoon, Caroline islands.
Utian or Brooker, in the Louisiade archipelago. n° 03' S., 152° 27' E. 9*
Utirik, Button or Kutusow, Marshall islands, is 20X5 m. n° 20 N., 169° 50' E.©
Utupua, an old form of Tapoua or Edgecumbe of the Santa Cruz group.
Uvea or Wallis was discovered by Maurelle in 1781, and again by Wallis in 1797.
There are nine separate islands from 1-10 m. in circuit, and many islets or rocks
enclosed within one reef, though there is a ship passage to the lagoon on the south.
Uvea is 7 m. n-s., volcanic, 197 ft. high. Reef 14 m. n-S., 9 m. E-w. Came under
French influence in 1842 ; at first attached to the jurisdiction of Tahiti ; November
27, 1887, it was, with Futuna, made part of New Caledonia. Population in 1880,
5000 and increasing. On the south are Faiia, Nukuatea, Nukuafo, Nukufetao,
Faioa, Akimoa or Sail-rock; on the east, Nukulufala, Eonaniva, Fougalei; on the
north, Takuaviki, Nukuteatea, Nukuloa, and Nukufutu. The southwest point of
Uvea is in 13° 23' 35" S., 176" iT 47" w. 18.
Uvea, a form of Uea, Loyalty group.
Uyelang, islet of Udjelong, Marshall islands. Northeast end in 90 43' n., i6i° 19' E.
Vaga, of the Kiriwina group. 8° 44' S., 150° 55' 30" E.
Vahanga or Bedford, in the ACtseon group; 5 m. west from Tenarunga, Paumotu
archipelago. 22.
Vahine, a form of Huaheine, Society islands.
Vahitahi or Cook’s lagoon was discovered by Bougainville in 1768, and seen by Cook
the next year; 3X1 m. Paumotu archipelago. 18° 42' S., 138° 50' w. 22.
Vaiorea, islet on the west side of Huaheine, Society islands.
Vairaatea, Vairaotea or Egmont, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered by Wallis
in 1767; consists of two islets, Pukararo (leeward), Tres Cocotiers of Mauruc, and
Pukarunga (windward) or Egmont. 190 20 S., 139° 18' w. 22.
Vairaatea, see Mururoa, Paumotu archipelago. Often confounded with the preceding.
VaitUpU or Tracy, of the Ellice group, is of oval shape with fringing reef; 4 m. in
diameter. Formerly spelled Oaitupu. 7° 30' S., 178° 41' E. 16.
Vakuta, inhabited islet of the Kiriwina group. 8° 47' s., 151° 04' E.
Valea, one of the Shepherd islands, New Hebrides; uninhabited, narrow, almost in¬
accessible; 367 ft. high. Above the steep sides are coconut groves. 12.
Valise, see Guilbert, New Guinea.
Valua, of the New Hebrides, extends 6 m. NE-SW.; 1400 ft. high. Fertile, with a pop¬
ulation of about 1000. A station of the Melanesian mission. i3°4o's., 167° 38' E.
Vambi, one of the French islands, Bismarck archipelago. 40 40 S., 149° id E.
Vanama, south from Tagula, Louisiade archipelago. n° 38' S., 153° 3 1 E.
Vanavana, Kurateke, Barrow or Teku, of the Paumotu archipelago, was discovered
by Beechey January 31, 1826. It is a narrow strip of sand surrounding a lagoon;
1.2X17111. 20° 45' S., 139° 03' w.O 22.
Vanderford, of the Underwood group, Fiji. 17° 38' S., 177° 21 30" E.©
[246]
INDEX TO THE PA CIFIC ISLANDS.
163
Vanderlin, the largest of the Sir Edward Pelew group in the Gulf of Carpentaria.
Named for one of the directors of the Dutch East India Company who was a great
promotor of marine discoveries.
Vangunu, a name of the island off the southeast end of New Georgia or Rubiana,
Solomon islands.
Vanikoro, of the Santa Cruz islands, is 30 m. in circumference and 3000 ft. high
Densely wooded and only the coast inhabited. Tevai is on the same reef. As the
scene of the loss of the two ships of Iva Perouse, in 1788, Vanikoro has a sad in¬
terest. British protectorate declared August 18, 1898. n°4i'5o"s., i66°5ie. i 2.
Vanua kula, an islet of Kandavu, Fiji, 250 ft. high. 180 48' s., 178° 25" 10" K.
Vanua lava or lavu, New Hebrides, the largest of the Banks group, 15 m. n-S., 10 m.
E-W.; 3000A: ft. high, adtive volcano on the ridge. 130 48' s., 167° 30' 30" K. 12.
Vanua levu, Fiji; 100X25 111., 3200 ft. high, is the second in size of the Yitian group
and mountainous and wooded, with many bays and harbors with entrances through
openings in the barrier reef. The northeast point is in i6°o6'3o"s., i8o°07'e. 14.
Vanua masi, coral islet, 80 ft. high, within the Argo reef, Fiji. i8°o5,s., 178° 27' w.
Vanua mbalavu, Fiji, is 14X1 m.; Mt. Koro mbasanga is 930 ft. high. 17° 13' s.,
178° 58' w.
Vanua vatu, Fiji, is 6 m. in circumference and 310 ft. high. Frequented by fisher¬
men. 1 8° 22 S., i8oL 39' E.O
Vao, islet of New Caledonia. 20° 35' S.
Vao, islet of Malekula, New Hebrides, off Port Stanley.
Varivari, two islets Oil the south coast of New Guinea.
Vate, see Fate, New Hebrides.
Vatganai, islet ill Banks group, New Hebrides. 13 12" S., 167° 40' E.
Vatia, islet 011 the north coast of Viti levu, Fiji, 600 ft. high. 17 20' s., 1 77 50' E.
Vatia, small, high and rocky island off the north coast of Tutuila, Samoan islands. 15.
Vatilau or Buena Vista, off the northwest coast of Florida, Solomon islands; 1950 ft.
high. 8° 53' 30" S., 159° 59' 30" E. II.
Vatin, see Atiu, Herve}^ islands. 23.
Vatoa or Turtle was the only one of the Fijian group seen by Cook in 1774. Coral,
2 X0.5 111., 209 ft. high. Population less than 100. 190 47's., 17V 43' 42,/E. 14.
Vatu i thake, off Vanua levu, Fiji. North point is in 16° 33' 24” S., 178° 44' 30" E.
Vatu, a high island in the Yasawa group, Fiji. 17° 16' S., 177° 07' E.O
Vatu ira, islet 100 ft. high, off the northeast coast of Viti levu, Fiji; in the north
part of the Vatu ira lagoon, which is 14X3 111. 17 19' S., 178° 27 E.
Vatuka, one of the Tiri group, off the west coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Vatu lailai, islet at the mouth of the weather passage to Vatu leile, Fiji.
Vatu leile, Fiji, a well wooded, inhabited island, 6.7X17 ni. and no ft. high.
r»o r ft _ o w tr
18 34 30 S., 177 36 30 E.
Vatu levu, islet off Vatu leile, Fiji.
Vatu savu, islet off Vatu leile, Fiji.
Vatu vara or Hat, Fiji; 1.2 m. in diameter, 1030 ft. high; coral, with steep cliffs 011
all sides; the property of an American who resides there. 17 25' S., 179' 32' w.
Vatu Rhandi, New Hebrides. 13° 12' S., 167° 40' E. The proper form is Vatganai.
l247]
164
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
Vauvilliers, islet north from Mare, Loyalty islands.
Vavara, islet on the east side of Huaheine, Society islands.
Vavatl or Yavao, Tongan islands, was first visited by Maurelle in 1781. Population in
1891 was 5084. To the south and west are many islets. 18° 38' 20" s., i74°oi/ w. 18.
Vavi ai, islet in Guasop harbor on the south side of Murua or Woodlark island, of
the Louisiade archipelago. 9.
Vavitao or Ravaivai, of the Austral islands, was discovered by Captain Broughton
October 23, 1791; or, as some claim, by Bonecheo in 1772; 10 m. long; high.
23° 55' S., 147° 48' w.
Vehanga or Bedford, in the Adlseon group, Paumotu archipelago, uninhabited; 2 m.
in diameter. 21° 20 S., 136° 39' w. 2,2,.
Vehi, or Wedge, is half a mile wsw. from south cape of New Guinea.
Vekai, low islet 6 m. from Tabutha, Fiji ; uninhabited but frequented by turtle hunters.
G° 33' S., 1810 11 E.O
Vela la Velha is southeast from Mono, Solomon islands; 2800 ft. high. Volcanic,
with fuinaroles and hot springs.
Vele or Hinchinbrook, New Hebrides; northeast from Fate; 800 ft. high. See Mau.
Velerara, low and sandy island, Fiji. 16° 52' S., 1810 oo' 45" E.O
Velitoa, islet off Tongatabu, Tongan islands.
Vella Lavella, Solomon islands; 23 m. long, mountainous, with several volcanoes
more than 1000 ft. high. North point is in 70 32' S., 156° 35" E. II.
Venariwa, grassy islet 500 ft. high; 0.6X0. 3 m. northwest from Moturina, Louisiade
archipelago.
Vendralala, a high island in Naloa bay, Vanua levu, Fiji; inhabited. 16° 36" 54" S.,
178° 42' 45" E.O
Ventenat, see Digaragara, Louisiade archipelago. Named for Louis Ventenat, nat¬
uralist and chaplain of the Recherche . 9.
Verao, see Moso, New Hebrides.
V eriarartl, islet of Tahiti, Society islands.
Vesey is east from Commodore bay, New Britain. 50 27" S., 150° 48" E.
Viendrala, islet on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji; 99 ft. high, cultivated.
Vicuna, low island of Fiji. 160 11 35" s., 1790 50' 25" E.O
Village, an islet off the north coast of New Guinea, inhabited and connected to the
mainland by a reef bare at low water.
Vincennes, see Kawehe, Paumotu archipelago. 2,1.
Vingoru, one of the French islands, Bismarck archipelago. 40 36' S., 149° 21 E. IO.
Violet, islet 60 ft. high in the St. Andrew group, Admiralty islands.
Visschers, said to be three islands in the Bismarck archipelago, 1000 ft. high, coast
steep. Inhabitants naked, dye their hair and tatu to some extent. Their canoes
are a single log with carved ends. 2° 37" S., 151° 58' IO.
Viti, see Fiji.
Vitora, on the southeast coast of Ysabel, Solomon islands. 8° 37' S., 159° 46' E.
Viwa, in the bay of Mbau, Fiji; 1X0.3 m., 160T: ft. high. iy° 56' 56" s., 178° 39' 25” E.O
Viwa, in the Mamanutha group, Fiji; 100T ft. high. iy° 08' S., 176° 54' E.
Vliegen, see Rangiroa, Palliser group, Paumotu archipelago. 22.
[248]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
165
Volcano, in Anson archipelago. 22° 30' N.
Volcano, off the northeast point of Umboi, 3500 ft. high. Dampier saw an eruption
in March, 1700. 50 32' S., 148° 06' E.
Volcano, on the west side of Blanche bay, New Britain, rose in February, 1878.
Volcano, see Tinakula, New Hebrides.
Volcano Islands, or Magellan archipelago, a small volcanic group south of the Bonin
islands. Annexed by Japan in 1891. Arzobispo, Santo Alessandro, Sulphur,
Santo Agostino. Uninhabited.
Volunteer, see Starbuck.
Vomo, on the northwest coast of Viti levu, Fiji; 2 m. in circumference, 380 ft. high,
flat-topped. The south point is in 170 3c/ S., 177° 15' E.
Vomo lailai, a rock 200 ft. high on the south side of Vomo, Fiji. 17° 29A., 177° 13' E.©
Vostok, Wostok or Staver, was discovered by Bellingshausen in 1820; about 0.3 m.
in diameter. Tow, sandy, thickly covered with trees. io°o6's., 152° 23' W. British.
Votia, low island, Fiji. 170 33' 30" s., 1770 2O 20” E.O
Vua, islet in the Mato passage, Great South reef of New Caledonia.
V Ulan, New Guinea region. 30 57' s., 132° 41' E.
Vulcan, a volcanic cone 12 m. in circumference, clothed with vegetation to a height
of 3000 ft.; above that barren. Crater emits smoke. 40 io' s., 1450 02' E.
Vulelua, on northeast coast of Guadalcanar, Solomon islands. 9°29/i5"s., i6o°28,e. II.
Vuna, a common name of Taviuni, Fiji.
Vuro, islet on the northeast point of Ono, Fiji; 270 ft. high; uninhabited.
Vuro lailai (Tittle Vuro), a rock 90 ft. high on the reef between Ono and Vuro.
Wabuda, at the mouth of Fly river, New Guinea. 8° 23' S., 143° 45' E.
Wagipa, islet southeast from Dauila, D’Entrecasteaux group. 90 32' S., 150" 21' E.
Waia, in the Yasawa group, Fiji; 3 m. in diameter; 1641 ft. high. North extreme
170 16' S., 1 77° 05' E.
Waia lailai (Little Waia); 2X1.5 m. North point is in 170 19' 40" s., 177" 06' E.
Waia lailai thake, Fiji, in the Yasawa group; 1X0.5 m., 555 ft. high, inhabited.
1 70 22" 20" S., 1 77° 06' ic/' E. Observatory Hill.
Waiben or Thursday, in Torres strait. io°36/ S., 142° 12 E. A port of call for steamers
between Singapore and Brisbane; in telegraphic connection with the latter.
Waier or Wyer, within the same reef with Mer and Dauer, in Torres strait. 9" 54' s.,
1440 02' E. •
Waigiu, 80X20 m., rugged and hilly; Papuan, with wild tribes in the interior. East
end is in o° 20' s., 13 1° 20 E. Subject to the Sultan of Tidore.
Waiheke, in Auckland harbor, Hauraki gulf, New Zealand.
Waihu, an old chart name for Rapanui or Easter island.
Waikatu, the largest of the St. Andrew group, Admiralty islands. Inhabitants seem
to be a superior race.
Waikawa, Te Houra or Portland, in Hawke bay, New Zealand.
Wailagilala, low islet of sand and coral in the Lau group, Fiji; 9X3 cables, at the
northeast corner of a lagoon 9 m. in circumference. Also Weilangilala.
Waima, see Uen, New Caledonia.
[249]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
1 66
Wainwright, see Akamaru, islet of Mangareva. 2,2,.
Wakaia or Wakaya, io m. east from Ovalau, Fiji; 4X1.5 m., 595 ft. high. North
point is in 170 35' 16" S., 179° 02 E.
Wake was discovered in 1796 from the Prince William Henry , but it is probably the
San Francisco of Mendana; 20-25 m. long, 8 ft. high. When I saw it from the
masthead of the ship Oracle , in 1865, it was covered with a low and sparse vege¬
tation. 19° 15' n., 166° 30' E. Annexed by the United States in July, 1898.
Waldrotl, a small island in the Hudson group, near Viti levu, Fiji. 170 51' s.,
1 7 70 09' 30" E.O Named for Purser R. R. Waldron of the Wilkes Expedition.
Walibi, islet of Panatinani, Louisiade archipelago; 140 ft. high, grassy.
Walker, in the Hudson group, Fiji. 17 0 34' 30" S., 177° 03' 10" E.O Named for
Lieutenant W. M. Walker of the Wilkes Expedition.
Walker, discovered by Captain Walker in 1814. 30 34^., 1490 15' w. Existence doubtful.
Wallis (Red), in Torres strait. io° 50' S., 142° 02' E.
Wallis (Woody), in Torres strait. io° 52' S., 142° 02' E.
Wallis, islet of Port Praslin, New Ireland. 40 48' S., 152° 47' E.
Wallis, see Uvea. 18.
Walo, islet north of Port Stanley, on the coast of Malekula, New Hebrides.
Walpole, Loyalty islands, was discovered November 17, 1794, by Captain Butler of
the Walpole. 22° 38' oy" s., 168° 56' 45" E.
Wanim or Grass, in the Louisiade archipelago; 1.5 m. n-S., 390 ft. high.
Waremata or East, in the Bonvouloir group, Louisiade archipelago, is 500 ft. high,
densely wooded. io° 26' S., 152° 03' E.
Wanawana, an extensive, low, densely wooded island off the west side of New Georgia
(Marovo), Solomon islands. 8° 12' S., 157° oy' E.
Waratap, on the east side of South bay of Fate, New Hebrides.
Wari or Teste, between the Louisiades and New Guinea: called Teste by D’Urville;
2.5 m. E-w., 0.2 m. wide; inhabited by uncouth natives who wear human jawbones
as armlets. io° 57' 55" S., 151° 03' 20" E. 9.
Waritira, 8° 22' s., 1430 24' E.
Warren Hastings, see Pulo Mariere, Caroline islands. 40 20 n., 132° 28' E.
Warrior, see Tut on the south coast of New Guinea.
Wasau = Faiva, islet of Uea, Loyalty islands.
Washington, New York or Prospect, was discovered by Captain Fanning in 1798;
3.2 X 1.2 m., 10 ft. above the sea; covered with coconut and other trees. No lagoon,
but a fresh water pond. 40 4T 35" n., 160° 15' 37" w. (Fig. 12.)
Washington, see Huahuna, Marquesas islands.
Wasima, 175 ft. high, southeast from Dituna point, southeast coast of New Guinea.
Wasp, islet near Layard islands on the north coast of New Guinea.
Wateeoo = Atiu, Hervey islands.
Waterlandt, of Schouten and Lemaire, is Manilii of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Watmough, a low island off Viti levu, Fiji. 170 45' 50" S., 177° 20 40" E.O
Watson, islet off Blanche harbor, Mono, Solomon islands.
Watts, see Ailuk of the Marshall islands. 6.
Watts, see Kuriva in the Engineer group, Louisiade archipelago.
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
167
Wavi ai, see Vavi ai, Woodlark or Murua.
Wea or Emery, of the Atana islands, northwest from Rotnma.
Webb, 2-3 islets covered with coconut trees, near Roux islands, New Guinea.
Also called Ulawabai.
Wedge, islet of Stewart island, New Zealand.
Wedge = Vehi, on the southeast coast of New Guinea.
Wednesday, in Torres strait. io° 32' S., 142° 18' E.
Weeks was seen by Captain Gelett, of the Morning Star , in 24° 04' N., 1540 02 E.,
December 17, 1864. It had been previously reported. About 5 m. long, densely
wooded with trees and shrubs; a knoll in the centre rising 200 ft. above the sea.
Uncertain on charts.
Weitoa or O’Neill, on the southeast coast of New Guinea; nearly 2 m. nw-SE., and
580 ft. high. io° 41' S., 150° 56' E.
Welle, see Raputata of
the D’Entrecasteaux
group. 9.
Wellesley, group in the
Gulf of Carpentaria,
of which Mornington
is the largest. The
others are : Rocky,
Pisonia, Beautiful,
Forsyth, Bentinck,
Allen, Sweers and
Fowler.
Wellington, see Alapawa,
New Zealand.
Wellington, see Mokil of
Caroline islands. 5.
Wenmatl, of the Galapagos, the fragment of a volcano now 830 ft. high.
West, islet of Kandavu, Fiji; 25 ft. high.
West, islet of Niuatobutabu, Tongan islands; 70 ft. high, 0.7 m. in diameter.
West, in Torres strait. io° 33' 45" S., 150° 48' 25" E.
West, islet south side of Umboi, Bismarck archipelago; 150 ft. high.
West, islet off Cape Queen Charlotte, west side of New Hanover; inhabited. 2° 26' S.
149° 55' 13-
West Danger, of the Marshall islands.
Western, a group of the Admiralty islands. 2° 12' S., 148 ' oor 40” E. 10.
Whakari or White, in the Bay of Plenty, New Zealand.
Whale (La Baleine), see Isenay of the Pleiades group, Loyalty islands. 13.
White, see Whakari, New Zealand.
Whitsunday, see Nganati of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Whitsunday, see Nukutavake.
FIG. 12. WASHINGTON ISLAND.
Whitsunday, on the Australian coast.
Whitsuntide, see Arag, New Hebrides.
20 15 S., 149 02 E.
[25i]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
1 68
Whittle, Fiji. 1 8° 50' 30" s., 178° 25' 30" e.O
Whytohee, see Napuka of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Wiak, see Schouten.
Wiakow, on the north part of the outer ring of Egum atoll, Trobriand group.
9 20 30 S., 151 58 E.
Wild, of the Admiralty group; 0.7 m. long. Named for J. J. Wild, artist on the
Challenger. i° 55' 10" S., 146° 40' 56" E.
Willaumez, now ascertained to be a part of New Britain. Named for one of the officers
of D’Entrecasteaux, Ensign on the Recherche.
William IV., see Ant of the Andema group, Caroline islands.
Williams, one of the Tiri islands off Vanua levu, Fiji. 16° 24' 45" S., 179° o6/ 22" E.O
Wilson, islet off Blanche harbor of Mono island, Solomon islands.
Wilson, see Ifalik, Caroline islands. 3.
Wilson, a name of the Duff islands, so called because seen by Captain Wilson, Sep¬
tember, 1797.
Wilson, see Manihi of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Wittgenstein, see Fakarawa of Paumotu archipelago. So named by Bellingshausen. 21.
Woahoo — Oahu, Hawaiian islands. Old English name found on charts with Owhyhee.
Wolea or Ulie, Caroline islands, was discovered by Captain Wilson in the Duff in
1793. Wooded and inhabited atoll 0.7 m. in diameter, with 22 islets. North end
7° 23' 3°" n., 143° 57' D 3.
Woles, islet of Ruk, Caroline islands.
Wolkonski, see Takurea of the Paumotu archipelago. 21.
Woodlark, see Murua, Kiriwina group.
Woodle, see Kuria of the Gilbert islands.
Woody, opposite Entrance island in Torres strait. io° 40' S., 142° 20 E.
Woody, islet in Arembo bay, on the southwest side of New Caledonia.
Woody, see Panaman of the Eouisiade archipelago.
Wostok, a form of Vostok.
Wotja, the westernmost islet of Odia atoll, Marshall islands. There is much con¬
fusion with a similar name in the Romanzow atoll.
Wotje, Odia or Romanzow, of the Marshall islands, extends 29 m. E-W., with a width
from 6-12 m. There are 65 islets on the reef. Christmas harbor, of Kotzebue, is
• o ni rr o w rr . ^
m 9 28 09 N., 170 16 05 E. o.
Wotto, of the Marshall islands, was discovered by Captain Shanz of the Russian
navy. It is 18 m. long and 4-12 m. wide. io° 05' N., 1660 04' E.O
Wrack, in the Bismarck archipelago. 30 15' S., 154° 31' E.
Willi or High, on the northwest coast of Roua, Eouisiade archipelago; 1.4 m. E-W.,
300 ft. high; inhabited and cultivated. n° 42/ S., 154° 02 E.
Wyer, a form of Waier, Torres strait.
Wytoohee, see Napuka, Paumotu archipelago. Disappointment islands of Byron.
Yaba, islet in Banare bay, on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Yabwat, see Jabwat, Marshall islands.
Yaga, of the Kiriwina islands.
Yakimoan, islet northwest from Panawina, Eouisiade archipelago.
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
169
Y alangalala, uninhabited islet, Fiji. 160 49' 30" s., 180° 57' 20" E.O
Yambll, uninhabited island, 170 ft. high near Vuro, off Kandavu, Fiji.
Yamiga, islet on the southwest coast of New Guinea.
Yande, 6 m. west from Paaba on the northwest coast of New Caledonia; 1070 ft. high,
inhabited and well cultivated.
Yandua, high, inhabited island, 12 m. in circumference ; Loto peak, 875 ft. high, is
in 160 49' s., 178° 16' E.
Yanguel, see Kayangle of the Pelew islands.
Yangatlga, islet 887 ft. high on the north coast of Vanua levu, Fiji.
Yaniba, largest of the group on the north side of the outer ring of Egum atoll; 14
islets, the highest 150 ft. Population 200. 90 20 30" S., 151° 55' E.
Y antltha lailai and Yanutba levu, two islets between Ovalau and. Moturiki, Fiji.
Yanutha loa, off the west coast of Vanua mbalavu, Fiji; 160 ft. high.
Yanuya, inhabited island of the Mamanutha i thake group, Fiji.
Yanu yanu elotna, grassy islet 140 ft. high on the Kandavu reef, Fiji.
Yanu yanu sau, islet 80 ft. high on the reef of Kandavu, Fiji.
Yap or Ouap, of the Caroline islands, is on a reef 35X5 m. A volcanic peak 1170 ft.
high. The north islet is in o° 37' n., 138° 08' E. Population 8000, Malay with slight
Polynesian admixture. The stone money of the group consists of wheels of aragon¬
ite from 6 in. to 12 ft. in diameter. See photograph in The Caroline Islands , by
F. W. Christian, 1899, p. 236.
Yaroua, islet of Tuvutha, Lau group, Fiji.
Yarru, on the New Guinea coast. g° of s., 143° 12' E.
Yaruman, islet 285 ft. high, northeast from Pana numara, Louisiade archipelago.
Yasau-i-lau, near Yasawa, Fiji ; 0.5 m. long, 437 ft. high. 16° 5T4CFS., 177° 26/40//E.O
Yasawa group, Fiji, consists of Timboor, Kiusick, Yasawa, Asawa, Ovawa, Androna,
Yasawailau, Otovawa, Nansia, Nangati, Matathoni levu, Yangati, Naviti, Eld, Fox,
Agate, Sinclair, Waia, Waialailai, Waia lailai thake, Biwa, Knox, Ombi, Baldwin,
Davis, Totten, Lewin, Vomo.
Yasawa, inhabited island 8X2 m., 781 ft. high, in the group to which it gives name.
The north point is in 16° 43' S., 177° 30' 05" E. 14.
Yaukuve or May, islet of Ono, Fiji; 400 ft. high.
Yaukuve lailai, near by, is 200 ft. high.
Yavurimba, uninhabited islet of Mamanutha ira group, Fiji.
Yavutha, islet 240 ft. high, of the Angasa group, Fiji.
Yeccla, islet of the Carteret group. Bismarck archipelago.
Yeharnu, islet of the Carteret group.
Yeina, north from Tagula, Louisiade archipelago. n° 20 S., 153° 28/ E.
Yendua, see Yandua, Fiji.
Yengiebane, islet near Paaba on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Yenoe, islet in Banare bay on the northwest coast of New Caledonia.
Yermaloff, of Bellingshausen, is Taenga of the Paumotu archipelago. 2,1.
York, a group in Torres strait, 90 44' S., 143° 25' E. This group is shown on the
Surveyor-General’s fine map of Queensland and British New Guinea, 1896, but I
have been unable to find any description.
[253]
INDEX TO THE PACIFIC ISLANDS.
170
York, Duke of, an interesting group, of volcanic origin, between New Ireland and
New Britain in St. George channel.
York, Duke of, see Atafu of the Union group. 17. Wallis gave this name to Eimeo,
Society islands.
Young, on the Australian coast. 12° 07' S., 1430 12' E.
Yovo, islet of the Carteret group, Bismarck archipelago.
Yowl, a group of 16 low islands on the west coast of New Guinea. o°25/n., i3i°oo/E.
Papuan. Group surrounded by a coral reef 60 m. in circumference. This belongs
to the Moluccas and is not properly included in our region.
Ysabel or Bogotu, the Camba of Mendana, Solomon islands. The full name was
Santa Ysabel de la Estrella; 125 m. nw-SE. by 25 m., 3900 ft. high. The Mela¬
nesian mission has several stations here. The northeast point is in 70 18' S.,
158° 08' E.
Ythata, high, inhabited island north from Vaturera, Fiji; 2.5 m. E-w., 1 m. N-S. East
point is in 170 17' S., 179° 34' 30" E.
Yule, see Roro.
Zarpane is a name of Rota of the Marianas.
Zet, islet off the north end of Eoof, Hermit group. 8.
£eune, a small group on the southeast coast of Bougainville, Solomon islands.
6° 17' s., 155° 48' E.
Sille, islet in Dampier strait.
Roller, off the southwest end of Bouka, Solomon islands. 50 25' S., 154° 32' E.
^uckerhut, of the Admiralty group. 2° 24' S., 146° 49' E.
[254]
ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA.
Asie, Solomon islands. All the islets of the Solomon islands and of Ontong Java in
this supplementary list were taken into British jurisdiction by treaty with Germany
as mentioned under Solomon islands.
Benana, Solomon islands.
Dauahaida or Marokau, of the Paumotu archipelago.
Engaulii, islet of Ontong Java.
Faise, Solomon islands.
Grampus islands are attributed to Captain Meares, April 4, 1788, in 25° 15' N., 146° E.
Two islands close together, another southwest from these. Perhaps the Sebastian
Lopez of the Spanish charts.
Lehuanu, islet of Ontong Java.
Loto, Solomon islands.
Malabrigos or Margaret, a group of three islands discovered by Captain Magee in 1773,
in 27° 20 n., 1450 45' E. Perhaps the Malabrigos (bad shelter) of Torres in 1543,
but the identification is uncertain.
Marakau = Marokau, of the Paumotu archipelago.
Margaret, see Malabrigos above.
Mongava, a name of Rennel, Solomon islands.
Mongiki, a name of Bellona, Solomon islands.
Nee, islet of Ontong Java.
Niellei, Solomon islands.
Nieue = Niiie or Savage. The Jurisdiction of Her Britannic Majesty’s High Com¬
missioner’s Court for the Western Pacific was extended to Niue OCtober 19, 1899.
Nufahana, Solomon islands.
Nusakoa, Solomon islands.
Nusave, Solomon islands.
Oikuo, islet of Ontong Java.
Oku, islet of Ontong Java.
Palav, islet of Ontong Java.
Piedu, Solomon islands.
Porporang, Solomon islands.
Kalan, p. 82, should be Kalau.
Leuneuwa, p. 90, should be Leueneuwa.
Oua raha, p. 126, should be Owa raha.
[255] <X7X>
DIVISION OF THE PACIFIC AMONG THE NATIONS.
The present ownership of the islands of the Pacific Ocean, whether by outright
annexation, purchase or protectorate, is as follows :
Great Britain. — Australia, Tasmania, islands of Torres strait, S. E. New Guinea, Lou-
isiade archipelago, Solomon islands (except northwest corner), Santa Cruz, Lord
Howe, Norfolk, Kermadec, Chatham, New Zealand, Fiji, Ellice, Gilbert, Phoenix,
Union, Tonga, Niiie, Line islands, Hervey (Cook), Pitcairn, Henderson, Ducie
and Oeno of the Paumotu archipelago.
Germany . — N. E. New Guinea, Bismarck archipelago, N. W. Solomon islands, Pelew,
Marianas (except Guam), Caroline archipelago, Marshall islands and Western
Samoa.
France. — New Caledonia, Uvea, Society islands, Paumotu archipelago (except islands
in the southeast extreme), and Marquesas islands.
The New Hebrides are jointly watched or protected by Great Britain and France.
United States. — Hawaiian group, Wake, Guam and Eastern Samoan islands.
Holland. — Western New Guinea.
Japan. — Bonin and Marcus islands.
Equador. — Galapagos group.
i Chile. — Rapanui or Easter island, Juan Fernandez group, and St. Felix islands.
072) [256]
Issued December , igoo.
A
K E Y
TO THE
BY
WILLIAM
BRYAN,
Curator of Ornithology in the Museum.
HONOLULU, H. I.:
BISHOP MUSEUM PRESS.
19OI.
FOREWORD.
The following preliminary key to the birds of the Hawaiian possessions is based on a study
of the collection of birds in the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum, which institution now possesses the
most representative collection of the Hawaiian avifauna extant. The collection at this time num¬
bers upwards of six hundred specimens, embracing the famous Mills collection, a series of skins
collected by Mr. Palmer for the Rothschild museum, a valuable collection made by Mr. R. C. L.
Perkins, together w7ith collections by Messrs. W. H. Hall, F. Gay, A. F. Judd, and others. To the
above collection almost daily additions are now being made through the efforts of the Museum’s
skilled collector, Mr. A. Seale.
By the Hawaiian possessions it is intended to include all of the chain composed of some twenty
or more islands lying in the central North Pacific ocean, stretching over an area extending from about
1 50° West Longitude to 1750 East Longitude, and from 180 to 30° North Latitude.
Though following the scheme usually adopted by systematic zoologists in the making of ana¬
lytical keys there is some slight difference in the arrangement of the text. Since it may be necessary
for persons not entirely familiar with keys to make use of the following pages, it might be well to say
that the fundamental characters are used for the separation and identification of species instead of
length}' and oftentimes misleading detailed descriptions. To facilitate this, dichotomous antithesis is
striClly adhered to, so that there are but two alternatives ; the specimen must conform to the characters
given, for example, under a, or the whole matter under a, — that is, the sub-heads b, bb, c, ec, etc.,
(if there are any) must be passed over until aa is arrived at, which is of equal value with and the only
alternative of the division a. If it is settled that the specimen corresponds with the charadters given
under aa, the next step is to settle between the heads b and bb, then pass to c and cc, and so on,
taking up the characters in their natural order until finally the reference page is given, where the
key will be found continued. Thus the key to the higher orders will be found on the last pages of
the Memoir, and will indicate the order to which the bird belongs and the page where the order is
treated. Similarly the order will be broken up into families, the families into genera, and lastly the
genera into species. The index letters are in bold type, and characters of equal value are placed
immediately under each other, while the minor divisions are indented farther and farther to the right.
Hence bb is found set in an equal distance from the left-hand margin as b; CC is still farther indented,
but the same distance as c, while the body of the text extends the full distance across the page.
The measurements are, for the most part, taken from specimens in the Bishop Museum, and
are given in English inches and hundredths. The length of the wing is measured from the bend
(i. <?., the carpal joint) to the tip of the longest primary. The length of the tail is from the apparent
base to the tip of longest feather. The length of the culmen is the distance from the base of the
upper mandible on top to the tip of the same in a straight line. This measurement, as well as all of
the more exact ones, are best taken with the dividers. The depth of the bill is a vertical line from
[259] (iii)
IV
Forezvord.
the base of the upper mandible through both mandibles. The length of the tarsus is measured from
the enlargement on the front outside of the tibio-tarsal (i. e. , the “knee”) joint to the more or less obvi¬
ous beginning of the middle toe. The middle toe is measured in a straight line along the top from
the last-mentioned point to the tip of the nail.
In bringing together the key I have made free and frequent use of the catalogue of birds in the
British Museum, and Ridgway’s Manual of North American Birds, together with the valuable con¬
tributions to our knowledge of the Hawaiian ornithology — Aves Hawaiiensis, by Messrs. Wilson
and Evans, and Avifauna of Laysan, etc. I have also had at hand the published notes of Messrs.
Gadow, Dole, Perkins, Stejneger, and others. In addition to the above I have had the pleasure of
examining the material in the National Museum at Washington, D. C., the Philadelphia Academy of
Science, the British Museum, Tring Museum, and the Jardin des Plantes. To all of these sources
of information I would make grateful acknowledgement of the service they have rendered.
WM. ALANSON BRYAN.
[260]
Birds of the Hawaiian Group.
Order LONGIPENNES.— Long-winged Swimmers.'
Families.
With the lower mandible not longer than the upper one and only moderately
compressed, while the covering of the upper mandible is made up of one solid piece
(z. e., with the seams fused together, no “nail” at the tip, etc.), through which the
nostrils are pierced.
Family LAR ID^E. — Gulls and Terns.
Genera.
a. Bill rather short, and deeper at the angle than at the nasal openings; the
upper mandible longer and bent down over the lower one; tail usually even (Sub¬
family Larince)\ tarsus not roughened nor serrate behind ; hind toe moderately well
developed; culmen more than two-thirds the length of tarsus; nostrils linear or linear
ovate . ( Page 6. ) Lams.
aa. Bill slender with both mandibles about equal in length; tail slightly or de¬
cidedly forked; angle of the lower mandible not prominent. (Sub-family Sterninee. )
b. Tail more or less deeply forked; head without plumes at the gape; tar¬
sus shorter than the middle toe and claw; outer tail feathers the longest, and pointed;
tail generally more than half the length of the wing; bill compressed and slender;
tarsus never exceeding and generally shorter than the middle toe and claw; depth of
bill at base less than one-third the exposed culmen . (Page 7.) Sterna.
bb. Tail graduated, pointed; outer pair shorter than the next pair; middle
toe shorter than the exposed culmen; distance from the angle of the gonys to the tip
of the bill less than to the gape.
C. Tail feathers not all pure white.
d. Fourth pair of tail feathers from the outside the longest;
wing more than 9.50 . (Page 9-) Anoiis.
dd. Third pair of tail feathers from the outside the longest;
wing less than 9.50 . (Page 9.) Microan oiis.
CC. Tail feathers all pure white . (Page 9-) Gygis.
> For the Key to the Higher Orders see last pages of the Memoir. [261] ( 5 )
6
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP .
Genus I/A'RUS Linnaeus.
a. Head entirely white in the summer adults.
b. Primaries uniform pale grey, with no black, and fading gradually
into white at the tips (larger, wing more than 16.00). Head, neck, tail and under
parts white ; mantle grey ; the scapulars and secondaries white at their tips. Female
smaller, often considerably so. Adult in winter: Mottled and streaked with pale
brown on the head and neck; back and under parts also mottled. Immature: The
mottling on the upper surface gradually disappears and for a short time the bird ap¬
pears to be a creamy white. Young: Both the upper and under surface streaked and
mottled with ash-brown on a paler ground color; the feathers of the mantle margined
with huffish white which produces a creamy appearance; upper and under coverts
rather boldly marked with brown (Saunders). Length about 25.00-28.00, wing 16.25—
18.00 (17.12), tail 7.00-7.50, cnlmen 2.30-2.70, tarsus 2.40-2.78 (2.57), middle toe
with claw 2.35-2.75 (2.55). Hab. Bering Sea and adjacent waters northward to Point
Barrow; southward in winter to Japan (Ridgway). Kauai,2 Maui.
1. L. barrovianus3 Ridgw. Point Barrow Gull,
bb. Primaries marked with distinct white tips and dark (black) subtermi¬
nal spaces ; the two outer primaries with a distinct gre}^ wedge on the inner web in
the. summer adults; depth of bill through the angle .50 or more; mantle blue-grey
or dark pearl-grey in adults.
C. Larger, length 20.00-23.00, cnlmen 1.65-2.15, mantle darker grey
than in the following species; scapulars and secondaries broadly tipped with white;
the outer primary with a large portion of black ; the first, chiefly black with about
2.00 of the terminal portion white; the second, with a small grey wedge basally;
the third, fourth and fifth, black with white tips and increasing grey wedges; bill,
bright yellow with an irregularly shaped spot of intense carmine near the tip of the
lower mandible, and a dark spot or bar usually anterior to this on one or both mandi¬
bles. Female smaller and duller in color. Adult in winter: Like the above but head
and neck streaked with greyish brown. Immature: Autumn birds of the second year
show grey on the mantle ; upper tail coverts begin to show grey at their bases ; tail
feathers more uniform umber brown than before, though the coverts are whiter; under
parts whitish brown without distinct spots ; bill yellower at the base. Young: Much
darker brown throughout ; no signs of grey on the secondaries nor the basal portion
of the inner primaries, the paler inner webs being nearly dull brown ; tail coverts
2 I he single specimen in the Museum collection is one of two taken on the island of Kauai by Mr. Francis Gay. Both specimens were
taken late in the autumn months. While neither specimen agrees as closely with the descriptions at hand as would be desirable, I have
seen fit to refer them to barrovianus , believing them to be immature birds of that form. This is probably the undetermined species mentioned
by Kittlitz. the following measurements are taken from the Museum specimen No. 9305 : Length 25.50, culmen 2.00, tail 6.50, tarsus 2.85,
toe 2.75; locality, Kauai, H. I.; date, 1899, autumn. There is also a specimen in the cabinet of St, Louis College, Honolulu, taken on Man}
by Brother Matthias.
3 Earns glaucus, Briinn, from Laysan (Dr. Schamnsland)\ Hawaii (Henshaw, in Auk, Vol. XVIJ., p. 201).
[262]
LARIDAZ,
7
broadly and closely barred ; tail feathers umber brown with dull white tips ; bill
brownish basally, black terminally; tarsi and toes brown; wing 15.00-16.75, depth
of bill at the angle .60-.75, tarsus 2.00-2.60, middle toe and claw about 2.10. Hab.
Western North America, wintering on the Pacific coast. Hawaiian Islands (accidental;
one specimen in St. Louis College cabinet).
2. L. californ'icus Lawr. California Gull.
CC. Smaller, length 18.00-20.00; mantle lighter grey; bill with a black
band in adult. Adult: Bill greenish yellow, crossed near the end by a distinct black
band ; tip sometimes orange ; feet pale yellow. Immature : Head slightly streaked;
mantle grey with a few brown feathers about the bend of the wing; outer primary without
indication of a white spot ; tail feathers white with the remains of the broad dark subter¬
minal band. Young: Above brownish dusky varied with dull huffish white; quills black¬
ish, the shorter ones greyish basally with white tips; bill blackish, paler at the base;
wing 13.25-15.25, culmen 1. 55-1. 75, depth of bill at angle .50— .65. Hab. Whole of North
America. Hawaiian Islands (accidental ; one specimen in St. Louis College cabinet).
3. L. delawaren'sis Ord. Ring-billed Gull,
aa. Head uniform black or dusky in summer adults; lower parts, rump and
tail pure white; mantle grey; tarsus not longer than the middle toe and claw;
wing more than 10.00 (culmen more than 1.00); bill reddish brown, with a darker
subterminal band ; head and upper part of the neck plumbeous black with a conspicu¬
ous elongated white patch both above and below the eye; lower parts white with a rosy
blush in freshly killed birds; the secondaries broadly edged with white; primaries all
tipped with white and all bluish grey next the shafts 011 the upper part, except the
outermost which has the outer web black and some white 011 the inner web, with a
black subterminal bar. Female similar. Adult winter: Like above with the head white,
spotted and mottled with blackish 011 the upper surface. Immature: Similar, but with
a larger proportion of black in the primaries. Length 13.50, tail 4.25, tarsus 1.47, toe
with claw 1.50, culmen 1.25, depth of bill at gouys .32, wing 11.25. Hab. Interior of
North America from Iowa northward, breeding; south to Middle America and Western
South America to Peru. Maui.4
4. L- franklin'ii Sw. & Rich. Franklin’s Gull.
Genus STFRNA Linn.eus.
a. C rown black in the breeding plumage (more or less varied with white in
winter); wings rarely over 12.00; both webs of the outer tail feathers white at the base.
b. Mantle, back of neck, rump, upper tail coverts and all the tail feathers
except the outer ones (streamers) uniform sooty black; forehead and superciliary stripe
white; superciliary stripe not reading bad over the eye ; under parts white with a
greyish tinge on the abdomen ; bill and feet black. Winter adult: Like above except
4 The above description and measurements are based on the single winter specimen in the cabinet of St. Louis College. Oahu. The
specimen was taken by Brother Matthias on IVJaui, and is the first record of the species being taken here.
[263)
8
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP .
with white flecked through the black of lores and crown. Young:1 Brownish black
above, darkest on the upper wing coverts; outer tail feathers almost as sooty black as
middle ones, except towards their tips. Half -fledged birds: Feathers of the mantle
are blackish with broad white tips. Length 15.00-17.00, wings 11.75— 12.00, tail 7.00-
7.50 (forked for more than 3.00), tarsus .95-1.00, toe .99-1.05, culmen 1.80-1.85, depth
of bill .45-48, gonys .85. Hab. Tropical and juxta-tropical seas. Hawaiian Islands.
PI. XVI., 9153, 9155. 5. S. fuliginosa Gmel. Sooty Tern.
bb. Back, rump, tail coverts, wing coverts, outer edge of secondaries and
tail feathers, except the outer pair, dark sooty grey; crown, lores and nape black;
primaries chiefly smoky grey with the white wedges on the inner webs ; wings never
less than 10.00; under parts and forehead, white; white superciliary stripe extending
back over the eye. Winter adult: Similar to the above, but showing more white in
the forehead. Young: Mantle with more brownish tinge of grey; head mottled black
and white; wing 10.75, culmen 1.60, tarsus .85, toe 1.15. Hab. Central Pacific Ocean
Laysan, etc.
6. S. luna’ta (Peace). Grey-backed Tern.
aa. Crown always white, sometimes with a brownish tinge; nape, orbit, and
ear coverts black; mantle pale grey; in front of the eye a black triangular patch, the
point of which does not reach to the base of the bill ; from the eyes a black band ex¬
tending about the back of the head; band broadened and more or less prolonged down
the back of the neck ; neck and under parts white ; mantle and rump pearl grey ; shafts
of the primaries white; outer primary with the outer web blackish, streak next the
shaft on the inner web blackish or greyish black. Winter adult:1' Similar, with less
black about the head. Immature: Similar to the above, but there is a brownish tinge
to the back of the nape, the wing coverts are ash-grey, and a dark line runs along
the carpal joint (Saunders). Young: Forehead and crown huffish white with a black
streak which becomes confluent on the nape; feathers of the mantle and tail grey,
barred with ash -brown and tipped with buff. Length about 13.25-13.50, wiug
9.50-10.00, tail 3.90-4.40, bill 1. 25-1. 40, tarsus .75-.80, toe .95-1.00. Hab. Southern
and Western Pacific Ocean, north through Polynesia generally, the Philippine Islands
and China. Its range appears to depend in a great measure upon the existence of
coral islands of a certain size, and is probably still more extensive (Saunders). Kauai;
accidental.
7. S. melanau'chen Temm.
5 A September bird from Laysan Island has the head and neck dark sooty brown ; lighter sooty brown below, extending back to the
abdomen and over the flanks ; belly white ; tail uniform blackish brown, both inner and outer webs tipped with dirty white ; upper tail
coverts, rump, and greater wing coverts uniform with the tail; lesser wing coverts darker, edged with fulvous or whitish ; edge of wing
white, under wing coverts stone-grey. Length about 14.75, wing 10.25, tail 5.25, tarsus .90, toe 1.05, bill 1.25, gonys .45, depth of bill .35. As
may be seen by the above the bill pattern is totally different from adult fuliginosa as well as some slight variation in all of the other measure¬
ments. It was with difficulty that the specimen was made out fuliginosa .
6 The two specimens in the Museum were taken at Mana, Kauai, by Mr. A. F. Judd during the winter of 1892-3. Both have the white
foreheads assumed by this species, while the remainder of the plumage is badly worn. This seems to be the first record of this species
being taken in the Hawaiian Islands. The above measurements are taken from these specimens. The S. bergii of Dole has never been
noted from Hawaii since his early reference to it, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., 1869, p. 306. Bergii is, in geperal appearance, somewhat similar
to mclanauchen , though the former is much the larger (length .20-.21, wing 14.25, bill 2.05),
[264]
LARIDAE.
9
Genus ANOTJS Leach.
Plumage uniform sooty brown, becoming hoary on the forehead and top of the
head (larger, wing 10.30-1 i.oo); crown and forehead lavender-grey. Summer adult :
Forehead nearly white at the base of bill, passing to lavender-grey, which becomes lav¬
ender on the hind neck ; primaries and tail feathers nearly black. Adult female: Simi¬
lar, but a trifle smaller and with a weaker bill. Young similar. Length 13.00-16.25,
wing 10.30-11.00, culmen 1. 70-1. 75, tarsus .90-.93, tail 5.90-6.25, toe 1. 52-1. 55, depth
of beak .40. Hab. Tropical and juxta-tropical seas, wide-ranging. Hawaiian Islands.
PL XVI., 7903, 9157; XVII., 7900. 8. A. stol'idus7 (Linn.). Noddy.
Genus MICROANOUS Saunders.
Middle toe and clazu shorter than the exposed culmen; bill slender and long; the
distance from the angle of the gonys to the tip of the bill greater than to that of the
gape; lores deep black; cheeks decided plumbeous; nape, shoulders and tail, dull lav¬
ender grey ; lower parts dark sooty brown ; forehead and crown dull greyish white in¬
clined to a silvery white. Young : Similar but browner. Length about 13.00, wing
8.75-9.00, tail 5.25, tarsus .80, middle toe 1.30, culmen 1.50-1.85 (Laysan specimen
with darker lores), depth of bill .32. Hab. Hawaiian Islands.
PI. XVII., 9164, 9165. 9. M. hawaiien'sis Roths. Hawaiian Tern, Noi'o.
Genus GYGIS (Ji'jis ) Wagler.
Middle toe and claw shorter than the exposed culmen; bill black, stout at the
base and sharply pointed; pure white except a narrow ring about the eye which is
black; toes slender, middle toe abnormally long, webs deeply excised (stouter, tail more
pointed); shafts usually brownish. Young like above. Length 12.00-13.00, depth
of bill .40, wing 9.50, tail 4.25-5.00, tarsus .45-.50, middle toe with claw 1.10, culmen
1.80. Hab. Central Pacific generally. Laysan, etc.
PI. XVII., 7892. 10. G. alba kittlits'i Hart. White Tern.
7 A specimen of stolidus in the Museum series (Coll. No. 1309), which varies somewhat from the typical form, is minutely described by
Mr. Seale in his “P'ield Notes on the Birds of Oahu, H. I.,” Occasional Papers of the B. P. Bishop Museum , Vol. I., No. 2, p. 35.
[265]
IO
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
Order TUBIN ARES.— Tube-nosed Swimmers.
Families.
Nostrils opening from the anterior end of horizontal nasal tubes.
a. Tubes widely separated by the intervening eulmen; wings narrow and long;
birds of large dimensions . (Page io.) Diomedeidse.
aa. Both nasal tubes united ; no intervening eulmen ; birds of medium or
small size . (Page io.) Procellariidae.
Family DIOMEDEID^F. — Albatrosses.
Genus.
Sides of the lower mandible without sulcus (a longitudinal groove); tail short
and rounded and not more than one-third the length of the wing; base of upper division
of the bill zoide and closely joined by the lateral division . ( Page io. ) Diomed ea.
Genus DIOMEDEA Linnaeus.
Culmen slightly concave; bill somewhat compressed. Lateral division of the
bill narrower at the base than in the middle. (Sub-genus Phrebastria , Reich.)
a. Abdomen sooty brown (wings never more than 21.00, smaller and bill more
slender) ; dark sooty brown above ; bill dark brown ; under wing coverts and auxilia¬
ries sooty brown; sexes similar. Young: Similar to adult, but with sides of head
white; upper tail coverts whitish. Length about 29.00-36.00 (33.00), wing 19.50, tail
5.60, bill 4.00, tarsus 3.40, toe 4.90. Hab. North Pacific Ocean. Laysan, etc.
PI. XVIII., 8742. 11. D. nigripes And. Black-footed Albatross.
aa. Abdomen white (bill rather slender); upper tail coverts white; under wing
coverts blackish brown and white mixed; wings and back blackish brown; tail brown.
Female similar. Young similar to adult. Length about 32.00, wing 19.00, tail 6.00,
eulmen 4.50, tarsus 3.60, toe 4.75. Hab. Gardner, Lisianski and Laysan.
PI. XVIII., 8746. 12. D. immutab'ilis Roths. Gooney.
Family PROCELLARIIDAE. — Petrels.
Genera.
Common characters as above (with thirteen or more secondaries); bill shorter
than tarsus; tail feathers 12 to 14 in number.
a. Of medium or small size (wing less than 15.00); wing more than y.oo; eul¬
men more than half as long as the middle toe and claw. (Sub-family Fulmarinee.)
(266]
PR OCELLAR / 1 DAL
ii
b. Partition between the nostrils very thin , i. <?., narrower than the width of
a single nostril and within the nasal tube; depth of the bill at the shallowest part more
than one -fourth the length of the lower mandible measured along the side; tarsus not
compressed.
C. Wing more than twice the length of the tail; tail moderate, rounded
( 1 2 feathers); nasal tubes directed straight forward (claw of hallux small, .10); nail
of lower mandible making up more than one-third the length of the mandible measured
along the side. Plumage and size differing among species. . (Page 11.) ^Strelata.
CC. Wing less than twice the length of the tail; tail of 12 feathers long
and cuneate, being graduated for a third of its length ; nail of the lower mandible making
up less than a third of the length of the mandible measured along the side ; plumage dark;
nasal tubes fleshy at ends and directed forward and upward. .(Page 12.) Bulweria.
bb. Partition between the nostrils thick , i. e ., thicker than the outer edge of
one of the nostrils; the partition scarcely, if any, shorter than the outer edges of the
tubes; tarsus compressed and with a ridge on the front edge; space between the end
of the nasal tubes and the base of the unguis (nail on the tip of upper mandible) more
than the length of the latter (nostrils at least partially visible from above; wings
less than 15.00).
d. Nostrils elevated above the line of the culnien when viewed from
the side; nasal tubes elevated and inflated anteriorly; under wing coverts dusky;
breast white . (Page 12.) Prio films.
dd. Nostrils not noticeably elevated above the line of the culmen
when viewed from the side; compressed anteriorly and narrower than at the base;
edge of nostrils entirely visible from above (under wing coverts white or else lower
parts dusky) . (Page 13.) Puff 'intis.
aa. Wing less than y.oo; tarsus not perceptibly longer than middle toe and
claw; tail forked , or at least emarginate . (Page 13.) Oceatio droma.
Genus ^STREbATA Bonaparte.
Exposed portion of inner web of primaries beneath dark; bill wide at the gape;
under parts mostly white ; crown and back of the head dark ; upper tail coverts uniform
with the back; tail dusky (outer feathers sometimes mottled with white); auxilliaries
and under iving coverts mostly white inwardly , margined with dark.
a. Larger and darker above; under tail coverts greyish dusk}7, very abruptly
white beneath the surface; upper parts, including hind neck and upper tail coverts,
uniform brownish slate, darker on the wings and tail, and nearly black on the head;
the feathers of the hind neck and upper tail coverts (the latter very abruptly) white
beneath the surface ; forehead, lores, cheeks and entire lower parts white ; the sides
and longer tail coverts sometimes barred with dusky; wing 11.80-12. 00, tail 5.50-5.75
[267]
12
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP,
(graduated for about 2.40), culmen 1.22, tarsus 1.40, middle toe with claw 1.78. Hab,
Middle Pacific from Hawaiian Islands to Galapagos (Ridgway). (No specimen in
Museum.)
13. J3$. phseopyg'ia Salv. Dark-rumped Petrel.
aa. Smaller and paler above; upper tail coverts ashy-grey, much less abruptly
white beneath the surface (bill stouter); larger; under zuing coverts mostly dark; feathers
of the back distinctly edged with grey ; under parts white, except along the sides of
fore breast. Female similar. Young: Smaller, with the under tail coverts as long as or
longer than the tail feathers ; upper back and tail coverts much more broadly edged
with blue-grey ; whole aspect of the back lighter ; less blue-grey on the sides of fore breast.
Length 1 1. 15-14. 00 (12.75), wing 7.40-8.60, tail 3.20-4.70, culmen 1. 02-1. 10, tarsus 1.10-
1. 15, middle toe 1. 40-1. 50, inner toe 1. 15-1. 20. Hab. North Pacific Ocean. Laysan, etc.
The following table will show the variation in measurements of young fledged birds
and adults : —
Juvenile ( June ig ). Adult ( September ) .
PL XIX.. 7907,
Male.
Female.
Male.
Female.
Length .
1 1 .15
• • I2.5O
14.00
Wing .
— 7.50
7.40
8.60
8-75
Tail .
— 3.70
3.20
4-45
4.70
Culmen .
1 .02
I ,IO
1 . 10’
Tarsus .
.... 1. 15
1. 15
1. 15
1 ■ I5
Middle toe .
— 1.50
1 .40
I .40
1.50
Inner toe .
X • 15
i . 1 5
1. 15
7908.
14.
hypoleu'ca
Sal\
Bonin Petrel
Genus BUWERIA Bonaparte.
Plumage entirely dusky sooty brown, darker on the upper parts (smaller);
under tail coverts falling short of the end of the tail by more than .50; the greater
wing coverts lighter brown on their edges , forming a quite well defined patch ; quills
nearly black. Downy young: uniform dark sooty brown. Length about 10.00, wing
7.75, tail 4.50, culmen .90, tarsus 1.20. Hab. North Pacific Ocean. Laysan, Kauai,
French Frigates, Hawaii (Mills).
PI. XIX., 8768. 15. B. bul'weri (Jard. & Selby). Bulwer’s Petrel.
Genus PRIO'FINUS Hombr. & Jaco.
Tail long , cuneate ; under surface of body white; feathers of the head and upper
plumage not edged with white; back, greater wing coverts and primaries entirely deep
sooty brown with slaty brown beneath ; feathers of the back edged with paler brown;
sides of the neck greyish, mottled; under tail coverts dusky; auxiliaries dusky.
Length d 17.50 $19.00, wing 11. 25-12.00, tail 6.00, culmen 1. 50-1. 55, tarsus 1.75,
middle toe 2.15-2.25. Hab. North Pacific Ocean. Laysan, Kauai, etc.
PI. XIX., 7928. 16. P. cunea'tus (Salvin). Wedge-tailed Shearwater, Unu kane.
[268]
PR O CEL L ARIl DEE.
*3
Genus PUFFINUS Brisson.
a. Lower parts uniform dusky black (wing never over 10.00); bill deep black;
under wing coverts deep sooty black (darker); primaries and tail feathers black.
Length about 15.00, wing 9.10, tail 3.75, culmen 2.25, tarsus 1.70, middle toe 2.00.
Hnb. Central Pacific Ocean. French Frigates, Laysan.
PI. XIX., 7942. 17. P. nativita'tis Streets. Christmas Island Shearwater.
aa. Lower parts uniform white including auxiliaries and the central under tail
coverts; primaries dark beneath; head, neck and back, including wings and tail, a
very uniform black ; the edge of the feathers sometimes brownish ; flanks and outer
under tail coverts blackish ; border of under wing coverts blackish. Length 14.60, wing
9.25, culmen 1.30, tail 3.45, tarsus 1.80, toe 2.20, depth of bill at base .50. Hab. Kauai.
PI. XIX., 9307. 18. P. new'elli8 Henshaw.
Genus OCEANO DROMA Reichenbach.
Plumage soot 3- black ; upper tail coverts more or less white; base of all the tail
feathers white except the centre pair (tail not deeply forked; longer of the upper tail
coverts tipped with black. Length about 8.75, wing 5.90, tail 2.75, tarsus .82, middle
toe .95, tibia 1.60, culmen .58. 9 Hab. Central Pacific Ocean. Kauai, French Frigates,
Niihau( ? ).
19. O. cryptoleueura.10 Hawaiian Storm Petrel, Oeoe.
Order STEGANOPODES.— Totipalmate Swimmers.
Families.
a. Tail euneate (or rounded); web between the toes onl}7 slightW emarginate;
no terminal hook to the bill.”
b. Middle tail feathers greatly elongated ; whole head feathered; bill con¬
ical, compressed and pointed; nostrils plainly visible .. (Page 14.) Phaethon tidae.
8The description is taken from a specimen given to the Museum by Mr. Francis Gay, April 17, 1900 (B. I’. B. M. No. 9307). During the
interval between the writing and the publication of the description Mr. Henshaw has described a specimen taken by Mr. M. Newell (Brother
Matthias), which seems to be the same as the Kauai specimen in the Museum. I therefore withdraw my manuscript name (with due apology
to Mr. Gay) in favor of Mr. Henshaw's published name. See Auk (1900), Vol. XVII., p. 246. The locality of Mr. Henshaw's type is at fault.
It doubtless is a misprint and should be Waihu Valley, Island of Maui, in the place of "Waihu Valley. Island of Mani."
8 Female in the collection taken by Mr. A. F. Judd on Kauai during the winter of 1892-93, from which the above measurements
were taken.
10 Dr. Schauiusland, in his list of the birds of I.aysan Island, adds O. fuliginosa (Gm.) to the Hawaiian fauna. It can he easily dis¬
tinguished from 0. cryptoleueura by its larger size (length .10, wing 7.50) and having the upper tail coverts the same color as the back.
11 Since the preparation of the above I have a list of the birds obtained on Laysan by Dr. Schauinsland, Director Stiidt. Museum, Bremen,
in which he gives Phalacrocorax plagicus, Pall. The species may be identified by the following: The upper mandible terminating in a dis¬
tinct hook ; tarsus longer than the hind toe and claw; with a small, scarcely noticeable gular sac ; bill slender w'ith outline straight ; tail much
longer than the wing, graduated and composed of twelve feathers; culmen less than 2.50; feathers on the lower jaw projecting forward be.
yond the anterior angle of the eye ; head and neck rich glossy silky violet black ; more purplish towards the head, becoming silky dark
green on the lower parts. Breeding plumage: Neck and rump ornamented with very narrow white feathers. Young: L'niform brownish
dusky. Length 25.00-29.00, wing 9.50-10.60. Hab. Coast of Asia from Kamschatka to South China, from Alaska to South Mexieo(?). (Hawaiian
Islands, Laysan. — Dr. Schauinsland.)
[269]
14
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
bb. Middle tail feathers not greatly produced; no external nostrils; head
partly feathered; bill thick through the base . (Page I4-) Sul idae.
aa. Tail deeply forked; webs between the toes deeply emarginate; tarsus very
short, not longer than the hind toe and claw; wing and tail exceedingly long.
(Page 15.) Fregatidae.
Family PHAETHONTIDJE. — Tropic Birds.
Genus.
Characters the same as for the family . (Page 14.) Pha ethon.
Genus PHA'ETHON Linnaeus.
Plumage very close and satiny ; general color white, usually tinged with pink
or salmon color, with some black on the upper parts.
a. Outer web of primaries white to the base ; elongated tail feathers carmine with
black shafts; a black comma-shaped patch on the side of the head, starting at the cor¬
ner of the mouth and prolonged backward behind the eye ; inner secondaries with a black
band down the middle; flank feathers with a greyish black shaft stripe; feet black; at
the base of toes yellow; bill red. Female similar. Very young have the whole back, head
and wings white barred with black. Length 30.00-36.00, culmen 3.50-3.70, depth of
bill .85-1.05, wing 12.50-13.00, tail without middle feathers 5.00, with middle feathers
16.50-20.00, tarsus 1.15-1.20. Hab. Central Pacific and Indian Ocean. Laysan, etc.
PI. XX., 8554, 9715. 20. P. rubricaud'a Bodd. Red-tailed Tropic Bird.
aa. Outer primaries luith the outer iveb black for the greater portion of its
length; elongated tail feathers white or apricot color; black on outer web of first pri-
mary falling short of the tip by an inch or more ; basal two-thirds of both mandibles
more or less blackish horn color; black on the side of the head much as in P. rubri-
cauda; a black band along the wing formed by the black tips of the median wing-
coverts ; innermost secondaries and scapulars with a very broad oblique black band ;
shaft of long tail-feather black above, white below\ Length 23.00-28.00, wing 10.50-
11. 00, culmen 2.00, depth of bill .70, tarsus .75, middle toe 1.40, tail without plume
4.50, tail with long feathers 16.50-18.00. Hab. Inter-tropical seas. Hawaiian Islands.
PI. XX., 9895, 9896, 7599. 21. P. leptu'rus Lacep. & Daun. White-tailed Tropic Bird.
Family SULID.E. — Gannets.
Genus.
Characters the same as for the family . (Page 14.) Sula.
Genus SULA Brisson.
Bill sub-cylindrical and tapering to a point, the extremity of which is slightly
curved; whole of lower jaw together with the throat and chin naked. Young: Upper
parts unicolor. (Sub-genus Sula.)
[270
FREGA TIDAZ.
i5
a. Plumage of the head arid neck , as well as most all of the upper parts,
pure white.
b. Greater part of tail feathers brownish black; naked skin of the face and
throat blackish (blneish in life); neck and body entirely white; primaries, secondaries
together with most of the tail, brownish black ; wing coverts white. Young: Head, neck
and upper parts plain dark brown ; part of the neck streaked with white. Nestlings
covered with white down. Length 25.00-29.00, wing 15.00-17.00, tail 8.25—10.00,
eulmen 3.60-4.25, depth of bill 1.40-1.60, tarsus 2.25, middle toe 3.25. Hab. Central
Pacific Ocean. Laysan, French Frigates, Midway, etc.
PI. XXI., 7933. 22. S. eyanops Sind. Blue-faced Booby.
bb. Tail pure white; outer web of primary feathers hoary grey ; outer webs
of secondaries and their coverts hoary; smaller wing coverts white like the rest of the
body; all more or less rich white and tinged with buff; feet reddish. Young: Above
sooty brown, hind neck and lower parts light smoky grey (plumage extremely variable).
Length 23.00-27.00, wing 15.00, tail 6.75-7.25, eulmen 3.40-3.50, depth of bill 1.40.
Hab. Inter-tropical seas. Niihau, Oahu, Lisianski, Laysan, French Frigates, etc.
PI. XXI., 7933. 23. S. piscator (Linn.). Red-footed Booby.
aa. Plumage op the upper parts uniform deep sooty brown; head, neck and chest
deep sooty brown like the back ; lower parts white; tail and wings uniform with the
back. Young: Nearl\T uniform sooty brown, paler beneath. Length 30.00-3 1. 00, wing
15.50, tail 7.50, tarsus 1.80, eulmen 4.00 (4.25 $ ). Hab. Tropical seas. Niihau,
Laysan, etc.
PI. XXI., 8752. 24. S. sula Linn. Booby.
Family FRFGATID^. — Man-o’-war Bird.
Genus.
Characters for the genus same as for the family . (Page 15.) Fregata.
Genus FRBGATA Cuvier.
Culmen more than 4.25; bill long and strongly hooked at the extremity, both
mandibles being curved downward. Male: Breast and sides sooty black and eulmen
strong; feathers of the head, back and scapulars elongated, pointed, and a glossy oil-
green with a bronze sheen (no white on the flanks); gular pouch scarlet orange
(fading). Female: Breast and sides white; eulmen longer (5.00); head and neck not
so glossy; back of the neck, lesser and median wing coverts brown with paler margins.
Young , both sexes: Head and neck as well as upper half of chest white with an occa¬
sional rusty feather about head and sides ; upper breast dark sooty brown ; otherwise
as in the female. Length 37.50-41.00, wing 23.00-25.00, tail 15.00, tarsus .65. Hab.
Tropical and sub-tropical seas. Hawaiian Islands.
25. F. a'quila Linn. Man-o’-war Bird, Iwa.
[271]
i6
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
Order ANSERES.— Lamellirostral Swimmers.
Family.
Only one family. Characters same as for the order. . . .(Page 16.) Anatidse.
Family ANATID^. — Ducks, Geese, Etc.
Genera.
a. Tarsus shorter than middle toe with claw.
b. No trace of teeth (lamellse) along the side of lower mandible; distinct
tooth serrations along the upper edge (Sub-family Merginae) ; culmen shorter than
tarsus; bill narrow and peculiar . (Page I7-) Merganser.
bb. A very distinct row of teeth along the side of the lower mandible, in
addition to the series along the upper edge. (Sub-family Anatince.)
C. Hind toe narrowly lobed; neck shorter than the body ; a colored
speculum on the wing.
d. Bill not spatnlate ( upper wing coverts not blue, more usually
dark grey;) tail feathers rather narrow and pointed at the tips.
e. Tail moderate with the centre pair of feathers not very
long and tail graduated for less than one-third its total length ; bill rather broad and
about the length of the head . (Page 17.) Anas.
ee. Tail long , with the central pair of feathers very long and
pointed; culmen longer than the middle toe (speculum broader than the light band at
the tip of the secondaries) . (Page 18.) Dafila.
dd. Bill spatulate, i. e ., broad at the end and narrower at the base;
upper wing coverts blue (no soft membrane on the sides of the bill towards the tip).
(Page 18.) Spatula.
CC. Hind toe with a broad membranous lobe (Sub-family Fuligulince) ;
feathers on the lores not reaching beyond posterior border of nostrils; graduation of
the tail much more than the length of the bill from the nostrils ; distance from anterior
end of nostrils to tip of bill much greater than the same place to loral feathers.
(Page 18.) Charitonet'ta.
aa. Tarsus equal to or longer than the middle toe without the claw; neck mod¬
erately long, no cere on the bill. (Sub-family Anserince.)
f. Serrations on the cutting edge of upper mandible visible
from the outside for the greater portion of the length of the tomium; bill very stout,
its depth through the base more than equal to the length of the culmen; color of adult
either white or bluish with black primaries . (Page 19.) Chen.
[272]
ANA TIDrF.
fF. Sc r rations on the cutting edge of upper mandible not visi¬
ble from the outside , except at the base; tomium almost straight; bill moderate but strong.
g. Web of feet not deeply excised , i. e ., cut away
from back along both sides of the middle toe . (Page 19.) Branta.
gg. Web of the feet deeply excised.
(Page 19.) Nesochen.
Genus MERGANSER Brisson.
Distance between nostrils and nearest feathers on the sides of upper mandible
decidedly less than the depth of the upper mandible at base; feathering on sides of
base of upper mandible projecting far forward, forming a very decided though obtuse
angle. Adult male: Head dull greenish black, the occiput with a long pointed crest;
neck and sides of chest dull brownish buff or light cinnamon streaked with black; other
lower parts mainly whitfe, usually tinged with cream color (Ridgway). Female: Head
and neck reddish brown, darkest on the crown ; back scapulars and small wing coverts
umber brown ; edge of the feathers paler; a white patch on the wing; under parts white.
Length 20.00-25.00, wing 8.60-9.00, culmen about 2.50, tarsus 1.80-1.90, middle toe 2.40.
Hab. Northern portion of northern hemisphere, breeds northward. Hawaii,12 Oahu.
26. M. serra'tor (Linn.). Red-breasted Merganser.
Genus A'NAS Li xx/iirs.
Culmen shorter than the middle toe; central tail feathers but slightly curled,
some specimens not at all.
a. No white ring around the eye;'' speculum greenish blue; under tail coverts
in fully fledged male(?) more or less blackish, edged and mixed with chestnut; rump
blackish, with varying amount of chestnut; abdomen with pale greyish chestnut
ground streaked and spotted with blackish ; neck and breast of the same chestnut as
the under tail coverts, with oval blackish centres to the feathers of the chest, which
become mere streaks on the neck, most numerous on the chin (one specimen with less
black on the chin); lesser wing coverts dark grey, with some paler edges; under wing
coverts white; feet orange; speculum edged with a band of black followed by a white
one (variable in width in front), behind by a black band followed by a white one
equal to or wider than the black. Female similar. Length <$ about 18.50 (Seale),
wing 9.10-9.50, tail 3.50, culmen 1.80, tarsus 1.35, middle toe 2.10, depth of bill
.68-. 70; $ wing 8.50, tail 3.60, bill 1.80, tarsus 1.38, toe 2.00. Hab. Hawaiian Islands.
PI. XXII., 9168, 9424. 27. A. wyvilliana Sen. Hawaiian Duck, Koloa maoli.
aa. Ring of ivhite feathers about the eye; centre pair of tail feathers but little
curled at the tips. Male: General color of plumage rufesceut; head and nape with a
12 Mr. Henshaw reports the taking of two specimens near Hilo, November 1899. See Auk, Yol. XVIII.. p. 205. I am also informed that
it has been taken on Oahu.
x^I)r. Scliauinsland’s list adds .1. boscas, Linn., from Lavsan. It is distinguished from other Hawaiian ducks by having no white ring
about the eye, and with the speculum greenish blue. Length 24.00. It is hardly possible hat the Doctor has confused this with the much
smaller form which is indigenous to Laysan.
Mfmoiks B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 3.
[273]
. — 2.
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
1 8
greenish lustre, especially on the nape; throat mixed with a few white feathers; back,
fore neck, breast and flanks with dark rufescent markings. Female: Similar, but di ffers
in having more white on the chin; the upper throat much duller; some of the upper
and under tail coverts paler rufescent with dusky marks or bands; speculum blackish
in female. Length $ 16.00-16.50, wing 7.10-8.00, tail 3.30-3.50, tarsus 1. 25-1. 55,
culmen 1.38-1.50, toe 1.80-2.00. Hah. Laysan Island.
PI. XXII., 8745. 28. A. laysanen'sis'4 Roths. Laysan Teal.
Genus SPATULA Boir.
Longer scapulars with a white band along the centre part; abdomen deep chest¬
nut ; head and upper portion of the neck deep glossy green ; lower neck, breast and
outer scapulars white; rump and upper tail coverts dark glossy green with pale edges;
upper wing coverts and outer edge of the two longest scapulars pale blue. Female:
General color of upper parts brown, each feather edged with a broad reddish margin;
throat reddish and unspotted. Young similar to adult female. Length 17.00—21.00,
wing 9.00-10.00, culmen 2.60-2.90, width of bill at end i.ro-1.20, at base .60, tarsus
1. 40-1. 50. Hub. Northern hemisphere. Hawaiian Islands. ( No specimen in Museum. )
29. S. clypeata (Linn.). Shoveller.
Genus DAFILA Stephens.
Tail feathers not barred across; centre tail feathers blackish, lateral ones grey
with pale whitish margins; head dark , hair brown; a narrow band at the tip of the
last row of wing coverts cinnamon (larger, culmen 1.85-2.25); anterior part of the
sides of neck, breast and abdomen greyish white; the breast with very narrow, brown,
zigzag bars; head and upper neck hair brown, with a faint gloss on the sides of the
occiput. Male: Length 26.30-30.00, wing 11.10, tail 7.50-9.50, culmen 2.08, tarsus
1.80. Female: Smaller; tail feathers blackish, barred irregularly across with whitish
or ochraceous ; above greyish dusky varied with irregular bars of yellowish white or
pale ochraceous, each feather, except on throat, streaked with blackish. Male in first
breeding plumage has pale margin to the wing coverts, and most of the feathers of the
rump are broadly barred. Young male similar to adult female. Hab. Northern hemi¬
sphere southward. Hawaiian Islands.
30. D. acuta Linn. Pintail, Koloa mapu.
Genus CHARITONFTTA Stejneger.
Head and upper half of the neck rich metallic green with a purplish gloss on the
crown ; with a patch of white extending from behind the eye across the occiput ; lower
neck, lower parts, secondaries and scapulars white; back and upper parts black.
Female: Head and neck brown with faint gloss, a white patch on cheeks and ear
coverts; upper parts blackish brown, darkest on rump; under parts white tinged more
*4 Dr. Schauinsland's list gives Nett ion creccci, Linn., Querqneduta curio, Cla ngula atbcola, Linn., and Marcco americana (Gmel.), from
Lavsan Island. These references are interesting additions to the Hawaiian birds, and are of value in the studv of distribution.
[274]
ANA TIDAE.
19
or less with brownish grey. Length about 12.50, wing 6.25, tail 2.45, cnlmen 1.15,
tarsus 1. 1 2, toe 2.00, depth of bill .60. Hab. North America. Maui.'5
31. C. albeola (I,inn.). Buffle-head,
Genus CHEN (Ken) Boie.
Adult with the whole head and at least part of the neck white as well as the re¬
mainder op the plumage , except the primaries and their coverts; bill a deep purplish
(in life) with a white nail; primaries black. Young: Head, neck and upper parts pale
greyish, the feathers of the latter with whitish edges, and striped medianally with
darker, especially wing coverts and tertiaries; rump, tail coverts, tail and lower parts
plain white. Length 23.00-28.00, wing 14.50-17.00 (16.36), culmen 2.55-2.70, tarsus
2.80-3.25 (3.01), middle toe 2.00-2.50 (2.34). Hah. Western America, breeding in
Alaska, migrating south. Hawaiian Islands. (No specimen in the Museum.)
32. C. hyperbore us 6 (Pai.i,.). Lesser Snow Goose.
Genus BRANTA Scopoli.
Bill and feet entirely black at all ages; tail coverts white; tail and quills uni¬
form black; upper parts brownish, the feathers with lighter tips.
a. Head partly white , a white triangular patch on the cheek usually meeting
on the throat; lower parts deep brownish or brownish grey (often not much paler
than the upper parts) abruptly defined against the white of anal region; {smaller size,
wing less than 16.00 , culmen less than 1 .25;) tail feathers usually 14 to 16 in number.
Length 23.00-25.00, wing 13.60-14.00, culmen .95-1.15, tarsus 2.40-2.75. Hab. Pacific
coast of North America, breeding at Norton Sound, south in winter. Hawaiian Islands.'7
33. B. canaden'sis minima Ridgw. Cackling Goose.
aa. Head entirely black; middle of the neck encircled by a broad white collar ,
interrupted only behind; no chestnut on the breast; upper tail coverts very long;
upper parts nearly uniform dark sooty brown ; lower parts dark sooty slate, not dis-
tindllv if at all contrasted with black of chest, but abruptly defined against white
of anal region. Young: Similar to adult but collar indistinct or obsolete; the larger
wing coverts broadly tipped with white. Length 22.00-29.00, wing 12.70-13.50, cul¬
men 1. 20-1. 35, tarsus 2.20-2.50. Hab. Western Ardtic America, south in winter along
the western Pacific coast. Maui. '
34. B. nigricans (Lawk.). Black Brant.
Genus NESOCHEN Salvad.
Head and throat black , which color extends a little below the eye and down the
neck; side of neck tawny buff, becoming lighter towards the lower parts; upper stir¬
's The specimen from which the above is taken is one in the St. Louis College cabinet. Brother Alfred, the curator, informs me it was
taken on Maui by Brother Matthias during his sojourn there.
16 Hon. Walter Rothschild (through Palmer) in lill. : also adds Anser albifrons gambeli (Hartl.) from Hawaii.
17 Hon. Walter Rothschild, in lilt. Kauai.
'8 Specimen in St. Louis College cabinet taken on Maui by Brother Matthias: also Hon. Walter Rothschild, in lilt.
[275]
20
BIRDS OF THE IIAJFA I I AN GROUP.
face dull dark umber, the feathers edged or barred with whitish ; rump dusky black;
abdomen and under tail coverts white. Female: Black extends farther down on the
side of the head and neck; bill and feet black. Length about 23.00, wing 15.00, bill
1.75, tarsus 3.00, toe 3.25, tail 6.75. Hab. Hawaii.
35. N. sandvicen'sis (Vio.). Hawaiian Goose, Nene.
Order HERODIONES. Herons, Ibises, Etc.
Families.
a. Bill much curved , long and with nasal groove, linear and produced almost to
the tip of the bill. (Sub-order /bides.) Bill almost cylindrical, slender and narrower
than deep towards the tip, and curved downward for nearly the whole length.
(Page 20.) Ibididae.
aa. Bill practically straight; sides of upper mandible without any groove; hind
toe inserted on a level with the anterior ones ; the middle toe with its claw pedlinate
(toothed) on the inner edge (Sub-order Herodii)\ bill lance-shaped or compressed
and pointed . (Page 21.) Ardeidae.
Family IBID ID^. — I BISES.
Genus.
Anterior aspect of the tarsus plated ; head never more than moderately crested
and not very noticeable; chin, lores and base of cheeks bare, but the latter feathered to
be3rond the anterior line of the eye; claw of the middle toe nearly straight. Head of
the adult wholly feathered except lores. . . ( Pa%e 20.) Plegadis.
Genus PLBG'ADIS Kaup.
Adult with head, neck and lower portions uniformly chestnut ; upper parts
metallic green bronze and purple, most brilliant on upper surface of wings and tail;
lores lake-red in life , turning brown in skin, or somewhat reddish brown ; feathers sur¬
rounding the base of the bill white. Young: With lower parts greyish brown. Length
about 19.00-26.00, wing 9.30-10.80, culmen 3.75-6.00, tarsus 3.00-4.40, middle toe
2.10-2.85. Hab. Tropical America in general, west coast from Louder California to
Oregon. Hawaiian Islands.19 (No specimen in Museum.)
36. P. gtiarauna (Linn.). White-faced Glossy Ibis.
*9 Professor Brigham informs me that specimen "found on Molokai, which the natives said was a 'malihini' or stranger, and portions of
which were placed in the colle(£iion of the society - ” (Dole, Hawaiian Annual, 1879, p. 41) was one taken by himself from a flock of five
during September or OCtober, 1865. The “fragments" were subsequently sent to Professor Baird at the Smithsonian Institution, Washington,
D. C., and have since been lost track of. Professor Brigham has since satisfied himself that the specimen was Plegadis. This record, taken
in connection with the immature bird collected by Mr. Knudsen on Kauai in 1S72, seems to confirm Mr. Ridgway's belief that P. guarauna is
an accidental visitor to the islands from the west coast of America.
[276]
ARDEIDAE.
2 I
Family ARDEIDiEL — Herons.
Genera.
With the tail composed of 12 feathers; claws rather short and strongly curved
(tail feathers stiffer than the coverts); (Sub-family Ardei nee;) bill only moderate,
never equal to the length of the middle toe and tarsus combined; bill without distinct
serrations on the upper mandible ; upper mandible with notch near the tip.
a. Cnlmen longer than the tarsus , the latter longer than the middle toe.
(Page 21.) Demiegret'ta.
aa. Cnlmen shorter than middle toe and about equal to tarsus; plumage of young
and old very different; bill thick, i.e., cnlmen rarely more than four times as long as
the depth of bill at base . (Page 21.) Nycticorax.
Genus DEMIEGRETTA Bi.yth.
General color above and below deep blackest slate, the feathers almost black;
feathers of the upper breast elongated like those of the middle back, both paler slaty grey;
abdomen and vent feathers tinged with ashy white; a pure white streak down the centre
of the throat. Female similar. Young: Paler and more sooty brown. White form:
Exactly similar to the grey form, only white. Hah. Malay Peninsular and islands to
Australia, Islands of the Pacific, Fiji, Samoa, etc., north to bay of Corea. Hawaiian
Islands ( ? )P
37- D- sacra (Gmel.). Sacred Heron.
Genus NYCTICORAX Stephens.
Prevailing color , bluish grey in adult , brownish and striped longitudinally with
ivhite in the young; gonys nearly straight; cnlmen and tarsus about equal (Sub-genus
Nycticorax ); base of forehead and eyebrow white; no chestnut on the back and tail; no
white on the back; under tail coverts white, as well as the under sides of the body, with a
delicate shade of grey, especially on the neck and chest ; back and crown glossy black
green; wings dove color; head with two or three long slender white plumes, in the
breeding plumage. Female: Similar to adult male both summer and winter. Young:
Light brown above, tinged with cinnamon, most marked on the wing quills; each
feather of the body with a white tear-shaped shaft stripe; quills with small white
tips; sides of head and neck and entire lower parts striped white and greyish brown;
throat whitish. Length 23.00-26.00 (25.00), wing 1 1.60-12.50, tail 4.10-4.75, cnlmen
2.70-3.35, tarsus 2.72-3.05, middle toe 3.10-3.45, depth of beak .S5-.95. Hab. Wide-
20 The reference which President Dole makes (Hawaiian Annual, 1879, p. 52) to this species is the only account of its ever being seen in
the Islands. Since he speaks of it as “commo? all over the group,” and "when in full plumage the long feathers of the crest and back are
blackish purple, and from the back of the bead three long feathers of the purest white hang," etc., it is quite probable that the bird dt
scribed is the common A uku,
[277]
22
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
ranging form in suitable localities, North America southwards. Hawaiian Islands.
The following table of measurements are from specimens in the Museum :
Males.
Adult.
Adult.
Wing .
- 12.50
12.10
Tail .
4.70
Culmen .
- 3.25
3 '3°
Tarsus .
- 2.95
3-05
Middle toe ....
•••• 3-45
3-45
Depth of bill. •
.... .85
•95
N. nyeticorax
naevius21
(Bodd.)
PI. XXIII., 5584, 9170.
Juvenile.
Adult.
Females.
Adult.
Juvenile.
1 1 .60 ....
12.50
12.00
n.50
4.50 ....
4.IO
4-75
4.50
3.10 ....
3-35
3.00
2.70
2.85 ....
3-05
3.00
2.72
3.20 —
3 40
34°
....
.85 ••••
.80
•95
.82
Black-crowned Night Heron, Auku kohili.
Order PALUDICOL^E.— Rails, Coots, Etc.
Family y.
First primary longer than the seventh; wings less than io inches (except in
Porphyrio) ; toes very long and slender, with “scallops” along the side in Fnlica; tail
usually quite rudimentary . (Page 22.) Rallidse.
Family RALTIDFF . — Rails, Gallinules and Coots.
Genera.
a. No enlarged shield-like process extending over the front part of the head;
(Sub-family Rallince; ) middle toe and claw exceeding the length of the tarsus; sec¬
ondaries practically equal to the primaries in length, or falling short of them by less
than the length of the hind toe and claw.
b. Tail feathers very soft and entirely hidden at the ends by the coverts
(Hawaii) . (Page 23.) Pen nula.
bb. Tail feathers not decomposed but ordinary and evident with no white
secondary quills, the inner toe without the claw longer than the culmen; plumage
variegated; wings feebly developed and not as long as the tarsus and toes combined.
(Page 23.) Porsanula.
aa. An enlarged frontal shield.
C. Toes without lobes or flaps. (Sub-family Gallinulincc.)
d. Nostrils oval, in a distinct nasal depression; frontal shield
rounded; wings nearly three times the length of the tarsus. . (Page 23.) Gallitl ula.
dd. Nostrils rounded ; 110 nasal depression; plumage blue (wing
coverts ordinary); primaries much longer than secondaries. . (Page 24.) Porphyrio.
21 The Hawaiian A uku seems not to differ from the American sub-species bv any constant character.
[278]
RALL1DAZ.
23
CC. Toes provided with conspicuous lateral lobes or flaps; primaries
about equal to secondaries. (Sub-family Fiiliciiue .) . . . .(Page 24.) Fulica.
Genus PEN NULA Dole.
General color above dark ruddy brown with darker centres to the feathers, pro¬
ducing a somewhat mottled appearance; wing coverts like the back and very much
elongated; quills blackish with rusty brown outer edges; tail feathers blackish, com¬
pletely hidden by the feathers of the rump; head more uniform brown with a ruddy
tinge; sides of the face like the top of the head; throat and under surface of the body
dark vinaceous ruddy, a trifle paler shade on the throat. (Measurements from the
two mounted specimens in the Museum from Mills collection.) Length about 5.50,
wing 2.70 do., tail .75 do., tarsus 1.00, 108, toe ( ? ) .85, culmen -75-.76, depth of bill
.30 do.’2 Hah. The uplands of Hawaii; rare or extinct.
39. P. ecaudata King. Sandwich Rail, Moho.
Genus PORZAN ULA Fkohawk.
Upper parts generally sandy brown with black centres to the feathers; some¬
times white in the centre of the back or rump; wing coverts uniform with the back
except for the black streaks; sides of the head, throat and breast dark ashv grey; flanks
and under tail coverts sandy brown, like back, with occasional white spots; under wing
coverts sandy buff; wing and tail feathers brown with sandy margins. Length about
6.00, wing 2.18-2.25, tail 1.00-1.10, culmen .65-.80, middle toe 1.10-1.30. Hah. Lavsan.
PI. XXIV., 7911. 7912. 40. P. palm eri Froh. Eaysan Rail.
Genus GAEEINUEA Brisson.
Uniform plumbeous, sides of body streaked with white; base of lower mandible
red vermilion like shield ; bill tipped with greenish yellow. Male: General color of
the back dark olive brown reflecting ruddy brown ; head and neck blackish fading into
slate-grev on the upper neck and under parts. Winter adult: Similar, but frontal shield
smaller. Young: Sootv black more or less mixed with white below. Adults in the
22 Mr. Wilson, doubtless in error, gives total length about 13.00. wing 6.00. tarsus 3.2s. middle toe with claw just under culmen ;s.
a Mr. Scott B. Wilson, in discussing the genus Pennula (Aves Hawaiiensis. p. 171-17., find- grounds for the making of three specie? —
species in addition to the typical P. ecaudata. His description of P. sandiicensi (Gmel. is based on the drawing executed ’.v Mr. W. W Klli-
in 17m to which Mr. Wilscm appends Lathams description which is as follows : "bize -mail : bill dusky ash color : genera! color of the plum¬
age pale ferrugmous : the feathers on the upper parts darkest in the middle : tail short hid by the upper coverts legs dusky fle-h < lor.
InhabiLs Sandwich files. Was also found on the Lsland of Tanna but the plumage is darker on the upper parts and the bill and legs yell'.-,
ish. — Sir Joseph Banks. The Ellis drawing is only the crudest suggestion of the general form of a P > ■ while Latham'- ripti n i-
very meagre: and since there seems not to be a single example in any museum and no example of the Sandwich kail ha- been met with
within human memory " it is quite possible that the drawings and description could have emanated from, and therefore should be referred t<
the well known extinct and exceedingly rare ecaudata of King ! 17S5;. Pennula wi/soni is ba-ed on the so-called -and wich Kail in the Leiden
Museum." The original description by Dr. O. Finsch is here appended. Sehlegel s type in the Leiden Museum Upper part- dark rudd;
brown with blackish centres to the feathers of the back and wings, producing on these parts well marked longitudinal stripe, head and
neck somewhat lighter and uniform ruddy brown like the sides of the head and neck under part- uniform ru-ty brown shading into vin ,-
red. a little darker on the flanks; middle of chin somewhat lighter: anal region and lower tail covert- dark vinous red forming a well
marked darker patch : primaries blackish very narrowly margined with brown on the outer webs broad and lax upper tail < verts with
very narrow light rusty brown apical margins, showing as lighter undulations : bill and feet light horny brown a- far as can be judged
greenish in life). Sex and habitat unknown. Measurements (/.?'. F'insch Total length 150 mm., wing 7 mm culmen t mm. tarsus
-o mm., tibia - mm., middle toe and claw u mm
• [279]
24
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
autumn and winter have white on the abdomen and under wing coverts. Length about
14.00, wing 6.75, tail 1.50, culmen and shield 2.00, tarsus 2.25-2.50, toe 3.00, hind toe
1.25, Hab. Hawaiian Islands.
PI. XXIV., 9745. 41. G. sandvicen'sis Streets. Hawaiian Gallinule, Alae.
Genus PORPHY RIO Brisson.
Thighs purplish brown; inner secondaries black (with no distinct patch of blue
on the throat); under surface uniform bluish except the under tail coverts which are
white; general color of back black; primaries black; frontal plate, bill, legs and feet
red. Length 17.25, wing 14.50, tail 4.00, culmen and shield 2.70, tarsus 3.35, toe 4.00.
Hab. Australia, New Zealand, New Guinea. Oahu; introduced.
42. P. melano'tus Newt. Alae awi.
Genus FUXICA LfNN^US.
General color above and below slaty grey; under tail coverts black, the lateral ones
white with the inner half of the feather black ; outer secondaries broadly tipped with
white, one specimen with under parts suffused with whitish, and flank stripes wanting in
all the specimens in the colledlion; quills blackish brown; back browner. Length
16.25, t5-6o, 16.25; wing 7.00, do., do.; tail 2.10, 2.20, 2.30; culmen including shield
2.25, 2.05, 2.10; tarsus 2.25, 2.15, 2.20; toe 3.25, do., do. Hab. Hawaiian Islands.
PI. XXIV., 9432. 43. F. alai Peale. Hawaiian Coot,-4 Alae keokeo.
Order LIMICOLX.-SW Birds.
Families.
a. Naked portion of the thigh much more than the length of the middle toe;
tarsus more than twice the length of the middle toe ; nasal groove not extending be¬
yond half the length of culmen . (Page 26.) Recurviros tridae.
aa. Naked portion of thigh less than the length of middle toe; tarsus less than
twice the length of the middle toe.
b. Toes with distinctly scalloped web, and with a serration along the edge
of the planta-tarsi as in the grebes. . .' . (Page 25.) Phalaropo didae.
bb. Toes without scalloped webs and no serrated edge to the planta-tarsi;
nasal groove extending along the greater part of the upper mandible.
C. Front of tarsus covered with a continuous row of transverse scutulae.
d. Bill slender; exposed culmen longer than middle toe without
the claw; end of bill with a more or less rounded or sometimes expanded tip.
(Page 26.) Seolopac idae,
2*A partial albino (Museum No. 8708) was collected on Maui bj' Mr. G. P. Wilder, November 4, 1899.
[280]
PHAL AROPODID* €.
25
dd. Bill stout and pointed, eulmen arched toward the tip, very
pointed and wedge-shaped at the tip; or, exposed eulmen equal to or shorter than the
middle toe without the claw . (Page 29.) Aphri^ldae.
CC. Front of tarsus covered with small irregular or hexagonal scales
in front and behind, and with the dentrum or end of the upper mandible enlarged; bill
shorter than the tarsus . (Page 28.) Charadi'idae.
Family PHALAROPO DID^B. — Phalaropes.
Genera.
a. Bill slender, almost cylindrical, not widening towards the end ; nostrils sepa¬
rated from the loral feathers by a space equal to the depth of the upper mandible at
the base . (Page 25.) PhalaropUS.
aa. Bill broad, flattened, somewhat widened toward the end; nostrils somewhat
separated from the loral feathers by a space less than the depth of the upper mandible
at the base . (Page 25.) Crymo philus.
Genus PHALAROPUS Brisson.
Web between middle and outer toes extending to or be}Tond the second joint of
the latter; lateral membrane of all the toes distinctly scalloped. ( Sub-genus Phala-
ropiis .) Adult female in summer: Above dark plumbeous, the back striped with
oehreous buff; wings dusky, the greater coverts broadly tipped with white; lower parts
white; chest and sides of neck rufous. Adult male in summer: Similar to the female,
but colors duller, the rufous confined to the sides of the neck and less distinct ; the
chest chiefly mixed with white or greyish. Winter plumage : Forehead, supercilliary
stripe, sides of head and neck with lower parts generally pure white ; top of head grey¬
ish ; upper parts chiefly greyish ; under parts for the most part white. Length 7.00, wing
4.10, tail 1.90, eulmen .88, toe .90. Hab. ArCtic regions; southward in winter. Kauai.
44. P. loba'tus’5 (Linn.). Northern Phalerope.
Genus CRYMOPHILUS VlEILEOT.
Summer female : Fore part of head deep plumbeous black; hind neck plain
cinnamon and plumbeous; sides of head white; sides of neck and entire under parts
vinous chestnut ; general color of back sandy buff, streaked with black centres to the
feathers; lesser wing coverts slaty blue with whitish edgings. Male: Similar to the
female, but less brightly colored ; the head sandy brown streaked with blackish like
the back; a good deal of white on the under surface of the body and throat. Male in
winter: Bluish grey above; wings more dusky than in summer, but still retain the
white markings; head, neck and lower parts pure white, with the occiput and space
about the eye dark plumbeous. Young : Top of head, hind neck, back and scapulars
25 The only specimen in the Museum was one shot by Mr. A. F. Judd on Kauai during the winter of 1892-93. This seems to be the first
record of P. lobolus appearing in Hawaii.
[281]
20
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
dull black, the feathers edged with ochraeeous: wing coverts, rump and upper tail
coverts plumbeous. Length about 7.75, wing 5.00, tail 2.10. tarsus .So, eulmen .So,
toe .S2. Hab. Northern portions of northern hemisphere. Hawaii, Maui."
45. Crymo philus fuleca rius Lixx.). Red Phalarope.
Family RECURVIROS TRIDiE. — Stilts and Avocets.
Genus.
With the hind toe absent: toes with scarcely any web, and divided to the base;
bill nearly straight . (Page 26.) Himan tOpUS.
Genus HIMAN TOPUS Brissox.
Under surface of the bodv white; head and neck behind black, with no complete
white collar on the latter ; forehead white ; ear coverts and sides of face black ; back of
neck and upper parts, including wings, black with a deep gloss; tail light grey tipped
with black. Length about 15.00, wing S. 75-9. 50, tail 3.25-3.30, eulmen 2.S0-3.10,
tarsus 4.75, middle toe 1.S0. Hah. Hawaiian Islands.
PI XXV 9429. 46. H. knud seni Stejx. Hawaiian Stilt, Kukuluaeo.
Family SCOLOPAC ITHE. — Snipes, Sandpipers, Etc.
Genera.
a. Back of tarsus with continuous row of transverse scutulae ( /. e.y square plates );
bill straight. Ears situated decidedly posterior to the eye (not underneath it' ); plum¬
age varving with the seasons. ( Sub-family Tringinee. )
b. Hind toe present.
C. No web betw.een the anterior toes; bill but slightly if at all widened
at the tip : exposed eulmen longer than the middle toe and claw . . . . ( Page 27. ) Trin ga.
CC. Middle toe united to one or both of the lateral toes by a membrane;
tail not more than half as long as the wing.
d. Tail longer than the exposed eulmen; wing more than 4.50;
axillaries uniform greyish or dusky ; no web between the middle and inner toe.
(Page 27.) Heteracti tis.
dd. Tail shorter than the exposed eulmen; wing more than 7.00;
terminal portion of both mandibles smooth and hard . '( Page 27. ) Limosa.
bb. Hind toe absent . ( Page 28. ) Calidris.
aa. Back of tarsus covered with hexagonal scales. ( Sub-familv Nit mi nee. )
( Page 28.) Numenius.
~v -r. ::: r.r.t .Enter plumage is in the collection made by Brother Matthias, on Maui, which is now in the St. Louis College
*; Ft :n th:~ specimen the above description and measurements are taken. See also Henshaw Auk. XVII.. p. 203. Dr
S-.hauinsland lists thi- species from Lavsan Island.
2' Mr. Henshaw adds Gull indigo defcata Ord. from Hawaii.
L 282]
SCOL OPACIDFE.
2;
Genus TRINGA Li> : <al -
Middle tail feathers longer and more pointed than the rest; tarsus longer
than the middle toe and claw; exposed culmen not longer than the tarsus, and less
than half as long as the tail ( Sub-genus Ado drama,' l: wing more than 4.50; rump and
tail coverts plain brownish black; shaft of all the quills white for a portion of its
length. Adult male: General color above sandv rufous streaked with black down the
centre of the feathers ; lesser wing coverts dull brown ; primary coverts blackish; crown
of head bright sand}' rufous streaked with black ; lores and a distinct eyebrow white
with a narrower streak of blackish; under surface of body white; the chin unspotted:
the throat and fore neck tinged with rufous and minutelv spotted. Female similar.
Winter: Much browner than the summer plumage without the rufous except on the
head Young: With more rufous on the upper parts than the old birds. Length 7.75,
wing 5.10, tail 2.10, culmen .90, tarsus 1.20, middle toe 1.10. Hah. Far north, breed¬
ing in Alaska, migrating south. Oahu, Maui. Lay sail.
47. T. acuminata H k-w Sharp-tailed Sandpiper.
Gents HETERACTI TIS Stejnk ,kr.
General color above uniform ash-greyish with slightly indicated lighter margins;
nasal grooves more than half as long as the exposed culmen; lower back, rump and
upper tail coverts purer grey; wing coverts like the back; lores blackish. 1 1 Inter:
Under surface of the bodv white with ash-grey shade over the fore neck and che-t ; sides
of flanks and chest also ashy grey. Female similar. Summer: Above plain brownish
gray varied with dusky ; lower parts white tinged with grayish on the fore neck ; fore
neck streaked; rest of lower parts barred with dusky. Young: Above brownish grey,
the feathers margined with buff or pale ochraceous and finely mottled transversely with
greyish. Length 10.50-12.00, wing 6.40-6.75, tail 2.90-3.00, culmen 1. 50-1. 70, tarsus
1.25-1.32, toes 1. 25-1. 30. Hab. Pacific coast of America, southward, wide-ranging.
Hawaiian Islands.
PI. XXV.. 91S9. 48. H. incanus <Gmel. Wandering Tatler, Ulili.
Genus LIMO SA Bresson.
Wing without white patch ; with the tail distinctly barred ; upper tail coverts
white with brownish or dusky markings: under parts, head and neck plain cinnamon
color; general color over the back blackish mottled with chestnut red; wing coverts
greyish varied with dusky shaft streaks and whitish margins. Wim r: Head, neck
and lower parts whitish, darkest on the chest, streaked with dusky about the head and
neck ; breast and sides of body with a few shaft streaks and bars of brownish grey.
2s The Museum’s specimen of T. acuminata was taken by Mr. A F. Judd in Moanalua valley near Honolulu. I have examine.? , specimen
taken on Maui bv Brother Matthias which is now in the St. Louis College cabinet Dr. Schamnslaud include- it in hi- list fir m Laysac
29 Trinra (I-y icon. i Case is added bv Dr. Schauinsland s list of birds from Laysan : also T. macnlata. vieill. from Hawaii i Hensh.
[283]
28
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
Female: Similar to male but larger. Young: Above, including wing coverts, buffy
greyish or dull clay color irregularly varied with dusky ; lower parts dull buffy whitish
shaded across chest with deeper greyish buff. Length 14.60-16.00, wing 8.25-9.15,
culmen 3.17-4.70, tarsus 2.00-2.45, middle toe 1.10-1.33 . Hab. Coasts of
Eastern Asia and across to Alaska, migrating south in winter to New Zealand and
Australia; Lower California, casual in winter (Ridgway). Kauai.30
49. L. lappon'ica bau'eri (Naum.). Pacific Godwit.
Genus CAI/IDRIS Cuvier.
Whiter: General color above light ashy grey with more or less distinct hoary
edges to the feathers and blackish shaft stripes; under parts white. Summer: Differs
from the winter in being mottled and not uniform; greater wing coverts broadly tipped
with white ; above light rusty, mottled and spotted with blackish on the feathers ; head,
neck and chest light rusty. Spring: Above light greyish coarsely spotted with black,
streaks of black on the neck. Young: Similar to winter adult but not so uniform
above. Only seen in winter plumage in Hawaii (?). Length about 8.00, wing 4.S0-
4.90, tail 2.25-2.30, tarsus .95, middle toe .73, culmen .90-1.00. Hab. Nearly cosmo¬
politan. Hawaiian Islands.
50. C. arena'ria (Linn.). Sanderling, Hunakai.
Genus NUME'NIUS Brisson.
Feathers of the thighs terminating in long bristle-like points; quills with whitish
or rufous on the inner edge; a central longitudinal pale band down the crown, with
the sides of the crown blackish brown forming a broad band down the sides of the
latter; auxilliaries pale cinnamon barred with wide stripes of dark brown ; upper parts
sooty brown and buff; tail coverts uniform cinnamon buff; lower parts dull buff;
cheeks, neck and breast streaked with brown. Female similar. Length about 17.00,
wing 9.00-9.25, tail 3.75, culmen 2.95-3.25, tarsus 2.15-2.35. Hab. Most of the islands
of the Pacific. Hawaiian Islands.
PI. XXV., 9752. 51. N. tahitiensis (Gmel.). Bristle-thighed Curlew, Kioea.
Family CHARADRI ID^. — Plovers.
Genus.
With no spur and no facial wattles; wing less than 8.00; plumage without
metallic tint; head not crested; no hind toe . (Page 28.) Charad rillS.
Genus CHARADRIUS Li NNAtUS.
No hind toe. Adult summer: General color above mottled with black, golden
and ashy chin, throat and lower parts dull dusky black; a frontal band and long eye-
30 The specimen from which the above description was taken is in the possession of Mr. Francis Gay and was secured by him on the
island of Kaua The measurements are, length 17.00, wing 9.00, tail 3.00, culmen 4.10, tarsus 2.25, middle toe 1.50 (?). A fine winter specimen
is in St. I.ouis College cabinet. Dr. Schauinsland also records Limosa novez-zea la iiditT, Salv., from Laysan.
[284]
C HA R A DR I ID HE.
29
brow white or buffy white; wing feathers black with white shafts. Adult winter:
With no black on under parts, which are whitish on the throat and belly and light
brownish streaked with grey elsewhere, more streaks on the chest ; usually less yellow
above than in summer. Young: Similar to adults but with more golden above; crown
blacker. Length 9.85-10.00, wing 6.35-6.65, tail 2.65-2.90, eulmen .85-1.00, tarsus
1.60-1.92 (1.70), toe 1. 20-1. 32, depth of bill .25. Hab. Breeding in Northern Asia
and Alaska, southward to Pol}-nesia. Hawaiian Islands. The following table of meas¬
urements is taken from specimens in the Museum series:
Male. Male. Male. Male. Male. Female. Female. Female.
Length . 9.90 9-85 10.00 9-75 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
Wing . 6.65 6.40 6.50 6.55 6.35 6.45 6.75 6.50
Tail . 2.90 2.80 2.80 2.72 2.80 2.65 2.80 2.75
Culmen . .98 .98 1.00 .90 1.00 .85 .90 .97
Tarsus . 1.85 1.92 1.70 1.60 1.70 1.70 1.76 1.75
Toe . 1.25 1.30 1.25 1.20 1.32 1.25 1.30 1.25
Depth of bill . .25 .26 .25 .25 .26 .25 .26 .26
52. C. domin'icus fnlvus31 (Gmel.). Pacific Golden Plover, Kolea.
Pi. XXV., 9397, 9897-
Family APHRI^IDJE.— Si jrf Birds and Turnstones.
Genus.
Nasal grooves not more than half the length of the upper mandible; tail slightly
rounded; terminal half of the bill pointed . (Page 29.) ArenaTia.
Genus ARENA RIA Brisson.
Head white and streaked with black, or head blackish brown ; throat white,
followed by a broad black band. Fall adult male: General color above black mixed
with chestnut or partly chestnut feathers ; entire rump pure white ; upper tail coverts
black, longer ones white; quills black with white shafts; crown of head and hind neck
white; lores white; sides of neck, fore neck and breast black; throat white; abdomen
white. Female: Duller all over and with less chestnut. Winter: Above nearly uni¬
form dusky brown, edges of feathers ashy brown; head uniform brown like the back;
hind neck and side of neck ashy mottled with dusky centres. Young: General color
above dusky brown; throat and under surface of body white. Length about 8.00, wing
5.60-5.95, tail 2.40-2.50, culmen .88-. 90, tarsus .95-1.05, toe 1.05, depth of beak .30.
Hab. Cosmopolitan. Hawaiian Islands.
PI. XXV., 8726, 9174. 53. A. inter'pres29 (Linn.). Turnstone, Akekeke.
31 Mr. Henshaw adds Squatarola squatarola (I. inn.) from Hawaii. (Auk, XVII., p. 202.
32 it is probable that A. interpres (Ijnn.) and A. melanocephala (Vig.) both visit the islands. However, I have seen no specimens of the
latter that have been taken in the group.
[285]
30
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
Order GALLING.— Gallinaceous Birds.
Families.
Hind toe rather small and short, less than half the length of the outer toe and
inserted above the level of the middle toe. (Sub-order Phasiani. )
a. Head entirely feathered, tarsus without spur. . . .(Page 30.) Tetraonidae.
aa. Head partly naked, tarsus with spur . (Page 30.) Phasiati ldse.
Family TETRAON'ID^.— Quails, Etc.
Genus.
Tarsi and nasal fossae naked; wings less than 6.00 (Sub-family Perdicinee) ;
cutting edge of lower mandible somewhat serrate ; first wing quill shorter than the
seventh; tail shorter than the wing; wing not more than 5.50; plumage much varied;
tail more than two-thirds the length of wing; crest lengthened and distinct from the
feathers of the crown . (Page 30.) Lophortyx.
Genus lOPHORTYX Bonaparte.
Crest black; throat uniform black in the adult males; flanks olive browix or
greyish streaked with chestnut. Male: Belly with black scale-like markings and a
central patch of chestnut. Female: Prevailing color smoky greyish or brownish.
Young: Above finely mottled brownish; throat and abdomen dull whitish. Length
about 9.50, wing 4.35-4.70, tail 4.10-4.70, tarsus 1. 20-1. 25. Hab. California and
Oregon. Hawaiian Islands ; introduced.
54. L- californ'ica (Siiaw). California Partridge.
Family PHASIANID2E. — Pheasants.
Genus.
Head feathered except about the eyes; tail lengthened and graduated, the
feathers tapering to a point; sexes different. (Sub-family Phasinince. )
(Page 30.) Phasia'nus.
Genus PHASIA'NUS Linn.Eus.
a. Under parts fiery copper chestnut. Male: A white ring about the middle of
the neck; the neck metallic green; the breast with metallic coppery and purple reflec¬
tions. Female: With all the tail feathers barred with blackish and dirt}T white on a
brownish ground. Length 20.00 in the female to 30.00 in the males; wing 8.50-10.50,
tail 11.00-20.00. I lab. China. Hawaiian Islands; introduced.
55. P. torquatus Gmee. Ring-neek Pheasant.
[286]
PERIS TERIDEE.
31
aa. Under parts dark green; no white ring about the neck; throat and side of
the neck with a purplish gloss; top of the head bronze green; the lower neck and
mantle dark green varied with buff lines which follow the shape of the feathers; lesser
wing coverts greenish slate; larger wing coverts as well as the lower feathers of the
mantle with bright ferric ochraceous markings; rump greenish. Female: Feathers of
the mantle almost entirely black in the middle, with sometimes a shaft stripe of rufous
and green tip to the feathers; feathers to the mantle and nape indistinctly tipped with
dark green ; under parts light buff ; all the feathers of the chest, breast, sides and flanks
strongly marked with black. Length 24.00-29.00, wing 8.20-9.65, tail 10.00-14.00,
tarsus 2.20-2.70, toe 2.50. Hab. Japanese Islands. Oahu; introduced.
56. P. versicolor53 Vieiu.. Japanese Pheasant.
Order COLUMB^-Pigeons.
Earn ilv.
Tarsus almost as long or longer than the middle toe ; tail feathers twelve or more.
( Page 31.) Peristeridae.
Family PERISTERIDAE.- Ground Pigeons, Etc.
Genus.
Without metallic spots on the wings; tail rather broad; tarsus naked on the
upper parts; neck with a dark collar. (Sub-family Turturinee.) Same characters
for the genus . (Page 31.) Turtur.
Genus TURTUR Sklby.
Feathers of the hind neck bifurcated (forked at the tip); black with white ter¬
minal spots (Sub-genus Spilope/ia); under tail coverts grey; upper parts, back, rump,
etc., light brown edged with lighter brown; top of head blue grey; back of neck vin¬
ous; lower parts rich vinous, lightest on the chin and abdomen; outer wing coverts
lead-grey; outer pair of tail feathers black tipped with broad white band. Female
similar. Young: Paler and duller all over. Length 1 2.50-13.00, wing 6.00-6.25, tail
5.00-5.50, tarsus .90-1.00, toe 1.20. Hab. China. Hawaiian Islands; introduced.
57. T. chinensis (Scop.). Chinese Turtle Dove.
33 Hybrids between the two species of pheasants here given frequently occur. The numerous attempts to introduce game bird-, into the
islands have met with varied success, so that “wild" turkey, chickens, guinea fowls, pea fowls, etc., are not infrequently met with.
[287]
32
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
Order RAPTORBS.— Birds of Prey.
Families.
Head entirely feathered; no web between the inner and middle toe; hind toe
with large sharp claw.
a. Eyes lateral, not surrounded by disks of radiating feathers ; outer toe not
reversible. ( Snb-order Fa leones. ) . ( Page 32. ) Falcon idae.
aa. Eyes surrounded by disks of radiating feathers; both eyes directed forward;
cere concealed by loral and frontal feathers (Snb-order Striges)\ facial disks distinct
and extending as far above the eye as below it; inner toe decidedly shorter than the
outer one; first quill shorter than the third . (Page 33.) Bubon idae.
Family FALCON ID^. — Falcons, Hawks, Etc.
Genera.
Nostrils not circular, nor linear and oblique; with the upper end of the nasal
opening the anterior one (Sub-family Accipitrinee) ; tail not forked; front of tarsus
covered with large transverse scutulse; claws grooved beneath; cutting edge of upper
mandible not notched; tip of upper mandible produced into a conspicuous hook.
a. Face encircled by a ruff of short stiffened feathers, as in the owls.
( Page 32.) Circus.
aa. Face not encircled by a ruff; tail not more than two-thirds the length of the
wing; primaries exceeding the secondaries by much more than the length of the tarsus
in front; wings more than four times as long as the tarsus . (Page 33.) Buteo.
Genus CIRCUS Lacepedp;.
Male: Above dull blue-grey, darker and inclined to brownish on the head, back
and scapulars ; the neck somewhat mottled with buffy white; facial ruff ash}^ grey;
chin whitish ; throat, sides of neck and breast dull greyish ; rest of under parts white;
tail bluish grey; upper tail coverts white. Female: Above dusky brown ; head and
neck streaked; the lesser wing coverts spotted; feathers of rump edged with rusty;
facial ruff buffy white streaked with dark brown ; tail ashy gre}? with five bars of dark
brown, the interspaces more or less rufous; under surface of body buffy white with
broad streaks of brown on the breast, thighs and abdomen. Young: Above ashy brown
or blackish brown with rufous margins to the feathers ; wing coverts spotted with deep
rusty; ear coverts uniform bright dark brown; feathers of the disks browmer; lower
parts rich rusty ochraceous, paler posteriorly. Length 19.50-24.00, wing 12.90-16.00,
[288]
BUBON/D FE.
33
tail 8.80-10.50, tarsus 2.85-3.25, middle toe 1. 20-1. 55. I fab. Whole of North America,
southward; accidental in Hawaiian Islands. (No specimens in the Museum.)
58. C. hudson'ius (Linn.). Marsh Hawk.
Genus BUTEO Cuvier.
Upper parts, back, head and upper tail coverts blackish brown ; secondaries and
wing coverts like the back ; all with paler margins, and with some tawn}r rusty ; throat
white; sides of breast brown mottled with white; black shafts to all the dark feathers;
abdomen, tibia and under tail coverts white with faint brownish markings; quills
blackish above; from the notch to the base of inner web white with faint brownish bands
varying in size and extent ; tail, general color brownish with bands of smoky brown and
dull ash-grey. Female: Larger and similar (one specimen shows indistinct bands of
brownish and tawny on the wing coverts and back). Young: Darker above, more rusty
edgings to the feathers of the sides and back of the neck ; throat with narrow shaft
stripes; breast and under parts with more brown than white; thighs brown with rusty;
under tail coverts whitish with cross bars of brown slightly edged with ochraeeous
rusty. Length about 15.50. Measurements taken from three specimens: Wing 9.50,
10.60, n.75; tail 5.50, 5.60, 6.40; tarsus 2.60, 2.30, 2.60; culmen 1.10, 1.25, 1.30; toe
1.90, 1.75, 2.10. (The last set of measurements are from the female.) Hab. Hawaii.
PI. XXVI., 5521. 59. B. solita'rius34 Peale. Hawaiian Hawk, Io.
Family BUBONID^. — Owls.
Genus.
Characters as given for the family . (Page 33.) Asio.
Genus A'SIO Brisson.
Light bands on quills less than ten in number; under surface of quills barred
across with brown ; tips entirely brown ; face more or less fulvescent with brownish
black; ear tufts short; ground color varying in individuals from tawny ochraeeous to
buffy white relieved by dark brown stripes; wings mottled with dusky and ochraeeous;
tail ochraeeous and buffy ; outer feathers lighter. Young: Above dark sepia brown, the
feathers broadly tipped with buff ; face uniform brownish black ; lower parts wholly
plain dull buffy tinged with smoky greyish anteriorly. Hab. Hawaiian Islands. The
following measurements seem to justify the separation sub-speeifiealU of the Hawaiian
form from the larger North American bird :
Sex.
Length .
Wing.
Tail.
Tarsus.
Toe .
Culmen
Museum No. 9,835.
$
13-25
11. 15
5-40
i-35
1 .60
1. 10
No. 10,067.
9
14.00
11.80
5-50
i-35
1.58
1 . 1 2
No. 1,284.
—
14-25
11.20
5-55
1.38
1 -55
1 .08
No. 9,272.
$
14.00
11.50
5 -45
1 .36
1 -55
1 .10
PI. XXVI., 9835. 60. A. accipitri'nus sandvicensis35 (Bi.ox.). Hawaiian Owl, Pueo.
34 There are some uncertain references to “ Pandion solitarius" which are with difficulty reconciled with the habits of the species given
above. A fish-hawk ( Pandion ) may yet be taken in the group.
35 To correspond with the form usually adopted sandwichensu is changed to 'sandvicensis.
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 3. — 3. [289]
34
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
Order PASSERES.-Perching Birds.
Families.
Tarsus compressed behind, forming a comparatively sharp edge, or else hind
claw longer than its digit and straight, the enveloping membrane (i. e ., tarsal sheath )
divided into not more than three longitudinal segments which may be either cut up
into transverse segments or fused into continuous plates. (Sub-order Oscines.)
a. Posterior half of the tarsus not compressed but rounded and divided into dis¬
tinct segments like the anterior half . (Page 35.) Alatl didae.
aa. Posterior half of the tarsus compressed with the lateral plates forming
a sharp ridge.
b. No bastard primary (i.e., the first primary obsolete), the outer primary
falling short of the wing by less than the length of the hind toe without the claw; bill
of various forms but with a well developed operculum ; tongue a more or less modified
tubular brush. A very heterogeneous family embracing the greater part of the
Hawaiian passerine avi-fauna . (Page 39.) Drepail ididae.
bb. Tenth or outer primary present, but varying in length.
C. Primaries apparently only nine, the tenth being exceedingly rudi¬
mentary ; tip of the bill not hooked ; bill straight and cone-shaped. Bird sparrow-like.
d. Wing less than 2.40; nostrils placed high on the bill nearer the
culmen than the tomium . (Page 39.) Ploceidae.
dd. Wing more than 2.48; bill notched and with a few bristles
at the gape; true sparrows . . . . (Page 38.) Fringillidae.
CC. Primaries obviously ten, or else the bill hooked; tarsus longer
than the middle toe with claw.
e. Tarsus more or less distinctly scutulate in front.
f. Tail feathers normal, but not especially long; nasal
feathers erect or inclined backward ; nasal bristles either present or wanting.
g. No nasal bristles; nasal feathers inclined back¬
ward somewhat; first primary minute, not reaching to the tip of the wing coverts;
white patch on the wing at base of primaries . (Page 37.) Sturtlidae.
gg. Nasal bristles present.
* h. Large birds; wing more than 4.00.
(Page 35.) Corvidae,
hh. Small birds ; wing less than 4.00.
i. First primary not over .30; bill slender
and notched near the tip; nasal openings not pronounced. . . .(Page 58.) Sylviidae.
[290]
ALA UDIDAE — COR I rIDAE.
35
ii. First primary more than a third the
length of the second ; bill rather broad and flat; nasal bristles extending forward for
half the length of the cnlmen . (Page 36.) Muscicap idae.
ff. Tail feathers long, graduated; tail longer than the
wing; nostrils basal in an unossified groove; first primary about half the length of the
second; with or without auxiliary plumes . (Page 56.) Meliphag idae.
ee. Tarsi not divided into scutulie in front except at extreme
lower portion ; with few redial bristles.
j. Wing less than 3.00; small brown
birds; young not spotted (See i., page 34) . (Page 58.) Sylvildae.
jj. Wing more than 3.00; the young
spotted . ( Page 59.) Turdidae.
Family ALAU DID^E.- Larks.
Genus.
Wing falling short of the tail by more than the length of the tarsus; hind claw
very long; cnlmen shorter than the middle toe; first primary rudimentary ; plumage
mainly dull brownish . . (Page 35.) Alau da.
Genus ALAU'DA Linnaeus.
The feathers with blackish centres, everywhere producing a streaked appear¬
ance ; the scapulars and lower mantle with greyish edges to the feathers; chest tawny
buff streaked with black; outer tail feathers white with some dusky along the inner
web. Winter: Plumage more tawny. Young: More tawny than the winter adults,
with more white above and black streaks changing to subterminal spots of dark brown.
Length about 7.50, wing 4.35-4.55, tail 2.90-3.05, culmeu .45-.50, tarsus .95. Hub.
Europe and Asia. Hawaiian Islands; introduced.
61. A. arven'sis Linn. Skylark.
Family CORVIDAE. — Crows, Etc.
Genus.
Bill without a distinct subterminal notch at the tip; hind toe strong; wing fall¬
ing short of the tip of the tail by less than the length of the tarsus; nostrils concealed
by bristles; first primary long as secondaries (Sub-family Corvinee)\ tarsus longer
than culmen . ( Page 35.) Cor'vtlS.
Genus COR'VUS Linnaeus.
Head deep brown or blackish ; back lightest on the tertiaries and secondaries,
and grey-brown on the primaries; rump and tail blackish brown uniform with
mantle; primary shafts brown above, below more whitish brown. Length 18.00—20.00,
wing 13.00, tail 7 .75-8.50, culmen 2.20-2.40, depth of bill 1.00-1.10, tarsus 2.50-2.65,
toe 2.10-2.30. Hub. Hawaii.
PI. XXVI., 6599. 62. C. hawaiien'sis Peace. Hawaiian Crow, Alala.
[291]
36
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
Family MUSCICAP IDiEF — Fly-catchers.
Genus.
Bill broad, soft, rather flat, slightly hooked at the tip, and furnished with numer¬
ous redial bristles which reach beyond the middle of culmen ; culmen keeled ; wing
falling short of the end of the tail by about the length of the tarsus; wing longer than
the tail; bill at base not as broad as the length of the hind toe without the claw; the
second primary a half inch shorter than the third. Peculiar to the Hawaiian Islands.
(Page 36.) Chasiempis.
Genus CHASIEM PIS Cabanis.
a. Young of all species: Wing coverts spotted with tawny oehraceous; throat
ochraceous ; base of lower mandible lighter without black or white on the throat.
b. Browner above, ochraceous of throat and tail coverts deeper; head not
so ochraceous. (See description of adult C. sandvicensis.)
bb. Fighter, more ochraceous above, throat and upper tail coverts rusty
ochraceous. (See description of adult C. gayi and C. sclateri. )
aa. Adult of all species: Wing coverts spotted with white; black or white or
both on the throat ; lower mandible dark ; tail coverts white.
C. Above bluish grey. Adult: Above uniform dark smoky grey; up¬
per tail coverts pure white; wing coverts blackish, with greater and lesser coverts
tipped with white forming two fairly distinct bars across the wing; quills blackish
with grayish fulvous edges tipped with white ; lores and superciliary stripe whitish or
buffy white; centre of throat white surrounded by buffy and buffy grey feathers, form¬
ing a more or less distinct pedtoral girdle; sides of the body greyish white with wash of
rusty ; abdomen and under tail coverts white ; white on outer web of tail feathers narrow
and extending along the edge for the greater part of its length ; white tip about .35 broad.
Young: Deep tawny buff or ochraceous about the rump, head and neck; under tail
coverts tawny; wing bands rusty. Length 5.25-5.50, wing 2.55-2.95, tail 2.35-2.60,
culmen .45-. 50, depth of bill .16, width .22, tarsus .80-.89, toe .65. Hab. Kauai.
PI. XXVII., 6657, 9410. 63. C. scla'teri Ridgw. Apekepeke.
CC. Above brownish.
d. White tips to the outer tail feathers, usually longer than .50;
white tip and outer edging of the secondaries neither wide nor prolonged. Adult:
[292]
STURNIDsE.
37
Above brown tinged with rufous; upper tail coverts white; forehead, lores and super¬
ciliary stripe white; wing coverts black with white spots; primary coverts blackish;
primaries brown with rusty or buffy white edges ; feathers of the throat black tipped
with white, which is conspicuous in older birds; chest and sides of the body reddish
brown, sometimes with white tips; abdomen and under tail coverts pure white; outer
edge of outer pair of tail feathers whitish for most of their length ; inner web white for
at least .40. Intermediate plumage: Forehead, lores and superciliary stripe rusty
white; upper parts similar to adult, usually more rusty; upper tail coverts white with
ochraceous tinge; wings as above; throat white, followed by a sooty black patch, and
this in turn by rufous brown as in adult ; rest of lower parts similar to adult. Young;
Tawny ochraceous brown above ; head tawny with darker centres to the feathers ; upper
tail coverts ochraceous; primaries and tail feathers showing ochraceous; wing coverts
brown tipped with ochraceous ; under parts rusty, buff and grey passing to whitish
grey on the abdomen. Length 5.50-5.75, wing 2.70-2.75, tail 2.40-2.65, eulmen .47-. 53,
depth of bill .20, width .18, tarsus .90, toe .63. Hab. Hawaii.
PI. XXVII., 9923, 9924. 64. C. sandvicen’sis36 (Gmel.). Hawaii Elepaio.
dd. White tips to outer pair of tail feathers usually less than .50;
white tips and edgings to the secondaries quite pronounced; above brownish (feathers
with bluish bases) washed with tawny ochraceous, especially about the head; tail
coverts white; wing coverts brownish black forming a well defined bar; lesser coverts
tipped less regularly with white ; primaries brown with buff edges ; forehead rusty
ochraceous ; lores and about the eyes white ; chin white ; throat black with more or less
white tips (not so conspicuous as in sandvicensis) ; breast with some reddish brown; ab¬
domen white. Intermediate plumage : Similar to young, but showing brownish black
in the throat, and more or less white in the wing and tip of the tail. Young; Above,
tawn}r ochraceous brown, most ochraceous on the sides and back of the neck; upper
tail coverts tawny ochraceous; forehead, lores, chin, throat and chest tawny ochraceous;
abdomen white; under tail coverts tawny; wing coverts and primaries brown with
ochraceous edges, larger wing coverts sometimes showing white tips forming a less
conspicuous bar than in adults. Length 5.50-6.00, wing 2.55-2.65, tail 2.50-2.55,
eulmen .40-.45, tarsus .95-1.00, toe .60. Hab. Oahu.
PI. XXVII., 9252, 9258, 9255, 9259, 9260, 9407. 65. C. gayi Wilson. Oahu Elepaio.
Family STURNIDiE. — Starlings, Minas, Etc.
Genus.
Hind claw stronger than the claw of the middle toe; in prepared skins the feet
reach almost to the end of the tail; bill somewhat curved; eulmen less than the tarsus
in length . (Page 38.) Acridotheres,
36 With the material at hand it is impossible to separate the two forms which are supposed to occur on the island of Hawaii.
[293]
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
38
Genus ACRIDOTHERES Yieiulot.
With a bare patch of yellow skin below and behind the eye ; lower mandible
black at the base; with white on the base of primaries forming a speculum; no black
on breast and abdomen; above vinous brown with an ashy shade, as is also the breast
and sides of the body; abdomen and under tail coverts white; head and neck blackish.
Female similar. Length 9.50, wing 5.50, tail 3.45, tarsus 1.40. Hab. Indian Penin¬
sula. Hawaiian Islands ; introduced.
66. A. tristis (Linn.). False Mina.
Family FRINGIEI/IDiE. — Sparrows, Finches, Etc.
Genera.
Depth of bill at base less than the length of hind toe with claw, and less than
two-thirds the length of the tarsus.
a. Gonvs slightlv convex; a light brownish spot on speculum at base of quills.
(Page 38.) Passer.
aa. Gonys not appreciably convex ; no light spot or speculum at base of quills;
wing less than five times as long as the tarsus; first quill decidedly longer than the
f mrth; depth of bill at base about equal to the length of culmen.
( Page 38.) Carpod acus.
Genus PASSER Brissox.
Brownish above; the back streaked with black; wing with two white bands;
under parts pale greyish or greyish white. Male: With black throat continued over
the chest; ear coverts dull grey; top of head grevish with a large patch of bright
chestnut on the sides. Female: With the throat not black ; back streaked or mottled
with blackish ; a pale superciliary stripe ; cheeks dingv brown like the ear coverts;
browner than the male. Young: Both sexes resemble the adult female but are whiter
below, especially on the throat. Length 5.50-6.25, wing 2.90—3.00, tail 2.45—2.50.
Hab. Europe, America, etc. Hawaiian Islands; introduced; common.
67. P. domesticus Linn. European House Sparrow.
Genus CARPOD ACUS K AUP.
Sides of body streaked or always with well defined shaft lines of brown, and with
a distinct eyebrow; tail not decidedly shorter than wing ; not distincllv emarginated
(Sub-genus Burrica) ; crown of head not broadly streaked; abdomen ashy white
streaked with brown ; general color above light ashv brown slightlv streaked with
darker brown. Male: Rump, lores, forehead, throat and breast crimson. Female:
General color above brown slightly mottled with duskv centres to the feathers ; upper
tail coverts like the back; crown similar and more or less mottled; lores ashv white;
under surface white broadly streaked with dusky brown. Length about 5.25-5.50,
[294]
PLO C FJ D sE— D R E PA X I D I D /E .
39
"dng 3-IO> tail 2.35, culmen .40, depth of bill .30, tarsus .75, toe .50. Efab. Western
part of North America. Hawaiian Islands; introduced.
68. C. mexica nus obscurus McCall. House Finch, “Rice Bird.”
Family PLOCEID^E. — Weaver Birds.
Genus.
The first primary short, not longer than the primary coverts (Sub-family
Viduinee)\ tail about equal to the wing; centre feathers somewhat produced and
pointed, but the tail itself wedge-shaped and not greatlv graduated; bill swollen and
rounded ; culmen strongW arched ; tail moderately long, never exceeding the wing by
as much as the tarsus with the middle toe and claw . (Page 39.) Munia.
Genus MU NIA Hodgson.
Legs dark; under tail coverts huffy white; throat deep chestnut; sides of body
oculated with black and white spots; tail from above grevish olive yellow; rump
feathers plain with lighter edges ; general color above warm chocolate brown with nar¬
row whitish shaft lines, the lower back waved with dusky brown cross bars ; quills
dusky brown. Adult female similar to the male in color. Young: Nearly uniform
reddish brown ; upper tail coverts more vellowish brown ; wing coverts like the back;
crown of head and sides of face like the back ; under parts of the body deep sandy
brown; feet and bill paler. Length 4.40-4.55, culmen .45, wing 2.15-2.30, tail 1.60-
1.80, tarsus .60. Hab. Malavan Peninsula. Hawaii, Maui, Oahu; introduced.
69. M. nisoria (Temm.). Chinese Sparrow.
Family DREPAN IDID2E. — Honey-suckers.
Genera.
a. Bill very strong , deep and hawfinch-like in form ; depth of bill at base about
equal to (never less than) hind toe without the claw; culmen not longer than hind
toe with the claw, and never shorter than .50. Length never less than 5.15.
b. Upper mandible longer than the lower by at least .10; both gonys and
culmen strongly curved ; plumage in adult males yellow on the throat.
C. Wing not exceeding 3.10; culmen strongly curved (parrot-like) and
exceeding the lower mandible by the length of the hind claw ; yellow super-loral stripe.
(Page 53.) Pseudones tor.
CC. Wing more than 3.10; culmen curved but not exceeding the lower
mandible by more than the length of the hind claw (except rarely in Psittacirostra) .
d. Back without any back shaft streaks; head yellow; upper
mandible light colored.
e. Head, neck and chest bright gamboge yellow; primaries
edged externallv with yellow olive ....,, . (Page 54- * Loxioi des,
[295]
40
BIRDS OS THE HA WAIT AX GROUP.
ee. Head and neck in the male yellow, female olive green;
edge of primaries slightly yellow olive; feet light brown (in the skin).
(Page 53.) Psittaciros tra.
dd. Back with more or less distinct blackish or brownish shaft
streaks; upper mandible horn-color; feet black or bluish black.
(Page 54.) Telespi'za.
bb. Upper mandible exceeding the lower by not more than .10; bill very
wide and deep: depth not less than .5S, and width not less than .38.
f. Wing more than 4.00 ; bill bluish grey ; gonys
straight or very slightly deeurved . ( Page 55.) Rhodacan this.
ff. Wing less than 4.00; bill dull flesh color and very
thick and clumsy; gonys curved . ( Page 56. ) CbloridopS.
aa. Bill of various forms but never deeper nor broader than .30; or, if so, very
long and much deeurved.
g. Culrnen, cutting edge of mandibles and gonys
all perceptibly deeurved, except in He ter rhynchus zeihoni where the gonvs is straight
( where curve of bill is questionable, culrnen more than .50 ) .
h. Culrnen very long and remarkably curved;
culrnen never less ( usually much more) than .70.
i. Upper mandible at least one-third its
length longer than the lower mandible; color never red or black.
(Page 51.) Heterorhyn chus.
ii. Upper mandible not one-third longer
than the lower mandible; tip of the wings falling short of the tip of the tail (in the
skin) by less than the length of the tarsus.
j. Bill light vermilion (becoming de¬
cidedly paler in old skins ); primaries and tail feathers black. ( Page 42.) Vestia ria.
jj. Bill for the most part black or
blackish brown ; lores black or brownish black.
k. Plumage chiefly olive; prima¬
ries never edged or tipped with whitish ; bill sickle-like. ( Page 50. ) Hemigna thus.
kk. Plumage chiefly black; pri¬
maries edged or tipped with whitish.
I. With yellow feathers over
the rump in adults; under tail coverts elongated and loose-webbed; bill less curved.
( Page 41.) Drep anis.
II. With no yellow in the plu¬
mage at any age; bill much stronger and much more curved; under tail coverts
normal . ( Page 42.) Drepanoram phus.
[296]
DREPAXIDID
4i
hh. Culmen not very long nor remarkable
curved ; both of the mandibles of practically the same length.
m. With a more or less
prominent crest; length more than 6.50 . (Page 43.) Palme ria.
mm. Without crest: adult
birds either crimson or yellowish olive; length less than 6.50.
n. General color crim¬
son, or with more or less red cast to the plumage ; bill and feet black or blackish.
( Page 43.) Himati one.
nn. General color yel¬
lowish olive or olive grev ; upper mandible brown or bluish slate at the base.
O. The bill but slight¬
ly curved; culmen more than .75; wing more than 2.95; bill bluish slate.
( Page 46. ) Viridon ia.
OO. The bill curved;
culmen less than .75; wing less than 2.93; upper mandible brown.
< Page 44. 1 Chlorodrep anis.
gg. Bill practically straight, or where questionable
less than .50; wing less than 3.40.
p. Bill bluish horn
at the base ( hnch-like ), sometimes slightlv crossed at the tip: feet black or blackish.
q. Lores not black:
neck above and below nearlv uniform in color; crown never gamboge yellow.
( Page 48. > Lox Ops.
qq. Lores black;
color of neck above and below different ; crown gamboge yellow in adults.
( Page 48. ) Chrysomit ridops. "
pp. Bills of various
forms, but not bluish horn at the base; feet brown or pinkish in life.
r. Breast, wings
and tail black, with red on under parts; length 5.50 . ■ Page 44. > CiridopS.
rr. The breast.
wing and tail not black; no red in the plumage; length less than 5.50.
S. Larger: the
wing m re than 2.30; outer primary (first primary wanting) as short or shorter than
the fifth from the outer . ( Page 46. ) Oreomy za.
SS. Smaller:
wing less than 2.30; outer primary equal to the filth irom the outer: bill slender, very
slightlv deeurved; never more than .55 . ( Page 46. ) Rothschild ia.
Genus DREP'ANIS Temmixck.
With vellow on the rump and upper tail coverts; both mandibles practically the
same length and strongly curved; culmen more than equal to the tarsus in length;
•''Included under the genu# • : page
j* United with the genus fUmWn^mi i. the single species therebv becoming GUhvA^mu Stein.
C-97 J
42
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
body, both above and below, fine deep black; rump, upper tail coverts, under tail
coverts, thighs, lesser wing coverts and margin of the wing fine rich yellow, “crocus
yellow” (Wilson); primary cpverts white; tail feathers blackish, showing a little dull
white for .50 along the shaft of the outer pair ; primaries black with the outer edge, for
its distal third, white ; secondaries black tipped with white. Sexes and young: Length
about S.oo, wing 4.00-4.15, tail 2.65-2.90, chord of culmen 1.62-1.70, depth of bill .30,
width .30, tarsus 1.15, toe .75. Hab. Hawaii.
70. D. paci'fica (Gmel.). Mamo.
Genus DREPANORHAM PHUS Rothschild.
With the upper and lower parts fine deep black, with no yellow on the rump;
base of the upper mandible yellow or whitish; tail and inner edge of primaries deep
black ; outer edge of primaries smoky black at base, passing to wdiitish and forming a
white conspicuous patch. Female: Similar, but with a shorter bill. Length about
8.00, wing 3.90-4.00, tail 2.55-2.80, chord of culmen 1.85-2.15, depth .32, tarsus 1.10-
1.20, toe 1. 00. Hab. Molokai.
PI. XXVII., 6696. 71. D. fune'rea39 (Newton). Perkins’ Mamo.
Genus VESTIA RIA Fleming.
FIG. 3. V. COCCINEA.
Bill curved ; about the same length as head ; bill and feet vermilion in life, dry¬
ing whitish ; general color uniform scarlet vermilion including scapulars and lesser wing
39 1 take pleasure in adopting- tile new generic name for D. funerea (Newton) proposed by the Hon. Walter Rothschild in his "Avifauna
of Laysan, etc.” (Part III., p. 163). While it is unfortunate that the single example of this genus could not have been left as a species of the
old and well known genus Dtepanis, the fa<5ts are the form differs from it sufficiently to warrant the change.
[298]
DREPANIDIDAi.
43
coverts ; tertiaries tipped with white ; wing and tail feathers deep black. Female similar.
Young: All the vermilion parts grey, with some greenish and gallstone vellow; feathers
with black tips, and vermilion showing here and there. Length 6.00, wing 2.87, tail 2.00,
tarsus 1.00-1.12, culmen .97—1.10. Hab. Hawaiian Islands, throughout the group.
PI. XXVIII., 9792, 9342, 9338, 9333, 9340, 9348. 9S99. 72. V. coccin ea Forster. Iiwi.
Genus PALME RIA Rothschild.
fig. 4. p. dolei.
Forehead and crown covered with long lanceolate feathers forming a linear
crest which rolls forward over the base of the beak ; crest grey in front, darker on the
crown ; occipital feathers lanceolate, elongated and tipped with bright scarlet orange;
feathers of the back blackish with silvery shaft stripes and tipped with scarlet orange;
tail and wing feathers black, the former tipped (?), the latter narrowly margined
with whitish; throat dirty silver grey ; breast like the back. Young: Brownish grey
above, with some black feathers showing orange tips ; breast showing smoky grey; under
tail coverts whitish. Length 6.50—6.75, wing 3.30— 3-5°> tail 2.65-2.80, culmen .70-. 75,
depth of bill .25, tarsus 1.10-1.20, toe .80. Hab. Molokai, Maui.
PL XXVIII., 6595, 6596. 73. P. dolei+° (Wilson).
Genus HIMATI ONE Cabanis.
a. General color above dark crimson (blood red), richest on the head and neck;
primaries black, faintly edged with ashy ; secondaries with crimson buff ; tail feathers
black; throat, breast and sides uniform with the back; abdomen white. Female:
Slightly lighter than the male(?). Young: General color brown, washed with ful¬
vous or buff ; with buffy margins to the wing coverts ; lower parts similar to upper;
with or without crimson feathers here and there, varying with age. Length 5.15-5.25,
wing 2.70-3.00, tail 2.05-2.15, culmen .65-.70, depth of bill .15, tarsus .75-.S0, toe .70.
Hab. Hawaiian Islands, throughout the group.
PL XXVIII., 7996, 9803, 9322, 9898, 9309, 9324. 74. H. sanguin ea (Gmel.). Apapahe.
4°The above species was named in honor of Hon. S. B. Dole, and not a wine jar as the erroneous spelling c. 'u would make it.
[299]
44
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
aa. Head, throat and breast bright scarlet vermilion, richest on the head; abdo¬
men grey-brown ; under tail coverts lighter brown ; upper tail coverts a lighter shade
of vermilion than the head ; primaries brownish black edged with buffy ; secondaries
brown edged with buffy and vermilion. Female: Similar, but paler. Young: Dull
brown above and light ash on the under parts. Lighter than H. sang nine a , and with
a shorter bill. Length about 5.25, wing 2.48-2.65, tail 2.25-2.40, culmen .50-.55,
depth of bill .20, tarsus .80-. 85, toe .70. Hab. Laysan.
75- H. freethi Roths. Laysan Honey-eater.
Genus CIR'IDOPS Wieson.
Breast, wings, tail and forehead black; occiput and upper part of mantle silvery
grey, shading into smoky grey-brown on the mantle ; lower breast, rump, upper tail
coverts and median wing coverts bright scarlet ; under tail coverts rich brown. Sexes
and young unknown. Length about 5.50, wing 3.30, tail 2.20, culmen .40, tarsus .75,
toe .70, hallux with claw .65. Hab. Hawaii.
76. C. anna (Dote). Ulaaihawane.
Genus CHLORODRLP ANIS Perkins.
Upper parts olive ; lower parts more or less olive or yellow; bill curved; first
primary wanting; second primary equal to or longer than the third and fourth; nasal
opercula overhung at the base by a few weak bristles; fifth quill equal to or longer
than the first. Young: Duller and very similar in color, usually greyish olive on
the back.
a. Wing never less than 2.35, bill perceptibly decurved.
b. Adults larger in size with stronger bills; beak not less than .60; wing
in males not less than 2.55.
C. With scarcely a trace of black on the chin at the base of the lower
mandible; lores blackish with a yellowish super-loral stripe; scarcely a trace of black
at base of upper mandible ; upper parts olive green, yellowest on the rump ; forehead
yellower olive than the crown ; primary coverts, wing and tail feathers brown edged
with olive; lower parts golden green, almost lemon yellow; bill strongest of the seven
species. Fema le very similar. Length about 4.50-4.85, wing 2.62-2.70, tail 1.62-1.70,
culmen . 72-75, depth of bill .25, tarsus .92, toe .70. Hab. Kauai.
PI. XXIX., 9396. 77. C. stejneg'eri (Wilson). Kauai Amakihi.
CC. With a fairly distinct, narrow, ill-defined, blackish band about the
base of the beak; lores blackish ; yellow super-loral stripe not reaching quite to the
base of the beak.
d. Trifle larger; tarsus .S2--95 ; centre of breast yellower; upper
parts dark olive green, yellowest on the rump, darkest on the head; lower parts fine
yellow, yellowest on the chest; thighs grey; wing coverts, wing and tail feathers
brownish black edged with olive. Female: Above greyish olive, greyest on the head,
L300J
D RE PA NIDI DAE.
45
showing most yellow on the upper tail coverts and outer edge of primaries and tail
feathers; with a whitish yellow super-loral stripe; lower parts grey washed with yel¬
low. Length 4.50-4.70, wing 2.45 ( $ wing 2.75?), tail 1. 75-1. 95, culmen .60-.70, depth
of bill .16, tarsus .80-95, toe -65- Hab. Maui.
78. C. wilson'i (Roths.). Maui Amakihi.
dd. Trifle smaller; tarsus .75-. 82 ; centre of breast more olive
yellow. Length about 4.50, wing 2.40-2.60, tail 1.65-1.95, culmen -55-.65, depth of
bill .16, toe .60. Hab. Molokai.
79. C. kalaa'na ( Wilson)41. Molokai Amakihi.
bb. Adults averaging smaller in size; with weaker bills; beak not more
than .60; wing not more than 2.60.
e. Above yellowish green, yellowest on the rump; bright
yellow on the chest.
f. Abdomen showing more white; rump not so decided
yellowish olive; wing coverts, primaries and tail feathers edged with olive green; edge
of wing yellowish; under wing coverts white; lores, together with a scarcely percepti¬
ble streak over the base of the upper mandible, blackish ; super-loral stripe indistinct
yellow. Female: Grey olive green, greyest on the head; more tawny on the rump;
wings and tail edged with olive; secondaries outer edge at tip white; median and
greater wing coverts tipped with white or ochraceous white; greyish on the throat
with more or less wash of yellow passing to tawny white on the breast, and fulvous
on lower flanks. Young males: Showing more yellow and olive on the under parts.
Length 4.75-5.10, wing 2.45-2.60, tail 1.70-1.80, culmen .56-.60, depth of bill .16,
tarsus .80, toe .86. Hab. Oahu.
80. C. chloris (Cab.). Oahu Amakihi.
ff. Back olive yellow, becoming decided yellow olive on
the rump; less olive below; lores greyish sooty; super-loral stripe less strongly con¬
trasted with the adjacent parts. Female: Back quite olive grey, yellowest on the
rump; lores darkest; super-loral stripe quite distinct; lower parts yellowish grey with
olive. Length 4.20-4.40, wing 2.35-2.50, tail 1.70-1.80, culmen .60, tarsus -75-.S5,
toe .65. Hab. Lanai.
81. C. ehloridoi'des42 (Wilson). Lanai Amakihi.
*x Differing but slightly from typical C. chloris and Mr. Wilson’s proposed Lariat species C. chloridoides. Selected specimens from a short
senes of spring birds (May to June) show the following fairly constant differences. Males: Under parts of kalaana more olive and golden
than in chloridoides, ’which in turn is less lemon yellow than in typical chloris ; color of feet and beak similar; kalaana duller olive yellow
above than chloris^ which is duller than chloridoides which is decidedly yellowish olive on the rump ; lores of kalaana blackest, chloridoides
next, while chloris is decidedly greyish sooty ; super-loral stripe most extensive in kalaana , brightest in chloris , and least contrasted with the
adjacent parts in chloridoides. With the females kalaana is lightest olive grey above, quite light over the upper mantle and differing from
chloris , which is deeper, and from chloi idoides in being less olive grey ; rump and tail coverts of kalaana grey with but slight olive cast ; chloris
is tawny olive, while chloridoides is olive green ; lores of kalaana smoky grey, not differing from chloris , but lighter than chloridoides where
t hey are sooty ; super-loral stripes in kalaana yellower and more noticeable than in chloris, and less so than in chloridoides which is quite a de¬
cided yellow; below, kalaana greyish olive white with yellow wash; chloris with more grey and less j-ellow ; chloridoides yellowish olive.
Hence, male kalaana has the under parts more olive and golden, duller olive yellow above ; lores blackest; super-loral stripe more extended;
otherwise similar to chloris. Female: Lighter olive grey above, quite light over the mantle; rump similar to upper mantle; lores smoky
grey; super-loral stripe more noticeable than in chloris ; below, greyish olive washed with yellow ; differing least from chloris Both kalaana
and chloridoides seem to be species of only sub-specific value.
4- See note to C. kalaana.
[301]
46
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
ee. Above yellowish olive with faint indication of orange(?)
— not noticeable on old faded specimens — which is strongest on the rump; primaries
and tail quills brownish edged with olive; lores and a narrow line over the forehead
blackish ; lower parts yellowish olive. Female: Duller than the male, with ashy cast
to the upper parts; longer parts paler. Young: Similar to female. Length 4.40-4.60,
wing 2.45-2.60, tail 1.65-1.80, enlmen .50-.55, tarsus .85-.90, toe .65. Hab. Hawaii.
82. C. virens43 (Gmee.). Hawaii Amakihi.
aa. Wing less than 2.30; bill but slightly deenrved; smallest of the Hawaiian
birds; bill more slender than in typical Chlorodrepanis ; upper parts more uniform
yellow. Male: Above, head, mantle and outer edge of wing and tail quills j^ellowish,
brighter than an olive yellow; rump yellowest; below uniform yellow with but slight
greenish tint. Female: Similar in size but much greener both above and below, with
the under parts much duller, fading into greyish olive on sides of the abdomen.
Young similar to female. Length 4.00-4.25, wing 2.20-2.30, tail 1. 45-1. 55, culmen
.50-. 53, tarsus .75-.80, toe .55. Hab. Kanai.
83. C. parva44 (Stejn.).
Genus VIRIDON IA Ro'j fHSCHILD.
Bill straight or but slightly curved, high and strong at the base, more atten¬
uated towards the tip, and sharp; fourth and fifth primaries about equal, second
shorter than the seventh; tail rather short; sexes similar; above olive green, showing
more yellow on the forehead, chin and upper tail coverts; under parts more yellowish
olive, greener than the upper parts and with a faint ochraceous cast ; tail blackish
brown with yellowish olive margins ; under surface of wing dark ash with dusky white
quills. Wing 2.80-3.00, tail 1. 70-1. 75, culmen .70, tarsus .83— .86, toe .73— .75, depth
of bill .23. Hab. Hawaii.
84. V. sagittiros'tris Roths.
Genus ORBOMY'^A Stejneger.
Under mandible straight, or at least not perceptibly curved; plumage soft and
fluffy; tarsus covered in front with four, five or six scales ; nasal operculum slightly
overhung at the base by tiny feathers; tip of the wing formed by the third, fourth,
43 Mr. Rothschild (Avifauna of Laysan, Part III., page 129) gives Oreomyza perkinsi as a new species from Hawaii, describing it as fol¬
lows : “ Adult male: Above light olive green (Ridgway Nom. Colors, Pl. X., No. 18), brighter on the rump ; quills black edged with oil green;
below olive yellow; vent greenish white ; thighs dirty white ; under wing coverts white with a yellow tinge ; lores black ; iris dark brown;
legs and feet greyish brown ; soles of feet yellowish-flesh color; upper mandible dark brown with paler base ; lower mandible grey. Total
length about 5.5 inches ; wing 2.6, tail 1.7, tarsus 0.85, culmen 0.63. One male, Puulehua, Plawaii, September 25, 1891.” In commenting on the
specimen in the Tring Museum Mr. Rothschild states that the “remarkable specimen has a long but straight bill . The coloration is
that of Chlorodrepanis virens . and that it might be a hybrid between Oreomyza mana and Chlorodrepanis virens .” The B. P. Bishop
Museum series, embracing many recently collected specimens, show virens with beaks approaching the straight form, though none that are
to be confounded with the Oreomyza type ; while fine old males of Oreomyza mana are much more highly colored than has been usually sup¬
posed. The only character in Mr. Rothschild’s description which seems to be of specific value, when compared with the Museum series, is
the length, which is given as almost an inch longer than the average of either mana or virens. Since the author fails to call attention to this
point it may possibly be a typographical error. Mr. Henshaw informs me he has taken nothing that conforms with the description, and as
Mr. Perkins has not met with the bird the status of the species is somewhat doubtful.
44 At the suggestion of my friend Professor H. W. Henshaw we have made a careful study of the alcoholic material in the Museum, and
find the tongue o [parva to be distindtly tubular in form ; a fact which alone would at once remove it from the genus Oreomyza , and which at
the same time indicates its affinity with the tube-tonged Chlorodrepanis group. My observations of the bird alive, while collecting on Kauai,
convince me that its habits are those of the Chlorodrepanis rather than of Oreomyza.
[302]
DREPANIDfD/E.
47
fifth, or by the fourth, fifth and sixth feathers, the second shorter than the sixth; first
primary obsolete.
a. Plumage not red.
b. Under parts not yellow or greenish yellow; culmen about .50, tail
about 1.85.
C. Bill light colored ; breast white or buff}" white. Male: Above clear
olive grey faintly washed with olive green, which is most marked on the rump; nearly
white on the chin, becoming olive buffy on the breast; more yellowish on the abdomen,
with the sides of the body light smoky olive grey; lores and forehead buffy white.
Female: Similar, but duller. Young: With forehead, lores, superciliary stripe and
throat white. Length 4.40-4.65, wing 2.50-2.75, tail 1.75-1.85, culmen .42-.50, depth
of culmen .20, tarsus .78-.S5, toe .55. Hab. Kauai.
PI. XXIX., 9402. 85. O. bairdi Stejn. Akikihi.
CC. Bill dark colored ; below, whitish buff on the throat, becoming
greener and greyer on the lower breast ; lores sooty ; abdomen and under tail coverts
white with a yellowish wash; primaries and quills brownish. Female: Similar, but
duller in color. Young: Similar, but showing more buffy white about the base of the
bill and lores. Length 4.25-4.50, wing 2.60, tail 1.80-1.90, culmen .50, depth of bill
.20, tarsus .85-.90, toe .70. Hab. Hawaii.
PI. XXIX., 6664. 86. O. mana'45 (Wilson).
bb. Under parts, throat, etc., greener or yellower; bill and tail relatively
longer.
d. Yellowish olive green above; yellow of the forehead extending
farther back onto the crown ; crown and entire upper parts, including the edge of outer
web of primaries and tail feathers, light yellowish green; primaries and tail feathers
brownish black ; lower parts, including edge of wings, lemon yellow ; sides of body
yellowish olive. Female: Similar to adult male, but less bright yellow below (Roths¬
child). Quite you)ig: Greyish olive above, tail showing the most olive shade; median
and greater wing coverts tipped with buffy white, forming two distinct bands across
the wing; below, greyish white showing some yellow. Length about 4.50, wing 2.30,
tail 1.95, culmen .50-.55, depth of bill .18, tarsus .92, toe .65. Hab. Lanai.
87. O. monta'na (Wilson). Alauhiio.
dd. Olive green above, yellow of the forehead more restricted.
e. Broad dusky loral mark; bill stronger; color deeper olive
brown; more golden beneath. Adult male: Somewhat similar to adult C. chloris, but'
with the olive upper plumage darker, though tinged with yellow; forehead brighter
than the crown, and with an obvious though ill-defined yellowish streak over the
eye ; lores brownish black ; chin, cheeks, aurieulars and throat clear golden yellow,
which color pervades the breast and belly, becoming very pale, almost white on the
+5 See note following Chlorudrepnvis virens , page 46.
[.W3]
4S
BIRDS OP THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
abdomen; lower tail coverts pale yellow; wing coverts with distinct whitish marks of
considerable size. Female: Very unlike the male above described ; streak over the
eye and under parts yellowish white; sides of breast and flanks washed with olive gi'ey;
above, olive; the greater wing coverts with large greenish white tips. Young: Quite
young birds and nestlings are much like the females, but are browner above and of a
mottled appearance. Length 4.50-5.00, wing 2. 60-2. Si, tail 1.85-2.00, tarsus .80-. 86,
culmen .60-. 65 (Rothschild). Hub. Oahu.
88. O. maculata Cab.
ee. Loral mark not so pronounced ; greener above and paler
yellow below; bill a trifle slenderer; forehead, lores, cheeks, chin and under parts
bright lemon yellow; upper parts olive green, yellowest on the upper tail coverts;
sides of body washed with olive; quills and tail feathers brown externally, edged with
olive. Female: Similar to the male, but duller above and below. Young: Above grey
with an olive tinge, more greenish grey on the rump; indistinct whitish super-loral
stripe ; throat and centre of bod}^ light huffy grey, greyer on the sides, with a faint
wash of yellow ; a distinct whitish buff band formed by the tips of the greater wing
coverts. Length 4.50-4.65, wing 2.40-2.50, culmen .45-.50, depth of bill .15, tarsus
.82-. 85, toe .65. Hab. Maui.
PI. XXIX., 6684, 6685. 89. O. new'toni (Roths.).
aa. Plumage rich scarlet ; bill and feet light; head all round, back and lower
parts bright rich scarlet, darkest on the back, purest scarlet on the throat ; upper man¬
dible brownish grey above, darkest near the tip; under mandible whitish yellow; tar¬
sus light brown in skins, pink in life. Female: Back and head brownish grey with a
mixture of brownish dull scarlet, most apparent on the head and rump, outer edge of
wing and tail feathers; under parts greyish white tinged with salmon and dull scarlet.
Young males have more or less strong mixture of ferruginous brown or rufous above,
washed with deep brown along the sides of the body, more obvious in younger indi¬
viduals. Length 4.95-5.20, wing 2.60, tail 2.05-2.20, culmen .53— .55, depth of bill .17,
tarsus .85-. 90, toe .70. Hab. Molokai.
PI. XXVIII., 6681, 8089, 8088. 90. O. flam mea (Wilson). Kakawahie.
Genus LOXOPS Cabanis.
FIG. 6. L. COCCINEA.
Bill short and finch-like; culmen much shorter than the tarsus; wing moderate
length, falling considerably short of the tail, and not equal to the length of the tail
and tarsus combined ; bill bluish grey.
[304]
DREPA NIDIDsE.
49
a. General color red, foxy or orange ; no black on lores or forehead.
b. General color above, scarlet orange, dullest on the mantle ; wing coverts,
wing and tail feathers brownish black edged externally with dull scarlet orange; below,
uniform scarlet orange, brighter than the back. Female: Greyer on the crown; loral
region dusky whitish ; back greyish with olive tinge, olive most pronounced on the
rump and edge of wing and tail feathers ; chin grey ; breast greyish olive, greyer on
the sides of body. Young: Similar to female; bill paler than in adults. Length 4.25—
4.60, wing 2.40-2.50, tail 1.85-2.05, culmen .42, depth of bill .20, tarsus .77-79, toe .60.
Hab. Hawaii.
PI. XXVIII., 6648, 6642. . 91. I/, coccin'ea (Gmel.). Akep'a.
bb. General color above, orange or foxy.
C. Uniform orange, brightest on the breast; more yellow orange on the
rump; primaries and tail feathers blackish brown edged with orange, like the back.
Female: Similar, but duller. Young: Back of head and mantle decided grey with
slight olive tinge; rump and breast more olive; sides greyer olive, very similar to
young of L. coccinea. Length about 4.50, wing 2.60, tail 2.00, culmen .40, depth of bill
.20, tarsus .80, toe .67. Hab. Maui.
PI. XXVIII., 6638. 92. L. ochra'cea Roths.
CC. Body, red foxy ; lores blackish ; wings and tail olive brown ; wing
coverts, quills and tail red-edged ; inner edge of quills and under wing coverts white;
bill short, triangular, conic ; tip straight, acute, whitish ; feet brown ; tarsus nine
lines (Grey’s description). Gould says “that the whole of the plumage is rich rusty
red deepening into brownish red on the back . Length 4 inches, bill wing 2J,
tail tarsus f.” Hab. Oahu.
93. L. rufa46 (Blox.).
aa. With lores, a ring about the eye, and forehead smoky black; crown gam¬
boge yellow fading into rich olive and passing into olive green on the mantle and wing
coverts ; rump, tail coverts and edge of tail feathers brighter yellowish olive ; edge of
primaries like the back; lower parts, including the sides of head, bright gamboge yel¬
low, passing to olive yellow on the sides of the body; thighs smoky grey; wings and
tail blackish brown. Female: Similar, except more green in the yellow, and with
loral region not as well defined. Young: Greyish green above, grey with a very faint
yellowish green wash below; sometimes smoky tips to the feathers; lores and forehead
not well defined; bill lighter. Length 4.50-4.60, wing 2.40-2.50, tail 2.00-2.15, cul¬
men .43-45, depth of bill .20, tarsus .85, toe .60. Hab. Kauai.
PI. XXIX., 9353, 9361. 94. L. cseruleiros’tris47 (Wilson). Ou holowai.
*6 Since the above description was written I have had the pleasure of examining the Loxops in the British Museum collections and quite
agree with Mr. Rothschild in separating the Oahu species; and with Mr. Wilson in placing westenholmii , Roths., as a synonym of I., rufa
(Blox.).
47 Should be held sub-generically distinct from the other three members of the genus on account of the stronger bill, smoky loral patch
and general color which is always different from typical Loxops.
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vop. I., No. 3. — 4.
5°
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
Genus HEMIGNA'THUS Lichtenstein.
Bill very long, slender and curved, with the tongue as long as the bill ; feet
reaching to the tip of the tail (in the skin); tip of the wings falling short of the tip of
the tail by less than the length of the hind toe and claw.
a. Back dull olive green; . species has very inconspicuous plumage;
the whole upper surface and wing feathers on the outside are dull olive green, the
inner webs of the flight feathers dull brown. The under surface is light but still dull;
throat and centre of the abdomen, as well as the under tail coverts, pale buff. A bright
yellow superciliary stripe is very conspicuous, especially as diredlly underneath it from
the beak to the eye there is a dark brown streak. The bow-shaped, curved bill, which
terminates in a very fine, almost hair-like point, is exactly half as long as the body,
and the under mandible is three lines shorter than the upper. The whole length, from
the point of the bill to the end of the tail is 7 inches, bill 1%, tail ijkb tarsus 11 lines,
middle toe and claw 9 lines ( Excerpt from Rothschild’s translation of Richtenstein’s
description). Hab. Oahu; rare or extinct. (No specimens in the Museum.)
95. H. lichtensteini48 Wilson. Kipi.
aa. Yellowish olive green above; under parts yellower.
b. Smaller size; bill shorter; above all over a beautiful bright olive green
with a yellowish cast, yellowest on the rump, and with a distinct yellow mark over the
eye ; throat, sides of face and breast duller olive green than the back, fading into dis¬
tinct whitish on the abdomen and under tail coverts, varied only with an olive wash;
primaries and tail feathers brown with olive on the outer edges; lores smoky black;
wings falling short of the tip of the tail by less than .50 (in the skin). Female: Above,
greyish olive green; more olive green on the rump; lores blackish, above which is a
pale superciliary stripe; chin whitish or greyish white with a yellowish tinge, becom¬
ing yellower on the chest and under parts, with olive tinge along the sides. Young:
Similar to female. Length 6.25-6.50, wing 3.00-3.15, tail 1.80-1.85, chord of culmen
1.25-1.38, tarsus .87-. 92, toe .80-. 85, depth of bill .20, width of bill .25. Hab. Hawaii.
PI. XXIX., 9421. 96. H. obscur'us (Gmel.). Akialoa.
48 Since the first reference in Gray’s synonomy (Cat. Birds Trop. Isds., p. 9) for Drepanis ( Hemigna th u s) ellisiana is given “ Certhia obscura
(nec Gmel.) Vieill. Ois. dor. t. 53?”. I prefer to consider that it is the reference to the exact place in the volume cited that Gray was in doubt
about, and that he did not intend questioning the name Certhia obscura. That being the case Drepanis (Hemignathus) ellisiana will become a
synonym of Hemignathus obscurus. Hence it seems that Mr. Wilson's name //. lichtensteini should stand.
[306]
DRE PA NIDIDFE.
5i
bb. Larger size, bill and wing longer.
C. Chord of cnlmen not less than 1.95, averaging 2.15; above, bright
olive yellow, yellowest on the rump ; on crown and forehead the feathers have dark
centres with olive edges which give a “scaled” appearance to the region ; a distinct
superciliary stripe ; under parts from chin to tail yellow with an olive tinge ; wings
and tail brown edged with olive on the outer webs; lores black. Female: Quite differ¬
ent from the male; above, grey with an olive tinge; rump yellowish olive; head scaled
as in the male ; super-loral line ding}' yellowish white ; lores black ; throat greyish
white; breast yellowish white with an olive green wash. Young: Have less yellow
below and over the eye, scarcely any olive on the back, which is greyish ; scales on the
crown less noticeable. Length 7.00-7.50, wing 3.40-3.55, tail 2.10—2.25, chord of cul-
men 1.95-2.35, tarsus 1.05-1.10, toe 1.00. Hab. Kauai.
PI. XXIX., 8130. 97. H. pro'cerus Cab. Kauai Akialoa.
CC. Chord of cnlmen not exceeding 1.95 (?). Above, yellowish olive
green somewhat mixed with greyish brown on the head where the bases show' through
Quills dark brown edged with the color of the back ; rectrices the same. Below,
yellowish olive green much less bright than on the back and with little yellow7 in it,
shading into olive buff on the vent, and with a brown pale shade on the throat, etc.
Length 6.00 inches in the skin, wing 3.30, tail 2.10, tarsus 1.93, chord of cnlmen 1.90.
Female: Smaller, more greenish olive, and less bright ; superciliary stripe faint and
greenish. Chin, throat and middle of abdomen buffish yellow (From Rothschild’s
description). Hab. Lanai.
98. H. lanaien'sis Roths. Lanai Akialoa.
Genus HETERORHYN CHUS Rothschied.
Upper mandible much longer than the longer; tongue not as long as the upper
mandible.
a. The under mandible curved ; smaller size.
b. Head yellow; no decided superciliary stripe.
C. Color of the forehead bright deep gamboge yellow, not extending
over the crown, sharply defined from the greyish olive of the neck and back ; wings
and tail blackish brown with olive outer edges to the feathers; lores black, and
[307]
con-
52
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
nested by a narrow black band across the forehead; throat and chest rich gamboge
yellow; abdomen whitish with a yellowish cast; flanks olive grey; edge of wing yel¬
lowish. Female: Above, olive green, a yellowish super-loral stripe; lores dusky grey;
chin and throat yellow; centre of lower parts pale yellow; sides olive grey. Young:
Similar to female. Length 5.00-5.25, wing 2.95-3.00, tail 1.80-1.95, chord of culmen
.95-1.05, tarsus .85-.90, toe .75-.80. Hab. Maui.
PI. XXIX., 6620. 99. H. affi'nis Roths.
CC. Gamboge yellow of the forehead more or less indefinable from the
fine olive yellow of the back into which it gradually merges, olive yellow purest on the
rump; primaries and tail feathers brown edged with the olive of the back; lores and a
narrow line above the bill a deep black ; throat, breast and sides of the head a bright
gamboge yellow, brighter than the forehead ; breast with a slight olive tinge ; abdomen
and under tail coverts white. Female: Above, grey with an olive cast, most pro¬
nounced on the head and rump. Below, dusky white, greyest on the sides of the body
and throat. Young: Similar to females, the males showing yellow on the throat at an
early age. Length about 5.50, wing 2.85-3.20, tail 1.85-2.05, culmen .95-1.10, tarsus
.90, toe .80. Hab. Kauai.
PI. XXIX., 6633, 6636. 100. H. hanape'pe (Wilson). Nukupu'u.
bb. Head green; a very distinct superciliary stripe. Male specimen in
Paris Museum: Above, olive green, darker and more olive on the back; lighter, more
green on the head, wing and tail coverts ; lores and line behind the eye brownish black.
Across the forehead and above the eyes conspicuous orange yellow superciliary stripe;
Quills deep brown, outer web edged with greenish yellow; chin, throat and upper breast
bright orange yellow; abdomen yellow and fading into pale greenish grey on the vent
and under tail coverts. Adult female or immature male in the Frankfort Museum:
Above, dull brownish olive tinged with greenish on the top of the head, rump and
upper tail coverts and on the edge of the quills and tail feathers. Lores dusky ; a
somewhat ill-defined but distinct superciliary stripe ; sides of the head and throat
yellowish. An immature male in the Leiden Museum is somewhat similar to the
Frankfort specimen. Length 5.50, culmen 1.10, wing 2.95, tarsus .76, tail 2.9(A).
(Condensed from Rothschild’s descriptions in Avifauna of Laysan, etc.) Hab.
Oahu ; extinct.
101. H. lu'cidus (Licht.).
aa. Gonys of under mandible straight and strong at the base; above, olive
green, brightest on the rump, and yellowest on the head; lores black; below rich gam¬
boge yellow on the chin, gradually fading into olive yellow on the sides of the abdomen
and under tail coverts ; under wing coverts with yellowish shade of white; quills and pri¬
maries brown edged with olive. Female : Above, greenish olive grey, with olive bright¬
est on the rump ; throat and breast pale yellow shading into greyish white, with olive
[308]
DRFPANID/DAl.
53
infusion on the belly and flanks. Voting duller and greyer. Length 5.50-5.75, wing
3.20-3.35, tail 1.85-2.00, eulmen .85-1.03, tarsus .90-96, toe .85. Hab. Hawaii.
PI. XXIX., 6632, 6630. 102. H. wil'soni-o Roths.
Genus PSLUDONESTOR Rothschild.
FIG. IO. P. XANTHOPHRYS.
Upper parts with grey bases to the feathers, and greenish olive ends, giving the
back a somewhat greenish grey cast, more inclined to olive on the rump; broad super-
loral stripe light yellow; lores dusky, extending backward through the eye; breast
canary yellow ; abdomen yellowish white ; greyish olive on the flanks ; under tail coverts
with a yellowish tinge ; upper mandible blackish ; lower mandible whitish ; bill strongly
hooked; gonys much curved. Female and young : Duller above; yellow of throat not
so pronounced. Length 5.15-5.50, wing 2.70-2.90, tail 1. 75-1. 90, eulmen .65-.S5,
depth of bill .55-. 65, tarsus .8 $-.87, toe .80. Hab. Maui.
PI. XXIX., 6607. 103. P. xantho'phrys Roths.
Genus PSITTACIROS TRA Te MMINCK.
Head and upper neck, all around, a rich light gamboge yellow, sharply defined
against the greenish grej^ of the mantle and olive grey of the chest; rump olive green;
tail and primaries dusky brown edged with olive green; olive on the sides and flanks;
abdomen and under tail coverts whitish grey ; bill and feet pink ; upper mandible ex¬
ceeding the lower usually by about .15. Female: Upper parts, including head and
neck, uniform olive green ; greyish on the neck ; under parts greyish white, washed
with 3’ellow ; under tail coverts white. Young: Similar to the female, but more uniform
grey above and below, except the abdomen, which is whitish; bill dark. Length 6.30-
49 The above charadlers are sufficient to separate zullsoui from its fellows, sub-generically at least, if not entitling it to generic rank.
[309]
54
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP .
6.60, wing 3.80-4.00, tail 2.50-2.60, oilmen .55-. 60, tarsns .87-.90, toe .90-.95. Hab%
Kauai, Molokai, Lanai, Hawaii, Oahu. 50
PI. XXIX., 6612. 104. P. psitta'cea (Gmel.). Ou'.
#
Genus LOXIOIDFS Oustai.et.
Head and neck to the mantle, and breast to the middle of the body, uniform
bright gamboge yellow; back and upper coverts ashy grey, decidedly ashy on the
rump; wing coverts, primaries and tail feathers dusky brown or blackish edged with
yellowish olive; abdomen and under tail coverts dusky whitish with a bluish cast.
Female: Similar, but with the yellow showing a brownish wash ; with a greenish cast
to the under parts. Length about 7.50, wing 3-55-3-75, tail 2.55-265, depth of bill
.60, tarsus .95-1.00, toe .75. Hab. Hawaii.
105. L- bailleu'i Oust. Pali'la.
Genus TFLFSPI2A Wilson.
Head all around, neck and under parts to the middle of the abdomen bright
yellow, brightest on the head ; back bright olive yellow with varying blackish shaft
streaks; rump grejr with some olive cast at times; webs of primaries and tail feathers
brown; secondaries blackish edged with yellowish olive; wing coverts deep brown
broadly" edged with yellowish olive; bill horn color. Immature : Feathers of the head
deep brown with yellowish edges ; upper surface with centre of feathers deep brown or
blackish edged with light brown ; rump uniform brown ; tail and primaries brown
edged with olive yellow; throat and breast yellow with brown shaft stripes; centre of
the abdomen white ; sides and under tail coverts brown, or olive brown, and with brown
shaft stripes. Young: Similar to immature birds, except yellow reduced to the slight¬
est tinge about the head and wings. Length 6.25-6.50, wing 3.25-3.40, tail 2.55-2.60,
culmen .65-. 70, depth of bill .47-. 50, tarsus .95-1.00, toe .95. Hab.5' Laysan.
Pi. XXIX., 8731. 106. T. can'tans51 Wilson. Laysan Finch.
5° In Odtober, 1899, I saw a specimen in the bushes up Moanalua valley which I believe to have been the above species, though of course
I cannot be positive of the identity. Since the preparation of the above, Mr. Rothschild (Birds of Laysan, Part III., page 193) has separated
the Oahu form from the Hawaii bird, giving the principal differential character as “having the middle of the breast and belly, the feathers
of the tibia and under tail coverts whitish ; whereas, the adult males of the Hawaii bird “have the under parts olive green merging into whit¬
ish only in the middle of the lower abdomen.” The name given to “the Honolulu Ou” is Psittacirostra o livacca, Roths.
s1 With a good series of birds before me I am unable to separate cantans , Wilson, from flavissima 4 Roths. The latter seems to be only
fully mature specimens of the former, and in a plumage which requires some time for the individual to assume. Diredtor Wm. T. Brigham
also informs me that specimens brought from Laysan and kept in his aviary for a long time passed through several of the intermediate stages
on the way from cantans to flavissima before they were accidentally killed.
[310]
D RE PA NID ID Ai.
Genus RHODACANTHIS Rothschild.
a. Head, throat and under parts throughout rich scarlet orange; breast purer
orange tinge; under tail coverts and flanks showing some grey; mantle brown; rump
orange brown ; tail and wing feathers brown, with some orange brown ; wing and tail
feathers brown with orange brown edgings to the outer webs; bill bluish grey.
Female: Above, greenish olive with dark grey bases to the feathers ; more olive on the
rump and upper tail coverts; tail and wing feathers with olive edges; breast showing
grey as the under color, with yellowish olive edges, yellowest on chin and upper breast;
centre of the breast whitish with but faint yellowish wash; flanks greenish yellow.
Young: Similar to females; young males brighter below. Length about 7.50, wing
4.20-4.40, tail 2.90—3.00, culmen .80-.85, depth of bill .58-. 61, tarsus 1. 00-1.05, toe
1. 00. Hab. Hawaii.
PI. XXIX., 6603, 6601. 107. R. palmeri Roths.
aa. Head, neck and under parts generally apple yellow, brightest and richer
on the head and neck, and greener on the under parts ; upper parts ash}’ green, becom¬
ing bright green on the lower back, rump and upper tail coverts. Wings and tail dull
blackish brown, feathers externally margined with green; bill blue-brown; legs grey;
iris brown. Total length about 7.50, culmen .72, wings 3.80, tail 2.50, tarsus 1.00.
Adult female : Differs from the male in being much greener and duller in color, only
the forehead being yellow; the crown similarly colored to the back; under parts dull
yellowish green. Palmer obtained a small series in the district of Kona at the same
place where R. palmeri was first collected. The smaller size and yellow head of the
adult male serves to distinguish this species very easily from the much larger R. palmeri
with its orange red head in the adult male. Neither Wilson nor Perkins met with this
bird (Rothschild in Part III., Avifauna of Laysan, etc.). Hab. Hawaii.
108. R. flaviceps Roths.
[311]
56
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
Genus CHXO RIDOPS Wilson.
FIG. 14. C. KONA.
Female: Above, decided olive green, more olive on the upper tail coverts, and
with dark centres to the feathers of the head, producing a scaled appearance; under
parts of the abdomen and flanks yellowish olive ; under tail coverts whitish ; quills and
tail feathers brown with olive edgings on the outer web ; bill extremely thick and
clumsy. (Male probably brighter?) Length 6.00-6.50, wing 3.30-3.45, culmen .70,
depth of bill .70, width of bill .60, tarsus ,85-. 90, toe .85. Hab. Hawaii.
109. C. ko'tia Wilson.
Family MBLIPHAGID^.— Honey -EATERS.
Genera.
With no white feathers about the eye; nostrils operculate; first primary about
half the length of the second ; secondaries three-fourths the length of the wing ; tip of
the wing formed by the fourth, fifth and sixth primaries. (Sub-family Melipliagirue.)
a. Smaller; wing less than 5.00; tail black or brownish black; with or without
pectoral tufts . .(Page 56.) Moho.52
aa. Larger; wing more than 5.00; tail brown or greenish brown.
(Page 58.) Chaetop'tila.
Genus MOHO Lesson.
a. With no yellow pectoral tufts; tail feathers uniform blackish without any
trace of white on the outer pair; crown black with a greyish cast; upper surface brown
52 Since it is doubtful if Moho should ever have been set aside, to accord with the Stricklan-iian code, and since it is certain that by the
A. O. XL code Moho would stand against Acnilocercus , it is preferable to use the former name for this genus.
L312]
MEL I PH A GIDAE.
0/
or brownish black with faint white shaft stripes on the mantle; upper tail coverts
rusty brown ; wing and tail feathers blackish brown ; throat and neck to chest black with
white shafts and bars ; under wing coverts mostly white ; thighs yellow ; breast uniform
with the back ; sides of the bod}' less rusty brown than the upper tail coverts ; bill and
feet black. Female: Similar to male, but smaller. Young: Differing from the adult
in having the tibiae blackish instead of yellow, and with the greyish shaft stripe to the
feathers of back and breast indistinct or wanting. Length 7.50-9.00 (according to
tail), wing 3.70-4.00, tail 3.60-4.25, culmen 1.10-1.15, depth of bill .25, tarsus 1.25-
1.35, toe .95. Hab. Kauai.
PI. XXIX., 5463. no. M. braccatus (Cassix). Oo aa.
aa. With yellow pectoral tufts, and more or less white on the outer pair of
tail feathers.
b. With elongated yellow ear tufts, uniform in color with the few yellow
feathers under the wing and the under tail coverts ; a faint edge of whitish on the outer
margin of the outer pair of tail feathers; remainder of tail uniform glossy black, like
the primaries ; crown and rump black ; back, chest and abdomen black, with conspicu¬
ous white shafts to the feather; throat black; bill and feet black; central tail feathers
with weak shafts; long and plume-like. Female similar!?). Length about 11.00,
wing 4.55-4.75, tail 5.00-6.25, culmen 1.32, depth of bill .30, tarsus 1. 50-1. 55, toe 1.05.
Hab. Molokai.
hi. M. bish'opi (Roths.).
bb. Without elongated yellow ear tufts ; tail with prominent white tips to
the outer feathers.
C. With only the two outer tail feathers with white tips ; head, rump,
back, wing coverts and lower parts deep black with some gloss ; upper mantle, lower
part of the abdomen and inner edge of secondaries inclined to umber brown ; tufts
under the wings and under tail coverts bright golden yellow; primaries and tail
feathers black; bill and feet black. Female: Similar, but smaller. Young: With no
yellow beneath the wings. Length S 12.50-10.50$ , wing 4.85-4.90, tail 7.50, culmen
1. 15, depth of bill .25, tarsus 1.40, toe 1.00. Hab. Hawaii.
PI. XXIX., 5457. 112. M. nobilis (Merrem.). Oo.
CC. All the tail feathers, except the middle pair, tipped with white.
General color sooty black; tail brown, all tipped as above; centre pair somewhat nar¬
rower than the others and gradually diminishing to the apical third of their length
into fine hair-like, or filamentous, upturned points; axillte or under surface of the
shoulder white; flanks and under tail coverts bright yellow; bill and legs black.
Total length 12 inches, bill it), wing 4^4, tail 644, tarsus ib (Gould). Hab. Oahu;
rare or extinct. (Xo specimen in the Museum.)
113. M. apiealis Gould. Yellow-tufted Honey-eater.
[313]
58
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP .
Genus CHiETOP TILA SCLATER.
Tail greenish brown ; feathers of the forehead, crown and back of the neck, with
whitish shaft stripe, blackish webs and tipped with olive — black predominating on the
crown — most olive on the neck ; lores and ear -coverts blackish ; an indistinct grey
superciliary stripe; throat dusk}* white, washed with yellow; breast dingy white with
black stripes ; abdomen and under tail coverts with fewer stripes and more olive than
the chest ; flanks and upper tail coverts oehraceous black with white shafts and termi¬
nal spots ; primaries and secondaries brown edged with olive ; under wing coverts
brown. Length about 13.50, wing 5.75, tail 6.65, culmen 1.25, depth of bill .31, width
.45, tarsus 1.60, toe 1.15, hallux with claw 1.02. Hab. Hawaii; rare or extinct.
PI. XXX.. Frontispiece. 114. C. angustiplu ma (Peale).
Family SYLVIID^B. — Warblers, Etc.
Genus.
Bill slender, but rather wide and depressed ; wing long and flat, about equal to
the tail in length, with a very small bastard primary not extending beyond the wing
coverts; birds not migrator}” no white on the tail (Sub-family Sylviince)\ rectal
bristles fairly well developed; wing more than 2.70; second primary longer than the
fifth ; upper parts brownish with greyish cast ; a faint buffy white super-loral stripe;
outer tail feathers more than .25 shorter than the longest pair.
(Page 58.) Acroceph alus.
Genus ACROCEPH ALUS Naumann.
Upper parts brownish with a greyish cast, greyest on the neck; under parts
buffy white including the edge of wing, and a super-loral stripe ; wing and tail feathers
brownish ; feet black ; bill horn-brown ; nostrils rounded and exposed ; sexes similar.
Young (? ). Length about 5.65, wing 2.30-2.40, tail 2.30-2.40, culmen .60, tarsus .75-
.90, toe .72, depth of bill .15. Hab. Laysan.
PI. XXVII.. 8735. 115. A. familia'ris Roths. Miller Bird.
[314]
TURDIDsE,
59
Family TURDID^F. — Thrushes, Etc.
Genus.
The young different from the adults, having the under parts spotted; tarsus for
the greater part of its length without transverse seutulae, being booted ; bill somewhat
depressed, with a few rectal bristles; gonys about one-third the length of the com-
misure of the beak (Sub-family Myadestinee')\ inner toe about equal to the hind toe;
nostrils exposed and not hidden by bristles, and situated in a wide oval groove ; eulmen
not longer than the hind claw; second primarv longer than the secondaries; bill with
a distinct sub-terminal notch . (Page 59.) Piiaeornis.
Gents PH.5J0RNIS Sclater.
a. Uniform in color above, brown or hair-brown, with faint olive wash,
b. Very conspicuous buffy white mark on the outer tail feathers.
C. Wing less than 4.00; feet light flesh-color; above, dull brown with
an olive cast, most pronounced on the middle of the rump and mantle ; throat and lores
bluish grey ; chest bluish ash or grey, sometimes mottled with blackish ; abdomen
and under tail coverts buff-white ; outer web of primaries with very dull brown edge;
inner web edged so as to form a dull buffy patch at base of feathers ; outer tail feathers
edged with whitish or fulvous on the inner web ; ends of primary coverts blackish,
forming a patch. Young: Feathers above, brown with broad blackish borders to the
tip, and before this a creamy buff, more or less triangular spot ; feathers of lower parts
ashv brown at the base, then lighter cream color and broadly bordered with blackish
brown, these borders blackest and broadest on the breast (Rothschild). Length about
6.15, wing 3.35, tail 2.45, eulmen .70, depth of bill .20, width of bill .22, tarsus 1.30,
toe .95, gonys .32. Hab. Kauai.
PI. XXYII., 6693.
[315]
116. P. palm eri Roths. Puaiohi.
6o
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
CC. Wing more than 4.00; feet dark colored; above, dull brown with
a rusty olive tinge ; sides of head and ear coverts tawny, always more or less mottled
with rusty and grey ; quills blackish, edged externally with rusty olive, which color
forms a spot at the base of the inner primaries, below which the blackish tips of
the greater wing coverts form a less pronounced spot; inner edge of the wing feathers
without buffy patch; outer edge of each primary for almost its entire length rusty;
lower parts dull smoky grey in appearance, shading into whitish on the abdomen; tail
feathers like back, outer three pairs tipped with white or buffy white, pronounced on
the tips and gradually fading into the ground color of the web; feet dark brown.
Female similar. Young: Similar to P. obscura , but can be distinguished by the mark¬
ings on the outer web of primaries, the white of the tail, and the broader bill. Length
7.50-8.50, wing 4.05-4.18, tail 3.20-3.30, culmen .50-.55, depth of bill .22, width of
bill .40, tarsus 1. 25-1. 32, toe .95, gonys .25. Hab. Kauai.
PL XXVII., 9385. 117. P. myadesti'na Stejn. Kamau'.
bb. With no conspicuous white markings on the outer tail feathers.
d. Wing 3.50-3.75 ; color lighter below ; a distinct black patch near
the base of the outer web of inner primaries; above, olive brown with a faint wash of
greyish; head darker; primaries and tail feathers brown (quills and webs practically
the same color) , with the edge of the outer webs rusty or rusty brown ; outer web of
the inner primaries and the secondaries with a distinct black patch, bordered in front
and behind by the rusty edges of the feather ; chin and throat pale grey, the grey pass¬
ing to wdiite on the abdomen; under tail coverts buffy white; wing pattern on the
inner web of primaries marked at all ages; no white on outer tail feathers. Female
similar. Young: Similar to allied species, but with the wing pattern on the inner web,
no white on the tail, and with the black patch on the outer edge of inner primaries as
in adults. Leugth about 7.00-7.50, wing 3.50-3.75, tail 3.25-3.30, culmen .57-.60,
depth of bill .22, width of bill .30, tarsus 1. 25-1. 30, toe .95, gonys .27. Hab. Lanai,
Molokai.53
PI. XXVII., 8094, 8096. 118. P. lanaiensis Wilson. Olomau.
dd. Wing not less than 3.90; color darker below; above, dusky
olive brown (fading to hair-brown — Mills specimens); forehead greyer; under parts
ash-grey ; white on the abdomen and under tail coverts ; primaries and tail feathers
brown, shaded with dusky olive; quills of tail feathers umber brown above; base of
secondaries showing a rusty spot ; pattern on the inner web of quills scarcely discerni¬
ble; bill and feet blackish ; no white on the tail feathers. Female similar. Young:
Spotted like young thrushes; each feather above is bordered with blackish, and before
the blackish border is a more or less triangular buff spot ; the feathers below are buffy
white and broadly bordered with blackish brown (Rothschild).
S3 The form from Molokai should probably be separated as a sub-species. No specimens from Molokai at hand.
[316]
TURD I DAL,
6r
Length 6.90-8.00, wing 3.95-4.00, tail 2.85-2.95, culmen .55~.62, depth of bill .22-.25,
width of bill .30-.35, tarsus 1. 22-1. 30, toe .97, gonys .26. Hab. Hawaii.
PI. XXVII., 6615, 9922, 9923. 119. P. obscu'ra (Gmel.). Oman.
aa. Upper parts olive brown, extremities of the feathers much lighter color;
tail and wings brown; bill bristled at the base; length 7.50 (Bloxham). Nothing
farther is known of this evidently extinct species than is given above, and which is
taken from Bloxham’s account of the birds secured on the voyage of the Blonde , where
it is given as “ Turdus sandvicensis (var.), from Oahu.”
120. P. oahuen'sis Wilson & Evans.
[317]
KEY TO THE HIGHER ORDERS.
a. All four toes united by a web or membrane. . . . Page Order Steganopodes.
aa. Hind toe. when present, not connected in an" way with the other toes.
b. Nostrils pecuiiariv tubular, and feet webbed . . . i Page to. Order Tubinares.
bb. Nostrils not tubular, or feet not webbed.
C. Feet webbed; cutting edge of the bill dentate; bill as in ducks, geese, etc.
Page r 6. i Order Anseres.
CC. Cutting edge of the bill not fringed or dentate, or else feet not webbed.
d. Toes distinct!’.- webbed; legs inserted well forward towards the middle . f
the bdv, which is held horizontal . 'Page = . Order Longipennes.
dd. Toes not distinctlv webbed, or else tarsus longer than the tail.
e. Lower portion f thigh naked. - r else hill long and with grooves ex¬
tending along the 'ides.
f. Lores naked; hind toe long and inserted on the same level with
the middle toe . Page 20. ) Order Herodiones.
ff. Lores feathered; hind toe. when present, never exceeding the
length of the lower mandible.
g. Hind toe linger; inserted on a level with middle toe when long
O O O
as the under mandible head with frontal shield 1 . > Page 22. Order Paludicolae.
gg. Kind toe shorter; if present, inserted m re r les above the
level of the middle toe . ' Page 24. ) < Jrder Limacolae.
ee. Lower porti »n of the thighs feathered: the bill, if lengthened, not
grooved along the sides.
h. Bill stronglv hooked, with a distinct naked cere at case f
upper mandible . 1 Page 52. * Order Raptores.
hb. Bill not stronglv he ked. and without naked cere at the
base of upper mandible; or. if with a cere, it is soft and swollen in life.
i. Hind tee small and elevated.
• Page to. » Order GaUinae.
ii. Kind toe alwavs well developed and on the same level
with the middle one > mainly perching birds ».
j. With soft swollen cere at the base f upper mandible.
( Page 31. ) Order Columbae.
jj. Without a soft swollen cere: toes, three in front, one
behind, and on the same level: not united by web. and tarsus equal to or longer than
the hind toe with claw . 1 Page ta. Urder Passeres.
TABLE SHOWING THE DISTRIBUTION OF BIRDS
IN THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
The o denotes its occurrence ; + rare or extinct; ? uncertain or questionable record.
Name.
Hawaii.
Maui.
Lanai.
Molokai.
Oahu.
Kauai.
Niihau.
Laysan.
_
Lisiansky.
French Frig¬
ates.
Midway.
Accidental or
wide-ranging.
Larus barrovianus .... .... ....
0
0
0
0
0
californicus ... .... ....
, .
0
0
delawarensis .... .... ....
, ,
0
0
0
franklinii .... .... ....
. .
0
0
Philadelphia1 .... .... ....
0
0
vSterna fuliginosa • . .... ....
0
0
0
0
0
0
. .
0
0
0
0
0
lunata .... .... .... ....
0
0
0
. .
0
melanauchen . . .... ....
0
0
Anous stolidus .... .... ....
0
, ,
, ,
0
0
0
0
, ,
0
, .
0
Microanous hawaiiensis .... ....
0
. .
, ,
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Gygis alba kittlitzi .... .... ....
0
0
. .
0
Diomedea nigripes .... ....
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
immutabilis • • • • .... ....
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Ajstrelata phaeopygia2 .... ....
?
0
0
hypoleuca .... .... ....
0
0
Bulweria bulweri . . .... ....
0
. .
, .
. .
0
0
. .
0
Priofinus cuneatus .... .... ....
0
0
0
0
Puffinus nativitatis .... ....
0
. .
0
newelli . . .... .... ....
. •
0
, ,
. .
. .
0
Oceanodroma castro3 .... ....
0
?
. .
. .
0
fuliginosa .... .... ....
6
Phalacrocorax plagicus .... ....
O
0
Phaethon rubricauda. . . .... ....
0
0
0
O
lepturus .... .... ....
0
0
. .
0
0
0
0
. .
. •
. •
. •
0
Sula cyanops . . .... .... ....
O
0
0
0
0
piscator .... .... ....
• •
• •
• •
0
• •
0
O
0
0
0
0
sula .... .... .... ....
0
0
0
0
Fregata aquila .... .... ....
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
O
0
0
0
0
Mprcraimpr sprrntnr . .... ....
0
0
O
Anas boscas • • • • .... • • • •
O
0
wyvilliana .... .... ....
0
0
>
0
0
laysanensis • • • • • • • • • • • •
O
Nettion crecca • • • • • • • • • • • •
O
0
Querquedula circia .... ....
. •
O
1 Since the foregoing pages were in print Mr. Rothschild has published a record of the taking of a single specimen of this small gull at
Poli-hula lake, on Kauai, on March 15, 1891, by Mr. Palmer. See Avifauna of Laysan, etc.. Part III., p. 286.
2 There seems to be some reason for separating the Hawaiian form from the Galapagos form under the name .-Estrela la p/ieropygia
sandvicensis , Ridgway. More material is required to thoroughly establish the sub-species.
3 In the text this species is given as O. cryptolencura. That name has been recently found to be a synonym for Oceanodroma castro
( Harcourt).
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 3. — 5. I
(65)
66
BIRDS OF THE HAWAIIAN GROUP.
TABLE OF DISTRIBUTION. — Continued.
Name.
Hawaii.
Maui.
Lanai.
Molokai.
Oahu .
Kauai.
Niihau.
—
c3
'/}
a
h4
Lisiansky .
French Frig-
ates .
Midway.
Accidental or
wide-ranging.
Charitonetta albeola .... .... ....
o
o
o
Spatula clypeata ... .... ....
o
o
o
o
# .
. .
o
Mareca americana .... .... ....
o
o
Dafila acuta .... .... ....
o
o
o
o
o
. .
o
Chen hyperboreus .... .... ....
. .
o
o
o
Branta canadensis minima.. ••••
?
o
' . .
o
nigricans . .... ....
?
o
o
o
Nesochen sandvicensis .... ....
o
Plegadis guarauna .... .... ....
* •
. .
o
. .
o
• .
o
Demiegretta sacra. . .... ....
?
Nycticorax nycticorax naevius . . • • • •
o
o
o
o
o
o
. .
6
Pennula ecaudata- • .... ••••
t
Porzanula palmeri .... .... ....
o
Gallinula sandvicensis • • • . • • • •
o
o
?
o
o
o
o
Porphyrio melanotis • • • • • • • • • • • •
. .
. .
. •
. .
o
Fulica alai .... .... • • • .
o
o
?
o
o
. .
Phalaropus lobatus • • • . • • • • • • • •
. .
. .
. .
. .
o
o
Crymophilus fulicarius .... • • • •
o
o
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
o
. .
. .
* .
o
Himantopus knudseni. • • • • • • • • •
o
o
o
o
o
o
. .
Gallinago delicata • • • • • • • •
?
Tringa acuminata • • • • • • • • • • • •
o
o
o
o
americana • • • • .... • • • •
o
o
maculata . . .... .... • • • •
o
o
Heteractitis incanus • • • • • • • •
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Limosa lapponica baueri .... • • • •
• .
o
o
. •
o
o
Calidris arenaria... .... ••••
o
o
. *
o
o
o
Numenius tahitiensis- • • • • • • • • • •
o
o
. .
o
o
o
o
o
. .
. .
o
o
Charadrius dominicus fulvus • • • •
o
o
?
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Squatarola squatarola • . • • • • • • • •
o
o
Arenaria interpres • • • • • • • •
o
o
?
o
o
o
?
o
o
o
o
o
Lophortyx californica • • • • • • • • • •
o
o
Phasianus torquatus • • • • • • • •
o
o
• .
. .
o
o
versicolor .... • • • • • • • •
. •
. .
. .
o
Turtur chinensis. . . • • • • • • • •
o
o
o
. .
. .
o
Circus hudsonius .... • • • ■ • • • •
. .
. .
. .
* .
o
o
Buteo solitarius. ... • • • • • • • •
o
Asio accipitrinus sandvicensis . . • • • •
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Alauda arvensis • • . • • • • • • • •
o
Corvus hawaiiensis • • • • • • • • • • • •
o
Chasiempis sclateri • • • • • • • •
o
sandvicensis • • • • • • • • • • • •
o
Rayi .
• •
• •
• •
• •
o
Aeridotheres tristis • • • • • • • • • • • •
o
o
o
o
o
o
Passer domesticus • • • • • • • •
o
. .
. .
. .
o
Carpodacus mexicanus obscurus • • • •
o
o
o
o
Munia nisoria •••• •••• ••••
o
o
. .
. .
o
Drepanis pacifica • • • • • • • • • • • •
t
Drepanorhamphus funerea- • ••••
o
Vestiaria coccinea •••• •••• ••••
o
o
o
o
o
o
Palmeria dolei .... • • • • • • • •
o
o
TABLE OF DISTRIBUTION .
TABLE OF DISTRIBUTION. — Continued.
Name.
Hawaii.
Maui.
o3
o3
Molokai.
Oahu.
Kauai.
1
Niihau.
Himatione sanguinea . . .... ....
0
0
0
0
0
0
freethi .... .... ....
Ciridops anna • .... .... ....
t
Chlorodrepanis stejnegeri. • • ....
0
chloridoides .... .... ....
0
wilsoni .... .... ....
0
kalaana • • • .... .... ....
. .
0
chloris • • • • .... ....
. .
• •
0
virens .... .... • • • • • • • •
0
parva • • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
Viridonia sagittirostris • .... ....
0
Oreomyza bairdi ... .... ....
* *
0
mana .... .... .... ....
0
montana • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
maculata . . .... .... ....
0
newtoni .... .... ....
0
flammea • • • • • • • . • • • • • • •
* •
0
Loxops coccinea • • • • • • • • • • •
0
ochracea • . • • • • • • • • • • •
0
rufa • • •••• •••• • • • •
. .
• •
t
cseruleirostris .... .... . • • •
0
Hemignathus lichtensteini. • • • • •
t
obscurus . .... • • • • • • • •
0
procerus .... • • • • • • • •
0
lanaiensis • • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
Heterorhynchus affinis • • • • • • • •
0
hanapepe. . • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
lucidus •••• • • • • • • • •
t
wilsoni ... • • • • •••• • • • •
0
Pseudonestor xanthoplirys • • • • • •
0
Psittacirostra olivacea4 • • • • • • • • •
0
psittacea • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
0
0
• •
0
Loxioides bailleui • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
Telespiza cantans • • • • • • • • •
• •
Rhodacanthis palmeri • • • • • • • • • •
0
flaviceps • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
Cbloridops kona • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
Moho braccatus • • • ■ • • • • • • •
0
bishopi •••• • • • • • • • • • • • •
• •
0
nobilis • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
apicalis • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• •
t
Chsetoptila angustipluma • • • ....
t
Acrocephalus familiaris .... • • • •
• •
Phseornis palmeri • • • • • • • • • •
0
myadestina • • • • • • • • • • • •
• •
. .
• •
0
lanaiensis . • • • • • • • •
• •
0 1
obscura • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
0
oahuensis • • • • • • • • • • • •
• •
• •
t
03
x
►4
tf}
.2
X
tb4)
' u
,'hXh
a 8
•r- V-
fc
r"*.
03
4 The addition of the new Ou to the list brings the total number of species of Hawaiian birds up to 132.
[323]
Accidental or
wide-ranging.
INDEX AND SYNONYMY.
Accipitrinae .... .... ....
PAGE.
32
NO.
Acridotheres • • • •
37. 38
tristis .
38
66
Acrocephalus • • • •
58
familiaris • • • • • •
58
1 15
Acrulocereus apicalis • • • •
57
1 13
bishopi .... .... ....
57
1 1 1
braecatus .... ....
57
1 10
niger .... .... ....
57
1 1 2
nobilis . • .... ....
57
1 1 2
Actitis ineanus . . .... ....
27
48
Actodromas • • • •
27
Aeo .... .... •••• ••••
26
46
AJstrelata ....
1 1
hypoleuca • • • •
12
14
leucocephala .... • • • •
1 2
13
phseopygia • • • •
12
13
saudwicensis ....
12
1 3
Akaiearooa .... • • • •
50
96
Akakane .... • • • •
49
9i
Green .... • • • •
49
94
Akapane .... • • • •
43
74
Akeake • • • • • • • •
29
53
Akeka .... • • • •
29
53
Akekee .... • • • •
29
53
Akekeke • • • • • • • •
29
53
Akepa • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
49
9i
Akepeuie • • • • • • •
49
9i
Akialoa .... • • • •
50
96
Kauai • • • • • •
51
97
Lanai • • • • • • • • • • • •
5i
98
Akihialoa (Sp. indet.).
Akihipolena .... • • • ■
43
72
Akikihi .... • • • •
47
85
Alaalai (Sp. indet.).
Alae • • • • •••• ••••
24
4i
awi .... ••••
24
42
keokeo • • • • .... • • • •
24
43
ula •••• • • • • ....
24
4i
Alala- ••• • • • • • • • • • • • •
35
62
Alauda ■ • • • • • • •
35
arvensis .
35
61
Alaudidae. • • • • • • •
34, 35
Alauhiio • • • • • • • •
47
87
Alauwahio. • • • •••• • •••
46
83
Alawi • • • • •••• • • • • • • • •
46
83
Albatross, Black-footed ....
10
1 1
de la Chine • • • • • • ■ • • •
10
1 1
[
PAGE.
NO.
Amakihi, Hawaii .... ....
46
82
intermediate .... ....
45
78
Kauai .... .... ....
44
77
Lanai .... .... ....
45
81
Maui .... .... ....
45
78
Molokai . .... ....
45
79
Oahu .... .... ....
45
80
ochraceous • • • • ....
49
92
scarlet .... .... • • • •
49
9i
Amakika ( See Amakihi ) .
Amaui • • .... .... • • • •
61
119
Auauanii .... .... ....
46
83
Anas . . • • • •
16, 17
boscas ( See note) ••••
17
boschas .... .... ....
i-7
27
clypeata .... ....
18
29
laysanensis .
18
28
sandvieensis .... • • • •
G
27
superciliosa • • • • • • • • • •
17
27
(var.) •
17
27
(var. a . , sandvieensis)
17
27
wyvilliana • • • • • • • •
r7
27
Anatidae .... • • • • ....
16
Anatinse .... .... . • • •
16
Anauanii .... .... ....
46
83
Anous •••• • • • • • • • •
5, 9
fuliginosus. ... .... . • • •
8
5
hawaiiensis • • • • • • • •
9
8
melanogenys • • • • • • • •
9
8
niger .... • • • • • • • •
9
8
pileatus • • • • • • • • • • • •
9
8
spadicia • • • • • • • •
9
8
stolidus .
9
8
tenuirostris .... • • • •
9
9
(Also No. 8 in part.)
Anser hauaiensis • • • • • • • •
20
35
hawaiensis • • • • • • • •
20
35
hawaiiensis . . .... • • • •
20
35
sandvieensis • • • • • • • •
20
35
Anseres. . .... • • • • • • • •
l6
Anserinae • • • • • • • • • • • •
16
Anthochaera angustipluma • • • •
58
1 14
Ao ( Sp. indet. ) .
Apane .... .... • • • • • • • •
43
74
Apapane .... • • • • • • • •
43
74
Apekepeke • • • • • • • • • • • •
36
63
Aplirizidae • • • • • • • • • •
25, 29
5]
(69)
INDEX AND SYNONYMY, \
70
BaGE.
NO.
t>A6E.
No.
Ardea cserulea (var. ■/)••• • • • •
21
37
Certhia vestiaria ,* • * • • • • •
43
72
exilis .... .... . • • •
22
38
virens ... .... ....
46
82
grisea • • • • • • • • • • • •
22
38
Cheetoptila .... .... • ■ • •
58
(Herodias) sacra • • • •
21
37
angustipluma .
58
114
naevia • • • • .... ....
22
38
Charadriidse .... .... ....
25-
28
nycticorax .... ....
22
38
Charadrius .
28
sacra • • • • .... ....
21
37
auratus orientalis .... ....
29
52
vulgaris .... ....
21
37
dominicus fulvus • • • •
29
52
Ardeidse .... .... ....
20, 21
fulvus .... .... ....
29
52
Ardeinae .... .... ....
21
glaucopus .... ....
29
52
Arenaria • • • • • • • • ....
29
hiaticula .... .... ....
29
52
interpres • • • • • • • •
29
53
“like C. hiaticula’’ ....
29
52
Asio .
33
pluvialis .... .... ....
29
52
accipitrinus .... ....
33
60
taitensis .... ....
29
52
accipitrinus sandvicensis- •
33
60
virginianus • • • • • • • • • •
29
52
brachyotus • • • . ....
33
60
xanthocheitus .... ....
29
52
sandvicensis- • .... ....
33
60
Charitonetta • • • • • • • • • •
16,
18
sandwichensis .... ....
33
60
albeola • • • • -
19
31
Atagen aquila.... •••• ••••
i5
25
Chasiempis .
36
aquilus . • • • • • ....
15
25
dolei .... •••• ••••
36
62
Attagen aquila ... .... ....
1,5
25
gayi .
37
65
Aua .... .... ....
35
62
ibidis .... •••• • • • •
37
64
Auku kohili .... .... • • • •
22
38
ridgwayi • • • • • • • • • • • •
37
64
Aukuu .... .... ....
22
38
sandvicensis • • • • • •
36
64
(Also No. 65 in pt.)
Bee-eater, Yellow-tufted. • • • • • •
57
113
sandwichensis .... ....
37
64
Bernicla sandvicensis • • • •
20
35
(Also Nos. 63 and 65 in pt.)
sandwichensis • • • • • • • •
20
35
sclateri • • • • • • • • ....
36
63
Booby .... .... ....
15
24
Cliasiempsis obscura. . ....
61
119
Blue-faced . . • • • • • • • •
i5
22
sandvicensis. . .... ....
37
64
Red-footed .... ....
15
23
sandwichensis • • • • • • • •
37
64
Brachyotus gallapagoensis • • • •
33
60
Chen .
16,
19
Brant, Black .... • • • •
19
34
hyperborboreus • • • • • •
19
32
Branta - • • • • • • • •
17, i9
hyperborea • . • • • • ....
19
32
canadensis minima • • • •
19
-7 n
AO
hyperboreus- • • ■ ••••
19
32
(Leucopareia) sandwichensis • •
20
35
Chloridops • • • • • • • • -
40,
56
nigricans .
19
34
kona • • • • • • • • • •
56
109
Bubonidse .... • • • • • • • •
32, 33
Chlorodrepanis • • • • • • • •
4i,
44
Buffie-head . . .... . • • •
19
3i
ehloridoides • • • • • •
45
81
Bulweria • • • • • • • • • • • •
11, 12
chloris • • • • • • • • • • • •
45
80
anjinho . . .... • • • •
12
15
kalaana • • • • • • • •
45
79
bulweri .... • • • • • • • •
12
15
parva • • • • • • • • • • • •
46
83
columbina • • • • • • • •
12
15
stejnegeri - -
44
77
macgillivrayi • • • • • • • •
12
i5
virens • • • • - • • • •
46
82
Burriea .... .... • • • •
38
wilsoni • • • • ....
45
78
Buteo • • .... • • • • ••••
32, 33
Chrysomitridops • • • • • • • • • •
4A
48
( Onychotes) solitarius • • • •
33
59
caeruleirostris • • • • ....
49
94
solitarius . • • • •
33
59
Cinclus interpres - • • • • • • ....
29
53
Circus • • • • • • • • • • • •
32
Calidris . • • • • • • • •
26, 28
cyaneus hudsonius* • • • • • • •
33
58
arenaria • • • • • • • •
28
50
hudsonius • • • • • • • •
33
58
Callipela ealifornica • • • • • • • •
30
54
Ciridops • • • • • • • • • • • •
4A
44
Carduelis coccinea • • • • • •
49
9i
anna- • • • • • • • • •
44
76
Carpodacus • • • • • • • • • • • •
38
sp. .
44
76
frontalis .... • • • •
39
68
Clangula albeola ( See note) • • • •
18
frontalis rhodocolpus. . • • • •
33
68
Cnipolegus sp. (?) • ■ • • • • • •
37
64
mexicanus obscurus- • • •
39
68
Colluricincla ( ? ) sandvicensis • •
61
119
Certhia coccinea. • • • • • • • • •
43
72
Columbse • • • • • • • • • • • •
31
obscura • • • • • • • •
50
96
Coot, Hawaiian .... . • • •
24
43
pacifica .... .... • • • •
42
70
Corethrura obscura .... • • • •
23
39
sanguinea .... ....
43
74
sandwichensis .... ....
23
39
[326]
INDEX AND SYNONYMY.
7*
PAGE.
xo.
PAGE.
NO.
Corvidae • • • • . • • • . • • .
34,
35
Dysporus parvus .... ....
15
24
Corvinae • • • • • • • • ....
35
piscator- . .... ....
15
23
Corvus .
35
sula . . .... .... ....
15
24
hawaiiensis .
35
62
(Physocorax) hawaiiensis et
Eee-eve. • .... .... ....
43
72
tropicus • • • • . . . .
35
62
“Eine Art Elite” .... ....
18
28
tropicus .... .... ....
35
62
Eki-aki. . .... .... ....
9
10
Cracticus ater .... ....
35
62
Elepaio, Hawaii .... ....
37
64
Crake, Laysan . ... .... ....
24
40
Kauai .... .... ....
36
63
Creeper, Crimson .... ....
43
74
Oahu .... .... ....
57
65
Great Hook-billed .... ....
42
7°
Emberiga sandviceusis (Syn. indet.)-
Hook-billed Green ....
50
96
atricapilla (Syn. indet.).
Olive-green . . .... ....
46
82
Entomiza (?) angustipluma ....
58
1 14
Red Hook-billed. . ....
43
72
Eopsaltria sandvicensis ....
37
64
Crow, Hawaiian ... .... ....
35
62
(Chasiempis) maculata ....
37
64
Tropic •••• ••••
35
62
‘ ‘ obscura ....
61
119
Crytnophilus • • • • • • •
25
sandwichensis
36
63
fulicarius • • • • -
26
45
(Phaeornis) obscura . • • •
61
119
Curlew, Bristle-thighed ... ....
28
5i
Ewaewa .... .... ....
8
5
Otaheite .... ....
28
5i
Cymochorea eryptoleucura ....
13
19
Falcones .... .... ....
32
Falcouidae . . .... ....
32
Dafila- • • • • • • • • •
16,
18
Finch, Crimson House • • • • ....
39
68
acuta ••••
18
30
House . . .... ....
39
68
caudacuta- • • • • • • •
18
30
Eaysan .... .... ....
54
106
Demiegretta • • • •
21
scarlet • • .... ....
49
9i
sacra • • • • • • • •
21
37
Fish Hawk (See note) . • • • ....
33
Diomedea .
10
Fly-catcher, Dusky ... ....
61
119
immutabilis • • • •
10
12
Sandwich .... .... ....
37
64
nigripes • • • •
1 1
1 1
Spotted-winged . • ....
37
64
Diomedeidae .... • • • • ....
10
‘‘Fou de Cayanne” .... ....
15
24
Dove, Chinese Turtle. . . • • •
3i
57
Fregata .
15
Singapore .... .... . . . •
31
57
aquila .
15
25
Drepanididae. . .... ••••
34,
39
aquilus . . .... ....
15
25
Drepanis • • • • • • • • -
40-
4i
leucocephala .... ....
15
25
aurea ... • • • • • • • •
49
91
leucocephalus, et palmerstoni
15
25
byronensis • • • • • •
43
74
minor .... .... ....
15
25
coccinea • • • • • • • •
50
96
strumosa ....
15
25
ellisiana .... • • • •
50
96
Fregatidae .... .... ...
14,
15
flava •••• •••• • • • •
46
82
Fregeta • • • • .... ....
15
funerea .... • • • • • • • •
42
71
aquila .... .... ....
15
25
(Hemignatlius) ellisiana • •
50
95
Frigate, Palmerston . . ....
15
25
( “ ) lucida • • • •
52
IOI
White-headed .... ....
15
25
(Himatione) sanguinea. • • •
45
80
Fringilla coccinea .... ....
49
9i
lucida .... ••••
52
IOI
Fringillidae .... ....
34,
38
obscura • • • •
50
96
Fulica - - -
23,
24
olivacea • • • • • • • •
52
IOI
alai .... -
24
43
pacifica • • • •
42
70
Fulicinae .... .... ....
23
rufa • • • • .... • • • •
49
91
Fuligulinae .... • • • • ....
16
(Also No. 93 in pt.)
Fulmarinae • • • • • • • • • •
10
sanguinea • • • • • • •
43
74
vestiaria .... ....
43
72
Gallinae- • .... .... ....
30
(Vestiaria) coccinea . • . •
43
72
Gallinula .
22,
2,3
Drepanorhamphus
40, 42
chloropus .... .... ....
24
4i
funerea • • • • • • • •
42
71
galeata . • • • • • ....
24
4i
Duck, Hawaiian .... ....
17
27
galeata sandvicensis • • • • • •
24
4i
Dysporus eyanopus • • • •
15
22
sandvicensis .
24
4i
daetylatra • • • •
15
22
sp-
24
4i
fiber .
15
24
Gallinule, Hawaiian . . ....
24
4i
hernandizi .... • • • •
15
22
Gallinulinae • • • • ....
22
leucogaster • • • • • .. ....
15
24
Gambetta fuliginosa • • ....
27
48
[327]
D
INDEX AND SYNONYMY.
Gannet, Brown . . ....
PAGE.
15
NO.
24
Himantopus- • • • ••••
PAGE.
• • • 26
NO.
mavsked. . .... ....
15
22
candidus .... • • • •
26
46
Godwit, Pacific... .... ...
28
49
kandseni • • • • ....
• • . 26
46
Gooney .... .... ....
xo
12
knudseni .... ....
26
46
Brown .... .... ...
10
1 1
nigricollis. ... ....
• . • 26
46
Goose, Cackling .... ....
19
33
Himatione ■ • • • -
4H 43
Hawaiian .... .... ...
20
35
aurea .... ....
•••49
92
Lesser Snow .... ....
19
32
chlordoides .... ....
45
81
Sandwich Island ....
20
35
chloris .... ....
•• 45
80
Gracula longirostra • • • • • •
57
1 12
(Also No. 77 in pt. )
nobilis .... .... ...
57
1 1 2
dolei .... ....
••• 43
77
Grosbeak, Parrot-billed ....
54
104
dolii .... .... ....
46
72
Gull, California . . .... ...
7
2
flava .... ....
.. 46
82
Franklin’s .... ....
7
4
fraithii . . .... ....
44
75
Point Barrow • • • • ...
6
I
freethi .... • • • •
.. 44
75
Ring-billed .... ....
7
3
kalaana. . .... ....
45
79
Gygis .
5- 9
maculata .... • • • •
.. 48
88
alba .... .... ....
9
10
mana • • • • • • • ....
47
86
alba Candida .... ...
9
10
montana • • • • ....
.. 47
87
alba kittlitzi • • ....
9
10
newtoni. . .... ....
48
89
Candida .... .... . . . .
9
10
parva • • • • ....
.. 46
83
sanguinea • • • • • • • •
43
74
Haakoae .... .... . . . .
14
21
(Also No. 82 in pt. )
Halixeus aquilus .... ....
15
25
stejnegeri •• ....
.. 44
77
Haliplana fuliginosa • • • • . . . .
8
5
virens ... • • • • • • • •
46
82
lunata .... .... ....
8
6
(Also Nos. 78, 80, 88 in pt.
)
H awk , Brown .... .... . . . .
33
59
wilsoni .... ••••
•• 45
78
Hawaiian .... ....
33
59
Hirondelle de nier brune ....
9
8
Marsh .... .... . . . .
33
58
Honey-eater, Hook-billed - •
.. 50
96
Hemignathus • • • • -
40, 50
Laysan . . .... ....
44
75
affinis .... .... . . . .
52
99
Yellow-tufted ....
•• 57
1 13
(Also No. 102 in pt.)
Hoo hoo .... •••• • • • •
42
7°
ellisianus .... .... . . . .
50
95
Hunakai • • • • • • • •
. . 28
50
hanapepe .... ....
52
100
Hydroehelidon fuliginosum ....
8
5
lanaiensis • • • • • • • • • •
5i
98
Hypoloxias aurea ....
.. 49
92
lichtensteini • • • ....
50
95
coceinea. • • • • • • • • •
49
9i
lucidus .... • • • • • • . •
52
IOI
obscurus • • • • • • • •
50
96
Iawi .... .... ....
•• 43
74
(Also Nos. 95, 97, 102 in pt.)
Ibides .... .... ....
20
olivaceus .... • • • • ....
50
96
Ibididse • • • • • • • • • •
. . 20
(Also No. 102 in pt.)
Ibis, White-faced Glossy ....
20
36
procerus- • • • • • • • • • • •
5i
97
Ii .
•• 43
74
stejnegeri .... ....
5i
97
Iiwi .... .... ....
43
72
wilsoni .... .... ....
53
102
Iiwipolena .... ....
•• 43
74
Herodii . . .... ....
20
Io .
33
59
Herodiones .... • • • • ....
20
Ioa .... .... ....
•• 15
25
Heron, Black-crowned Night • •
22
38
Iwa • • .... .... ....
15
25
Sacred .... .... ....
21
37
Iwi .... .... ....
.. 44
77
Heteractitis - -
26, 27
Iwipolena . . .... ....
43
72
brevipes .... • • • • ....
27
48
Iwipopolo •••• ••••
•• 43
72
incana • • . • • • • • • •
27
48
incanus .
27
48
Kaao=Ao (Sp. indet.).
Heterorhynchus- • • • ••••
4°. 5i
Kaio ... .... ••••
•• 33
59
affinis . • • • •
52
99
( Also No. 60 in pt. )
hanapepe • • • • • • • •
52
100
Kaka ( See note ) • • • •
.. 17
27
lucidus • • • • • • • • • • • •
52
IOI
Kakawahie • • .... ....
48
90
olivaceus .... ....
52
IOI
Kala ... •••• ....
. . 8
5
wilsoni .... .... ....
53
102
Kamao • • • • .... • • • •
60
1 1 7
Heteroscutus brevipes • • • •
27
48
Kamou • . • • ■ • ....
. 60
117
incanus • • • • • • • • • • • •
27
48
Kanono (Sp. indet.).
[328]
73
INDEX AND
Keke ... .... .... ....
PAG I
29
NO.
54
Kio'ea • • • • .... ....
28
51
Kiowea • • .... .... ....
58
114
Kipi .... .... ....
50
95
Kleiner rotlier. ... .... . . . .
44
75
Koae .... .... ....
14
21
Koae ula .... .... ....
H
20
Kolea .... .... • • • •
29
52
Koloa maoli • • • • • • • •
17
27
mapu .... .... ....
18
30
tnoha .... .... ••••
18
29
Kukuluaeo . . .... ....
26
46
La Mouette brune .... • • • •
9
8
La Paille-en-Queue a brins rouges
14
20
cle l’isle de France ....
H
20
Laridae .... .... • • • •
5
Lark, Sky .... .... • • • •
35
61
Larus .
5,
6
barrovianus -
6
1
californicus- • • • • •••
7
2
delawarensis • • • •
7
3
franklinii ....
7
4
glaueus .... .... • • • •
6
1
niger(?) .
57
1 1 2
Philadelphia (See note)
65
Lauwi •••• • • • •
46
83
Le Fou .... •••• ....
15
24
blane. ... .... • • • •
15
23
brun .... .... • • • •
15
23
comnnine • • • • • • • •
15
24
Limieoke . • • • • • • •
24
Limosa • • • • .
26,
27
lapponica baueri .
28
49
Linaria eoceinea • • • • • • • •
49
9i
(Also No. 93 in pt. )
Longipennes • • • • • • • •
5
Lophortyx • • • •
30
californica • • • •
30
54
Loxia pityopsittacus . •
54
104
psittaeea .... • • • • • • • •
54
104
Loxioides • • • • • •
39,
54
bailleni .... ....
54
105
bailleui -
54
105
Loxops •••• • • • •
4F
48
aurea • • • • • • •
49
92
(Also No. 91 in pt.)
cseruleirostris .
49
94
( Clirysomitridops ) cseruleirostris
49
94
eoceinea • • • •
49
9i
eoeciueus • • • • • • • • • • • •
49
9i
flammea • • • •
48
90
ochraeea .
49
92
rosea .... • • • • • • • •
43
72
rufa • • • • • • • •
49
93
wolstenliolmei • • • •
49
93
Mamo ••• •••• • • • •
42
70
Perkins • • • • • • • •
42
7i
Man-o’-war Bird •••• ••••
15
25
[32
SYNONYMY.
Manuku .... ....
PAGE.
.... 31
NO.
57
Mareea amerieana (See note)
18
Megalopterus tenuirostris. .
.... 9
8
stolidus. . ....
9
8
Meliphaga faseiculata • • • •
•••• 57
1 12
Meliphagidse ....
35, 56
Melithreptes vestiaria ....
.... 43
72
Melithreptus obseurus
50
96
paeifieus .... ....
.... 42
7°
vestiarius ....
43
72
(Also No. 96 in pt.)
virens • • • • • • • •
.... 46
82
Mellisuga eoceinea ...
43
72
Merganser • • • • ....
.... 16, 17
Red-breasted ....
1 7
26
serrator .... ....
.... 17
26
Merops faseiculata. • • •
• 57
1 12
niger .... ....
•••• 57
1 1 2
SP- .
57
1 1 2
Microanous • • • • • • • •
— 5, 9
hawaiiensis- • • •
9
9
Miller Bird .... ....
.... 58
1 15
Mina • • • • ■ • • •
38
66
False • • • • ....
.... 38
66
Moha ••••
18
29
Moho. ••• •••• ••••
.... 23
39
(Also No. 1 13 in pt. )
Moho • • • • ••••
56
angustipluma ....
.... 5s
1 14
apiealis .
57
1 1 3
atriceps .... ....
.... 58
IJ4
bishopi -
57
1 1 1
braccata-.. ••••
• • • • 57
r 10
niger • • • • • • • • . • •
• 57
1 1 2
nobilis - • • • •
• • •• 57
1 12
(Also No. 1 13 in part.)
Moboa angustipluma
58
114
apiealis .... ....
• ••• 57
1 13
braeeata .... . . .
57
1 10
faseiculata . . ....
• • • • 57
1 10
( Also No. 1 1 2 in pt. )
nobilis (in part) ....
• • •• 57
1 10
Morus parvus .... . • •
•5
24
piseator • • • • ....
.... 15
23
sula .... .... • • •
• 1 6
24
Mud hen • • • • ....
.... 24
43
(Also No. 41 in pt.)
Munia - ••••
.... 39
nisoria -
39
69
nisoria punctata ....
.... 39
69
Museicapa maeulata
37
64
obseura .... ....
.... 61
1 19
sanduicensis .... • • •
37
64
(Also No. 63 in pt.)
sandvicensis. . ....
■ • • • 37
64
sandwichensis • • • • • • •
37
6.3
Muscicapidae • • • • • • • •
• ••• 35, 36
Mynah, House •••• •••
38
66
Myzomela nigroventris. • • •
.... 43
72
sanguinea • • • • • • •
43
74
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 3. — 6.
74
INDEX AND SYNONYMY.
PAGr
NO.
PAGE.
NO.
Nau kane • • • . .... ....
12
l6
Otus brachyotus. • .... ....
33
60
Nectarinia byronensis ....
43
74
Ou . .... ....
54
IO4
coccinea .... .... ....
43
72
(Also No. 1 17 in pt.)
flava .... .... ....
46
82
liolowai .... .... ....
49
94
lucida .... .... ....
52
IOI
Honolulu (See note) ....
54
niger • • .... ....
57
112
polapalapa ... .... ....
54
104
sanguinea • • • • • • • • • •
43
74
Owholowai • • .... ....
49
94
Nene • • • • • • • • • • • •
20
35
Owl, Short-eared .... ....
33
60
Nesochen .... ....
r7>
19
Hawaiian .... ....
33
60
sandvicensis .
20
35
Pakalakala .... .... ....
8
6
Nettion crecca (See note) . ...
18
Palila .... .... ....
54
104
Noio .... .... . • • •
9
9
Palmeria • • • • ....
4i, 43
Nukupuu •••• .... ....
52
100
dolei ••• •••■
43
73
Numenius . .
26,
28
dolii .... .... ....
43
73
australis .... .... ....
28
51
mirabilis .... ....
43
73
femoralis .... ....
28
5i
Paludicolse .... .... ....
22
phaeopus .... .... ....
28
5i
Pandion (See note) ... ....
33
tahitiensis .
28
5i
( Polioaetus) solitarius ....
33
59
taitensis .... .... ....
28
5i
solitarius • • • • ....
33
59
Nycticorax • • • •
21
Partridge, California .... . . . .
30
54
griseus .... • • • •
22
38
Passer .
38
nycticorax .... ....
22
38
domesticus .
38
67
nycticorax nsevius
22
38
Passeres .... .... ....
34
Oceanodroma • • • •
11,
13
Pelecanus aquilus .... ....
15
25
castro •••• •••• ••••
13
19
fiber .... .... ....
15
23
cryptoleucura .
13
19
leueocephalus .... ....
15
24
f uliginosa ( See note ) • . ....
13
leucogaster .... ....
15
24
Oeoe .... .... ....
13
19
palmerstoni . . .... ....
15
25
CEjstrelata bulweri .... ....
12
15
parva .... .... ....
15
24
hypoleuca • • • ■
1 2
14
parvus .... .... ....
15
24
phaeopygia • • • • • • • • • • • •
1 2
13
sula .... .... ....
15
24
sandwichensis ....
12
13
Pennula .... ....
22, 23
Oio .... .... .... ....
9
8
ecaudata • • • •
23
39
Olokele .... .... ....
43
72
miller .... .... ....
23
39
liokii .... .... ....
43
72
millsi ... .... ....
23
39
popolo . . .... ....
43
72
palmeri .... .... ....
23
40
Olomao .... .... ....
60
1 18
sandvichensis • • • • ....
23
39
(Also No. 1 19 in pt.)
sandwichensis • • • •
23
39
Olomau •••• •••• ....
60
1 18
wilsoni (See note) ....
23
Omao • • • • • • • • • • . •
61
119
Peristeridae .... • • • •
3i
Onychoprion fuliginosa ... ....
8
5
Petrel, Bonin .... ....
12
14
fuliginosus .... ....
8
5
Bulwer’s • • • • .... ....
12
15
lunatus .... ....
8
6
Dark-rumped .... • • • •
1 2
13
serratus. • ....
8
5
Hawaiian Storm .... ....
13
19
Onycbotes gruberi .... ....
33
59
Salvin’ s White-breasted • • •
12
14
solitarius .... ....
33
59
Petrodroma sanguinea .... ....
43
74
Oo .
57
1 1 2
Phaebastria . • ....
10
Oo aa •••• .... ....
57
1 10
Phaenicurus rubricauda ... ....
14
20
Oreomysa - ....
4i,
46
Phseornis • • • • • •
59
bairdi . .
47
85
lanaiensis .
60
118
flammea • • • • • • •
48
90
myadestina .
60
1 1 7
maculata • • • • ....
48
88
myiadestina . • .... ....
60
117
mana • • • • • • • •
47
86
oahuensis .
61
1 20
montana ....
47
87
oahuusis .... ....
61
1 20
newtoni .... .... ....
48
89
obscura - -
61
119
(Rothschildia) parva . ...
46
83
palmeri .... ....
59
1 16
wilsoni .... .... ....
47
85
Phaethon • . ....
14
Ortygometra obscura . . ....
23
39
aethereus • • • • • • • * ....
14
21
sandvicensis . . .... ....
23
39
atherus .... • • • •
14
21
sandwichensis • • • • ....
23
39
lepturus .
14
21
Oscines- • .... .... ....
34
phaenicurus • • • • • • • •
14
20
Ospray ( See note ) . . . . ....
33
rubricauda . ••••
14
20
[330]
INDEX
AND
SYNONYMY.
75
PAGE.
NO.
PAGE.
NO.
Phaethontidae .... ....
.... 13, 14
Pueo .... .... .... . . . .
33
60
Phaeton aethereus. . . .
14
21
Puffinus •••• .... ....
n, 13
(Also No. 20 in pt.)
eolutnbianus .
12
15
candidus .... ....
.... 14
21
cuneatus .... ....
12
l6
phaenieurus
14
20
knudseni .... .... . . . .
12
l6
rubrieauda . . ....
.... 14
20
nativitatis • • • •
13
17
rubrieaudata ....
14
20
n. sp. .... ....
13
17
rubricandatus ....
.... 14
20
newelli -
13
18
rubricaudus
14
20
Quail, California Valley . .
30
54
Phalacroeorax plagiens(See
lote ) • . 13
Querquedula circia ( See note) . .
18
Phalarope, Northern . .
25
44
Rail, Raysan .... ....
23
40
Red .
.... 26
45
Sandwich .... ....
23
39
Pbalaropodidae ....
24, 25
Wingless .... .... . . . .
23
39
Phalaropus • • • •
.... 25
(Also No. 40 in pt.)
lobatus • • • •
25
44
Rallidae .... ....
22
Phasianidse • • • • ....
.... 30
Rallus .... .... ....
22
Phasianus .
30
acaudata .... .... . . . .
23
39
torquatus .
.... 30
55
ecaudata .... ....
23
39
versicolor ....
56
obscura • • • • .... ....
23
39
Pheasant, Japanese ....
.... 31
56
sanduicensis .... ....
23
39
Mongolian ....
30
55
sandvicensis • • .... ....
23
39
Ring-necked ....
.... 30
55
sandwiehensis .... ....
23
39
Phyllornis tonganensis
46
82
Raptores .... .... ....
32
virens ....
.... 46
82
Raven .... .... ....
35
62
Pintail .... ....
• • 18
30
Recurvirostridse . . .... ....
24, 26
Pipi .... .... ....
.... 54
104
Rhodacanthis • • • •
40, 55
Piscatrix Candida • • • •
PS
23
flaviceps- • • • • • • •
55
108
piscator .... ....
.... 15
23
palmeri • • • •
55
107
Planetis guttatus ....
8
5
Rhynchaspis clypeata .... ....
18
29
Plegadis • • • •
.... 20
Rice Bird .... .... ....
39
68
guarauna
• . 20
36
Rothschildia .... .... ....
41, 46
Ploceidae .... • • • •
• ••• 34. 39
parva • • • • • • • ■
46
83
Plover, Pacific Golden
29
52
Sanderling .... .... ....
28
50
Pluvialis fulvus • •
.... 29
52
Sandpiper, Sharp-tailed ....
27
47
longipes ....
29
52
Siberian Pectoral (See note) ....
27
Polena • • • • • ■ ....
.... 43
72
Scarlet Bird . • .... ....
43
72
Polioaetus solitarius • •
33
59
Scolopacidae .... .... ....
24, 26
Porphyrio • • • • • • • •
.... 22, 24
Scolopax guarauna . . ....
20
36
melanotus • • • •
24
42
iucana .... .... ....
27
48
Porzanula • • • •
.... 22, 23
phaeopus( ?) .... ....
28
51
palmeri
23
40
solitaris .... .... ....
27
48
Priofinus .
.... 11, 12
taliitieusis .... ....
28
51
cuneatus
. . 12
16
undulata .... .... ....
27
48
Procellaria alba . . ....
.... 12
!3
Shearwater, Black .... ....
13
17
anjinho. . ....
• • 12
15
Christmas Island .... ....
!3
17
bulweri .... ....
.... 12
15
Knudsen’s .... ....
12
16
bulwerii . • ....
12
15
Wedge-tailed .... ....
12
16
macgillivrayi ....
.... 12
15
Shoveller .... • • • • . • • •
18
29
Procellariidae ....
• • 10
Sickle-bill, Green .... ....
51
97
Pseudonestor .
• • • ■ 39, 53
Sittacodes • • • • • • • ....
54
104
xanthophrys .
53
103
Skylark • • • • • • • • • • • •
35
61
Psittacina olivacea ( See note
.... 54
Snipe, Ash-colored. ... ....
27
48
Psittacirostra
40, 53
Sparrow, Chinese .... ....
39
69
icterocephala ....
.... 54
104
European House. . ....
38
67
olivacea (See note)
54
Spatula •••• - -
16, 18
psittacea .
.... 54
104
clypeata • • • • • • • •
18
29
Psittacopis psittacea . .
54
104
Spilopelia • • • • • • • •
31
Psittirostra icterocephala . .
.... 54
104
Steganopodes • • • • • • • •
13
psittacea ....
54
104
Sterna • • • • • • • •
5, 7
sandvicensis ....
.... 54
104
alba •••• •••• ••••
9
10
Ptiloturus fasciculatus
57
1 12
bergii (See note) .... • • • •
8
Pnaiohi. . .... • • • •
.... 59
1 16
Candida • • • • • • • •
9
10
[33 1 1
"6
IXDEX AXD SYNONYMY.
PAGE.
NO.
PAGE.
NO.
Sterna fuliginosa • • • •
.... S
5
Tern. Grey -backed ....
.... 8
6
fuseata • • • • • •
9
8
Hawaiian .... . . . .
9
9
gouldii • • • • • • • •
.... 8
5
X oddy .... ....
. ... 9
8
guttata . • ....
S
5
Peale’s . . .... . . • •
8
6
infuscata • • • • • • • •
.... S
5
Sootv .... ....
.... 8
5
luetuosa ....
s
5
White ■ • .... . • . .
9
10
lunata • • • • • • • •
.... 8
6
Tetraonidae .... ....
.... 30
melanauchen • ■
8
j
Thalassidroma . • • • • • • •
13
19
nivea .... • • • •
.... 9
10
bulweri .... ....
.... 12
15
oahuensis ....
8
5
sp. (?) .
13
19
1 Onyclioprion ) serrata
.... 8
5
Totanus brevipes . • • •
.... 9 7
^ /
48
owhyhaensis ....
9
8
fuliginosus .... • • • •
97
~ /
48
panaya .... • • • •
.... 8
5
(Gambetta) incanus ••
. • . . 97
48
serratus . • • • • •
8
5
incanus .... • • • •
27
48
stolida .... ••••
.... 9
8
oeeanieus .... ....
.... 97
48
unieolor • • • •
9
8
pedestris .... ....
27
48
Stilt. Hawaiian . . ....
.... 26
46
polynesiae • • • • • . •
• • • • 97
^ /
48
Storm Petrel. Hawaiian
13
19
solitarius .... • • • •
27
48
Strepsalis interpres • • • •
.... 29
53
undulatus ... • • • •
.... 27
48
Strepsilas interpres. ...
29
53
Tringa - • • • • • • • •
26, 27
Striges • . • • • • • • • •
.... 32
acuminata- • ••••
.... 27
47
Strix delicatula ....
33
58
americana (See note) • • • •
27
sandwichensis ....
.... 50
96
interpres .... • • ■ •
. . . . 29
53
Stryx aeeipitrina • • • •
• • 33
60
maeulata (See note) • • • .
27
Stumidae • • • • • • • •
• • • * 34* 37
oahuensis .... • • • •
. . . . 29
53
Snla .
14
Tropic Bird, Red-tailed • • • •
x4
20
bassana .... • • • •
.... 15
22
White-tailed • • • •
• ... 14
21
brasiliensis ....
13
24
T ubinares .... .... • • • •
10
cyanops • • • • -
.... 15
22
Turdidae • • • • • • • •
• • • • 35- 59
daetvlatra ....
1 5
2 9
Turdus sandwichensis • • • •
61
119
ervthrorhvneha ....
.... 13
23
sandwichensis (var.) • •
• ... 61
120
fiber .... ....
I 3
23
woahensis • • • • • • • •
61
120
fuliea .... ....
.... 13
24
T urnstone • • • • • • • •
. . . . 29
53
fusea .... • • • •
13
24
Turtur . .
31
leueogaster . . ....
.... 13
24
chinensis .
. ... 31
57
leucophaea ....
15
23
Tyrannula obseura • • • • • •
61
119
melanops .... • • • •
.... 13
22
Uau .... .... • • • •
. • • • 12
13
nigrodaetyla ....
1 3
22
Ukaka • • • • • • • • • • • •
54
104
parva • • • • • • • •
.... 13
24
Ukeke .
. . . . 29
53
personata ....
15
22
Ukekeke • • • • • • • • • • • •
29
53
piscator - -
.... 13
23
Ula .
. ... 14
20
piseatrix ....
13
23
I'laaihawane • • • • • • • •
44
76
plumigula .... • • • •
.... 13
9 ->
-O
Ulala .
•••• 35
62
rubripeda ....
15
23
Ulili .
97
^ /
48
rubripes • • • • • • • •
.... 15
23
Uluaihawane .... • • • •
. . . . 44
76
sinieadvena ....
15
24
Unu kane . • • • • • • • • •
12
16
sula .
.... 13
24
Uwau ••• .... • • • •
. . . . 12
13
Sulidae .... ....
14
Vestiaria . .
40. 42
Sultana Bird .... • • • •
.... 24
42
akrona • • • • • • • •
• • • 5°
96
Sylviidae • ■ • • • • • •
34.35.
58
coccinea • • • • • • • •
43
72
T aebypetes aquila ....
.... 15
25
evi . • • • • • ....
, . . . 43
72
aquilus . • ....
1 5
23
heterorhynehus • • • • • •
52
IOI
leueoeephalus • • • •
.... 13
25
hoho •••• ••••
... 42
70
palmerstoni ....
•5
25
Yiduinae .... • • • • • • • •
39
Taenioptera obseura ••••
.... 61
119
Yiridonia ■ • • • • • • •
••• 41. 46
Tatare familiaris ....
58
1 15
maeulata • • • • • • • •
48
88
otaitensis .... ....
.... 61
119
sagittirostris • • • •
...46
84
Tatler. Wandering. ...
- • 2"
48
Weaver Bird • • • • • • • •
39
69
Teal. Lavsan .... • ■ • •
.... 18
28
Wideawake • • • • • • • •
... 8
5
Telespiza • • • • • •
40. 54
Grey .... • • • • • • • •
8
6
cantans • • • • -
•••• 54
106
Yellow head, Bird with ....
• • • 54
104
flavissima • • • •
54
106
Zaporuia sandwichensis • • • •
23
39
[332]
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate XVI.
ill. XI, in;,.-,.
Sterna tulifdiiusa.
:ilo7, 79iK!, A lions stolidus.
’
r
v :
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate XVII.
i)l <14, 91 05, Mitroanous hawam*nsis.
7892, Gygis alba kittlltzi.
7900, Anous stolidus.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I
Plate XVIII.
•RNICh PAfAHi BISHOP
m
n74-\ Diomedeu iiigTipes,
S74(I, Diomedeu immiitiibilis,
Mkmoirs Bishop Mi'ski'm, Vol. I.
Plat k XIX.
7328, 1’riofiuuK cunetitmi.
87liS, Bulweria bulweri.
7U0s, 7007. -Bstrelata hypoleuca.
9307, I’ufiinus iwvfkIU.
7942, Pufflnus nativitatis.
Mkmoirs Bishop Mi ski m. Yoi.. I
Plate XX.
i*sOr». 7966. Phaethon leptnrus.
$754. 9716, Phaethon rnbricanda
■
Mkmoiks Bishop .Museum, Vol. I.
Plate XXI.
s'T.'ii). Sula jiiscator.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate XXII.
S745, Alias laysanansis.
1)4-4, ill us, Anas w.v villiana .
Memoirs Bishop Mpskpm, Voi.. I.
Plate XXIII.
r»5x4( ju V. ) , D1 TO ( <). N.vrticomN li.vrtieorii x ini'Vlus.
Memoirs Bishop .Mrs hum, Vol. I.
Plate xxiv.
974o, Gallinula sandvieensis,
7911, 7912, Porzauula pahueri.
94.-S2, Fulica alal.
Memoirs Bishop Mtseitm, Vor.. I.
Plate XXV.
9159, HeteractitiM incanUH.
JS7HB, 9174, Arenatia interpres.
9397, 9897, Charadrius domiiiipus fulvus.
9725, Numenius tahitiensis.
9429, Himantopus knudsoni.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vor.. X.
Plate XXVI.
nnL’l, IUiteo solitill'ills.
««»), Corvus liawaiieiisiK.
ii.sBo , AhIo aecipitriniiM saiidvicensis.
*NICi. PAUAH1 BISHOP MUSHUM.
W
£
92»2, 9258, 9255, 9259, 9260, 9407, Chanieinpis ga,yi ; 8657, 9410, sclaterl; 9923, 9924, C. sandYieensis.
93S5, Phaeornis uiyadestina; 9922, 9923, P. obscura; 6415, 8094, 8096, P. lanaiensis ; 6693, P. palmeri.
5696, Drepanorhamphus funerea. 8735, Acrocephalua fainiliaris.
i
Memoirs Bishop Mrsr.t'M, Vor..‘ I.
Plate XXVIir.
9792, 9342, 9338, 9333, 934S, 9340, 9899, Vestiaria coccinea.
7996, 9803, 9322, 9898, 9309, 9324, Himatione sanguinea.
068 J , 8089, 8088, Oreomyza flammen, 6038, Loxops ochracea; 6648, 0642, 1,. coccinea.
6595, 6596, Palmerla dolei.
Memoirs Bishop Museem. Vol. I.
Plate XXIX.
(5(503, <5601 , Bhodocanthis palmeri. si 30, HeinignatliUK procerus. (5(512, PsittaciroBtris psittacea,.
0421. Heini^natlius obscurus.
0:153, 03(>1 , Loxops cirrnleirostris. (5(5(54. Oreom.vzu maiia. (5(5:42, (5(530. Hetworh.viichiiH wilsoni.
0402. Oivom.vza bairdi. (5(533. (5(53(5, Hoterorh.vnchiis hanapepe. (5(507. Psemlonestor xant hrophr.vs.
(5(520, Heterorh.vncrhiiK affinis. 030(5, C. stcjncgreri.
5457. Moho nobilis. 54(53. Moho bracmtUB.
*731, Telespiza can fans.
(5(5*4, (5(5*5, o. newtonf.
0370, Clilnrodrcjiaiiis parva.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate XXX.
i
j
l
C'hiptoptiltt angustiplumu.
STONE IMPLEMENTS AND STONE WORK
OF THE
ANCIENT HAWAIIANS.
BY WILLIAM T. BRIGHAM, A . \ I .
Memoirs of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum.
Vol. I. No. 4.
HONOLULU ;
BISHOP MUSEUM PRESS.
1902.
KRAUS REPRINT CO.
Millwood, New York
1974
ORDERED PRINTED BY THE TRUSTEES
NOVEMBER 8, 19OI.
Reprinted with the permission of the Bishop Museum Press
KRAUS REPRINT CO.
A U.S. Division of Kraus-Thomson Organization Limited
PREFACE.
In selecting the Stone Implements of the Ancient Hawaiians for the subject of the next chapter
of what I had some j'ears since intended should be a history of Hawaii, or rather of the Hawaiians
before the advent of other and very different racial influences, it may be fair to explain to my
readers, almost at the start, my method in this fragmentary edition of such information about old
Hawaii and its customs as I have been able to gather during the past thirty-six years. And here
I must be pardoned for thrusting a personality into what I greatly desire to make a clear and
impersonal statement of fadts.
When I came to these islands a young man full of enthusiasm, fresh from the teachings of
Agassiz, Gray, Wyman and Cooke, eager to study nature in all her aspedls, unbiased by theory,
only anxious to learn, I found a land where traces of a native civilization were not all effaced. The
American Mission had labored a little more than forty years and the results of their work were still
vigorous : the missionary homes still existed, oases in the outlying districts, where I could talk
with venerable men and women who had landed in 1820 when the young son and successor of
Kamehameha had cast aside all that his ancestors had held sacred in religion, and was not yet ready
to assume new responsibilities,— indeed he hardly gave much thought to the great change that was
impending. One era was at an end, another was on the threshold. Hitherto intercourse with for¬
eigners had but little modified the native ways of living. There had been no interruption of the ancient
worship although it had been for years falling into mild decay. The admirable unwritten system
of law regarding land tenure, water rights, fishing privileges, and the stern but generally beneficial
kapu were almost unimpaired, and that little band of missionaries that went like Joshua’s spies
to view the land, and whose story is so charmingly told in Ellis’ Tour of Hazvaii, found people
and things much the same as did the wrecked Spaniards when they knelt on the Hawaiian beach
three centuries before.
I never had the pleasure of meeting William Ellis, but I have corresponded with him.
I have met and lived with most of the other early missionaries, and if they were perhaps more
anxious to remove those obstacles to eternal health which threatened the interesting people they
had come to save, than to study the past history and work connected so intimately with what
they considered a fallen state, their desires were sincere and unselfish, and they were always ready
to place their journals at my disposal and to answer questions which must at times have seemed to
them almost idle.
Other sources of information, now closed forever, were then open to the traveler among the
Hawaiians. In the remote valleys the sound of the kapa beaters still echoed from the pali, and the
ancient fabric was still worn to some extent. I have gone to rest in a grass house by the light of a
stone lamp filled with kukui oil, after my native hosts and I had conversed by the light of the more
primitive string of kukui nuts. I had for my guide on the island of Molokai a man who had officiated
as priest in the native temple whose ruins he was explaining to me. Mateo Kekuanaoa, the father
of two kings, and the most intelligent native I ever met; John Ii, Charles Kanaina (father of King
[335] (3)
IV
Prejace.
Lunalilo), King Kamehameha V., were all living and willing to contribute to the notebooks I was
filling more with a desire of gaining and retaining information than with any view of future publica¬
tion. Many humbler contributors added to the store when in mountain journeys they wrote for me
the names they all then knew of bird or plant or place.
For years these notes vrere useless although they came back with me to these islands in 1888,
but when a few years ago I expeCted to leave the Hawaiian group forever, I destroyed all that I could
lay hand upon as useless baggage in my proposed wanderings. That any escaped was due to the
change of plans before I had time to read them all through before consigning them to the fire. From
this examination they are still fresh in my memory although it is quite possible that the details
might have been more complete had the originals been still before me.
From these sources more than from the voyagers, I shall draw in the proposed sketches of the
Hawaiians. I have left untold the tiresome accounts of battles, and I have been so unorthodox an
historian as to care very little for thronal succession, if this term can be used where the kings had not
even a stool to sit upon, or for the genealogies, for I have seen them falsified to satisfy ambition.
I have already published an account of the curious Feather Work of the Hawaiians and I now take
up the Stone Work, intending to continue the series with Wood Work, Mats and Baskets, House
Building, Food and Cookery, Games and Sports, Warfare, Dress and Ornament, Religion, Kapa
Making, Cord and Netting, Fisheries, Canoes and Voyages, Medicine, Chronology, Water Rights,
Land Tenure and Kapu. These chapters are partly in order and will be presented as material on
hand seems sufficient, and not necessarily in the above sequence.
In this chapter I have endeavored to illustrate all the genuine old Hawaiian implements, but
constantly in the course of writing new examples have come to me and I cannot suppose that I have
encompassed all within the limits of these few pages. It has been an object wdth me in all this work
to present to those wTho cannot examine the collections in this Museum as clear an idea as possible of
what they comprise, and as this must be rather in the nature of material for farther -study and com¬
parison, I have not encumbered my pages with many references to other works or parallel examples,
which might exhibit the number of books on kindred subjects I may have read, but would add little
to a knowledge of these Hawaiian matters. Where the material exists in this Museum, or is familiar
to me in other museums, for comparison between Hawaiian and other Polynesian examples I have
briefly called attention to the divergence or parallelism, but I have refrained, as far as possible, from
mere conjectural relationships as proving common derivation, preferring to reserve such discussion
until all the evidence at my command in all the departments of this series has been fairly presented.
Alamakani, October 26, 1901.
(336)
Stone Implements of the Ancient
Hawaiians.
A chapter treating also of the ancient Stone Work , Sculpture and such remains as are
at present known either in Museums abroad or on these islands by William
T. Brigham, A.M., DireFlor of the Bernice Fauahi Bishop Museum.
IN the Pacific Region it is not necessary to discuss the tools of primitive man : the
first known inhabitants of the Pacific islands were many thousand years removed
from primitive man, and the delicate questions of tertiary or early quaternary
remains may be wholly eliminated. We need not, even for convenience, divide the
remains of tools used here into stone, bronze or iron periods. There were no such
divisions. Neither iron, copper, nor tin was accessible to the islanders, and from the
time they landed on the bits of land scattered through this ocean, whether it be five or
twenty centuries ago, they used wood, stone, bone or shell for the purposes where modern
civilized man uses the metals or pottery, and this use was universal until little more
than a century ago when iron and foreign tools were introduced here and there among
the islands. Even on the Hawaiian islands metal tools were far from common in the
middle of the last century.*
If in this region there was a counterpart to the fabled Atlantis of the lesser
ocean, in the diluvium that removed its possible inhabitants all their work perished
with them and the little islands which perchance serve as gravestones to the lost con¬
tinent are unmarked by any inscription. The architectural or sculptured remains
today found on Rapanui, Tonga, the Marianas and elsewhere are the work of people
not remote from the present or historic inhabitants. There are tools of rude form and
careless workmanship from the Pacific islands ; forms that unconnected with their
more modern representatives would puzzle the antiquarian, but there is nothing truly
in the nature of incunabula.
If then the mystery of the birth of primitive implements is not to be approached
on these islands; if the oldest of the tools cannot boast an age of more than twenty
centuries, modern indeed in the history of the human race, what have we left ? Simply
the rude implements of an intelligent people who had arrived at a certain stage of
civilization when they left their home and sought another in the Pacific. What they
had formerly must have been greatly modified by the new environment, but in their
♦In 1850 Rev. Mr. Forbes speaking of his district of Kealakeakua said, "Axes are very rare . There is not a native carpenter who
owns a set of tools, to ray knowledge on this island [Hawaii], the population of which is 30,000 or more. Here and there one owns a saw and
an adze ; rarely any however except canoe diggers, and the tools they have usually belong to some chief for whom they work.” Rev. H. T.
Cheever The Island IVnrld of the Pacific , p. 221, New York, 1851.
[337]
(5)
6
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
rude tools and methods perhaps is hidden the most definite clue to the origin of the
Pacific immigrants, but this will not here be discussed for the space at our disposal is
otherwise bespoken. Of all that remains stone is the most durable material but with
all its hardness it bears the imprint of human hands as the hard bone yields to the
softer muscle, and some one may take these stone records, add to them the other works
and customs of the ancient Hawaiians and perhaps solve the enigma of their origin.
r | —
FIG. I. HAWAIIAN STONE HAMMERS.
At present too little is known of the archaic languages as well as customs of the en¬
circling nations or peoples, at the time of the first irruption of the ancestors of the
Pacific islanders, to study the problem with profit.
How much memory of a previous civilization the Pacific immigrants brought
with them we may never discover: certainly they could not have brought much in the
way of household goods, and from what we know of their early voyages the bulk of
their cargo must have been food. Tradition on all the groups points definitely to the
arrival of the first settlers in canoes; the more recent immigration to New Zealand
even preserves the names of the canoes which were later transferred to the tribes
springing from the crews. On landing, a waterworn log, such as may be found on
most beaches, would perhaps be the first implement used in rolling the heavy canoe
[338]
STONE HAMMERS.
7
ashore. The presence of a canoe argues the possession of cutting tools and of con¬
siderable skill in their use, but if any were brought with them these must in time have
worn out, and new ones were to be provided if the newcomers were not to fall back in
their civilization. Axes were perhaps the first tools needed for we may believe that
there were no hostile tribes to drive from most of the islands, and we know that there
were no dangerous animals to exterminate. Shelter and the simplest wants of camp
FIG. 2. AUSTRALIAN (1922) AND MAORI (1539) HAMMERS.
life require the axe and hammer. To make an axe a hammer is needed and a frag¬
ment of stone serves this purpose better than a more civilized man can understand
until he has seen a pebble in a deft hand shape an axe, a pestle or a dish. One frag¬
ment is doubtless more convenient than another and a rounded form easily held in
the hand has been selected by most primitive people. The Maori of New Zealand
twisted a withe around the stone to make a handle (No. 1539, Fig. 2) and the Aus¬
tralian fastened the stone to a simple handle by means of a very tenacious gum (No.
1922, Fig. 2), but the Hawaiian did very good work with the handle Nature has
provided in his strong right arm. Now as the aCtual priority of many of the simple
stone implements must be simply a matter of conjecture, I prefer to leave to everyone
including myself, full liberty to arrange their descriptions in the most convenient order
without prejudice to any theory of sequence.
[339]
8
HAWAIIAN SI ONE IMPLEMENTS.
Hammers. — Taking first then the hammers as the most simple, least artificial,
and perhaps for that reason what we have fewest specimens of in our museums, we
might perhaps with the conceit of modern civilization ask what people without nails
needed hammers for. Perhaps, the earliest use was to drive a stake for which a smooth
stone of rounded shape was more convenient than a rough fragment of stone, as any
man who has ever camped out knows very well. Other stones must be split and chipped
FIG. 3. HAWAIIAN CANOE BREAKERS.
to form axes, and very early in the history of the human race it was found that a sea-
worn pebble was a suitable tool to knap flint or chip clinkstone. Coconuts* in these
tropical regions must be opened in the skilful way that every old native well knows
lest the precious liquid be spilled; kukui nuts must be cracked without bruising the
kernel which is to be used for a candle ; the bark of the shrubs used in making first
strings, afterwards kapa or bark cloth must be beaten ;f then when the wooden bowls
and dishes so common among the Hawaiians cracked or were broken, little pegs (which
were indeed nails) must be carefully hammered into the breach; in the basket work
* Coconuts ( Niu ), the fruit of a palm whose home was on the isthmus of Darien, were probably introduced by the first comers. If planted
immediately in this climate at least eight years would be required to reach the bearing age. Ocean waves would not bring these valuable
nuts to the Hawaiian Islands which are washed by a northeastern current, and are on the extreme northern limit within which this palm
flourishes.
t Although in later days specialized beaters were used for this purpose, as will be shown in the chapter on Kapa Making, at first simple
stone hammers served the purpose as among the Maori and other Polynesian people.
[340]
CANOE BREAKERS— STONE USED.
9
successive loops or layers must be hammered iuto place; the poi pounders were shaped
as we shall see when we come to this indispensable implement, and in fine the uses of
the simple pebbles with slightly flattened sides as shown in Fig. i (4468 and 4469)
were even more general than those of the beautiful but specialized hammer of a modern
tool chest. In the same figure No. 4482 represents a natural fragment of lava used as
a hammer for general purposes in an Hawaiian family for several generations : it is a
convenient tool and has the advantage of the shabby umbrella in being less in demand
by the borrower.
Canoe Breakers. — In general no handle was used on Hawaii as by the Aus¬
tralians, Maori and so many primitive people, but in a certain modified form of hammer
a flexible cord of coconut fibre was substituted for a handle precisely as the rope handle
of the iron ball used at the present time in the athletic exercises of “throwing the
hammer”. Hawaiians used these large and heavy hammers in war
to break canoes. They were also swung in the powerful grasp of the
Hawaiian chief much like the “morning stars” of mediaeval warfare.
In the specimen (7945) on the left of Fig. 3 the knobbed neck to which
the rope was plaited has been broken off, but in the Munich museum
there is a fine specimen, Fig. 4, with the rope attached. The right
hand specimen (2975) had a groove for the encircling cord and it has
also been used in later times as a pounder of roots both edible and
FIG. 4.
medicinal. And here let us remember that the simpler the tool the
more varied its uses. This grooved pebble can be an adtive hammer or a passive sinker
to a net ; a stone cup may be a lamp or a paint pot or even a chafing dish in which to
burn souls, as will be described later when Hawaiian religion is considered. While it
is certainly convenient to call or label a specimen by a definite name, another person
may prefer another designation for what he considers the more important role the
article may play.
Stone Used. — The materials used in fashioning the implements of the Pacific
islanders may be enumerated here. The list is not a long one, if we eliminate intro¬
duced material, as for instance, granite brought as ballast from China and eagerly
sought by the old Hawaiians for sinkers. Of simple minerals we have calcium car¬
bonate in the form of corals and of staladfite in the caves in raised coral reefs, and in a
more compact variety resembling marble where lava streams have run over the raised
and consolidated reef; Calcium sulphate or gypsum also found in caves or raised reefs
and used for the shanks of fish hooks : red ferric oxide or hematite is found in masses
of small size in Hawaiian lava flows and is used for clappers and sinkers. Of the rocks
composed of several minerals the most common and important is basaltic lava in all its
protean forms. From this are made the lamps, dishes, cups, balls, pestles, sinkers,
[341] '
IO
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
etc., and it is found in nearly all the high islands of the Pacific. Found with this is
phonolite or clinkstone, invaluable for adzes and grindstones ; it is of a most compact
structure, brown, gray, or even black in color and is a mixture of sanadine, felspar,
nepheline, hornblend and nosean.* It is found with the older lavas, and on these
islands generally at a considerable elevation; on Mauna Kea at 12,000 feet. As its
name implies it has a very metallic clink, and old worked specimens often simulate
cast steel.
Obsidian or volcanic glass is not a product of the Hawaiian volcanoes but is
found elsewhere in the Pacific and is important for the cutting qualities of its glass¬
like fradtured edges. From Rapanui in the extreme east come the dagger heads, and
BERNICE PAUAH1 BiSHOP MUSEUM-
FIG. 5. OBSIDIAN DAGGER AND DAGGER HEADS.
from the Admiralty group at the western edge of the Pacific region come the spear
heads and the capital daggers of which a specimen is shown in Fig. 5 (No. 1562).
The Rapanui dagger heads, of which three are shown in the same figure, are of coarse,
almost stony obsidian and when used are fastened to short wooden handles. Masses of
clear obsidian from New Zealand but no objedts made from it are in this Museum.
In Mexico this volcanic glass was greatly used in olden times for inlaying as the Maori
used paua shell and also for the keen narrow knives used for circumcision and other
surgical operations.
*The chemical composition of an average specimen is given as : Silica 57.7, Alumina 20.6, Potassa 6.0, Soda 7.0, I.ime 1.5, oxides of Iron
and Manganese 3.5, Magnesia 0.5. Specific gravity about 2.58.
[342]
STONE USED.
1 1
Pumice (basic) is found as a froth of a greenish hue about the Hawaiian volcanic
vents but owing to its extreme friability is not used as is the trachytic pumice drifted
to the Hawaiian shores, perhaps from the Alaskan volcanoes; this is found buried in
the sand beaches on the windward side of Kauai, and has been used from the earliest
times as a polishing material.
Coral limestone is of considerable importance throughout the Pacific region and
is often crystalline, hard and compact without much indication of its original structure;
in this condition it is used for pestles, poi-pounders, dishes, weights, etc. Calcareous
limestone is found compacted of the sand and debris of the reefs blown ashore and
FIG. 6. SLINGSTONES FROM NEW CALEDONIA AND GUAM.
cemented by seolian influences, but it generally is not hard enough for making tools,
although sometimes good as building stone. The coral reef rock was once used largely
by foreigners for building purposes as it can be cut from the reef at low tide with an
axe and on continued exposure to the air it hardens. The first church in Honolulu is
entirely constructed of this material, but I do not know that the old natives made an}T
extensive use of it in the construction of temple walls or even the walls of fish ponds.
Where lava streams have flowed over the raised reef the limestone has almost the
appearance of marble, although never in thick beds. In cases where it is granular,
like coarse sandstone, it is frequently very hard and tenacious, making capital
pounders (Figs. 35 and 37). With this material should be classed the shells so
important on the atolls where no stone of any other nature occurs. The huge Tridacna
[343]
12
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
is a quarry for adzes which vie with those made from clinkstone in durability and
the power of retaining a cutting edge.
While in the eastern Pacific phonolite is the important material for adzes and
chisels, in New Zealand, New Caledonia and other western islands greenstone* largely
takes its place. Nephrite or Jade is frequently used for ornament or amulet and even
for adzes, while an aluminous form, Jadeite, is used for the blades of ceremonial adzes
or axes in many islands of the Bismarck archipelago (PI. LX.).
FIG. 7. HAWAIIAN SUING AND SLINGSTONES.
Slingstones. — A hammer with a detachable handle was widely used in Poly¬
nesia. Next to a club a stone seems a most handy weapon and is often nearer at hand
than a stick. When in the olden time a Hawaiian was obliged to travel into the upper
region of the mountains he was much in the habit of taking a stone in his hand for
protection albeit no more substantial enemy was to be met than the aumakua or spirits
whose domain he placed in the waste places above the forests. The smooth pebble
from the brook with which the Jewish shepherd boy slew the Philistine giant was very
primitive as a weapon beside the slingstones of the Pacific islanders. Where the im¬
proved form originated or who was the inventor may never be known ; certain it is that
all through the Pacific an elongated form with conical terminals was in use. Far away
* A fuller account of greenstone will be given below in the notice of the Maori implements and ornaments.
[344]
SL IN GS 7 ONES.
i3
in the Mediterranean the Balearic islanders were sought as the most skilful slingers in
the Roman, Greek and Carthaginian armies, and the nux plumbea of the Romans was
not unlike the stone projeCtile used by the Hawaiians.
The New Caledonian on the west had the lightest and most acute slingstones
while the Hawaiian in the east had the largest and heaviest, and in both cases, as may
be seen from the illustrations (Figs. 6 and 7, and Plate XXXI.) the stones were almost
always double cones. Rolled patiently between flat stones with motion from right to
left as well as back and forth, the stone fragment gradually assumed the form best
suited to insure directness of aim as the missile could be made to revolve on its axis,
like a rifle ball, by the skill of the slinger. The average weight of the New Caledonian
stones in this Museum is 1.56 oz., and their length is 1.75 in.; of the Hawaiian 4.73 oz.
and 2.65 in. The material of the former is a sort of steatite, of the latter lava, and of
those brought from Guam by Mr. A. Seale, stalaCtite. It will be noted that all these
stones average lighter than cricket balls (5.5 oz.) or base balls (5.2 oz.).
The collection of slingstones shown in Fig. 7 was found on the grounds sur¬
rounding the Bishop Museum beneath a large fragment of lava which was being removed
for building purposes. This was near the ancient path from Waikiki to Ewa, on the
top of the slight ascent from the marshes. Perhaps the warrior had here placed his
ammunition to drive back some enemy using the trail and death had claimed him
before his stones had all been slung.
The following table will show the size and
Plate XXXI
4822. Compact lava, 2.65X1.6X1.5 in., 5 oz. 4829.
4814. Brown lava. 3X 1.9X 1 .7 in., 7 oz. 4816.
4818. Smooth finish, 2.85X1.7 in., 6 oz. 4812.
4813. Compact lava, 3. 1X2.1 in., 10 oz. 4817.
4820. Lava, 3.4X 1 -9 in., 10 oz. 8051
4824. Grey, clay-like, 2.7X 1.8X 1.7 in., 6.5 oz. 8049.
4826. Red, porous lava, 2. 4X1.7 in., 5.2 oz. 7648.
4823. Clay (palolo), 2.6Xi-5in., 4 oz. 4819.
4821. Clay (palolo), 3X1. 6X 1.4 in., 4.5 oz. 8048.
4815. Rolled lava, 2. 6X 1. 9X 1.7 in., 6.5 oz. 4827.
4828. Cellular lava, 2. 4X1.6 in., 5 oz. 7749.
4825. Claylike, 2.5X 1 -6X 1 .5 in., 4.5 oz. 4842.
4830. Cellular lava, 2.3X 1.5X 1.4 in., 4 oz.
P'igure 7.
4831. Rolled lava, 2.35X1.9X1.8 in., 6.5 oz. 4837.
4832. Rolled lava, 2. iX 1.6 in., 4.5 oz. 4838.
4833. Rolled lava, 2.1X1.65 in., 4.5 oz. 4839.
4834. Cellular, 2. iX 1. 5X 1.4 in., 3-5 oz- 4840.
4835. 2X 1.65X 1.5 in., 4 oz. 4841.
4836. Well-rolled, 2.2X 1.55X 1 .45 in., 4 oz.
Average 2.65X 1.64X 1.54 in., 4.73 oz. The heaviest weighs 10 oz., the lightest 2,7 oz,
[345]
weight of the stones figured : —
Smooth, 2.4X 1 .4X 1.2 in., 3.2 oz.
Rough rolled, 2. 4X1.5 in., 3.7 oz.
Brown, smooth, 2. 4X1. 8 in., 6 oz.
Grey lava, 2.6X 1.6X 1.4 in., 4.5 oz.
Ground, 2.6X1. 6X1.5 in., 4.7 oz.
Very irregular, 2.8X1.5X14 in., 5 oz.
Rough, tufa-like, 2.3X 1.7X 1.6 in., 5.2 oz.
Lava, 1.9X 1.65 in., 3.7 oz.
Cellular lava, 1 .9X 1 .45 X 1.2 in., 3 oz.
Lava, 2X1. 5X1. 3 in., 3 oz.
Flattened, 2.1X1.5X1.1 in., 2.7 oz.
Round, rough (Noa?), 1.5 in., 3 oz.
Cellular, 1. 7X1.5 in., 3 oz.
Defective, 2.4X1.65X1.5 in., 4.2 oz
Nearly round, 1.9X 1.7 in., 4 oz.
Cellular, 2.2X1. 7X1.6 in., 4.7 oz.
Cellular, 2.1X i-5X 1.4 in., 3.2 oz.
i4
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
The simple sling of pandanus was the most inartificial of any nsed in the Pacific.
The Caroline islanders had a handsome sling of braided coconut fibre. The form of
sling and their use in warfare does not concern us at present and we may pass to the
next stone implement.*
Anchors. — Certainly the anchors used by the Hawaiians before the advent of
iron were hardly manufactured. Often a mere stone to which a cord of coconut fibre
could be attached served the purpose of holding the canoe temporarily on the shoals
near shore. More commonly the canoe of a chief was provided with a stone through
FIG. 8. HAWAIIAN ANCHOR BELONGING TO ONE OF KAMEHAMEHA’S CANOES.
which was a natural hole (Fig. 8) a form not hard to find among volcanic rocks.
When a convenient hole could not be found a strong net of olona was put around a
stone of suitable size and the painter made fast in this way. In sea water abounding
in marine worms canoes could not be left long at rest in the water but were drawn out
on the beach, when not in adtual use, so the need of an anchor was less; in fishing it
was sometimes important.
Grindstones. — In New Zealand the presence of sandstone ledges brought
together workmen of various tribes to grind or polish their adzes, etc. The same was
the case in Australia, but the Hawaiian had no sandstone fit for the purpose and he
used the flat slabs of phonolite which often present a parallel cleavage and so form
plates sometimes thin enough to use as covering slates. The hardness sometimes
*The use of slings was general all over the world, and from the earliest times, and they were, before the invention of firearms, no
contemptible weapon. In the chapter on Hawaiian warfare their effectiveness as well as their various forms will be considered. The battle
of Nuuanu (1795) was perhaps the last great conflict in which Hawaiians made use of slings.
[346]
GRINDSTONES.
*5
made the stone a whetstone rather than a grindstone and the labor must have been
immense. In Fig. 9 may be seen examples of grindstones long used and now in the
Bishop Museum. The illustrations are fair examples of the worn surfaces of Hawaiian
grindstones. In all that have been observed there is an absence of grooves ; the
abraded surface is always an even, shallow concave.
Grindstones are among the oldest of Hawaiian stone-working tools and their
use (except for an occasional knife-sharpening) had ceased long before I had any
knowledge of the islanders. That stone balls (Fig. 10) were formed by long-continued
]
FIG. 9. HAWAIIAN GRINDSTONES.
rolling between stones of this class is well known, and I am assured that two long narrow
stones like the lower one in Fig. 9 were used for this purpose, a man squatting in the
native manner at each end and communicating a reciprocating motion to the upper
stone as in the operation of sawing. Without cutting sand the operation must have
been a tedious one, yet the many specimens extant show that a great deal of this grind¬
ing must have been done. The finish is by no means the same on all, but the use to
which the balls were put in the games required a fairly spherical periphery. Immense
balls of a generally spherical form but rough surface are known as “puts” of some
native Hercules, and these are generally unworked and often merely the residuary
nucleus of a decomposing mass of lava. One very fine one once in a private collection
on Molokai was fabled to have been rolled nearly the length of that island, destroying
forests in its course. Another in the Bishop Museum more than a foot in its smaller
[347]
i6
HAWAIIAN SI ONE IMPLEMENTS.
diameter, and weighing eighty-seven pounds was used as a test of strength on Kanai.
The largest in the illustration (No. 3588) was used as a bowl, is of good surface, weighs
twenty-two pounds, and is seven and a half inches in diameter.
Similar but flatter grinding stones were used on other groups, as the Solomon,
Gilbert and Caroline islands, to grind the shell money of those places. In that opera¬
tion the fragments of sea shells or of coconut shells were roughly rounded by the
hammer, drilled and strung on the midrib of palm leaflets, often a score or more at a
time, and rolled until polished. Specimens in the Bishop Museum from all these
FIG. IO. STONE BALLS USED IN GAMES.
islands show great skill and a beautiful finish. The flat stones on which the Australian
ground edible seeds and shaped adzes in turn must be classed with these Hawaiian
grindstones. In no case have I seen any ornamentation or definite shaping such as
the Mexican both in olden time and now gives to the metate ; all the grindstones of
the Pacific islanders were stri fitly utilitarian.
Polishing Stones. — With the exception of adze-sharpening and ball-rolling,
the large flat grindstones were not much in demand, the smaller stones, even round
pebbles taking their place as more portable and more convenient of application to any
surface however irregular. Here again the diversit}" of uses for the same simple tool
is well seen, the pebblestone hammer being very generally, especiallj7 by the Maori,
used for a polisher.
[348]
POLISHING STONES.
i7
For coarse abrasion of comparatively softer substances the cellular lava of the
Hawaiian volcanoes affords a capital means. The hard, glassy, silicious crust on the
flows is full of cells and generally occurs in very convenient tablets as may be seen in
Plate XXXIV., No. 3053. When these are partly worn so as to open the first layer of
subcuticular cells a most efficient rasp is at hand. This hard cellular lava also occurs
in thicker layers and from these, besides a common rasp, a tool of very ancient applica¬
tion wras made as shown in Fig. 11. The Hawaiians were a race addi&ed to bodily
cleanliness, and as they had neither soap nor a very suitable sand, this evenly rough
: . jahi :,;shop museum.
FIG. II. HAWAIIAN BATH RUBBERS.
stone was their best detergent much used in the olden days. The two specimens
figured (4248 and 4249) were used by the Kamehameha family and the spherical cells
are still blocked by the abraded royal cuticle. In the same connedtion pumice was used
as a fridtional depilatory, as well as to reduce callosities of the skin. Large blocks of
pumice were used to remove the bristles from pigs before baking. Another convenient
use of the flat plates of cellular lava was for files when broken into strips and rounded.
The beautifully finished Hawaiian bone and shell fish hooks were wrought with these
apparently clumsy implements which were also required to keep them sharp. The
apuapii anai makau or fish hook sharpeners (Fig. 12) were found all over the group,
but from their small size and brittle nature not many are preserved in colledtions.
As a rule the cellular lava served to do the rough work on the wooden bowls
rather than the polishing proper, and the same may7 be said of the coral blocks which
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vou. I., No. 4. — 2. [349]
i8
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
AM
came next in roughness. In fine work the usual succession was fine coral, or puna ,
pohaku eleku a rather soft, brittle stone, rough pumice or ana oahi (baked pumice),
olai , oio and lau ulu or dried leaves of the breadfruit tree. A large variety of polishing
stones may be found on Plates XXXII. -XXXV. The oio was a stone used especially
to polish canoes. It was early discovered that the shape of the polishing stone con¬
tributed to its efficiency and the smoother back and the raised knob, ridge or handle
soon followed. On the
hard woods of Hawaii
a long continued rub-
k bing was necessary.
The glassy polish af¬
fected by the modern
fanciers of Hawaiian
bowls was, of course,,
never found on the old
dishes or bowls. The
polish given by the
skilful old Hawaiian
with the breadfruit
leaves was more last¬
ing as well as more
tasteful than the mod¬
ern French polish. The
plates will show fully
the various forms and
texture of the more common polishing stones and a minute description is unnecessary.
The patient application of whatever medium was the secret of the beautiful finish
of the best of the old umeke or bowls.
Door Stone. — Not what is usually meant by that term, but here a literal
translation of the Hawaiian name Pohaku puka. As the Hawaiian house made of a
light frame covered with grass could not be safely bolted when the small entrance door
was closed at night, an ingenious contrivance was sometimes used which, if it would
not prevent housebreaking would probably wreak vengeance on the intruder. It may
be stated that the door was very low, seldom exceeding three feet in height, and one
entered as a quadruped. Across the way was stretched a cord over a short peg near
the bottom of one door post and by this cord was suspended direCtly over the entrance
a heavy stone. One in the Bishop Museum is shown in Fig. 13. It weighs 36.7 pounds
and would be likely to disable if not kill outright any person on whose back it might
fall. This is the only mantrap among the Hawaiians which has come to my notice.
[350]
4477
4478
4479
FIG. 12. HAWAIIAN FILES FOR FISH HOOKS.
SQUID-HOOK SINKERS.
19
Squid-hook Sinkers. — Among the products of the sea few were more gener¬
ally acceptable to the Hawaiians than the squid or hee. Both fresh and dried it was a
favorite concomitant of poi the national
dish. To capture it on the reefs where
it abounds, a peculiar hook was used
which will be more fully described in
the chapter on the Fisheries, but here
it must be shown (Fig. 14 ) to explain
the use of the stone sinker. The spindle
to which the bone hook is attached has
at the opposite end the stone sinker
bound face to face with a cowrie, usu¬
ally Cyprcea tigrina , which is a favorite
bait for squid. When lowered to the
bottom the stone falls beneath and is
hidden by the shell : the hook is partly
concealed by the blades of grass bound
to the spindle near it. When the squid
grasps the coveted shell, the fisher pulls
the line and if all goes as planned, the
hook enters the soft body of the mollusk
which is then drawn in through the ink
which it emits. In Tahiti, instead of
a whole shell, fragments are bound like
shingles over the sinker which is less
carefully cut than by the old Hawaiians.
Plates XXXVI.-XXXIX. show a large
series of these sinkers which are of vari¬
ous material, even foreign stone from
ship ballast. No relic of the old stone
time is more abundant than these squid-
hook sinkers, and the abundance is due
to the fact that they were easily made,
and like poi pounders their use continues
to the present day. I have seen the old
stones used as sinkers to a net as well.
FIG. 13. HAWAIIAN DOOR STONE.
Stone Knives. — While the native bambu furnished convenient knives very
generally in use whether to trim kapa or circumcise a lad, stone was also in use for
heavier work such as carving a dog or pig. No specimens are known that show any
[351]
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
2o
care in working-; simply a split stone with a more or less sharp edge not enhanced by
grinding and unprovided with an}7 handle as shown in Fig. 15. Snch a rnde imple¬
ment could hardly be
classed with edge tools.
It was not so far advanced
as the rough flensing
knives of the Chatham
islands Moriori, where the
stone is shaped to some
extent and the handle is
formed. Fig. 16 shows
these knives used by the
Moriori for cutting the
blubber from whales or
other oil yielding mam¬
mals. Still less could
they compare with the
more finished obsidian
knives from the Admir¬
alty group shown in
Fig. 4. Probably not
much use was made of the
Hawaiian stone knives
for they are very rare.
Knives of wood with in¬
serts of shark teeth will
be described in the chap¬
ter on Tools and Manu¬
factures. They were less
common on this group
than on the Gilbert Isl¬
ands. The more impor¬
tant cutting tools, adzes
and axes I leave for the
fig. 14. Hawaiian squid-hook. present to be considered
later as perhaps the most finished product among Hawaiian stone implements.
Clubs and Pestles. — Warfare and Peace. As with all primitive people these
states were not long sundered in time or space, their symbols may be considered together.
Clubs and pestles in Hawaii were often of very similar form, and whether a given example
[352]
CLUBS AND PESTLES.
21
as No. 4798 in Plate XL., or better still No. 4657 in Fig. 23, was weapon or tool must
be decided by the finish and the abrasion of the grinding end. I believe this latter
specimen to be a club ( Newa ) both from the superior finish, unusual on a pestle,
and from the absence of any sign of abrasion at the butt. It was a heavy effective
weapon made of compact lava.
Another form of newa was free from any ambiguity. Formed of stone like the
last, it had four wings or ridges at the head, and although this example (Plate XL.,
No. 4785) was not so carefully wrought as some, it was a favorite form and similar
clubs of heavy kauila wood are in the Bishop Museum. What I believe to have been
BERNICE PAUAHI BISHOP MUSEUM.
FIG. 15. HAWAIIAN STONE KNIFE.
a later adaptation of this pattern has been described* by Charles H. Read, Ksq.,
F. A. S., from the Vancouver collection in the British Museum. A stone head with
four ridges is bound to a baton of kauila wood by cords of olona. In the Bishop
Museum are two heads of stone (Fig. 18) of which No. 4789 closely resembles
the one in the Vancouver collection; it weighs 16 oz. The other, No. 4790, is barrel¬
shaped, 4.4 in. long, and weighs 19 oz. Four deep grooves receive the attaching cords
and the base is slightly hollowed out to receive the end of the wooden handle. There
is another head of much better finish in private hands in Honolulu, in which the at¬
tachment to the wood was facilitated by four knobs at the base. I have examined this
through the kindness of a third party but have been unable to obtain either cast or
photograph of the specimen which is said to have been found in the district of Kohala
on Hawaii. It was brought to me for a name, and there may be other similar specimens
♦Journal of the Anthropological Institute, XXI., p. 105, pi. x.
[353]
22
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
BERNICE PAUAHI BISHOP MUSEUM.
lying unknown and negledted in private hands. Those in the British Museum and
those here figured from the Bishop Museum are the only specimens known in museums.
On the same plate (XL.) is figured a club of far better finish than those hitherto
attributed to the Hawaiians (No. 4786). It has, as can be seen on the plate, a smooth
finish and no knob on the handle end, but instead is perforated by boring from each
, side. Through the bevelled
hole thus formed a strong
braided cord of olona is
passed, showing that besides
its use as a common club
the weapon could be hurled
as a bola to entangle the
legs of an adversary. This
latter use was a favorite one
among the Hawaiian war¬
riors and in Fig. 19, No.
4788, is shown a stone cut
with some art to effect the
same end. Its sedtion is
flat and the distal end is
broadened and thickened at
the edges ; there is a suit¬
able knob by w'hich to make
fast the cord. To return to
our club on PI. XL. The
sedtion is not round but
elliptical, connecting it with
the flattened clubs called
mere by the Maori who
greatly prize them ; indeed
hey are often made of jade of considerable intrinsic value. The Bishop Museum pos¬
sesses one of beautifully clear light green jade 17.2 inches long. Of this flattened form
are the Moriori clubs shown in Plate LXII. which seem to show the original form
afterwards more or less modified by their Maori successors into patu and mere.
Two other weapons, 4793 and 4794, are shown also on Fig. 19. These were
grasped in the hand as a reinforcement and gave the fist a dangerous solidity. They
could, according to other native authorities, be used as bo/as. I have seen only these
two which are quite distinct in material and finish.
[354]
FIG. 16. MORIORI STONE FLENSING KNIVES.
CLUBS AND PESTLES.
23
Stone club heads are common enough in other groups, especially in the western
Pacific where the Solomon islanders make very elaborate short clubs with a round un¬
pierced stone head concealed within basket work. The wooden handle is often elabo¬
rately inlaid with pearl shell. The New Guinea men make the well-known spherical
club heads fastened to the stick with gum in which are imbedded small shells or
squares of pearl shell. Dr. Giglioli has described these clubs in a learned and com¬
plete essay.* The neighboring inhabitants of the Bismarck Archipelago make heads
of various forms as shown in Fig. 20.
The golegole (No. 1571) is rare, but
the star-shaped forms are more com¬
mon and show great care and patience
on the part of the maker. It should
be noted that this last form is now fre¬
quently imitated and with modern tools
is not difficult to shape, but the finish
will generally betray the work to the
initiated. I do not think that this star
form has any connection with the stone
stars of the Peruvians described b}r
Squier and others. The stone stars
described by Whymper as common in
Ecuador and figured by himf have no
cylindrical body from which the star
arms radiate as in the club heads of the
western Pacific. None have more than
six rays, and in some these rays are
very short. In weight they vary from
five to twenty ounces, and while the
Ecuadorean stars may have been used FIG- compound Hawaiian club.
From Read.
as club heads (at least the heavier
ones), it is quite as likely they were ornaments or symbols connected with star worship.
The disk clubs of the New Caledonians belong to the same class and are usually made
of jade, although this is sometimes of the coarsest grade.
And here I may be permitted to digress so far as to mention the jade working
of the Maori and New Caledonian. Greenstone is not found on the Hawaiian islands,
hence the material wTas not described with the Hawaiian stones in the earlier part of
this chapter, but in New Zealand, New Caledonia and New Guinea the products in the
*Le Mazze con testa sferoidale di pietra delta Nuova Brettagna, dette Palao. Prof. Enrico H. Giglioli, Archivio per L’Antropologia
e la Etnologia, Vol. XXVII., p. 17. Firenze, 1897.
t Travels Amongst the Great Andes of the Equator, by Edward Whymper, p. 269.
[355]
24
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
shape of adzes, clubs, amulets or ornaments are among the choicest of worked stone
objedts and are found in every museum.
The middle island of the New Zealand group has been sometimes named for the
greenstone or pounamu found there, but the name properly belongs only to the quar¬
ries, — Te wai pounamu. Many grades of greenstone are worked, but the choice, deli¬
cately colored and somewhat translucent varieties usually called jade are the ones of
present interest. These are very hard and fine-grained and lend themselves to careful
and patient work as few other stones. Dr. A. B. Meyer the distinguished Director of the
FIG. l8. HAWAIIAN CLUB HEADS.
Dresden Museum has published* full information on the physical and chemical char¬
acteristics of this stone which in its varieties has many names as jade, jadeite, melanite,
nephrite, greenstone, serpentine, chloro-melanite, etc. From Dr. Meyer’s fine work
I borrow three analyses (by Frenzel) to show the constant proportion of silica in speci¬
mens from different localities : —
Nciv
Guinea
Adze.
New Zealand Adze.
New Caledonian
Silica,
56.80
56.30
55- 80
Alumina,
16.25
Iron oxide,
7-53
5.62
5-67
Manganese,
trace
....
Lime,
5.60
14.30
15.80
Magnesia,
3-i3
21-95
20.54
Soda,
12.06
....
Water,
0.25
2.90
2.10
Sp. gr., 3.16
101 .62
Sp.gr.
2.98 101.07 Sp.
gr., 3.06 99.91
* Jadeit— und Nephrit— Objecte. B. Asieti, Oceaniep und Africa. Konigliches ethnographisehes Museum zu Dresden. Leipzig, 1883.
[356]
CLUBS AND PESTLES.
25
In the second and third specimens lime and magnesia take the place of alumina
and soda in the first, otherwise the body material silica and the coloring element iron
oxide remain essentially the same.
In New Zealand the principal forms of the worked stone are mere , hei-tiki , toki or
adze and ear ornaments; in New Guinea chiefly the adze, and in New Caledonia adze,
disk-club and beads of a spherical or flattened form. Dr. Meyer gives illustrations of
these in Plates V. and VI. of the work cited, and the Maori articles are well shown in
a vrork by Hamilton.* So slow was the abrasion in the rude grinding that it is said
to have taken more than a generation to finish a mere. The tools were blocks of sand-
FIG. 19. HAWAIIAN STONE WEAPONS.
stone rubbed slowly by hand, water dropping on the stone meanwhile. One form of
ear ornament resembling a capital J in the type called Gothic was of peculiarly difficult
workmanship. The odd-looking heitikis with one-sided heads were worked largely
with drills and sand ; they had drilled holes for suspension from the neck.
Of all these forms none seem closely related to the Hawaiian except certain clubs
and pounders. I am in doubt whether to class a certain Hawaiian shell ornament in
the Bishop Museum with the heitiki, but as it is an unique specimen I have decided to
relegate it to the chapter on Ornament.
An antique form of Maori club is shown in Fig. 21 which both in material and
shape recalls the Hawaiian pestle, but the handle end is in both examples ornamented
with human heads, and one (No. 1514) has two rude masks on the body as well, while
both have the butt more rounded than in the Hawaiian pestle. Of better workmanship
* Maori Art, by A. Hamilton. New Zealand Institute, Wellington, N. Z.: 4to., Pis. XEV., XLVI.
[357]
26
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
PESILES.
2 7
are the beaters shown in Fig. 22; both are of very dark greenstone and smoothly fin¬
ished. The first, No. 1513, is a paoi or pestle to crush fern root, a process for which
wooden pestles are more commonly used, and the other, No. 13 1, comes to the Bishop
Museum labelled “Hand
Club”, but it certainly
could have been used as
a pestle, while its short¬
ness (9.6 in.) would be
inconvenient for a club.
Pestles. — On the Ha¬
waiian Group there was
no corn to be ground so
that we find neither the
roller and nictate of the
Mexican nor the long
pestle of the Amerind;
nor did the Hawaiian
grind the fern root which
he usually baked, but he
had the nut of the Aleu¬
rites molnccana or kukui
and the kamani Calophyl-
lum inophyllum to crush
both for food and for the
oil. Here also, unlike the
custom of the southern
islands, the awa ( Piper
rnethysticum ) was ground,
not chewed. The grind- ■ .
ing of bait for fishes was
always done with wooden
pestles which will come
properly under Fisheries.
As a general thing the Hawaiian pestle had no knob at the handle end, but some
of good workmanship, shown in Plates XLI. and XLII., have definite bosses. In some
cases the knob is replaced by depressions on opposite sides of the stem as may be seen
in No. 7999 of Fig. 23. The rudest form, which I believe to be very ancient, is shown
in No. 4483 of the same figure; it is simply a convenient pebble worn by use, and I have
[359]
FIG. 21. ANCIENT MAORI CLUBS.
28
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
found it a suitable implement to crush kernels of nuts or the stems of medicinal plants
Where choice intervened the kahuna lapaait or aboriginal “medicine-man” always
selected ivory or bone pestles for comminuting his drugs, — the material gave more
power to the drug. Several ivory pounders are in the Bishop Museum as well as a
medicine cup made from
the vertebra of a small
whale.
Returning to Fig. 23,
we have in No. 4660 an¬
other primitive pestle
found in the ruins of an
ancient heiau or temple.
It is of hard cellular lava
rudely wrought, but con¬
siderably worn by use.
Next to it is a very choice
specimen, No. 4657, which
equals in the workman¬
ship the best Maori speci¬
mens; are we to consider
this the new a or hand
club of some chief? I have
already mentioned the
difficulty encountered in
attempting to distinguish
between the weapon and
the tool. The curious fig¬
ure in the lower right
hand corner, No. 7947,
is what remains of a brok¬
en pestle which by the
hand of a modern forger
has been converted into the semblance of an ancient god. Too many such occur, and
the Portuguese or Japanese stonecutters make many a dishonest dollar from the in¬
experienced collector of Hawaiian curiosities, and the native of the soil is not free from
this cheat. So closely are genuine stone dishes or idols imitated that it is one of the
most difficult matters to pass judgment upon, even for the few experts, and it is safer
for the tyro to reject any specimen even if be disinterred before his e3^es.
[360]
FIG. 22. MAORI PAOI (NO. 1513) AND CLUB (NO. 131).
PESTLES ,
29
BERNICE PAUAHI BISHOP MUSEUM.
t:
FIG. 23. HAWAIIAN PESTLES.
[36l]
30
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
The pestles in Plates XLI. and XLII., also in Figs. 24 and 25 are fair examples
of the Hawaiian form, and while in modern times certain ones are often designated
“noni-pounders” I doubt there was any distinction in ancient times and the same stone
ground kukui nuts for oil or the awa root for the hot and exhilarating drink or, yet
again, noni ( Morinda citrifolici ) for dye or medicine. Some, as will be seen, are
FIG. 24. HAWAIIAN PESTLES.
flattened at the butt, not always by long use; most, however, are rounded to fit more
closely the bottom of the mortar.
A much more common class of pestles was shorter, conical in shape, and held in
the hand. These mullers, shown in Fig. 26, were generally used to pulverize charcoal
or to grind ochres for paints, or to crush berries or succulent stems for dyes. Often no
mortar was required but a shallow dish or a flat rock served as nether millstone. Older
in point of development than the taller brethren, they serve as a transitional form to
the pohaku kni poi or poi pounders, one of the most characteristic of Hawaiian stone
implements and one that survives to this day without a rival in the hand manufacture
of the national food.
[362]
PHALLIC EMBLEMS.
3i
Phallic Emblems. — The almost universal worship of the Phallus in early
stages of human development extended to the tribes inhabiting the Pacific, and was
prevalent among the Hawaiians. The worship is not to be considered here but the
stone emblems of it must be noticed for some of them are liable to be mistaken for
pestles. I have never found the curious nail which my friend Dr. Kramer describes
/
FIG. 25. HAWAIIAN PESTLES.
from Samoa* but there are in the Bishop Museum many phallic objedts of undoubted
antiquity. The stone lamps offer many illustrations and the pohaku eho are sometimes
found buried or otherwise hidden. In one case only have I seen the female element
represented and in that lingam it appeared as a well wrought ring through which
passed, but wholly detached, a conical stone similar to the larger of those shown in
Plate LXXV. Many of the objedts in this plate are well made and some are of great
size as if intended to occupy a temple, and not merely a private sandtuary. In the
Berlin Museum (Arning colledtion) is a male organ of such naturalistic treatment that
I infer it was made in later times and not intended as an object of worship, for in all
sacred phalli a very conventional treatment is shown. The images of the Hawaiian
*Der Steinnagel von Samoa, von Dr. Augustin Kramer. Globus Bd. LXXX., Nr. 1 (1901).
[363]
32
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
gods, especially those carved from wood are often obscene to an extreme only equalled
in New Zealand among the Maori or in Japan.
Near Kalae on Molokai is a curious sculptured stone having at first glance the
appearance of being waterworn. It is, however, on the top of a hill where no water
conld have done the work. I photographed it in 1889 (Fig. 27) and learned from the
residents of the neighboring ranch that it was once the object of great veneration
under the name of Kanlnnanahoa. It has been carved to a great extent, but how much
the natural conformation of the rock contributed to its present form cannot be told.
FIG. 26. HAWAIIAN STONE MULLERS.
Dr. Kramer has described* this also as phallic. It is in a region now depopulated but
once with a large native population as the remains of temples and other structures
indicate. In its present desolation and neglect, this once venerated stone is made the
bearer of various names of tramps. It is as high as an ordinary man.
Mortars. — Before following this line of form development we must turn back
to fit the pestles with their mortars. I do not know of any pot holes in the rocks out¬
side of torrent beds that were used for mortars as was so common among the Amerinds
of New England.
The simplest mortar in the Bishop Museum is shown in Plate XEIII., No. 1227.
It is 15 inches in its largest diameter and bears marks of considerable use. It seems
’'Globus, Band LXXIII.
[3M]
MOR7ARS.
33
to have been a small boulder or nodule of very cellular lava, and was rudely fashioned
more by use than in the original intent. It is considered an awa mortar, because of
its chief use, but would have been convenient for any trituration. Of similar form, but
better workmanship, are the mortars shown in the lower group on the same plate. The
last one of the group has actually been worn out by long use and the bottom has dropped
away.* The middle one shows an approach to the more finished specimens we will next
consider, and which show a remarkable degree of patient and understanding work.
Both inside and out the finish is good, but within the shape is very perfect, being
FIG. 27. KAULUNANAHOA ON MOLOKAI.
almost almond-sliape in section. The five mortars shown in Fig. 28 were all found on
the island of Kauai, hidden in the earth within the limits of the Kealia sugar planta¬
tion, and were turned up by the plow in cultivating for cane. Mr. George H. Dole was
at the time manager of this plantation and added them to his private collection, most
of which afterwards came to the Bishop Museum. The dimensions of these rare speci¬
mens, for I do not know of any similar in any of the museums, are as follows, in the
order in which they are placed in the figure. Height and diameter in inches: —
No. 1222, 13.5X6.2: 1224, 8. 5X7. 2; 1221, 7. 2X7. 2; 1223, 8X8; 1225, 11.5X7.
These were generally used for grinding kukui or kamani nuts for both oil and
the relish called inanwna. I have traced the place of their manufacture to a hill above
* It is not impossible that the bottom has been broken intentionally to prevent subsequent use.
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 4. — 3. [365]
34
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
Makaweli on Kauai where there are many fragments both of the lava used for mortars
and the clinkstone of which adzes were shaped. To this factory I shall have occasion
to revert when describing the adze making. What the exact process of manufacture
was I do not know, nor can any of the old natives satisfy me. Certainly the method
was not a perfect one for many failures are recorded unintentionally among the refuse
heaps of this fadtor y. One that I brought from there is shown in Fig. 29 and it will
be seen that the sides were split off uniformly all round, a condition that is rather
puzzling, for the bottom of the cup seems about finished, and the accident must have
occurred when the finishing touches were being applied. It can hardly have happened
FIG. 28. HAWAIIAN STONE MORTARS.
by a fall on to the stone ledge that crops out here and there within the limits of the
workshop. There is the ruin and my readers may adopt such explanation as seems good.
That the stone worker was often deceived in the quality of his selected stone is shown
by the many failures after much work has been expended, but when the uncertain nature
of volcanic rock is considered and its common want of homogeneity is known, it is not
surprising. Many an experienced sculptor has been bitterly disappointed in his chosen
block of Carrera marble and after much labor has come upon a hopeless flaw.
The shallow cups or dishes to be used with the mullers are shown in Fig. 30.
One (2979) is shown in reverse to exhibit the four legs. Most of the others are very
shallow and were probabty used for the paints for the impression of the bambu stamps
on kapa ; hence they are abundant, or at least their fragments are, for each kapa maker
must have had at least three of these cups when printing. There is little variation in
[366]
MORTARS.
35
the form as they were objects of utility not ornament. The following table will give
the length and weight of the Hawaiian stone pestles shown in the preceding figures:
Figure 23.
4483. Rude form, a mere pebble, which has been 7999. Compact lava, 7.5 in. long, 2 lbs. 8 ozs.
used considerably, 6.5 in. long, 2 lbs. 8 ozs. 4660. Cellular lava, 9.5 in. long, 4 lbs. 10 ozs.
4657. Most finished specimen in the collection, 7947- Compact lava ; the broken pestle has been
15.5 in. long, 6 lbs. 2 ozs. converted into an idol.
FIG. 29. MORTAR BROKEN IN MAKING.
Figure 24.
4652. Cellular lava, round, 12 in. long, weighs 7946.
4 lbs. 7 ozs. 4646.
4655. Cellular lava, 11.6 in. long, 3 lbs. 4 ozs. 4645.
Cellular lava, 11.3 in. long, 5 lbs.
Compact lava, 19.5 in. long, 5 lbs. 7 oz.
Cellular lava, 9.5 in. long, 3 lbs. 12 ozs.
4658. Very compact lava, scored on base, 13.7
in. long, weighs 5 lbs. 13 ozs.
4644. Compact lava flattened, 12 in., 5 lbs. 8 ozs.
4653. Cellular lava, four grooves on base, 11.9
in., 5 lbs. 8 ozs.
Cellular lava, W cut on side, 11.5 in., 5
lbs. 3 ozs.
Compact lava, round, 11.5 in., 5 lbs.
7 ozs.
Figure 25.
4651.
1
4659-
[367]
36 HAWAIIAN SI ONE IMPLEMENTS.
Figure 26.
4632. Compact lava, 6.2 in. long, 34.7 ozs
4633. Compact lava, 6.1 in. long, 42.5 ozs
4634. Compact lava, 6.7 in. long, 45 ozs.
4635. Compact lava, 7 in. long, 37.2 ozs.
4636. Compact lava, 6.1 in. long, 48 ozs.
4637. Coral rock, 5.6 in. long, 28.5 ozs.
4638. Cellular lava, 5 in. long, 32 ozs.
4639. Compact, well made, 5.7 in. long, 47 ozs.
4640. Compact, 4 in. long, 23 ozs.
4641. Compact, 4 in. long, 23 ozs.
4656. Coarse lava, 4 in. long, 23 ozs.
4114. Elliptical section, 4.5 in. long, 46.7 ozs.
FIG. 30.
STONE CUPS
USED
FOR GRINDING.
Plate
XU.
4796.
Cellular
lava,
13.2
in. long,
4 lbs. 2 ozs.
479S.
Cellular
lava,
14.7
in. long,
6 lbs
4797-
Cellular
lava,
15.8
in. long,
6 lbs. 9 ozs.
5148.
Cellular
lava,
13.8
in. long,
4 lbs
Plate
XIII.
4649.
Cellular lava,
13 iu.
long, 5 lbs. 3 ozs.
4647.
Cellular lava,
12.7
in. long,
6 lbs.
4654-
Cellular lava,
12.5
in. long,
6 lbs. 8 ozs.
4650.
Cellular
lava,
i3-4
in. long,
6 lbs
5i49-
Cellular
lava,
1 1 -7
in. long,
5 lbs. 2 ozs.
Poi Pounders (Na pohaku kui poi). — We come now to an implement very
prominently identified with Polynesian life: one that had its beginnings with the race
and which will perhaps be the last of ancient things to fall from the hands of the dying
people. Wherever the making of poi reached there were the stone ponnders of one
general pattern but with many local variations. Where breadfruit takes the place of
[368]
POI POUNDERS.
37
kalo, as in some Micronesian islands, the edible substance is pounded with similar
pestles of wood or stone. The root of the kalo i^Colocasia esculentci) is cooked and then
pounded on large wooden dishes, with no inconsiderable labor, into a tough and pasty
dough which is then in turn diluted with water and allowed to sour as a paste. This
is the favorite food among the Polynesians both jmung and old, and it seems to confute
the popular idea that tropical peoples will not by choice do hard work. Certainly poi
FIG. 31. HAWAIIAN POI BOARD AND POUNDERS.
pounding was the hardest bread-making known among the nations, and the labor fell
to the lot of the men alone.
But it is not so much the work done with these pounders, which will properly
be considered in the chapter on Food, as the work expended in making them, and also
the variation in forms that we are to study here. Every important group in Polynesia
(using poi) had its own pattern, and as they have been somewhat mixed in museums
and private collections, a very brief notice of these forms must be given here. The
group with which in traditional times the Hawaiians had the closest connexion through
their long voyages, had a form quite distinct from any known to their visitors, and
yet the Tahitian form is often attributed to the Hawaiian islands because the inter¬
course in the period when the whaling industry flourished in these waters brought
many Tahitian things to Honolulu which became a point for their redistribution to the
[369]
3 8 HAWAIIAN SI ONE IMPLEMENTS.
rest of the world. I have traced other Tahitian objedts, which in the museums of
Kurope and America were called Hawaiian, to the fact that the Reverend William Ellis
was a missionary in the Society islands until his health suffered, and on his way home
to recuperate, he was persuaded to tarry in the Hawaiian islands and help the earliest
band of missionaries sent by the American Board of Foreign Missions. His knowledge
of the Tahitian dialect enabled him to converse with the closely related Hawaiian,
and thus his help was invaluable to the teachers on Hawaii who were struggling to
master the language of the people they had come to instruct. Mr. Ellis was more than
FIG. 32. TAHITIAN POI POUNDERS.
an ordinary teacher as his most interesting lour oj Haivaii in 1821, and his various
works on Madagascar prove, and he not only studied manners and customs but collected
specimens of the manufactures of the peoples with whom he sojourned, and the col¬
lections brought through Hawaii from Tahiti and now in the British Museum mainly,
were sometimes confounded with those that Mr. Ellis collected in Hawaii.
Evidently the Tahitians held their pounders in a different way to the Hawaiian
bread-maker for the characteristic cross bar was the handle instead of the C3dindrical
stem of the pounder. While the cross bar was longer or shorter, and of differing curves,
the specimens shown in Fig. 32 are good types of the southern form. Although the
Marquesan group is much nearer the Society than the Hawaiian islands the pounder
found there more resembles that used on the latter group, and was held in the same way.
[370]
MARQUE SAN POI POUNDERS.
39
Its distinguishing feature, on all the specimens that I have seen, was the small knob
at the top which was either simply grooved (S004, 8005) or decorated with a head
of the type common
in Marquesan art.
Both these forms are
shown in Fig. 33, and
the graceful curve of
the stem should be
noticed. The artistic
outline is closer allied
to the Tahitian than
to the Hawaiian. A
ery ancient form of
v
FIG. 33. MARQUESAN POI POUNDERS.
Marquesan pounder
now in private hands
in Honolulu is shown
in Fig. 34. The double head is boldly modelled and the whole finish of the pounder is
good. It perhaps favors my belief that
the cannibals did better work, and had
better taste, than the people who lived 011
poi and fish; but any one may form his
own theory if he has specimens enough
of the work of each division of the
Pacific islanders to make a fair com¬
parison. To me there is something
very cannibalistic in the two faces 011
this pounder, and I am inclined to be¬
lieve that the poi pounded with it was
often as the bread to the more im¬
portant meat.
The pounders used by the can¬
nibals at the other end of the Pacific
region, the Maori, have been already
figured (P'ig. 22, p. 28). The fern root
and hinau berries (- Elceocarpus denta-
tus ) were generally beaten in a wooden
bowl with a wooden pestle, neither of FIG' 34- ancient marquesan poi pounder.
them having any connexion with the Hawaiian poi board and pounder. Both the bowl
and pestle were often carved in artistic forms as were so many of the humblest imple¬
ments of the Maori. [371]
40
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
Returning to the north Pacific we find in Micronesia a very distinct type of poi
pounder. Both the cross bar and the boss have disappeared and a flattened disk termi¬
nates the stem otherwise quite like those of the Polynesian islanders already described.
On many of the islands of Micronesia no stone is found ; coral and coral sand form the
solid land and it is common to see implements that on the volcanic islands are made
of lava on these atolls made of compact shell, or in the case of pounders, of coral rock
solid and ringing. Such are shown in Fig. 35 where the excellent workmanship of the
cannibals and the peculiar discoidal top may be seen. One or two conical points are in
FIG. 35. CORAIy ROCK POUNDERS FROM RUK .
some cases added apparently for ornament, or it may be to indicate an especial use, as
the two specimens (3291, 3292) in the middle of the group have two points and are said
to have been used for grinding taik , a red pigment greatly prized by the Ruk people.
Also from the Caroline islands are the two pounders shown in Fig. 36. One
(7075) is of wood painted red like many of the Carolinean objedts of the same material:
the other is of very compact lava and well made. These are used for pounding both
kalo and breadfruit.
I am not acquainted with any other form of importance outside the Hawaiian
group, but on this group there was a variation in form greater than any of those already
seen. However, we are getting on too fast and must return to the very primitive
mullers from which have developed all these forms. Any oiie of the mullers shown in
[372]
POT POUNDERS.
4i
Fig. 26 would do for poi pounding but they all lack weight and the face surface is not
of sufficient diameter to do well the needed pounding. In Fig. 37 we have a conical
mnller made of coral rock (coral sand conglomerate) which is fairly heavy (4 lbs. 12 oz.),
but while it would strike a forceful blow it would not be so easy on the recover, and in
spite of the rather rough surface would be likely to slip from the hand. In this case
the inventive genius of an intelligent people would soon devise the slender stem and
knobbed top. I am able to show the intermediate shape when the stem had been
diminished for the better clasping of the hand. Fig. 38 shows a very old muller or
FIG. 36. WOOD AND STONE POUNDERS, CAROLINE ISLANDS.
pounder found in the ruins of an old heiau or temple. It is roughly wrought and
indicates an early age or little skill on the part of the maker. It almost gives the
impression of a lump of clay being fashioned on the potter’s wheel. It is the only one
of this form I have seen.
Let not my reader suppose that I attach much importance to this development
of the pounders; there is no chronological sequence so far as known, and while it is
easy to arrange intermediate forms, it must be always remembered that we have nothing
beyond onr imagination to rest upon. We cannot prove that the simple form was not
made long after the so-called intermediate for some special purpose. There are no
bones of the cave bear or of any other extinct animal with which these stone tools have
been found, and except tradition there is no possible help in dating any of the old speci¬
mens. Tradition seldom meddles with the common implements of vulgar life, and
certainly does not in many of the ones which occupy our attention at present.
[373]
42
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
I am fortunately able to show how the Hawaiian poi pounder was made, and it
is probable that this was the most ancient method. In Hilo in 1888 I found an old
native at work with his son fashioning poi pounders for his neighbors and one of the
photographs I then took is shown in Fig. 39. Sitting on the porch of his house on a
mat (no longer Hawaiian
but Chinese), clad in for¬
eign clothes, father and son
still retained the native pos¬
ture and the native methods
I had seen a quarter of a
century before when a grass
house and stone platform
had served as background
to a bronzed figure clad only
in the unobtrusive malo or
clout, working in the same
way for the same end. Only
a hard silicious pebble arm¬
ed with perseverenee and pa¬
tience made products fairly
shown in the plates and fig¬
ures. Now it is said the
modern pounders are often
turned in a lathe,* and these
substitutes are used by the
Chinese to prepare the Ha¬
waiian’s national food !
Not seldom when much
of the hard rough shaping
FIG. 37. HAWAIIAN muller of coral rock. js done the work must be
abandoned because a flaw is discovered. Two such failures are shown in Fig. 40. The
first (No. 8815) looks almost like a model of an eroded mountain for the hard pebble
has cut away the stone much as the torrent washes out the valleys. The first stage
was nearly finished. In the second example (No. 8043) more progress had been made:
the concavity of the sides was marked and the face was nearly complete when the
great crack from side to side appeared and the disappointed workman threw the block
on to the refuse heap whence it found its way into a stone wall where the rejected stone
was selected from the whole wall for the lesson it could teach.
*1 have recently seen tolerable poi pounders cut with a short-handled axe. It took nearly a day, and the result was rough.
[374]
POI POUNDERS.
43
MStSM
mm
I have wondered whether the Hawaiian priesthood was enough like other priest¬
hoods to cling tenaciously to the use of ancient implements as well as forms. I have
__ - - - - - , - — . no information at first hand on the matter, for the
j priests had ceased to perform their functions, at
least in public, before my day, but in the ruins of
a temple on the slopes of the Kaala range on Oahu,
were found by Messrs. Bryan and Seale of the
Museum staff, several pounders of antique form
two of which are shown in Fig. 41. No. 10,031 is
made of a lava closely resembling stratified sand¬
stone, and is considerably flattened. No. 10,032
is of a curiously shortened form. Both bear
marks of long use. The Alii or Chiefs were par¬
ticular about their poi pounders, carrying their
own on journeys, and some of the Moi or Kings
placed a kapu on their private pounders. In the
Bishop Museum is the “sacred” pounder of the
great Kamehameha, a small form easily carried
on a journey or war-like expedition. It escaped
fig. 38.
ANCIENT HAWAIIAN POI
POUNDER.
being photograph¬
ed as it was in the
case with relics
and not with the
other more ple¬
beian pounders.
Under the circum¬
stances the priests,
who by this same
kapu ruled the
Kings, probably
were equally par¬
ticular about their
own pounders.
Another native
custom had its in¬
fluence on the size
., , ,, , , FIG. 39. HAWAIIANS MAKING POI POUNDERS.
if not the form of
some pounders. The maka ainana or people, as distinguished from the chiefs and
clergy, had neither any property nor any rights that their rulers were bound to respect.
[375]
44
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
Every tiling belonged to the King. The Hawaiian saying uO Inna , o lalo , kai , <9 uka
a o ka Jiao pae , ko ke VzV” (All above, all below, the sea, the land, and iron cast
upon the shore, all belong to the King) was so true that if a chief heard the noise
of pounding poi, and was hungry, he could take the poi from the commoner to satisfy
his own hunger even if he left the poor fellow starving. This was sufficiently com¬
mon in practice to induce the making of pounders of smaller size that would not
_ J
FIG. 40. UNFINISHED POI POUNDERS.
betray the preparation of food by the noise. Na pohaku km poi main. Such are
several of the pounders shown in Figs. 43 and 44, and these lighter forms were the
ones carried by the servants of a chief on a journey.
On the island Kauai are found two peculiar forms: one in its various modifica¬
tions is shown in Plate XEIV.: the other in Plates XLV. and XL VI. Both of
these forms are two-handed and the process is rather grinding than pounding. They
were preferred for grinding the barks and berries used in dyeing kapa. The stirrup
form may be regarded the older, certainly the easier to make, and the ring form
( pohaku kui puka or pohaku puka ) may have developed from this by wearing through
the concavity. This ring form is found among the old corn grinders of Mexico, and so
[376]
POI POUNDERS.
45
closely do these two remote implements resemble each other that I have seen in one of
the principal ethnological museums of Europe a genuine Hawaiian ring poi pounder
labeled as a Mexican corn grinder. Both are made of similar lava. In Plate XLIV. the
unusual form shown at the extreme right of the group (No. 6820) is a cast kindly sent me
by Professor Frederick W. Putnam, the distinguished Curator of the Peabody Museum
of American Archae¬
ology at Cambridge,
Mass., in whose charge
is the unique original.
It shows more elaborate
design than any I have
seen, although the pro¬
jections 011 the upper
corners, so convenient for
the thumbs, are indicated
on No. 4113 of the same
plate. I have never seen
these stirrup pounders in
use. The ring pounders
seem to have become ob¬
solete in more recent
times, perhaps because
the Chinese, who pound
much of the poi, prefer
the common conical form of Fig. 42. The methods of holding the ring pounders,
according as they are used for pounding (a) or grinding (b) is shown in Fig. 45.
This was the usual, although the workmen doubtless varied the grip as their wrists
became wearied, and different natives have shown me other methods as the only ones
they ever knew. All such information is of little value.
The very limited range of these stirrup and ring pounders is noteworthy.
The island Kauai was not remote from the rest of the group, nor were her inhabitants
hostile generally. That intercourse was not so common as between the islands to
the southeast is shown by the provincial forms of words, the use of the sound repre¬
sented by k instead of that represented by t more generally on Kauai (a-Tooi of
Cook) than on the other islands, and other dialectal peculiarities not necessary to
discuss here. Notwithstanding there was a considerable intercourse and interchange
of merchandise between the people of Kauai and even the distant Hawaii. Peculiar
forms of kapa made only on the former island have been found buried in ancient
caves in Kohala, Hawaii, but I do not remember that an}^ poi pounders of the
[377]
BERNICE PAUAHI BISHOP MUSEUM.
wnllttol X unylxini, DlfWk>t.
FIG. 41. ANCIENT HAWAIIAN POI POUNDERS.
46
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
forms in question have ever been found on Hawaii. I am at a loss to explain the
non-distribution and I cannot find that their use extended beyond the island of
Kauai. When I first visited that island in 1864 they were already obsolete and were
shown as curiosities.
FIG. 42. HAWAIIAN POI POUNDERS.
That the reader may obtain a better idea of the size and weight of these “bread
makers” I give here a list of those figured, with their weight, height and the diameter
at the largest end.
4085. 5 lbs. 8 oz., 8 in., 5.7 in.
4081. 5 lbs., 8.2 in., 5.5 in.
4084. 3 lbs. 4 oz., 8.5 in., 5.8 in.
4089. 2 lbs. 13 oz., 6.8 in., 3.7 in.
6860. 5 lbs. 4 oz., 8 in., 5.5 in.
Figure 42.
4083. 9 lbs., 9 in., 5.6 in.
4093. 2 lbs. 13 oz., 7.2 in., 3.8 in.
7530. 6 lbs., 7.2 in., 5.7 in.
4082. 7 lbs. 10 oz., 8.8 in., 6.1 in.
7731. 6 lbs. 2 oz., 8.5 in. 5.9 in.
POI POUNDERS.
47
Figure 43.
4096.
4 lbs.
7.5 in., 4.7 in.
4094.
3 lbs. 7 oz., 7.5 in., 4.4 in., coral.
4097.
3 lbs-
3 oz., 6.2 in., 3.3 in.
4105.
2 lbs. 12 oz., 5.7 in., 4.2 in.
4091.
4 lbs.
8 oz., 7.1 in., 5 in.
4103.
1 lb. 13 oz., 5.1 in., 3.1 in.
4092.
2 lbs.
1 oz., 6.5 in., 3.1 in.
7736.
3 lbs. 14 oz., 7.6 in., 4.5 in., coral
4086.
4 lbs.
12 oz., 7 in., 5 in.jj
4088.
2 lbs. 14 oz., 6 in., 4.1 in.
4099.
2 lbs.
5 oz., 6 in., 3.5 in.
4090.
5 lbs. 8 oz., 8.7 in., 5.9 in.
4080.
6 lbs.
4 oz., 7.8 in., 5 in.
4079.
10 lbs. 9 oz., 10 in., 6.7 in.*
4106.
3 lbs.
12 oz., 7 in., 4.6 in.
FIG. 43. HAWAIIAN POI POUNDERS.
Figure 44.
4087.
2 lbs. 14 oz., 6.6 in., 4.2 in.
4°95-
2 lbs., 5.6 in., 3.2 in.
4100.
1 lb. 12 oz., 5.1 in., 3.7 in.
4104.
1 lb. 8 oz., 5.5 in.
4103.
1 lb. 13 oz., 5.2 in., 3.2 in.
4241.
3 lbs. 10 oz., 4.1 in., 4.6 in
4098.
2 lbs. 3 oz., 5 in., 3.8 in.
4101.
2 lbs., 5.2 in., 3.5 in.
Plate XLIV.
4112.
4 lbs. 4 oz., 5.2 in., 4 in.
41 16.
2 lbs. 14 oz., 5 in., 4.1 in.
4H3-
2 lbs. 5 oz., 4 in., 3.8 in.
4109.
4 lbs. 5 oz., 5.2 in., 5 in.
4110.
3 lbs., 4.7 in., 3.5 in.
6820. t
4108.
2 lbs. 1 oz., 4.5 in., 4.1 in.
♦This is the largest specimen in the Bishop Museum,
and the largest I have
ever seen.
+ This is a cast of the specimen in the Peabody Museum. I have not the weight of the original stone, but as my memory serves it is
heavier than the average of the stirrup pounders.
[379]
48
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
In the ring poi ponnders the abrading surface is elliptical, so in addition to the
height, which is rather less than in the conical pounders, the major and minor diameters
of the base are given, and as most all of the specimens are damaged on the peripherj^
these diameters are given as nearly as possible as before the chipping took place. The
methods of holding these pounders is shown in Fig. 45, where A shows the position for
pounding, B the position for grinding.
FIG. 44. HAWAIIAN FOI POUNDERS.
4120
4I32 3 4
4138
4126
413°
4129
4128
8000
41 19
4122
4127
4125
4 lbs. 10 oz., 6.2 in., 5. 7X3-5 hi.
4 lbs. 2 oz., 6 in., 5. 5X3. 2 in.
5 lbs. 6 oz., 5.9 in., 5-7X3-8 in..
3 lbs. 3 oz., 5.5 in., 5. 2X3-2 in.
5 lbs., 6.4 in., 6.6X4 in.
2 lbs. 10 oz., 5.2 in., 6.2X4 in.
1 lb. 14 oz., 4.8 in., 5. 2X2. 3 in.
3 lbs., 5 in., 5. 2X3-2 in.
4 lbs., 5.9 in., 5. 9X3-2 in.
3 lbs. 8 oz., 5.4 in., 5. 7X3-2 in.
4 lbs., 5.1 in., 5. 9X3-4 in.
3 lbs., 5.1 in., 5.4X 3.7 in.
Plate XLV
4131
4i33
4121
4i37
4i39
Plate XLVI.
4124
7954
4134
4118
4239
4123
7955
4 lbs. 14 oz., 5.8 in., 6. 4X3-5 in.
5 lbs. 11 oz., 6 in., 6. 6X4. 6 in.
3 lbs. 12 oz., 5.7 in., 6. 4X4. 2 in.
3 lbs. 9 oz., 5.5 in., 6. 1X3-8 in.
3 lbs., 5.4 in., 6. 2X3-4 in.
2 lbs. 14 oz., 5.1 in., 5. 5X3-2 in.
2 lbs. 1 oz., 5.1 in., 5. 5X3-2 in.
1 lb. 5 oz., 3.9 in., 4. 1X2. 7 in.
4 lbs. 10 oz., 5.7 in., 6X3 in.
2 lbs. 15 oz., 5.5 in., 6X3-1 in.
3 lbs. 10 oz., 5.5 in., 6.1X4 in.
3 lbs. 14 oz., 5.2 in., 6. 7X3-9 in.
From these last tables it will be seen that the ring pounders are lighter tin
the others.
an
[380]
POI POUNDERS.
49
The two pounders shown in Fig. 46 are of unknown use. No. 4140 is flat with
a slightly thicker grinding edge which shows signs of use. The upper part seems fitted
for some sort of han¬
dle; certainly it could
not conveniently be
held in the hands from
its small size (only 4.6
in. high). Natives have
been unwilling or un¬
able to give any infor¬
mation about it; to
those I have questioned
it is evidently a res
ignota. I may add that
it was dug up on
fig. 45A. Kauai, that island of fig. 45b-
odd pounders. The other pounder (4135) conveys to me the impression of a stirrup
pouuder partly converted into a ring pounder. As may be seen in the illustration it
BERNICE PAUAHI BISHOP MUSEUM
2 ' 3
FIG. 46. STONE POUNDERS. 4U"
has convenient notches for thumbs on top and the perforation is rough and unfinished.
This also has been used, perhaps before the alteration, A harder enigma is presented
Memoirs b. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 4.-4. 1 ]
5o
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
in Fig. 47. Is the worked stone a pounder? Why the great labor expended on the
very peculiar form ? I confess that I cannot answer these questions with any satis¬
faction, nor does the little known history of the stone help in the least; it only
indicates a native belief in its antiquity. The story is otherwise a curious one. In
1895 a native kahuna or priest was making offerings to a modern stone idol, for an
important object which I am requested not to mention. He had spread the mat
for the oblation, covering it with red cotton cloth (Turkey red), the color used in
idol worship, and upon this was placed the stone god flanked by a bottle of whiskey
FIG. 47. HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENT.
and one of gin. Fresh fern leaves and dried awa root were before the god, and as the
incantation requires some link to the ancient times, the older the more efficacious, this
stone implement (No. 7660), treasured long in the family of the priest, was placed in
one corner of the sacred mat ; a large smooth pebble, Uhi a Lewalu , regarded as of
divine nature (a sort of aumakua ), was placed opposite, while between these venerable
assistants were strewed imitations of old fish hooks, leiomano, etc. The god forsooth
was not expeCted to detect these forgeries! The kahuna, divested of his ordinary
clothes, donned a small triangular silk apron, and during the rites fell dead. The
people in the house not being accomplices in these heathen proceedings, were yet un¬
willing to have the unhallowed machinery under their roof and sent the whole outfit
(including the gin and whiskey bottles empty , also fern leaves and awa unwithered) to
[382]
K A PA PRESSERS— STONE DISHES.
5i
the Bishop Museum where it is now on exhibition. Now in the opinion of this kahuna,
who was a fairly intelligent native, the stone was of sufficient antiquity to have become
sacred, to have acquired a certain mana or divine power, although I do not believe he
could have explained its original use.
Kapa Pressers. — A form allied to the ring pounders, or even more to the
Mexican corn grinders already mentioned, and one sometimes confounded with the
former by collectors, is that shown in Fig. 48. The three rather clumsily wrought
-K.V-. I'AUAHI BISHOP MUSEUM-
FIG. 48. KAPA PRESSERS.
stones were used for pressing the moist kapa or bark cloth. I have never seen them
used, and certainly they were not a necessary part of the clothmaker’s machinery for
they are rare and doubtless were generally replaced by smooth stones or blocks of wood.
Stone Dishes. — While for ordinary dishes wood was the more suitable material,
and in the chapter on Household Utensils it will be seen that the Hawaiians had large
bowls ( Umeke) and flat dishes of suitable size and form for dog or fish, they also made
use of stone dishes and in the Bishop Museum are several such dishes and bowls that
will here be figured and described.
We have the rudest form of platter, at first sight almost a mere beach pebble
worn by the waves but not cut by human hand, but close examination shows some
[383]
52
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
• • •. • ’w.v -
shaping and also use. The bottom is much rougher than the top which is shown in
Fig. 49. If it is to be considered a worked stone certainly a modicum of labor was
expended by the maker. Its use may be surmised from what we know of the few other
stone dishes that remain. Before some shapeless idol in some one of the many heiau
ereCted to the god of this or that hui or company of fishermen on some prominent cliff
overlooking the fishing ground, this stone
was perhaps the platter for the offering of
fish which was to decay rapidly before the
unsmelling nostrils of the fish god. In
those bleak and storm-swept places wood
would not last long.
A well-finished bowl of sandstone
comes next and presents several peculiari¬
ties. The thick upper edge is perfectly
flat and the bottom spherical with a sort
of “punty” mark as if a knob had been
broken from its centre. If found else¬
where it might pass for the cover of a cin¬
erary urn. It was found bnilt into a dry
stone wall at some distance from recent
habitations. Altogether it does not pos¬
sess a common Hawaiian physiognomy.
The material is a homogeneous coral sand¬
stone from Oahu, quite the same that many
poi pounders were made from. It is slight¬
ly chipped on one edge. Fig. 50, No. 125 7.
In Fig. 51 we have a distinct dish (8580),
rude indeed but definitely a dish, and
as it was discovered on Molokai in a temple, and as tradition locally vouched for its
original use, we need not hesitate to class this with the vessels of the sanCtuary.
It held the smaller offerings and is of compact lava about twenty inches in diameter.
In the chapter on Worship the use of these stone receptacles will be fully discussed;
here it is only necessary to show that the Hawaiians made them. A more definite
temple dish, if dish it should be called, is shown in Fig. 52 (No. 6796). It was found
on Molokai and is well known to be the offertorium of a rude stone fish-god which is
with it in the Bishop Museum. Its form is peculiar in that it is very thick (6 in.) in
proportion to its diameter and has a projecting band around most of its circumference
interrupted only by the handle-like projection 011 which the idol rested. The greatest
diameter including this band is 13 in., the least 10.5 in.
[384]
ms;
ip- .Aj -is..
M
& .***'■
vy
SfW V .. ...
■vAE ■ ■
PTrS"
kv
FIG. 49. HAWAIIAN STONE DISH.
STONE BOHNS.
53
Stone Bowls. — We come now to two pots or bowls differing in shape but
having this in common that they were both found on uninhabited bird-islands of the
Hawaiian group, where their use was probably identical although we do not know
what that was. The first one, Fig. 53, No. 7449, was found on Necker island with the
FIG. 50. HAWAIIAN DISH OF CORAL SANDSTONE.
curious stone images described below and figured in PI. TXII. It is so whitened with
guano that it resembles concrete. Originally 8 in. high and 7.8 in. in diameter, the
upper rim has been broken away and there is a small hole broken in the bottom. The
inside diameter is 6.5 in., so the wall is very thin. The shape is unlike any other
Hawaiian vessel known to me. It is well suited for a container, the walls being too
thin for a mortar. With the images it was given to the Bishop Museum by Hon. Geo.
N. Wilcox. The other bowl (No. 5593) presents an elliptical sedlion (7.5X6 in.) and
is 6.7 in. high : it weighs 8.2 lbs. It has even thinner walls and has a considerable piece
[385]
54
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
broken from the bottom so
that like the former it has
become useless for a con¬
tainer and was perhaps
abandoned by the last owner.
It was found on Nihoa or
Bird island in 1885 and was
given to the Museum by
Mrs. Dominis (later Queen
Liliuokalani). I simply do
not know what these bowls
were used for, and it would
be idle to conjecture without
farther information. Both
of these islands, the least
distant Nihoa out of sight
from the nearest island
Kauai, were visited in for¬
mer days by Hawaiians for
feather gathering and fish-
FIG. 51. HAWAIIAN STONE DISH.
ing, and the remains of
stone enclosures evident¬
ly for purposes of worship
are abundant on Necker.
It was apparently a Holy
Island. On neither isl¬
and are there permanent
springs of water, and if
there were they would be
contaminated by the gua¬
no of the innumerable
birds that frequent these
rocky islets for nesting.
The visitors did not reside
on either island longer
than necessary to collect
FIG. 52. stone offertorium from moeokai. feathers (of the tropic and
frigate birds) and the landing was precarious. That there were so many stone images
on Neeker island is surprising for it is a narrow ridge of an ancient crater with steep
[386]
STONE CUPS.
55
sides to the sea and the stone enclosures
occupy much of the level ground. In these
were placed the images, and where the
human visitors lived while there I do not
see. On Nihoa, which is larger and more
fertile (there is no vegetation on Neeker
island except scant grass and a few low,
half-starved shrubs), there are stone en¬
closures, perhaps heiau, but I have not
seen them, and no images have been found.
Still the latter island has not been worked
over so thoroughly as Neeker island. As
the fishermen had to go a long distance in
canoes they would hardly from choice take
a rare form of stone dish to contain pro-
FIG. 53. STONE BOWL, FROM NECKER ISLAND.
visions when their wooden
umeke were lighter and
more capacious.
Still another stone dish
is in the Museum and
from its form it might
also be a dish for idol
offerings, but the handle
at one end and the knob
at the other are not un¬
like some wooden dishes
in use for fish, etc. The
workmanship seems mod¬
ern and it is quite possi¬
ble that this is the poor
work of some Portuguese
or Japanese imitator. It
is shown in Fig. 55. The
extreme length is 12.5 in.
J
FIG.
Stone Cups. — I would
now call attention to the
most common ot Hawaii¬
an stone vessels, the cups or saucers, which present every state of elaboration. They are
found all over the group, some of them of considerable antiquity, and they were used
[387]
56
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
by the fishermen to prepare bait ( pain ), by the tatuer to hold his ink, by the kapa
printer to hold her d}res, and by man, woman and child for the innumerable purposes
for which such a container is convenient, especially in a civilization where the differ¬
entiation of dishes has not attained the stage of modern housekeeping.
In Fig. 56 I have placed some typical forms of these cups from the most finished
(No. 2974) to the roughest (No. 7760); the form with thick lips that could be used as
a lamp (No. 3568) and the fanciful form (No. 3569) that might serve as cup to No. 2974
as saucer. It is seldom
that these cups when
dug up betray an y
definite marks of their
former use, but some¬
times the djm is still
permeating the porous
stone, and in others the
burned oil is clearly
in evidence. Although
most of these cups
have long since been
discarded for the more
convenient products of
foreign make, not in¬
frequently an old fisherman attributes greater efficacy to the ancient cup, and I have
seen bait mixed carefull}^ in' a treasured relic of his predecessors.
Referring to PI. XL/VII. where many of these cups are shown, No. 1229 is
certainly a dye cup and No. 7728 is undoubtedly a lamp, while the others may have
been used for anything. The lefthand specimen in the middle row (7925) closety recalls
those stone club heads from New Britain, but in this case the boring has been effected
on one side only ; the outer surface is that of a smooth oblate spheroid. Some are so
rude as to seem mere pebbles with a slight depression pecked on a flat surface; in
others the boring of the cup was done by a pestle-like pebble with sand and water.
In Fig. 57 is presented a series of well-finished cups all of one general pattern.
The obverse has always a flat, well-ground, edge; the reverse is sometimes hemi¬
spherical and sometimes bell-shaped. They, like their plebeian relatives shown in PI.
XIvVII. might be used in many ways, but two of the many were so peculiar as to merit
a more detailed description. They in this way have place both in Worship and Amuse¬
ments and in the chapters devoted to those subjects will again appear, but here we must
say that in the dance ( hula ) these stone cups were used to make disgusting noises b}^
pressing the wetted edges suddenly against some soft part of the body, — an effect es-
[388]
FIG. 55. HAWAIIAN STONE DISH.
STONE CUPS .
57
pecially pleasing to the Polynesian race and produced by the Samoans in the siva dance
by placing the hand in the opposite armpit. It is probably to this curious use that we
must attribute their application in the rude surgery of the Hawaiian kahuna lapaan
as blistering cups. The other use was far more weird, and in spite of their peaceable
and harmless appearance they must be placed in the category of deadly weapons.
FIG. 56. HAWAIIAN STONE CUPS.
Perhaps in the quiet little row shown in Fig. 57 there is not a cup that has not caused
the death of one or more Hawaiians. The strange process of “praying to death, pule
anaana'n will be fully described in a later chapter, but in one of the methods it sufficed
to collect a few hairs, nail parings or some spittle of the intended vidtim, burn these
exuvice with suitable prayers in the innocent-looking cup ( kapualn hum anaana) and
then scatter the ashes in the water he was accustomed to drink. If this last part was
impracticable, the kahuna ?naana performed the previous part of the rite and then took
[389]
5§
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
care to have his quarry informed that his soul had been consumed. Convinced of this,
the credulous vidtim took to his mat, wasted away and died. So fixed was the belief in
this bewitching process among all classes of the Hawaiians that the utmost precau¬
tions were taken to secure from any possible enemy these rejected bodily parts even of
the highest chiefs, who indeed would have the most enemies.
The material in all cases, except No. 942, which is of coral sandstone, is a brown
compact lava closely allied to clinkstone, and one would incline to the belief that they
all came from the same place; evidently the same pattern has been used. The more
prosaic uses of these fine cups my readers may imagine for themselves. It may be of
FIG. 57. KAPUAHI K.UNI ANAANA.
interest to some to know the size of the Hawaiian stone cups, and as the usual scale
has been purposely omitted, the diameters are tabulated below. As on some of the
figures the numbers do not show, the measurements are given in their order beginning
with Fig. 56.
Figure 56.
3568.
6.6 in.
3569-
4.6 in.
2974.
4.7 in.
7760.
5-9 in
Plate
XDVII.
5163.
6.1 in.
5164.
3.1 in.
5161.
3.0 in.
1229. 6.1 in.
7925-
4-4 9°
7926.
3-5 in-
7927.
3-5 iii-
7928.
3.6 in.
7728. 3.4 in.
5162.
3-5-
7929.
2.9 in.
7930.
3.0 in.
793i-
2.9 in.
Figure 57.
7939. 3.8 in. 943. 3.1 in. 944. 3.4 in. 943. 3.6 in. 7580. 3.8 in. 940. 3.4 in. 941. 3.2 in.
Depth, 1. 7-2. 5 in.
In many of the heiau or luakini were found lavers of considerable size cut from
stone but not elaborately worked. If a tolerably flat stone with a slightly concave sur¬
face could be found this concavity was deepened by patient pounding and grinding
until a great, though shallow, bowl resulted of capacity sufficient for the washing of a
human body: and here were washed the victims for the sacrifices. On the abandon¬
ment of the ancient system of worship in 1819 many or most of these were broken up,
[390]
STONE LAMPS.
59
but a specimen remains near the heiau called Mokini in Koliala, Hawaii, large enough
to contain an outstretched human bod}^ with perhaps three or four inches of water.
These were certainly the largest stone dishes made by the old Hawaiians.
My attention has been called to certain stones (of which I have seen perhaps
six) of roughly cubical form cut on one face into a shallow depression with a narrow
rim (Fig. 58). I have been told that they were used for evaporating sea-water in the
3212 fig. stone; satt pans. 3213
time of Umi. Although I have only seen the ordinary mud-pans used for salt-making,
there is nothing improbable in that statement.* On Hawaii Messrs. Tyerman and
Bennetf noticed this use of stone containers in 1821.
“April 5. We had an opportunity of seeing how the natives collect salt, of which they furnish
large quantities to ships, besides what they consume themselves. Small ring fences of masonry work
are formed near to the sea, within which are placed rude stones, of all shapes having deep cavities,
which may hold from one to two or three gallons of water. These being filled and evaporated from
time to time, the salt is deposited, and ready for use without further trouble. In one of these basins
we observed about half a gallon of fine salt.
I^amps. — The old Hawaiians had artificial lights of several sorts. There were
the lama or torches of bambu stuffed with candlenuts or other combustible matter
and the lamaku made by stringing the meats of roasted candlenuts on the midribs of
* Since the above was written the two specimens figured have been added to the Museum collection,
t Journal of Voyages and Travels. Boston, 1822, Vol. II., p. 19.
[391]
6o
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
coconut leaflets and binding together half a dozen or more of these strings with dried
banana leaves. Such a torch, perhaps six inches in diameter and four feet long, gave
a bright but smoky and odoriferous blaze.* In almost universal use were strings of
these nuts four, six or ten meats for the slight household illumination required before
reading was introduced. The kukui was tended by a child who ignited the next as
the preceding nut was nearly spent by inverting the candle and when the kindling
was complete knocking off the burned coal. While burning they were often rested
FIG. 59. LAMP FROM A LAVA BUBBLE.
against a stone. They gave a very intermittent and smelly light but were in use in
the outlying districts as late as 1865, but since then the advent of kerosene oil has
finally extinguished them.
The illumination we are most interested in here comes from the oil lamp which
was usually made of stone, although I have seen coconut shells and even a green
papaya fruit ( Carica papaya ) used to contain the oil. In the Bishop Museum is a
wooden lamp, No. 1212. The oil was expressed from the kukui or kamani nuts in the
stone mortars, and animal fat was often substituted. The wick was a strip of kapa
* I well remember the first time I saw these torches used. The American Minister Resident, Dr. James McBride, and I were travelling-
along the north coast of Hawaii in 1864. We had loitered behind the rest of our party and darkness came upon us as we came to the brink of
the valley of I,aupahoehoe. The road then led down into the valley many hundred feet below us by a narrow', steep and dangerous path, in
some places overhanging the ocean, and we were glad to see the torch bearers in the valley coming to light our path, although trusting to the
sure footed animals we were far down the path before the torches came, and I could smell them a long way off.
[392]
STONE LAMPS.
61
torn from a man’s malo or a woman’s pEu as there was need. One advantage of these
simple howl lamps was that an increase of light was readily obtained by adding wicks,
an addition as easy as it is difficult to put a wick to a modern civilized lamp, and as
many could be added as the rim of the bowl would permit.
Perhaps the Hawaiian maker of lamps gave freer rein to his fancy than did
workers in other stone objedls, but it will be seen by Plates XLYIII.-LII. that there
was some variety if little beauty in this comparatively unimportant household utensil.
The simplest that I know is No. 12 n, shown in Fig. 59. A bubble in the lava has
been selected and the superfluous stone knocked away. It is a charmingly aesthetic
treatment, wholly free from the stiffness generally seen in these lamps. We neither
know who made it nor who used it. In this as in most of the Hawaiian remains there
is a complete impersonality : in the
few attributed to famous warriors or
high chiefs there is nothing peculiar,
the specimen is like dozens of other
specimens and so far as that goes
might have been made for Kaaliu-
manu or Liloa, for Pele or L0110 so
far as the stone shows any individu¬
alism. Another peculiarity of the
Hawaiian mind helps to cut off the
entail as it were. Hawaiians seem
ashamed of all that their ancestors
made or used in the ages before the advent of white civilization and have removed so
far as possible all relies of that indigenous civilization. Most of the stone articles that
could not be burned or conveniently thrown into the sea were buried or hidden in caves,
and only lately when there is some market value attached to these works of their prede¬
cessors are they brought to light as a source of income. Under such circumstances it
would be difficult to establish any genuine genealogy.
There is in some lamps an “improvement” showing some ingenuity. It appears
in the small cup lamp, No. 7728, on PI. XLVII. A little cavity sunk in the bottom
of the bowl into which the last drops of oil might gravitate to feed the thirsty wick.
This is almost always about a quarter of an inch deep and wide, and appears in about
one-quarter of the lamps in the Museum collection.
Another example of the utilization of natural opportunities is shown in No. 1203,
PI. XLVIII., where two holes were taken and the surrounding cellular lava rudely
shaped into a lamp. A third slight depression is by the side of these two holes and
might easily have been deepened; a shell attached to this indicates the seaside origin
of the holes for which a stone-boring echinoderm is perhaps responsible.
[393]
11—
FIG. 60. LAMPS FROM BROKEN POUNDERS.
62
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS .
FIG. 6l. RUDE FORMS OF HAWAIIAN RAMPS.
FIG. 62. STONE LAMPS FROM MOLOKAI.
[394]
STONE LAMPS.
63
Accidents often furnish a partly formed lamp as shown in Fig. 60, where two
broken poi pounders have been regenerated (No. 1170) by sinking a cup into the broad
end; No. 5622 by using the smaller end in the same way. In the latter the base is
slightly flattened, but in the former even the original oblique break has been left. This
makes a very convenient form to carry in the hand although it will not stand without
support. Lamps of this class were very common, as a broken poi pounder was a part
of the furniture of most families. Some very rude forms are shown in Fig. 61, and as
might be supposed such are not uncommon. No. 4336 is a shapeless fragment of stone
FIG. 63. CYLINDRICAL HAWAIIAN LAMPS.
converted easily into a lamp by boring or chipping a cup; No. 4331 is a similar rough
fragment, while No. 4338 although of very rough workmanship still shows design.
In Fig. 62 are shown two lamps, both from Molokai, and apparently from the same
quarry. The material is crystalline, of a coarse texture, and by no means common.
These lamps show that particular forms were not local, for in No. 7509 there is the
broad base and high cup so arranged that kukui candles could be placed against the
side (compare No. 1200, PI. L.)> while No. 1210 is the simple oblate spheroid. Both
are large and heavy, evidently not intended to be often moved.
In several of the Museum specimens there is a peculiarity that I have not been
able to explain, — the lamp is invertible; that is, there is a polio or cup for oil at either
end. Of this form are Nos. 1208 and 1190 of PI. L., and in both the cup is of the same
size and condition so that either could be used indifferently ; certainly both have been
used, as the oil burned into the stone testifies. In Pis. LI. and LII. are shown lamps
[395]
64
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
of phallic form not uncommon among the Hawaiians. They are generally well wrought
and would seem to belong to a comparatively late period. They are large and heavy,
not easily transported. A common form of Hawaiian stone lamp is cylindrical, of vary¬
ing height and diameter but remark¬
ably uniform in appearance. The cup
is also of nearly the same capacity in
all. In height they vary from six to
nine inches. No. 1202 was found at
Haiku, Maui, but the provenance of
the others is unknown. All are made
of the same porous lava, seemingly
unsuited to hold any liquid, but in
use the oil soon burns to an imper¬
vious crust. The last in the group
of Fig. 63 is what was called a poho-
waa or canoe lamp used in the in¬
frequent night voyages and also for
fishing. This last use seems to be
better illustrated in Fig. 64, which
represents an unusual form in that it
is of rectangular seCtion with slight¬
ly rounded corners, and the bowl is
much larger than usual in house
lamps. The lower half tapers from
a shoulder. The bowl was filled with
fat, and with a wick of twisted rush
or kapa, bright but flaring light was
obtained. The lamp could be placed in the hole in the thwart intended for the mast,
or in a similar hole in a board projecting over the gunwale. Night fishing was a favor¬
ite sport among the Hawaiians, although the lama or torch was generally used instead
of a fixed lamp. I do not know much about the stone lamps of the other Polynesians
except the Tahitians, and from that group I have seen only the finely designed and
wrought lamps in the British Museum, and in that at Cambridge, England, the latter
brought home by Tyerman and Bennet, if my memory serves. These are called
“Sorcery Lamps”, and may be correCtly designated, but no more definite information
has come to me of the way in which they were used. The name suggests a use like
that of the Hawaiian kapuahi kuni anaana of Fig. 57. No part of the Pacific has re¬
tained less of the olden time than the Society islands. The conversion from ancient
[396]
■
-
A
FIG. 64. FISHING LAMP.
STONE LAMPS.
65
idolatry was so sudden and complete that everything appertaining to the abandoned
cult was destroyed or hidden. The new converts brought forth their treasures as did
the hypnotised Florentines at the bidding of Savonarola
and consigned them to the flames if thereby they might
ransom themselves from Purgatory. Far more of an¬
cient Tahitian implements are in foreign museums
than on the group. The British Museum was es¬
pecially favored since it has the articles bronght home
by that early missionary and careful observer Rev¬
erend William Ellis. Fig. 65 shows one of the several
sorcery lamps in the British Museum and it will at
once be noticed that the design and workmanship far
surpasses anything we have on the Hawaiian group.
The perforated basement seems peculiar to this form
of lamp. The cup for oil is exceedingly large, sug¬
gesting that it was used like the kapuahi kuni ana , to
burn other material than merely light-producing oil.
The arch over the bowl could not conveniently be used
as a handle, for the smoke of combustion made it FIG-65- tahitian sorcery lamp.
constantly sooty, and its size was also in the way. Perhaps it was a rest for kukui nut
candles. Something seems to have been broken from the top of the arch, possibly a
consecrated figure. That the general size of the Hawaiian stone lamps may be under¬
stood, I give here the height and diameter with any explanation seemingly required :
Figure 59.
1211. A bubble of surface lava, 3.5 in., 6.5 in.
Figure 60.
1197. End of a broken poi pounder; the larger 5622. Broken poi pounder; hollowed at the
end hollowed out; 4.5 in. smaller end; 4.7 in., 5.2 in.
Figure 61.
4341. 4.7 in., 4.4 in. 4334- Neatly rounded; 3 in., 4.5 in.
4336. A seaworn block ; two natural cups, the 4331. Has a deep cup; 3.2 in.
deeper (2.5 in.) used; 4 in. 4338. Olivine lava; 3 in., 4.4 in.
4332. Inerusted with burned oil ; 4.6 in.
Figure 62.
7:509. Large and heavy; lava full of felspathie 1210. Of the same stone and from the same
crystals; Molokai; 8.2 in., 10.5 in. locality as last; 5.7 in., 9 in.
Figure 63.
1202. Haiku, Maui; 6.7 in., 4.4 in. 4339. Cistern in cup; 6 in., 4.5 in.
1191. Deep cup with cistern; 7.5 in., 3.5 in. (top). 1201. Cup 2.5 in. deep; Poliowaa; 6.2 in., 5.2 in.
1193. Cylindrical, of coarse lava; 8 in., 6 in.
Figure 64.
7959. Boat lamp for fishing; cup 3.7 in. deep; 8.7 in., 6.5 in.
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, Vol. I., No. 4.-5- [397]
66
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
Plate XLVIII.
7759. Deep cup with cistern; 6 in. 7758. Flat base, very large cup; 4.2 in., 5.9 in-
1203. Three natural cups, two of them used; 1206. Spherical, broken on the lip ; 6.5 in., 6 in.
5.5 in., 8 in. 4330. Cistern in cup; 3.7 in., 5.2 in.
Plate XLIX.
1 205. Square block with rounded corners; 4.5 in.
1194. Upper portion pentagonal; 5.2 in.
7691. Cistern in cup; 3.5 in., 5.5 in. [Wrong
number on plate.]
1226. Perhaps also used as a mortar; 4.7 in. ,7. 2 in.
1207. Unwrought, small cup; 5.7 in.
1228. Cistern in rather shallow cup; 2.2 in.,
6.7 in.
Plate U.
1208. Cup at each end, the upper one larger;
5.7 in.
1232. Found in 1880 at Kulaokahua, Oahu;
deep cup; 6.5 in., 8.2 in.
1209. Large cup without cistern; 6 in., 6.7 in.
1200. Cistern in cup; Kohala, Hawaii; 5 in.,
3.7 in. (top) 6.6 in.
4333- Round as if turned; striated stone; 5.5 in.,
6.5 in.
1190. Cups at both ends with cisterns ; 5.5 in.
Plate LI.
1182. Coarse lava, phallie; 10 in., 7. 7-3. 7-4. 6 in. 1189. Base rectangular (3.7 X 3.2 in.); 7 in.,
7690. Very well formed, cup 2 in. deep; 8.1 in., 4.8 in. (head).
4.8 in. (head). 1184. Phallic; 7.2 in., 7.7 in. (base).
1x83. Cup large, grooved for caudles; Niihau;
sandstone; phallic; 1 1.5 in.
Plate LII.
1185. Nuuanu, Oahu; greenish lava, shallow
cup for nuts ; 8 in.
4340. With a curious rim ; 7.5 in., 6.2 in. (rim).
4337. Broad top, narrow base ; 4 in.
1192. Cistern in cup ; 5.2 in.
1187. Cup 2 in. deep; 4.2 in., 3.7 in.
1186. Small cup and four feet; Waimea, Hawaii;
6.2 in., 4.2 in. (head).
1188. Smooth finish, phallic; 6 in., 4.7 in.
(head).
Stone Mirrors. — The Kilo pohaku of the Hawaiians were most ingenious.
Some native Narcissus admiring his face in some placid pool may have caught the
suggestion and, wiser than the beloved of Echo, instead of pining away for love of the
intangible image, devised a means of recalling this image at pleasure. Whoever may
have been the lucky inventor, the results as we have them today are certain well-ground
circular disks, less than half an inch thick, and of diameter varying as shown in Fig. 66.
These were not highly polished and do not in the least reflect when in a dry condition,
so their properties would be concealed from a casual observer, but placed in a shallow
calabash of water the dark background of the stone gives back a sufficiently clear re¬
flection. I have never seen any of these mirrors of other than circular form. They
rapidly disappeared from use with the advent of European glass mirrors* and their
use was soon forgotten. In the native kahuna lapaau practice they are occasionally
used as a cooling application to furunculi or other ulcerous sores, and for this use holes
are often bored near the edge through which a cord for suspension could be passed.
♦There is in the Bishop Museum a strip of “silvered” glass given by Vancouver to Kamehameha, to which has been fitted a neat frame
of native wood : similar mirrors, but of smaller size, were attached to handkerchiefs by the Hawaiian women, much like the fashion of
attaching small mirrors to folding fans, once in vogue among white ladies.
[398]
UL UMAIKA. 67
I know of no other snb-eivilized people who have adopted this ingenious conception.
Specimens are no longer common. The stone is a sort of basanite, quite as com¬
pact as the phonolite used for adzes, and it is of a uniformly dark color in all the
examples noted. It is supposed to come from the uplands of Maunakea on Hawaii.
d us
FIG. 66. HAWAIIAN STONE MIRRORS.
Ulurnaika. — Made much in the same way but for a very different purpose are
the Ulurnaika stones. The game maika was played with stone disks (or sometimes
balls), called on Hawaii and Kauai tilu, while on the intervening islands of the group,
Maui and Oahu, olohu was a more common designation. A full description of the game,
which was a favorite one from Hawaii to Niihau, will come properly into the chapter
on Amusements, but here it may be briefly stated that a smooth alley or kahua fifty or
sixty yards long was built as for bowls, and on this was played three forms of the
game. The first was a competitive trial of strength in settling how far the stone could
[399]
68
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
be thrown, or rather bowled, and the old mele often tell of fabulous distances covered
by the ancient Hawaiian heroes. The second required more skill than strength to
drive the ulumaika between two upright sticks a few inches apart near the end of the
FIG. 67. HAWAIIAN MA1KA STONES.
kahua, or thirty to forty yards from the bowler.* The third was rather a trial of the
ulu than of the players, as the stones were rolled against each other and the toughest
won the game for its owner. There is a famous kahua near Kalae on Molokai, where
I have seen hundreds of ulu so broken that the fragments were not worth carrying off.
The players trained carefully and became very strong and skilful. Practice began in
* Narrative of a Tour through Hawaii by William F,llis, p. 187. Second edition. Tondon, 1827.
[400]
ULUMAIKA.
69
early youth, and children used rough and unpolished stones for their play. Various
kinds of stone were used as we have seen was the ease with the scpiid-hook sinkers, but
a heavy compact coral rock seems to have been the favorite; it was sometimes arti-
FIG. 68. HAWAIIAN MAIKA STONES.
ficially colored, and indeed it was generally stained by the coconut, kukui or kamani
oil with which the choicest ulu were frequently anointed. Wood was sometimes used
instead of stone, as in No. 902 in the Bishop Museum which weighs 11.2 oz. and be¬
longed to the Princess Keelikolani.
While sometimes spherical, as has been noted in the description of stone balls,
ulu were mostly thin cylinders with slightly convex sides : the edges were often rounded,
[401]
70
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
Of those in the Bishop Museum the largest is five inches in diameter and three inches
thick ; it weighs forty-four ounces ; the smallest is one and seven-eighths inches in diam¬
eter and weighs three and one-half ounces. That the thickness of the disk bears no
definite relation to the diameter may be seen in Fig. 69. Some of the best ulu are
shown in Figs. 67 and 68, and the following table will give the size and weight: —
Number.
Diameter.
Thickness.
Weight.
Material.
Figure 67. — 928.
3.1 in.
1.6 in.
14.7 OZ.
Coral rock.
911.
2.6
1 .6
9-5
Coral rock.
900.
3-7
2
22.5
Brown and yellow breccia, Hawaii.
915-
2.7
1.8
11. 7
Coral rock.
go 1 .
3-2
2.2
18.5
Coral rock, highly polished.
4672.
3
i-5
1 1 -5
Coral rock.
898.
3-3
1 .6
15
Coral rock, sharp edges.
925-
3-4
1.8
18
Coral rock, sharp edges.
923-
3
1.8
12.2
Breccia, chipped.
936.
2-3
i-5
7
Coral, stained.
934-
3-5
i-5
20
Coral ; Kailua, Hawaii.
904.
2.4
i-5
7
Yellow breccia, chipped.
4662.
3-6
2.1
23
Compact coral rock.
47l6-
2.8
1.8
1 4-5
Basalt.
927.
3-4
i-7
1 1 .2
Yellow breccia, chipped.
47°4-
3
1 .8
1 1 -5
Hava, much defaced.
4661 .
3-6
i-9
22
Coral rock, beautifully polished.
906.
2.4
i-7
8
Coral rock, very convex.
4663.
2.1
1.4
3-5
Grey lava, one face chipped off.
9l9-
i-9
i-3
4
Rough lava ; used by children.
4665.
3
1.8
H
Coral, well polished ; L,iliuokalani.
4697.
3-9
2.2
3i
Coral, chipped.
924.
5
3-i
52
Lava, with cells filled ; very convex.
4673-
3-7
i-9
24
Coral rock.
Figure 68. — 8668.
2.7
i-7
8
Red stone with brown veins.
938.
3-3
1.8
19
Lava.
908.
3
1.8
14
Lava, stained red; North Kona, Hawaii.
8669.
2.7
1 .6
9
Light brown compact stone.
935-
3-2
i.8
16.2
Lava, stained red ; well polished.
916.
2.9
1 .6
13.2
Lava, stained red.
903-
3-i
1 .6
16
Red lava(?); Hilo, Hawaii.
4701.
3-4
2
23
Sandstone (?) .
917.
3-2
1.8
14.7
Grey lava, unsymmetrical.
937-
2.9
i-7
1 1 -7
Lava.
9H-
2.8
i-5
12
Grey lava, not polished.
4702.
3-i
i-9
12.2
Black lava.
4700.
3-4
2
16.5
Material resembling blue clay.
5013-
3
2
12
Coral rock ; belonged to Mopua.
909.
2.9
1.4
n-7
Black lava.
8678.
3-4
1.8
16
Lava ; F\ A. Hosmer.
899.
3-4
i-7
H-5
Grey lava.
918.
3
1.8
13
Compact lava.
913-
3-i
r-7
1 1 .2
Grey lava.
930-
3-2
1.8
18.2
Compact lava.
Average :
3-09
1.77
I7-I5
These forty-four ulu have been
seledled
from the large number in the Bishop
Museum (see Fig. 69 for others) solely on account of their fine finish, and they will
probably fairly represent the forms used by the best players. I am puzzled by the
unsymmetrical specimen No. 917, for it is difficult, if not impossible to roll it straight.
Did the ancient Hawaiians have “trick bowls”?
[402]
UL UMAIKA .
71
Not only has this fine game faded from the memory of the fading Hawaiians, but
the stones have become curiosities to them. I once asked an intelligent Hawaiian the
name of these stones, and his reply was, “ Aole ike wan; pohakn kapili waa pahaP “I do
not know; perhaps a stone to pound a canoe.” Indeed they have often been used as
hammers, and many have dents on the edge or sides. Another use for the rough,
poorly finished ulumaika I have noticed several times. In the sand burials at Koloa,
Kauai, and near Leahi on Oahu, they were placed under the chin of the corpse, which
FIG. 69. PILE OF MAIKA STONES.
was arranged in a sitting posture with the knees against the breast. Curiously enough
two of the three instances noted were female skeletons ; the other was not recorded ; but
as women did not play maika these were not cases of prized possessions buried with the
dead, — rather a pillow for the tongue in the long sleep.
Hxadtly how the ulumaika were made I cannot say, for the methods told to me (the
process ceased long before I came to the Islands) vary considerably, and I could not
regard my informants as very akamai or skilful in the matter. From the large collec¬
tion at my disposal I have arranged the stages somewhat as follows, although the order
in any individual case might of course be varied : stone roughly rounded ; sides ground
fiat ; accurately rounded ; sides made convex by grinding between grooved stones which
were held so that the grooves were at an acute angle with each other; polishing the
stone. Specimens of all these stages are in hand ; some are given in the figures, for the
last two are sometimes omitted and we have simply a flat circular disk without polish.
7 2
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
Ring Cutting. — The native Hawaiian bambn is of small diameter and so could
not be used as the larger species are, so ingeniously, by the islanders of the western
Pacific to cnt disks and rings from stone or shell, but the process has produced so many
specimens in all large ethnological collections that it may fairly be described here. If the
Hawaiians could have had it the making of ulumaika would have been greatly sim¬
plified. I have seleCted for illustration a large heavy ring of limestone used as a cindalo
on god on one of the Solomon group,
and it will be seen in Fig. 70 that
the central hole is cleanly bored.
No. 1883 is 9.6 inches in diameter
and it was probably rounded in the
Hawaiian way between stones, but
the hole which measures, as seen
by the scale, only 3.2 inches was
bored with the bambu drill. The
two lower rings in the same figure
are of a much harder material, the
shell of the huge bivalve Tridacna
gigcis , common through Micronesia
and the Bismarck archipelago.
I have seen good steel drills broken
in the attempt to pierce this shell,
and yet it will be seen that the
bambu has done its work with
success and neatness. The rings,
which come from northeastern New
Guinea, are used as bangles or
fig. 70. rings of limestone and shell. wristlets and are made by patiently
twisting a loaded bambu of suit¬
able diameter and armed with silicious sand and water. A fragment of the shell is
bound around with slips of rattan, as shown in Fig. 71, and fitted snugly into a cavity
of a block of light suberose wood, probably a species of Erythrina. With the feet rest¬
ing on this block the workman twists right and left the ever shortening bambu, which
is four or five feet long at the start and usually has a stone of one or two pounds
weight attached to one side. Water and sand joined to the silica of the bambu will
in time work through the hard shell. I11 a specimen of the bambu in the Bishop
Museum the cutting edge is roughly serrated and thin. When the central hole was
bored a larger bambu was used to complete the ring.
[404]
AXES AND ADZES.
73
For boring small boles in stone, shell, or bone, the old Hawaiian used fragments
of lava made fast to the spindle of the universally known “pump drill”, and in
most cases the hole was not bored diredlly through but countersunk, as it were,
from both sides until the conical holes met in the middle of the object to be perfor¬
ated. In this way were bored the holes in dog teeth for attaching them to the net
for anklets to be worn in the hula. One pair of these hula anklets in the Bishop
Museum has nineteen hundred holes, each drilled from both sides!
Fishing' Stones. A peculiar method of fishing in vogue among the old
Hawaiians consisted in suspending in the water club-shaped pieces of wood smeared
with some bait ( pain ) supposed to be attractive to the
fish, and then hooking or scooping the assembled
prey. Many of these laau melomelo are in the Bishop
Museum, and many of the formulae for bait used to
render the log attractive have been published in an
early catalogue of this Museum.* Stone was some¬
times substituted for wood, although rarely, and the
only two that I have seen are shown in Fig. 72 (Nos.
7453 and 7452). They are well made, doubtless for some
person of importance, and have been carefully kept.
The longer one measures 9.5 inches and is of very
graceful outline. In shape they resemble magnified
“amulets” or “plummets” so common on the American
continent. Most of the fish caught by means of these
; bohaku melomelo were small shore fish and the process
will be described more fully in the chapter on Fisheries. f t
Papamu for Konane. — The game of konane ,
a favorite one among the upper classes of old Hawaii,
was usually played on a wooden board ( papamu ) marked with spots arranged either
in files or quincuneially and of indefinite number. In some eases stone took the place
of wood, as in a fine specimen in the Bishop Museum (No. 5313). Here a large flat
stone 16X24 inches is dotted with depressions (about 120) in files, but I have seen a
much larger series of these pits upon the flat lava slabs in situ near Kailua, Hawaii.
The “men” used in playing were beach-worn pebbles of black lava and white coral.
Axes and Ad^es. — If this important class of stone implements has been left
until now it was not for insufficient appreciation, nor poverty of material, except in the
first mentioned tool, where No. 4603 (Fig. 73) is not only the single specimen of its
*A Preliminary Catalogue of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum of Polynesian Kthnology and Natural History, Pt. II., p. 95. Honolulu, 1892.
fThe Indians of Vancouver used sinkstones of the size of a goose egg and shaped like those described in the text, to twirl the bait. Mem.
Anthrop. Soc. London. III., p. 261.
[405 1
74
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
kind in the Bishop Museum, but the only one I have seen. It is a great stone wedge
7.5 inches long and 2.5 inches on the blade. It is of hard and durable clinkstone weigh¬
ing 2 lbs. 13 oz. The angle1 of the wedge is about 65°. When used as an axe it was
doubtless bound to a han¬
dle, although the very
blunt end would seem to
render the attachment
difficult. Except for riv¬
ing logs I do not know
what work such an axe
could do that might not
better be done with the
more common adzes. An¬
other more common form
of axe is shown on Plate
LVII., No. 3141.
That the Hawaiian adze
is peculiar and not very
closely allied to those of
New Zealand, as claimed
by Moseley in the Voyage
of the Challenger, nor in¬
deed to any other of the
Pacific forms will, I think
be plain enough from the
many illustrations herein
given (Plates Till, to
TVII., and Figs. 74-79).
As it has several times
been asserted that Ha¬
waiian and Maori adzes
were more closely allied
FIG. 72. HAWAIIAN FISHING STONES. than those Qf any Qf tpe
other Pacific groups, I have given illustrations of Moriori adzes (Figs. 81 and 82) from
the Chatham islands as well as a series of the later Maori forms (Plate TIX.) probably
derived from their predecessors. I have also shown the chisel-like greenstone adzes from
the Solomon islands (Fig. 78) which differ most from the Hawaiian. The Hawaiian
peculiarity consists in the parallel sides and angular tang, but it is not to one definite
shape that all Hawaiian adzes conform. For instance the plates show that parallelism
[406]
AXES AND ADZES.
75
of the sides is not constant and in the larger specimens there is a wide departure, but all
the while there is a strong family resemblance among them all. To show the cutting
edges of these tools more clearly than the photographs can I have made tracings (Fig. 74)
of some of the more important examples illustrated in the plates and figures. The num¬
bers will identify the specimens in both cases. The angle certainly seems too obtuse
to cut well, at least on some examples, but the work done with them in the hands of an
old Hawaiian remains to this day to silence all doubts of their capabilities.
Let us climb to the workshop of the adze maker. All these were in high places,
and one on Manna Kea, Hawaii, was nearly 12,900 ft. above the sea. As good elink-
FIG. 73. HAWAIIAN STONE AXE.
stone was not found in many places the known quarries hardly exceeded half-a-dozen.
On Hawaii was the most important of all, that on Manna Kea, where the workmen
could only work in favorable seasons for the snow frequently covered the quarry, but
from the immense quantity of fragments and chips the work must have extended over
many generations; so far as known, this was the earliest quarry exploited, and it is
puzzling how the place was discovered when we consider the aversion the Hawaiians
had to even visiting those high, bleak and desert regions, the supposed abode of spirits
not always friendly. It is possible that the tradition which speaks of the survivor of
the deluge of Kahinalii grounding on Mauna Kea and following the receding waters
to the lower levels, discovering the koi pohaku on the way, may point to the consider¬
able antiquity of adze-making in this place, but I am inclined to believe that all tradi¬
tions of the Hawaiian deluge date after the coming of the Spanish discoverers. It has
[407]
76
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
always seemed strange that the axe-makers did not bring the raw material down to
their homes and work it np in comfort instead of freezing in their kapa garments at
this great altitude. It may be that the mystery of the place and its very solitude kept
the trade in few hands and so enhanced the value of a tool that so many must have.
Another quarry 011 the same island was in an almost equally strange place, a
lateral and deep crater of the volcano of Kilauea. The stone was obtained from the
lower walls of the very deep pit and a subsequent flow of lava in the crater has covered
all traces of the chips or working, but the name clings to the place ( Keanakakoi , the
workshop of the adzes), and there are masses of clinkstone, often of large size, scattered
about the vicinage of Kilauea, apparently ejeCted by some explosive eruption like that
of 1789. All the adzes from these two quarries are dark-colored and very compact.
On Maui, far up the slopes of Haleakala, was a quarry which I have never seen, nor do
I know the location. I know of no quarries on Oahu, although they may have existed,
for clinkstone is found in fragments near Aliapaakai and elsewhere. On Kauai, above
Waimea, the port where Cook first landed, are extensive quarries, and from these what
knowledge of the working of adzes I may have was obtained. Various stone enclosures
mostly in ruin and popularly considered heiau or temples are about the ridge where
the clinkstone was worked, and while some were workshops or habitations necessary
for shelter in that rainy region, there is every reason to believe that temples to the
tutelary gods of the guild of adze-makers were there as well, for the ancient Hawaiians
were a very devout people, acknowledging invisible superiors in all handicraft, and
doing no serious work without invoking the aid and protection of these deities.
Of course the making of stone adzes ceased soon after the introduction of iron
and I have never seen them made, nor have I talked diredtly with any of the surviving
makers, but I have seen them used and sharpened, and I have been astonished at the
[408]
AXES AND ADZES.
77
FIG. 75. HAWAIIAN STONE ADZES.
dexterity of the man and the efficiency of the tool. In watching the shaping of a canoe
I have seen the old canoe-maker use for the rough shaping and excavating an ordinary
foreign steel adze, but for the finishing touches he dropped the foreign tool and returned
to the adze of his ancestors, and the blunt looking stone cut off a delicate shaving from
[409]
7§
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
BERNICE PAUAH1 BISHOP MUSEUM.
i a 3 4 . si e
FIG. 76. HAWAIIAN STONE ADZES.
the very hard koa wood and never seemed to take too much wood as the foreign adze was
apt to do. That skill was an important element in the use I was convinced, for with all
the teaching of the native I could only make a dent where I tried to raise a shaving.
But to return to the ancient Anakakoi. The marks of fires, where the blocks of
stone were heated to make sure there were no air cells to cause flaws in the koi , were
common, and the cores, flakes (spalls) and shapeless fragments cover the ground, with
here and there broken adzes, sometimes nearly finished before the unlucky break oc¬
curred. Plate LVIII. shows a series of “chips” from this workshop, obtained for me by
Mr. Francis Gay, on whose estate the quarry is situated. These spalls and cores were
[410]
AXES AND ADZES.
79
obtained by the spalder with a rather heavy pebble hammer, but the nature of the stone
is so different from the conchoidally fracturing flint that the shaping had mostly to
be done by grinding, hence I was surprised to find few grindstones. Perhaps, as the
workshop was abandoned long before the stone adze went out of use, the portable grind¬
stones (See Fig. 9) were carried away to sharpen the old adzes, of which there was cer¬
tainly a great supply. No stone implement is found so universally or abundantly all
over the group. A study of this collection, small as it is, throws some light on the
procedure of the old adze-makers. Apparently a number of spalls were chipped from
the core when the fire test had proved the absence of air cells, and then a selection made
for the various sizes and kinds of adzes desired, and it will
be seen from Plate LVIII. that there was a great range
in size, and even very small spalls might be utilized, as
in No. 4602. The spall was chipped roughly into the
desired shape, and if the stone was refraCtory and would
not split as desired it was used for some other shape, or east
aside. Then the end intended for the blade was ground
straight across as shown in No. 3, and to this normal the
front and back were afterward ground. This first grind¬
ing served probably also to show the compactness or grain
of the stone. No. 1 indicates that the sides were ground
last, for in the fragment one side is ground smooth, the
other partly. It will be seen on some of the many figures
of adzes given that this finish was sometimes omitted on
otherwise well finished adzes. No. 10 shows a partly
formed adze with the sides ground and the blade broken
away. No. 9 is a cellular highly silicious spall rejeCted
as an impurity ; in fact it seems a scum of the clinkstone.
No. 15 is a fragment with large flat cells that have been
exposed by the fire test.* No. 8 was fully formed for grinding and the edge was
partly ground when the corner split off and the work stopped. No. 16 shows half of
a spall of very heavy clinkstone suitable for a short adze or a scraper without tang.
No. 19 seems to have been formed as far as possible by chipping and was ready for
the grinding that never came. No. 4 shows a fragment of a rare form shown more
fully in Fig. 77, which represents an adze (full size) of unknown use with the blade
at an angle of 750, with the axis of the adze like a turner’s chisel. This is in the
possession of Professor Curtis J. Lyons, of the Government Survey, who kindty lent the
specimen for illustration. I think these adzes (of which I have seen only these two
*It is generally the case that where cells occur in otherwise closegrained lava that the application of heat gives explosive force to the
imprisoned air or other gas, and once while camping on Olokui, a mountain of Molokai, I built a fireplace of compact fragments of stone,
and as the heat of the fire permeated the stones explosions so violent took place that we were obliged to move away for safety.
[411]
FIG. 77. HAWAIIAN ADZE WITH
OBLIQUE BLADE.
So
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENIS.
JA HI BISHOP MUSEUM.
FIG. 78. HAWAIIAN STONE ADZES.
Hawaiian, but many Maori) were used in carving the large idols. Another unground
but nearly shaped adze of large size is shown in No. 3153 of Plate LIV., found,
I believe, at this same Kauai quarry.
Adzes may, for convenience, be classed in three divisions: with parallel sides
and angular tang, e.g., Fig. 79, No. 3447; Plate FVII., No. 3136; Pis. LV. and FVI.:
with divergent sides and angular tang, e.g ., Fig. 78, No. 3155; Fig. 76, No. 3137:
with divergent sides, thin and nearly flat, e.g., Fig. 76, No. 3121; Fig. 78, No. 3123.
[412]
FIG. 79. HAWAIIAN STONE ADZES.
That each of these was fitted for particular work I do not doubt, but I cannot go any
farther. The hardness of the wood influenced to a marked degree the angle of the
cutter, and in very soft wood, such as wiliwili ( Erythrina monosperma ), coconut shell
or alahee wood was substituted for stone as admitting a more acute angle for the
edge. Plates L,V. and LVI. and Fig. 72 show some variation. As the under sur¬
face is a curve it presents a constantly changing angle. The angles, as nearly as
can be measured, vary from 340 to 78°; the weights from eleven pounds to less than
an ounce, and the width of the cutting edge from an eighth of an inch to six inches.
Placing the adzes figured in tabular form wre have the following: —
Memoirs B. P. b. Museum. Vpi.. i.. No, 4,-6. [413]
AXES AND ADZES.
BERNICE PAUAHI BISHOP MUSEUM.
82
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS
Width of
Weight.
Number.
Length.
blade.
Lbs.
Ozs.
Figure 73
—4603.
7.5 in.
2.5 in.
2
13
P'lGURE 75
—3122.
16
4.6
IO
7
3140.
12.8
4-5
7
1
315°-
13.2
3-3
5
5
Figure 76.
—3137-
1 1
4-5
4
7
3152-
1 1
3-6
4
8
3121.
10.7
4.1
10
7
Figure 78.
—3155-
13
4
7
8
3156.
12.5
3-i5
4
4
3123.
11 -5
3-2
5
7
Figure 79.
—3195-
8-5
1 .6
2
4
7998.
1 1
2.2
5
7572.
1 1. 4
2.2
4
3
4565-
7
i-3
1
4
3147-
6.8
1.2
• •
1 1
4028.
6
i-5
• •
12
Plate Fill
—3125.
13-5
4-7
1 1
3139-
13.2
3-3
4
IO (
8679.
11. 8
4.2
5
13 ’
Plate LIV
—3153-
13-5
4
6
6
6738.
13-4
3-7
5
• •
8931.
13-5
3-7
4
4
Plate LV.
—3122.
16
4.6
10
7
315°-
13.2
3-3
5
5
3155-
13
4
7
8
Plate LVI
—6738.
13-4
3-7
5
8931.
13-5
3-7
4
4
3152-
1 1
3-6
4
8
7998.
1 1
2.2
5
7572.
1 1.4
2.2
4
3
3167-
6-5
i-7
2
6
3156.
12.5
3-i5
4
4
Plate LVII
—4576.
6.9
2-5
12.5
4577-
5-7
2.1
8-5
4562.
4
1.4
5
3135-
4.1
1.65
5
4586.
3-7
i-7
7
4593-
4.1
1.4
6
4585-
3-9
1.2
4
4572.
4
i-5
6-5
3180.
4.6
1.2
8
3G6-
4.9
1 .6
7
3i4i-
7-5
2
12
3129.
2
0.6
1
4607.
2.7
1
2
3i3i-
2.3
0.8
i-5
4574-
3-2
1 .6
3
4606.
3-3
1.2
3
4580.
3
r.2
3
4588.
3-5
i-7
6
4°34-
3-2
i-3
3-9
4°33-
3-4
1 .6
4
4°3I •
2-5
1 .2
i-5
4030.
3-i
0.6
2
4620.
4
0.7
4
5305.
4.1
1 . 1
4-7
4608.
3
0.8
i-5
3L32.
2-5
1.4
3
4582.
2.9
1.2
2-5
4602.
J-5
0. 12
0.4
3I33-
2
0.9
1
[414]
Notes.
Axe, found on Kauai; 65°.
Well wrought, found on Kauai.
Honuapo, Kau, Hawaii.
Grey phonolite.
Broad and flat, dark phonolite.
Edge of blade chipped.
Finely finished, flat, black phonolite.
Dark phonolite.
Well wrought; found on Kauai.
Blade broken ; Kauai.
Another view is given on Plate FVI.
See also Plate LVI.
Kauai.
Liliuokalani collection.
Kauai.
All on this plate are in the rough and entirely
unground. No. 3139 is a darker clinkstone.
Blade much damaged ; Queen Emma.
Kona, Hawaii.
Dark phonolite, thin.
Found on Kauai; 36°.
Angle to tang=32°.
Waianae, Oahu ; light colored phonolite. •
Kona, Hawaii; front on Plate LIV.
Front view on Plate LIV.
Edge of blade chipped.
Peculiar form of tang.
P'orm similar to No. 7998.
Polished on all sides; "Na kini mahoe."
Front shown in Fig. 76.
Grey phonolite, very thin ; Kauai.
Black phonolite, from Kauai.
Well wrought, from Kauai.
Kauai.
Blade chipped, from Kauai.
Blade chipped.
Well ground, from Kauai.
Dark phonolite; Palama, Oahu.
Well wrought, dark stone.
Axe of dark phonolite, thin.
Kauai.
Good polish.
Finely wrought.
Grey phonolite stained with red earth.
Dark phonolite, from Kauai.
Well shaped.
Rough.
Much like obsidian.
Polished all over.
Blade broken.
Dark phonolite.
Rough work.
Broad and short, Kauai.
Finely polished chisel ; Kauai.
Kauai.
AXES AND ADZES.
83
Width of
Weicrht.
Number.
Length.
blade.
Lbs.
Ozs.
Notes.
Plate L,VII.
—4583-
2
r
I
Brown phonolite, well wrought.
Continued.
4581.
r.8
0.8
I
459i-
2.2
I
2
Tang broken.
4564-
2
I . I
2
Kealia, Kauai.
4595-
2.6
0.8
2
Rudely wrought, obtuse angle.
4038.
2.2
0-7
I
Polished only on top.
4578.
2-5
I .1
i-5
Polished all over.
4037-
2.4
0.8
1 -7
4601 .
i-4
0.6
0.7
4036.
2.3
0.6
1
Kauai.
4039-
2
0.7
1
Grey phonolite, no polish.
4600.
2.7
0.8
i-5
Kealia, Kauai.
4599-
2
0.6
1
4598.
2.2
0.7
1
3136.
21.7
2.1
9
4
Found in a walled-up cave wrapped in kapa;
evidently highly valued.
The last example in the list, which I have photographed with the small adzes
to show the extremes, is peculiarly interesting not only from the circumstances men¬
tioned, but for the remarkable length. It might have been used to cut the interior of
coconut wood drums, or of deep canoes, or even umeke ; but if so used why give it soli¬
tary entombment in a burial cave ? There were no human remains nor anything else
in the small cave, so the finder declared. Although the kapa is very durable in dry
places it must have mouldered before all traces of a skeleton could have vanished.
The adze is likely to remain a mystery. No. 4602, if used as a chisel, must have had
some sort of handle, as the fragment is too minute to grasp firmly. It may have been
intended for a borer to use with the pump drill, but it shows no signs of attrition on
the vertical edges. As a mechanical proposition it seems difficult to get any efficiency
from an ounce of stone used as an adze, unless indeed it had a weighty handle like the
New Caledonian adze shown in Fig. 86 A and B. For felling trees the heavy and broad
adzes, like No. 3121 or 3122, I have found by experiment quite suitable.
It is worth while noting that there is in the Bishop Museum an adze (No. 3115,
not figured) which was in adlual use so recently as 1886, and although the stone has
been replaced by a plane-iron, the peculiar form remains in the old handle. The latest
stone adzes I have seen in use date back to 1864, although I have no reason to suppose
that they were abandoned for some years after that.
We may now examine a few other adzes from the Pacific Region, that their
points of variation from the Hawaiian model may be noted. The Solomon islanders
had a chisel-like axe or adze which not infrequently became more of a gouge than
chisel. The material is always a dark green stone, neither so fine-grained nor so hard
as the New Zealand greenstone. In all specimens I have seen the section is either
circular or elliptical. I do not claim that all adzes from the Solomon islands are alike,
for I do not know of more than a few dozen in all foreign collections, and no study has
been made of them in their own country. Fig. 80 shows the two commoner forms, and
Fig. 81 three of the chisel form which I obtained in Hamburg from the Godeffroy col-
[415]
84
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
lection. All are exceedingly well finished and might have been held in the hand when
in use; I do not know the method of handling them. There are two adzes in the
Bishop Museum of which the provenance is uncertain, and they are shown in Fig. 82.
No. 3149 seems to belong to the Society
islands, and it will be noticed that the sides
are sloping instead of as in the Hawaiian
vertical. The other one in the same figure
(No. 7878) I attribute with very little doubt
to New Zealand. Its main peculiarity is
the transverse ridge on the face, not an un¬
common feature in Maori adzes, which seems
to have served to keep the handle in place.
FIG. 8l. SOLOMON ISLANDS ADZES.
We come now to the Maori adzes, which
have been considered most closely related to the Hawaiian. In Plate LIX. are shown
ten specimens of considerable variation in form, and I cannot believe that their total
dissimilarity to the Hawaiian forms is due solely to the different material used in the
two groups (greenstone* and phonolite). In three of the specimens (6952, 6944 and
1 507) we see the angular blade already noticed in Hawaiian specimens, — in all such
FIG. 80. SOLOMON ISLANDS ADZES.
*As will be seen in the table on page 86, many of these Maori adzes are made from a volcanic stone resembling phonolite but distinct
from the Hawaiian variety. New Zealand being a volcanic country with a great variety of lava, including obsidian, the worked stones offer
much greater diversity than on the Hawaiian group, where the volcanic eje(5ta are comparatively uniform.
[416]
AXES AND ADZES.
85
cases the tools are small, weighing but a few ounces. The angular tang so promi¬
nent in the Hawaiian is absent in the Maori ; so are the perpendicular sides, and the
edges are generally rounded, or in some cases (1504) beveled on the front side.
The Moriori predecessors of the Maori, whom the latter drove from the main
islands to the little group of
the Chatham islands, where
they are now practically ex¬
tinct, had a form of adze close¬
ly allied to the Maori but pre¬
senting several peculiarities.
Those shown in Figs. 83 and
84 were collected many years
ago by a resident of the Chat¬
ham islands and are supposed
to show fairly the forms. In
the first figure the two stiff,
sharp-angled stones are of a
remarkably fine finish, sur¬
passing in some respedts any
Pacific ocean adzes I have
seen. No. 8586 is large, and
even the tang is rounded to
suit the cord that attached it
to the handle. The front is
slightly convex and the blade
is consequently curved, but
the other sides are true as if
planed. The smaller one of
the same pattern is flat on all
sides. The material is a hard,
brittle, steel-grey, volcanic
stone. In Fig. 82 a greater variety is shown, and here there is a nearer approach to
the Hawaiian. The material is a volcanic stone containing considerable masses of
olivine, often colored red by decomposition. I have not recognized this stone in any
other adzes, and I do not know whether it is found on the Chatham group.
In Micronesia shell replaced the stone, which is not found on the low coral
atolls, and the shape was comparatively uniform throughout the region making use of
shell. Sometimes flat, when the exigencies of the shell demanded this starved form,
but usually thick, semi-cylindrical, the edge ground toward the flat side, thus leaving
[417]
FIG. 82. SOUTHERN PACIFIC ADZES.
86
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
a curved cutting edge as shown in Fig. 83. These shell adzes were probabl}- as durable
as stone, and they are said to be still in use on the smaller islands where there is little
trade. In New Guinea the adzes were often rudely formed of a volcanic stone, or of
greenstone, and in shape often approach the Hawaiian, as shown in Fig. 85, Nos. 1552
and 1553. In the same group the axe No. 1800 is of finer make.
The sizes and weights of these non-Hawaiian adzes are given in the following table:
Number.
Length.
Cutting edge.
Weight.
Notes.
SOLOMON ISLANDS :
Figure 80. — 1873.
6.5 in.
1 .6 in.
. . lbs.
10.5 oz.
Greenstone; Florida.
1872.
4-5
3-6
• •
6.7
Greenstone ; Florida.
SOLOMON ISLANDS:
Figure 81. — 7969.
6.2
1.2
. .
1 1
Greenstone; edge like finger-nail.
7967.
12.6
1.2
1
12
Greenstone; edge like finger-nail.
7968.
5-9
1.2
• •
10
Greenstone; edge like finger-nail.
SOUTHERN PACIFIC:
Figure 82. — 3149.
10
3-2
1
8-5
Greenstone lava ; Mrs. Bishop’s collection.
7878.
8
3-i
1
9.2
Greenstone of light color ; Maori.
NEW ZEALAND:
Plate FIX. -6952.
3-4
i-5
. .
2-5
Thin jade, angular blade, sides unfinished.
1502.
7
2.8
1
7
Brown lava.
1503-
13-9
2.7
7
1 2
Blade chipped, transverse ridge, no tang.
1504.
8.2
2-5
1
15-5
Grey stone ; sides beveled on top.
6948.
4-9
2
. .
10
Brown lava.
6945.
6.4
1.8
1
• •
Rounded on all sides ; grey lava.
6946.
5-4
2.1
. •
13-5
6944.
3
2.1
• •
5-5
Dark phonolite ; angular blade.
1507-
3-3
2-3
• •
6-5
Fight greenstone ; blade at angle.
6947.
5-9
2.6
4
* *
Grey lava ; sides beveled.
CHATHAM ISLANDS:
Figure 83. — 8586.
i3-7
3-9
6
7
Grey lava.
8585.
8-5
2
1
6.7
Grey lava, flat on all sides.
CHATHAM ISLANDS:
Figure 84. — 8587.
8-5
2.8
1
13
Reticulated lava with much olivine.
8593-
2.9
1.2
• •
2.7
8594-
2.9
1 .6
• •
3
8595-
2-3
1 .6
• •
3
Angular edges.
8596.
3-7
1.9
5-5
Rudely finished.
8592.
6-5
2-5
1
9
8588.
5-6
2-5
• •
8.2
Thin.
8589.
6
2.2
1
• •
8590.
4.6
i-9
• •
6
8591-
2.9
1.2
• •
2.7
Thin, edge re-ground.
MARSHALL ISLANDS:
Figure 85.-7534.
1 1 -5
4(6 circ.)5
• •
Cut from shell of Tridacna gigas.
Handles for the Ad^es. — While this portion of our study seems to rightfully
belong to the consideration of Tools and their use, it may fairly claim a place here for
brief treatment, for otherwise the stone appears of little use, and the relationship of these
stones is partly explained by the peculiarities of handling. To use their koi pahoa* the
Hawaiians had a handle generally of hau wood ( Paritium tiliaceum ) cut with a heel
to which the tang of the stone was attached by cords of olona or coconut fibre, a bit of
kapa or dry leaf of pandanus or banana being inserted between the wood and stone.
* While the term hot pahoa properly applies to the narrow sort with parallel sides like a chisel, custom has extended its use to almost
all forms of stone adzes.
[418]
ADZE HANDLES.
*7
(No. 3101, PI. LX.) This form shows little variation except in length or curve of
handle. The hau tree is well fitted for this purpose, the wood being light and tough,
and the branches naturally curved. The very name of the tree signifies “handle tree”
(/ he au = hau ) .
Besides this simple form there was a more complicated one especially designed
for the poe kalae waa or canoe makers, in which the stone blade was not fastened diredlly
to the handle but to a tongue, which in turn was attached to the handle in such a way
as to be movable on its axis and so serve for a
right- or left-handed cutter (No. 3116, PI. LX.) .
Among the Hawaiians this was traditionally
the invention of a skilled canoe-maker, after¬
wards deified, Kupaaikee, who not only be¬
queathed his name but also his elelo (tongue)
to this form of handle. Traditions are very
pretty and interesting matters, but one must
not trust much to their guidance, and in the
present case we know that the people of the
northern coast of New Guinea have had the
same ingenious form from time immemorial,
and some of the other islanders had an even
simpler form for effecting the same purpose,
as shown in Fig. 83, No. 1800 from New
Guinea, and in c. of Fig. 84 from the Bis¬
marck archipelago. In the New Guinea form,
in my opinion the progenitor of the Hawaiian,
sleeves of braided rattan are used to hold the
rotating blade, while on Hawaii coconut cord
serves the same purpose, the former palm not
extending eastward in the Pacific. In the Caroline islands the portion to which the
stone (shell) was fitted had a projection against which the head of the adze rested
(Fig. 83, No. 8063), giving additional firmness. In the Marshall islands the form of
the Kupaaikee adze appears rather clumsy, but the original purpose has disappeared,
the blade being immovable.
Laying the museums of Europe under contribution, we have in Fig. 86 some
other Pacific handles. The two from New Caledonia show in a rather clumsy form
the ingenious method of giving weight to the adze by a heavy block of wood, hemi¬
spherical in form, adding much to the efficiency of the tool. These handles are often
in one piece, but sometimes hand-piece and socket for the blade are inserted into the
block. In the specimen from the Dresden museum the blade socket can revolve in the
[419]
88
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS
BERNICE PAL AH! BISHOP MI S: I'll
£3*56
FIG. 84. MORIORI ADZES.
FIG. 85.
HANDLES OF ADZES FROM NEW GUINEA AND MICRONESIA.
[420]
ADZE HANDLES.
89
club-like handle to which it is also attached by a cord. In the Berne museum is an
adze from Tahiti which seems to be the Hawaiian form reversed, and it makes a simple
handle. The specimen in the Hamburg museum attributed to the Marshall islands
seems to be unique and differs greatly from the ordinary handles of that group, as
shown in Fig. 85 ; Herr C. W. Luders should, however, be well informed on the locality.
The knob is the puzzling feature. In F, the specimen from the Berlin museum, we
have perhaps the most primitive method of handling.
fig. 86.
F
VARIOUS ADZE HANDLES.
A. New Caledonia, in the Vienna Museum.
B. New Caledonia, in the Copenhagen Museum.
C. Bismarck archipelago, Dresden Museum.
D. Society islands, in the Berne Museum.
E. Marshall islands, in the Hamburg Museum.
F. Hermit islands, in the Berlin Museum.
To return to the specimens at hand: two adzes from the Gilbert islands, shown
in Fig. 87, closely resemble the Hawaiian form, although the stone is replaced
with shell; but I am by no means sure that these handles, which were obtained within
a few years, represent the ancient form. They may have been taken from Hawaiian
patterns, the intercourse between these groups having been close since the establish¬
ment of the Hawaiian Board of Missions some fifty }’ears ago. The Maori adzes shown
in Fig. 88 have been handled within twenty years, and are supposed to show the
ancient form. It will be noticed that feathers are used to decorate, much as on the
tomahawk of the Amerind, and these adzes or axes were used as weapons by the Maori,
one or both of these specimens having been found on a famous battle field.
[421]
9o
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
Another form of stone axe or adze must not be wholly passed by, the ceremonial or
sacred axe from Mangaia, of the Hervey group, well represented in every large museum,
and here shown in Fig. 89; and with this another, not so well known, from Duau
(Normanby), of the D’Entre¬
casteaux group (PI. LXI.).
The Hervey islands handles
are carved with great delicacy,
and it is difficult to believe
that the}- were cut with so
rude an instrument as a shark
tooth, but such was the case.
The patterns are believed to
be of a sacred nature, and their
origin has been ingeniousl}7
suggested by my friend Mr.
Charles H. Read, the distin-
fig. 87. gilbert islands adzes. guished archaeologist of the
British Museum.*
The Duau specimens
are of very different
form, and have in com¬
parison little decora¬
tive carving; the
blades are flat and of
jadeite; the handle of
No. 1551 (PI. EXI.)
was originally orna¬
mented with feathers.
The handle of No.
1552, on the same
plate, is neatly carved
and a bone disk is
fastened to the inner
angle. In both the
blades are rather insecurely attached b}i bands of rattan. Still another specimen of
these decorated handles may be given from the stores of the Bishop Museum; it
comes from hew Zealand, that home of fine wood carving, and is shown in Fig. 90.
FIG. 88. MAORI ADZES.
*On the Origin and Sacred Character of certain ornaments of the southeast Pacific. Journal of the Anthropological Institute, XXI., p. 139.
[422]
CHISELS AND GOUGES.
91
In all cases the intention seems to be to honor the stone implement rather than
the temporary owner. As the warrior in mediaeval times held his sword in rever¬
ence, so the artisan of the
stone age regarded his principal
tool as most worthy of honor.
Chisels and Gouges. — We
have seen in the illustration of
the adzes of the Solomon islands
(Fig. 81) forms closely adapted
for cutting grooves or for the
more general work of a chisel,
and among the ancient Hawaii-
ans both chisels and gouges were
in use during the period preced¬
ing the introduction of steel. So
far as my experience goes the
latter tool was more commonly
formed from a marine shell
( Mitra or Terebra sp.), the
basal portion being ground at a
suitable angle, while the taper¬
ing apical end served conveni¬
ently for a handle. The Bishop
Museum has lately, however,
come into possession (in a lot
of material recently used in
heathen practices) of a well-
made stone gouge which is
shown in Fig. 92. It is 5 in.
long, 0.6 in. wide at the cutting
edge, and weighs 3.5 oz.
About the same time Mr. Paul
Hofer gave to the Museum the
finest stone chisel that I have
ever seen. This is shown in
_ . - FIG. 89. CEREMONIAL adzes FROM MANGAIA.
big. 91, and is o.b m. long,
weighs 7.7 oz., and has a cutting edge of 0.5 in. Of a form suitable for holding in the
hand it must have been a serviceable tool for carving images or the like, and certainly
required no handle. It has been carefull}r ground on all sides in such a way that it
[423]
92
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
FIG. 90. MAORI CARVED ADZE HANDLE.
tapers to each end. Doubtless buried in a moist place for many years its present
surface much resembles rusty iron. Another gouge in the collection (No. 4555) is
3.5 in. long, 0.6 in. wide at cutting edge, and weighs only 2.2 oz. It is ground smooth
and well rounded, and with the gouge shown in Fig. 92 seems to have been used in
carving the large idols. At least the curved edge exadify fits the interior curve of the
nostrils in two of the large idols in this Museum. The smaller gouge must have re¬
quired some sort of handle, as it is too short to hold firmly in the fingers.
Stone Figures. — Of the few animals that fell under the observation of the
ancient Hawaiians the dog and pig were by far the most cherished, but I have never
seen an}T image either in wood or stone of these domestic animals, and neither vras
raised to the dignitj’ of a god, although the deified hero Kamapuaa was half hog half
man. Was the totemistic idea too powerful to admit of deifying the limited articles of
animal food and so banishing them from the larder ? With certain fish the case was
different, and the Shark god was one of the most powerful of the minor deities; hence
probabfy we have a number of more or less accurate representations both in wood and
stone of these dreaded fish. Two that are in the Bishop Museum are shown in Fig. 93.
It is curious that in the southern Polynesian islands representations of fish, or at least
of fish as divinities, were extremefy’ rare, and )-et the harvest of the sea was quite as
important to the southern people as to their brethren dwelling north of the equator.
[424]
STONE FIGURES.
93
A fabled lizard of great size was one of the “properties” of the Hawaiian folklore, and
to this daj’ dread of this dragon-like monster is rife among the people. While draw¬
ings of the Moo or lizard exist, I do not
recall any carved figure of one. In bone
we have figures of shells, and even rude
skulls of enemies, but all these are small
*■
mi "-. •
FIG. 92. STONE GOUGE.
and belong to the chapter on Ornament.
Far more important are the anthropomor¬
phic figures still extant that show the sculp-
fig. 91. stone chisel tor’s powers most fully. Wood was of course
the most pliant material for the plastic work, but most of the idols of this material
perished in the flames of the iconoclastic reformers of 1S19. The few that survive in
the museums of the world have been photographed for the chapter on Hawaiian Y\ or-
[425]
94
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
BERNICE PAUAHI BISHOP MUSEUM.
FIG. 93. STONE IMAGES OF FISH GODS.
ship ; but the image makers used stone as well as wood, and of these some have survived,
and a few may be here noticed as works of stone, although their religious significance will
be treated more fully in another chapter. The oldest form as it appears to me is the
unhewn stone with the face of a human being sketched rudely on one end. Even
wooden idols have survived with no more shaping than this, and that the face or head
was not always considered necessary we see by the sketches of Dr. William Ellis* and
others, where a post rounded and decked with kapa makes a perfectly satisfactory god
so far as appears. A capital type of this rude stone form is shown in PI. LXIV., a
stone of great weight which stood, when I first saw it (1864) at the gate of a gentle¬
man’s premises in Kahuku, Oahn. Even in its fallen state it had its votaries, and
I have seen natives treat it with great respect, even making offerings of leaves. It was
50 inches high. After the death of the then owner and the absorption of the residence
♦This was not the missionary of the same name often quoted in this chapter, but the assistant surgeon to both vessels during Cook’s
third voyage, and the author of a very good account of the voyage.
[426]
STONE FIGURES.
95
by a sugar plantation this image and its companion, which will presently be described,
were taken to Frankfort-on-the-Main by a German resident of Honolulu. This gentle¬
man afterwards died, and hearing that the images were lying uncared for in their late
owner’s courtyard, in 1896 while in Germany, I hoped to be able to restore them to their
native country. I was three months too late, for on entering the great museum in Berlin
I found they had recently secured a permanent resting place there. Dr. Bastian, however,
kindly had casts made which are, by the courtesy of the German Government, now in the
Bishop Museum, and from these I have made the illustrations, PI. LXIV., and Fig. 94.
The other image is not an idol (in the popular sense) but a portrait bust, and it
was first known to the white population of the islands when it stood in the valley of
Manoa, near Honolulu. It is claimed that it was there before Cook’s arrival at Kauai
(1778). The ruff, wig and
cue suggest a Spanish
portrait of the time of the
early Spanish discoverers.
Whether it was an at¬
tempt on the part of a
native sculptor to repre¬
sent the white strangers,
or whether some Span¬
iard of Juan de Gaetano’s
crew made it as a memo¬
rial of their visit, I can¬
not say. The workmanship is much the same as on other stone images undoubtedly
Hawaiian, and the owner in 1864, who was a gentleman of education and especially
versed in Hawaiian legendary lore, always believed that it was of Hawaiian workman¬
ship and very ancient. The front and profile are shown in Fig. 94. The bust is 32
inches high. It is the only portrait I have seen, for the usual idols are not “likenesses
of any form that is in Heaven above, or that is in the Earth beneath, or that is in the
water under the earth”.
I have mentioned the images found on Necker island of the Hawaiian group in
connexion with the stone bowl (Fig. 53) found with them. They were all broken in
pieces, but some of them have been repaired* and are shown in PI. EXII. It will be
seen that there are two distinct types, one made of cellular lava, and with a coarse
treatment of arms and legs ; the other of finer stone and more reasonable treatment.
The heads in all of them spring from the breast without necks; they are large and
and have enormous ears. The profile, Fig. 95, is of image No. 7447, PI. LXII. We
*The repairing- consists solely in cementing together the ruptured parts. No additions have been made. Why, if the object was to
destroy these images, they were simply broken and left on the ground it is difficult to understand, for it would have been easy to have thrown
the fragments into the sea without moving from the spot where they were left.
[427]
FIG. 94. IMAGE FROM MANOA VALLEY.
96
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
know nothing of what they were intended to represent. Several small objedls have
been put together in Fig. 96. No. 4488 is an implement of unknown use, perhaps a
whetstone. The clinkstone
of which it is made is very
compact and metallic in ap¬
pearance. No. 5312 is a
small rudely made disk, of
which other specimens are
shown in Fig. 97. There is
a slight concavity on each
face, and a perforation in the
middle to unite these depres¬
sions, and the natives usu¬
ally call such stones pohaku
Jut, or a stone for a top. In
Fig. 97, No. 4681 is doubt¬
less such a stone, as it is
round and suitable for fast¬
ening to a spindle, and No.
4682 in the same figure
would also make a fair top;
but the two irregular speci¬
mens, No. 5312 and No.
4683 (Fig. 97), could hardly
serve that purpose. They
have been used in modern
times, and so far as I know,
formerly as well, as part of
a snare to catch birds. A
loop of fine cord is passed
through the central hole
and covered with bait, while
the snarer leads the cord to
some cover near by. A pull
at the right time may catch the leg of the bird in the loop and the weight of the stone
prevents flight. No 7454 is a peculiar and well finished sinker for a squid or turtle
hook. The Bishop Museum has lately acquired another specimen still attached to the
spindle, explaining the use, before unknown to me. No. 4064 is a neatly made stone
[428]
FIG. 95. NECKER ISLAND IMAGE.
STONE FIGURES.
97
helmet worn by a small idol. It is hollow and has a small hole in the rim, apparently
to fasten it on with. But the idol could not be obtained at the time the helmet was
purchased and now it has disappeared. I do not believe that the top was of consider¬
able antiquity on these islands, although small ones made from a kukui nut are not
uncommon among children’s toys. The irregular stones could be and no doubt were
used for net sinkers.
I have not described the stone structures of the old Hawaiians because they were
of rough stone, dry laid, and consist of pyramidal and enclosed temples which will
properly be considered with the Ancient Worship, and extensive walls enclosing fish
FIG. 96. MISCELLANEOUS STONE OBJECTS.
preserves on the fringing coral reefs, which belong again to the Fisheries. In both
these stone works it was the great labor expended in collecting, transporting and plac¬
ing the stones rather than any architectural skill that made them noteworthy. In the
case of the Kohala heiau it is claimed that fifteen thousand men formed a line and
passed the stones more than seven miles over very hilly and uneven ground, never
allowing the stones to touch the ground in their journey. From what I know of the
old native character I can believe this statement.
The stone walls of the heiau often tumbled down on Hawaii in the frequent
earthquakes, but I do not know that they were ever made the objeCts of the viCtor’s
destroying wrath in the interminable petty wars, while the walls of the fish ponds were
usually broken down to let out the fish and so materially injure the conquered owners.
In the remarkable temple of Umi on the desert plains of Hawaii, seven thousand
feet above the sea, the huge pyramids of stone remain to this day as monuments of the
Memoirs B. P. B. Museum, vol. I., No. 4. — 7. [429]
BERNICE PAUAHI BISHOP MUSEUM.
98
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
devotion and industry of Chiefs, priests and the men of the districts of the island. On
the other hand what the heathen conquerer spared the “civilized” white man has wan¬
tonly destroyed, for a heiau near Honolulu that in 1880 was in a most interesting con¬
dition has since been ground up in the roek-crusher to make roads, and no stone is left
to mark the place!
Cut stones for building purposes were rare, and in all cases they were shaped
from slabs of lava by patient hammering. One of the flat stones (No. 4899), formerly
surrounding the altar in a small fishermen’s heiau on top of a steep volcanic cone over-
FIG. 97. TEETOTUM STONES.
looking the sea at Kapoho, on the eastern coast of Hawaii, is in the Bishop Museum.
Its dimensions are: length 48 in., width 26 in., and thickness 4.5 in. Some cut stones
of a very different sort have been found at Kailua, on the same island, buried in the
sands of the beach, of which the original intent remains in doubt. They are called
the pohaku kalae (cut stones) of Umi, and are said to have been brought on double
canoes from some unknown quarry along the coast probably now covered by some of
the many lava flows of that region. One belonging to the Bishop Museum is 6 ft. long,
2 ft. wide, and 13 in. thick. Could they have been used for landing-stones or wharves
for the royal canoes on that sandy beach ? They were well cut, and of a size and
weight difficult to handle by simple muscular strength.
Before closing this brief chapter on Hawaiian wrought stones I may mention
the stones found in several places, known as bell-stones from their great resonance.
[430]
99
MISCELLANEOUS OBJECTS.
Of these the best example is on the road to Kaimuki district near Eeahi, on Oahu.
They are simply large stones supported on three or four smaller ones and their vibra¬
tions are excited by beating with small stones. I cannot find that the old Hawaiians
made much of these stones. Another remarkable stone found also in the same region
(and elsewhere) has one of its surfaces scored so deep and in so clear a manner by
volcanic aCtion as to suggest inscriptions, and images of runic staves or Etruscan
stelae arise in the imagination of the antiquary. They are Nature’s handiwork, not
man’s, and to the same category must be assigned the stones here marked with com¬
paratively large depressions, of distinct hemispherical form, often quite as definite as
similar markings seen in Europe on stones forming part of prehistoric tombs : they
are here only the remains of bubbles in the lava. Not infrequently has my attention
been called to these as doubtless ancient games of the Hawaiians.
Genuine inscriptions, however, do exist on the Hawaiian islands, in caves, on
exposed stones, and on lava flows where considerable flat surface is presented. Of these
pidtographs many have been collected, some photographed, and some cast, and they are
now being studied with a view to future publication. They range from a simple glyph
to record the important fact that the sculptor had completed the circuit of the island,
Hawaii for example, — a feat as difficult in ancient days as a pilgrimage from Damascus
to Mecca, — to curious conventionalized figures of men (or devils) and animals. Until
these have received further study no question of their date or origin need be raised.
They are found on all the principal islands from Kauai to Hawaii, and are of similar
character throughout the group.
Any one who has had the patience to read this chapter through and to examine
the many illustrations will be struck with the entire absence of surface decoration.
Not a fret nor a guilloche, not even lines or dots are used on the surface of stone dishes
or implements to relieve the primitive roughness! Even the stone images (except the
Manoa bust, which shows foreign influence) are devoid of the slight ornament of cloth¬
ing, and if their stone work alone survived, the ancient Hawaiians would not have any
standing among decorative tribes. The Papuans and Melanesians, so much their in¬
feriors physically and mentally, would rank far above them in ornamentation. We must
have patience until the patterns of their kapa can be shown, and the decoration of their
gourd vessels, when it will, I think, be shown that they appreciated decoration if they
were not adepts in the higher forms. In the beauty of pure form as shown in their
feather helmets and in the best of their ancient umeke they yield to none. Perhaps if
they had made pottery in place of working intractable stone the result might have been
different. The wonderfully decorative carving (on wood) of the Maori and the Man-
gaian, both of the same family with the Hawaiian, show what the Polynesian can do
when his faculties are turned in that direction.
t43G
IOO
HAWAIIAN STONE IMPLEMENTS.
We are able to see how in the possible twelve centuries that the Hawaiians have
been on this group they utilized the stone for their daily needs, until at last the stranger
from distant lands brought metals, pottery, and the loom, supplanting the rude tools
and their imperfect products, until only the whetstones and poi pounders retain their
place in the native armamentarium. How few the stone implements retained by the
most civilized peoples! The mechanic uses his grindstone and whetstone, the latter
not very different from the most primitive form, and the chemist clings to his agate
mortar, as the cobbler to his lapstone, but little else is left; even the millstones are
yielding place to hardened steel rollers for the comminution of cereals. With all this
change, improvement doubtless, the stone implements of a people without a written
history are the remaining link to connect us with their past.
“O there are voices of the Past,
Links of a broken chain,
Wings that can bear me back to Times
Which cannot come again :
Yet God forbid that I should lose
The echoes that remain!”
Ordered printed November 8 , igoi .
LIST OF PLATES
XXXI.
Hawaiian Slingstoues.
XLIX.
Hawaiian Stone Lamps.
XXXII.
Polishing Stones.
L.
“ “
XXXIII.
1 l i (
LI.
i ( l ( ( <
XXXIV.
t ( ( (
LII.
< ( ( t < (
XXXV.
( ( ( (
LIU.
Hawaiian Adzes.
XXXVI.
Squid-hook Sinkers.
LIV.
( ( ( (
XXXVII.
( ( ( (
LV.
“ “ ( profile )
XXXVIII.
( ( ( (
LVI.
< < ( < ( (
XXXIX.
( i U
LVII.
i ( < (
XL.
Hawaiian Stone Clubs.
LVIII.
P'ragments from a Workshop.
XLI.
Hawaiian Stone Pestles.
LIX.
Maori Adzes.
XLII.
1 1 1 1 < <
LX.
Hawaiian Adzes mounted.
XLIII.
Hawaiian Mortars.
LXI.
Ceremonial Adzes from Duau
XUV.
Stirrup Poi Pounders.
LXII.
Necker island Images.
XLV.
Ring Poi Pounders.
LXIII.
Moriori Clubs.
XLVI.
1 < < < C i
LXIV.
Hawaiian Idol.
XLVII.
Stone Cups.
LXV.
Phallic Emblems.
XLVIII.
Hawaiian Stone Lamps.
tfMratiiifrriLFVi Mii
[433]
FIGURES IN THE TEXT.
1. Hawaiian Stone Hammers .
2. Australian and Maori Hammers - •
3. Stone Canoe Breakers .
4. Canoe Breaker at Munich .
5. Obsidian Daggers .
6. New Caledonian Slingstones .
7. Hawaiian Slingstones . .
8. Stone Anchor .
9. Grindstones .
10. Stone Balls . .
11. Bath Rubbers .
12. Files for sharpening Fish hooks - •
13. Door Stone .
14. Squid Hook .
15. Stone Knife .
16. Moriori Flensing Knives .
17. Outline of Stone head Club .
18. Stone Club heads .
19. Hawaiian Stone Weapons .
20. Clubs from Bismarck archipelago
21 . Maori Clubs .
22. Maori Beaters .
23. Hawaiian Pestles . .
24. Hawaiian Pestles .
25. Hawaiian Pestles .
26. Stone Mullers .
27. Kaulananahoa on Molokai .
28. Fine Hawaiian Mortars .
29. Broken Mortar .
30. Stone Cups for Grinding .
31. Poi Board and Pounders .
32. Tahitian Poi pounders .
33. Marquesan Poi pounders . .
34. Ancient Marquesan pounder .
35. Pounders from Ruk .
36. Wooden and Stone pounders - - - -
37. Conical pounder . .
38. Ancient Hawaiian Pounder .
39. Making Poi pounders .
40. Unfinished Poi pounders .
41. Old forms of Pounders .
42. Poi pounders .
43. Poi pounders .
44. Poi pounders .
45. Method of holding Poi pounders.
46. Odd forms of Pounders .
47. Hawaiian Pounder (?) .
48. Kapa Pressers .
49. Rude Stone Dish .
PAGE
Sandstone Dish . 53
Round Stone Dish . 54
Offertorium . 54
Bowl from Necker island . 55
Nihoa island Bowl . 55
Dong Stone Dish . 56
Stone cups . 57
Kapuaha kuni anaana . 58
Stone Salt pans . 59
Uava bubble Damp . 60
Lamps made from Pounders . 61
Group of Stone Lamps . 62
Lamps from Molokai . 62
Cylindrical Lamps . 63
Fishing Lamp . 64
Tahitian Sorcery Lamp . 65
Hawaiian Stone Mirrors . 67
Stones for the game of Maika . 68
Stones for the game of Maika . 69
Pile of Maika Stones . 71
Rings of Stalactite and of Shell . 72
Holder for Boring Shell rings . 73
Hawaiian Fishing Stones . 74
Hawaiian Axe . 75
Cutting edges of Axe and Adzes . 76
Hawaiian Adzes . 77
Hawaiian Adzes . 78
Adze with angular blade . 79
Hawaiian Adzes . 80
Hawaiian adzes . 81
Solomon islands Adzes . 84
Solomon islands Adzes . 84
Adzes from Southern Pacific . 85
Moriori Adzes . 87
Moriori Adzes . 88
Handled Adzes from New Guinea . 88
Various Adze handles . 89
Gilbert islands Adzes . 90
Maori Adzes handled . 90
Ceremonial Adzes from Mangaia . 91
Maori Carved Adze handle . 92
Hawaiian Stone Chisel . 93
Hawaiian Stone Gouge . 93
Stone Fish-gods . 94
Image from Manoa valley . 95
Necker island Image in profile . 96
Miscellaneous Stone Objedts . 97
Pohaku hu or Top Stones . 98
PAGE
6 50
7 5i
8 52
9 53
1 i° 54
■ii 55
■ 12 56
• 14 57
■ 15 58
• 16 59
■ 1 7 60
■ 18 61
• 19 62
- 20 63
.21 64
'22 65
■ 23 66
• 24 67
• 25 68
. 26 69
• 27 70
.28 71
- 29 72
■ 30 73
• 3i 74
• 32 75
• 33 76
• 34 77
• 35 78
• 36 79
• 37 80
■ 38 81
• 39 82
• 39 83
- 40 84
• 4i 85
- 42 86
• 43 87
• 43 88
. 44 89
• 45 90
- 46 91
■ 47 92
• 48 93
• 49 94
• 49 95
- 50 96
• 5i 97
■ 52
[435]
I
•
■
PLATES.
PLATE XXXI.
Hawaiian Seingstones.
4822.
Compact brown lava.
4829.
Smooth, flattened on side near one end
4814.
Brown lava.
4816.
Rough, red, rolled.
4818.
Smooth finish.
4812.
Brown, smooth lava.
4813-
Compact lava.
4817.
Grey, flat on one side.
4820.
Pecking marks very plain.
8051
Ground but not polished.
4824.
Grey, clay-like.
8049.
Very irregular.
4826.
Red, porous lava.
7648.
Rough, tufa-like.
4823.
Clay with the end ground off.
4819.
Lava .
4821 .
Clay like last.
8048.
Black cellular lava.
4815.
Rolled lava.
4827.
Lava.
4828.
Very cellular lava.
7749-
P'lattened.
4825.
Clay-like.
4842 .
Round, rough ; perhaps a Noa stone.
4830.
Cellular lava.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I,
Plate XXXI.
4829
■'SM
HAWAIIAN SEINGSTONES (MAA)
PLATE XXXII.
Hawaiian Polishing Stones.
7937-
Pohaku oio ; flat face and conical back;
3065.
Oalii. Baked pumice from the
beach of
4.2 lbs.
Niihau. Obtained in 1885.
3013-
Polishing stone of ordinary shape and
3062.
Puna. Smooth white coral.
texture.
3068.
Pohaku oio anai.
3001.
Pohaku oio for polishing canoe or umeke.
3031-
Pohaku oio anai.
Maui.
3067.
Pohaku oio anai with knob ;
elliptical
3010.
Pohaku oio anai. Fine polishing stone.
outline.
3026.
Of the same character as the last.
3066.
Pohaku oio anai from Kailua, Hawaii.
3022.
Pohaku oio anai.
7754-
Polisher with flat face, conical back with
3002.
Pohaku oio anai.
knob, 3.5 lbs.
3009.
Pohaku pahoa oio anai umeke laau. For
3004.
Pohaku pahee anai ipu laau.
Kailua,
polishing umeke.
Hawaii.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate XXXII
r.
HAWAIIAN POLISHING STONES
PLATE XXXIII.
Hawaiian Polishing Stones.
3049-
Rough, cellular, fresh lava rasp.
3003
3044-
Rough lava rasp.
3040
3025.
Truncated cone smooth polisher.
3029.
Cellular lava of uniform texture, back
3015
rounded.
3007
3°3°-
Smooth calcareous conglomerate.
3021
3°45-
Fine coral sandstone.
3024.
Fine grain with occasional cells; canoe
polisher.
3028
3016.
Cellular light colored stone.
Hemispherical, smooth.
Black rough lava crust. Much used for
rough work.
Rude canoe polisher.
Lenticular mass, one side worn flat.
Smooth, well worn polisher for canoes or
umeke.
Stone with large, irregular cells like rotten
stone.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, You. X,
Plate XXXIII,
3045
V
301 6f
3040
3028
- -
HAWAIIAN POLISHING STONES
PLATE XXXIV.
Hawaiian Polishing Stones.
3005. Fine-grained hemispherical polisher. 3038.
3046. Pumice with two used surfaces at right 3011.
angles to each other. 3008.
3043. Rough porous lava. 3027.
3053. Pieces of black cellular lava crust. 3023.
3014. Smooth calcareous polisher.
3006. Smooth hemispherical polisher.
Very hard and smooth lava for whetstone.
Half of a prolate spheroid, smooth grain.
Plat surface, rounded back, rough grain.
Hemispherical, cellular canoe polisher.
Close-grained, rounded back polisher for
canoes.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. i.
Plate XXXIV.
HAWAIIAN POLISHING STONES
PLATE XXXV.
3018.
30x2.
3017.
3047-
3032-
3041.
3°33-
Hawaiian Polishing Stones.
Calcareous conglomerate, hemispherical
form .
Hemispherical, compact.
Lava, round on back, nearly flat on face.
Pumice with marks of use on four sides.
Lava with crystals of augite ; truncated
cone.
Rude, shapeless piece of lava.
Curious cellular fragment resembling bur-
stone.
3051. Fragment of coral softer than pumice.
3035. Pumice nearly worn out.
3034. A very composite stone full of minute
crystals.
3039. Coral of considerable solidity.
3058. Plate of lava crust.
3036. Pumice for rounding the insides of umekes.
3059. Thin, tile-like fragment of compact lava
smooth on both sides.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. i.
Plate XXX V.
HAWAIIAN POLISHING STONES
PLATE XXXVI.
Hawaiian Squid-hook Sinkers.
I cannot vouch for the identification of all the specimens. They are often foreign stones taken
from the ballast of some vessel, and there is no petrological collection for comparison within two
thousand miles.
5231-
Coral sand rock.
5228.
Yellow ochre.
5212.
Hematite.
5215-
Coral conglomerate.
5265.
Crystalline granitoid rock.
5202.
Coral conglomerate.
5240.
Crystals of pyroxene in lime.
5i9i-
Coarse coral sand rock.
5200.
Augite crystals in white matrix.
5256.
Granitoid stained with iron.
5206.
Coral sand rock.
5188.
Fine white coral sand rock.
5184.
Hematite.
5190.
White crystals in dark green matrix.
5273-
Coral sandstone.
5189.
Augite, olivine, etc.
5223.
Augite, olivine, quartz, etc.
5233-
Coral conglomerate.
5276.
Hematite.
5221.
Granite from Hongkong(?).
5222.
Granite from Hougkong(?).
5214.
Coral conglomerate.
5186.
Hematite and olivine.
5187.
Hematite.
5185.
Hematite.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate XXXVI.
5136
HAWAIIAN SQUID-HOOK SINKERS,
PLATE XXXVII.
Hawaiian Souid-hook Sinkers.
5258.
Volcanic nodule.
5269.
Coarse metamorphic rock.
5229-
Coarse coral rock.
5254-
Olivine lava.
*
5264.
Dark crystals in white matrix.
5262.
Reddish crystalline rock.
5257-
Same as last specimen.
5246.
Granitoid rock.
523o.
Coral rock.
5224.
Granitoid rock.
5241-
Decomposing crystals, red matrix.
5198.
Dark crystals in white matrix,
heavy.
5195-
Volcanic nodule.
5226.
Olivine almost entirely.
5218.
Rose granite.
5245-
Dark crystals in white matrix.
5220.
Volcanic nodule.
5238-
Volcanic olivine, pyrite, etc.
By the term volcanic nodule I mean
certain masses of undetermined composition
extruded
from the slowly moving lava flows. They are often hematite, olivine, ochre or a mixture of these
and augite, and are often several inches in diameter.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate XXXVII.
1
Hawaiian Squid-hook Sinkers
PLATE XXXVIII.
Hawaiian Squid-hook Sinkers.
5251-
Volcanic nodule.
5219-
Granite, from Hongkong
5216.
Dark crystals ( ? hornblende ) in white
5259-
Crystalline stone.
matrix.
5268.
Containing much olivine.
5248.
Volcanic nodule.
5213-
Coarse coral rock.
5260.
Volcanic nodule.
5252.
Reddish lava.
5209.
Coral sandstone.
5197-
Rose granite.
5261.
Granitoid rock.
5270.
Coarse granite.
5249-
Volcanic nodule.
5266.
Crystalline stone.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate XXXVIII.
tf&Cl "Vj (
5260
pfi&Aii,'
U>2r->()M
fife' ' *
IF -ACiSi
HAWAIIAN SQUID-HOOK SINKERS.
5 244
5253
5267
5207
5205
5225
5i92
5234
5236
5237
5235
PLATE XXXIX.
Hawaiian Squid-hook Sinkers.
Dark crystals in white matrix.
Volcanic nodule; olivine, augite, etc.
Volcanic nodule.
Coral rock.
Semifossil coral.
Dark crystals in white matrix.
Coral rock.
Coral conglomerate.
Coral, baked.
Coarse coral rock.
Coral, baked.
5255-
Olivine lava.
5203.
Coral rock.
5274-
Volcanic augite
heavy.
crystals, soi
5242.
Shell and sand conglomerate.
5182.
Hematite.
5183.
Hematite.
5232.
Coral rock.
5243-
Cellular lava.
5239-
Tufaceous stone.
5272.
Lava containing
much iron.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vou. I.
Plate XXXIX.
HAWAIIAN SQUID-HOOK SINKERS.
PLATE XL.
Hawaiian Stonk Clubs.
4785. Cellular lava with four wings and a hole 4786. Compact lava, well-drilled hole in handle;
drilled in handle ; 9.5 in. long, weighs 9 in. long, blade 3X2.2 in., weighs
3 lbs. 3.5 oz. 2 lbs. 14.5 oz.
Cellular lava, pestle-like; 14.7 in. long,
weighs 6 lbs. 6 oz.
4798.
MEMOIRS IilSIIOP MUSEUM , VOL. I.
Plate XL.
I
HAWAIIAN STONK CLUJ5S,
PLATE XU.
Hawaiian Pksti.ks.
4796. Cellular lava ; 13.2 in. long ; weighs 4 lbs. 4798. Cellular lava; 14.7 in. long; weighs 6 lbs.
2 oz. 6 oz.
4797. Cellular lava ; 15.8 in. long; weighs 6 lbs. 5148. Cellular lava; 13.8 in. long; weighs 4 lbs.
9 oz. 5 oz.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I
Plate X I, I
HAWAIIAN STONE PESTLES
PLATE XLII.
Stone Pestles.
4649. Cellular lava : 13 in. long; weighs 5 lbs. 4647. Cellular lava; 12.7 in. long; weighs 6 lbs
3 oz- 4650. Cellular lava; 13.4111. long; weighs 6 lbs
4654. Cellular lava: 12.5 in. long; weighs 6 lbs. 4 oz.
8 oz.
5149. Cellular lava; 11.7 in. long; weighs 5 lbs.
2 oz.
MKMOIKS HishOI’ Mrs! i .m, VOI.
HAWAIIAN STONE PESTLES.
PLATE XUII.
Hawaiian Stone Mortars.
1227.
1 220.
1225.
Used for grinding avva ; 15. 5X 13.5 in. in
diameter.
A large cup; 11X10.5 in. in diameter.
Transition form to the high mortars of
Kauai ; 7 in. in diameter.
4078. From Nihoa; bottom worn out. From
Queen Liliuokalani. 11.5X11 in. in
diameter.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate XI, III.
HAWAIIAN STONE MORTARS.
PLATE XLIV.
Stirrui'-likk Poi Pounders from Kauai.
6820. A cast from the original in the Peabody Museum at Harvard University.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol.
STIRRUP-LIKE POUNDERS FROM KAUAI.
PLATE XEV.
41 20.
4T32-
Ring Poi Poundkrs from Kauai (Na Pohaicu Puka).
4138. 4130. 4133.
4126. 4131. 4121.
4i37
4i39
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol.
RING POI POUNDERS FROM KAUAI.
PLATE XL VI.
Ring Poi Pounders from Kauai.
4I29-
4128.
8000.
4119.
4122.
4127.
4125
4124.
7954-
4134-
4118.
4239-
4123-
7955
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate XLVI
RING POI POUNDERS FROM KAUAI
Plate XPVII.
Hawaiian Stone Mortars or Cups.
5163.
5164.
5161.
1 229
7925-
7926.
7927.
7928
7728.
5162.
7929.
7930-
793i
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Voe.
HAWAIIAN STONE MORTARS OR CUPS.
PLATE XEVIII.
Hawaiian Stone Lamps.
7759. Deep cup with cistern. 1206. Almost spherical ; broken on the lip.
1203. Three natural cups, two of them used. 4330. Cup with cistern.
7758. P'lat base and very large cup.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol.
HAWAIIAN STONE TAMPS.
PLATE XUX.
Hawaiian Stone Lamps.
1205. Square block of cellular lava with rounded
corners.
1194. The upper portion rudely pentagonal.
7691. Cup with cistern; saturated with burned
oil. [Wrong number on plate.]
1226. Perhaps also used for a mortar.
1207. Unwrought, with very small cup.
1228. Cistern in a rather shallow cup.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol.
HAWAIIAN STONE TAMPS.
PLATE L.
Hawaiian Stone Lamps.
1208. Cup at each end, the upper one larger.
1232. Deep cup; found in 1880; Kulaokahua
Oahu.
1209. Large cup without cistern.
1200. Cistern in cup; rim for candlenuts ; Ko
hala, Hawaii.
4333. Striated stone ; round as if turned.
1190. Cups at both ends with cisterns.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol.
HAWAIIAN STONE LAMPS.
PLATE LI.
Hawaiian Stone Lamps. (Na Poho Kuicui.)
Mainly of phallic origin.
1 182.
7690.
1183.
1 189.
1184.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I. Plate LI
HAWAIIAN STONE LAMPS.
PLATE LII.
Hawaiian Stonk Lamps.
1185.
Shallow cup for nuts.
1 187.
Cup two inches deep.
4340-
Unusual rim.
1 186.
Small cup ; four feet.
4337-
Broad top and narrow base.
1188.
Smooth finish, phallic
1 192.
Cistern in the cup.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I
Plate LII
HAWAIIAN STONE LAMPS
3125-
PLATE LIU.
Hawaiian Stone Adzes.
3i39-
8679.
Memoirs Bishop Mdskum, Vol. I
Plate U1I
HAWAIIAN STONE ADZES
PLATE UV.
Hawaiian Stone Adzes.
3i53-
6738.
8931-
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol.
Pi. ATE I, IV.
BISHOP
HAWAIIAN STONE ADZES
PLATE LV.
Hawaiian Stone Adzes.
Viewed edgewise.
3122-
315°-
3I55-
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I
Plate I.v.
HAWAIIAN STONE ADZES
PLATE LVI.
Hawaiian Stonk Adzes.
6738. 8931.
3152.
7998.
7572-
3167-
3156.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol.
>
hT
W
H
►J
HAWAIIAN STONE ADZES.
PLATE EVIL
Hawaiian Stone Adzes.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol.
HAWAIIAN STONE ADZES.
PLATE LVIII.
Fragments from a Workshop.
i . Tang of nearly finished adze, one side ground
smooth, the other partly ground.
2. Distal end of well-ground adze, sides not
ground.
3. Distal end of partly ground adze showing
edge ground flat.
4. Distal end of well-finished sloping adze;
conchoidal fradture.
5. Fragment, partly ground, of adze broken at
both ends.
6. Roughed adze head; rejected for bad texture?
7. Fragment of flake or spall.
8. Adze fully shaped for grinding when corner
of blade broke.
9. Cellular, highly silicious fragment.
10. Partly formed adze with sides ground.
1 1 . End of flake.
12. End of flake.
13. End of flake.
14. Sharp end of spall, broad end showing striae
15. Fragment with a large flat cell.
16. Partly shaped flake for short -adze; very solid
17. Outside flake.
18. Partly formed adze.
19. Partly formed adze.
20-23. Cores.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate I/VIIJ
FRAGMENTS FROM A WORKSHOP: KAUAI
Plate LIX.
Maori Adzes or Axes.
6952. Thin jade; angular blade.
1502. Brown phonolite.
1503. Transverse ridge, no tang.
1504. Grey stone, sides beveled on top.
6948. Brown phonolite.
6945. Brown lava or phonolite.
6946.
6944. Dark phonolite, angular blade.
1507. Light greenstone, blade at angle
6947. Grey lava, sides beveled.
[1504
1502
6953 1
69481
■1507
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate BIX.
MAORI ADZES OR AXES
PLATE EX.
Hawaiian Adzes Handled.
3116. An adjustable adze of the Kupaaikee pat- 3101. An ordinary adze with the blade attached
tern. It can be made either left- or by coconut fibre braid,
right-handed, for canoe excavating, etc.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Voi.. I.
Pi. ate I,X
HAWAIIAN ADZES HANDLED
PLATE LXI.
Flat Ceremonial Axes.
1551. From Duau, of the D’Entrecasteaux group, 1552. P'rom Huon gulf, New Guinea. The blade
The blade of jadeite, although large, is is similar to the last, but much smaller,
flat and thin. The end of the handle The handle is artistically carved. Native
was formerly decorated with feathers. name, Ki.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate LXI.
FIyAT CFRFMONIAIy AXES
PLATE IyXII.
Stone Images from Neckek Island.
Found in fragments on this uninhabited island. The first two are of coarser lava than
the last two, and all seem to be made of common Hawaiian material.
blrn:u- pauahi bishop museum
IMAGES FROM NECKER I SEAN D
PLATE LXIII.
Primitive Moriori Clubs.
Chatham Islands.
8604.
8615.
8616.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I
Plate I<XIII.
primitive; moriori ctubs
PLATE LXIV.
Idol formerly at Kahuku.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, vol. i
Plate LX I V
HAWAIIAN IDOL
PLATE LXV.
Phallic Emblems.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I
Plate LXV
PHALLIC EMBLEMS
ADDITIONAL NOTES
ON
HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK
BY WILLIAM T. BRIGHAM, A.M.
Memoirs of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum.
Vol. I. — No. 5.
HONOLULU, H. I.:
Bishop Museum Press.
1903.
KRAUS REPRINT CO.
Millwood, New York
1974
ORDERED PRINTED BY THE TRUSTEES.
Reprinted with the permission of the Bishop Museum Press
KRAUS REPRINT CO.
AU.S. Division of Kraus-Thomson Organization Limited
Printed in U.S.A.
Supplementary Notes to an Essay on Ancient Hawaiian Feather Work.
By William T. Brigham, Dire For of the Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum , Honorary
Fellow op the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland.
When I published the introductory essay of this volume, on Hawaiian Feather
Work, I hoped that it would interest some one to point out specimens of that work
that had not fallen under the author’s notice. That hope has been filled to a certain
extent and herewith I offer the additions.
There has been a change in several of the names of the birds which furnish the
feathers. The Oo, Acrulocercus nobilis , has dropped its inappropriate generic name
and reverted to the older appellation Mohoa nobilis. The researches of my friend
Mr. Will iam A. Bryan, Curator of Ornithology in this Museum, have shown that
what we who were not skilled in ornithologic distinctions had considered the common
species of Tropic bird, Phaethon retire reus ^ is really the Phaethon lepturus. The Alala
or Crow returns to its former species and becomes Corvus hawaiiensis , and the false
Mina is properly Acridotheres tristis. If then the reader who cares for correct nomen¬
clature will adopt these changes he will have (for a time) the authorized names
for the birds that furnish the feathers, the principal material with which we have to
deal in treating of the beautiful work of the old Hawaiians. Having corrected these
matters, which, I am happy to say, were not so much due to the carelessness or ignor¬
ance of the author as to the advance in Ornithology, we may turn at once to the
additions that are to be made to the lists given in the original essay.
The feather mats shown in Plate YI. of this volume have been still farther
examined by my friend Mr. Edge-Partington, and I may quote his note in Anthro¬
pological Reviews and Miscellanea, London, 1900:
“ Professor Brigham, in his Hawaiian Feather Work, refers to and figures two feather mats in
the British Museum, which together with a coronet of similar manufacture form the subject of this
note. Professor Brigham first saw these when on a visit to this country. He then considered that
they were not Hawaiian; but since, failing to find any more likely locality, he places them “as mats
on which offerings were made to the god Kukailimoku, ” until a better use can be found for them.
If these were merely mats I fail to see the use of the tying cords fastened to each end. Why, too,
should the makers have departed from their usual custom of mounting feathers on a network of olona
fibre, a much more suitable foundation than the thick rows of fibre of which these mats are made,
wrapt and sewn together, a form of manufacture, moreover, which is not in vogue in Hawaii ? Pro¬
fessor Brigham says that the patterns are quite unlike those used in the feather cloaks ; but I think
one can go further than that, and say that they are unlike any known pattern from Hawaii. We
must therefore try and find another home for them, and I would suggest Tahiti, and that their use
[437] (3)
4
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
was a protection when fighting. My reason for this attribution is that there are in the British
Museum long, oblong boxes formerly supposed to come from Hawaii; by an inscription, only partly
legible, on one of them in George Benuet’s handwriting, we know now that these boxes are Tahitian.
The inscription is as follows : 'A native . box made of the 7e'ood of the breadfruit tree . con¬
taining the war-like ornaments ...... Hautia , presented by him to G. Ben net . 1822 , and which he says
were worn by . also and preceding kings of Huahcine This particular box was received, with
other Eastern Pacific specimens, from the Sheffield Literary and Philosophical Society ; the speci¬
mens originally in the Museum are without history, as are also the feather ornaments now under dis¬
cussion. It may well be, therefore, that they were received at the same time, and possibly formed a
portion of one of the early collections either of Captain Cook or Sir Joseph Batiks. As against this
theory Williams, in his Missionary Enterprises , p. 498, says that ‘at Tahiti and Hervey Islands there
FIG. I. UNDER SIDE OF ONE OF THE MATS SHOWN IN PLATE VI. OF THIS VOLUME.
are but few varieties of the feathered tribes ; and these are not remarkable either for the beaut}* of
their plumage or for the sweetness of their notes.’ If, therefore, the mats and coronets were manu¬
factured in the Tahitian group they must have been from imported feathers. Failing Tahiti there is
the Island of Rurutu, in the Austral group, ‘the people of which are distinguished above all others
in these seas, for their taste and skill in finery of every kind, from the feathered helmets of their
warriors to the carving on their canoes . In manners, dress and language they very nearly resem¬
ble the inhabitants of Tahiti and Huaheine.’ ( Tyerman and Bennet's Voyages , 1831, Vol. I., p. 496.)
The only reason for placing these objects in the Hawaiian section, until some definite locality is ob
tained, is that the feathers used are evidently from the same birds as those from which the Hawaiians
gathered their stores.”
I cannot see any good reason for changing the opinion expressed on page 37, that
as the feathers are undoubtedly Hawaiian (the birds that yield them being peculiar to the
Hawaiian group), and as the method of attaching the feathers was not unknown on this
group, the mats are more likely to be Hawaiian than an}Thing else yet suggested. For the
[438]
FEATHER MAI.
5
purpose of a stiff mat a loose net of olona would seem quite unsuitable. For protection
in war these very brilliant and gaudy mats would attract the arrows or missiles of tlie
enemy, from which they would offer as much protection as a common newspaper.
The figure of the under side of one of these mats, which I did not have at the
time the plate was published, will, I think render my claim that the specimens are
mats, more stable; for the sticks, four in number, that are inserted to stiffen the
structure would make it diffi¬
cult to wear them in battle,
except they were used like
the stays of the French gcns-
c Pannes , which would be quite
Mr. Edge-Partington will roll
one of them up and try if it
will go into the box which
seems, as he says, Tahitian.
From the picture he gives of
this receptacle I should think
it would not fit. The strings
need not entangle ns, for they
are hardly suited to tie to¬
gether or to anything else,
bnt seemed to me to be analo¬
gous to the strings often left
on towels partly for ornament
and partly to keep the warp
and woof together.
It is difficult to decide
upon the matter in the ab¬
sence of the specimen, but it
seemed to me that perhaps the sticks were not a part of the original manufacture, but
added as “spreaders” for exhibition purposes. If these sticks were removed the fabric
would easily roll together and the cylinder thus formed might still be connected with
the god Kukailimoku in this way: I am informed that in moving the feathered head
it was raised on a pole and borne by its kahu or keeper; why not cover the pole with
this feather ornament ? I am inclined to think that it would about fit the truncated
neck of the war god. When the idol rested my former idea of the mat would be appro¬
priate still. As will be shown in the chapter on ancient Hawaiian worship it was an
[439]
foreign to the Polynesian
ideas of propriety. Perhaps
FIG. 2. KUKAILIMOKU. NEWCASTLE-UPON-TYNE.
6
BRIGHAM OH HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORE.
almost universal custom to place all small (that is movable) idols upon mats, which
were often covered with red kapa; and if wooden or stone gods, how much more should
a deity formed of this most precious material be provided with a suitable substratum.
Ktlkailimoku.— To the small number of images of this great god and the
tutelar deity of Kamehameha I. we can now add two more: one from the Oxford Museum
(which in some way slipped from my notes on that wonderful collection, and which my
FIG. 3- KUKAIEIMOKU IN THE OXFORD MUSEUM.
friend Professor Henry Balfour recalls to my memory by the remarkable illustration
given iu Fig. 3), and the other from the museum of the Natural History-' Society,
Barras Bridge, Newcastle-upon-Tyme. I quote from the interesting letter of E. Leonard
Gill, Esq., the Curator of the Museum, the following details, and present iu Fig. 2 the
photograph sent therewith :
“Total height, 32 inches; measurement along crest, 34.5 inches. This mask [idol], as the
photograph shows, has lost all but a few stray feathers; in its present condition it consists of the
basket framework, over which is stretched the fine netting into which the bases of the feathers were
interwoven. The netting and the feathers were continued into the mouth but not into the eyes. The
workmanship is admirable both for its firm, bold outlines and for the extreme skill shown in detail.
The history of the idol is interesting but incomplete. It formed a part of the museum of Marmaduke
Tunstall, F. R. S., at Wycliffe in Yorkshire; and on Tun. stall’s death in 1791 it passed with the rest
of the museum into the possession of George Allan, of Blackwell Grange, near Darlington. Tunstall’s
collection was here systematised and greatly added to by Allan, and this, the “Allan Museum,”
[44o]
was
KUICA TL fMOKU.
7
purchased in 1822 by the Newcastle Literary and Philosophical Society, by whom it was soon after¬
wards handed over to the Natural History Society and formed the basis of their present museum.
The Ethnological portion of the Allan Museum is practically all that is now retained, and that portion
is of extreme value from the fact that the objects in it were collected long before the native handicraft
had become debased. The examples from New Zealand and the South Sea Islands are particularly
fine and there is every reason to believe that many of them were obtained in Captain Cook’s Voyages.
In a Synopsis of the Newcastle Museum (1827) the editor, G. T. Fox, in describing the contents
of the Allan Museum, speaks as follows of these objects; ‘ Many of these articles are understood to
have been collected during the voyages of Captain Cook, from some of the inscriptions on them, as well
FIG. 4. EYE OF WICKER WORK WITH SHELL'AND FEATHERS.
as from the title of Mr. Allan’s MS. catalogue of his museum.’ This particular mask [idol] is numbered
16 in the Ethnology section of the Allan Museum, and is thus described by Fox in his Synopsis, under
the heading ‘Owhyhee, and other Sandwich Islands’: ‘16. Indian God or idol. Has been covered with
the red feathers of the Hook-billed Red Creeper (Certhia vestiaria, Gml. and Lath.), which are also
used by the natives for ornamenting their cloaks whilst intermixed with the olive feathers of another
species (Certhia obscura1). Similar but better specimens of this idol are in the British Museum.’
Little can be added to Mr. Gill’s account, but I may call attention to the elongated
neck and the fact that the descendants of the makers of this image in after years called
the ladies of the American Mission, certainly not respectfully, aioeoe , long-necked.
In matters of worship consistency is generally de trop.
In the human hair of the Pitt-Rivers specimen at Oxford we may note a resem¬
blance to one in the British Museum (shown in Fig. 26, p. 34); but the present specimen
* Certhia irstiaria- Vestr'ai/n corc/'nra, C-. obscura- Hrniigntithus obscurna.
[441 1
8
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
(Fig. 3) which may be numbered 11 in the list of Kukailimoku, has plain shell eyes
devoid of wooden pupil, which give the head a very peculiar expression. Once covered
with red feathers this specimen is now bare: the neck is large but not very long. No
history is attached to this very interesting head.
I am somewhat puzzled at the considerable number of Kukailimoku in existence
(eleven), omitting all reckoning of those that may have been hidden in caves, where
if not destroyed by time they are at all events unknown, as it was regarded as the private
deity of Kamehameha I. ; and hitherto I have not been able to learn from Hawaiians
whether members of the Moi’s family or household, or his highest chiefs would be
likely to have replicas of the god’s image. Certainly all those images attributed to
Cook or Vancouver, if their history be so far correct, were in existence before Kameha¬
meha made Kukailimoku the state god,2 and may have been given to the voyagers
before the full apotheosis of the war god. It is unfortunate that so little history re¬
mains, and there is no chance of any important additions to our knowledge of this
image from native sources. All the questions that naturally arise must remain un¬
answered. It may be recalled that at the death of his foster father Kalaniopuu (1782),
the young Kamehameha was left as Pontifex maximus of the gods of Hawaii, an office
he had filled from early youth. It was not Kukailimoku alone that was entrusted to
his care, but all the gods and their maintenance devolved upon him.
Besides the Kukailimoku other and more gigantic images were constructed with
wicker work in whole or in part, and Rev. S. E. Bishop, D.D., of the American Mission, has
told me that he remembered such in his childhood at Kailua, on the west coast of Hawaii.
This ancient place was the residence of many Moi, and here Kamehameha died. The
wicker heads were generally covered with kapa (bark cloth ) , often decorated with feathers,
and the eyes were formed of shell as in the portable images we have been considering.
One such eye decorated with feathers is shown in Fig. 4, of which the photograph was
sent to me by Miller Christy, Esq., of London, who gives the following account of it:
“ My friend Mr. James Backhouse, of the Nurseries, York, possesses one of these eyes which
has a very interesting history. It was brought home by Captain Cook and given by his widow to a
certain Ann Gates of Doncaster in Yorkshire. It next passed into the hands of a certain Ann Smith,
who gave it about the year 1814 or 1815 to Jane Backhouse, of York, the grandmother or great¬
grandmother of my friend. Of this eye I send you a photograph which Mr. Backhouse has kindly had
taken for me. The diameter of the eye is about six inches. The outermost feathers are yellow and the
innermost red. They are fastened on to a net base which is stretched on a frame of wickerwork.
The central piece is mother-of-pearl with a wooden button or pin in the centre. I fancy it must have
been the existence of these objects in Mr. Backhouse’s museum which gave rise to the report that a
feather cloak was preserved in York. Neither Mr. Backhouse nor myself knows anything of a cloak
preserved there.”
In the British Museum are a number of wicker disks of about the size of this
specimen, of which the use was uncertain until Mr. Christy brought forward this eye,
and now their purpose seems settled. No net nor feathers are about any of them, but
2 It had, according to Fornander, been a chosen deity of a long line of Moi of Hawaii, from Liloa to Kalaniopuu.
[442]
FEATHER EYE AND MAHIOLE.
9
their size and shape closely resemble the specimen figured. The late king Kalakaua
told me he had seen two huge images with wicker heads in a legendary cave at Keala-
kekua. It was within two miles of this reputed cave that the Kukailimoku in this
Museum (Fig. 22, ante) was concealed after the abolition of the ancient cult by Liholilio.
Mahiole. — Our additions to the list of helmets are considerable and interesting.
Of the unfeathered variety an authentic specimen has come to this Museum since the
publication of the former paper. It was obtained many years ago by the Reverend
W. P. Alexander, of the American Mission, when stationed at Wailuku, Maui. He saw
it on the head of a native and secured it on the spot, and gave it as an interesting
relic to Oahu College. From the cabinet of
this institution it was given by the Trustees
to the Bishop Museum. It is very well made
but quite thin and unfit for the usual purposes
of a helmet. (Fig. 5.) I believe it was orna¬
mental simply, and from the number of this
class extant cannot have been a very exclusive
badge of chieftainship. I11 one of the French
voyages a plate represents two chiefs with
similar helmets directing an execution.3 The
basket work of this head piece is so well made
that I shall take occasion to again refer to it
in the chapter on Mats and Baskets of the
Hawaiians. In continuation of the list on
page 48 this mahiole should be numbered 42.
43. The interesting history of the
mahiole in the museum of the Natural History Society at Newcastle-upon-Tyne has
been given with that of the Kukailimoku of the same collection. This helmet is
covered with red feathers except on the yellow crest and the bands of black radiating
from the crown. The red has hardly faded, but the crest has lost much of its original
color on the surface, while underneath the feathers are still bright orange yellow.
The length from A to b direct is 13 inches; A to b along the crest, 27.5 inches; and
from c to d 10.5 inches. A color scheme is given in Fig. 7.
44. A very good specimen is in the Oxford Museum, of which my friend Pro¬
fessor Balfour has kindly sent me a photograph (Fig. 8). It is remarkably well shaped,
still covered with a network of olona, but the feathers have gone. Probably it was red
with a yellow crest. It was in the Pitt-Rivers collection and without special history.
45. In the Castle Museum, Norwich, England, are two rather dilapidated
mahiole which have been in that museum over fifty years; and the Curator, James
3 Narrative of a lroyage round the World. Capt. Freycinet. Letters by J. Arago. London, 1823. Part II., p. 137, Letter CXXVI.
[443]
FIG. 5. HELMET FROM MAUI.
IO
BRIGIIAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORN.
Reeve, Esq., has kindly sent me photographs which are reproduced on Plate LX VI.
There are feathers enough to show that they were originally covered with red iiiui at¬
tached to the usual network of olona.
46. With the above and quite similar, as shown in Plate LXVI.
1 may now return to the mahiole enumerated in the former paper, of which
I have obtained more information. And first, No. 12 on page 44, the specimen brought
home by Waber of Berne, and
now in the museum of that
city, I am able to figure by
the kindness of Dr. von Fel-
lenberg, the Curator,4 who has
sent me a water-color drawing
of this and the cloak which
will be mentioned later. It is
well modelled, red, with yellow
crest, and in good order.
On page 48 of the former
paper (this volume) four
helmets were catalogued as
Numbers 38-41. These were
formerly in the Boston Mu¬
seum, where they had been so
many years that their history
was lost, and at the time of
the publication of my original
paper had recentl}^ been given
to the Peabody Museum of
American Archaeology at Cam¬
bridge, Mass. I have since
seen them, and from Mr. C.
C. Willoughby’s photographs,
kindly sent me, can add the
following descriptions:
38. One of the knobbed variety, featherless, and closely resembling the example in
the Berlin Museum shown in Fig. 37, p. 44. The most marked difference is in the shape of
the ear notch which is less generous and opens up and forward. It is in better preservation
than the one in Germany. The length along the front from knob to knob top is one foot.
39. Another one without either feathers or net is almost a duplicate of one in
the Vancouver collection of the British Museum, and shown in Fig. 40, b. This seems
* Dr. Edmund von Fellenberg died May 10, 1902, aged eighty-five years. Not the Berne Museum alone, but all who have met this dis¬
tinguished and amiable man will mourn his loss. £444 1
FIG. 6. MAHIOLE AT NEWCASTLE-UPON-TYNE.
MAH [OLE OR HELMETS.
1 1
■M RED
YELLOW
SV!:;::fc'GRE E N
WT-E i -V-,* ^ 41-4,^ -y VyVb- f j- +
COLOR SCHEME.
a little smaller than the Vancouver specimen (15.5 inches from base to tip), but the
measurements may have been taken in a different manner. The angular ear notch is
the same, and the number and arrangement of the radiating arms is duplicated. It
seems as if one skilful workman made both of these mahiole.
40. One of the four is covered with feathers and is a most interesting specimen.
In general shape it resembles the last, but has six instead of five arms. It is 19 inches
from base to tip (a— b), and as shown in the color diagram, Fig. 10, 1., has a red body or
cup fringed on the front edge with interrupted black
lines; three arms are yellow and three red, and the crest
is red beneath, yellow above. In this, as in some others,
the two methods of attaching the feathers are used. The
rays and crest are covered with feather-bearing network,
while the cup is composed of rods to which feathers are
bound, a structure more solid and useful as a helmet.
41. In the same figure No. 11. shows a helmet of the more common shape, 15
inches from A to is, and covered with red, black and yellow feathers. Certainly this
collection shows some of the most interesting forms of the Hawaiian feather helmets,
and the close religious and commercial connection
of Boston with the Hawaiian Kingdom explains
the presence of such good specimens.
It is unfortunate that there are no specimens
extant of the helmets of the southern groups.
The fanatical revulsion from paganism caused the
k\ voluntary destruction of these as well as the idols,
|H and if any were preserved by stealth, as I have
1$ information that the idols were in some cases, time
FIG- 7- has probably destroyed the more delicate fabric.
At the marriage of Aimata and Pomare in Tahiti, in 1821, Reverend William Ellis
writes that “The two principal Raatiras were distinguished by their ancient helmets,
superbly covered with red feathers, and surmounted with the tails of tropic-birds.”5
The conical cap of the Easter Islanders, covered with feathers of the barnyard fowl, is
perhaps the degenerate remains of a feather helmet.
Marquesan Head Dress. — The Bishop Museum has just received from our
collector, Mr. Alvin Seale, who has been for the past year in the southeast Pacific, a
very interesting feather head dress, Pac kua , obtained from an old chief at Nukuhiva,
the principal island of the Marquesas. It is a broad band of lenticular outline com¬
posed of the fibrous sheath of the leaf of the coco palm bound with a neat braid of
Pandanus. The feathers are attached in a peculiar way by long fibres fastened verti¬
cally to the long axis of the band. As there is no net or any very firm substratum to
5 Letter quoted in Tyerman and Bcnncty ii.. 157.
C445]
T 9
BRIGHAM OX HAWAII AX FEATHER WORK.
fasten the feathers to, the method used bv the Hawaiians could not be followed. Most
of the feathers are green, but the red ones of the outer row, and of scattered patterns
elsewhere, are from the now extinct Kua. a bird closely resembling the Hawaiian iiwi.
While devoid of the grace¬
ful and attractive form
of the mahiole this head
band must have given
some dignity to the tatued
face beneath. The length
is 18.5 inches; the width
8.2 inches. The red color
is nearlv that of the apa-
pane so much used on
Hawaii. I have every rea¬
son to believe this bit of
Marqnesan feather work
verv old, but the border is
certainly recent. Fig. 11.
Xo additional informa¬
tion has been obtained
of the Hawaiian feather
malo , mentioned in the
previous paper, but it
certainlv had none of
the interest that a simi¬
lar garment possessed
among the southern
Polvnesians. At Raiatea,
“When a new king was
consecrated, bv cereino-
FIG. 8. MAHIOLE AT OXFORD. nies too filthy to be de¬
tailed, he was invested with the via ro or hereditarv robe of rovaltv, of network covered
with red feathers, and to which an additional lappet is annexed at the accession of each
sovereign. This splendid train, which was wont to be wound about the bod}', and flowed
upon the ground, is 21 feet in length, and six inches broad. The needle bv which the
fabric is wrought is still attached to it. and according to report no stitch could be taken
with it but thunder was forthwith heard in the heavens. The symbolical marks which
are apparent on the plumage and texture indicate that manv hundreds of human victims
-It a missionary who is writing, and if i- probable that the ceremonies of this function were most interesting from an ethnological
point of view. [446]
AHUULA.
i3
fa
;• • V- - • ; J
feSo* ' . w' vJfp.r;;- v-<»rj- ' V.
K p - ,
V *
FIG. 9. MAHIOLE AT
BERNE.
have been sacrificed during its gradual making and extension, when the sundry monarchs
by whom it has been worn in succession, wrapped themselves with its folds as their in¬
signia of authority .... Tamatoa has cast off this relic of idolatry and sent it as another
trophy of the gospel victories here, to the museum of the London Missionary Society." ~
Ahuula. — Before describing the additional ahuula there
are several corrections to be made in the former list. Of the
cloak numbered 22 (Fig. 66, p. 63) I am able, by the kindness of
Dr. von Fellenberg, who has sent me a water-color sketch, to
1 V V' ' / T“.
present a more accurate diagram (Fig. 12) than the one on :
page 63. To No. 76 (Fig. 104, p. 77) should be added the
following measurements: width at neck, 2 feet 7 inches; round
the bottom, 9 feet 1 inch; length of side, 4 feet; total length,
4 feet, 3 inches. No. 90 (Fig. 1 12, p. 79) was wrongly attributed
to the British Museum : it belongs to J. Edge-Partington, Esq.
The mistake arose from the inclusion of a drawing of this in
a parcel containing those of the Museum specimens. Nos. 92
and 93 are now in the Dresden Museum, Dr. A. B. Meyer
writes me. Of No. 94 I am now able to add an illustration (Plate LXYII., lower figure. )
and the following particulars: It has a neck border of red and yellow feathers, while
the rest is covered
with long black
feathers ( Frcgaia
aquilaf ). The
front edge is S.5
inches long, and
the total length 17
inches. No. 96 is
now rotting in the
royal mausoleum
in Nuuanu Valley.
No. 98 must prob¬
ably be cancelled,
for I am assured
by residents of York that the}- have never heard of any feather cape there. No. ico
should be corrected to St. Augustine College, Canteibuiy. The abbreviation Cant, being
common to Cantabrigae and Canterbury led to the error. I have written to this Theo¬
logical College, but have received no answer, so can add nothing to the statement on
page 81. The additions to be added to the list are the following:
FIG. IO. HELMETS IN THE PEABODY MUSEUM.
'Tyernian and Betmet, from whose narrative this is quoted (ii., 125). unfortunately were by no means trustworthy in all respects, if
their account of matters and customs at the Hawaiian Islands are any criterion. Like the Hawaiian malo this has disappeared. All the
ethnological specimens of the Society were deposited in the British Museum, but my friend J. Edge-Partington has been unable to find
any traces of it in that Museum. [4471
i4
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
101. This is one of the ahuula from the Boston Museum now in the Peabody
Museum of American Archaeology in Cambridge. Although in a sad state of dilapida¬
tion the elaborate pattern can be easily made out. It is 29 inches long. Fig. 13-
102. At Newcastle-upon-Tyne, with the specimens of feather work already de¬
scribed (page 6) is a cape in excellent preservation, shown in Fig. 14. It is of the
usual red and yellow feathers. The front edges measure 9.5 inches; the depth is 14
inches, and the bottom is 63.5 inches round. In the Transactions of the Natural
FIG. II. MAROUKSAN HFAD DRHSS.
History Society of Newcastle, ii. , list of donations, 1834-5, we read: “Feather Cloak
and Helmet and a collection of Native Curiosities from the Sandwich Islands ; Mr.
William Row.” Note the resemblance to the pattern of the capes shown in Figs.
56 and 59.
103. A very pretty and well preserved cape belongs to Miss Mary Clark of Hart¬
ford, Conn. The front edges measure 9 inches; the extreme width is 32 inches, and the
length 14.5 inches. It is very well shown in Plate LXVIII. The feathers are 00 and
iiwi. It probably left the Hawaiian Kingdom during the reign of Kamehameha III.
104. A cloak in the cabinet of the Literary and Philosophical Society of Perth,
Scotland. I am only informed that it is in bad condition, and is partty covered with
green feathers.
[448]
FEATHER GARMENTS.
T5
105. A cape, unusual both in shape and design, belonging to J. Edge-Part-
fngton, Esq. (Fig. 15.) It is of 00 and iiwi feathers, 17 inches long, 27 inches at the
neck, 12 inches in front, and about 5 feet around the bottom.
106. A cloak said to have been de¬
stroyed in the conflagration caused acciden¬
tally in the attempt of the Board of Health
to stamp out the bubonic plague in the Chi¬
nese quarter of Honolulu. At the time when
the claims for losses caused by this great
fire were presented to the Commission ap¬
pointed for the purpose, my assistant, Mr.
Allen M. Walcott, obtained from the claim¬
ant, Peleioholani, a carpenter by trade, the
following particulars : The cloak was called
“ Eheukani ” and was made in the time of
Keeaumoku (the father of Kaahumann) and
finished shortly before the battle of Mokuohai
ax
FIG. 13. CAPE AT CAMBRIDGE, MASS.
(July, 1782) between Kamehameha and Kiwalao. Keeaumoku's wife gave it to Pele-
ioholani’s grandmother. Principally mamo8 feathers with a small crescent of red
iiwi in each upper corner; between the shoulders a round spot of black 00 feathers,
from which a line of red iiwi led down to a trifle below the middle of the cloak. The
cords at the neck were of human hair, an unusual thing. It must be remembered that
8 Probably 00, for a genuine mamo ahuula was devoid of any adulteration by other colored feathers. It should be stated that Peleio
holani’s claim to be the owner of this cloak was disputed and it was said to have been taken from the palace j*ears ago; but from what
I have seen of the observation of natives whose duty it was to care for the royal robes. I do not believe one of them could describe the
pattern of the cloaks he or she had seen for years.
[449!
i6
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORK.
the design (Fig. 16) as well as the following measurements are from the description
given to Mr. Walcott by Peleioholani and are of course only approximate. They are
worth recording as differing
from any robes described.
Length, about 4 feet 9
inches; neck measurement
about 2 feet ; circumference
at bottom about 5 feet 8
inches. It is a matter of
tradition that 27,000 birds
the feathers for this cloak.
In the left side were seven
spear holes that were never
patched, and about which
were blood stains. Keeau-
moku was severely wound¬
ed in this battle, and it was
rather a fancy with the old chiefs to retain the honorable scars in the ahuula, as in the
cloak given by Kamehameha to Vancouver to be taken to England for King George.
107. An interesting
cloak is in the Museum at
Dover, England. It was
given to this museum by
General William Miller,
well known in Hawaiian
history as a British rep¬
resentative at Honolulu.
The cloak was probabl}'
given to him by Kameha¬
meha III., who did much
to scatter the ahuula
which had been accumu¬
lated by his victorious
father, who apparently swept the island of Hawaii clean of these royal robes. This
cloak is 5 feet 9 inches long; 2 feet 8 inches across the upper part; 8 feet 3 inches
across the lower part, and 10 feet 7 inches round the bottom. The pattern in 00 and
iiwi feathers is not unusual, and the robe seems in good preservation. I purchased
[450]
FIG. 15. EDGE -PARTINGTON CAPE.
were captured to furnish
FIG. 14. CAPE AT NEWCASTLE-UPON-TYNE.
FEATHER GARMENTS.
*7
a photograph of the specimen, but it proved unsuited for reproduction, and must be
represented by the color diagram Fig. 17.
108. There is a small cape in Keene, New Hampshire, owned by Henry S.
Mackintosh. Its dimensions are approximately : around bottom, 64 inches ; around
FIG. 16.
FIG. 17.
neck, 17 inches; across front, 26 inches. Although the owner wishes to dispose of it
he has failed to respond to my request for a photograph.
109. Another of the Kamehameha capes was brought to my attention by the
authorities of the United States National Museum. It was given by Kauikeaouli to
the father of the present owner. It is of 00 with slight red and black ornamentation,
as shown in the color diagram. (Fig. 18.) It is 26 inches across, and 64 inches around
FIG. 18. FIG. 19.
the bottom. It will be seen that it is exactly the same size as the preceding cape, and
as I have seen neither, nor do I know the name of the person offering this to the
National Museum, there is a possibility that the two notes refer to the same cape.
no. In the Norwich Castle Museum, of which J. Reeve, Esq., is Curator, are
two capes which had not come to my notice, as one was attributed to Tahiti and the
other to New Zealand. Mr. Edge-Partington corrected the mistakes, and besides send-
[451]
iS
BRIGHAM ON HAWAIIAN FEATHER WORN.
ing me the measurements requested the Curator to send photographs, which he kindly
did, and the results are shown in the figures. The first cape in this colle&ion, once
attributed to the Maori, is small, 14 inches deep; 29.5 inches wide at the upper end,
and 41 inches at the bottom. (Fig. 19.) It is covered mainly with the pure white
feathers of the Tropic bird, with ornamentation of black, probably the feathers of the
Man-of-war hawk. The net at the upper part is wholly bare of feathers. It is quite
_ _ _ _ _ „ _ like the cape No. 70,
page 76, in the Hof-
museum at Vienna, and
seems to be made of
similar feathers.
hi. The other
cape is in a sadly di¬
lapidated condition, al¬
though it will be seen
that the net is still
entire, and enough
feathers of the iiwi re¬
main to show that it
once was entirely red.
It is 13 -inches long;
29.5 inches in its widest
extent; 17 inches across
the neck, and 8.5 down
the front. The edge of
the neck had some yel-
fig. 20. coil of feather money. low feathers, but not
enough remain to determine the pattern. Plate LXVII., upper figure.
Feather Money. — I have spoken of the feather currency of the Hawaiians
and Samoans, which consisted merely of a bunch of feathers of some red bird, or on the
former group preferably yellow. But there was (and still is to some extent) on Santa
Cruz, in the western Pacific, a more developed coinage, more peculiar than the huge
stone disks of the Caroline Islanders that represent money. Mr. R. Etheridge, Jr., the
distinguished Curator of the Australian Museum, has published in the Records of that
museum (Vol. IV., No. 7, August, 1902) a very interesting account of a specimen lately
acquired, and as the curious currency seems rare in collections I have thought it might
be of interest to describe a coil in this museum which came some years ago labelled
“War Belt.” In the note below I give various references to published information
[452]
FEATHER MONEY.
l9
on the matter.9 Plate LXIX. shows the unrolled coil of this currency, of which the
length of the feathered part is 23 feet, its width 1.2 inches. Between the band and the
wooden hoops that it is coiled upon when rolled up (Fig. 20) there are cords of twisted
fibre respectively 28.5 and 26 inches. The band is composed of longitudinal vegetable
fibres wrapped around with similar fibre, to which the red feathers of a common lory
( 7 richoglossus massena Bonaparte) are glued by some tar-like substance. On the
edges near the ends are seeds of Coix lachryma , but none of the other ornaments
mentioned by Etheridge.
9 Kdge-Partington Album, I., PI. 165, figures a coil without the interior support. Codrington, The Melanesians, 1.891, p. 324, gives per¬
haps the earliest account of its use. Schmeltz, Internal. Archiv . Ethnographic , VI., 1893, p. 57, refers to Santa Cruz feather money.
Jennings, Notes on an Ethnological Collection from Santa Cruz, Jour n. Anthrop. Inst.. I., n. s., PI. 64. Temple, Beginnings of Currency, Ibid,
II., n. s., p. 99. Ktheridge, The Tavan , or Coil Feather Currency of Santa Cruz Island , Records Ansi. Mi is., IV., p. 2S9.
[453]
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I.
Plate BXVI.
HELMETS AT CASTLE MUSEUM, NORWICH, ENGLAND,
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I
Plate T.XYII
CAPE AT NORWICH, ENGLAND.
CAPE AT CAMBRIDGE, MASS.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol.
CLARK FEATHER CAPE.
Memoirs Bishop Museum, Vol. I
Plate I.XIX.
SANTA CRUZ COIL, MONEY
INDEX TO VOLUME I
WHILE EACH MEMOIR IS PAGED INDEPENDENTLY, THE PAGINATION OF THE VOLUME WILL BE FOUND AT THE BOTTOM OF THE PAGE.
PAGE
Accipitrinse . 288
Acridotheres . 293-4, 437
Acrocephalus familiaris . 314
Acrulocercus, see Molio . 3 13 , 437
Aetitis incanus . 283
Aetodromas . 283
Adze handles . 418
Adzes, Gilbert Islands . 422
Hawaiian . 405
Mangaia . 423
Maori . 422
Mieronesian . 420
Moriori, Chatham Islands . 419
Solomon Islands . 416
Aeo, Himautopus . 282
.zEstrelata hypoleuea . 268
leucoeephala . 268
phaeopygia . 268
sandwicensis . 268
Agassiz on Coral . 101
Ahuula, or Feather Cloaks . 50, 447
List of . 56
Aulick . 68
Bardwell . 61
Berlin . 69
Bingham . 68
Bolton . 68
Brassey . 71
British Museum . 64, 90
Cambridge, Mass. . 448
Canterbury . 447
Chapman . 68
Christy . 71
Clark . 448
Colgate . 80
Copenhagen . 70
Cunningham . 74
Dover . 450
Edge- Partington . 447-9
Emma, Queen . 60
P'lorence . 75
Gilman . 61 |
PAGE
Ahuula, Gottingen . 76
Haalelea . 62, 77, 78
Ipswich . 74
Joy . 72
Judd . 62
Kalanikauikalaneo . 59
Kameliameha . 58
Kearny . 72
Kelley . 71
Kiwalao . 58
Lee . 76
Leiden . 74
Leihula . 79
Lucas . 71
Lunalilo . 63
Mackintosh . 451
Maidstone . 71
Munich . 75
Newcastle-on-Tyne . 448
Norwich . 451
Paris . 73
Pauahi . 60
Perth . 448
Pittsfield . 69
Pomare . 71
Reis . 80, 81
Saffron Walden . 73
Starbuck . 80
Sydney . 4, 76
Victoria . 63, 78, 79
Vienna . 75
Waber . 64, 444
Welling . 68
York . 447
Akakane . 305
Akapane . 299
Akeake . 285
Akeka . 285
Akekee . 285
Akepa . 305
Akialoa . 306
Akiliipolena . 299
XU
Index.
PAGE
Akikihi . 303
Alae . 280
Alala, or Crow . 12, 291
Alauda arvensis, Lark . 291
Albatross . 266
Alexander helmet . 443
Amakihi . 300
Anas . 272-4
Anchors of Stone . 346
Anoiis . 261, 265
Anser hawaiiensis . 276
Anson’s Voyage . 91
Anuu or Oracle . 29, 30
Apapane . 10, 299
Apekepeke . 292
Ardea, Heron . 277
Arenaria interpres . 285
Asio accipitrinus . 289
Atagen aquila . 271
Auku, Heron . . 278
Aulick cloak . 68
Balboa discovers the Pacific . 89
Balls of Stone . 348
Bardwell cape . 61
Bath rubbers . 349
Beechey’s Voyage . 93
Belcher’s Voyage . . . 93
Bellingshausen’s Voyage . 93
Berlin capes and cloaks . 69
Bernicla sandvicensis . 276
Bingham cape . 68
Bird-lime for catching birds . 3
Birds furnishing feathers for cloaks . 9
Birds of the Hawaiian Islands, Key to ... • 259
Bligh’s Voyage of the Bounty . 92
Bolton cloak . 68
Booby, Blue-faced . 271
Bougainville’s Voyage . 91
Bowls of Stone . • • . 385
Brachyotus galapagoensis, Owl . 289
Brant, Black . 275
Brassey cloak . 71
Brigham on Hawaiian Feather Work . 1
Index to the Islands of the Pacific .... 85
Ancient Hawaiian Stone Implements. • 333
Supplementary Notes on Feather Work 437
British Museum cloaks and capes . 64, 90
Bryan on Hawaiian Birds . 259
Bulweria bulweri . 268
Buteo solitarius, Hawk . 289
Byron’s Voyage of the Blonde . 91
PAGE
Calidris arenaria . 284
Callipela californica . 286
Cannibalism in the Pacific . 108
Canoe- breakers of Stone . 341
Capes and cloaks, Ahuula . 50
List of . 56
Market value of . 55
Carpodacus, Rice-bird . 295
Carteret’s Voyage . 91
Chaetoptila angustipluma . 314
Challenger, Voyage of . 93
Chapman cloak . 68
Charadrius . 284
Chasiempis . 292
Chen hyperboreus . 275
Chisels of Stone . 423
Chloridops kona . 312
Chlorodrepanis . 297-302
Christy cloak . 71
Chrysomitridops caeruleirostris . 305
Circus hudsonius . 289
Ciridops anna . 300
Clark Cape . 448
Climate of Pacific ocean . 98
Cloak burned, Honolulu . 449
Clubs, Maori . 359
New Guinea . 358
Stone . 387
Colgate Ahuula . 80, 447
Colors of feathers . 9
of kahili . 17
Cook’s Voyages . 92
Coot, Hawaiian . 280
Copenhagen Ahuula . 70
Coral Islands . 100
Corvus hawaiiensis . 291, 437
Crake, Laysan . 280
Crow, Hawaiian . • • . 291
Cunningham cloak . 74
Cups of Stone . 387
Curlew . 284
Currents of the Pacific . 95
Dafila acuta . 274
Darwin on Coral growth . 101
Demiegretta sacra . 277
D’Entrecasteaux Voyage . 92
Depth of the Pacific . -94
Designs of Ahuula . 52
Diomedea immutabilis . 266
Dishes of Stone . 383
Door Stone .
Index. xiii
PAGE
Dove, Chinese . 287
Dover Museum Cloak . 450
Drake’s Voyage . 90
Drepanis . 297
Drepanorhamphus . 298
Duck, Hawaiian . 273
Duperrey’s Voyage . 93
D’Urville’s Voyage . 93
Dyed Feathers . 12
Dysporus, see Sula . 270
Edwards’ Voyage . 93
Klepaio . 292
Ellis’ Account of Feather work . 6
Emma, Queen, Capes . 60
Eye of shell and feathers . 442
Fauna of the Pacific region . 105
Feather Money, Santa Cruz . 432
Feather Work of the Hawaiians . 1-81, 437
Figure carving in Stone . 424
F'iles of Stone . 350
Finch, House . 295
Laysan . 310
Scarlet . 305
Fish gods of Stone . 426
Fishing Stones . 405
Fitzroy’s Voyage . 93
Flora of the Pacific region . 103
Florence Aliuula . 75
Forms of Islands . 99
Fregata aquila . 271
Freyeinet’s Voyage . 93
Fulica alai . 280
Gallinule, Hawaiian . 280
Gannet . 271
Giglioli, Voyage of the Magenta . 93
Gill, E. Eeouard, letter . 440
Gilman Cape . 61
God wit, Pacific . 284
Gottingen Cape . 76
Golegole Club . 355
Goose, Hawaiian . 276
Gouges, Stone . • • • 423
Greenstone described . 355
Grinding Stones . 346
Gulls . 262
Gygis alba . 265
Haalelea Capes . 62, 77, 78
Hammers of Stone . 340
Handles of human bone for kahili . 16
Handling of Adzes . 418
Hawk, Hawaiian . 289
PAGE
Helmet from Cook . 41
Heltnet covered with human hair . 48
Helmet from New Ireland . 40
Helmets in Berlin . 43
British Museum . 46, 47
Oxford . 443
Newcastle-on-Tyne . 443
Paris . 45
Peabody Museum, Cambridge . 48
Vienna . 42
Helmets, Eist of . 42
Hemignathus . 306-9
Heron, Auku . 277
Heteractitis . 283
Heterorhynchus . 307-9
Himantopus, Stilt . 282
Himatione . 299
Iiwi . 9, 299
Image from Manoa Valley . 427
Images from Necker Island . 427
Inhabitants of the Pacific . 106
Inscriptions, Hawaiian . 431
Ipswich cape . 74
Iwa . 11, 271
Jade, Manufactures of . 355
Joy Cloaks . 72
Judd Cape . 62
Kahili branches . 19
Kahili, Eist of . 21
Kahili of sugarcane . 24
Kalauikauikalaneo cloak . 59
Kamehameha cloak of mamo . 58
Kapu in the Pacific . 112
Kapa pressers of stone . 383
Kapuahi kuni anaana . 389
Kauila handles of kahili . 16
Kaulunanahoa on Molokai . 365
Kearny cloak . 72
Kelley cloak . 71
Ki stem . 16
Kiwalao cloak . 58
Knives of stone . 351
Koae . 11, 270
Kolea, Plover . 285
Koloa, Hawaiian Duck . 273
Kotzebue’s Voyage . 93
Krusenstern’s Voyage . 93
Kua feathers . 446
Kukailimoku . 31-39, 44°
Kukuluaeo, Stilt . 282
Kuro siwa Current . 95
XIV
Index.
PAGE
Lamp, Fishing . 396
Lamp of stone . 391
Lamp, Tahitian Sorcery . 397
Languages of the Pacific . 109
Lark, Sky . 291
Larus, Gull . 262
Lee Cape . 76
Leiden Cloak . 74
Leihula Cape . 79
Lei, List of . 27
Lemaire’s Voyage . 91
Lophortyx californica . 286
Loxioides . 310
Loxops . 304
Lucas Cloak . 71
Liitke’s Voyage . 93
Lunalilo Cloak . 63
Mackintosh Cape . 451
Magalhaes’ Voyage . 89
Mahiole or Helmet . 40, 443
Maidstone Cape . 71
Maika, Game of . 399
Malo of feathers . 81, 446
Malo of the Raiatean Kings . 446
Mamo . 9, 298
Marquesan head band . 445
Mats of feathers . 36, 67, 437
Mendana’s Voyage. . . . . . 90
Menezes the Portuguese . 90
Merganser . 273
Microanous hawaiiensis . 265
Mina, False ( Acridotheres tristis) . 294
Mirrors of stone . 398
Missions in the Pacific . hi
Moriori stone knives . 354
Mortars of stone . 364
Munich Cape . 75
Mud-hen . 280
Munia nisoria . 295
Murray theory of coral growth . 101
Moho ( Acrulocercus) . 312
Nahienaena, Princess . 17
Nene, Hawaiian Goose . 276
Nesochen sandvicensis . 276
Nets for birds . 13
Noio, Hawaiian Tern . 265
Norwich Castle Museum Capes . 451
Numenius tahitiensis, Curlew . • 284
Nycticorax . 278
Obsidian for cutting . 342
Oceanodroma cryptoleucura . 269
PAGE
Gystrelata . 267
Offertorium from Molokai . 386
Olona cord and netting . 50
Oo, Moho nobilis . 313
Oreomyza . 3°2-4
Otus brachyotus . 289
Ou (Psittacirostra psittacea) . 8, 310
Owl, Hawaiian . 12, 289
Pacific Ocean, Index to Islands . 89
Palila (Loxioides bailleui) . 310
Palmeria dolei . 299
Pandion solitarius . 289
Papainu for Konane . 405
Paris Cloak . 73
Partition of the Pacific . 112
Partridge, Californian . 286
Passer domesticus, English Sparrow . 294
Pa’u of Nahienaena . 59
Pauahi Cape . 60
Penguin, Voyage of . 94
Pennula ecaudata . 279
Perouse, Voyage of . 92
Pestles of stone . 352
Petrels . 268
Phaeornis . 315-17
Phaethon . 270, 437
Phalacrocorax plagicus . 269
Phalaropus lobatus . 281
Phallic emblems . 363
Phasianus torquatus . 286
versicolor . 287
Pittsfield Cape . 69
Plegadis guarauna, Ibis . 276
Poi pounders, Hawaiian . 368
Making . 375
Marquesan . 371
Micronesian . 372
Tahitian . 370
Pomare Cloak (Brassey) . 71
Porphyrio melanotus . 280
Portlock and Dixon account of feather work 7
Porzanula palmeri . 279
Pounders, Stone . 381
Priofinus cuneatus . 268
Procellaria . 268
Pseudonestor xanthophrys . 309
Psittacirostra psittacea . 310
Pueo, Hawaiian Owl . 12, 289
Puffinus . 268-9
Quail, California Valley . 286
Quarries of Clinkstone . 407
Index. xV
PAGE
Queen’s Cloak . 58
Querquedula eircia . 274
Quiros, Voyage of . 91
Raiatean Malo . 446
Rail, Raysan, Sandwich, Wingless . 279
Reis Cape . 80, 81
Religions in the Pacific Ocean . no
Rhodacanthis . 31 1
Rice Bird . 295
Ring-cutting in shell or stone . 404
Roggewein’s Voyage . 91
Ross, Sir Janies, Voyage of . 93
Rothschildia parva . 302
Saffron Walden Cloak . 73
Salt pans of stone . 391
Sanderling . 284
Sandpiper . 283
Scherzer, Voyage of the Novara . 93
Schouten and Remaire, Voyage of . 91
Shearwater . 269
Sinkers, Squid-hook . 351
Skylark . 291
Slingstones . 344
Snipe, Ash-colored . 283
Sorcery Cups . 390
Sorcery Ramp from Tahiti . 397
Sparrow, Chinese . 295
European House . 294
Spatula clypeata, Shoveller . 274
Squid-hook Sinkers . 351
Star Club heads . 355
Starbuck Cape . 80
Sterna, various species . 263-5
Stewart’s description of feather work. ...... 19
Stilt, Hawaiian (Himantopus) . 182
Stone Implements of Hawaii . 337
Storm Petrel, Hawaiian . 296
PAGE
Strepsilas interpres . 285
Sula, Booby . 271
Sydney Cape . 4, 76
Tachypetes=Fregata . 271
Tahitian Poi pounders . 370
Sorcery Ramp . 397
Tasman’s Voyage . 91
Tatler, Wandering . 283
Teal, Raysan . 274
Teetotum Stones . 430
Telespiza cantans . 310
Temple Oracle, Model of . 30
Tern, various species . 264-5
Torches, Hawaiian . 391
Tortoise-shell handles of kahili . 16
Totanus = Heteractitis . 283
Tringa acuminata, Sandpiper . 283
Tropic Bird (Phaethon) . 270
Turtur chinensis, Dove . 287
Uluaihawane, Ciridops anna . 300
Ulumaika Stones . 399
Vancouver on feather work . 7
Vancouver’s Voyage . 93
Vestiaria coccinea . 299
Victorian Ahuula . 63, 78, 79
Vienna Ahuula . 75
Viridonia sagittirostris . 302
Volcanic Systems of Pacific . 99
Voyages, in Pacific Ocean . 89
Waber Cloak at Berne . 64, 444
Wallis, Voyage of . 91
Welling Cloak . 68
Whaling Industry in Pacific . 105
Wilkes Expedition . 93
Wilson’s Voyage in the Duff . 93
Winds of the Pacific Ocean . 96
*
.
.
Date Due
0 1
t ur^iyERsi
164 0186985 8
GN670 . B5 v . 1
Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum,
Honolulu
Memoirs of the Bernice Pauahi
Bishop Museum of Polynesian
-Ehlmolggy and Natural History
DATE
ISSUED TO
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11